The URL can be used to link to this page

WTP NO. 1 IMPROVEMENTS - PRESSURE FILTER MODIFICATIONS AND ADSORPTION SYSTEM AUTOMATION - 15-0031-UT CERTIFICATE OF SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION For ARSENIC ADSOPTION FILTER CONTROL SYSTEM Project: RO1 Improvements -Pressure Filter & Adsorbers___Contract Number: _15-0031-UT___ Location: RO-1_______________________________________________________________________ Contract Date: _March 13, 2017____________Notice to Proceed Date: __June 14, 2017_______ Substantial CompletionDate: _April26, 2018___Warranty Expiration Date: April26, 2019_ Consultant: __Tetra Tech__________________________________________________ A portion of the work performed under this Contract has been inspected by authorized representatives of the Owner, Contractor, and Consultant, and the Project (or specified part of the Project, as indicated above)is hereby declared to be substantially completed on the above date. DEFINITION OF SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION Substantial completion is the stage in construction when a project or designated portion thereof is sufficiently complete in accordance with contract documents so that the Owner can use the work or portion thereof for its intended use.Items that affect operational integrity and function of the work must be capable of continuous use. ______________________________________By: ____________________________________ ConsultantAuthorized Representative Date The Contractor accepts the above Certificate of Substantial Completion and agrees to complete and correct the items on the tentative list within the time indicated. ______________________________________By: ____________________________________ ContractorAuthorized Representative Date The Owner accepts the specified area of the Project as Substantially Complete and will assume full possession of the specified area of the Project on ________________, 2018. The responsibilityfor utilities, security, and insurance under the Contract Documents shall be as set forth in the Contract Documents. ______________________________________By: _____________________________________ City of ClearwaterAuthorized Representative Date Certificate of Substantial Completion, Page 2 of 2 PROJECT PUNCH LIST A punch list of items to be completed or corrected by _______________, 2018is appended hereto. This list may not be exhaustive, and the failure to include an item on it does not alter the responsibility of the Contractors to complete all the work in accordance with the Contract Documents. ARSENIC ADSOPTION FILTER CONTROL SYSTEMONE YEAR WARRANTY Contract Section III, 13.5 WARRANTY/CORRECTION PERIOD If within one year after the date of Substantial Completion or such longer period of time as may be prescribed by Laws or Regulations or by the terms of any applicable special guarantee required by the Contract Documents or by any specific provision of the Contract Documents, any Work is found to be defective, Contractor shall promptly, without cost to the Owner and in accordance with the Owner’s written instructions;(i) correct such defective Work, or, if it has been rejected by the Owner, remove it from the site and replace it with Work that is not defective and (ii) satisfactorily correct or remove and replace any damage to other Work or the workof others resulting therefrom… Where defective Work (and damage to other Work resulting therefrom) has been corrected, removed or replaced under this paragraph the correction period hereunder with respect to such Work will be extended for an additional period of one year after such correction or removal and replacement has been satisfactorily completed. Substantial Completion Date: _April26, 2018_Warranty Expiration Date:April26, 2019 __ A copy of this signed and executed document should beprovided to the following parties: Project Owner Project Contractor Project Consultant (if applicable) City Construction Office Specialist Project File • • • WTP No. 1 Improvements — Pressure Filter Modifications and Adsorption System Automation (Project No. 15-0031-UT) CONTRACT DOCUMENTS & SPECIFICATIONS Prepared for Prepared by TETRA TECH BID SUBMITTAL February 2017 City of Clearwater, Florida WTP No. 1 Improvements — Pressure Filter Modifications & Adsorption System Automation (Project No. 15- 0031 -UT) TABLE OF CONTENTS SECTION I ADVERTISEMENT OF BIDS & NOTICE TO CONTRACTORS SECTION II INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS SECTION III GENERAL CONDITIONS SECTION IV TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS SECTION Na SUPPLEMENTAL TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS APPENDIX INSTRUMENTATION APPENDICES SECTION V CONTRACT DOCUMENTS Prepared in the Office of the City Engineer COVER Page II Updated 2/11/2016 • SECTION I SECTION 1 INVITATION TO BID NOTICE TO CONTRACTORS WTP No. 1 Improvements- Pressure Filter Modifications and Adsorption System Automation Documents and plans for project # 15- 0031 -UT are available at www .mvclearwater.com /citvproiects. The work includes: furnishing all labor, equipment, and materials for the construction of the improvements at the Reverse Osmosis Plant No. 1 consisting of, but not limited to: the replacement of the blower, valve replacement with modulating butterfly valves, structural supports and programming of PLC control logic. Mandatory Pre -Bid Conference: Thursday, March 9, 2017 Municipal Service Building, Room 130 100 S. Myrtle Ave. Clearwater, FL 33756 Pre - qualification DEADLINE: March 23, 2017 Category: Wastewater /Water Treatment Facilities with a minimum of $500,000 Bids DUE: Thursday, April 6, 2017 at 1pm City of Clearwater, Project # 15- 0031 -UT Purchasing Office, 3rd Floor 100 S. Myrtle Ave, Clearwater, FL 33756 -5520 Issued by: Alyce Benge, Purchasing Manager For Additional Information Contact: Engineering Dept. 727 - 562 -4750 Page 1 Updated 2/13/2017 SECTION II 010 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS Table of Contents SECTION II i INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS i 1. COPIES OF BIDDING DOCUMENTS 1 2. QUALIFICATION OF BIDDERS 1 3. EXAMINATION OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND SITE 1 4. INTERPRETATIONS AND ADDENDA 2 5. BID SECURITY OR BID BOND 3 6. CONTRACT TIME 3 7. LIQUIDATED DAMAGES 3 8. SUBSTITUTE MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT 3 9. SUBCONTRACTORS 3 10. BID/PROPOSAL FORM 4 11. SUBMISSION OF BIDS 4 12. MODIFICATION AND WITHDRAWAL OF BIDS 5 13. REJECTION OF BIDS 5 14. DISQUALIFICATION OF BIDDER 5 15. OPENING OF BIDS 5 16. LICENSES, PERMITS, ROYALTY FEES AND TAXES 5 17. IDENTICAL TIE BIDS/VENDOR DRUG FREE WORKPLACE 6 18. AWARD OF CONTRACT 7 19. BID PROTEST 7 20. TRENCH SAFETY ACT 9 21. CONSTRUCTION SITE EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL MANAGEMENT MEASURES 9 SECTION II i Updated 2/11/2016 • • SECTION II — Instructions to Bidders 1. COPIES OF BIDDING DOCUMENTS 1.1. Complete sets of the Bidding Documents are accessible through the City of Clearwater website at address: www .myclearwater.com/cityprojects. Price of Contract Documents and Plans, as indicated on the Jiffy Reprographics Plan Room, reflects reproduction costs only, which is non - refundable. Bidding Documents may include, but aren't limited to, plans, specifications, bond forms, contract form, affidavits, bid/proposal form and Addendums. 1.2. Complete sets of Bidding Documents must be used in preparing bids. Neither the City nor the Engineer shall be liable for errors or misinterpretations resulting from the use of incomplete sets of Bidding Documents, by Bidders, sub - bidders or others. 2. QUALIFICATION OF BIDDERS 2.1. Each prospective Bidder must pre - qualify to demonstrate, to the complete satisfaction of the City of Clearwater, that the Bidder has the necessary facilities, equipment, ability, financial resources and experience to perform the work in a satisfactory manner. An application package for pre - qualification may be obtained by contacting the City of Clearwater, Engineering Department, P.O. Box 4748, Clearwater, Florida 33758 -4748 (mailing address); 100 South Myrtle Avenue, Clearwater, Florida 33756 -5520 (street address) or by phone at (727) 562 -4750. Pre - Qualification requirement information is also available on the City of Clearwater Website at address: www. myclearwater. com/ gov/ depts/ pwa/ engin/Construction/prequal.asp. Contractors wanting to pre - qualify to bid on a project as a General Contractor must do so two weeks (ten work days) prior to the bid opening date. Bidders currently pre - qualified by the City do not have to make reapplication. It is the Contractor's responsibility to confirm pre - qualification status before a Bid Opening. 3. EXAMINATION OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND SITE 3.1. It is the responsibility of each Bidder, before submitting a Bid, to (a) examine the Contract Documents thoroughly; (b) visit the site to become familiar with local conditions that may in any manner affect cost, progress, performance or furnishing of the work; (c) consider and abide by all applicable federal, state and local laws, ordinances, rules and regulations; and (d) study and carefully correlate Bidder's observations with the Contract Documents, and notify Engineer in writing of all conflicts, errors or discrepancies in the Contract Documents. 3.2. For the purposes of bidding or construction, bidder may rely upon the accuracy of the technical data contained in reports of explorations and tests of subsurface conditions at the site which have been utilized by the Engineer in the preparation of the Contract Documents, but not upon non - technical data, interpretations or opinions contained therein or for the completeness thereof. Drawings relating to physical conditions of existing surface and subsurface conditions (except Underground Facilities) which are at or contiguous to the site and which have been utilized by the Engineer in preparation of the Contract Documents, may be relied upon by Bidder for accuracy of the technical data contained in such drawings but not upon the completeness thereof for the purposes of bidding or construction. 3.3. Information and data reflected in the Contract Documents with respect to Underground Facilities at or contiguous to the site are based upon information and data furnished to the SECTION II Page 1 of 9 Updated 2/11/2016 • • • SECTION II — Instructions to Bidders City and Engineer by owners of such Underground Facilities or others, and the City does not assume responsibility for the accuracy or completeness thereof unless expressly provided in the Contract Documents. 3.4. Provisions concerning responsibilities for the adequacy of data furnished to prospective Bidders on subsurface conditions, Underground Facilities, other physical conditions, possible conditions, and possible changes in the Contract Documents due to differing conditions appear in the General Conditions. 3.5. Before submitting a Bid, each Bidder shall, at Bidder's own expense, make or obtain any additional examinations, investigations, explorations, tests and studies and obtain any additional information and data which pertain to the physical conditions (surface, subsurface and Underground Facilities) at or contiguous to the site or otherwise which may affect cost, progress, performance or furnishing the work in accordance with the time, price and other terms and conditions of the Contract Documents. 3.6. On request in advance, City will provide each Bidder access to the site to conduct such explorations and tests at Bidder's own expense as each Bidder deems necessary for submission of a Bid. Bidder shall fill all holes and clean up and restore the site to its former condition upon completion of such explorations and tests. 3.7. The lands upon which the Work is to be performed, rights -of -way and easements for access thereto and other lands designated for use by the Contractor in performing the Work are identified in the Contract Documents. All additional lands and access thereto required for temporary construction facilities or storage of materials and equipment are to be provided by the Contractor. Easements for permanent structures or permanent changes in existing structures are to be obtained and paid for by the City unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents. 3.8. The submission of a Bid will constitute an unequivocal representation by the Bidder that the Bidder has complied with every requirement of these Instructions to Bidders and that, without exception, the Bid is premised upon performing and furnishing the Work required by the Contract Documents by such means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures of construction as may be indicated in or required by the Contract Documents, and that the Contract Documents are sufficient in scope and detail to indicate and convey understanding of all terms and conditions of performance and furnishing of the work. 4. INTERPRETATIONS AND ADDENDA 4.1. All questions as to the meaning or intent of the Contract Documents are to be directed in writing to the Engineer. Interpretations or clarifications considered necessary by the Engineer in response to such questions will be issued by Addenda, via the Jiffy Reprographics Plan Room to all parties recorded by the Plan Room as plan holders having received the Bidding Documents. Questions received after the time frame specified on the pre -bid meeting agenda, prior to the date for opening of Bids, may not be answered. Only information provided by formal written Addenda will be binding. Oral and other interpretations of clarifications will be without legal effect. 4.2. Addenda may also be issued to modify the Bidding Documents as deemed advisable by the City or Engineer. SECTION II Page 2 of 9 Updated 2/11/2016 • SECTION II — Instructions to Bidders 5. BID SECURITY OR BID BOND 5.1. Each Bid must be accompanied by Bid Security made payable to the City of Clearwater in an amount equal to ten percent (10 %) of the Bidder's maximum Bid price and in the form of a certified or cashier's check or a Proposal/Bid Bond (on form provided in Section V) issued by a surety meeting the requirements of the General Conditions. 5.2. The Bid Security of the Successful Bidder will be retained until such Bidder has executed the Agreement and furnished the required Payment and Performance bonds, whereupon the Bid Security will be returned. If the Successful Bidder fails to execute, deliver the Agreement and furnish the required Bonds within ten (10) days after the award of contract by the City Council, the City may annul the bid and the Bid Security of the Bidder will be forfeited. The Bid Security of any Bidder whom the City believes to have a reasonable chance of receiving the award may be retained by the City until the successful execution of the agreement with the successful Bidder or for a period up to ninety (90) days following bid opening. Security of other Bidders will be returned approximately fourteen (14) days after the Bid Opening. 5.3. The Bid Bond shall be issued in the favor of the City of Clearwater by a surety company qualified to do business in, and having a registered agent in, the State of Florida. 6. CONTRACT TIME 6.1. The number of consecutive calendar days within which the work is to be completed is set forth in the Technical Specifications. 7. LIQUIDATED DAMAGES 7.1. Provisions for liquidated damages are set forth in the Contract Agreement, Section V. 8. SUBSTITUTE MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT 8.1. The contract, if awarded, will be on the basis of material and equipment described in the Drawings or specified in the Specifications without consideration of possible substitute or "or equal" items. Whenever it is indicated in the Drawings or specified in the Specifications that a substitute or "or equal" item may be furnished or used, application for its acceptance will not be considered by the Engineer until after the effective date of the Contract Agreement. The procedure for submittal of any such application is described in the General Conditions and as supplemented in the Technical Specifications. 9. SUBCONTRACTORS 9.1. If requested by the City or Engineer, the Successful Bidder, and any other Bidder so requested, shall, within seven (7) days after the date of the request, submit to the Engineer an experience statement with pertinent information as to similar projects and other evidence of qualification for each Subcontractor, supplier, person and organization to be used by the Contractor in the completion of the Work. The amount of subcontract work shall not exceed fifty percent (50 %) of the Work except as may be specifically approved by the Engineer. If the Engineer, after due investigation, has reasonable objection to any proposed Subcontractor, supplier, other person or organization, he may, before recommending award of the Contract to the City Council, request the Successful Bidder to submit an acceptable substitute without an increase in Contract Price or Contract Time. If the Successful Bidder SECTION II Page 3 of 9 Updated 2/11/2016 • • • SECTION II — Instructions to Bidders declines to make any such substitution, the City may award the contract to the next lowest and most responsive Bidder that proposes to use acceptable Subcontractors, Suppliers, and other persons and organizations. Declining to make requested substitutions will not constitute grounds for sacrificing the Bid Security to the City of any Bidder. Any Subcontractor, supplier, other person or organization listed by the Contractor and to whom the Engineer does not make written objection prior to the recommendation of award to the City Council will be deemed acceptable to the City subject to revocation of such acceptance after the Effective Date of the Contract Agreement as provided in the General Conditions. 9.2. No Contractor shall be required to employ any Subcontractor, supplier, person or organization against whom he has reasonable objection. 10. BID /PROPOSAL FORM 10.1. The Bid/Proposal Form is included with the Contract Documents and shall be printed in ink or typewritten. All blanks on the Bid/Proposal Forms must be completed. Unit Prices shall be to no more than two decimal points in dollars and cents. The Bidder must state in the Bid/Proposal Form in words and numerals without delineation's, alterations or erasures, the price for which they will perform the work as required by the Contract Documents. Bidders are required to bid on all items in the Bid/Proposal form. The lump sum for each section or item shall be for furnishing all equipment, materials, and labor for completing the section or item as per the plans and contract specifications. Should it be found that quantities or amounts shown on the plans or in the proposal, for any part of the work, are exceeded or should they be found to be less after the actual construction of the work, the amount bid for each section or item will be increased or decreased in direct proportion to the unit prices bid for the listed individual items. 10.2. Bids by corporations shall be executed in the corporate name by the president or a vice - president (or other corporate officer accompanied by evidence of authority to sign) and the corporate seal shall be affixed. The corporate address and state of incorporation shall be shown below the Signature. If requested, the person signing a Bid for a corporation or partnership shall produce evidence satisfactory to the City of the person's authority to bind the corporation or partnership. 10.3. Bids by partnerships shall be executed in the partnership name and signed by a general partner, whose title shall appear under the signature and the official address of the partnership shall be shown below the signature. 10.4. All names shall be typed or printed below the signature. 11. SUBMISSION OF BIDS 11.1. Sealed Bids shall be submitted at or before the time and at the place indicated in the Advertisement for Bids and shall be submitted in a sealed envelope with the project name and number on the bottom left hand corner. If forwarded by mail, the Bid shall be enclosed in another envelope with the notation "Bid Enclosed" on the face thereof and addressed to the City of Clearwater, attention Purchasing Manager. Bids will be received at the office indicated in the Advertisement until the time and date specified. Bids in any other form will not be accepted. 11.2. The sealed bid envelope shall contain, but not be limited to, the Proposal/Bid Bond and corresponding Power of Attorney, Affidavit, Non Collusion Affidavit, Proposal (pages one SECTION II Page 4 of 9 Updated 2/11/2016 SECTION II — Instructions to Bidders to three), Addendum Sheet, Bidder's Proposal, and Scrutinized Companies and Business Operations with Cuba and Syria Certification Form. • 12. MODIFICATION AND WITHDRAWAL OF BIDS • • 12.1. Bids may be modified or withdrawn by an appropriate document duly executed (in the manner that a Bid must be executed) and delivered as described in the Advertisement of Bids. A request for withdrawal or a modification shall be in writing and signed by a person duly authorized to do so. Withdrawal of a Bid will not prejudice the rights of a Bidder to submit a new Bid prior to the Bid Date and Time. After expiration of the period for receiving Bids, no Bid may be withdrawn or modified. 12.2. After a bid is received by the City, the bidder may request to modify the bid for typographical or scrivener's errors only. The bidder must state in writing to the City that a typographical or scrivener's error has been made by the bidder, the nature of the error, the requested correction of the error, and what the adjusted bid amount will be if the correction is accepted by the City. The City reserves the right at its sole discretion to accept, reject, or modify any bid. 13. REJECTION OF BIDS 13.1. To the extent permitted by applicable State and Federal laws and regulations, the City reserves the right to reject any and all Bids, and to waive any and all informalities. Grounds for the rejection of a bid include but are not limited to a material omission, unauthorized alteration of form, unauthorized alternate bids, incomplete or unbalanced unit prices, or irregularities of any kind. Also, the City reserves the right to reject any Bid if the City believes that it would not be in the best interest of the public to make an award to that Bidder, whether because the Bid is not responsive or the Bidder is unqualified or of doubtful financial ability or fails to meet any other pertinent standard or criteria established by the City. The City reserves the right to decide which bid is deemed to be the lowest and best in the interest of the public. 14. DISQUALIFICATION OF BIDDER 14.1. Any or all bids will be rejected if there is any reason for believing that collusion exists among the bidders, the participants in such collusion will not be considered in future proposals for the same work. Each bidder shall execute the Non - Collusion Affidavit contained in the Contract Documents. 15. OPENING OF BIDS 15.1. Bids will be opened and read publicly at the location and time stated in the Advertisement for Bids. Bidders are invited to be present at the opening of bids. 16. LICENSES, PERMITS, ROYALTY FEES AND TAXES 16.1. The Contractor shall secure all licenses and permits (and shall pay all permit fees) except as specifically stated otherwise in the Technical Specifications. The Contractor shall comply with all Federal and State Laws, County and Municipal Ordinances and regulations, which in any manner effect the prosecution of the work. City of Clearwater building permit fees SECTION II Page 5 of 9 Updated 2/11/2016 • • • SECTION II — Instructions to Bidders and impact fees will be waived except as specifically stated otherwise in the Technical Specifications. 16.2. The Contractor shall assume all liability for the payment of royalty fees due to the use of any construction or operation process, which is protected by patent rights except as specifically stated otherwise in the Technical Specifications. The amount of royalty fee, if any, shall be stated by the Contractor. 16.3. The Contractor shall pay all applicable sales, consumer, use and other taxes required by law. The Contractor is responsible for reviewing the pertinent State Statutes involving the sales tax and sales tax exemptions and complying with all requirements. 16.4. The City of Clearwater is exempt from state sales tax on materials purchased by the City and incorporated into the WORK. The City of Clearwater reserves the right to implement the Owner Direct Purchase (ODP) Option, as may be indicated in the Scope of Work Description in Section IV — Technical Specifications and as defined in Section III — General Conditions. 17. IDENTICAL TIE BIDS/VENDOR DRUG FREE WORKPLACE 17.1. In accordance with the requirements of Section 287.087 Florida Statutes regarding a Vendor Drug Free Workplace, in the event of identical tie bids, preference shall be given to bidders with drug -free workplace programs. Whenever two or more bids which are equal with respect to price, quality, and service are received by the City for the procurement of commodities or contractual services, a bid received from a business that certifies that it has implemented a drug -free workplace program shall be given preference in the award process. Established procedures for processing tie bids will be followed if none or all of the tied bidders have a drug -free workplace program. In order to have a drug -free workplace program, a contractor shall supply the City with a certificate containing the following six statements and the accompanying certification statement: (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) Publish a statement notifying employees that the unlawful manufacture, distribution, dispensing, possession, or use of a controlled substance is prohibited in the workplace and specifying the actions that will be taken against employees for violations of such prohibition. Inform employees as to the dangers of drug abuse in the workplace, the business's policy of maintaining a drug -free workplace, any available drug counseling, rehabilitation, and employee assistance programs, and the penalties that may be imposed upon employees for drug abuse violations. Give each employee engaged in providing the commodities or contractual services that are under bid a copy of the statement specified in subsection (1). In the statement specified in subsection (1), notify the employees that, as a condition of working on the commodities or contractual services that are under bid, the employee will abide by the terms of the statement and will notify the employer of any conviction of, or plea of guilty or nolo contendere to, any violation of chapter 893, or of any controlled substance law, of the United States, or of any state, for a violation occurring in the workplace no later than five (5) days after such conviction. Impose a sanction on, or require the satisfactory participation in a drug abuse assistance or rehabilitation program if such is available in the employee's community, by any employee who is so convicted. SECTION II Page 6 of 9 Updated 2/11/2016 • • • SECTION II — Instructions to Bidders (6) Make a good faith effort to continue to maintain a drug -free workplace through implementation of this section. I certify that this firm does /does not (select only one) fully comply with the above requirements. 18. AWARD OF CONTRACT 18.1. Discrepancies between words and figures will be resolved in favor of words. Discrepancies in the multiplication of units of work and unit prices will be resolved in favor of the unit prices. Discrepancies between the indicated sum of any column of figures and the correct sum thereof will be resolved in favor of the correct sum. 18.2. In evaluating the Bids, the City will consider the qualifications of the Bidders, whether or not the Bids comply with the prescribed requirements, unit prices, and other data as may be requested in the Bid/Proposal form. The City may consider the qualifications and experience of Subcontractors, suppliers and other persons and organizations proposed by the Contractor for the Work. The City may conduct such investigations as the City deems necessary to assist in the evaluation of any Bid and to establish the responsibility, qualifications and financial ability of Bidders, proposed Subcontractors, Suppliers and other persons, and organizations to perform and furnish the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents to the City's satisfaction within the prescribed time. 18.3. If the Contract is to be awarded, it will be awarded to the lowest responsible, responsive Bidder whose evaluation by the City indicates to the City that the award will be in the best interest of the City. 18.4. Award of contract will be made for that combination of base bid and alternate bid items in the best interest of the City, however, unless otherwise specified all work awarded will be awarded to only one Contractor. 18.5. The successful bidder /contractor will be required to comply with Section 119.0701, Florida Statutes (2014), specifically to: (a) Keep and maintain public records that ordinarily and necessarily would be required by the City of Clearwater in order to perform the service; (b) Provide the public with access to public records on the same terms and conditions that the City of Clearwater would provide the records and at a cost that does not exceed the cost provided in this chapter or as otherwise provided by law; (c) Ensure that public records that are exempt or confidential and exempt from public records disclosure requirements are not disclosed except as authorized by law; and (d) Meet all requirements for retaining public records and transfer, at no cost, to the City of Clearwater all public records in possession of the contractor upon termination of the contract and destroy any duplicate public records that are exempt or confidential and exempt from public records disclosure requirements. All records stored electronically must be provided to the public agency in a format that is compatible with the information technology systems of the City of Clearwater. 19. BID PROTEST 19.1. RIGHT TO PROTEST: SECTION II Page 7 of 9 Updated 2/11/2016 • • • SECTION II — Instructions to Bidders Any actual bidder who is aggrieved in connection with the solicitation or award of a contract may seek resolution of his/her complaints initially with the Purchasing Manager, and if not satisfied, with the City Manager, in accordance with protest procedures set forth in this section. 19.2. PROTEST PROCEDURE: A. A protest with respect to the specifications of an invitation for bid or request for proposal shall be submitted in writing a minimum of five (5) work days prior to the opening of the bid or due date of the request for proposals, unless the aggrieved person could not have been reasonably expected to have knowledge of the facts giving rise to such protest prior to the bid opening or the closing date for proposals. Opening dates for bids or due dates for requests for proposal will be printed on the bid/request document itself. B. Protests in respect to award of contract shall be submitted in writing a maximum of five (5) work days after notice of intent to award is posted, or is mailed to each bidder, whichever is earlier. Notice of intent to award will be forwarded to bidders upon telephonic or written request. Protests of recommended award should cite specific portions of the City of Clearwater Code of Ordinances that have allegedly been violated. C. Exceptions to the five (5) day requirements noted in both A and B above may be granted if the aggrieved person could have not been reasonably expected to have knowledge of the facts giving rise to such protest prior to the bid opening, posting of intent to award, or due date for requests for proposals. Request for exceptions should be made in writing, stating reasons for the exception. D. The Purchasing Manager shall respond to the formal written protest within five (5) work days of receipt. The Purchasing Manager's response will be fully coordinated with the appropriate Department Director and the Assistant City Manager. E. If the protestor is not satisfied with the response from the Purchasing Manager, he /she may then submit in writing within five (5) work days of receipt of that response his/her reason for dissatisfaction, along with copies of his/her original formal protest letter and the response from the Purchasing Manager, to the City Manager. F. The City Manager as Purchasing Agent for the City has the final authority in the matter of protests. The City Manager will respond to the protestor within ten (10) work days of receipt of the appeal. 19.3. PROTEST FEE: When filing a formal protest, the protesting vendor must include a fee in the amount of 5% of the selected vendor's total bid to offset the City's additional expenses related to the protest. This fee shall not exceed $2,500 nor be less than $50. If either the Purchasing Manager or the City Manager upholds the protest, the City will refund 100% of the fee paid. 19.4. STAY OF PROCUREMENT DURING PROTEST: In the event of a timely protest, the Purchasing Manager shall not proceed with the solicitation or award of contract until all administrative remedies have been exhausted or until the City Manager makes written determination that the award of contract without delay is necessary to protect the best interest of the City. SECTION II Page 8 of 9 Updated 2/11/2016 • • • SECTION II — Instructions to Bidders 20. TRENCH SAFETY ACT 20.1. The Bidder shall comply with the provisions of the City of Clearwater's Ordinance related to trench digging (Ordinance No. 7918 -08) along with the Florida Trench Safety Act (Sections 553.60 - 553.64, Florida Statutes) and the provisions of the Occupational Safety and Health Administration's (OSHA) excavation safety standards, 29 C.F.R.s 1926.650 Subparagraph P, or current revisions of these laws. 21. CONSTRUCTION SITE EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL MANAGEMENT MEASURES 21.1. The Bidder shall comply with the provisions of the Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) National Pollution Discharge Elimination System (NPDES) stormwater permit and implement stormwater pollution prevention plans (SWPPP's) or stormwater management programs (both using best management practices (BMPs) that effectively reduce or prevent the discharge of pollutants into receiving waters. A. The control of construction- related sediment loadings is critical to maintaining water quality. The implementation of proper erosion and sediment control practices during the construction stage can significantly reduce sediment loadings to surface waters. B. Prior to land disturbance, prepare and implement an approved erosion and sediment control plan or similar administrative document that contains erosion and sediment control provisions. NPDES Management Measures available at City of Clearwater Engineering Environmental Division and EPA websites to help address construction- related Best Management Practices. SECTION II Page 9 of 9 Updated 2/11/2016 • SECTION III GENERAL CONDITIONS Table of Contents: 1. DEFINITIONS 1 2. PRELIMINARY MATTERS 5 2.1. DELIVERY OF BONDS AND CERTIFICATES OF INSURANCE 5 2.2. COPIES OF DOCUMENTS 5 2.3. COMMENCEMENT OF CONTRACT TIME/NOTICE TO PROCEED; STARTING THE PROJECT 5 2.4. BEFORE STARTING CONSTRUCTION 6 2.5. PRECONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE 6 2.6. PROGRESS MEETINGS 6 3. CONTRACT DOCUMENTS, INTENT 6 3.1. INTENT 6 3.2. REPORTING AND RESOLVING DISCREPANCIES 7 4. AVAILABILITY OF LANDS; SUBSURFACE AND PHYSICAL CONDITIONS; REFERENCE POINTS 7 4.1. AVAILABILITY OF LANDS 7 4.2. INVESTIGATIONS AND REPORTS 8 4.3. PHYSICAL CONDITIONS, UNDERGROUND FACILITIES 8 4.4. REFERENCE POINTS 8 5. BONDS AND INSURANCE 9 5.1. PERFORMANCE AND PAYMENT BOND /CONTRACT BOND 9 5.2. INSURANCE REQUIREMENTS 9 5.2.1. COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY INSURANCE 9 5.2.2. COMMERCIAL AUTOMOBILE LIABILITY INSURANCE 10 5.2.3. WORKERS' COMPENSATION AND EMPLOYER'S LIABILITY INSURANCE10 5.2.4. PROFESSIONAL LIABILITY/MALPRACTICE /ERRORS OR OMISSIONS INSURANCE 10 5.2.5. CONTRACTOR'S EQUIPMENT /INLAND MARINE/PROPERTY INSURANCE10 5.2.6. BUILDER'S RISK INSURANCE 10 5.3. OTHER INSURANCE PROVISIONS 10 5.4. WAIVER OF RIGHTS 11 6. CONTRACTORS RESPONSIBILITIES 12 6.1. SUPERVISION AND SUPERINTENDENCE 12 6.2. LABOR, MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT 12 6.3. SUBSTITUTES AND "OR EQUAL" ITEMS 13 6.4. SUBCONTRACTORS, SUPPLIERS AND OTHERS 14 SECTION III i Updated 6/3/2016 • SECTION III — General Conditions 6.5. USE OF PREMISES 14 6.5.1. STAGING AREAS 15 6.5.2. RESTORATION TIME LIMITS 15 6.6. LICENSE AND PATENT FEES, ROYALTIES AND TAXES 16 6.7. LAWS AND REGULATIONS 16 6.8. PERMITS 16 6.9. SAFETY AND PROTECTION 17 6.10. EMERGENCIES 17 6.11. DRAWINGS 18 6.11.1. SHOP DRAWINGS, SAMPLES, RFIs, AND SUBMITTAL REVIEW 18 6.11.2. AS -BUILT DRAWINGS 19 6.11.3. CAD STANDARDS 21 6.11.4. DELIVERABLES 23 6.12. CONTRACTOR'S GENERAL WARRANTY AND GUARANTEE 23 6.13. CONTINUING THE WORK 23 6.14. INDEMNIFICATION 23 6.15. CHANGES IN COMPANY CONTACT INFORMATION 24 6.16. PUBLIC RECORDS 24 7. OTHER WORK 25 7.1. RELATED WORK AT SITE 25 7.2. COORDINATION 25 8. OWNERS RESPONSIBILITY 26 9. OWNER REPRESENTATIVE'S STATUS DURING CONSTRUCTION26 9.1. OWNERS REPRESENTATIVE 26 9.2. CLARIFICATIONS AND INTERPRETATIONS 26 9.3. REJECTING OF DEFECTIVE WORK 27 9.4. SHOP DRAWINGS, CHANGE ORDERS, AND PAYMENTS 27 9.5. DECISIONS ON DISPUTES 27 9.6. LIMITATIONS ON OWNER REPRESENTATIVE'S RESPONSIBILITIES 28 10. CHANGES IN THE WORK 28 11. CHANGES IN THE CONTRACT PRICE 29 11.1. CHANGES IN THE CONTRACT PRICE 29 11.2. ALLOWANCES AND FINAL CONTRACT PRICE ADJUSTMENT 30 11.3. UNIT PRICE WORK 31 12. CHANGES IN THE CONTRACT TIME 31 13. TESTS AND INSPECTIONS, CORRECTION, REMOVAL OR ACCEPTANCE OF DEFECTIVE WORK 32 13.1. TESTS AND INSPECTION 32 13.2. UNCOVERING THE WORK 33 SECTION III ii Updated 6/3/2016 SECTION III — General Conditions 13.3. OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE MAY STOP THE WORK 33 13.4. CORRECTION OR REMOVAL OF DEFECTIVE WORK 33 0 13.5. WARRANTY /CORRECTION PERIOD 34 13.6. ACCEPTANCE OF DEFECTIVE WORK 34 13.7. OWNER MAY CORRECT DEFECTIVE WORK 34 14. PAYMENTS TO CONTRACTOR AND COMPLETION 35 14.1. APPLICATION FOR PROGRESS PAYMENT 35 14.2. CONTRACTOR'S WARRANTY OF TITLE 36 14.3. REVIEW OF APPLICATIONS FOR PROGRESS PAYMENTS 36 14.4. PARTIAL UTILIZATION 37 14.5. FINAL INSPECTION 37 14.6. FINAL APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT 38 14.7. FINAL PAYMENT AND ACCEPTANCE 38 14.8. WAIVER OF CLAIMS 39 15. SUSPENSION OF WORK AND TERMINATION 39 15.1. OWNER MAY SUSPEND THE WORK 39 15.2. OWNER MAY TERMINATE 39 15.3. CONTRACTOR MAY STOP WORK OR TERMINATE 40 16. DISPUTE RESOLUTION 41 17. MISCELLANEOUS 41 0 17.1. SUBMITTAL AND DOCUMENT FORMS 41 17.2. GIVING NOTICE 41 17.3. NOTICE OF CLAIM 41 17.4. PROFESSIONAL FEES AND COURT COSTS INCLUDED 41 17.5. ASSIGNMENT OF CONTRACT 41 17.6. RENEWAL OPTION 42 17.7. ROLL -OFF CONTAINERS AND /OR DUMPSTERS 42 18. ORDER AND LOCATION OF THE WORK 42 19. MATERIAL USED 42 20. CONFLICT BETWEEN PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS 42 21. OWNER DIRECT PURCHASE (ODP) 42 21.1. SALES TAX SAVINGS 42 21.2. TITLE AND OWNER RISK 43 21.3. CONTRACTOR'S RECEIPT OF MATERIALS 43 21.4. ODP RECORDS, WARRANTIES AND INDEMNIFICATION 44 22. RESIDENT NOTIFICATION OF START OF CONSTRUCTION 44 22.1. GENERAL 44 • SECTION III iii Updated 6/3/2016 SECTION III — General Conditions 22.2. EXAMPLE 46 23. PROJECT INFORMATION SIGNS 46 i23.1. SCOPE AND PURPOSE 46 23.2. TYPE OF PROJECT SIGN, FIXED OR PORTABLE 46 23.3. FIXED SIGN 47 23.4. PORTABLE SIGNS 47 23.5. SIGN COLORING 47 23.6. SIGN PLACEMENT 47 23.7. SIGN MAINTENANCE 47 23.8. TYPICAL PROJECT SIGN 48 24. AWARD OF CONTRACT, WORK SCHEDULE AND GUARANTEE48 25. SCRUTINIZED COMPANIES AND BUSINESS OPERATIONS WITH CUBA AND SYRIA CERTIFICATION FORM 49 • • SECTION III iv Updated 6/3/2016 • • SECTION III — General Conditions 1. DEFINITIONS Addenda Written or graphic instruments issued prior to the opening of Bids which clarify, correct or change the Bidding Requirements or the contract documents. Agent Architect, engineer or other outside agency, consultant or person acting on behalf of the City. Agreement The written contract between Owner and Contractor covering the Work to be performed; other Contract Documents are attached to the Agreement and made a part thereof as provided therein. Application for Payment The form accepted by Engineer which is to be used by Contractor in requesting progress or final payments and which is to be accompanied by such supporting documentation as is required by the Contract Documents. Approve The word approve is defined to mean satisfactory review of the material, equipment or methods for general compliance with the design concepts and with the information given in the Contract Documents. It does not imply a responsibility on the part of the Engineer to verify in every detail conformance with the Drawings and Specifications. Bid The offer or proposal of the bidder submitted on the prescribed form setting forth the prices for the work to be performed. Bidding Documents The advertisement or invitation to Bid, instructions to bidders, the Bid form, and the proposed Contact Documents (including all Addenda issued prior to receipt of Bids). Bonds Performance and payment bonds and other instruments of security. Change Order A written order to Contractor signed by Owner and Contractor authorizing an addition, deletion or revision in the Work, or an adjustment in the Contract Price or the Contract Time issued on or after the effective date of the Agreement. City The City of Clearwater, Pinellas County, Florida. Construction Inspector A person who is the authorized representative of the Construction Manager and inspects City construction projects in order to insure the Contractor's work complies with the intent of the Contract Documents. Construction Manager The person who is typically in responsible charge of City construction projects. The Construction Manager assumes responsibility for the management of construction contracts at the Preconstruction Conference. The Construction Manager chairs the SECTION III Page 1 of 50 Updated 6/3/2016 • • • SECTION III — General Conditions Preconstruction Conference and is the authority on any disputes or decisions regarding contract administration and performance. The Construction Manager typically acts as the Owner's Representative during construction. Contract Documents The Agreement, Addenda (which pertain to the Contract Documents), Contractor's Bid (including documentation accompanying the bid and any post -Bid documentation submitted prior to the execution of the Agreement) when attached as an exhibit to the Agreement, the Bonds, Instructions to Bidders, these General Conditions, any Supplementary Conditions, the Specifications and the Drawings, any other exhibits identified in the Agreement, together with all Modifications issued after the execution of the Agreement. Contract Price The Contract price constitutes the total compensation (subject to authorized adjustments) payable by Owner to Contractor for performing the Work. Contract Time The number of days or the date stated in the Agreement for the completion of the Work. Contractor The Person with whom the Owner has entered into the Agreement. For the purposes of this contract, the person, firm or corporation with whom this contract or agreement has been made by the City of Clearwater or its duly authorized representative. Critical Path Method Construction Schedule —CPM A graphic format construction schedule that displays construction activities as they relate to one another for the purpose of identifying the most efficient way to perform the work in a timely manner. The critical path identifies which activity is critical to the execution of the schedule. Day A calendar day of twenty -four (24) hours measured from midnight to the next midnight. Defective An adjective which when modifying the word Work refers to Work that is unsatisfactory, faulty or deficient, or does not conform to the Contract Documents or does not meet the requirements of any inspection, reference standard, test or approval referred to in the Contract Documents, or has been damaged prior to Engineers recommendation of final payment. Drawings The drawings, which will be identified in Technical Specifications or the Agreement, which show the character and scope of the Work to be performed and which have been prepared or approved by Engineer and are referred to in the contract documents. Shop drawings are not Drawings as so defined. Engineer The duly appointed representative of the City Manager of the City of Clearwater. For the purposes of this contract, the City Engineer of the City of Clearwater, Pinellas County, Florida, or his authorized representative. For certain projects, the Engineer may serve as the Owner's Representative during construction. SECTION III Page 2 of 50 Updated 6/3/2016 • • • SECTION III — General Conditions Engineer's Consultant A Person having a contract with Engineer to furnish services as Engineer's independent professional associate or consultant with respect to the Project and who is identified as such in the Supplementary Conditions. F.D.O.T Specifications The Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction as issued by the Florida Department of Transportation (latest English edition). Furnish The words "furnish ", "furnish and install ", "install ", and "provide" or words of similar meaning shall be interpreted, unless otherwise specifically stated, to mean "furnish and install complete in place and ready for service ". Inspection The term "inspection" and the act of inspecting means examination of construction to ensure that it conforms to the design concept expressed in the Drawings and Specifications. These terms shall not be construed to mean supervision, superintending or overseeing. Laws and Regulations Any and all applicable laws, rules, regulations, ordinances, codes and orders of any kind of governmental bodies, agencies, authorities and courts having jurisdiction. Liens Liens, charges, security interests or encumbrances upon real property or personal property. Milestone A principal event specified in the contract Documents relating to an intermediate completion date or time prior to the final completion date. Notice to Proceed (NTP) A written notice given by the Owner to the Contractor fixing the date on which the Contract Time will commence to run and on which Contractor shall start to perform his obligations under the Contract Documents. Owner The City of Clearwater, Florida. For the purposes of this contract, the person who is the City's authorized representative from the City's Department with whom will be responsible for the maintenance and operation of the Work once the Work is completed. For certain projects, a designee of the Owner may serve as the Owner's Representative during construction. Owner's Representative Designee of the Owner with authority to act on behalf of the Owner during construction. Person A natural person, or a corporation, partnership, firm, organization, or other artificial entity. Project The total construction of which the Work to be provided under the Contract Documents may be the whole or a part as indicated elsewhere in the Contract Documents. SECTION III Page 3 of 50 Updated 6/3/2016 • • • SECTION III — General Conditions Partial Utilization Use by Owner of a substantially completed part of the Work for the purpose for which is intended (or a related purpose) prior to Final Completion of all the Work. Representative of Contractor The Contractor shall assign a responsible person or persons, one of whom shall be at the construction site at all times that work is progressing. The names and positions of these persons shall be submitted to the City Engineer at the time of the pre- construction conference. This person or persons shall not be changed without written approval of City Engineer. Request for Information (RFI) An official written request for clarification of the intent of the contract documents from the Contractor to the Engineer. Shop Drawing All drawings, diagrams, illustrations, schedules and other data which are specifically prepared by or for Contractor to illustrate some portion of the Work and all illustrations, brochures, standard schedules, performance charts, instructions, diagrams and other information prepared by a supplier and submitted by Contractor to illustrate material or equipment for some portion of the Work. Specifications Those portions of the Contract Documents consisting of written technical descriptions of materials, equipment, construction systems, standards and workmanship as applied to the Work and certain administrative details applicable thereto. Subcontractor A person having a direct contract with Contractor or with any other Subcontractor for the performance of a part of the Work at the site. Substantial Completion The Work (or a specified part thereof) which has progressed to the point where, in the opinion of Engineer, as evidenced by Engineer's definitive certificate of Substantial Completion, it is sufficiently complete, in accordance with the Contract documents, so that the Work (or specified part) can be utilized for the purposes for which it is intended; or if no such certificate is issued, when the Work is complete and ready for final payment as evidenced by the Engineer's recommendation of final payment. The terms "substantially complete" and "substantially completed" as applied to all or part of the Work refer to Substantial Completion thereof. Supplementary Conditions The part of the Contract which amends or supplements these General Conditions. Supplier A manufacturer, fabricator, supplier, distributor, material man or vendor having a direct contract with Contractor or with any Subcontractor to furnish materials or equipment to be incorporated in the Work by the Contractor. Surety Any person, firm or corporation which is bound with Contractor and which engages to be responsible for Contractor and his acceptable performance of the Work by a Bid, Performance or Payment Bond. SECTION III Page 4 of 50 Updated 6/3/2016 • SECTION III — General Conditions Underground Facilities All pipelines, conduits, ducts, cables, wires manholes, vaults, tanks, tunnels or other such facilities or attachments, and any encasements containing such facilities which have been installed underground to furnish any of the following services or materials: electricity, gases, steam, liquid petroleum products, telephone or other communications, cable television, sewage and drainage removal or treatment, traffic or other control systems or water. Unit Price Work Work to be paid for on the basis of unit prices. Work The entire completed construction or the various separately identifiable parts thereof required to be furnished under the Contract Documents. Work includes and is the result of performing or furnishing labor and incorporating materials and equipment into the construction, and performing or furnishing services and furnishing documents, all as required by the Contract Documents. Work Change Directive A written directive to Contractor, issued on or after the Effective Date of the Agreement and signed by the Engineer, ordering an addition, deletion, or revision in the Work, or responding to differing or unforeseen physical conditions under which the Work is to be performed or emergencies. Work Change Directive will not change the Contract Price or Contract Time, but is evidence that the parties expect that the change directed or documented by a Work Change Directive will be incorporated in a subsequently issued Change Order following negotiations by the parties as to its effect, if any, on the Contract Price or Contract Times. • 2. PRELIMINARY MATTERS • 2.1. DELIVERY OF BONDS AND CERTIFICATES OF INSURANCE When Contractor delivers the executed Agreements to the Owner, Contractor shall also deliver to the Owner such Bonds and Certificates of Insurance as Contractor may be required to furnish by this contract. 2.2. COPIES OF DOCUMENTS Engineer shall furnish to Contractor one (1) copy of Contract Documents for execution. Additional copies will be furnished, upon request, at the cost of reproduction. 2.3. COMMENCEMENT OF CONTRACT TIME /NOTICE TO PROCEED; STARTING THE PROJECT The Contract Time will commence on the day indicated in the Notice to Proceed. Contractor shall start to perform the work on the date the Contract Time commences to run. No work shall be done at the site prior to the date that the Contract Time commences to run. Pursuant to Section 255.05(1)(b), Florida Statutes, the Notice to Proceed cannot be issued until Contractor provides City with a certified copy of the recorded bond issued by the Pinellas County Clerk of Court. SECTION III Page 5 of 50 Updated 6/3/2016 • • • SECTION III — General Conditions 2.4. BEFORE STARTING CONSTRUCTION Before undertaking each part of the Work, Contractor shall carefully study and compare the Contract Documents and check and verify pertinent figures shown thereon and all applicable field measurements. Contractor shall promptly report in writing to Engineer any conflict, error or discrepancy which Contractor may discover; and shall obtain a written interpretation or clarification from Engineer before proceeding with any work effected thereby; however, Contractor shall not be liable to the Owner for failure to report any conflict, error or discrepancy in the Drawings or Specifications, unless Contractor had actual knowledge thereof or should reasonably have known thereof. No verbal agreement or conversation with any officer, Agent or employee of the Owner or Engineer's Consultant, either before or after the execution of this Contract, shall affect or modify any of the terms or obligations herein contained. Contractor shall not commence any work at any time without approved insurance required by these General Conditions. Failure to obtain this insurance will be the sole responsibility of the Contractor. 2.5. PRECONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE After Contract has been fully executed and before the start of the Work, the Owner's Representative shall schedule a preconstruction conference to be attended by Contractor, Engineer, Owner and others as appropriate to establish a working understanding among the parties as to the Work and to discuss the schedule of the Work and general Contract procedures. The Contractor shall submit to the Owner's Representative prior to the Notice to Proceed, a color Critical Path Method (CPM) Construction Schedule. This is to be a sequence of events including submittal review and procurement. Notice to Proceed is usually established at the preconstruction conference and such date can be inserted into the schedule at that time. The Contractor shall also submit a Submittal Schedule for review by the Engineer. This is to make sure that the list is complete and this schedule shall be the basis of a Submittal Log. The Contractor shall submit to the Owner's Representative prior to the Notice to Proceed, a completed Emergency Call List, a completed Authorized Signature List, and Verification of Illegal Discharge Construction Site Training. 2.6. PROGRESS MEETINGS The Contractor is required to attend Progress Meetings. These meetings will be scheduled on a weekly, bi- weekly, or monthly basis depending on the needs of the project. The Contractor shall bring to each meeting an updated submittal log, an updated request for information (RFI) log, a look -ahead schedule to cover the project activity from the current meeting to the next meeting, and all material test reports generated in the same time period. 3. CONTRACT DOCUMENTS, INTENT 3.1. INTENT The Contract Documents comprise the entire Agreement between Owner and the Contractor concerning the Work. They may be altered only by written agreement. The Contract Documents are complementary; what is called for by one is as binding as if called for by all. It is the intent of the Contract Documents to describe a functionally complete project (or part thereof) to be SECTION III Page 6 of 50 Updated 6/3/2016 • • SECTION III — General Conditions constructed in accordance with the Contract Documents. Any Work, materials or equipment which may reasonably be inferred from the Contract Documents or from prevailing custom or from trade usage as being required to produce the intended result will be furnished and performed whether or not specifically called for. When words or phrases, which have a well - known technical or construction industry or trade meaning, are used to describe Work, materials or equipment, such words or phrases shall be interpreted in accordance with that meaning. Clarifications and interpretations of the Contract Documents shall be issued by the Owner's Representative. Reference to standards, specifications, manuals or codes of any technical society, organization or association, or to the code, Laws or Regulation of any governmental authority, whether such reference be specific or by implication, shall mean the latest standard specification, manual or code, or Laws or Regulations in effect at the time of opening of Bids except as may be otherwise specifically stated in the Contract Documents. However, no provision of any referenced standard specification, manual or code, whether or not specially incorporated by reference in the responsibilities of Owner or Contractor as set forth in the Contract Documents, shall change the duties and responsibilities of Owner, Contractor, Engineer or Owner's Representative, or any of their Agents or employees from those set forth in the Contract Documents. Clarifications and interpretations of the Contract shall be issued by the Owner's Representative. Each and every provision of law and clause required by law to be inserted in these Contract documents shall be deemed to be inserted herein, and they shall be read and enforced as through it were included herein, and if through mistake or otherwise, any such provision is not inserted, or if not correctly inserted, then upon the application of either party, the Contract Documents shall forthwith be physically amended to make such insertion. 3.2. REPORTING AND RESOLVING DISCREPANCIES If, during the performance of the Work, Contractor discovers any conflict, error, ambiguity or discrepancy within the Contract Documents or between the Contract Documents and any provision of any such Law or Regulation applicable to the performance of the Work or of any such standard, specification, manual or code or of any instruction of any Supplier, Contractor shall report it to the Owner's Representative in writing at once, and Contractor shall not proceed with the Work affected thereby (except in an emergency) until an amendment or supplement to Contract Documents has been issued by one of the methods provided in these General Specifications, provided however, that Contractor shall not be liable to Owner, or Owner's Representative for failure to report any such conflict, error, ambiguity or discrepancy unless Contractor knew or reasonably should have known thereof. 4. AVAILABILITY OF LANDS; SUBSURFACE AND PHYSICAL CONDITIONS; REFERENCE POINTS 4.1. AVAILABILITY OF LANDS The Owner shall furnish, as indicated in the Contract Documents, the lands upon which the Work is to be Performed, rights -of -way, easements, rights of entry for access thereto, and such other lands which are designated for the use of contractor. The Owner shall identify any encumbrances or restrictions not of general application but specifically related to use of lands so furnished with which contractor will have to comply in performing the Work. Easements for permanent structures or permanent changes in existing facilities will be obtained and paid for by the Owner, unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents. SECTION III Page 7 of 50 Updated 6/3/2016 • • • SECTION III — General Conditions 4.2. INVESTIGATIONS AND REPORTS Reference is made to the Supplementary Conditions and Technical Specifications for identification of those reports of investigations and tests of subsurface and latent physical conditions at the site or otherwise affecting cost, progress or performance of the Work which have been relied upon by Engineer in preparation of the Drawings and Specifications. Such reports are not guaranteed as to accuracy or completeness and are not part of the Contract Documents. Contractor shall promptly notify the Owner's Representative in writing of any subsurface or latent physical conditions at the site, or in an existing structure, differing materially from those indicated or referred to in the Contract Documents. Engineer will promptly review those conditions and advise if further investigation or tests are necessary. Owner or Engineer shall obtain the necessary additional investigations and tests and furnish copies to the Engineer and Contractor. If Engineer finds that the results of such investigations or tests indicate that there are subsurface or latent physical conditions, which differ materially from those, indicated in the contract Documents, and which could not reasonably have been anticipated by Contractor, a work change or Change Order will be issued incorporating the necessary revisions. 4.3. PHYSICAL CONDITIONS, UNDERGROUND FACILITIES The information and data shown or indicated in the Contract Documents with respect to existing Underground Facilities at or contiguous to the site is based on information and data furnished to Owner or Engineer by the owners of such Underground Facilities or by others. Unless otherwise expressly provided in the Contract Documents, Owner and Engineer shall not be responsible for the accuracy or completeness of any such information or data; and the cost of all the following will be included in the Contract Price and contractor shall have full responsibility for: (i) reviewing and checking all such information and data, (ii) locating all Underground Facilities shown or indicated in the Contract Documents, (iii) coordination of the Work with the owners of such Underground Facilities during construction, and (iv) the safety and protection of all such Underground Facilities and repairing any damage thereto resulting from the Work. The Contractor is required to call the Sunshine State One Call of Florida prior to any excavation per State regulations and to notify any utility owners who are not a member of the Sunshine State One Call of Florida prior to any excavation. The Sunshine State One Call of Florida is an agency for the protection and location of utilities prior to any excavation and contact number is available in local telephone directory. 4.4. REFERENCE POINTS Engineer shall provide engineering surveys to establish reference points for construction, which in Engineer's judgment are necessary to enable Contractor to proceed with the Work. Contractor shall be responsible for laying out the Work, unless otherwise noted in the Contract, shall protect and preserve the established reference points and shall make no changes or relocations without the prior written approval of the Owner and Engineer. Contractor shall report to Engineer whenever any reference point is lost or destroyed or requires relocation because of necessary changes in grades or locations, and shall be responsible for the accurate replacement or relocation of such reference points by a surveyor licensed in the State of Florida. The Contractor is referred to the Technical Specifications for more specific information regarding the provision of construction surveys. If a City survey crew is assigned to the project and there is excessive stake replacement caused by negligence of Contractor's forces after initial line and grade have been set, as determined by the Engineer, the Contractor will be charged at the rate of $100.00 per SECTION III Page 8 of 50 Updated 6/3/2016 • • SECTION III — General Conditions hour. Time shall be computed for actual time on the project. All time shall be computed in one - hour increments with a minimum charge of one hour. 5. BONDS AND INSURANCE 5.1. PERFORMANCE AND PAYMENT BOND /CONTRACT BOND Contractor shall furnish a Performance and Payment Bond pursuant to Section 255.05, Florida Statutes in an amount equal to the Contract Price as security for the faithful performance and payment of all Contractor's obligations under the Contract Documents. This bond shall remain in effect at least one year after the date when final payment becomes due, unless a longer period of time is prescribed by laws and regulations or by the Contract Documents. Contractor shall also furnish such other Bonds as are required by the Supplementary Conditions. All Bonds shall be in the form prescribed by the Contract Documents in Section V and shall be executed by such sureties as are named in the current list of "Companies Holding Certificates of Authority as Acceptable Sureties on Federal Bonds and as Acceptable Reinsuring Companies" as published in Circular 570 (amended) by the Audit Staff, Bureau of Government Financial Operations, U.S. Treasury Department. All bonds signed by an agent must be accompanied by a certified copy of such agents' authority to act. All bonds shall be deemed to contain all of the Conditions of Section 255.05, Florida Statutes, even if such language is not directly contained within the bond and the Surety shall be licensed and qualified to do business in the State of Florida. Owner reserves the right to reject any surety. If the Surety on any Bond furnished by the Contractor is declared bankrupt or becomes insolvent or its right to do business is terminated in any state where any part of the Project is located or it ceases to meet the requirements of these Contract Documents, the Contractor shall within five days after notice thereof substitute another Bond and surety, both of which must be acceptable to Owner. 5.2. INSURANCE REQUIREMENTS The Contractor shall, at its own cost and expense, acquire and maintain (and cause any sub- contractors, representatives or agents to acquire and maintain) during the term with the City, sufficient insurance to adequately protect the respective interest of the parties. Coverage shall be obtained with a carrier having an AM Best Rating of A -VII or better. In addition, the City has the right to review the Contractor's deductible or self - insured retention and to require that it be reduced or eliminated. Specifically the Contractor must carry the following minimum types and amounts of insurance on an occurrence basis or in the case of coverage that cannot be obtained on an occurrence basis, then coverage can be obtained on a claims -made basis with a minimum four (4) year tail following the termination or expiration of this Agreement: The following insurance limits may be achieved by a combination of primary and umbrella/excess liability policies. 5.2.1. COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY INSURANCE Commercial General Liability Insurance coverage, including but not limited to, premises operations, products /completed operations, products liability, contractual liability, advertising injury, personal injury, death, and property damage in the minimum amount of $1,000,000 (one million dollars) per occurrence and $2,000,000 (two million dollars) general aggregate. SECTION III Page 9 of 50 Updated 6/3/2016 • • • SECTION III — General Conditions 5.2.2. COMMERCIAL AUTOMOBILE LIABILITY INSURANCE Commercial Automobile Liability Insurance coverage for any owned, non - owned, hired or borrowed automobile is required in the minimum amount of $1,000,000 (one million dollars) combined single limit. 5.2.3. WORKERS' COMPENSATION AND EMPLOYER'S LIABILITY INSURANCE Statutory Workers' Compensation Insurance coverage in accordance with the laws of the State of Florida, and Employer's Liability Insurance in the minimum amount of $100,000 (one hundred thousand dollars) each employee each accident, $100,000 (one hundred thousand dollars) each employee by disease and $500,000 (five hundred thousand dollars) aggregate by disease with benefits afforded under the laws of the State of Florida. Coverage should include Voluntary Compensation, Jones Act, and U.S. Longshoremen's and Harbor Worker's Act coverage where applicable. Coverage must be applicable to employees, contractors, subcontractors, and volunteers, if any. 5.2.4. PROFESSIONAL LIABILITY /MALPRACTICE /ERRORS OR OMISSIONS INSURANCE Professional Liability/Malpractice /Errors or Omissions Insurance coverage appropriate for the type of business engaged in by the Contractor with minimum limits of $1,000,000 (one million dollars) per occurrence. If a claims made form of coverage is provided, the retroactive date of coverage shall be no later than the inception date of claims made coverage, unless prior policy was extended indefinitely to cover prior acts. Coverage shall be extended beyond the policy year either by a supplemental extended reporting period (ERP) of as great a duration as available, and with no less coverage and with reinstated aggregate limits, or by requiring that any new policy provide a retroactive date no later than the inception date of claims made coverage. 5.2.5. CONTRACTOR'S EQUIPMENT /INLAND MARINE /PROPERTY INSURANCE If Contractor is using its own property in connection with the performance of its obligations under this Agreement, then Contractor's Equipment— Inland Marine Insurance and/or Property Insurance on an "All Risks" basis with replacement cost coverage for property and equipment in the care, custody and control of others is recommended. City is not responsible for Contractor's (or any sub - contractors, representatives, or agents) equipment or property. 5.2.6. BUILDER'S RISK INSURANCE The City will provide at its expense, Builder's Risk Insurance for the project to cover all risks of loss in the complete and full value of the project. Contractor agrees to cooperate in a timely manner with providing any information or documentation required for the application and by the carrier as the project proceeds. 5.3. OTHER INSURANCE PROVISIONS Upon approval of this Agreement by City Council, and then annually upon the anniversary date(s) of the insurance policy's renewal date(s) for as long as this Agreement remains in effect, the Contractor will furnish the City with a Certificate of Insurance(s) (using appropriate ACORD SECTION III Page 10 of 50 Updated 6/3/2016 • • • SECTION III — General Conditions certificate, SIGNED by the Issuer, and with applicable endorsements) evidencing all of the coverage set forth above and naming the City as an "Additional Insured." In addition when requested in writing from the City, Contractor will provide the City with certified copies of all applicable policies. The address where such certificates and certified policies shall be sent or delivered is as follows: City of Clearwater Engineering Department Attn: Construction Office Specialist P.O. Box 4748 Clearwater, FL 33758 -4748 1. The Description (of Operations /Locations/Vehicles) should specify Project Name and Project Number. 2. Contractor shall provide thirty (30) days written notice of any cancellation, non - renewal, termination, material change or reduction in coverage. 3. Contractor's insurance as outlined above shall be primary and non - contributory coverage for Contractor's negligence. 4. Contractor reserves the right to appoint legal counsel to provide for the Contractor's defense, for any and all claims that may arise related to Agreement, work performed under this Agreement, or to Contractor's design, equipment, or service. Contractor agrees that the City shall not be liable to reimburse Contractor for any legal fees or costs as a result of Contractor providing its defense as contemplated herein. The stipulated limits of coverage above shall not be construed as a limitation of any potential liability to the City, and the City's failure to request evidence of this insurance shall not be construed as a waiver of Contractor's (or sub - contractors, representatives, or agents) obligation to provide the insurance coverage specified. 5.4. WAIVER OF RIGHTS The Owner and Contractor intend that all policies purchased in accordance with Article on Insurance will protect the Owner, Contractor, Subcontractors, Engineer, Engineer's Consultants and all other persons or entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions to be listed as insured or additional insured in such policies and will provide primary coverage for all losses and damages caused by the perils covered thereby. All such policies shall contain provisions to the effect that in the event of payment of any loss or damage the insurers will have no rights of recovery against any of the insured or additional insured thereunder, the Owner and Contractor waive all rights against each other and their respective officers, directors, employees and agents for all losses and damages caused by, arising out of or resulting from any of the perils covered by such policies and any other property insurance applicable to the work; and, in addition, waive all such rights against Sub - contractors, Engineer, Engineer's Consultants and all other persons or entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions to be listed as insured or additional insured under such policies for losses and damages so caused. None of the above waivers shall extend to the rights that any party making such waiver may have to the proceeds of insurance otherwise payable under any policy so issued. In addition, the Owner waives all rights against Contractor, Subcontractors, Engineer, Engineer's Consultant and the officers, directors, employees and agents of any of them for: (i) loss due to business interruption, loss of use or other consequential loss extending beyond direct physical loss or damage to the Owner property or the Work caused by, arising out of or resulting from fire or other peril, whether or not insured by the Owner and; (ii) loss or damage to the completed Project or part thereof caused by, arising out of or resulting SECTION III Page 11 of 50 Updated 6/3/2016 • • • SECTION III — General Conditions from fire or other insured peril covered by any property insurance maintained on the completed Project or part thereof by the Owner during partial utilization, after substantial completion or after final payment. 6. CONTRACTORS RESPONSIBILITIES 6.1. SUPERVISION AND SUPERINTENDENCE Contractor shall supervise, inspect and direct the Work competently and efficiently, devoting such attention thereto and applying such skills and expertise as may be necessary to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. Contractor shall be solely responsible for the means, methods, techniques, sequences and procedures of construction. Contractor shall not be responsible for the negligence of others in the design or specification of a specific means, method, technique, sequence or procedure of construction which is shown or indicated in and expressly required by the Contract Documents. Contractor shall be responsible to see that the completed work complies accurately with the Contract Documents. Contractor shall keep on the work at all times during its progress a competent resident superintendent, who shall not be replaced without notice to the Owner's Representative except under extraordinary circumstances. The superintendent will be Contractor's representative at the site and shall have authority to act on behalf of Contractor. All communications to the superintendent shall be as binding as if given to Contractor. The Contractor's superintendent shall keep a mobile cell phone on his person so he can be contacted whenever necessary. Contractor shall employ only competent persons to do the work and whenever the Owner's Representative shall notify Contractor, in writing, that any person on the work appears to be incompetent, unfaithful, disorderly, disrespectful or otherwise unsatisfactory, such person shall be removed from the project and shall not again be employed on it except with the written consent of the Owner's Representative. Contractor represents the City of Clearwater and shall conduct themselves in a professional manner to the public at all times. Contractor shall reimburse Owner for additional engineering and inspection costs incurred as a result of overtime work in excess of the regular working hours or on the Owner normally approved holidays. At such times when Inspector overtime is required, the Contractor shall sign an overtime slip documenting such hours and the Contractor shall be provided a copy for his records. At the end of the project and prior to payment of withheld retainage funds, the Contractor shall deliver to the Owner a check made out to the Owner of Clearwater for full reimbursement of all Inspector overtime hours. Withheld retainage shall not be released until the Owner has received this check. Minimum number of chargeable hours for inspection costs on weekends or holidays shall be four hours. The cost of overtime inspection per hour shall be $80.00 per hour. Contractor shall provide and maintain in a neat and sanitary condition, such sanitary accommodations for the use of Contractor's employees as may be necessary to comply with the requirements of Laws and Regulations and the Engineer. 6.2. LABOR, MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT Contractor shall provide competent, suitably qualified personnel to survey, lay out and construct the work as required by the Contract Documents. Contractor shall at all times maintain good SECTION III Page 12 of 50 Updated 6/3/2016 • • • SECTION III — General Conditions discipline and order at the site. Except as otherwise required for the safety or protection of persons or the work or property at the site or adjacent thereto, and except as otherwise indicated in the Contract Documents, all work at the site shall be performed during regular working hours. Contractor shall adhere to the Community Development Code, Section 3 -1508 regarding noise restrictions from 6:00 p.m. to 7:00 a.m. any day and all day Sunday. Contractor will not permit overtime work or the performance of work on Saturday, Sunday, or any legal holiday without Owner consent given after prior notice to Engineer. Unless otherwise specified in the General Requirements, Contractor shall furnish and assume full responsibility for all materials, equipment, labor, transportation, construction equipment and machinery, tools, appliances, fuel, power, light, heat, telephone, water, sanitary facilities, temporary facilities, and all other facilities and incidentals necessary for the furnishing, performance, testing, start-up and completion of the Work. All materials and equipment installed in the Work shall be of good quality and new, except as otherwise provided in the Contract Documents. If required by Engineer, Contractors shall furnish satisfactory evidence (including reports of required tests) as to the quality of materials and equipment. The Contractor shall provide suitable and secure storage for all materials to be used in the Work so that their quality shall not be impaired or injured. Materials that are improperly stored, may be rejected by the Engineer without testing. All materials and equipment shall be applied, installed, connected, erected, used, cleaned and conditioned in accordance with the instructions of the applicable manufacturer, fabricator, supplier, or distributor, except as otherwise provided in the Contract Documents. The City of Clearwater, at its sole discretion, reserves the right to purchase major equipment or materials to be incorporated into the Work under the Owner Direct Purchase (ODP) Option, per Section III, Article 21. In such event, the Contractor shall cooperate and assist the Owner of Clearwater, at no additional cost, to implement the ODP documents and procedures. 6.3. SUBSTITUTES AND "OR EQUAL" ITEMS Whenever an item of material or equipment is specified or described in the Contract Documents by using the name of a proprietary item or the name of a particular Supplier, the specification or description is intended to establish the type, function and quality required. Unless the specification or description contains or is followed by words reading that no like, equivalent or "or equal" item or no substitution is permitted, other items of material or equipment or material or equipment of other Suppliers may be accepted by Engineer. If in Engineer's sole discretion an item of material or equipment proposed by Contractor is functionally equal to that named and sufficiently similar so that no change in related Work will be required, it may be considered by Engineer for approval. If in the Engineer's sole discretion an item of material or equipment proposed by Contractor does not qualify as an "or equal" item, it may be considered as a proposed substitute item. Contractor shall submit sufficient information as required by the Engineer to allow the Engineer to determine that the item of material or equipment proposed is essentially equivalent to that named and is an acceptable substitute therefore. Request for review of proposed substitute and "or equal" will be not be accepted by Engineer from anyone other than Contractor. Request for substitute and "or equal" items by Contractor must be submitted in writing to Owner's Representative and will contain all information as Engineer deems necessary to make a determination. Request for substitute shall identify why a substitute is submitted and include advantages to the Owner. All data provided by Contractor in support of any proposed substitute SECTION III Page 13 of 50 Updated 6/3/2016 • • SECTION III — General Conditions or "or equal" item will be at Contractor's expense. Engineer will be allowed a reasonable time to evaluate each proposal or submittal made per this paragraph. Engineer will be sole judge of acceptability. 6.4. SUBCONTRACTORS, SUPPLIERS AND OTHERS The Contractor shall deliver to the Owner's Representative before or at the preconstruction conference a list of all Subcontractors, suppliers and other persons and organizations proposed by the Contractor for Work to be performed on the Project. The Contractor shall include with this list the qualifications and references for each Subcontractor, supplier or other person and organization for review and approval. Any changes to this list must be submitted to the Owner's Representative for approval prior to the substitution of any Subcontractors, suppliers or other persons and organizations before performing any Work on the Project for the Contractor. Contractor shall be fully responsible to Owner and Engineer for all acts and omissions of the Subcontractors, Suppliers and other persons performing or furnishing any of the work under a direct or indirect contract with Contractor just as Contractor is responsible for Contractor's own acts and omissions. Nothing in the Contract Documents shall create for the benefit of any such Subcontractor, Supplier or other person any contractual relationship between Owner or Engineer and any Subcontractor, Supplier or other person, nor shall it create any obligation on the part of Owner or Engineer to pay or to see to the payment of any moneys due any such Subcontractor, Supplier or other person. Contractor shall be solely responsible for scheduling and coordinating the work of Subcontractors, Suppliers and other persons performing or furnishing any of the work under a direct or indirect contract with Contractor. Contractor shall require all Subcontractors, Suppliers and such other persons performing or furnishing any of the work to communicate with the Engineer through Contractor. The divisions and sections of the Specifications and the identifications of any Drawings shall not control Contractor in dividing the work among Subcontractors or Suppliers or delineating the work to be performed by any specific trade. All work performed for Contractor by a Subcontractor or Supplier will be pursuant to an appropriate agreement between Contractor and the Subcontractor or Supplier which specifically binds the Subcontractor or Supplier to the applicable terms and conditions of the Contract Documents for the benefit of Owner and Engineer. Contractor shall not pay or employ any Subcontractor, Supplier or other person or organization whether initially or as a substitute, against whom Owner or Engineer may have reasonable objection. Contractor shall not be required to employ any Subcontractor, Supplier or other person or organization to furnish or perform any of the work against whom Contractor has reasonable objection. Owner or Engineer will not undertake to settle any differences between Contractor and his Subcontractors or between Subcontractors. 6.5. USE OF PREMISES Contractor shall confine construction equipment, the storage of materials and equipment and the operations of works to the site and land areas identified in and permitted by the Contract Documents on other land areas permitted by Laws and Regulations, right -of -way, permits and easements, and shall not unreasonably encumber the premises with construction equipment or other materials or equipment. Contractor shall assume full responsibility for any damage to any SECTION III Page 14 of 50 Updated 6/3/2016 • SECTION III — General Conditions such land or area, or to the owner or occupant thereof or of any adjacent land or areas, resulting from the performance of the Work. Should any claim be made by any such owner or occupant because of the performance of the Work, Contractor shall promptly settle with such other party by negotiation or otherwise resolve the claim by arbitration or other dispute resolution proceed in or at law. Contractor shall, to the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, indemnify and hold harmless Owner, Engineer, Engineer's Consultant and their officials, directors, employees and agents from and against all claims, costs, losses and damages arising out of or resulting from any claim or action, legal or equitable, brought by any such owner or occupant against Owner, Engineer or any other party indemnified hereunder to the extent caused by or based upon Contractor's performance of the Work. During the progress of the Work, Contractor shall keep the premises free from accumulations of waste materials, rubbish and other debris resulting from the Work. At the completion of the Work or at intervals established by the Engineer, Contractor shall remove all waste materials, rubbish and debris from and about the premises as well as all tools, appliances, construction equipment and machinery and surplus materials. Contractor shall restore to original condition all property not designated for alteration by the Contract Documents. 6.5.1. STAGING AREAS The Contactor shall obtain and deliver to the City written permission for the use of all staging and storage areas outside of the Limits of Construction. Use of right of way within the limits of construction must be approved by the City. All applicable erosion control, tree barricade and restoration, including time limits, specifications, etc., must be followed. 6.5.2. RESTORATION TIME LIMITS The timely restoration of all impacted areas, especially right -of -ways, is very important to the Citizens of Clearwater; therefore these time limits are imposed: • Debris piles shall be removed within five (5) consecutive calendar days. • Concrete driveways and sidewalks shall be replaced within ten (10) consecutive calendar days of removal. Resident access shall be maintained at all times. • All arterial and collector roadways shall be restored ASAP. • Local streets and asphalt driveways shall be restored as soon as a sufficient quantity is generated, however, this is never to exceed fifteen (15) consecutive calendar days. Local and resident access shall be maintained at all times. • Any irrigation systems or components damaged or impacted by construction activities shall be repaired or replaced "in- kind" within forty -eight (48) hours to minimize the loss of turfgrass or landscape plantings, particularly during periods of drought. • Sod must be restored "in- kind" within fourteen (14) consecutive calendar days of a successful pipe pressure test, removal of concrete forms, backfill of excavations, replacement of driveways or sidewalks or other project specific milestone. It must be watered for a period of thirty (30) days after it is placed. Erosion control and dust control of denuded areas must be maintained at all times. If the project or a portion of it does not involve right -of ways, then a different schedule of sod restoration may be considered. SECTION III Page 15 of 50 Updated 6/3/2016 SECTION III — General Conditions 6.6. LICENSE AND PATENT FEES, ROYALTIES AND TAXES Contractor shall pay all license fees and royalties and assume all costs incident to the use in the performance of the work or the incorporation in the Work of any invention, design, process, product or device which is the subject of patent rights or copyrights held by others. If a particular invention, design, process, product or device is specified in the Contract Documents for use in the performance of the work and if to the actual knowledge of Owner or Engineer its use is subject to patent rights or copyrights calling for the payment of any license fee or royalty to others, the existence of such rights shall be disclosed by Owner or Engineer in the Contract Documents. To the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, Contractor shall indemnify and hold harmless Owner, Engineer, Engineer's Consultants and the officers, directors, employees, agents and other consultants of each and any of them from and against all claims, costs, losses and damages arising out of or resulting from any infringement of patent rights or copyrights incident to the use in the performance of the Work or resulting from the incorporation in the Work of any invention, design, process, product or device not specified in the Contract Documents, and shall defend all such claims in connection with any alleged infringement of such rights. Contractor shall pay all sales, consumer, use and other taxes required to be paid by Contractor in accordance with the Laws and Regulations of the State of Florida and other governmental agencies, which are applicable during the performance of the work. 6.7. LAWS AND REGULATIONS Contractor shall give all notices and comply with all Laws and Regulations applicable to furnishing and performance of the Work. Except where otherwise expressly required by applicable Laws and Regulations, neither Owner nor Owner's Representative shall be responsible for monitoring Contractor's compliance with any Laws or Regulations. If Contractor performs any work knowing or having reason to know that it is contrary to Laws or Regulations, Contractor shall bear all claims, costs, losses and damages caused by or arising out of such work: however, it shall not be Contractor's primary responsibility to make certain that the Specifications and Drawings are in accordance with Laws and Regulations, but this shall not relieve Contractor of Contractor's obligations to the Owner to report and resolve discrepancies as described above. When City projects include Federal or State funding, the requirements of Executive Order 11 -02 shall be adhered to utilizing the Homeland Security E- Verify System to verify employment eligibility. 6.8. PERMITS Unless otherwise provided in the Supplementary Conditions, Contractor shall obtain and pay for all construction permits and licenses. The Owner shall assist Contractor, when necessary, in obtaining such permits and licenses. Contractor shall pay all governmental charges and inspection fees necessary for the prosecution of the Work, which are applicable at the time of opening of Bids. Contractor shall pay all charges of utility owners for connections to the work, and the Owner shall pay all charges of such utility owners for capital costs related thereto such as plant investment fees. Unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents, Clearwater Building Permit Fees will be waived. SECTION III Page 16 of 50 Updated 6/3/2016 • • • SECTION III — General Conditions 6.9. SAFETY AND PROTECTION Contractor shall be responsible for initiating, maintaining and supervising all safety precautions and programs in connection with the Work. Contractor shall take all necessary precautions for the safety of, and shall provide the necessary protection to prevent damage, injury or loss to: (i) all persons on the work site or who may be affected by the work, (ii) all the Work and materials and equipment to be incorporated therein, whether in storage on or off the site; and (iii) other property at the site or adjacent thereto, including trees, shrubs, lawns, walks, pavements, roadways, structures, utilities and Underground Facilities not designated for removal, relocation or replacement in the course of construction. In the event of temporary suspension of the work, or during inclement weather, or whenever Owner's Representative may direct; Contractor shall, and shall cause Subcontractors, to protect carefully the Work and materials against damage or injury from the weather. If, in the opinion of the Owner's Representative, any portion of Work or materials shall have been damaged or injured by reason of failure on the part of the Contractor or any Subcontractors to so protect the Work, such Work and materials shall be removed and replaced at the expense of Contractor. The Contractor shall initiate and maintain an accident prevention program which shall include, but shall not be limited to the establishment and supervision of programs for the education and training of employees in the recognition, avoidance and prevention of unsafe conditions and acts. Contractor shall provide first aid services and medical care to his employees. The Contractor shall develop and maintain an effective fire protection and prevention program and good housekeeping practices at the site of contract performance throughout all phases of construction, repair, alteration or demolition. Contractor shall require appropriate personal protective equipment in all operations where there is exposure to hazardous conditions. The Engineer may order that the work stop if a condition of immediate danger to the Owner's employees, equipment or if property damage exists. This provision shall not shift responsibility or risk of loss for injuries of damage sustained from the Contractor to Owner, and the Contractor shall remain solely responsible for compliance with all safety requirements and for the safety of all persons and property at the site of Contract performance. The Contractor shall instruct his employees required to handle or use toxic materials or other harmful substances regarding their safe handling and use. The Contractor shall take the necessary precautions to protect pedestrians and motorists from harm, and to prevent disruptions of such traffic due to construction activity. Contractor shall comply with all applicable Laws and Regulations of any public body having jurisdiction for safety of persons or property and to protect them from damage, injury or loss; and shall erect and maintain all necessary safeguards for such safety and protection. Contractor shall notify owners of adjacent property and of Underground Facilities and utility owners when execution of the work may affect them, and shall cooperate with them in the protection, removal, relocation and replacement of their property. All damage, injury or loss to any property caused, directly or indirectly, in whole or part, by Contractor, any Subcontractor, Supplier or any other person or organization directly or indirectly employed by any of them to perform or furnish any of the work or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable, shall be remedied by Contractor. Contractor's duties and responsibilities for safety and for protection of the Work shall continue until such time as all the Work is completed and Engineer has issued a notice to Owner and Contractor that the Work is acceptable. 6.10. EMERGENCIES In emergencies affecting the safety or protection of persons or the Work or property at the site or adjacent thereto, Contractor, with or without special instruction or authorization from Owner or SECTION III Page 17 of 50 Updated 6/3/2016 • • • SECTION III — General Conditions the Owner's Representative, is obligated to act to prevent damage, injury or loss. Contractor shall give Engineer prompt written notice if Contractor believes that any significant changes in the Work or variations from the Contract Documents have been caused thereby. If the Owner's Representative determines that a change in the Contract Documents is required because of the action taken by Contractor in response to such an emergency, a Work Change Directive or Change Order will be issued to document the consequences of such action. 6.11. DRAWINGS 6.11.1. SHOP DRAWINGS, SAMPLES, RFIs, AND SUBMITTAL REVIEW Contractor shall submit Shop Drawings to Engineer for review and approval as called for in the Technical Specifications or required by the Engineer. The data shown on the Shop Drawings will be complete with respect to quantities, dimensions, specified performance and design criteria, materials and similar data to show Engineer the materials and equipment Contractor proposes to provide and to enable Engineer to review the information. Contractor shall also submit Samples to Engineer for review and approval. Before submitting each Shop Drawing or Sample, Contractor shall have determined and verified: (i) all field measurements, quantities, dimensions, specified performance criteria, installation requirements, materials, catalog numbers and similar information with respect thereto, (ii) all materials with respect to intended use, fabrication, shipping, handling, storage, assembly and installation pertaining to the performance of the Work, and (iii) all information relative to Contractor's sole responsibilities in respect to means, methods, techniques, sequences and procedures of construction and safety precautions and programs incident thereto. Contractor shall also have reviewed and coordinated each Shop Drawing or Sample with other Shop Drawings and Samples with the requirements of the Work and the Contract Documents. Each submittal will have a transmittal cover sheet identifying the shop drawing name, number, and technical specification reference; will bear a stamp or specific written indication that Contractor has satisfied Contractor's obligations under the Contract Documents with respect to Contractor's review and approval of that submittal. At the time of submission, Contractor shall give Engineer specific written notice of such variations, if any, that the Shop Drawing or Sample submitted may have from the requirements of the Contract Documents, such notice to be in a written communication separate from the submittal; and, in addition, shall cause a specific notation to be made on each Shop Drawing and Sample submitted to Engineer for review and approval of each such variation. The Contractor shall maintain a submittal log as mentioned in Article 2.5. The Engineer shall receive updated copies at each progress meeting, and the Engineer shall respond to each submittal within fourteen (14) consecutive calendar days. The Contractor shall maintain a request for information (RFI) log as mentioned in Article 2.5. The Engineer shall receive updated copies at each progress meeting, and the Engineer shall respond to each RFI within fourteen (14) consecutive calendar days. The untimely submission of Submittal or RFIs shall not be grounds for a delay claim from the Contractor. Engineer's review and approval of Shop Drawings and Samples will be only to determine if the items covered by the submittals will, after installation or incorporation in the Work, conform to the information given in the Contract Documents and be compatible with the design concept of the completed Project as a functioning whole as indicated the Contract Documents. Engineer's review and approval will not extend to means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures of construction (except where a particular means method, technique, sequence or procedure of SECTION III Page 18 of 50 Updated 6/3/2016 • • • SECTION III — General Conditions construction is specifically and expressly called for by the Contract Documents) or to safety precautions or programs incident thereto. The review and approval of a separate item as such will not indicate approval of the assembly in which the item functions. Contractor shall make corrections required by Engineer, and shall return the required number of corrected copies of Shop Drawings and submit as required new Samples for review and approval. Contractor shall direct specific attention in writing to revisions other than the corrections called for by Engineer on previous submittals. Engineer's review and approval of Shop Drawings or Samples shall not relieve Contractor from responsibility for any variation from the requirements of the Contract Documents unless Contractor has in writing called Engineer's attention to each such variation at the time of submission and Engineer has given written approval of each such variation by specific written notation thereof incorporated in or accompanying the Shop Drawing or Sample approval; nor will any approval by the Engineer relieve the Contractor from responsibility for complying with the requirements of paragraph above discussing field measurements by the Contractor. Contractor shall furnish required submittals with complete information and accuracy in order to achieve required approval of an item within two (2) submittals. Owner's Representative reserves the right to backcharge Contractor, for Engineer's costs for resubmittals that account for a number greater than twenty percent (20 %) of the total number of first time submittals, per the approved initial submittal log. Owner's Representative reserves the right to backcharge Contractor for all third submittals. The number of first time submittals shall be equal to the number of submittals agreed to by Engineer and Contractor. All costs to Engineer involved with subsequent submittal of Shop Drawings, Samples or other items requiring approval will be backcharged to Contractor at the rate of 3.0 times direct technical labor cost by deducting such costs from payments due Contractor for Work completed. In the event that Contractor requests a substitution for a previously approved item, all of Engineer's costs in the reviewing and approval of the substitution will be backcharged to Contractor, unless the need for such substitution is beyond the control of Contractor. 6.11.2. AS -BUILT DRAWINGS The Contractor shall keep and maintain one set of blueprints, As -Built Drawings, in good order and legible condition to be continuously marked -up at the job site. The Contractor shall mark and annotate neatly and clearly all project conditions, locations, configurations and any other changes or deviations which may vary from the details represented on the original Contract Plans, including revisions made necessary by Addenda, Shop Drawings, and Change Orders during the construction process. The Contractor shall record the horizontal and vertical locations, in the plan and profile, of all buried utilities that differ from the locations indicated or which were not indicated on the Contract Plans and buried (or concealed), construction and utility features which are revealed during the construction period. The As -Built Drawings shall be available for inspection by the Engineer, Engineer's Consultant, and the Owner's Representative at all times during the progress of the Project. The As -Built Drawings shall be reviewed by the Owner's Representative, or his designee, for accuracy and compliance with the requirements of "As -Built Drawings" prior to submittal of the monthly pay requests. The pay requests shall be rejected if the marked -up redline prints do not conform to the "As -Built Drawings" requirements. As -Built Drawings shall be submitted to the Owner Inspector for approval upon completion of the project and prior to acceptance of final pay SECTION III Page 19 of 50 Updated 6/3/2016 SECTION III — General Conditions request. Final pay request shall not be processed until As -Built Drawings have been reviewed by the Engineer or the Engineer's Consultant for accuracy and completeness. Prior to placing new potable water mains in service, the Contractor shall provide the Engineer intersection drawings, as specified for the water mains. The Owner's acceptance of the "As -Built Drawings" does not relieve the Contractor of the sole responsibility for the accuracy and completeness of the As -Built Drawings. 6.11.2.1. General The Contractor shall prepare an "AS -BUILT SURVEY" per chapter 5J- 17.052, Florida Administrative Code (see definition below), signed and sealed by a Florida registered land surveyor. The contractor will deliver to the Owner two hard copies of signed and sealed As -Built Drawings and an AutoCAD file. 5J- 17.050 Definition: (10)(a) As -Built Survey: a survey performed to obtain horizontal and/or vertical dimensional data so that constructed improvements may be located and delineated: also known as Record Survey. This survey shall be clearly titled "As -Built Survey" and shall be signed and sealed by a Florida registered land surveyor. The survey must be delivered to the Owner of Clearwater Construction Division upon substantial completion of the project. If this condition is not met, the Owner will procure the services of a Professional Surveyor and Mapper registered in the State of Florida and will back charge the contractor a fee of $1,800 per day or any portion thereof to provide the Owner with the required As -Built Survey. 6.11.2.2. Sanitary and Storm Sewer Piping Systems 1. Manholes and inlets shall be located by survey coordinates (northing, easting and elevation) based on the approved horizontal and vertical datum or utilize the stationing supplied on the construction plans. New and replaced service connections shall be dimensioned to the nearest downstream manhole. All manholes, cleanouts and catch basin invert and rim elevations, manhole and catch basin dimensions, pipe sizes, and pipe material shall also be noted on the plan view and also on the profile if one exists. The terminal ends of all subdrains, inverts of all pipe in structures, and the flow line of inlets shall also be noted on the plan view and also on the profile if one exists. 2. Pipe materials and areas of special construction shall be noted. 6.11.2.3. Pressure Pipe construction (Water, Reclaimed Water, Forcemain) All pipes shall be located by survey coordinates (northing, easting and elevation) based on the approved horizontal and vertical datum or utilize the stationing supplied on the construction plans. Coordinates shall be at all pipe bends, tees, valves, reducers, and deflections. Also all new and replaced service connections for potable and reclaimed water will be located as described above. Additionally there must be survey coordinates no further than 100 feet apart on linear type construction and shall denote top of pipe elevation at those points. 6.11.2.4. Electrical and Control Wiring The as -built drawings shall include all changes to the original Contract Plans. The as -built drawings shall also include the size, color, and number of wires and conduit. For projects where this information is too voluminous to be contained on the blueline prints, the Contractor shall SECTION III Page 20 of 50 Updated 6/3/2016 • SECTION III — General Conditions prepare supplemental drawings, on same size sheets as the blueline prints, showing the additional conduit runs, 1 -line diagrams, ladder diagrams, and other information. The wiring schematic diagrams shall show termination location and wiring identification at each point on the ladder diagram. 6.11.2.5. Horizontal and Vertical Control The As -Built survey shall be based on the original datum used for the construction design plans or if required by the Owner the datum shall be referenced to the North American Datum of 1983/90 (horizontal) and the North American Vertical Datum of 1988. The unit of measurement shall be the United States Foot. Any deviation or use of any other datum, (horizontal and or vertical), must be approved by the Owner of Clearwater Engineering Department. 6.11.2.6. Standards The As -Built survey shall meet the Minimum Technical Standards per Chapter 5J -17 and the Clearwater CAD STANDARDS set forth below. In addition to locating all improvements that pertain to the as -built survey it is the requirement of the Owner to have minimum location points at every change in direction and no more than 100 feet apart on all pressure pipes. 6.11.2.7. Other The As -Built drawings shall reflect any differences from the original Contract Plans, in the same level of detail and units of dimensions as the Plans. 6.11.3. CAD STANDARDS • 6.11.3.1. Layer Naming 6.11.3.1.1. Prefixes and Suffixes • DI prefix denotes digitized or scanned entities EP prefix denotes existing points - field collected EX prefix denotes existing entities - line work and symbols PR prefix denotes proposed entities - line work and symbols FU prefix denotes future entities (proposed but not part of this contract) - line work and symbols TX suffix denotes text — use for all text, no matter the prefix 6.11.3.1.2. Laver Naming Definitions: GAS gas lines and appurtenances ELEC power lines and appurtenances PHONE telephone lines and appurtenances CABLE cable TV lines and appurtenances BOC curbs WALK sidewalk SECTION III Page 21 of 50 Updated 6/3/2016 • • • SECTION III — General Conditions WATER water lines and appurtenances, sprinklers STORM storm lines and appurtenances TREES trees, bushes, planters SANITARY sanitary lines and appurtenances FENCE all fences BLDG buildings, sheds, finished floor elevation DRIVE driveways EOP edge of pavement without curbs TRAFFIC signal poles, control boxes TOPBANK top of bank TOESLOPE toe of slope TOPBERM top of berm TOEBERM toe of berm SEAWALL seawall CONCSLAB concrete slabs WALL walls, except seawall SHORE shoreline, water elevation CL centerline of road CLD centerline of ditch CLS centerline of swale CORNER property corners, monumentation BENCH benchmark, temporary benchmarks Other layers may be created as required, using above format. 6.11.3.2. Layer Properties All layers will use standard AutoCAD linetypes, bylayer. All layers will use standard AutoCAD colors, bylayer. All text will use standard AutoCAD fonts. 6.11.3.3. Text Styles Text style for EX layers will use the simplex font, oblique angle of 0 °, and a text times the plot scale. Text style for PR and FU layers will use the simplex font, oblique angle of 22. height of .010 times the plot scale. SECTION III height of .008 5 °, and a text Page 22 of 50 Updated 6/3/2016 • • SECTION III — General Conditions 6.11.4. DELIVERABLES The as -built survey shall be produced on bond material, 24" x 36" at a scale of 1'1=20' unless approved otherwise. The consultant shall deliver two hard copies and one digital copy of all drawings. Requested file formats are: Autodesk DWG and Adobe PDF files. Please address any questions regarding format to Mr. Tom Mahony, at (727) 562 -4762 or e-mail address Thomas .Mahony(cmyClearwater.com. 6.12. CONTRACTOR'S GENERAL WARRANTY AND GUARANTEE Contractor warrants and guarantees to Owner, Engineer and Engineer's Consultants that all Work will be in accordance with the Contract Documents and will not be defective. Contractor's warranty and guarantee hereunder includes defects or damage caused by abuse, vandalism, modification or operation by persons other than Contractor, Subcontractors or Suppliers. Until the acceptance of the Work by the Owner, the Work shall be under the charge and care of the Contractor, and he shall take every necessary precaution against injury or damage to any part thereof by action of the elements, or from any other cause whatsoever, arising from the execution or non - execution of the Work. The Contractor shall rebuild, repair and make good, at his own expense, all injuries or damages to any portion of the Work occasioned by any cause before its completion and final acceptance by the Owner. In addition, "the Contractor shall remedy any defects in the work at his own expense and pay for any damage to other work resulting therefrom which appear within a period of one year from the date of final acceptance ". Contractor's warranty and guarantee hereunder excludes improper maintenance and operation by Owner's employees and normal wear and tear under normal usage for any portion of the Work, which has been partially accepted by the Owner for operation prior to final acceptance by the Owner. Contractor's obligation to perform and complete the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents shall be absolute. None of the following will constitute an acceptance of Work that is not in accordance with the Contract Documents or a release of Contractor's obligation to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents: (i) observations by Owner's Representative, (ii) recommendation of any progress or final payment by Owner's Representative, (iii) the issuance of a certificate of Substantial Completion or any payment by the Owner to contractor under the Contract Documents, (iv) use or occupancy of the Work or any part thereof by Owner, (v) any acceptance by Owner or any failure to do so, (vi) any review and approval of a Shop Drawing or Sample submittal or the issuance of a notice of Acceptance by the Engineer. 6.13. CONTINUING THE WORK Contractor shall carry on the work and adhere to the progress schedule during all disputes or disagreements with the Owner. No work shall be delayed or postponed pending resolution of any disputes or disagreements, except as the Owner or Contractor may otherwise agree in writing. 6.14. INDEMNIFICATION To the fullest extent permitted by law, Contractor agrees to defend, indemnify, and hold the City, its officers, agents, and employees, harmless from and against any and all liabilities, demands, claims, suits, losses, damages, causes of action, fines or judgments, including costs, attorneys', witnesses', and expert witnesses' fees, and expenses incident thereto, relating to, arising out of, 1111 SECTION III Page 23 of 50 Updated 6/3/2016 • SECTION III — General Conditions or resulting from: (i) the services provided by Contractor personnel under this Agreement; (ii) any negligent acts, errors, mistakes or omissions by Contractor or Contractor personnel; and (iii) Contractor or Contractor personnel's failure to comply with or fulfill the obligations established by this Agreement. Contractor will update the City during the course of the litigation to timely notify the City of any issues that may involve the independent negligence of the City that is not covered by this indemnification. The City assumes no liability for actions of Contractor and will not indemnify or hold Contractor or any third party harmless for claims based on this Agreement or use of Contractor - provided supplies or services. Notwithstanding anything contained herein to the contrary, this indemnification provision shall not be construed as a waiver of any immunity to which Owner is entitled or the extent of any limitation of liability pursuant to § 768.28, Florida Statutes. Furthermore, this provision is not intended to nor shall be interpreted as limiting or in any way affecting any defense Owner may have under § 768.28, Florida Statutes or as consent to be sued by third parties. 6.15. CHANGES IN COMPANY CONTACT INFORMATION Contractor shall notify Owner by US mail addressed to the City Engineer of any changes in company contact information. This includes: contact phone, address, project manager, email addresses, etc. 6.16. PUBLIC RECORDS The ENGINEER will be required to comply with Section 119.0701, Florida Statutes (2014), specifically to: a) Keep and maintain public records required by the city of Clearwater (hereinafter "public agency ") to perform the service being provided by the contractor hereunder. b) Upon request from the public agency's custodian of public records, provide the public agency with a copy of the requested records or allow the records to be inspected or copied within a reasonable time at a cost that does not exceed the cost provided for in Chapter 119, Florida Statutes, as many be amended from time to time, or as otherwise provided by law. c) Ensure that public records that are exempt or confidential and exempt from public records disclosure requirements are not disclosed except as authorized by law for the duration of the contract term and following completion of the contract if the contractor does not transfer the records to the public agency. d) Upon completion of the contract, transfer, at no cost, to the public agency all public records in possession of the contractor or keep and maintain public records required by the public agency to perform the service. If the contractor transfers all public records to the public agency upon completion of the contract, the contractor shall destroy any public records that are exempt or confidential and exempt from public records disclosure requirements. If the contractor keeps and maintains public records upon completion of the contract, the contractor shall meet all applicable requirements for the retaining public records. All records stored electronically must be provided to the public agency, upon request from the public agency's custodian of public records in a format that is compatible with the information technology systems of the public agency. SECTION III Page 24 of 50 Updated 6/3/2016 • SECTION III — General Conditions e) A request to inspect or copy public records relating to a public agency's contract for services must be made directly to the public agency. If the public agency does not possess the requested records, the public agency shall immediately notify the contractor of the request and the contractor must provide the records to the public agency or allow the records to be inspected or copied within a reasonable time. f) The Contractor hereby acknowledges and agrees that if the contractor does not comply with the public agency's request for records, the public agency shall enforce the contract provisions in accordance with the contract. g) A Contractor who fails to provide the public records to the public agency within a reasonable time may be subject to penalties under Section 119.10, Florida Statutes. h) If a civil action is filed against a contractor to compel production of public records relating to a public agency's contract for services, the court shall assess and award against the contractor the reasonable costs of enforcement, including reasonable attorney fees, if: 1. The court determines that the contractor unlawfully refused to comply with the public records request within a reasonable time; and 2. At least 8 business days before filing the action, the plaintiff provided written notice of the public request, including a statement that the contractor has not complied with the request, to the public agency and to the contractor. i) A notice complies with subparagraph (h)2. if it is sent to the public agency's custodian of public records and to the contractor at the contractor's address listed on its contract with the public agency or to the contractor's registered agent. Global Express Guaranteed, or certified mail, with postage or shipping paid by the sender and with evidence of delivery, which may be in an electronic format. j) A contractor who complies with a public records request within 8 business days after the notice is sent is not liable for the reasonable costs of enforcement. 7. OTHER WORK 7.1. RELATED WORK AT SITE The City reserves the right to have its own forces enter the construction site at any time and perform work as necessary in order to perform infrastructure repair or maintenance, whether related to the project or not. The Contractor will allow complete access to all utility owners for these purposes. The City may have its own forces perform new work related to the project, however, this work will be identified in the Contract Scope of Work and coordination will be such that this activity is denoted in the Contractor's CPM Schedule so as not to cause any delays or interference with the Contractor's work or schedule. 7.2. COORDINATION If the Owner contracts with others for the performance of other work on the Project at the site, the following will be set forth in the Scope of Work: (i) the person who will have authority and responsibility for coordination of the activities among the various prime contractors will be identified; (ii) the specific matters to be covered by such authority and responsibility will be itemized; and (iii) the extent of such authority and responsibilities will be provided. Unless otherwise provided in the Supplementary Conditions, the Owner shall have sole authority and responsibility in respect of such coordination. SECTION III Page 25 of 50 Updated 6/3/2016 • SECTION III — General Conditions 8. OWNERS RESPONSIBILITY Except as otherwise provided in these General Conditions, the Owner shall issue all communications from the Owner to the Contractor through Owner's Representative. The Owner shall furnish the data required of the Owner under the Contract Documents promptly and shall make payments to Contractor promptly when they are due as provided in these General Conditions. The Owner is obligated to execute Change Orders as indicated in the Article on Changes In The Work. The Owner's responsibility in respect of certain inspections, tests, and approvals is set forth in the Article on Tests and Inspections. In connection with the Owner's right to stop work or suspend work, see the Article on Engineer may Stop the Work. The Article on Suspension of Work and Termination deals with the Owner's right to terminate services of Contractor under certain circumstances. Owner shall not supervise, direct or have control or authority over, nor be responsible for, Contractor's means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures of construction or the safety precautions and programs incident thereto, or for any failure of Contractor to comply with Laws and Regulations applicable to the furnishing or performance of the Work. The Owner will not be responsible for Contractor's failure to perform or furnish the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. 9. OWNER REPRESENTATIVE'S STATUS DURING CONSTRUCTION • 9.1. OWNERS REPRESENTATIVE • Dependent of the project type, the Owner's Representative during the construction period will either be the Construction Manager, the Engineer, or a designee of the Project's Owner. The duties, responsibilities and the limitations of authority of Owner's Representative during construction are set forth in the Contract Documents and shall not be extended without written consent of Owner and Engineer. 9.2. CLARIFICATIONS AND INTERPRETATIONS Engineer will issue with reasonable promptness such written clarifications or interpretations of the requirements of the Contract Documents regarding design issues only, in the form of Submittal responses, RFI responses, Drawings or otherwise, as Engineer may determine necessary, which shall be consistent with the intent of and reasonably inferable from Contract Documents. All other clarifications and interpretations of the Contract Documents shall be issued form the Owner's Representative. Such written clarifications and interpretations will be binding on the Owner and Contractor. If Contractor believes that a written clarification or interpretation justifies an adjustment in the Contract Price or the Contract Time and the parties are unable to agree to the amount or extent thereof, if any, Contractor may make a written claim therefore as provided in the Articles for Change of Work and Change of Contract Time. SECTION III Page 26 of 50 Updated 6/3/2016 • • • SECTION III — General Conditions 9.3. REJECTING OF DEFECTIVE WORK The Owner's Representative or the Engineer will have authority to disapprove or reject Work which Owner's Representative or the Engineer believes to be defective, or that Owner's Representative or the Engineer believes will not produce a completed Project that conforms to the Contract Documents or that will prejudice the integrity of the design concept of the completed Project as a functioning whole as indicated by the Contract Documents. The Owner's Representative or the Engineer will also have authority to require special inspection or testing of the Work whether or not the Work is fabricated, installed or completed. 9.4. SHOP DRAWINGS, CHANGE ORDERS, AND PAYMENTS In connection with Engineer's authority as to Shop Drawings and Samples, see articles on Shop Drawings and Samples. In connection with Owner's Representative authority as to Change Orders, see the articles on Changes of Work, Contract Price and Contract Time. In connection with Owner's Representative authority as to Applications for Payment, see the articles on Payments to Contractor and Completion. 9.5. DECISIONS ON DISPUTES The Owner's Representative will be the initial interpreter of the requirements of the Contract Documents and judge of the acceptability of the work thereunder. Claims, disputes and other matters relating to the acceptability of the work or the interpretation of the requirements of the Contract Documents pertaining to the performance and furnishing of the work and Claims under the Articles for Changes of Work, Changes of Contract Time and Changes of Contract Price will be referred initially to Owner's Representative in writing with a request for a formal decision in accordance with this paragraph. Written notice of each such claim, dispute or other matter will be delivered by the claimant to Owner's Representative and the other party to the Agreement promptly, but in no event later than thirty (30) days, after the start of the occurrence or event giving rise thereto, and written supporting data will be submitted to Owner's Representative and the other party within sixty (60) days after the start of such occurrence or event unless Owner's Representative allows an additional period of time for the submission of additional or more accurate data in support of such claim, dispute or other matter. The opposing party shall submit any response to Owner's Representative and the claimant within thirty (30) days after receipt of the claimant's last submittal, unless Owner's Representative allows additional time. Owner's Representative will render a formal decision in writing within thirty (30) days after receipt of the opposing party's submittal, if any, in accordance with this paragraph. Owner Representative's written decision on such claim, dispute or other matter will be final and binding upon the Owner and Contractor unless (i) an appeal from Owner Representative's decision is taken within thirty (30) days of the Owner Representative's decision, or the appeal time which may be stated in a Dispute Resolution Agreement between Owner and Contractor for the settlement of disputes or (ii) if no such Dispute Resolution Agreement has been entered into, a written notice of intention to appeal from Owner Representative's written decision is delivered by the Owner or Contractor to the other and to Owner's Representative within thirty (30) days after the date of such decision and a formal proceeding is instituted by the appealing party in a forum of competent jurisdiction to exercise such rights or remedies as the appealing party may have with respect to such claim, dispute or other matter in accordance with applicable Laws and Regulations within sixty (60) days of the date of such decision, unless otherwise agreed in writing by the Owner and Contractor. SECTION III Page 27 of 50 Updated 6/3/2016 • • • SECTION III — General Conditions When functioning as interpreter and judge, Owner's Representative will not show partiality to the Owner or Contractor and will not be liable in connection with any interpretation or decision rendered in good faith in such capacity. The rendering of a decision by Owner's Representative with respect to any such claim, dispute or other matter will be a condition precedent to any exercise by the Owner or Contractor of such rights or remedies as either may otherwise have under the Contract Documents or by Laws or Regulations in respect of any such claim, dispute or other matter pursuant the Article on Dispute Resolution. 9.6. LIMITATIONS ON OWNER REPRESENTATIVE'S RESPONSIBILITIES Neither Owner Representative's authority or responsibility under this paragraph or under any other provision of the Contract Documents nor any decision made by Owner's Representative in good faith either to exercise or not exercise such authority or responsibility or the undertaking, exercise or performance of any authority or responsibility by Owner's Representative shall create, impose or give rise to any duty owed by Owner's Representative to Contractor, any Subcontractor, any Supplier, any other person or organization or to any surety for or employee or agent of any of them. Owner's Representative will not supervise, direct, control or have authority over or be responsible for Contractor's means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures of construction, or the safety precautions and programs incident thereto, or for any failure of Contractor to comply with Laws and Regulations applicable to the furnishing or performance of the work. Owner's Representative will not be responsible for Contractor's failure to perform or furnish the work in accordance with the Contract Documents. Owner's Representative will not be responsible for the acts or omissions of Contractor or of any Subcontractor, any Supplier, or of any other person or organization performing or furnishing any of the work. Owner Representative's review of the final Application for Payment and accompanying documentation and all maintenance and operating instructions, schedules, guarantees, bonds and certificates of inspection, tests and approvals and other documentation required to be delivered by the Contractor will only be to determine generally that their content complies with the requirements of the Contract Documents and, in the case of certificates of inspections, tests and approvals that the results certified indicate compliance with the Contract Documents. The limitations upon authority and responsibility set forth in this paragraph shall also apply to Owner Representative's CEI, the Engineer's Consultants, and assistants. 10. CHANGES IN THE WORK Without invalidating the Agreement and without notice to any surety, the Owner may, at any time or from time to time, order additions, deletions or revisions in the Work. Such additions, deletions or revisions will be authorized by a Written Amendment, a Change Order, or a Work Change Directive. Upon receipt of any such document, Contractor shall promptly proceed with the Work involved which will be performed under the applicable conditions of the Contract Documents (except as may otherwise be specifically provided). If the Owner and Contractor are unable to agree as to the extent, if any, of an adjustment in the Contract Price or an adjustment of the Contract Time that should be allowed as a result of a Work Change Directive, a claim may be made therefore as provided in these General Conditions. SECTION III Page 28 of 50 Updated 6/3/2016 • SECTION III — General Conditions Contractor shall not be entitled to an increase in the Contract Price or an extension of the Contract Time with respect to any Work performed that is not required by the Contract Documents as amended, modified and supplemented as provided in these General Conditions except in the case of an emergency as provided or in the case of uncovering work as provided in article for Uncovering Work. The Owner and Contractor shall execute appropriate Change Orders or Written Amendments recommended by Owner's Representative covering: • changes in the work which are (i) ordered by the Owner (ii) required because of acceptance of defective work under the article for Acceptance of Defective Work or correcting defective Work under the article for Owner May Correct Defective Work or (iii) agreed to by the parties; • changes in the Contract Price or Contract Time which are agreed to by the parties; and • changes in the Contract Price or Contract Time which embody the substance of any written decision rendered by Owner's Representative pursuant to the article for Decisions on Disputes; • provided that, in lieu of executing any such Change Order, an appeal may be taken from any such decision in accordance with the provisions of the Contract Documents and applicable Laws and Regulations, but during any such appeal, Contractor shall carry on the Work and adhere to the progress schedule as provided in the article for Continuing the Work. If notice of any change affecting the general scope of the work or the provisions of the Contract Documents (including, but not limited to, Contract Price or Contract Time) is required by the provisions of any Bond to be given to a surety, the giving of any such notice will be Contractor's responsibility, and the amount of each applicable Bond will be adjusted accordingly. • 11. CHANGES IN THE CONTRACT PRICE • 11.1. CHANGES IN THE CONTRACT PRICE The Contract Price constitutes the total compensation (subject to authorized adjustments) payable to Contractor for performing the Work. All duties, responsibilities and obligations assigned to or undertaken by Contractor shall be at Contractor's expense without change in the Contract Price. The Contract Price may only be adjusted by a Change Order or by a Written Amendment. Any claim for an adjustment in the Contract Price shall be based on a written notice of claim stating the general nature of the claim, to be delivered by the party making the claim to the other party and to Owner's Representative or promptly (but in no event later than thirty days) after the start of the occurrence or event giving rise to the claim. Notice of the amount of the claim with supporting data shall be delivered within sixty (60) days after the start of such occurrence or event, unless Owner's Representative allows additional time for claimant to submit additional or more accurate data in support of the claim, and shall be accompanied by claimant's written statement that the claimed adjustment covers all known amounts to which the claimant is entitled as a result of said occurrence or event. No claim for an adjustment in the Contract Price will be valid if not submitted in accordance with this paragraph. The value of any Work covered by a Change Order or of any claim for an adjustment in the Contract Price will be determined as follows: (i) where the Work involved is covered by unit prices contained in the Contract Documents, by application of such unit prices to the quantities of the items involved (ii) where the Work involved is not covered by unit prices contained in the Contract Documents, by SECTION III Page 29 of 50 Updated 6/3/2016 • • • SECTION III — General Conditions a mutually agreed lump sum (which may include an allowance for overhead and profit), (iii) where the Work is not covered by unit prices contained in the Contract Documents and agreement is reached to establish unit prices for the Work. Where the work involved is not covered by unit prices contained in the Contract Documents and where the Owner's Representative, the Owner, the Engineer, the Engineer's Consultant, and Contractor cannot mutually agree on a lump sum price, the City of Clearwater shall pay for directed changes in the Work, on "COST REIMBURSEMENT" basis. The Contractor shall apply for compensation, detailing Contractors forces, materials, equipment, subcontractors, and other items of direct costs required for the directed work. The application for Cost Reimbursement shall be limited to the following items: 1. Labor, including foremen, for those hours associated with the direct work (actual payroll cost, including wages, fringe benefits, labor insurance and labor taxes established by law). Expressly excluded from this item are all costs associated with negotiating the subject change. 2. Materials associated with the change, including sales tax. The costs of materials shall be substantiated through vendors' invoices. 3. Rental or equivalent rental costs of equipment, including necessary transportation costs if specifically used for the Work. The rental rates shall not exceed the current rental rates prevailing in the locality or as defined in the rental Rate Blue Book for Construction Equipment (a.k.a. DataQuest Blue Book). The rental rate is defined as the full - unadjusted base rental rate for the appropriate item of construction equipment and shall cover the costs of all fuel, supplies, repairs, insurance, and other costs associated with supplying the equipment for work ordered. Contractor -owned equipment will be paid for the duration of time required to complete the work. Utilize lowest cost combination of hourly, daily, weekly, or monthly rates. Do not exceed estimated operating costs given in Blue Book. Operating costs will not be allowed for equipment on stand -by. 4. Additional costs for Bonds, Insurance if required by the City of Clearwater. The following fixed fees shall be added to the costs of the directed work performed by the Contractor or Subcontractor. A. A fixed fee of fifteen percent (15 %) shall be added to the costs of Item 1 above. If work is performed by a subcontractor, the Contractor's fee shall not exceed five percent (5 %), and the subcontractor's fee shall not exceed ten percent (10 %). B. A fixed fee of ten percent (10 %) shall be added to the costs of Item 2 above. C. No markup shall be added to the costs of Items 3 and 4. The fixed fees shall be considered the full compensation for all cost of general supervision, overhead, profit, and other general expense. 11.2. ALLOWANCES AND FINAL CONTRACT PRICE ADJUSTMENT It is understood that Contractor has included in the Contract Price all allowances so named in the Contract Documents and shall cause the Work so covered to be furnished and performed for such sums as may be acceptable to Owner and Engineer. Contractor agrees that: (i) the allowances SECTION III Page 30 of 50 Updated 6/3/2016 • • SECTION III — General Conditions include the cost to Contractor (less any applicable trade discounts) of materials and equipment required by the allowances to be delivered at the Site, and all applicable taxes; and (ii) Contractor's costs for unloading and handling on the site, labor, installation costs, overhead, profit and other expenses contemplated for the allowances have been included in the Contract Price and not in the allowances and no demand for additional payment on account of any of the foregoing will be valid. Prior to final payment, an appropriate Change Order will be issued as recommended by Owner's Representative to reflect actual amounts due Contractor on account of Work covered by allowances and all the Work actually performed by the Contractor, and the Contract Price shall be correspondingly adjusted. 11.3. UNIT PRICE WORK Where the Contract Documents provide that all or part of the Work is to be Unit Price Work, initially the Contract Price will be deemed to include for all Unit Price Work an amount equal to the sum of the established unit price for each separately identified item of unit price work times the estimated quantity of each item as indicated in the Agreement. The estimated quantities of items of Unit Price Work are not guaranteed and are solely for the purpose of comparison of Bids and determining an initial Contract Price. Determinations of the actual quantities and classifications of Unit Price Work performed by Contractor will be made by Owner's Representative. Each unit price will be deemed to include an amount considered by Contractor to be adequate to cover Contractor's overhead and profit for each separately identified item. The Owner or Contractor may make a claim for an adjustment in the Contract Price if: (i) the quantity of any item of Unit Price Work performed by Contractor differs materially and significantly from the estimated quantity of such item indicated in the Contract Documents; and (ii) there is no corresponding adjustment with respect to any other item of Work; and (iii) if Contractor believes that Contractor is entitled to an increase in Contract Price as a result of having incurred additional expense or the Owner believes that the Owner is entitled to a decrease in Contract Price and the parties are unable to agree as to the amount of any such increase or decrease. On unit price contracts, Owner endeavors to provide adequate unit quantities to satisfactorily complete the construction of the project. It is expected that in the normal course of project construction and completion that not all unit quantities will be used in their entirety and that a finalizing change order which adjusts contract unit quantities to those unit quantities actually used in the construction of the project will result in a net decrease from the original Contract Price. Such reasonable deduction of final Contract Price should be anticipated by the Contractor in his original bid. 12. CHANGES IN THE CONTRACT TIME The Contract Time (or Milestones) may only be changed by a Change Order or a Written Amendment. Any claim for an adjustment of the Contract Time (or Milestones) shall be based on written notice delivered by the party making the claim to the other party and to Owner's Representative promptly, but in no event later than thirty (30) days, after the occurrence of the event giving rise to the claim and stating the general nature of the claim. Notice of the extent of the claim with supporting data shall be delivered within sixty (60) days after such occurrence, unless Owner's Representative allows an additional period of time to ascertain more accurate data in support of the claim, and shall be accompanied by the claimant's written statement that the adjustment claimed is the entire adjustment to which the claimant has reason to believe it is entitled as a result of the occurrence of said event. All claims for adjustment in the Contract SECTION III Page 31 of 50 Updated 6/3/2016 • SECTION III — General Conditions Time (or Milestones) shall be determined by Owner's Representative. No claim for an adjustment in the Contract Time (or Milestones) will be valid if not submitted in accordance with the requirements of this paragraph. All time limits stated in the Contract Documents are of the essence of the Agreement. Where Contractor is prevented from completing any part of the work within the Contract Time (or Milestones) due to delay beyond the control of Contractor, the Contract Time (or Milestones) may be extended in an amount equal to the time lost due to such delay if a claim is made therefore as provided in the article for Changes in the Work. Delays beyond the control of Contractor shall include, but not be limited to, acts by the Owner, acts of utility owners or other contractors performing other work as contemplated by the article for Other Work, fires, floods, epidemics, abnormal weather conditions or acts of God. Delays attributable to and within the control of a Subcontractor or Supplier shall be deemed to be delays within the control of Contractor. Where Contractor is prevented from completing any part of the Work within the Contract Times (or Milestones) due to delay beyond the control of both the Owner and Contractor, an extension of the Contract Time (or Milestones) in an amount equal to the time lost due to such delay shall be Contractor's sole and exclusive remedy for such delay. In no event shall the Owner be liable to Contractor, any Subcontractor, any Supplier, any other person, or to any surety for or employee or agent of any of them, for damages arising out of or resulting from (i) delays caused by or within the control of Contractor, or (ii) delays beyond the control of both parties including but not limited to fires, floods, epidemics, abnormal weather conditions, acts of God or acts by utility owners or other contractors performing other work as contemplated by paragraph for Other Work. • 13. TESTS AND INSPECTIONS, CORRECTION, REMOVAL OR ACCEPTANCE OF DEFECTIVE WORK • 13.1. TESTS AND INSPECTION Contractor shall give Owner's Representative and Engineer timely notice of readiness of the Work for all required inspections, tests or approvals, and shall cooperate with inspection and testing personnel to facilitate required inspections or tests. Contractor shall employ and pay for the services of an independent testing laboratory to perform all inspections, tests, or approvals required by the Contract Documents. The costs for these inspections, tests or approvals shall be borne by the Contractor except as otherwise provided in the Contract Documents. If Laws or Regulations of any public body having jurisdiction require any Work (or part thereof) specifically to be inspected, tested or approved by an employee or other representative of such public body including all Owner Building Departments and Owner Utility Departments, Contractor shall assume full responsibility for arranging and obtaining such inspections, tests or approvals, pay all costs in connection therewith, and furnish Owner's Representative the required certificates of inspection or approval. Unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents, Owner permit and impact fees will be waived. Contractor shall also be responsible for arranging and obtaining and shall pay all costs in connection with any inspections, tests or approvals required for Owner's and Engineer's acceptance of materials or equipment to be incorporated in the Work, SECTION III Page 32 of 50 Updated 6/3/2016 • • SECTION III — General Conditions or of materials, mix designs, or equipment submitted for approval prior to Contractor's purchase thereof for incorporation of the Work. If any Work (or the work of others) that is to be inspected tested or approved is covered by Contractor without written concurrence of Owner's Representative, it must, if requested by Owner's Representative, be uncovered for observation. Uncovering Work as provided in this paragraph shall be at Contractor's expense unless Contractor has given Owner's Representative and Engineer timely notice of Contractor's intention to cover the same and Owner's Representative has not acted with reasonable promptness in response to such notice. 13.2. UNCOVERING THE WORK If any Work is covered contrary to the written request of Owner's Representative, it must, if requested by Owner's Representative, be uncovered for Owner Representative's observation and replaced at Contractor's expense. If Owner's Representative considers it necessary or advisable that covered Work be observed by Owner's Representative or inspected or tested by others, Contractor, at Owner Representative's request, shall uncover, expose or otherwise make available for observation, inspection or testing as Engineer or Owner's Representative may require, that portion of the Work in question, furnishing all necessary labor, material and equipment. If it is found that such Work is defective, Contractor shall pay all claims, costs, losses and damages caused by, arising out of or resulting from such uncovering, exposure, observation, inspection and testing and of satisfactory replacement or reconstruction (including but not limited to all costs of repair or replacement of work of others); and the Owner shall be entitled to an appropriate decrease in the Contract Price for the costs of the investigation, and, if the parties are unable to agree as to the amount thereof, may make a claim therefore as provided in the article for Change in Contract Price. If, however, such Work is not found to be defective, Contractor shall be allowed an increase in the Contract Price or an extension of the Contract Time (or Milestones), or both, directly attributable to such uncovering, exposure, observation, inspection, testing, replacement and reconstruction; and, if the parties are unable to agree as to the amount or extent thereof, Contractor may make a claim therefore as provided the article for Change in Contract Price and Change of Contract Time. 13.3. OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE MAY STOP THE WORK If the Work is defective, or Contractor fails to supply sufficient skilled workers or suitable materials or equipment, or fails to furnish or perform the Work in such a way that the completed Work will conform to the Contract Documents, Engineer or Owner's Representative may order Contractor to stop the Work, or any portion thereof, until the cause for such order has been eliminated; however, this right of Owner's Representative to stop the Work shall not give rise to any duty on the part of Owner's Representative or Owner to exercise this right for the benefit of Contractor or any surety or other party. If the Owner's Representative stops Work under this paragraph, Contractor shall be entitled to no extension of Contract Time or increase in Contract Price. 13.4. CORRECTION OR REMOVAL OF DEFECTIVE WORK If required by Engineer or Owner's Representative, Contractor shall promptly, as directed, either correct all defective Work, whether or not fabricated, installed or completed, or, if the Work has been rejected by Engineer or Owner's Representative, remove it from the site and replace it with Work that is not defective. Contractor shall pay all claims, costs, losses and damages caused by • SECTION III Page 33 of 50 Updated 6/3/2016 SECTION III — General Conditions or resulting from such correction or removal (including but not limited to all costs of repair or replacement of work of others). • 13.5. WARRANTY /CORRECTION PERIOD • If within one year after the date of Substantial Completion or such longer period of time as may be prescribed by Laws or Regulations or by the terms of any applicable special guarantee required by the Contract Documents or by any specific provision of the Contract Documents, any Work is found to be defective, Contractor shall promptly, without cost to the Owner and in accordance with the Owner's written instructions; (i) correct such defective Work, or, if it has been rejected by the Owner, remove it from the site and replace it with Work that is not defective and (ii) satisfactorily correct or remove and replace any damage to other Work or the work of others resulting therefrom. If Contractor does not promptly comply with the terms of such instructions, or in an emergency where delay would cause serious risk of loss or damage, the Owner may have the defective Work corrected or the rejected. Work removed and replaced, and all claims, costs, losses and damages caused by or resulting from such removal and replacement (including but not limited to all costs of repair or replacement of work of others) will be paid by Contractor. In special circumstances where a particular item of equipment is placed in continuous service before Final Completion of all the Work, the correction period for that item may start to run from an earlier date if specifically and expressly so provided in the Specifications or by Written Amendment. Where defective Work (and damage to other Work resulting therefrom) has been corrected, removed or replaced under this paragraph the correction period hereunder with respect to such Work will be extended for an additional period of one year after such correction or removal and replacement has been satisfactorily completed. 13.6. ACCEPTANCE OF DEFECTIVE WORK If, instead of requiring correction or removal and replacement of defective Work, the Owner prefers to accept it, the Owner may do so. Contractor shall pay all claims, costs, losses and damages attributable to the Owner's evaluation of and determination to accept such defective Work such costs to be approved by Owner's Representative as to reasonableness. If any such acceptance occurs prior to Owner Representative's recommendation of final payment, a Change Order will be issued incorporating the necessary revisions in the Contract Documents with respect to the Work; and the Owner shall be entitled to an appropriate decrease in the Contract Price, and, if the parties are unable to agree as to the amount thereof, the Owner may make a claim therefore as provided in article for Change of Contract Price. If the acceptance occurs after the Owner Representative's recommendation for final payment an appropriate amount will be paid by Contractor to the Owner. 13.7. OWNER MAY CORRECT DEFECTIVE WORK If Contractor fails within a reasonable time after written notice from Owner's Representative to correct defective Work or to remove and replace rejected Work as required by Owner's Representative in accordance with the article for Correction and Removal of Defective Work or if Contractor fails to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents, or if • SECTION III Page 34 of 50 Updated 6/3/2016 SECTION III — General Conditions Contractor fails to comply with any other provision of the Contract Documents, the Owner may, after seven days' written notice to Contractor, correct and remedy any such deficiency. In exercising the rights and remedies under this paragraph the Owner shall proceed expeditiously. In connection with such corrective and remedial action, the Owner may exclude Contractor from all or part of the site, take possession of all or part of the Work, and suspend Contractor's services related thereto, and incorporate in the Work all materials and equipment stored at the site or for which the Owner has paid Contractor but which are stored elsewhere. Contractor shall allow Owner, Owner's Representatives, Agents and employees, the Owner's other contractors, and Owner's Representative, Engineer, and Engineer's Consultants access to the site to enable the Owner to exercise the rights and remedies under this paragraph. All claims, costs, losses and damages incurred or sustained by the Owner in exercising such rights and remedies will be charged against Contractor and a Change Order will be issued incorporating the necessary revisions in the Contract Documents with respect to the Work; and the Owner shall be entitled to an appropriate decrease in the Contract Price, and, if the parties are unable to agree as to the amount thereof, the Owner may make a claim therefore as provided in the article for Change of Contract Price. Such claims, costs, losses and damages will include but not be limited to all costs of repair or replacement of work of others destroyed or damaged by correction, removal or replacement of Contractor's defective Work. Contractor shall not be allowed an extension of the Contract Time (or Milestones) because of any delay in the performance of the Work attributable to the exercise by the Owner of the Owner's rights and remedies hereunder. 14. PAYMENTS TO CONTRACTOR AND COMPLETION Requests for payment shall be processed in accordance with F.S. 218.735 and as described herein. Progress payments on account of Unit Price Work will be based on the number of units completed. • 14.1. APPLICATION FOR PROGRESS PAYMENT Contractor shall submit (not more often than once a month) to Owner's Representative for review an Application for Payment filled out and signed by Contractor covering the Work completed once each month and accompanied by such supporting documentation as is required by the Owner's Representative and the Contract Documents. Unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents, payment will not be made for materials and equipment not incorporated in the Work. Payment will only be made for that portion of the Work, which is fully installed including all materials, labor and equipment. A retainage of not less than five (5 %) of the amount of each Application for Payment for the total of all Work, including as -built survey and Inspector overtime reimbursement, completed to date will be held until final completion and acceptance of the Work covered in the Contract Documents. No progress payment shall be construed to be acceptance of any portion of the Work under contract. The Contractor shall review with the Engineer or the Construction Inspector all quantities and work for which payment is being applied for and reach agreement prior to submittal of an Official Pay Request. The Engineer or the Construction Inspector will verify that the on -site marked up as -built drawings are up to date with the work and are in compliance with the Contract Documents. In addition to all other payment provisions set out in this contract, the Owner's Representative may require the Contractor to produce for Owner, within fifteen (15) days of the approval of any progress payment, evidence and /or payment affidavit that all subcontractors and suppliers have IIISECTION III Page 35 of 50 Updated 6/3/2016 • • • SECTION III — General Conditions been paid any sum or sums then due. A failure on the part of the contractor to provide the report as required herein shall result in further progress or partial payments being withheld until the report is provided. 14.2. CONTRACTOR'S WARRANTY OF TITLE Contractor warrants and guarantees that title to all Work, materials and equipment covered by any Application for Payment, whether incorporated in the Project or not, will pass to the Owner no later than the time of payment, free and clear of liens. No materials or supplies for the Work shall be purchased by Contractor or Subcontractor subject to any chattel mortgage or under a conditional sale contact or other agreement by which an interest is retained by the seller. Contractor warrants that he has good title to all materials and supplies used by him in the Work, free from all liens, claims or encumbrances. Contractor shall indemnify and save the Owner harmless from all claims growing out of the lawful demands of Subcontractors, laborers, workmen, mechanics, materialmen, and furnisher's of machinery and parts thereof, equipment, power tools, and all supplies incurred in the furtherance of the performance of this Contract. Contractor shall at the Owner's request, furnish satisfactory evidence that all obligations of the nature hereinabove designated have been paid, discharged, or waived. If Contractor fails to do so, then the Owner may, after having served written notice on said Contractor either pay unpaid bills, of which the Owner has written notice, or withhold from the Contractor's unpaid compensation a sum of money deemed reasonably sufficient to pay any and all such lawful claims until satisfactory evidence is furnished that all liabilities have been fully discharged, whereupon payment to Contractor shall be resumed in accordance with the terms of this Contract, but in no event shall the provisions of this sentence be construed to impose any obligations upon the Owner to the Contractor or the Surety. In paying any unpaid bills of the Contractor, the Owner shall be deemed the agent of Contractor and any payment so made by the Owner shall be considered as payment made under the Contract by the Owner to Contractor, and the Owner shall not be liable to Contractor for any such payment made in good faith. 14.3. REVIEW OF APPLICATIONS FOR PROGRESS PAYMENTS The Owner's Representative will within twenty (20) business days after receipt authorize and process payment by the Owner a properly submitted and documented Application for payment, unless the application requires review by an Agent. If the Application for payment requires review and approval by an Agent, properly submitted and documented Applications for payment will be paid by the Owner within twenty -five (25) business days. If an Application for payment is rejected, notice shall be given within twenty (20) business days of receipt indicating the reasons for refusing payment. The reasons for rejecting an Application will be submitted in writing, specifying deficiencies and identifying actions that would make the Application proper. In the latter case, Contractor may make the necessary corrections and resubmit the Application. The Owner's Representative or Agent may refuse to recommend the whole or any part of any payment to Owner. Owner's Representative or Agent may also refuse to recommend any such payment, or, because of subsequently discovered evidence or the results of subsequent inspections or test, nullify any such payment previously recommended, to such extent as may be necessary in Owner Representative's or Agent's opinion to protect the Owner from loss because: (i) the Work is defective, or completed Work has been damaged requiring correction or replacement, (ii) the Contract Price has been reduced by amendment or Change Order, (iii) the Owner has been required to correct defective Work or complete Work, or (iv) Owner's SECTION III Page 36 of 50 Updated 6/3/2016 • SECTION III — General Conditions Representative or Agent has actual knowledge of the occurrence of any of the events enumerated in the article on Suspension of Work and Termination. The Owner may refuse to make payment of the full amount recommended by the Owner's Representative or Agent because: (i) claims have been made against the Owner on account of Contractor's performance or furnishing of the Work, (ii) Liens have been filed in connection with the Work, except where Contractor has delivered a specific Bond satisfactory to the Owner to secure the satisfaction and discharge of such Liens, (iii) there are other items entitling the Owner to a set -off against the amount recommended, or (iv) the Owner has actual knowledge of any of the events described in this paragraph. The Owner shall give Contractor notice of refusal to pay in accordance with the time constraints of this section with a copy to the Owner's Representative or Agent, stating the reasons for such actions, and Owner shall promptly pay Contractor the amount so withheld, or any adjustment thereto agreed to by the Owner and Contractor, when Contractor corrects to the Owner's satisfaction the reasons for such action. 14.4. PARTIAL UTILIZATION Use by the Owner at the Owner's option of any substantially completed part of the Work which (i) has specifically been identified in the Contract Documents, or (ii) Owner, Engineer, Owner's Representative, and Contractor agree constitutes a separately functioning and usable part of the Work that can be used by the Owner for its intended purpose without significant interference with Contractor's performance of the remainder of the Work, may be accomplished prior to Final Completion of all the Work subject to the following: The Owner at any time may request Contractor in writing to permit the Owner to use any such part of the Work which the Owner believes to be ready for its intended use and substantially complete. If Contractor agrees that such part of the Work is substantially complete, Contractor will certify to Owner, Owner's Representative, and Engineer that such part of the Work is substantially complete and request Owner's Representative to issue a certificate of Substantial Completion for that part of the Work. Contractor at any time may notify Owner, Owner's Representative, and Engineer in writing that Contractor considers any such part of the Work ready for its intended use and substantially complete and request Owner's Representative to issue a certificate of Substantial Completion for that part of the Work. Within a reasonable time after either such request, Owner, Contractor, Owner's Representative, and Engineer shall make an inspection of that part of the Work to determine its status of completion. If Engineer does not consider that part of the Work to be substantially complete, Engineer will notify Owner, Owner's Representative, and Contractor in writing giving the reasons therefore. If Engineer considers that part of the Work to be substantially complete, the provisions of the articles for Substantial Completion and Partial Utilization will apply with respect to certification of Substantial Completion of that part of the Work and the division of responsibility in respect thereof and access thereto. 14.5. FINAL INSPECTION Upon written notice from Contractor that the entire Work or an agreed portion thereof is complete, Owner's Representative will make a final inspection with Engineer, Owner and Contractor and will within thirty (30) days notify Contractor in writing of particulars in which this inspection reveals that the Work is incomplete or defective. The Owner's Representative will produce a final punch list, deliver it to the Contractor within five (5) days of completion and assign a date for this work to be completed not less than thirty (30) days from delivery of the list. SECTION III Page 37 of 50 Updated 6/3/2016 • SECTION III — General Conditions Failure to include any corrective work or pending items does not alter the responsibility of the contractor to complete all the construction services purchased pursuant to the contract. Contractor shall immediately take such measures as are necessary to complete such Work or remedy such deficiencies. 14.6. FINAL APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT After Contractor has completed all such corrections to the satisfaction of Owner's Representative and has delivered in accordance with the Contract Documents all maintenance and operating instructions, As- built/Record Drawings, schedules, guarantees, Bonds, certificates or other evidence of insurance required by the paragraph for Bonds and Insurance, certificates of inspection, Inspector overtime reimbursement as required in the Contract Documents and other documents, Contractor may make application for final payment following the procedure for progress payments. The final Application for Payment shall be accompanied (except as previously delivered) by: (i) all documentation called for in the Contract Documents, including but not limited to the evidence of insurance required by paragraph for Bonds and Insurance, and (ii) executed consent of the surety to final payment using the form contained in Section V of the Contract Documents. Prior to application for final payment, Contractor shall clean and remove from the premises all surplus and discarded materials, rubbish, and temporary structures, and shall restore in an acceptable manner all property, both public and private, which has been damaged during the prosecution of the Work, and shall leave the Work in a neat and presentable condition. 14.7. FINAL PAYMENT AND ACCEPTANCE If through no fault of Contractor, final completion of the Work is significantly delayed and if Owner's Representative so confirms, the Owner shall, upon receipt of Contractor's final Application for payment and recommendation of Owner's Representative, and without terminating the Agreement, make payment of the balance due for that portion of the Work fully completed and accepted. If the remaining balance to be held by the Owner for Work not fully completed or corrected is less than the retainage stipulated in the Agreement, and if Bonds have been furnished as required in paragraph for Bonds and Insurance, the written consent of the surety to the payment of the balance due for that portion of the Work fully completed and accepted shall be submitted by Contractor to Owner's Representative with the Application for such payment. Such payment shall be made under the terms and conditions governing final payment, except that such payment shall not constitute a waiver of claims. If on the basis of Owner Representative's observation of the Work during construction and final inspection, and Owner Representative's review of the final Application for Payment and accompanying documentation, all as required by the Contract Documents, Owner's Representative is satisfied that the Work has been completed and Contractor's other obligations under the Contract Documents have been fulfilled, Owner's Representative will indicate in writing his recommendation of payment and present the Application to Owner for payment. Thereupon, Owner's Representative will give written notice to Owner and Contractor that the Work is acceptable subject to the provisions of this article. Otherwise, Owner's Representative will return the Application to Contractor, indicating in writing the reasons for refusing to recommend final payment, in which case Contractor shall make the necessary corrections and resubmit the Application. If the Application and accompanying documentation are appropriate as SECTION III Page 38 of 50 Updated 6/3/2016 SECTION III — General Conditions to form and substance, the Owner shall, within twenty (20) days after receipt thereof pay contractor the amount recommended by Owner's Representative. • 14.8. WAIVER OF CLAIMS • • The making and acceptance of final payment will constitute: a waiver of all claims by the Owner against Contractor, except claims arising from unsettled Liens, from defective Work appearing after final inspection, from failure to comply with the Contract Documents or the terms of any special guarantees specified therein, or from Contractor's continuing obligations under the Contract Documents; and a waiver of all claims by Contractor against the Owner other than those previously made in writing and still unsettled. 15. SUSPENSION OF WORK AND TERMINATION 15.1. OWNER MAY SUSPEND THE WORK At any time and without cause, Owner's Representative may suspend the Work or any portion thereof for a period of not more than ninety (90) days by notice in writing to Contractor, which will fix the date on which Work will be resumed. Contractor shall resume the Work on the date so fixed. Contractor shall be allowed an adjustment in the Contract Price or an extension of the Contract Times, or both, directly attributable to any such suspension if Contractor makes an approved claim therefore as provided in the articles for Change of Contract Price and Change of Contract Time. 15.2. OWNER MAY TERMINATE Upon the occurrence of any one or more of the following events; if Contractor persistently fails to perform the work in accordance with the Contract Documents (including, but not limited to, failure to supply sufficient skilled workers or suitable materials or equipment or failure to adhere to the progress schedule as adjusted from time to time); if Contractor disregards Laws and Regulations of any public body having jurisdiction; if Contractor disregards the authority of Owner's Representative; if Contractor otherwise violates in any substantial way any provisions of the Contract Documents; or if the Work to be done under this Contract is abandoned, or if this Contract or any part thereof is sublet, without the previous written consent of the Owner, or if the Contract or any claim thereunder is assigned by Contractor otherwise than as herein specified, or at any time Owner's Representative certifies in writing to the Owner that the rate of progress of the Work or any part thereof is unsatisfactory or that the work or any part thereof is unnecessarily or unreasonably delayed. The Owner may, after giving Contractor (and the surety, if any), seven days' written notice and, to the extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, terminate the services of Contractor, exclude Contractor from the site and take possession of the Work and of all Contractor's tools, appliances, construction equipment and machinery at the site and use the same to the full extent they could be used by Contractor (without liability to Contractor for trespass or conversion), incorporate in the Work all materials and equipment stored at the site or for which the Owner has paid Contractor but which are stored elsewhere, and finish the Work as the Owner may deem expedient. In such case Contractor shall not be entitled to receive any further payment until the Work is finished. If the unpaid balance of the Contract Price exceeds all claims, costs, losses and SECTION III Page 39 of 50 Updated 6/3/2016 • • • SECTION III — General Conditions damages sustained by the Owner arising out of or resulting from completing the Work such excess will be paid to Contractor. If such claims, costs, losses and damages exceed such unpaid balance, Contractor shall pay the difference to the Owner. Such claims, costs, losses and damages incurred by the Owner will be reviewed by Owner's Representative as to their reasonableness and when so approved by Owner's Representative incorporated in a Change Order, provided that when exercising any rights or remedies under this paragraph the Owner shall not be required to obtain the lowest price for the Work performed. Where Contractor's services have been so terminated by the Owner, the termination will not affect any rights or remedies of the Owner against Contractor then existing or which may thereafter accrue. Any retention or payment of moneys due Contractor by the Owner will not release Contractor from liability. Upon seven (7) days' written notice to Contractor and Owner's Representative, the Owner may, without cause and without prejudice to any other right or remedy of the Owner, elect to terminate the Agreement. In such case, Contractor shall be paid (without duplication of any items): for completed and acceptable Work executed in accordance with the Contract Documents prior to the effective date of termination, including fair and reasonable sums for overhead and profit on such Work; for expenses sustained prior to the effective date of termination in performing services and furnishing labor, materials or equipment as required by the Contract Documents in connection with uncompleted Work, plus fair and reasonable sums for overhead and profit on such expenses; for all claims, costs, losses and damages incurred in settlement of terminated contracts with Subcontractors, Suppliers and others; and for reasonable expenses directly attributable to termination. Contractor shall not be paid on account of loss of anticipated profits or revenue or other economic loss arising out of or resulting from such termination. 15.3. CONTRACTOR MAY STOP WORK OR TERMINATE If, through no act or fault of Contractor, the Work is suspended for a period of more than ninety (90) days by the Owner or under an order of court or other public authority, or the Owner's Representative fails to act on any Application for Payment within thirty (30) days after it is submitted or the Owner fails for thirty (30) days to pay Contractor any sum finally determined to be due, then Contractor may, upon seven (7) days' written notice to the Owner and Owner's Representative, and provided the Owner or Owner's Representative does not remedy such suspension or failure within that time, terminate the Agreement and recover from the Owner payment on the same terms as provided in the article for the Owner May Terminate. However, if the Work is suspended under an order of court through no fault of Owner, the Contractor shall not be entitled to payment except as the Court may direct. In lieu of terminating the Agreement and without prejudice to any other right or remedy, if Owner's Representative has failed to act on an Application for Payment within thirty (30) days after it is submitted, or the Owner has failed for thirty (30) days to pay Contractor any sum finally determined to be due, Contractor may upon seven (7) days' written notice to the Owner and Owner's Representative stop the Work until payment of all such amounts due Contractor. The provisions of this article are not intended to preclude Contractor from making claim under paragraphs for Change of Contract SECTION III Page 40 of 50 Updated 6/3/2016 • • SECTION III — General Conditions Price or Change of Contract Time or otherwise for expenses or damage directly attributable to Contractor's stopping Work as permitted by this article. 16. DISPUTE RESOLUTION If and to the extent that the Owner and Contractor have agreed on the method and procedure for resolving disputes between them that may arise under this Agreement, such dispute resolution method and procedure will proceed. If no such agreement on the method and procedure for resolving such disputes has been reached, subject to the provisions of the article for Decisions on Disputes, the Owner and Contractor may exercise such rights or remedies as either may otherwise have under the Contract Documents or by Laws or Regulations in respect of any dispute provided, however, that nothing herein shall require a dispute to be submitted to binding arbitration. 17. MISCELLANEOUS 17.1. SUBMITTAL AND DOCUMENT FORMS The form of all submittals, notices, change orders, pay applications, logs, schedules and other documents permitted or required to be used or transmitted under the Contract Documents shall be determined by the Owner's Representative subject to the approval of Owner. 17.2. GIVING NOTICE Whenever any provision of the Contract Documents requires the giving of written notice, notice will be deemed to have been validly given if delivered in person to the individual or to a member of the firm or to an officer of the corporation for whom it is intended, or if delivered or sent by registered or certified mail, postage prepaid, to the last business address known to the giver of the notice. 17.3. NOTICE OF CLAIM Should the Owner or Contractor suffer injury or damage to person or property because of any error, omission or any act of the other party or of any of the other party's officers, employees or agents or others for whose acts the other party is legally liable, claim will be made in writing to the other party within a reasonable time of the first observance of such injury or damage. The provisions of this paragraph shall not be construed as a substitute for or a waiver of the provisions of any applicable statute of limitations or repose. 17.4. PROFESSIONAL FEES AND COURT COSTS INCLUDED Whenever reference is made to "claims, costs, losses and damages," the phrase shall include in each case, but not be limited to, all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys and other professionals and all court or other dispute resolution costs. 17.5. ASSIGNMENT OF CONTRACT The Contractor shall not assign this contract or any part thereof or any rights thereunder without the approval of Owner, nor without the consent of surety unless the surety has waived its rights to notice of assignment. SECTION III Page 41 of 50 Updated 6/3/2016 • • • SECTION III — General Conditions 17.6. RENEWAL OPTION Annual Contracts issued through the Engineering Department may be renewed for up to two (2) years, upon mutual consent of both the Owner and the Contractor /Vendor. All terms, conditions and unit prices shall remain constant unless otherwise specified in the contract specifications or in the Invitation to bid. Renewals shall be made at the sole discretion of the Owner, and must be agreed to in writing by both parties. All renewals are contingent upon the availability of funds, and the satisfactory performance of the Contractor as determined by the Construction Department. 17.7. ROLL -OFF CONTAINERS AND /OR DUMPSTERS All City construction projects shall utilize City of Clearwater Solid Waste roll -off containers and/or dumpsters for their disposal and hauling needs. For availability or pricing contact Mike Pryor at the City of Clearwater, Solid Waste Department, by phone: (727) 562 -4923 or email: Michael.Pryor @myClearwater.com. 18. ORDER AND LOCATION OF THE WORK The City reserves the right to accept and use any portion of the work whenever it is considered to the public interest to do so. The Engineer shall have the power to direct on what line or street the Contractor shall work and order thereof. 19. MATERIAL USED All material incorporated into the final work shall be new material unless otherwise approved by the Engineer. If requested by the Engineer, the Contractor shall furnish purchase receipts of all materials. 20. CONFLICT BETWEEN PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS The various Contract Documents shall be given precedence, in case of conflict, error or discrepancy, as follows: Modifications, Contract Agreement, Addenda, Supplementary General Conditions, General Conditions, Supplementary Technical Specifications and Technical Specifications. In a series of Modifications or Addenda the latest will govern. In the case of an inconsistency between Drawings and Specifications or within either Document not clarified by addendum, the better quality, more stringent or greater quantity of Work shall be provided in accordance with the Engineer /Architect's interpretation. 21. OWNER DIRECT PURCHASE (ODP) 21.1. SALES TAX SAVINGS The Owner reserves the right to purchase certain portions of the materials or equipment for the Project directly in order to save applicable sales tax in compliance with Florida Law since owner is exempt from the payment of sales tax. The contract price includes Florida sales and other applicable taxes for materials, supplies, and equipment which will be a part of the Contractor's Work. Owner - purchasing of construction materials or equipment, if selected, will be administered on a deductive Change Order basis. The contract price shall be reduced by the actual cost of the materials or equipment purchased by owner plus the normally applicable sales SECTION III Page 42 of 50 Updated 6/3/2016 • • • SECTION III — General Conditions tax, even if the actual cost is in excess of the cost for the materials or equipment as -bid by the Contractor. For purposes of calculating engineering fees, contractor fees, architects fees, and any other amounts that are based on the contract amount, however, the original, as -bid contract amount shall be used. Direct purchase shall be considered for single items or materials that exceed $10,000 in value and /or items identified in Section V, Bidders Proposal. The Contractor shall provide the Owner an ODP Summary of all intended suppliers, vendors, equipment and materials for consideration as ODP materials or equipment (refer to ODP Instructions in Contract Appendix). 21.2. TITLE AND OWNER RISK Owner will issue Purchase Orders and provide a copy of Owner's Florida Consumer Certification of Tax Exemption and Certificate of Entitlement directly to the Vendor for ODP materials or equipment. Invoices for ODP materials or equipment shall be issued to the Owner, and a copy sent to the Contractor. Notwithstanding the transfer of ODP materials or equipment by the Owner to the Contractor's possession, the Owner shall retain legal and equitable title to any and all ODP materials or equipment; therefore, the owner assumes the risk of damage or loss at the time of purchase or delivery of items, unless material is damaged as the result of negligence by the Contractor. 21.3. CONTRACTOR'S RECEIPT OF MATERIALS The Contractor shall be fully responsible for all matters relating to the receipt of materials or equipment furnished to the Owner including, but not limited to, verifying correct quantities, verifying documents of orders in a timely manner, coordinating purchases, providing and obtaining all warranties and guarantees required by the Contract Documents, and inspection and acceptance of the goods at the time of delivery. The Owner shall coordinate with Contractor and Vendor delivery schedules, sequence of delivery, loading orientation, and other arrangements normally required by the Contractor for the particular materials or equipment furnished. The Contractor shall provide all services required for the unloading and handling of materials or equipment. The Contractor agrees to indemnify and hold harmless the Owner from any and all claims of whatever nature resulting from non - payment of goods to suppliers arising from the action of the Contractor. As ODP materials or equipment are delivered to the job site, the Contractor shall visually inspect all shipments from the suppliers, and approve the vendor's invoice for items delivered. The Contractor shall assure that each delivery of ODP materials or equipment is accompanied by documentation adequate to identify the Purchase Order against which the purchase is made. This documentation may consist of a delivery ticket and/or an invoice from the supplier conforming to the Purchase Order together with such additional information as the Owner may require. The Contractor will then forward an electronic copy of the invoice and supporting documentation to the Owner for payment within fourteen (14) calendar days of receipt of said goods or materials. Such payment shall be directly from public funds, from Owner to Vendor. The Contractor shall insure that ODP materials or equipment conform to the Specifications and determine prior to acceptance of goods at time of delivery if such materials or equipment are patently defective, and whether such materials or equipment are identical to the materials or equipment ordered and match the description on the bill of lading. If the Contractor discovers defective or non - conformities in ODP materials or equipment upon such visual inspection, the SECTION III Page 43 of 50 Updated 6/3/2016 • SECTION III — General Conditions Contractor shall not utilize such nonconforming or defective materials or equipment in the Contractor's Work and instead shall properly notify the Owner of the defective or nonconforming condition so that repair or replacement of those materials or equipment can occur without undue delay or interruption to the Project. If the Contractor fails to perform such inspection and otherwise incorporates into the Contractor's Work such defective or nonconforming ODP materials or equipment, the condition of which it either knew or should have known by performance of an inspection, Contractor shall be responsible for all damages to the Owner, resulting from Contractor's incorporation of such materials or equipment into the Project, including liquidated damages. 21.4. ODP RECORDS, WARRANTIES AND INDEMNIFICATION The Contractor shall maintain records of all ODP materials or equipment it incorporates into Contractor's Work from the stock of ODP materials or equipment in its possession. The Contractor shall account monthly to the Owner for any ODP materials or equipment delivered into the Contractor's possession, indicating portions of all such materials or equipment which have been incorporated in the Contractor's Work. The Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining and managing all warranties and guarantees for all materials, equipment and products as required by the Contract Documents. All repair, maintenance, or damage- repair calls shall be forwarded to the Contractor for resolution with the appropriate supplier, vendor, or subcontractor. The Owner shall indemnify and hold Contractor harmless from any sales tax (and interest and penalties incurred in connection therewith) in the event there is a final determination that purchases made by Owner, which Owner treats as being exempt from sales tax, are subject to sales tax. "Final determination" shall mean an assessment by the Department of Revenue that is no longer subject to protest, or a determination of a court having jurisdiction over such matters that is final and not subject to appeal. Contractor agrees to promptly notify owner of any audit, assessment, proposed assessment or notice of deficiency issued with regard to the Project and relating to ODP materials or equipment. ODP Purchase Orders must be closed out prior to closing out the contract/Contractor Purchase Order. If material costs needed for project exceed the ODP Purchase Order amount, the ODP Purchase Order will not be increased. Amounts in excess of the ODP Purchase Order will be paid for by the Contractor. 22. RESIDENT NOTIFICATION OF START OF CONSTRUCTION 22.1. GENERAL The Contractor shall notify all residents along the construction route or within a 500 -foot radius, unless stated otherwise in the Contract Documents, with a printed door hanger notice indicating the following information about the proposed construction work and the Contractor performing the work: City seal or logo; the scheduled date for the start of construction; the type of construction; general sequence and scheduling of construction events; possibility of water service disruption and/or colored water due to construction efforts; Contractor's name, the Superintendent's name, Contractor address and telephone number; Contractor's company logo (optional); requirement for residents to remove landscaping and/or other private appurtenances which are in conflict with the proposed construction; and other language as appropriate to the scope of Contract work. Sample door hanger including proposed language shall be approved by SECTION III Page 44 of 50 Updated 6/3/2016 • • • SECTION III — General Conditions the City prior to the start of construction. Notification shall be printed on brightly colored and durable card stock and shall be a minimum of 4 -t /4 by 11 inches in size. Notification (door hanger) shall be posted to residences and businesses directly affected by the Contractor's activities no later than seven (7) days prior to the start of construction activity. Directly affected by the Contractor's activities shall mean all Contractor operations including staging areas, equipment and material storage, principal access routes across private property, etc. Contractor cannot start without proper seven (7) day notice period to residents. Contractor is required to maintain sufficient staff to answer citizen inquiries during normal business hours and to maintain appropriate message recording equipment to receive citizen inquires after business hours. Resident notification by the Contractor is a non - specific pay item to be included in the bid items provided in the contract proposal. SECTION III Page 45 of 50 Updated 6/3/2016 • • • SECTION III — General Conditions 22.2. EXAMPLE CITY LOGO of CITY OF CLEARWATER NOTICE OF CONSTRUCTION TODAY'S DATE: / / PLEASE EXCUSE US FOR ANY INCONVENIENCE We are the construction contractor performing the (state project name) for the City of Clearwater in your area. The work will be performed in the public right -of -way adjacent to your property. This notice is placed a minimum of seven (7) days in advance of construction to notify property owners of the pending start of construction. (Brief description of the construction process to be expected by the property owners) The construction process may necessitate the removal of certain items from the right -of -way. Typical items such as sprinklers, grass, and postal approved mailboxes will be replaced by the contractor within a reasonably short period of time. The replacement of driveways and sidewalks will be made using standard asphalt or concrete materials. The property owner is responsible for the expense and coordination to replace driveways and sidewalks which have customized colors, textures and/or materials. Small trees, shrubs, landscaping materials, unauthorized mailboxes or structures within the right -of -way which must be removed due to the construction process will not be replaced. The property owner is responsible to relocate any such items which the property owner wishes to save prior to the start of construction. Vehicles parked on the streets or within the right -of -way may be required to be placed elsewhere. We are available to answer any questions you may have regarding the construction process or any particular item that must be relocated. Please contact our Construction Manager at (727) . We will be more than happy to assist you. Construction is anticipated to begin on: Company Name Company Address Contractor Phone Number 23. PROJECT INFORMATION SIGNS 23.1. SCOPE AND PURPOSE The Owner desires to inform the general public on the Owner's use and expenditure of public funding for general capital improvement and maintenance projects. To help accomplish this purpose, the Contractor is required to prepare and display public project information signs during the full course of the contract period. These signs will be displayed at all location(s) of active work. Payment to Contractor for the preparation, installation and management of project sign(s) shall be included in the cost of the work. The number of and type of signs will be stated in SECTION IV, SCOPE OF WORK. 23.2. TYPE OF PROJECT SIGN, FIXED OR PORTABLE Sign type shall be "fixed" on stationary projects and "portable" on projects which have extended locations or various locations. The particular wording to be used on the signs will be determined SECTION III Page 46 of 50 Updated 6/3/2016 SECTION III — General Conditions after contract award has been approved. Contractor will be provided the wording to be used on sign at the preconstruction conference. • 23.3. FIXED SIGN • • Fixed sign shall be 4 -foot by 6 -foot (4'x6') in size and painted on a sheet of exterior grade plywood of the same size and a minimum thickness of 1/2- inches. Sign shall be attached to a minimum of two (2) 4 -inch by 4 -inch (4 "x4 ") below grade pressure treated (P.T.) wooden posts and braced as necessary for high winds. Posts shall be long enough to provide secure anchoring in the ground. Bottom of sign must be a minimum of 24- inches above the ground. Alternate mounting system or attachment to fencing or other fixed structure can be considered for approval. Sign shall be painted white on both sides with exterior rated paint. 23.4. PORTABLE SIGNS Portable sign shall be a minimum of 24- inches by 30- inches (24 "x30 ") in size and will be attached to a standard sized portable traffic barricade. Sign material shall be aluminum, 0.080 - inches or thicker, background of white reflective sheeting, and shall be silkscreen or vinyl lettering. Portable sign shall be two signs located and attached to each side of the traffic barricade. 23.5. SIGN COLORING Background shall be white. Project Descriptive Name shall be in blue lettering. All other lettering shall be black. Basic lettering on sign shall be in all capital letters, of size proportional to the sign itself. Each sign shall depict the City's logo. The Project Manager /City Representative shall provide the appropriate electronic logo file(s) to the Contractor. 23.6. SIGN PLACEMENT Signs shall be placed where they are readily visible by the general public which pass by the project site. Signs are not to be placed where they may become a hazard or impediment to either pedestrian or vehicular traffic. For construction projects outside of the Owner's right -of -way, the signs will be placed on the project site. For projects constructed inside of the Owner's right -of- way, the signs will be placed in the right -of -way. Portable signs are to be moved to the locations of active work on the project. Multiple portable signs will be necessary where work is ongoing in several locations at the same time. Fixed signs are to be placed at the start of construction and will remain in place until the request for final payment. 23.7. SIGN MAINTENANCE The Contractor is responsible for preparation, installation, movement, maintenance, replacement, removal and disposal of all project signs during the full course of the contract period. The Contractor will place and secure portable signs from dislocation by wind or other actions. Signs are to be cleaned as necessary to maintain legibility and immediately replaced if defaced. SECTION III Page 47 of 50 Updated 6/3/2016 • • • SECTION III — General Conditions 23.8. TYPICAL PROJECT SIGN 6' <PROJECT NAME> < CONTRACT NUMBER> <DEPARTMENT NAME> PROJECT i N CONTRACTOR i COMPLETION DATE- FUNDING- 0 WN ER'S REPRESENTATIVE- - 2' minimum height 24. AWARD OF CONTRACT, WORK SCHEDULE AND GUARANTEE It will be required that the work will commence not later than five (5) calendar days after the Engineer gives written Notice to Proceed (NTP), which notice shall be given as outlined in Article 2 of these General Conditions. It is further required that all work within this contract be completed within the indicated number of consecutive calendar days as determined in Section IV, Scope of Work. Contract Time to commence at start date noted on the Notice to Proceed. If the Contractor fails to complete the work within the stipulated time, the City will retain the amount stated in the Contract, per calendar day, for each day that the contract remains incomplete. The work shall be discontinued on Saturdays, Sundays, and approved Holidays. If it becomes necessary for the Contractor to perform work on Saturdays, Sundays, and approved City of Clearwater Employee Holidays, that in the opinion of the Engineer, will require the presence of Inspectors, the Contractor shall pay SECTION III Page 48 of 50 Updated 6/3/2016 • • • SECTION III — General Conditions the City of Clearwater, Florida, the amount of Four Hundred Eighty Dollars ($480.00) per each eight -hour (8) day for each Inspector given such assignment. The Contractor shall remedy any defects in the work at his own expense and pay for any damage to other work resulting therefrom which appear within a period of one (1) year from the date of final acceptance. 25. SCRUTINIZED COMPANIES AND BUSINESS OPERATIONS WITH CUBA AND SYRIA CERTIFICATION FORM Any company, individual, principal, subsidiary, affiliate, or owner on the Scrutinized Companies with Activities in Sudan List, the Scrutinized Companies with Activities in the Iran Petroleum Energy Sector List, or is engaged in business operations in Cuba or Syria, is ineligible for, and may not bid on, submit a proposal for, or enter into or renew a contract with the City of Clearwater for goods or services for an amount equal to or greater than one million ($1,000,000.00) dollars. Therefore, if applicable, each entity submitting a bid, proposal, or response to a solicitation must certify to the City of Clearwater that it is not on either list or engaged in business operations in Cuba or Syria at the time of submitting a bid, proposal or response, in accordance with section 287.135, Florida Statutes. Business Operations means, for purposes specifically related to Cuba or Syria, engaging in commerce in any form in Cuba or Syria, including, but not limited to, acquiring, developing, maintaining, owning, selling, possessing, leasing, or operating equipment, facilities, personnel, products, services, personal property, real property, military equipment, or any other apparatus of business or commerce. The certification form (the Certification) is attached hereto, and it must be submitted, along with all other relevant contract documents, at the time of submitting a bid, proposal, or response. Failure to provide the Certification may deem the entity's submittal non - responsive. If the City of Clearwater determines that an entity has submitted a false certification form, been placed either on the Scrutinized Companies with Activities in Sudan List or the Scrutinized Companies with Activities in the Iran Petroleum Energy Sector List, (for contracts entered into or renewed on or after July 1, 2011 through June 30, 2012), or submitted a false certification form, has been placed either on the Scrutinized Companies with Activities in Sudan List or the Scrutinized Companies with Activities in the Iran Petroleum Energy Sector List or been engaged in business operations in Cuba or Syria, (for contracts entered into or renewed on or after July 1, 2012) then the contract may be terminated at the option of the City of Clearwater. Other than the submission of a false certification, the option to waive the aforementioned deficiencies mentioned in the previous sentence may be asserted on a case -by -case basis, at the sole discretion of the City of Clearwater, if to the following conditions are found to exist: A. For Scrutinized Companies with Activities in Sudan List or the Scrutinized Companies with Activities in the Iran Petroleum Energy Sector List, (all of the following must occur): 1. The scrutinized business operations were made before July 1, 2011. 2. The scrutinized business operations have not been expanded or renewed after July 1, 2011. 3. The City of Clearwater determines that it is in the best interest of the City to contract with the company or entity. SECTION III Page 49 of 50 Updated 6/3/2016 • • • SECTION III — General Conditions 4. The company or entity has adopted, has publicized and is implementing a formal plan to cease scrutinized business operations and to refrain from engaging in any new scrutinized business operations. B. For Companies Engaged in Business Operations in Cuba or Syria: 1. The business operations were made before July 1, 2012. 2. The business operations have not been expanded or renewed after July 1, 2012. 3. The City of Clearwater determines that it is in the best interest of the City to contract with the company or entity. 4. The company or entity has adopted, has publicized, and is implementing a formal plan to cease business operations and to refrain from engaging in any new business operations in Cuba or Syria. Further, the City may allow a company to bid on, submit a proposal for, or enter into or renew a contract with the City of Clearwater for goods or services for an amount equal to or greater than one million ($1,000,000.00) dollars, if the City makes a public finding that, absent one of the above exemptions, the City would otherwise be unable to obtain goods or services for which the contract is offered. The City retains the right to pursue civil penalties and any other applicable rights and remedies as provided by law for the false submission of the attached certification form. See Section V of the Contract for Certification Form to be executed and submitted with the Bid/Proposal Form. SECTION III Page 50 of 50 Updated 6/3/2016 • Table of Content: SECTION IV TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 100 SERIES: GENERAL 1 101. SCOPE OF WORK 1 102. FIELD ENGINEERING 2 102 -1. LINE AND GRADE PERFORMED BY THE CONTRACTOR 2 102 -2. LINE AND GRADE PERFORMED BY THE CITY 2 103. DEFINITION OF TERMS 2 103 -1. REFERENCE STANDARDS 3 104. STREET CROSSINGS, ETC. 3 105. AUDIO/VIDEO RECORDING OF WORK AREAS 3 105 -1. CONTRACTOR TO PREPARE AUDIO/VIDEO RECORDING 3 105 -2. SCHEDULING OF AUDIO/VIDEO RECORDING 3 105 -3. PROFESSIONAL VIDEOGRAPHERS 3 105 -4. EQUIPMENT 4 105 -5. RECORDED AUDIO INFORMATION 4 105 -6. RECORDED VIDEO INFORMATION 4 105 -7. VIEWER ORIENTATION 4 • 105 -8. LIGHTING 4 105 -9. SPEED OF TRAVEL 5 105 -10. VIDEO LOG /INDEX 5 105 -11. AREA OF COVERAGE 5 105 -12. COSTS OF VIDEO SERVICES 5 106. STREET SIGNS 5 107. WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL 5 107 -1. CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBLE FOR WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL 5 107 -2. WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL PLAN 6 107 -3. ROADWAY CLOSURE GUIDELINES 6 107 -4. APPROVAL OF WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL PLAN 7 107 -5. INSPECTION OF WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL OPERATION 8 107 -6. PAYMENT FOR WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL 8 107 -7. CERTIFICATION OF WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL SUPERVISOR 8 108. OVERHEAD ELECTRIC LINE CLEARANCE 8 108 -1. CLEARANCE OPTIONS 8 108 -2. REQUIRED MINIMUM CLEARANCE DISTANCES 9 109. PROJECT WEB PAGES 9 109 -1. WEB PAGES DESIGN 9 109 -2. WEB ACCESSIBILITY GUIDELINES 9 109 -3. THE SUN AND WAVES LOGO AND ITS USE 10 • SECTION IV i Updated 2/11/2016 SECTION IV - Technical Specifications 109 -4. MAPS AND GRAPHICS 10 • 109 -5. INTERACTIVE FORMS 10 109 -6. POSTING 10 109 -7. WEB PAGES UPDATES 10 200 SERIES: SITEWORK 11 201. EXCAVATION FOR UNDERGROUND WORK 11 202. OBSTRUCTIONS 12 203. DEWATERING 12 203 -1. GENERAL 12 203 -2. PERMIT REQUIREMENTS 12 204. UNSUITABLE MATERIAL REMOVAL 13 204 -1. BASIS OF MEASUREMENT 13 204 -2. BASIS OF PAYMENT 13 205. UTILITY TIE IN LOCATION MARKING 13 206. CLEARING AND GRUBBING 14 206 -1. BASIS OF MEASUREMENT 14 206 -2. BASIS OF PAYMENT 14 207. EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL 14 207 -1. GENERAL 14 207 -2. TRAINING OF PERSONNEL 14 207 -3. STABILIZATION OF DENUDED AREAS 15 207 -4. PROTECTION AND STABILIZATION OF SOIL STOCKPILES 15 0 207 -5. PROTECTION OF EXISTING STORM SEWER SYSTEMS 15 207 -6. SWALES, DITCHES AND CHANNELS 15 207 -7. UNDERGROUND UTILITY CONSTRUCTION 15 207 -8. MAINTENANCE 15 207 -9. COMPLIANCE 16 208. CONSTRUCTION AND REPAIR OF SEAWALLS AND OTHER BEACH EROSION CONTROL STRUCTURES. 16 208 -1. EXISTING SEAWALLS AND REVETMENTS 16 208 -2. TOP OF CAP ELEVATION 16 208 -3. SEAWALLS AND REVETMENTS LOCATED SEAWARD OF THE CCL 16 208 -4. PLACEMENT OF NEW SEAWALL 16 208 -5. POST CONSTRUCTION SURVEY 17 208 -6. RIP -RAP 17 208 -7. RETAINING WALL IN LIEU OF VERTICAL SEAWALL 17 300 SERIES: MATERIALS 18 301. CONCRETE 18 302. EXCAVATION AND FORMS FOR CONCRETE WORK 18 302 -1. EXCAVATION 18 302 -2. FORMS 18 303. REINFORCEMENT 18 • SECTION IV ii Updated 2/11/2016 SECTION IV - Technical Specifications 303 -1. BASIS OF PAYMENT 19 • 304. BACKFILL 19 304 -1. MATERIALS AND GENERAL 19 304 -2. TESTING AND INSPECTION 19 305. RIPRAP 20 305 -1. BASIS OF MEASUREMENT 20 305 -2. BASIS OF PAYMENT 21 400 SERIES: SANITARY SEWER 22 401. SANITARY MANHOLES 22 401 -1. BUILT UP TYPE 22 401 -2. PRECAST TYPE 22 401 -3. DROP MANHOLES 23 401 -4. FRAMES AND COVERS 23 401 -5. MANHOLE COATINGS 23 401 -6. CONNECTIONS TO MANHOLES 23 402. RAISING OR LOWERING OF SANITARY SEWER STRUCTURES 23 402 -1. BASIS OF PAYMENT 23 403. SANITARY SEWERS AND FORCE MAINS 24 403 -1. MATERIALS 24 403 -2. INSTALLATION 24 403 -3. TESTING 25 403 -4. BASIS OF PAYMENT 26 404. HDPE DEFORMED - REFORMED PIPE LINING 26 404 -1. INTENT 26 404 -2. PRODUCT AND CONTRACTOR/INSTALLER ACCEPTABILITY 26 404 -3. MATERIALS 26 404 -4. CLEANING /SURFACE PREPARATION 27 404 -5. TELEVISION INSPECTION 28 404 -6. LINER INSTALLATION 29 404 -7. LATERAL RECONNECTION 29 404 -8. TIME OF CONSTRUCTION 29 404 -9. PAYMENT 29 405. SANITARY MANHOLE LINER RESTORATION 30 405 -1. SCOPE AND INTENT 30 405 -2. PAYMENT 30 405 -3. FIBERGLASS LINER PRODUCTS 30 405 -4. STRONG SEAL MS -2 LINER PRODUCT SYSTEM 31 405 -5. INFILTRATION CONTROL 32 405 -6. GROUTING MIX 32 405 -7. LINER MIX 32 405 -8. WATER 33 405 -9. OTHER MATERIALS 33 405 -10. EQUIPMENT 33 405 -11. INSTALLATION AND EXECUTION 34 • SECTION IV iii Updated 2/11/2016 SECTION IV - Technical Specifications 405 -12. INNERLINE ENVIRONMENTAL SERVICES LINER PRODUCT SYSTEM 35 • 500 SERIES: POTABLE AND RECLAIMED WATER MAINS, FIRE LINES AND APPURTENANCES 41 501. SCOPE 41 502. MATERIALS 41 502 -1. GENERAL 41 502 -2. PIPE MATERIALS AND FITTINGS 41 502 -3. GATE VALVES 43 502 -4. VALVE BOXES 44 502 -5. HYDRANTS 44 502 -6. SERVICE SADDLES 45 502 -7. TESTS, INSPECTION AND REPAIRS 45 502 -8. BACKFLOW PREVENTERS 46 502 -9. TAPPING SLEEVES 46 502 -10. BLOW OFF HYDRANTS 46 503. CONSTRUCTION 47 503 -1. MATERIAL HANDLING 47 503 -2. PIPE LAYING 47 503 -3. SETTING OF VALVES, HYDRANTS AND FITTINGS 48 503 -4. CONNECTIONS TO EXISTING LINES 49 504. TESTS 50 504 -1. HYDROSTATIC TESTS 50 504 -2. NOTICE OF TEST 50 • 505. STERILIZATION 50 505 -1. STERILIZING AGENT 50 505 -2. FLUSHING SYSTEM 50 505 -3. STERILIZATION PROCEDURE 50 505 -4. RESIDUAL CHLORINE TESTS 51 505 -5. BACTERIAL TESTS 51 506. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 51 506 -1. GENERAL 51 506 -2. FURNISH AND INSTALL WATER MAINS 52 506 -3. FURNISH AND INSTALL FITTINGS 52 506 -4. FURNISH AND INSTALL GATE VALVES COMPLETE WITH BOXES AND COVERS 52 506 -5. FURNISH AND INSTALL FIRE HYDRANTS 52 600 SERIES: STORMWATER 54 601. RAISING OR LOWERING OF STORM DRAINAGE STRUCTURES 54 601 -1. BASIS OF PAYMENT 54 602. UNDERDRAINS 54 602 -1. BASIS OF MEASUREMENT 54 602 -2. BASIS OF PAYMENT 55 • SECTION IV iv Updated 2/11/2016 SECTION IV - Technical Specifications 603. STORM SEWERS 55 • 603 -1. TESTING AND INSPECTION 55 603 -2. BASIS OF PAYMENT 56 604. STORM MANHOLES, INLETS, CATCH BASINS OR OTHER STORM STRUCTURES 56 604 -1. BUILT UP TYPE STRUCTURES 56 604 -2. PRECAST TYPE 57 604 -3. BASIS OF PAYMENT 57 605. GABIONS AND MATTRESSES 57 605 -1. MATERIAL 57 605 -2. PERFORMANCE 58 700 SERIES: STREETS AND SIDEWALKS 60 701. RESTORATION OR REPLACEMENT OF DRIVEWAYS, CURBS, SIDEWALKS AND STREET PAVEMENT 60 702. ROADWAY BASE AND SUBGRADE 60 702 -1. BASE 60 702 -2. SUBGRADE 62 703. ASPHALTIC CONCRETE MATERIALS 63 703 -1. ASPHALTIC CONCRETE 63 703 -2. HOT BITUMINOUS MIXTURES - PLANT, METHODS, EQUIPMENT & QUALITY ASSURANCE 63 703 -3. ASPHALT MIX DESIGNS AND TYPES 64 703 -4. ASPHALT PAVEMENT DESIGNS AND LAYER THICKNESS 64 703 -5. GENERAL CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS 64 703 -6. CRACKS AND POTHOLE PREPARATION 64 703 -7. ADJUSTMENT OF MANHOLES 65 703 -8. ADDITIONAL ASPHALT REQUIREMENTS 65 703 -9. BASIS OF MEASUREMENT 66 703 -10. BASIS OF PAYMENT 66 704. ADJUSTMENT TO THE UNIT BID PRICE FOR ASPHALT 66 705. ASPHALT DRIVEWAYS 67 705 -1. BASIS OF MEASUREMENT 67 705 -2. BASIS OF PAYMENT 67 706. CONCRETE CURBS 67 706 -1. BASIS OF MEASUREMENT 67 706 -2. BASIS OF PAYMENT 68 707. CONCRETE SIDEWALKS AND DRIVEWAYS 68 707 -1. CONCRETE SIDEWALKS 68 707 -2. CONCRETE DRIVEWAYS 68 707 -3. CONCRETE CURB RAMPS 68 707 -4. BASIS OF MEASUREMENT 68 707 -5. BASIS OF PAYMENT 69 708. MILLING OPERATIONS 69 • SECTION IV v Updated 2/11/2016 SECTION IV - Technical Specifications 708 -1. EQUIPMENT, CONSTRUCTION & MILLED SURFACE 69 708 -2. ADDITIONAL MILLING REQUIREMENTS 69 708 -3. SALVAGEABLE MATERIALS 70 708 -4. DISPOSABLE MATERIALS 70 708 -5. ADJUSTMENT AND LOCATION OF UNDERGROUND UTILITIES 70 708 -6. ADJUSTMENT OF UTILITY MANHOLES 70 708 -7. TYPES OF MILLING 70 708 -8. MILLING OF INTERSECTIONS 70 708 -9. BASIS OF MEASUREMENT 71 708 -10. BASIS OF PAYMENT 71 800 SERIES: TRAFFIC SIGNALS, SIGNS AND MARKINGS 72 801. TRAFFIC SIGNAL EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS 72 801 -1. BASIS OF MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 72 802. SIGNING AND MARKING 72 802 -1. BASIS OF MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 73 803. ROADWAY LIGHTING 73 803 -1. BASIS OF MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 73 900 SERIES: LANDSCAPING/RESTORATION 74 901. WORK IN EASEMENTS OR PARKWAYS 74 902. GENERAL PLANTING SPECIFICATIONS 74 902 -1. IRRIGATION 74 902 -2. LANDSCAPE 84 • 903. SODDING 99 904. SEEDING 99 905. LAWN MAINTENANCE SPECIFICATIONS 99 905 -1. SCOPE 99 905 -2. SCHEDULING OF WORK 100 905 -3. WORK METHODS 100 906. LEVEL OF SERVICE 102 907. COMPLETION OF WORK 103 908. INSPECTION AND APPROVAL 103 909. SPECIAL CONDITIONS 103 910. TREE PROTECTION 103 910 -1. TREE BARRICADES 103 910 -2. ROOT PRUNING 104 910 -3. PROPER TREE PRUNING 105 • SECTION IV vi Updated 2/11/2016 • SECTION IV — Technical Specifications 100 SERIES: GENERAL 101. SCOPE OF WORK Project Name: WTP No. 1 Improvements - Pressure Filter Modifications and Adsorption System Automation Project Number: 15- 0031 -UT Scope of Work: The Work consists of furnishing all labor, equipment, and materials for the construction of the improvements at WTP No. 1 consisting of, but not limited to, the primary components: 1. Blower replacement. 2. Valve replacement with modulating butterfly valves. 3. Replacement of structural supports. 4. Programming of PLC control logic. The Contractor shall provide 1 fixed project sign as described in SECTION III, ARTICLE 23 of the Contract Documents. The final number of project signs will be determined at the beginning of the project based on the Contractor's schedule of work submitted for approval. Additional project signs may be required at no additional cost to the Owner due to the Contractor's schedule of work. Contract Period: 337 Consecutive Calendar Days SECTION IV Page 1 of 106 Updated 2/11/2016 SECTION IV — Technical Specifications 102. FIELD ENGINEERING 102-1. LINE AND GRADE PERFORMED BY THE CONTRACTOR Unless otherwise specified, the Contractor shall provide and pay for field engineering service required for the project. Such work shall include survey work to establish lines and levels and to locate and lay out site improvements, structures, and controlling lines and levels required for the construction of the work. Also included are such Engineering services as are specified or required to execute the Contractor's construction methods. Engineers and Surveyors shall be licensed professionals under the laws of the State of Florida. The Contractor shall provide three (3) complete sets of As -built Surveys to the Engineer prior to final payment being made as outlined in Section III (General Conditions), Article 6.11.2 of these Contract Documents. 102 -1.1. GRADES, LINES AND LEVELS Existing basic horizontal and vertical control points for the project are those designated on the Drawings or provided by the City. Control points (for alignment only) shall be established by the Engineer. The Contractor shall locate and protect control points prior to starting site work and shall preserve all permanent reference points during construction. In working near any permanent property corners or reference markers, the Contractor shall use care not to remove or disturb any such markers. In the event that markers must be removed or are disturbed due to the proximity of construction work, the Contractor shall have them referenced and reset by a Professional Land Surveyor licensed in the State of Florida. • 102 -1.2. LAYOUT DATA The Contractor shall layout the work at the location and to the lines and grades shown on the Drawings. Survey notes indicating the information and measurements used in establishing locations and grades shall be kept in notebooks and furnished to the Engineer with the record drawings for the project. • 102 -2. LINE AND GRADE PERFORMED BY THE CITY If line and grade is supplied by the City, at the completion of all work the Contractor shall be responsible to have furnished to the project inspector a replacement of the wooden lath and stakes used in the construction of this project. Excessive stake replacement caused by negligence of Contractor's forces, after initial line and grade have been set, as determined by the City Engineer, will be charged to the Contractor at the rate of $100.00 per hour. Time shall be computed for actual time on the project. All time shall be computed in one -hour increments. Minimum charge is $100.00. The Contractor shall provide three (3) complete sets of As -built Surveys to the Engineer prior to final payment being made as outlined in Section III (General Conditions), Article 6.11.2 of these Contract Documents. 103. DEFINITION OF TERMS For the Purpose of these Technical Specifications, the Definition of Terms from Section III, Article 1 - Definitions of these Contract Documents shall apply. SECTION IV Page 2 of 106 Updated 2/11/2016 • • • SECTION IV — Technical Specifications For the purpose of the Estimated Quantities, the Contractor's attention is called to the fact that the estimate of quantities as shown on the Proposal is approximate and is given only as a basis of calculation upon which the award of the contract is to be made. The City does not assume any responsibility that the final quantities will remain in strict accordance with estimated quantities nor shall the Contractor plead misunderstandings or deception because of such estimate of quantities or of the character or location of the work or of other conditions or situations pertaining thereto. 103 -1. REFERENCE STANDARDS Reference to the standards of any technical society, organization, or associate, or to codes of local or state authorities, shall mean the latest standard, code, specification, or tentative standard adopted and published at the date of receipt of bids, unless specifically stated otherwise. The most stringent specification prevails in the case where more than one specification is referenced for the same task. Contractor shall utilize applicable FDOT Standards and Specifications for tasks that are not covered by City's Standards and Specifications. 104. STREET CROSSINGS, ETC. At such crossings, and other points as may be directed by the Engineer, trenches shall be bridged in an open and secure manner, so as to prevent any serious interruption of travel upon the roadway or sidewalk, and also to afford necessary access to public or private premises. The material used, and the mode of constructing said bridges, and the approaches, thereto, must be satisfactory to the Engineer. The cost of all such work must be included in the cost of the trench excavation. 105. AUDIONIDEO RECORDING OF WORK AREAS 105 -1. CONTRACTOR TO PREPARE AUDIONIDEO RECORDING Prior to commencing work, the Contractor shall have a continuous color audio /video recording taken along the entire length of the Project including all affected project areas. Streets, easements, rights -of -way, lots or construction sites within the Project must be recorded to serve as a record of pre- construction conditions. 105 -2. SCHEDULING OF AUDIONIDEO RECORDING The video recordings shall not be made more than twenty -one (21) days prior to construction in any area. 105 -3. PROFESSIONAL VIDEOGRAPHERS The Contractor shall engage the services of a professional videographer. The color audio /video recording shall be prepared by a responsible commercial firm known to be skilled and regularly engaged in the business of pre- construction color audio /video recording documentation. SECTION IV Page 3 of 106 Updated 2/11/2016 SECTION IV — Technical Specifications 105-4. EQUIPMENT IIAll equipment, accessories, materials and labor to perform this service shall be furnished by the Contractor. The total audio /video system shall reproduce bright, sharp, clear pictures with accurate colors and shall be free from distortion, tearing, rolls or any other form of imperfection. The audio portion of the recording shall reproduce the commentary of the camera operator with proper volume, clarity and be free from distortion and interruptions. In some instances, audio /video coverage may be required in areas not accessible by conventional wheeled vehicles. Such coverage shall be obtained by walking. • • 105 -5. RECORDED AUDIO INFORMATION Each recording shall begin with the current date, project name and be followed by the general location, i.e., viewing side and direction of progress. Accompanying the video recording of each video shall be a corresponding and simultaneously recorded audio recording. This audio recording, exclusively containing the commentary of the camera operator or aide, shall assist in viewer orientation and in any needed identification, differentiation, clarification, or objective description of the features being shown in the video portion of the recording. The audio recording shall also be free from any conversations. 105 -6. RECORDED VIDEO INFORMATION All video recordings must continuously display transparent digital information to include the date and time of recording. The date information shall contain the month, day and year. The time information shall contain the hour, minutes and seconds. Additional information shall be displayed periodically. Such information shall include, but not be limited to, project name, contract number, direction of travel and the viewing side. This transparent information shall appear on the extreme upper left hand third of the screen. Camera pan, tilt, zoom -in and zoom out rates shall be sufficiently controlled such that recorded objects will be clearly viewed during video playback. In addition, all other camera and recording system controls, such as lens focus and aperture, video level, pedestal, chrome, white balance, and electrical focus shall be properly controlled or adjusted to maximize picture quality. 105 -7. VIEWER ORIENTATION The audio and video portions of the recording shall maintain viewer orientation. To this end, overall establishing views of all visible house and business addresses shall be utilized. In areas where the proposed construction location will not be readily apparent to the video viewer, highly visible yellow flags shall be placed by the Contractor in such a fashion as to clearly indicate the proposed centerline of construction. When conventional wheeled vehicles are used as conveyances for the recording system, the vertical distance between the camera lens and the ground shall not exceed ten feet (10'). The camera shall be firmly mounted such that transport of the camera during the recording process will not cause an unsteady picture. 105 -8. LIGHTING All recording shall be done during time of good visibility. No videoing shall be done during precipitation, mist or fog. The recording shall only be done when sufficient sunlight is present to SECTION IV Page 4 of 106 Updated 2/11/2016 • • • SECTION IV — Technical Specifications properly illuminate the subjects of recording and to produce bright, sharp video recordings of those subjects. 105 -9. SPEED OF TRAVEL The average rate of travel during a particular segment of coverage shall be directly proportional to the number, size and value of the surface features within the construction area's zone of influence. The rate of speed in the general direction of travel of the vehicle used during videoing shall not exceed forty -four (44) feet per minute. 105 -10. VIDEO LOG /INDEX All videos shall be permanently labeled and shall be properly identified by video number and project title. Each video shall have a log of that video's contents. The log shall describe the various segments of coverage contained on the video in terms of the names of the streets or location of easements, coverage beginning and end, directions of coverage, video unit counter numbers, engineering survey or coordinate values (if reasonably available) and the date. 105 -11. AREA OF COVERAGE Video coverage shall include all surface features located within the zone of influence of construction supported by appropriate audio coverage. Such coverage shall include, but not be limited to, existing driveways, sidewalks, curbs, pavements, drainage system features, mailboxes, landscaping, culverts, fences, signs, Contractor staging areas, adjacent structures, etc., within the area covered by the project. Of particular concern shall be the existence of any faults, fractures, or defects. Taped coverage shall be limited to one side of the Site, street, easement or right of way at any one time. 105 -12. COSTS OF VIDEO SERVICES The cost to complete the requirements under this section shall be included in the contract items provided in the proposal sheet. There is no separate pay item for this work. 106. STREET SIGNS The removal, covering or relocation of street signs by the Contractor is prohibited. All street signs shall be removed, covered or relocated by the City's Traffic Engineering Division in accordance with Sections 700, 994, 995, and 996 of FDOT's Standard Specifications. The Contractor shall notify the City's Traffic Engineering Division a minimum of twenty -four (24) hours in advance of the proposed sign relocation, covering or removal. 107. WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL 107 -1. CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBLE FOR WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL The Contractor shall be responsible to furnish, operate, maintain and remove all work zone traffic control associated with the Project, including detours, advance warnings, channelization, SECTION IV Page 5 of 106 Updated 2/11/2016 • • • SECTION IV — Technical Specifications hazard warnings and any other necessary features, both at the immediate work site and as may be necessary at outlying points. 107 -2. WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL PLAN The Contractor shall prepare a detailed traffic control plan designed to accomplish the level of performance outlined in the Scope of the Work and /or as may be required by construction permits issued by Pinellas County and/or the Florida Department of Transportation for the Project, incorporating the methods and criteria contained in Part VI, Standards and Guides for Traffic Controls for Street and Highway Construction, Maintenance, Utility and Incident Management Operations in the Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices published by the U.S. Department of Transportation and adopted as amended by the Florida Department of Transportation, or most recent addition. This plan shall be reviewed and approved by City Traffic Operations personnel regardless if MOT plan details are included in the contract plans. 107 -2.1. WORK ZONE SAFETY The general objectives of a program of work zone safety are to protect workers, pedestrians, bicyclists and motorists during construction and maintenance operations. This general objective may be achieved by meeting the following specific objectives: • Provide adequate advance warning and information regarding upcoming work zones. • Provide the driver clear directions to understanding the situation they will be facing as the driver proceeds through or around the work zone. • Reduce the consequences of an out of control vehicle. • Provide safe access and storage for equipment and material. • Promote speedy completion of projects (including thorough cleanup of the site). • Promote use of the appropriate traffic control and protection devices. • Provide safe passageways for pedestrians through, in, and /or around construction or maintenance work zones. Per the 2014 Design Standards (DS), Index 600 or latest revision: "When an existing pedestrian way or bicycle way is located within a traffic control work zone, accommodation must be maintained and provision for the disabled must be provided. Only approved pedestrian longitudinal channelizing devices may be used to delineate a temporary traffic control zone pedestrian walkway. Advanced notification of sidewalk closures and marked detours shall be provided by appropriate signs." Per the 2014 Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction or latest revision FDOT Design Standards (DS): 102 -5 Traffic Control, 102 -5.1 Standards, are the minimum standards for the use in the development of all traffic control plans. 107 -3. ROADWAY CLOSURE GUIDELINES Roadway types: Major Arterials, Minor Arterials, Local Collectors, and Local Following are typical requirements to be accomplished prior to closure. The number of requirements increases with traffic volume and the importance of access. Road closures affecting business or sole access routes will increase in process requirements as appropriate. For all but SECTION IV Page 6 of 106 Updated 2/11/2016 SECTION IV — Technical Specifications local streets, no road or lane closures are allowed during the Christmas holiday season and the designated "Spring Break" season without prior approval by the City Engineer. 107 -3.1. ALL ROADWAYS Obtain permits for Pinellas County or Florida Department of Transportation roadways. Traffic control devises conform to national and state standards. 107 - 3.1.1. PUBLIC NOTIFICATION Standard property owner notification prior to start of construction for properties directly affected by the construction process. 107 -3.2. MAJOR ARTERIALS, MINOR ARTERIALS, LOCAL COLLECTORS Consult with City Traffic Division staff for preliminary traffic control options. Develop Formal Traffic Control Plan for Permit Submittal to Regulatory Agency as necessary. 107 - 3.2.1. PUBLIC NOTIFICATION Message Board Display, Minimum of seven (7) day notice period prior to road closure and potentially longer for larger highway. The message board is to be provided by the Contractor. 107 -3.3. MAJOR ARTERIALS, MINOR ARTERIALS • 107 - 3.3.1. PUBLIC NOTIFICATION • C -View Release 107 -3.4. MAJOR ARTERIALS 107 - 3.4.1. PUBLIC NOTIFICATION News Release The Message Board may need to be displayed for a period longer than seven (7) days. 107-4. APPROVAL OF WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL PLAN The Contractor is invited and encouraged to confer in advance of bidding, and is required, as a specification of the work, to confer in advance of beginning any work on the Project, with the Traffic Operations Division, Municipal Services Building, 100 South Myrtle Avenue, telephone (727) 562 -4747, for the purpose of approval of the Contractor's proposed detailed traffic control plan. All maintenance of traffic (MOT) plans shall be signed and sealed by a Professional Engineer or an individual who is certified in the preparation of MOT plans in the State of Florida. SECTION IV Page 7 of 106 Updated 2/11/2016 SECTION IV — Technical Specifications 107 -5. INSPECTION OF WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL • OPERATION The Traffic Operations Division may inspect and monitor the traffic control plan and traffic control devices of the Contractor. The City's Construction Inspector assigned to the project, may make known requirements for any alterations or adjustments to the traffic control devices. The Contractor shall take direction from the Project Engineer or Project Inspector. • • 107 -6. PAYMENT FOR WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL Payment for work zone traffic control is a non - specific pay item to be included in the construction costs associated with other specific pay items unless specifically stated otherwise. 107 -7. CERTIFICATION OF WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL SUPERVISOR The City may require that the Supervisor or Foreman controlling the work for the Contractor on the Project have a current International Municipal Signal Association, Work Zone Traffic Control Safety Certification or Worksite Traffic Supervisor Certification from the American Traffic Safety Association with additional current Certification from the Florida Department of Transportation. This requirement for Certification will be noted in the Scope of Work and /or sections of these Technical Specifications. When the certified supervisor is required for the Project, the supervisor will be on the Project site at all times while work is being conducted. The Worksite Traffic Supervisor shall be available on a twenty -four (24) hour per day basis and shall review the project on a day -to -day basis as well as being involved in all changes to traffic control. The Worksite Traffic Supervisor shall have access to all equipment and materials needed to maintain traffic control and handle traffic related situations. The Worksite Traffic Supervisor shall ensure that routine deficiencies are corrected within a twenty -four (24) hour period. The Worksite Traffic Supervisor shall be available on the site within 45 minutes after notification of an emergency situation, prepared to positively respond to repair the work zone traffic control or to provide alternate traffic arrangements. Failure of the Worksite Traffic Supervisor to comply with the provisions of this Subarticle may be grounds for decertification or removal from the project or both. Failure to maintain a designated Worksite Traffic Supervisor or failure to comply with these provisions will result in temporary suspension of all activities except traffic and erosion control and such other activities deemed to be necessary for project maintenance and safety. 108. OVERHEAD ELECTRIC LINE CLEARANCE 108 -1. CLEARANCE OPTIONS When working in the vicinity of overhead power lines, the Contractor shall utilize one of the following options: Option 1 - Having the power lines de- energized and visibly grounded. SECTION IV Page 8 of 106 Updated 2/11/2016 • SECTION IV — Technical Specifications Option 2 - Maintaining a minimum distance of twenty feet (20') of clearance for voltages up to 350 kV and fifty feet (50') of clearance for voltages more than 350 kV. Option 3 - Determine the line voltage and provide clearance in accordance with the following table. 108 -2. REQUIRED MINIMUM CLEARANCE DISTANCES VOLTAGE (nominal, kV, alternating current) MINIMUM CLEARANCE DISTANCE (feet) Up to 50 10 Over 50 to 200 15 Over 200 to 350 20 Over 350 to 500 25 Over 500 to 750 35 Over 750 to 1,000 45 Over 1,000 (as established by the utility owner /operator or registered professional engineer who is a qualified person with respect to electric power transmission and distribution) Note: The value that follows "to" is up to and includes that value. For example, over 50 to 200 means up to and including 200kV. 109. PROJECT WEB PAGES 109 -1. WEB PAGES DESIGN If requested by the City, Engineer shall design the Project Web Site in accordance with the current City Web Site standards and styles. Project Web Site should include general project information as: Project Name & Number, Scope description, Location, Schedule, and Project Contacts. Note: Occasionally City modifies the general design of the City's Web Site, and the Engineer shall consult the City Webmaster for the current requirements, before designing or updating the Project Web Pages. 109 -2. WEB ACCESSIBILITY GUIDELINES Project Web Pages should conform to the W3C Web Accessibility Guidelines and US Section 508 guidelines whenever possible: http://www.w3.org/TR/1999/WAI-WEBCONTENT-19990505/ SECTION IV Page 9 of 106 Updated 2/11/2016 • SECTION IV — Technical Specifications http: / /www.section508.gov/ In particular, use of variable -width tables, user - adjustable /relative font sizes, ALT text for images, CSS whenever possible, etc. Accessibility should be a priority over design/aesthetics. 109 -3. THE SUN AND WAVES LOGO AND ITS USE The City's Sun and Waves logo should be used for everyday business, on all print and electronic material. It should be used on all internal correspondence, brochures, advertising, vehicles, apparel and signage. It should be used only in the manner presented here, in the proportion shown here, with no alterations. It should not be condensed, lengthened, or otherwise distorted to fit a space. The logo is approved for use by City departments, and is not to be used by outside vendors without the permission of the City Manager, Assistant City Manager or Public Communications office. Electronic versions of the logo should be obtained from Public Communications. 109-4. MAPS AND GRAPHICS Use of maps and graphics is recommended to illustrate the project; only approved graphics should be posted to the Project Web Pages. 109 -5. INTERACTIVE FORMS The site should also include an interactive form or other options to allow the Public's input sent back to the City regarding the Project. III 109 -6. POSTING The site should be presented to the City's Webmaster for review and posting to the City's Web Server. Posting of the Project Web Pages to a different server than City's Web server, if approved, should be coordinated with the City's Webmaster for resolving all accessibility and conformity issues. • 109 -7. WEB PAGES UPDATES Unless otherwise specified and agreed, Engineer is responsible for keeping the posted Web Pages up -to -date, by sending revisions and updates through the City Project Manager to the City's Webmaster for posting. SECTION IV Page 10 of 106 Updated 2/11/2016 • • • SECTION IV — Technical Specifications 200 SERIES: SITEWORK 201. EXCAVATION FOR UNDERGROUND WORK The Contractor is responsible to take all necessary steps to conduct all excavation in a manner which provides for the successful completion of the proposed work while at all times maintaining the safety of the workmen, the general public and both public and private property. The Contractor's methods of work will be consistent with the standard practices and requirements of all appropriate Safety Regulatory Agencies, particularly the Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) requirements for excavation. Unless otherwise specifically stated in these plans and specifications, the methods of safety control and compliance with regulatory agency safety requirements are the full and complete responsibility of the Contractor. For the purposes of the Contractor's safety planning in the bidding process, the contractor is to consider all excavation to be done in the performance of this contract to be in soil classified as OSHA "Type C ". The Contractor's attention is called to specific requirements of OSHA for excavation shoring, employee entry, location of excavated material adjacent to excavation, the removal of water from the excavation, surface encumbrances and in particular the requirement of a "Competent Person" to control safety operations. The Contractor will identify their Competent Person to City staff at the start of construction. City staff is required from time to time to perform inspections, tests, survey location work, or other similar activity in an excavation prepared by the Contractor. City staff, in conformance with the OSHA Excavation Safety Requirements, is to only enter an excavation in compliance with these OSHA standards. The City's staff reserve the option to refuse entry into the Contractor's excavation if, in the opinion of the City's staff, the entry into the Contractor's excavation is unsafe or does not conform to OSHA requirements. If this circumstance occurs, the Contractor must either provide the necessary safety requirements or provide alternate means for the accomplishment of the City's work at the Contractor's expense. The construction quantities, if any, contained in the bid proposal for this contract do not contain sufficient quantities to allow the Contractor to perform excavation work using strictly the "open cut" method whereby no shoring systems are used and trench side slopes are cut to conform to OSHA safety requirements without a shoring system. In addition to safety reasons, the Contractor is required to use excavation and trench - shoring methods in compliance with all safety requirements which allow the Contractor to control the amount of restoration work necessary to complete the project. Not more than four hundred feet (400') of trench shall be opened at one time in advance of the completed work unless written permission is received from the Engineer for the distance specified. For pipe installation projects, the trench shall be a minimum of six inches (6 ") wider on each side than the greatest external horizontal width of the pipe or conduit, including hubs, intended to be laid in them. The bottom of the trench under each pipe joint shall be slightly hollowed, to allow the body of the pipe to rest throughout its length. In case a trench is excavated at any place, excepting at joints, below the grade of its bottom as given, or directed by the Engineer, the filling and compaction to grade shall be done in such manner as the Engineer shall direct, without compensation. SECTION IV Page 11 of 106 Updated 2/11/2016 SECTION IV — Technical Specifications 202. OBSTRUCTIONS • Any pipes, conduits, wires, mains, footings, driveways, or other structures encountered shall be carefully protected from injury or displacement. Any damage thereto shall be fully, promptly, and properly repaired by the Contractor to the satisfaction of the Engineer and the owner thereof. Any survey monument or benchmark which must be disturbed shall be carefully referenced before removal, and unless otherwise provided for, shall be replaced upon completion of the work by a registered land surveyor. Any concrete removed due to construction requirements shall be removed to the nearest expansion joint or by saw cut. Contractor shall consult Inspector for the approved means. • • 203. DEWATERING 203 -1. GENERAL Unless specifically authorized by the Engineer, all pipe, except subdrains, shall be laid "in the dry". The Contractor shall dewater trench excavation as required for the proper execution of the work, using one or more of the following approved methods: well point system, trenched gravity underdrain system, or sumps with pumps. Well point systems must be efficient enough to lower the water level in advance of the excavation and maintain it continuously in order that the trench bottom and sides shall remain firm and reasonably dry. The well points shall be designed especially for this type of service, and the pumping unit used shall be capable of maintaining a high vacuum, and at the same time, of handling large volumes of air as well as of water. The Contractor shall be responsible for disposing of all water resulting from trench dewatering operations, and shall dispose of the water without damage or undue inconvenience to the work, the surrounding area, or the general public. Contractor shall not dam, divert, or cause water to flow in excess in existing gutters, pavements or other structures: and to do this Contractor may be required to divert the water to a suitable place of discharge as may be determined by the Engineer. Where possible, Contractor may contain produced groundwater on the project site, a dewatering plan must be submitted to the City for approval if a discharge permit is not obtained or required. The cost of dewatering shall be included in the unit price bid per linear foot of pipe, or, in the case of other underground structures, in the cost of such structures. 203 -2. PERMIT REQUIREMENTS 203 -2.1. DEWATERING DISCHARGE The Contractor shall be responsible for submitting the Notice of Intent to use the Generic Permit for the Discharge of Groundwater from Dewatering Operations and associated fee in accordance with Florida DEP Requirements, F.A.C. 62- 621.300(2)(b) prior to discharging of produced groundwater into the City's streets, storm sewers or waterways. Prior to construction, a dewatering plan must be prepared and submitted to the City for review. It shall include site - specific notes and details presenting the Contractor's proposed dewatering and disposal methods. The City will field- inspect the dewatering operation throughout construction. SECTION IV Page 12 of 106 Updated 2/11/2016 SECTION IV — Technical Specifications 204. UNSUITABLE MATERIAL REMOVAL • All unsuitable material, such as muck, clay, rock, etc., shall be excavated from under pipes, structures and roadways and removed from the site. All material removed is property of the Contractor, who shall dispose of said material off -site at their expense. The limits and depths of the excavation shall be determined in the field by the Engineer. • • 204 -1. BASIS OF MEASUREMENT The basis of measurement shall be the amount of cubic yards of clean fill placed as determined by either cross sections of the excavation, truck measure, or lump sum as specified in the Scope of Work and Contract Proposal. Included in the cost of cubic yards of suitable material placed is the removal, hauling and disposal of unsuitable material. 204 -2. BASIS OF PAYMENT The unit price for the removal of unsuitable material shall include: all materials, equipment, tools, labor, disposal, hauling, excavating, dredging, placing, compaction, dressing surface and incidentals necessary to complete the work. If no pay item is given, the removal of unsuitable material shall be included in the most appropriate bid item. 205. UTILITY TIE IN LOCATION MARKING The tie in locations for utility laterals of water, sanitary sewer, and gas shall be plainly marked on the back of the curb. Marking placed on the curb shall be perpendicular with respect to the curb of the tie in location on the utility lateral. Marks shall not be placed on the curb where laterals cross diagonally under the curb. The tie in location shall be the end of the utility lateral prior to service connection. Markings shall be uniform in size and shape and colors in conformance with the code adopted by the American Public Works Association as follows: SAFETY RED Electric power, distribution & transmission Municipal Electric Systems HIGH VISIBILITY SAFETY YELLOW Gas Distribution and Transmission Oil Distribution and Transmission Dangerous Materials, Produce Lines, Steam Lines SAFETY ALERT ORANGE Telephone and Telegraph Systems Police and Fire Communications Cable Television SAFETY PRECAUTION BLUE Water Systems, Slurry Pipe Lines and Potable Water SAFETY GREEN Sewer Systems LAVENDER Reclaimed Water, Irrigation and Slurry Lines SECTION IV Page 13 of 106 Updated 2/11/2016 • SECTION IV — Technical Specifications WHITE Proposed Excavation PINK Temporary Survey Markings Marks placed on curbs shall be rectangular in shape and placed with the long dimension perpendicular to the flow line of the curb. Marks placed on valley gutter and modified curb shall be six inch (6 ") x three inch (3 ") and placed at the back of the curb. Marks placed on State Road and vertical curb shall be four inch (4 ") x two inch (2 ") and be placed on the curb face. 206. CLEARING AND GRUBBING The work included in this specification includes the removal and disposal of all structures, appurtenances, asphalt, concrete, curbs, walls, trees, roots, vegetation, boulders, conduits, poles, posts, pipes, inlets, brush, stumps, debris and other obstructions resting on or protruding through the ground surface necessary to prepare the area for construction. Clearing and grubbing shall be performed in accordance with Section 110 of FDOT's Standard Specifications. Unless otherwise specified in the contract documents, the Contractor shall take ownership of all removed material and dispose of them off -site in accordance with all Local, State and Federal Requirements. 206 -1. BASIS OF MEASUREMENT The basis of measurement shall be either a lump sum quantity or the number of acres cleared and grubbed as specified on the plans or directed by the Engineer. il 206 -2. BASIS OF PAYMENT The pay item for clearing and grubbing shall include: all removal and disposal of materials and structures as well as all materials, hauling, equipment, tools, labor, leveling of terrain, landscape trimming and all incidentals necessary to complete the work. 207. EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL 207 -1. GENERAL Erosion and sediment control shall conform to the requirements of the FDOT Standard Specifications for Prevention, Control, and Abatement of Erosion and Water Pollution. Contractor shall use temporary erosion and sediment control features found in the State of Florida Erosion and Sediment Control Designer and Reviewer Manual (E &SC Manual) or the City of Clearwater Standard Indices. 207 -2. TRAINING OF PERSONNEL The City may require that the Supervisor or Foreman controlling the work for the Contractor on the Project have a current Florida Department of Environmental Protection (FDEP) Florida Stormwater, Erosion, and Sedimentation Control Inspector Training & Certification. All personnel working on the Project shall complete illicit discharge training once per calendar year. Contractor shall provide documentation to the City prior to Notice To Proceed. Example of SECTION IV Page 14 of 106 Updated 2/11/2016 • • • SECTION IV — Technical Specifications training and training sign -in sheet will be provided by the City to the Contractor at the Pre - Construction Meeting. 207 -3. STABILIZATION OF DENUDED AREAS No disturbed area may be denuded for more than thirty (30) calendar days unless otherwise authorized by the City Engineer. During construction, denuded areas shall be covered by mulches such as straw, hay, filter fabric, seed and mulch, sod, or some other temporary vegetation. Within sixty (60) calendar days after final grade is established on any portion of a project site, that portion of the site shall be provided with established permanent soil stabilization measures per the original site plan, whether by impervious surface or landscaping. 207-4. PROTECTION AND STABILIZATION OF SOIL STOCKPILES Fill material stockpiles shall be protected at all times by on -site drainage controls which prevent erosion of the stockpiled material. Control of dust from such stockpiles may be required, depending upon their location and the expected length of time the stockpiles will be present. In no case shall an unstabilized stockpile remain after thirty (30) calendar days. 207 -5. PROTECTION OF EXISTING STORM SEWER SYSTEMS During construction, all storm sewer inlets in the vicinity of the project shall be protected by temporary erosion and sediment control features found in the State of Florida Erosion and Sediment Control Designer and Reviewer Manual (E &SC Manual) or the City of Clearwater Standard Indices, or equals approved by the City Engineer before installation. 207 -6. SWALES, DITCHES AND CHANNELS All swales, ditches and channels leading from the site shall be sodded within three (3) days of excavation. All other interior swales, etc., including detention areas will be sodded prior to issuance of a Certificate of Occupancy. 207 -7. UNDERGROUND UTILITY CONSTRUCTION The construction of underground utility lines and other structures shall be done in accordance with the following standards: no more than 400 linear feet of trench shall be open at any one time; and, wherever consistent with safety and space consideration, excavated material shall be cast to the uphill side of trenches. Trench material shall not be cast into or onto the slope of any stream, channel, road ditch or waterway. 207 -8. MAINTENANCE All erosion and siltation control devices shall be checked regularly, especially after each rainfall and will be cleaned out and/or repaired as required. SECTION IV Page 15 of 106 Updated 2/11/2016 • • SECTION IV — Technical Specifications 207 -9. COMPLIANCE Failure to comply with the aforementioned requirements may result in a fine and/or more stringent enforcement procedures such as (but not limited to) issuance of a "Stop Work Order ". 208. CONSTRUCTION AND REPAIR OF SEAWALLS AND OTHER BEACH EROSION CONTROL STRUCTURES. Other beach erosion control structures, accompanied by a certified survey showing the location of the groin or other beach erosion control structure and adjoining groins or other beach erosion control structures, shall be presented to the city council for final approval. Where steps are necessary to provide access along the beach to the public, then such steps shall be shown as part of the plan for groin construction prior to issuance of the permit, and such steps shall be constructed and maintained in a safe condition at all times. 208 -1. EXISTING SEAWALLS AND REVETMENTS Existing seawalls and revetments on natural waterbodies may be replaced with a revetment or with a vertical seawall with the provision of rip rap placed at the base of the wall up to the mean high water line for the entire length of the seawall. Revetments and seawalls may be replaced with a vertical seawall in manmade waterbodies, provided that the seawall is within the property line and maintains the established shoreline. 208 -2. TOP OF CAP ELEVATION The top of cap elevation for all replacement and new seawalls and seawall caps shall not exceed 4.8 feet N.A.V.D. If the top of a seawall cap is constructed at an elevation differing from the adjacent property owner top of cap elevation by greater than one foot, then a return wall is required to sufficiently provide for the break in grade at the property line. Seawalls exceeding 4.8 feet N.A.V.D. in height prior to the effective date of this article may be maintained, repaired and replaced to their current height. 208 -3. SEAWALLS AND REVETMENTS LOCATED SEAWARD OF THE CCL Seawalls and revetments located seaward of the coastal construction setback line are controlled by regulations of the Division of Beaches and Shores of the Florida Department of Environmental Protection. Replacement of a seawall or revetment that is located seaward of the coastal construction setback line necessitates submission of a permit application to the state department of environmental protection. 208-4. PLACEMENT OF NEW SEAWALL The placement of a new seawall waterward of an existing seawall is permitted, subject to the following conditions: (a) A Florida registered professional engineer must certify the new seawall design. (b) The new seawall shall not extend more than 18 inches from the waterward face of the original alignment of the existing vertical seawall location. SECTION IV Page 16 of 106 Updated 2/11/2016 • SECTION IV — Technical Specifications (c) The new seawall shall be placed vertically plumb. (d) Placing a seawall in front of an existing seawall shall only be permitted once unless the seawall behind the new seawall is removed. (e) Existing seawall sections that interfere with new seawall location shall be removed. (0 The new seawall shall include an adequate closure of gaps at each property line. (g) For zoning purposes, the setbacks for the property will be measured from either the property line or the waterside of the original seawall slab, whichever is more restrictive, and will not be adjusted to accommodate the new seawall addition. For purposes of pier construction, the shore normal dimensions will be measured from the waterside of the original seawall slab. 208 -5. POST CONSTRUCTION SURVEY Prior to final inspection and approval of a new or replacement seawall or seawall cap, a post - construction survey shall be required. Repairs of existing seawalls and seawall caps which do not alter the height or location shall not be subject to this requirement. 208 -6. RIP -RAP On all natural waterways, an apron of rip -rap shall be placed at the base of all new and repaired seawalls up to the mean high water line for the entire length of the seawall to absorb the wave energy and protect the underlying soft earth or sand from being carried away, as well as to provide habitat for desirable marine species. This rip -rap shall be required at the base of all new seawalls and at the time that an existing seawall is repaired where the replacement constitutes greater than 50 percent of the entire length of the seawall or includes the replacement of a panel. • 208 -7. RETAINING WALL IN LIEU OF VERTICAL SEAWALL • A retaining wall may be built as an alternative to a vertical seawall, provided that all activities, including dredging, filling, slope grading, or equipment access and similar activities and all portions of the wall are located landward of the mean high water line. SECTION IV Page 17 of 106 Updated 2/11/2016 SECTION IV — Technical Specifications 300 SERIES: MATERIALS • 301. CONCRETE The Contractor shall notify the Construction Inspector or City a minimum of twenty -four (24) hours in advance of all concrete placement. Unless otherwise noted elsewhere or directed, the following requirements shall be adhered to: All concrete work shall be performed in accordance with the latest editions of the Design and Control of Concrete Mixtures by the Portland Cement Association, the American Concrete Institute, and FDOT's Standard Specifications. Unless otherwise specified, all concrete shall have fiber mesh reinforcing and have a minimum compressive strength of 3000 p.s.i. at twenty - eight (28) days. The cement type shall be Type I and shall conform to AASHTO M -85. The aggregate shall conform to ASTM C -33. All ready mix concrete shall conform to ASTM C -94. The slump for all concrete shall be in the range of three inches (3 ") to five inches (5 "), except when admixtures or special placement considerations are required. All concrete shall be tested in the following manner: Placement of less than five cubic yards (5 cy) shall be tested at the Engineer's discretion. Otherwise, for each class, for each day, for every 50 cy or part thereof exceeding five cubic yards (5 cy), one set of three (3) compressive strength cylinders will be required (1 at 7 days and 2 at 28 days). At the discretion of the Engineer, unacceptable test results may require the Contractor to provide further tests, as determined by the Engineer, to determine product acceptability, or need for removal, and compensation or denial thereof. • 302. EXCAVATION AND FORMS FOR CONCRETE WORK • 302 -1. EXCAVATION Excavating for concrete work shall be made to the required depth of the subgrade or base upon which the concrete is to be placed. The base or subgrade shall be thoroughly compacted to a point six inches (6 ") outside said concrete work before the forms are placed. 302 -2. FORMS Forms for concrete work shall be either wood or metal, except curbs. Curb forms shall be metal only, unless at radius, intermittent sections less than ten (10) linear feet or by written permission from Engineer. They shall be free from warps or bends, shall have a depth equal to the dimensions required for the depth of the concrete deposited against them and shall be of sufficient strength when staked to resist the pressure of concrete without moving or springing. 303. REINFORCEMENT When required, reinforcement shall be placed in the concrete work. Bar reinforcement shall be deformed: ASTMA -A 615, steel shall be billet Intermediate or Hard Grade: Rail Steel A.A.S.H.T.O. M42. Twisted Bars shall not be used, Fabric Reinforcement shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO M55 (ASTM A185). Welded deformed steel wire fabric for Concrete SECTION IV Page 18 of 106 Updated 2/11/2016 • • • SECTION IV — Technical Specifications reinforcement shall meet the requirements of AASHTO M 221 (ASTM A497). Welded wires shall be elevated by the use of chairs. Epoxy coated reinforcing Steel Bars shall meet ASTM A775/A77 requirements. 303 -1. BASIS OF PAYMENT Reinforcement shall not be paid for separately. The cost of such work shall be included in the contract unit price for the item of work specified. 304. BACKFILL 304 -1. MATERIALS AND GENERAL Material for backfill other than under Gabion mattress shall be carefully selected from the excavated material or from other sources as may be required by the Engineer. Such material shall be granular, free from clay, muck, organic matter or debris, contain no rocks or other hard fragments greater than three inches (3 ") in the largest dimension and all fill shall be similar material. Material for backfill under Gabion mattress shall be an A -1 soil meeting AASHTO M145. Backfill shall be carried up evenly in layer not exceeding eight inches (8 ") in thickness and shall be compacted into place by mechanical tamping before the next layer is applied. A hydro - hammer shall not be used for compaction. Backfill placed around pipes shall be carefully placed around the sides and top of pipe by hand shovels and thoroughly compacted to twelve inches (12 ") above the pipe by tamping or other suitable means. For backfill in small areas that do not permit any type of tamping, Contractor may use flowable fill to achieve required density. Flowable fill shall adhere to Section 121 of FDOT specifications. Where wet conditions are such that dewatering by normal pumping methods would not be effective, as determined by the Engineer, Contractor may use #57 stone (meeting FDOT's specifications) and hand tamping until backfill has reached an elevation and condition such as to make the use of the mechanical tampers practical. Fully wrap the stones with a layer of Type D filter fabric of FDOT Index 199. Do not place stones within four feet (4') of the ends of trench or ditch; use normally accepted backfill material at the ends. Where new cast -in -place concrete work is performed, do not place backfill until the specified twenty -eight (28) days compressive strength occurs. Do not allow heavy construction equipment to cross over pipes or culverts until placing and compacting backfill material to the finished earthwork grade or to an elevation of at least four feet (4') above the top of the pipe or culvert. The cost of backfill, flowable fill, alternative approved material for wet conditions, and extra dewatering effort to achieve required density, etc., shall be included in the contract unit price or lump sum price for the item of the work specified. 304 -2. TESTING AND INSPECTION Contractor shall employ and pay for the services of an independent testing laboratory, approved by the Owner, to perform density testing on backfilled material. All testing shall be witnessed by SECTION IV Page 19 of 106 Updated 2/11/2016 • • • SECTION IV — Technical Specifications the Owner's Representative. The test shall be repeated until satisfactory results are obtained. The Contractor shall be charged for all retests and re- inspection services. Backfill under all type of impervious areas and around structures: Backfill in these areas shall be compacted to a minimum of 98% Modified Proctor Test in accordance with ASTM D 1557 or ASSHTO T 180. Tests shall be performed up to the proposed bottom of pavement elevation. Backfill outside of impervious areas: Backfill in these areas shall be compacted to a minimum of 95% Standard Proctor Test in accordance with ASTM D -698 or AASHTO T-99. Tests shall be performed up to the proposed finished grade. Backfill Testing: The Contractor shall demonstrate the adequacy of backfill compaction by performing density testing. For each test location, density testing shall be performed at eight inch (8 ") lifts. The character of the backfill material will be observed during the excavation for density testing to determine conformance with the specifications. Density testing shall be performed using nuclear field density equipment or conventional weight - volume methods. If the weight - volume method is used, volume shall be determined by using the sand replacement test (ASTM D 1556) or liquid displacement methods (ASTM D 2167). If nuclear methods are used, the trench correction effect shall be accounted for by recalibrating the nuclear gauge on its calibration block at the location of each test prior to taking the density measurement. The Contractor shall furnish all equipment, tools, and labor to prepare the test site for testing. Normal Testing Frequency: One test shall be performed for each one hundred feet (100') of backfill or fraction thereof or for each single run of pipe /culvert connecting two (2) successive structures whichever is less. The location of the test within each section shall be selected by the Owner's Representative. Testing shall progress as each one hundred foot (100') section is completed. Four (4) tests equally spaced around each structure shall be performed on each eight inch (8 ") lift. Testing which indicates that unacceptable material has been incorporated into the backfill, or that insufficient compaction is being obtained shall be followed by expanded testing to determine the limits of the unacceptable backfill. Expanded Testing Requirements: If normal testing within a testing section indicates unacceptable backfill, the Owner's Representative may require additional testing within the same test section to determine the limits of unacceptable backfill. Additional testing required by the Owner's Representative shall be paid for by the Contractor and shall not exceed testing of four (4) additional locations within the test section. Unacceptable backfill within the limits established by the testing shall be removed and replaced by the Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner. Additional testing beyond that required may be performed by the Contractor at his expense to further delineate limits of unacceptable backfill. 305. RIPRAP The work included in this specification includes the construction of riprap as shown on the plans. The riprap shall be constructed per Section 530 of FDOT's Standard Specifications. 305 -1. BASIS OF MEASUREMENT The basis of measurement for riprap shall be the dry weight in tons. SECTION IV Page 20 of 106 Updated 2/11/2016 SECTION IV — Technical Specifications 305 -2. BASIS OF PAYMENT • The pay item for sand - cement riprap shall include: all materials, testing, labor, grout, hauling, equipment, excavation, backfill, dressing and shaping for placement of sand - cement and all incidentals necessary to complete the work. The pay item for rubble riprap shall include: all materials, required bedding stone, dressing and shaping for placement of bedding stone, filter fabric, testing, hauling, excavating, backfill, dressing and shaping for placement of rubble, and all incidentals necessary to complete the work. No payment will be granted if concrete or stone that exists on -site is used as rubble riprap. • • SECTION IV Page 21 of 106 Updated 2/11/2016 SECTION IV — Technical Specifications • 400 SERIES: SANITARY SEWER 401. SANITARY MANHOLES 401 -1. BUILT UP TYPE Manholes shall be constructed of brick with cast iron frames and covers as shown on the drawings. Invert channels shall be constructed smooth and semicircular in shape conforming to inside of adjacent sewer section. Changes in direction of flow shall be made in a smooth curve of as large a radius as possible. Changes in size and grade of channels shall be made gradually and evenly. Invert channels shall be formed by one of the following methods: form directly into concrete manhole base, build up with brick and mortar, lay half tile in concrete, or lay full section of sewer pipe through manhole and break out top half of pipe. The manhole floor outside of channels shall be made smooth and sloped toward channels. Free drop in manholes from inlet pipe invert to top of floor outside the channels shall not exceed twenty four inches (24 "). Standard Drop Manholes shall be constructed wherever free drop exceeds twenty four inches (24 "). Manhole steps shall not be provided. Joints shall be completely filled and the mortar shall be smoothed from inside of manholes. The entire interior and exterior of brick manholes shall be plastered with one half inch (1/2 ") of mortar. • Brick used may be solid only. Brick shall be laid radially with every sixth course being a stretcher course. • 401 -2. PRECAST TYPE Precast Sanitary Manholes shall conform to this specification unless otherwise approved by the City Engineer. AASHTO M 85 Type II cement shall be used throughout with a minimum wall thickness of five inches (5 "). The precast sections shall conform to ASTM C 478 latest revision. Section joints shall be a tongue and groove with "ram neck" gasket or "0" ring to provide a watertight joint. Minimum concrete strength shall be 4000 psi at 28 days. Three sets of shop drawings and location inventory shall be submitted to the City Engineer for approval. Approval of shop drawings does not relieve Contractor of responsibility for compliance to these specifications unless letter from Contractor requesting specific variance is approved by the City Engineer. Location inventory submitted with shop drawing shall detail parts of manhole per manhole as numbered on the construction plans. All manhole parts shall be numbered or lettered before being sent to the job site to permit proper construction placement. A plan or list of the numbering system shall be present on the job site when manhole components are delivered. SECTION IV Page 22 of 106 Updated 2/11/2016 • SECTION IV — Technical Specifications Precast manhole dimensions, drop entry, grout flow of channel, etc., shall be as shown on City of Clearwater Engineering Index #302 Sheets 1 and 2 of 2. Manhole sections shall be rejected if abused during shipping or placement and if pipe openings are not properly aligned. The "break in" to precast manholes for pipe entry will not be allowed. The manhole base shall be set on a pad of A 1 or A 2 Classification soil approximately five inches (5 ") thick to secure proper seating and bearing. 401 -2.1. MANHOLE ADJUSTMENT RINGS (GRADE RINGS) Between the top of the manhole cone and the manhole cover frame, a manhole adjustment ring shall be installed. The intent of the manhole adjustment ring is to accommodate future grade changes without disturbing the manhole. See Section IV, Article 703 -7, Asphaltic Concrete — Adjustment of Manholes. 401 -3. DROP MANHOLES Standard drop inlets to manholes shall be constructed of commercial pipe, fittings and specials as detailed on the drawings. 401-4. FRAMES AND COVERS Manhole frames and covers shall be set in a full bed of mortar with the top of the cover flush with or higher than finished grade as directed. Refer to Index 301. 401 -5. MANHOLE COATINGS • The exterior and interior of all built up manholes shall be coated with two (2) coats of Type II Asphalt emulsion, moisture and damp proof (Specification ASTM D 1227 Type II Class I) as manufactured by W.R. Meadows Sealtite or approved equal. The exterior of all precast manholes shall have a 15 mil dry thickness of Sherwin Williams Targuard® Coal Tar Epoxy or approved equal. The interior shall be AGRU SUREGRIP HDPE or PP -R Liner with a minimum thickness of two millimeters (2 mm). 401 -6. CONNECTIONS TO MANHOLES Connections to existing sanitary manholes using approved PVC sewer main shall be made with a manhole adapter coupling by NPC Kor -N -Seal® or approved water stop coupling. 402. RAISING OR LOWERING OF SANITARY SEWER STRUCTURES Sanitary Sewer Structures shall be raised or lowered as indicated on the plans or as indicated by the Engineer. 402 -1. BASIS OF PAYMENT Payment, unless covered by a bid item, shall be included in the cost of the work. SECTION IV Page 23 of 106 Updated 2/11/2016 • • SECTION IV — Technical Specifications 403. SANITARY SEWERS AND FORCE MAINS 403 -1. MATERIALS 403 -1.1. GRAVITY SEWER PIPE GRAVITY SEWER PIPE SHALL BE POLYVINYL CHLORIDE OR DUCTILE IRON. Polyvinyl chloride pipe and fittings shall conform to ASTM specification D 3034 for S.D.R. 35. Sewer pipe with more than ten feet (10') of cover shall be SDR 26. The pipe shall be plainly marked with the above ASTM designation. The bell end of joints and fittings shall have a rubber sealing ring to provide a tight flexible seal in conformance with ASTM D 3212. The laying length of pipe joints shall be a maximum of twenty feet (20'). Unless otherwise noted in these specifications or construction plans, Ductile Iron pipe and fittings for gravity sewer shall conform to Article 501 of these Technical Specifications for DIP water main except pipe shall be interior Protecto 401 ceramic epoxy lined in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Where sanitary sewer main is to be placed between building lots in a sideline easement, the sewer main shall, insofar as possible, be constructed without manholes or lateral connections within the side easement. The pipe material in the side easement between streets shall be C 900, SDR 18 polyvinyl chloride water main pipe as described in these Technical Specifications Article 501. A two -way cleanout shall be installed on each lateral at the property line. 403 -1.2. FORCE MAIN PIPE FORCE MAIN PIPE SHALL BE POLYVINYL CHLORIDE OR DUCTILE IRON. Unless otherwise noted in the specifications or construction plans, both polyvinyl chloride and ductile iron force main pipe and fittings shall conform to Article 501 of these Technical Specifications for water main pipe except that DIP shall be Protecto 401 ceramic epoxy lined in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. All polyvinyl chloride pipe which has become deteriorated due to exposure to ultra violet radiation shall be rejected. 403 -2. INSTALLATION 403 -2.1. GRAVITY SEWER PIPE Installation of Thermoplastic gravity sewer pipe shall be in conformance with recommended practices contained in ASTM D 2321. The bottom trench width in an unsupported trench shall be limited to the minimum practicable width (typically pipe OD plus eight inches (8 ") to twelve inches (12 ") on each side) allowing working space to place and compact the haunching material. The use of trench boxes and movable sheeting shall be performed in such a manner that removal, backfill and compaction will not disturb compacted haunching material or pipe alignment. Dewatering of the trench bottom shall be accomplished using adequate means to allow preparation of bedding, placement of the haunching material and pipe in the trench without SECTION IV Page 24 of 106 Updated 2/11/2016 • • • SECTION IV — Technical Specifications standing water. Dewatering shall continue until sufficient backfill is placed above the pipe to prevent flotation or misalignment. Where pipe bedding is insufficient to adequately support pipe, the Contractor will be required to remove unsuitable material and bed pipe in Class I material (one half inch (1/2 ") diameter aggregate) to provide firm support of pipe. Connections to manholes with sanitary pipe shall use a joint two (2) feet in length and shall use an approved water stop around pipe joint entry. The laterals shown on the plans do not necessarily reflect exact locations. The Contractor is required to locate all existing laterals for reconnection and to coordinate with the construction inspector the location of all new laterals. 403 -2.2. FORCE MAIN PIPE Installation of force main pipe shall be in conformance with Article 501 of these Technical Specifications for water main pipe. 403 -3. TESTING 403 -3.1. TESTING OF GRAVITY SEWERS The Contractor shall take all precautions to secure a perfectly water tight sewer under all conditions. The water tightness of a sewer which has a crown lying below groundwater level may be tested by measuring infiltration. The water tightness of sewers having crowns lying above groundwater level may be tested by filling the pipe with water so as to produce a hydrostatic head of two feet or more above the crown of the sewer at the upper end of the test section or the water table outside of the sewer, whichever is higher, and then measuring the exfiltration. In no case shall the infiltration or exfiltration exceed fifty (50) gallons per inch of diameter per mile per day. The Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials and equipment to test the amount of infiltration or exfiltration under the Engineer's direction. Where the infiltration or exfiltration is excessive, the Contractor at their own expense shall take the necessary steps to remedy such conditions by uncovering the sewer, remaking the joints or by replacing the entire length of sewer as required by the Engineer. No such repaired joints may be backfilled until after they have been tested and found to be acceptable. Care shall be taken to avoid flotation. The Contractor shall TV inspect all mains to verify the true and uniform grade and the absence of bellies or dropped joints prior to acceptance. Any dips or sags of more than five percent (5 %) of the inside pipe diameter dimension shall be cause for rejection. The above tests shall be performed at the discretion of the Engineer on any or all sections of the line. 403 -3.2. TESTING OF FORCE MAINS Force mains shall be tested under a hydrostatic pressure of 150 P.S.I. for two (2) hours, as described in Article 501 of these Technical Specifications for the testing of water mains. SECTION IV Page 25 of 106 Updated 2/11/2016 SECTION IV — Technical Specifications 403-4. BASIS OF PAYMENT • 403 -4.1. GRAVITY SEWER PIPE • • Payment for in place sanitary sewer gravity main pipe shall be the unit price per linear foot per appropriate range of depth of cut as contained in the contract proposal. Measurement for payment shall be along the centerline of the sewer main from center to center of manholes. Payment for laterals shall be the unit price per linear foot of pipe as measured from the centerline of the sewer main pipe to the terminal end of the lateral pipe including a two -way cleanout at the property line. Payment for sewer pipe shall include all labor, equipment and materials necessary to complete the installation. This shall include clearing and grubbing, excavation, shoring and dewatering, backfill and grading. 403 -4.2. FORCE MAIN PIPE Payment and measurement of force main pipe shall be the same as described in Article 501 of these Technical Specifications for water main pipe. 404. HDPE DEFORMED - REFORMED PIPE LINING 404 -1. INTENT It is the intention of this specification to provide for the trenchless restoration of eight inch (8 ") to twelve inch (12 ") sanitary sewers by the installation of a high density polyethylene, jointless, continuous, fold and form pipe liner which is watertight and chemically resistant to withstand exposure to domestic sewage including all labor, materials and equipment to provide for a complete, fully restored and functioning installation. 404 -2. PRODUCT AND CONTRACTOR/INSTALLER ACCEPTABILITY The City requires that all contractors be prequalified. See General Conditions regarding contractor prequalification. In addition, the City requires a proven extensive track record for the fold and form liner system to be used in this project. All contractors submitting for prequalification approval for this project must exhibit extensive satisfactory experience in the installation of the proposed liner system and satisfactory evidence that the proposed liner system has been extensively and successfully installed in the Unites States and the State of Florida. The installer must be certified by the liner system manufacturer for installation of the liner system. The City reserves full and complete authority to approve the satisfactory nature of the both the liner system and the installer. 404 -3. MATERIALS Pipe shall be made from P. E. 3408 polyethylene resins complying with ASTM D 3350, cell classification: P.E. 345434 D for High Density. It shall be Type 3, Grade 4, Class D, according to ASTM D 1248. The Contractor shall provide certified test results for review by the Engineer, SECTION IV Page 26 of 106 Updated 2/11/2016 • • • SECTION IV — Technical Specifications from the manufacturer, that the material conforms with the applicable requirements. Material shall have a minimum thickness of SDR 32.5. Pipe specimens shall comply with the minimum property values shown below with the applicable ASTM requirements: Material Property ASTM Method Value HDPE HDPE Tensile Strength D 638 3,300 psi Elasticity Modulus E= 113,000 psi Impact Strength D 256 A 3.0 ft -lb /in Flexure Modulus E= 136,000 psi Expansion Coeff. c =0.009 in/in/deg F At the time of manufacture, each lot of liner shall be reviewed for defects and tested in accordance with ASTM D 2837 and D 1693. At the time of delivery, the liner shall be homogeneous throughout, uniform in color, free of cracks, holes, foreign materials, blisters, or deleterious faults. The Contractor shall provide, as requested, certified test results for review by the Engineer, from the manufacturer, that the material conforms with the applicable requirements. The Engineer may at any time request the Contractor provide test results from field samples to the above requirements. Liner shall be marked at five (5) foot intervals or less with a coded number, which identifies the manufacturer, SDR, size, material, date, and shift on which the liner was extruded. Lining manufacturer shall submit to the Engineer for approval as requested, complete design calculations for the liner thickness. The criteria for liner design shall be HS -20 traffic loading, water table to the ground surface, minimum expected lifetime of fifty (50) years, and no structural strength retained from the existing pipe. Any liner system must be approved by the Engineer prior to receiving bids. Request for contractor prequalification and /or liner system approval must be received by the Engineer no later than fourteen (14) days prior to the date for receiving bids. 404-4. CLEANING /SURFACE PREPARATION It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to clean and prepare the existing pipes for rehabilitation. The Contractor will thoroughly clean the interior of the sewers to produce a clean interior surface free of all coatings, sand, rock, roots, sludge, or other deleterious materials prior to liner insertion. Bypass pumping will be provided by the Contractor as part of the unit cost of restoration. Bypass operations are to be so arranged as to cause minimum disruptions to local traffic, residents and particularly to commercial facilities. During the cleaning and preparation operations all necessary precautions shall be taken to protect the public, all property and the sewer from damage. All material removed from the sewers shall be the Contractor's responsibility for prompt disposal in accordance with all regulatory agency requirements. The Contractor may be required to SECTION IV Page 27 of 106 Updated 2/11/2016 SECTION IV — Technical Specifications control the rate of sewer cleaning in the sanitary system to avoid heavy pollution loads at the City's treatment plants. 404 -5. TELEVISION INSPECTION After cleaning, and again after the rehabilitation work on each section of the project is completed, all pipe sections shall be visually inspected with a digital camera and recorded in DVD format as specified below. 404 -5.1. VIDEO, PHOTO CAPTURE AND DATA COLLECTION REQUIREMENTS FOR MANHOLE AND PIPELINE INSPECTION This section describes the requirements of the Contractor in providing the following minimum requirements for Video, Photo Capture and Database structure to the City. The City is currently using CUES Granite XP video and data collection software. The Contractor shall provide the TV Inspections in the same Granite XP database, photo and video capture format. The Contractor - provided TV Inspections, Database, DVDs, Photos and related files shall have the ability to direct synchronize to the City's existing Granite XP database. 404 -5.2. IMAGE (PHOTOS) CAPTURE FORMAT AND REQUIREMENTS The Inspection image files (pictures) shall have the ability to export to Industry Standard Formats to include JPEG, BMP, and TIFF formats and be transferable by disk, DVD and/or external hard drive to an external personal computer utilizing standard viewers and printers. • 404 -5.3. DIGITAL VIDEO FORMAT AND REQUIREMENTS • Digital video files (Inspection Videos) shall be captured and/or recorded in the MPEG 1, 2 or 4 format or as specified by the City. The Video capture files shall be in MPEG format with data linking (Inspection Observations) to the database file(s). The "Link" of the video capture file to the database observation file is required. The inspection observation(s) shall link to the video record in real -time. The accompanying database shall support the following code systems: WRc, PACP, CUES standard, or current code system being utilized by the City. The Database and Software program (Granite XP V2.X) shall be able to import asset data from an ArcGIS (City current version) geo- database file utilizing the network features to associate Sewer Mains with corresponding Sewer Nodes. The database structure shall retain information on the various structures found within a sewer or storm system. It is important that the structures, nodes, manholes and pipe identifiers and related attribute information be retained as separate tables from the Inspection allowing import of existing data from multiple sources. The data structure allows different projects to reside within a single database. Information gathered in projects shall be available to view by project or by system. Data gathered during project inspection shall be available to view by the selected structure. Therefore, all inspections can be viewed on a structure even if gathered in different projects. SECTION IV Page 28 of 106 Updated 2/11/2016 SECTION IV — Technical Specifications 404 -5.4. SYNCHRONIZATION • The database shall have the ability to synch assets and inspections from replicated databases. The synch process should have built -in error checking for duplicates, updates and any modifications to the data being synched. This allows for multiple sources of data to be effectively consolidated into a single unitary database for analysis and evaluation. • • 404 -6. LINER INSTALLATION Liner shall be sized to field measurements obtained by the Contractor to provide a tight fit to the full interior circumference of the existing sanitary sewer and shall be a continuous, jointless liner product from inside of manhole to inside of manhole. Contractor shall use installation methods approved by the liner manufacturer including liner placement, reforming to fit existing pipe, pressure and heat requirements and reconnection of laterals. The Contractor shall immediately notify the Engineer of any construction delays taking place during the insertion operation. Contractor shall maintain a reasonable backup system for bypass pumping should delays or problems with pumping systems develop. Liner entries at manholes shall be smooth, free of irregularities, and watertight. No pinholes, tears, cracks, thin spots, or other defects in the liner shall be permitted. Such defects shall be removed and replaced by the Contractor at their expense. OSHA requirements for installation procedures, in particular, confined spaces are to be met. 404 -7. LATERAL RECONNECTION Sanitary laterals shall be reconnected as soon as possible to renew service. Laterals are to be reconnected by means of robotics, by internally cutting out the liner to 100% of the area of the original opening. All lateral reconnections are to be grouted to prevent leakage. Grouting method and material is to be approved by the Engineer. Any reconnections to laterals and connections to manholes which are observed to leak shall be resealed by the Contractor. All laterals discovered during the lining process are to be reconnected unless specifically directed otherwise by the City. Contractor shall notify all local system users when the sanitary system will not be available for normal usage by the delivery of door hangers with appropriate information regarding the construction project. 404 -8. TIME OF CONSTRUCTION Construction schedules will be submitted by the Contractor and approved by the Engineer. At no time will any sanitary sewer service connection remain inoperative for more than an eight (8) hour period without a service bypass being operated by the Contractor. In the event that sewage backup occurs and enters buildings, the Contractor shall be responsible for cleanup, repair and property damage costs and claims. 404 -9. PAYMENT Payment for sanitary sewer restoration shall be made per linear foot including all preparation, bypass pumping, equipment, labor, materials, operations, restoration, etc., to provide a fully SECTION IV Page 29 of 106 Updated 2/11/2016 • • SECTION IV — Technical Specifications completed and operational sewer. Payment shall be measured from center of manhole to center of manhole for the sanitary systems and from end of pipe to end of pipe for storm systems. 405. SANITARY MANHOLE LINER RESTORATION 405 -1. SCOPE AND INTENT It is the intent of this portion of the specification to provide for the structural rehabilitation of manhole walls and bases with solid preformed liners and made -in -place liner systems used in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and these specifications. In addition to these specifications, the Contractor shall comply with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations for work. Purpose of work is to eliminate infiltration, provide corrosion protection, repair voids and to restore the structural integrity of the manhole. For any particular system the Contractor will submit manufacturer's technical data and application instructions. All OSHA regulations shall be met. 405 -2. PAYMENT Payment for liners shall be per vertical foot of liner installed from the base to the top of the installed liner. Liners will generally be installed to the top of existing or new corbels. No separate payment will be made for the following items: Bypass pumping; Traffic Control; Debris Disposal; Excavation, including necessary pavement removal; Shoring and/or dewatering; Structural fill; Backfill and compaction; Grout and mortar; Brick; Resetting of the manhole ring and cover; Pipe extensions and connectors necessary to the installation; Replacement of unpaved roadway and grass or shrubbery plot; Replacement of roadway base and asphalt surface; and Appurtenant work as required for a complete and operable system. The cost of such work shall be included in the pay item, per linear foot of liner. 405 -3. FIBERGLASS LINER PRODUCTS 405 -3.1. MATERIALS 405 - 3.1.1. LINERS Liners shall be fiberglass engineered to meet or exceed AASHTO H 20 loading of 16,000 pound vertical wheel load. Manhole liners are to be of the integral corbel design unless otherwise stipulated. Manhole liners are to be as large in diameter as will fit into the existing manhole. The Contractor shall measure the existing manhole immediately prior to ordering materials and is solely responsible for the fitting of the liner. Contractor will be required to submit factory certification for fiberglass liners. The manhole liner shall meet all requirements of ASTM D 3753. 405 - 3.1.2. MORTAR Mortar shall be composed of one part Portland Cement Type I and between two (2) and three (3) parts clean, well graded sand, 100% of which shall pass a No. 8 sieve. SECTION IV Page 30 of 106 Updated 2/11/2016 • • • SECTION IV — Technical Specifications 405 - 3.1.3. GROUTING Grouting shall be a concrete slurry of four (4) bags of Portland Cement Type II per cubic yard of clean, well graded sand. 405 -3.2. INSTALLATION AND EXECUTION Excavate an area around the top of the existing manhole sufficiently wide and deep for the removal of the manhole ring and corbel section. Remove the frame and cover and corbel section without damaging the existing manhole walls. Care is to be taken not to allow brick or soil to fall into the existing manhole. Remove or reinsert loose brick which protrude more than one inch from the interior wall of the manhole and which could interfere with the insertion of the fiberglass liner. If the shelf of the manhole invert is not level around the perimeter, form a flat shelf with mortar. Cut the liner to the proper length. Cutouts in the manhole shall be made to accommodate existing inlet and outlet pipes, drops and cleanouts. Lower the liner into the existing manhole and set the bottom of the liner into quick setting grout. Obtain a good bottom seal to prevent the loss of grout from the annular space between the outside of the liner and the inside wall of the existing manhole. Set the liner as nearly vertical as possible. Pour six inches (6 ") of quick setting grout above the initial bottom seal in the annular void to insure an adequate bottom seal. Bridge the gap from drops, laterals, force mains, cleanouts and all existing piping between the existing manhole wall and the new manhole liner with P.V.C. pipe. Use quick setting mortar to seal the area around the manhole liner and piping. Fill the annular space between the manhole liner and the existing manhole interior walls with grout. Care must be taken not to deflect the manhole liner due to head pressure. Set the existing manhole ring and cover using brick to make elevation adjustments as needed. Observe water tightness and repair any visible leakage. Backfill around the new liner and compact the backfill. Sod the disturbed area. Match existing sod. Where manholes fall in paved areas, refer to Standard Detail Index 104, "Street and Driveway Replacement for Concrete and Asphaltic Concrete Surfaces ". 405-4. STRONG SEAL MS -2 LINER PRODUCT SYSTEM This specification shall govern all work to spray apply a monolithic fiber reinforced cementitious liner to the wall and bench surfaces of brick, concrete or any other construction material; Strong Seal MS 2 product. Described are procedures for manhole preparation, cleaning, application and testing. The applicator must be approved, trained and certified as having successfully completed factory training. The applicator /contractor shall furnish all labor, equipment and materials for applying the Strong Seal MS 2 product directly to the contour of the manhole to form a structural cementitious liner of a minimum one half inch (1/2 ") thickness using a machine specially SECTION IV Page 31 of 106 Updated 2/11/2016 • • • SECTION IV — Technical Specifications designed for the application. All aspects of the installation shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and with the following specifications which includes: 1. The elimination of active infiltration prior to making the application. 2. The removal of any loose and unsound material. 3. The spray application of a pre blended cementitious mix to form a monolithic liner in a two (2) coat application. 405 -4.1. MATERIALS 405 - 4.1.1. PATCHING MIX Strong Seal shall be used as a patching mix according to the manufacturer's recommendations and shall have the following minimum requirements: 1. Compressive Strength (ASTM C -109) 15 min., 200 psi 6 hrs., 1,400 psi 2. Shrinkage (ASTM C -596) 28 days, 150 psi 3. Bond (ASTM C -952) 28 days, 150 psi 4. Cement Sulfate resistant 5. Density, when applied 105 +1- 5 pcf 405 -5. INFILTRATION CONTROL Strong Plug shall be used to stop minor water infiltration according to the manufacturer's recommendations and shall have the following minimum requirements: 1. Compressive strength (ASTM C -109) - 600 psi, 1 hr.; 1000 psi 24 hrs. 2. Bond (ASTM C -952) - 30 psi, 1 hr.; 80 psi, 24 hrs. 405 -6. GROUTING MIX Strong -Seal Grout shall be used for stopping very active infiltration and filling voids according to the manufacturer's recommendations. The grout shall be volume stable, and have a minimum twenty -eight (28) day compressive strength of 250 psi and a one (1) day strength of 50 psi. 405 -7. LINER MIX Strong Seal MS 2 shall be used to form the monolithic liner covering all interior manhole surfaces and shall have the following minimum requirements at twenty -eight (28) days: 1. Compressive strength (ASTM C 109) 3,000 psi 2. Tensile strength (ASTM C 496) 300 psi 3. Flexural strength (ASTM C 78) 600 psi 4. Shrinkage (ASTM C 596) 0% at 90% R.H. 5. Bond (ASTM C 952) 130 psi SECTION IV Page 32 of 106 Updated 2/11/2016 • • • SECTION IV — Technical Specifications 6. Density, when applied 105 + pcf Product must be factory blended requiring only the addition of water at the Project site. Bag weight shall be 50 to 51 pounds and contents shall have dry bulk density of 54 to 56 pounds per cubic foot. Fiberglass rods which are contained in the product shall be alkaline resistant and shall be one -half inch (1/2 ") to five- eighths inch (5/8 ") long with a diameter of 635 to 640 microns. Products shall, in the unmixed state, have a lead content not greater than two percent (2 %) by weight. Strong Seal MS 2C shall be made with Calcium Aluminate Cement and shall be used according to the manufacturer's recommendations in applications where there is evidence of severe sulfide conditions. Product must be factory blended requiring only the addition of water at job site. Bag weight shall be 50 to 51 pounds and contents must have a dry bulk density of 50 to 56 pounds per cubic foot. Cement content must be 65% to 75% of total weight of bag. One bag of product when mixed with correct amount of water must have a wet density of 95 to 108 pounds per cubic foot and must yield a minimum of 0.67 cubic foot of volume. Fiberglass rods must be alkaline resistant with rod lengths not less than one -half inch (1/2 ") in length nor greater than five- eighths inch (5/8 ") in height. Product shall not include any basic ingredient that exceeds maximum allowable EPA limit for any heavy metal. Manufacturer must provide MSDS sheets for product(s) to be used in reconstruction process. A two (2) coat application of liner material will be required (no exceptions) with the first coat rough troweled to force materials into cracks and crevices to set the bond. The second coat to be spray applied to assure a minimum of one -half inch (1/2 ") thickness after troweling or brush finishing to a relatively smooth finish. 405 -8. WATER Shall be clean and potable. 405 -9. OTHER MATERIALS No other material shall be used with the mixes previously described without prior approval or recommendation from the manufacturer. 405 -10. EQUIPMENT A specially designed machine consisting of an optimized progressive cavity pump capable of producing a minimum of 250 psi pumping pressure, contra blend mixer with twin ribbon paddles with discharge, and an air system for spray application of product. Equipment must be complete with water storage and metering system. Mixer and pump is to be hydraulically powered. Equipment is to be mounted to heavy duty construction tandem axle road worthy trailer complete SECTION IV Page 33 of 106 Updated 2/11/2016 • SECTION IV — Technical Specifications with electric brakes and running lights. Internal combustion engine must be included to power the hydraulic system and air compressor. 405 -11. INSTALLATION AND EXECUTION 405 -11.1. PREPARATION 1. Place boards over inverts to prevent extraneous material from entering the sewer lines and to prevent up stream line from flooding the manhole. 2. All foreign material shall be removed from the manhole wall and bench using a high pressure water spray (minimum 1,200 psi). Loose and protruding brick, mortar and concrete shall be removed using a mason's hammer and chisel and/or scraper. Fill any large voids with quick setting patching mix. 3. Active leaks shall be stopped using quick setting specially formulated mixes according to the manufacturer's recommendations. Some leaks may require weep holes to localize the infiltration during the application after which the weep holes shall be plugged with the quick setting mix prior to the final liner application. When severe infiltration is present, drilling may be required in order to pressure grout using a cementitious grout. Manufacturer's recommendations shall be followed when pressure grouting is required. 4. Any bench, invert or service line repairs shall be made at this time using the quick setting mix and following the manufacturer's recommendations. 5. After all preparation has been completed, remove all loose material. ill 405 -11.2. MIXING For each bag of product, use the amount of water specified by the manufacturer and mix using the Spray Mate Model 35C or 35D equipment for thirty (30) seconds to one (1) minute after all materials have been placed in the mixing hopper. Place the mix into the holding hopper and prepare another batch with timing such that the nozzleman can spray in a continuous manner without interruption until each application is complete. 405 -11.3. SPRAYING The surface, prior to spraying, shall be damp without noticeable free water droplets or running water. Materials shall be sprayed, applied to a minimum uniform thickness to insure that all cracks, crevices and voids are filled and a somewhat smooth surface remains after light troweling. The light troweling is performed to compact the material into voids and to set the bond. Not before the first application has begun to take an initial set (disappearance of surface sheen which could be fifteen (15) minutes to one (1) hour depending upon ambient conditions) is the second application made to assure a minimum total finished thickness of one -half inch (1/2 "). The surface is then troweled to a smooth finish being careful not to over trowel so as to bring additional water to the surface and weaken it. A brush finish may be applied to the finished coat to remove trowel marks. Manufacturer's recommendation shall be followed whenever more than twenty -four (24) hours have elapsed between applications. The wooden bench covers shall be removed and the bench is sprayed such that a gradual slope is produced from the walls to the invert with the thickness at the edge of the invert being no less than one -half inch (1/2 "). The SECTION IV Page 34 of 106 Updated 2/11/2016 • • • SECTION IV — Technical Specifications wall bench intersection shall be rounded to a uniform radius, the full circumference of the intersection. The final application shall have a minimum of four (4) hours cure time before being subjected to active flow. 405 -11.4. PRODUCT TESTING At some point during the application, at least four (4) two inch (2 ") cubes may be prepared each day or from every fifty (50) bags of product used, identified and sent, in accordance with the Owner's or Manufacturer's directions, for compression strength testing as described in ASTM C 109. 405 -11.5. CURING Ambient manhole conditions are adequate for curing so long as the manhole is covered. It is imperative that the manhole be covered as soon as possible after the application has been completed. 405 -11.6. MANHOLE TESTING AND ACCEPTANCE Manhole may be vacuum tested from the top of manhole frame to the manhole base. All pipes entering the manhole shall be plugged, taking care to securely place the plug from being drawn into the manhole. The test head shall be placed and the seal inflated in accordance with the manufacturers' recommendations. A vacuum pump of ten inches (10 ") of mercury shall be drawn and the vacuum pump shut off. With the valves closed, the time shall be measured for the vacuum to drop to nine inches (9 "). The manhole shall pass if the time is greater than sixty (60) seconds for forty -eight inch (48 ") diameter, seventy five (75) seconds for sixty inch diameter (60 "), and ninety (90) seconds for seventy -two inch (72 ") diameter manholes. If the manhole fails the initial test, necessary repairs shall be made. Retesting shall proceed until a satisfactory test is obtained. Tests shall be performed by the Contractor under the direction of the Project Engineer. 405 -12. INNERLINE ENVIRONMENTAL SERVICES LINER PRODUCT SYSTEM 405 -12.1. SCOPE Materials and application procedures for manhole rehabilitation for the purpose of restoring structural integrity, providing corrosion resistance, and stopping infiltration by means of: 1. Hydraulic grouting, where required, as a preliminary measure to stop high volume infiltration. 2. Hydrophilic grouting (positive side waterproofing), where required, as follows: a. Hydrophilic foam - injected through wall of manhole to fill voids, and/or b. Hydrophilic gel- injected through wall of manhole to stop active leaks 3. Cementitious waterproofing with crystallization (negative side waterproofing) 4. Calcium aluminate cement lining, minimum of one -half inch (1/2 ") SECTION IV Page 35 of 106 Updated 2/11/2016 SECTION IV — Technical Specifications 5. Epoxy coating, minimum of thirty (30) dry mils 1111 405 -12.2. MATERIALS • • 405 - 12.2.1. REPAIRING CEMENT A quick setting hydraulic cement compound shall be used to plug all visible minor leaks and to instantly stop major leaks, so that further waterproofing processes may proceed unhindered. The repairing cement shall be nonshrinking, nonmetallic, and noncorrosive. The compound shall have the following properties: Set Time Tensile Strength ASTM C 307 Compressive Strength ASTM -C 109 Flexural Strength ASTM C 78 1 -3 minutes 1 day 510 psi 3 days 745 psi 28 days 855 psi 1 day 3,125 psi 7 days 7,808 psi 28 days 9,543 psi 1 day 410 psi 3 days 855 psi 28 days 1,245 psi 405 - 12.2.2. HYDROPHILIC GROUTING Based on conditions found in and around the manhole, the applicator shall pressure inject either one or both of the following materials: 1. An expansive foam grout shall be used to stop major intrusion of water and fill cracks and voids behind the structure's surface. Physical properties are as follows: Tensile Strength 380 psi ASTM D 3574 -86 Elongation 400% ASTM D 3574 -86 Bonding Strength 250 -300 psi 2. A hydrophilic gel grout shall be used for soil stabilization behind the manhole to prevent seepage, to provide a damming effect, and to place a hydrostatic barrier around exterior of manhole. Physical properties are as follows: Density 8.75 -9.17 lbs /gal ASTM D -3574 Tensile Strength 150 psi ASTM D- 412 Elongation 250% ASTM D -3574 Shrinkage Less than 4% ASTM D -1042 Toxicity Non Toxic 405 - 12.2.3. WATERPROOFING A waterproofing component based on the crystallization process shall be applied. The system combines cementitious and silicate based materials that are applied to negative side surfaces to seal and stop leakage caused by hydrostatic pressure. A combination of five coats (using three components -two powders and a special liquid) react with moisture and the constituents of the SECTION IV Page 36 of 106 Updated 2/11/2016 • • SECTION IV — Technical Specifications substrate to form the crystalline structure. It becomes an integral part of the structure and blocks the passage of water. With moisture present, the crystallization process will continue for approximately six (6) months. Upon completion, the color will be light grey. Physical properties are as follows: Slant/Shear bond Strength to Calcium Aluminate Cement ASTM C882 Modified 1,200 1,800 psi Tensile Strength (7 day cure) ASTM C 190 Permeability (3 day cure) CRD 48 55 380 psi (2.62 MPa) 325 psi (2.24 MPa) 8.1x1OA -10 cm /sec to 7.6x1OA -11 cm/sec at 100% RH at 50% RH 405 - 12.2.4. CEMENT LINING A self - bonding calcium aluminate cement shall be applied to restore structural integrity and provide corrosion resistance qualities. The cement (before adding fibers) shall have the following properties: Calcium Aluminate Cement 12 Hrs 24 Hrs 7 Days 28 Days Astm C 495 Compressive Strength, Psi 7000 11000 12000 13000 Astm C 293 Flexural Strength, Psi 1000 1500 1800 2000 Astm C 596 Shrinkage At 90% Humidity -- <0.04 <0.06 <0.08 Astm C 666 Freeze -Thaw Aft 300 Cycle No Damage Astm C 990 Pull - Out Strength 200 - 230 Psi Tensile Astm C 457 Air Void Content (7 Days) 3% Astm C 497 Porosity /Adsorption Test 4 - 5% Modules of Elasticity: 7.10 X 10 PSI after twenty -four (24) hours moist curing at 68 degrees Fahrenheit. The calcium aluminate cement shall be reinforced with inert fibers which comply with ASTM C 1116 and ASTM C 1018, added at the rate of one (1) pound per cubic yard of concrete. The mixture shall be applied to a thickness of at least one half inch (1/2 "), but no greater than two inches (2 "). It will have a dark grey color. 405 - 12.2.5. EPDXY COATING A high build, flexible waterproofing epoxy shall be applied to a minimum of thirty (30) dry mils. This epoxy will seal structure from moisture and provide protective qualities to the surface, including excellent resistance to chemical attack and abrasion. The epoxy shall be 100% solids, can be applied to damp surfaces, cures to a tile like finish, is easy to clean, and has no toxic fumes. Its uses include sewage treatment plants and other sewer structures. The epoxy shall have the following properties at 75 degrees Fahrenheit: SECTION IV Page 37 of 106 Updated 2/11/2016 • SECTION IV — Technical Specifications Mixing Ratio (Parts A:B), by volume 1:1 Color (other colors available on request) Light Gray Pot Life, hrs 1 Tensile Strength, psi, min 2,000 Tensile Elongation, % 10 —20 Water Extractable Substances, mg. /sq. in., max 5 Bond Strength to Cement (ASTM 882) psi 1,800 405 - 12.2.6. CHEMICAL RESISTANCE The sanitary sewer liner shall be resistant to: Alcohols, Trichloroethylene, Nitric Acid (3 %), Jet Fuels, Water, Sulfuric Acid (3% 10 %), MEK, Wine, Butyl Acetate, Beer, Lactic Acid (3 %), Gasoline, Corn Oil, Aluminum Sulfate, Paraffin Oil, Vegetable Juice, Sodium Chloride, Motor Oil, Hydrochloric Acid (3 %), and many others. 405 -12.3. INSTALLATION AND EXECUTION 405 - 12.3.1. PROCEDURAL OVERVIEW Work shall proceed as follows: 1. Remove rungs (steps), if desired by client. 2. Clean manhole and remove debris. a. Plug lines and/or screen out displaced debris. b. Apply acid wash, if necessary, to clean and degrease. c. Hydroblast and/or sand blast structure. d. Remove debris from work area. 3. Repair minor defects in walls, benches, and inverts, as required, with repairing cement. (Note: Major structural repairs, such as rebuilding of benches, will also be made as required by client.) 4. Inject hydrophilic grout through all surfaces, as needed, to eliminate infiltration. 5. Apply cementitious /crystallization waterproofing agents to all surfaces, repeating steps as needed. 6. Spray and/or hand apply calcium aluminate cement lining to all surfaces. 7. Spray apply epoxy coating to all surfaces. NOTE: Steps 1 -5 shall be executed consecutively with minimal delays; calcium aluminate (Step 6) shall require a cure time of at least twenty -four (24) hours for needed adhesion of epoxy (Step 7) to cement lining. 405 - 12.3.2. PREPARATION An acid wash shall be used (if needed) to clean and degrease. Then, if the client desires, the rungs shall be removed. Next, the entire structure is thoroughly water and/or sand blasted to remove any loose or deteriorated material. Care shall be taken to prevent any loose material from SECTION IV Page 38 of 106 Updated 2/11/2016 • • • SECTION IV — Technical Specifications entering lines and other areas by either plugging the lines (where feasible) or inserting protective screens. 405 - 12.3.3. STRUCTURAL REPAIR Hand place or spray apply hydraulic cement material as necessary to prepared surface to fill cracks and voids in structure. Allow twenty (20) minutes before applying waterproofing /crystallization. 405- 12.3.4. INFILTRATION CONTROL Pressure injection of hydrophilic gel and hydrophilic foam. 1. Drill five- eighths inch (5/8 ") holes through active leaking surface. 2. Install all zert fittings, as recommended by manufacturer. 3. Inject material until water flow stops. 4. Remove fittings (if necessary). 405 - 12.3.5. WATERPROOFING /CRYSTALLIZATION PROCESS 1. Apply a slurry coat of powder #1 to moist wall using a stiff brush, forming an undercoat. 2. Apply dry powder #2 to slurry coat by hand. 3. Brush or spray on sealing liquid during the application to penetrate and initiate the crystal forming process. 4. Repeat steps 2 and 3, until there are no visible leaks. 5. Apply powder #1 as an overcoat. 6. Allow one (1) hour to cure before applying cement lining. 405 - 12.3.6. CEMENT LINING 1. Dampen surface. 2. Mix material in mixer as recommended for spray or hand trowel application. 3. Apply cement until required build up of at least one half inch (1/2 ") (and no more than two inches (2 ")) has been achieved. 4. Trowel to smooth finish, restoring contours of manhole. 5. Texture brush surface to prepare for epoxy finish. 6. Allow for a twenty -four (24) hour cure time prior to epoxy coating. NOTE: If conditions of heavy humidity prevail, a dry air blower shall be used to facilitate curing times. SECTION IV Page 39 of 106 Updated 2/11/2016 • • • SECTION IV — Technical Specifications 405 - 12.3.7. EPDXY COATING Spray apply epoxy coating using airless spraying equipment until surface is visibly covered and a thickness of at least thirty (30) mils has been achieved. Manhole may be safely entered after six (6) hours, as epoxy will be hardened. Full cure strength will be achieved at forty eight (48) hours. 405 - 12.3.8. CLEAN UP The work crew shall remove all debris and clean work area. 405 - 12.3.9. MANHOLE TESTING AND ACCEPTANCE Manhole may be vacuum tested from the top of manhole frame to the manhole base. All pipes entering the manhole shall be plugged, taking care to securely place the plug from being drawn into the manhole. The test head shall be placed and the seal inflated in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. A vacuum pump of ten inches (10 ") of mercury shall be drawn and the vacuum pump shut off. With the valves closed, the time shall be measured for the vacuum to drop to nine inches (9 "). The manhole shall pass if the time is greater than sixty (60) seconds for a forty eight inch (48 ") diameter, seventy five (75) seconds for sixty (60) inches, and ninety (90) seconds for seventy -two inch (72 ") diameter manholes. If the manhole fails the initial test, necessary repairs shall be made. Retesting shall proceed until a satisfactory test is obtained. Tests shall be performed by the Contractor under the direction of the Project Engineer. 405- 12.3.10. WARRANTY All materials and workmanship shall be warranted to the Owner for a period of five (5) years, provided that all the above mentioned repair steps are used. SECTION IV Page 40 of 106 Updated 2/11/2016 SECTION IV — Technical Specifications 500 SERIES: POTABLE AND RECLAIMED WATER • MAINS, FIRE LINES AND APPURTENANCES • • 501. SCOPE The Contractor shall furnish all plant, labor, materials and equipment to perform all operations in connection with the construction of potable water mains, fire lines, reclaimed water mains and appurtenances including clearing, excavation, trenching, backfilling and clean up. 502. MATERIALS 502 -1. GENERAL Materials, equipment and supplies furnished and permanently incorporated into the project shall be of first quality in every respect and shall be constructed and finished to high standards of workmanship. Materials shall be suitable for service intended, shall reflect modern design and engineering and shall be fabricated in a first class workmanlike manner. All materials, equipment and supplies shall be new and shall have not been in service at any time previous to installation, except as required in tests or incident to installation. Machined metal surfaces, exposed bearings and glands shall be protected against grit, dirt, chemical corrosion and other damaging effects during shipment and construction. 502 -2. PIPE MATERIALS AND FITTINGS 502 -2.1. DUCTILE IRON PIPE Ductile Iron Pipe shall be in accordance with ANSUAWWA C151/A21.51 81 or latest revision. Pipe thickness class, wall thickness and working pressure shall conform to the following table: Size Class Thickness (In.) Rated Water Working Pressure (PSI) 4" 51 0.26 350 6" 50 0.25 350 8" 50 0.27 350 12" 50 0.31 350 The trench laying condition shall be Type 2, Flat bottom trench backfill lightly consolidated to centerline of pipe. Pipe shall be manufactured in accordance with ANSUAWWA C151/A21.51 81 or latest revision. SECTION IV Page 41 of 106 Updated 2/11/2016 SECTION IV — Technical Specifications Pipe shall be asphalt coated on the outside and standard cement lined and sealed coated with • approved bituminous seal coat in accordance with ANSI /AWWA C104/A21.4 80 or latest revision. Ductile iron pipe shall be used for all hydrant installations and for fire line installations from the main to the backflow preventer. 502 -2.2. POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) PIPE Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe four inch (4 ") through eight inch (8 ") shall be in accordance with ANSUAWWA C900 or latest revision and the American Society for Testing Materials (ASTM) Standard D 2241 and PVC Resin Compound conforming to ASTM Specification D 1784. Polyvinyl Chloride Pipe shall have the same O.D. as Cast and Ductile Iron Pipe and be compatible for use without special adapters with Cast Iron Fittings. Pipe dimension ratio, working pressure and laying length shall conform to the following table: • • Size Dimension Ratio (OD/Thick.) Rated Water Working Pressure (PSI) Laying Length (Ft) 4 18 150 20 6 18 150 20 8 18 150 20 Pipe larger than eight inch (8 ") shall be ductile iron. The City Engineer reserves the right to require the use of ductile iron in sizes four inch (4 ") through eight inch (8 ") when needed due to laying conditions or usage. The bell of four inch (4 ") and larger PVC pipe shall consist of an integral wall section with a solid cross section elastomeric ring which meets the requirements of ASTM D 1869. Each length of pipe shall bear identification that will remain legible during normal handling, storage and installation and so designate the testing agency that verified the suitability of the pipe material for potable water service. All polyvinyl chloride pipe shall be laid with two (2) strands of insulated twelve (12) gauge A.W.G. solid strand copper wire taped to the top of each joint of pipe with about eighteen inches (18 ") between each piece of tape. It is to be installed at every valve box through a two inch (2 ") PVC pipe to twelve inches (12 ") minimum above the top of the concrete slab. The two inch (2 ") PVC pipe shall be the same length as the adjustable valve box, and the two inch (2 ") PVC pipe shall be plugged with a two inch (2 ") removable brass plug with recessed nut. This wire is to be continuous with splices made only by direct bury 3M brand splice kit approved by the Engineer. This wire is to be secured to all valves, tees and elbows. 502 -2.3. FITTINGS AND JOINTS Fitting from four inch (4 ") through sixteen inch (16 ") in size will be compact ductile iron cast in accordance with ANSUAWWA C153 /A 21.53 with mechanical joint bells. Bolts, nuts and gaskets shall be in accordance with requirements of ANSUAWWA C153 /A 21.53. The working pressure rating shall be 350 P.S.I. Ductile iron fittings shall be coated and lined in accordance with SECTION IV Page 42 of 106 Updated 2/11/2016 SECTION IV — Technical Specifications requirements of ANSI /AWWA C104/A21.4. Mechanical joint glands shall be ductile iron in • accordance with ANSI /AWWA C111/A 21.11. When reference is made to ANSI /AWWA Standards, the latest revisions apply. Only those fittings and accessories that are of domestic (USA) manufacture will be acceptable. • • 502 -2.4. RESTRAINT Restraint of plugs, caps, tees, bends, etc., shall be accomplished by the use of approved mechanical restraining rings or glands installed per manufacturer's recommendations. Hydrants shall be restrained by the use of swivel connecting joints. Restraining mechanical joint glands on hydrants shall be used only where hydrant runout length precludes the use of swivel joint connectors. 502 -2.5. PIPE WITHIN CASING All pipe placed within casings shall be slip joint ductile iron restrained by the use of restraining gaskets designed for use with the particular joint being installed and have properly sized casing spacers (Cascade Series) installed on the pipe so that the pipe will be centered within the casing. Each end of the casing shall be properly sealed to prevent the intrusion of soil, water, or debris within the casing itself. It shall be sealed by brick and mortar, cement or any approved method by the Engineer. 502 -3. GATE VALVES Discs of valves shall be operated by methods which will allow operation in any position with respect to the vertical. Gate valves for interior piping or exposed above grade outside structures, shall be hand wheel operated with rising stems. Valves four inches (4 ") and larger, buried in earth shall be equipped with two inch (2 ") square operating nuts, valve boxes and covers. Valves shall be fitted with joints suitable for the pipe with which they are to be used. The direction of opening for all valves shall be to the left (counter clockwise). Unless otherwise shown or specified, valves for high pressure service shall be rated at not less than 150 psi cold water, non - shock. The manufacturer's name and pressure rating shall be cast in raised letters on the valve body. Installation shall be in accordance with good standard practice. Exposed pipelines shall be so supported that their weight is not carried through valves. Two Inch (2 ") diameter and smaller are not allowed. These should be approved ball valves. Three Inch (3 ") diameter are not allowed. Gate Valves, four inch (4 ") to sixteen inch (16 ") diameter, inclusive, shall be resilient seated gate valves encapsulated with EPDM Rubber in conformance with ANSI /A.W.W.A. Standard Specification C509 -515 latest revision. These valves shall include the following features consistent with C509 -515, full opening unobstructed waterway, zero leakage at 200 p.s.i. differential pressure, all internal parts removable from bonnet without removing body from pressure main, corrosion resistant bronze or stainless steel nonrising stem with 0-ring bonnet seal with epoxy coated inside and outside cast iron or ductile iron valve body. SECTION IV Page 43 of 106 Updated 2/11/2016 • • • SECTION IV — Technical Specifications Gate valves larger than sixteen inches (16 ") shall be suitable for the service intended and shall be resilient seated gate valves encapsulated with EPDM rubber in conformance with ANSI /AWWA. These valves shall include the following features consistent with C509 -80, full opening unobstructed waterway, zero leakage at 200 psi differential pressure. All valves shall be equipped with steel cut bevel gears, extended type gear case and rollers, bronze or babbitt tracks and scrapers and valved by -pass. 502-4. VALVE BOXES Valve boxes shall be of standard extension design and manufacture and shall be made of cast iron. No PVC Risers or Derisers are allowed as part of a valve box assembly. They are to be three -piece valve box assemblies. The lower part of the assembly can be ordered in various heights to accommodate different depths. Suitable sizes of valve boxes and extension pieces shall be provided where shown. The valve box cover shall be of cast iron. Valve boxes and their installation shall be included in the bid price for valves. Refer to City Index No. 402; Sheet 1 of 5 & Sheet 2 of 5 for potable water valve pad detail, and City Index No. 502; Sheet 1 of 2 & Sheet 2 of 2 for reclaimed water valve boxes and pad detail. 502 -5. HYDRANTS No other hydrants, other than those listed below, may be used in extension to or replacement of the City of Clearwater potable water system: • Kennedy Guardian #K 81D Fire Hydrant, • Mueller Super Centurion 25 Fire Hydrant • AVK Nostalgic 2780. • American Darling B -84 -B. No substitutions shall be allowed without the approval of the City of Clearwater. Above hydrants shall be in accordance with the latest revision of the AWWA Specification C 502 and include the following modifications: 1. All shipments to be palletized and tailgate delivery. 2. Hydrants shall conform to A.W.W.A. Standard C -502 latest revision and must be UL /FM listed. 3. Hydrants shall be of the compression type, closing with line pressure. 4. The operating threads will be contained in an operating chamber sealed at the top and bottom with an 0-ring seal. The chamber will contain a lubricating grease or oil. 5. Hydrants shall be of the traffic model breakaway type, with the barrel made in two sections with the break flange located approximately two inches (2 ") above the ground line. Breakaway bolts are not allowed. 6. Operating nut shall be of one -piece bronze or ductile iron construction. 7. A dirt shield shall be provided to protect the operating mechanism from grit buildup and corrosion due to moisture. SECTION IV Page 44 of 106 Updated 2/11/2016 • • • SECTION IV — Technical Specifications 8. A thrust washer shall be supplied between the operating nut and stem lock nut to facilitate operation. 9. Operating nut shall be a #7 one and a half inch (1 -1/2 ") pentagon nut. 10. Nozzles shall be of the tamper resistant, one quarter (1/4) turn type with 0-ring seals or threaded into upper barrel. Nozzles shall be retained with a stainless steel locking device. 11. The main valve shall be of EPDM solid rubber. 12. The seat shall be of a bronze ring threaded to a bronze insert in the hydrant shoe, with 0- rings to seal the barrel from leakage of water in the shoe. 13. The main valve stem will be 304 or higher grade stainless steel and made in two sections with a breakable coupling. 14. Hydrant shall have a six inch (6 ") Mechanical Joint epoxy lined elbow, less accessories. 15. Hydrant shall have a five and one quarter inch (5 -1/4 ") valve opening, and shall be a left hand operation to open. 16. Hydrant shall be without drains. 17. Hydrant shall have two (2) two and one half inch (2 -1/2 ") hose nozzles and one (1) four and one half inch (4 -1/2 ") pumper nozzle. Threads shall be in accordance with the National Standard Hose Coupling Thread Specifications. 18. Hydrant body shall have a factory finish of yellow paint. All paints shall comply with AWWA standard C- 502 -85 or latest revision. All hydrants will be shop tested in accordance with the latest AWWA Specification C 502. Restrained joint assemblies shall be used which have bolted mechanical and swivel joints from the hydrant tee through to the hydrant. Restrained joints shall absorb all thrust and prevent movement of the hydrant. All hydrants shall be provided with an auxiliary gate valve so that the water to the hydrant may be shut off without the necessity of closing any other valve in the distribution system. No hydrants shall be installed on the reclaimed water system unless approved by the City of Clearwater's Engineering Department. 502 -6. SERVICE SADDLES Service saddles shall be used on all service taps to four inch (4 ") P.V.C. water main. The largest service connection allowable on four inch (4 ") main shall be one and one half inch (1- 1/2 "). Service saddles shall be used on all two inch (2 ") service connections to six inch (6 ") and larger mains. Service saddles (JCM 406 series or Ford FC 202 series) shall be wide bodied ductile iron with epoxy or nylon coating and shall have stainless steel straps. 502 -7. TESTS, INSPECTION AND REPAIRS 1. All materials shall be tested in accordance with the applicable Federal, ASTM or AWWA Specification and basis of rejection shall be as specified therein. Certified copies of the tests shall be submitted with each shipment of materials. SECTION IV Page 45 of 106 Updated 2/11/2016 • • • SECTION IV — Technical Specifications 2. All materials will be subject to inspection and approved by the Engineer after delivery; and no broken, cracked, misshapen, imperfectly coated or otherwise damaged or unsatisfactory material shall be used. 3. All material found during the progress of the work to have cracks, flaws, or other defects shall be rejected and promptly removed from the site. 4. If damage occurs to any pipe, fittings, valves, hydrants or water main accessories in handling, the damage shall be immediately brought to the Engineer's attention. The Engineer shall prescribe corrective repairs or rejection of the damaged items. 502 -8. BACKFLOW PREVENTERS The City of Clearwater owns and maintains all backflow prevention devices that are installed within their system. Therefore, any and all devices must be purchased from the City and installed by City work forces. Backflow prevention devices installed on customer's service lines at the point of delivery (service connection) shall be of a type in accordance with AWWA specification C506 or latest revision. Two (2) different types of backflow prevention devices are allowed. Type of device, and when required, is determined by the degree of hazard presented to the municipal water system from possible backflow of water within the customer's private system. The types of devices allowed are: 1. Double Check Valve Assembly - a device composed of two (2) single, independently acting, approved check valves, including tightly closing shutoff valves located at each end of the assembly and suitable connections for testing the water tightness of each check valve. 2. Reduced pressure principle backflow prevention device - a device containing a minimum of two (2) independently acting, approved check valves, together with an automatically operated pressure differential relief valve located between the two check valves. The unit must include tightly closing shutoff valves located at each end of the device, and each device shall be fitted with properly located test cocks. 502 -9. TAPPING SLEEVES Steel body tapping sleeves shall be JCM Industries Inc., JCM 412 or Smith -Blair 622. All steel body tapping sleeves shall have heavy welded ASTM A 285, Grade C steel body, stainless steel bolts, manufacturer's epoxy coated body, and three - quarter inch (3/4 ") bronze test plug. 502 -10. BLOW OFF HYDRANTS Blow offs are not allowed. SECTION IV Page 46 of 106 Updated 2/11/2016 SECTION IV — Technical Specifications 503. CONSTRUCTION • 503 -1. MATERIAL HANDLING • • 1. Pipe, fittings, valves, hydrants and accessories shall be loaded and unloaded by lifting with hoists or skidding so as to avoid shock or damage. Under no circumstances shall such materials be dropped. Pipe handled on skidways shall not be skidded or rolled against pipe already on the ground. 2. Pipe shall be so handled that the coating and lining will not be damaged. If, however, any part of the coating or lining is damaged, the repair shall be made by the Contractor at their expense in a manner satisfactory to the Engineer. 3. In distributing the material at the site of the work, each piece shall be unloaded opposite or near the place where it is to be laid in the trench. 503 -2. PIPE LAYING 503 -2.1. ALIGNMENT AND GRADE The pipe shall be laid and maintained to the required lines and grades with fittings, valves and hydrants at the required locations, spigots centered in bells; and all valves and hydrant stems plumb. All pipe installed shall be pigged and properly blown off before any pressure testing and sterilization of the pipe can be completed. The depth of cover over the water main shall be a minimum of thirty inches (30 ") and a maximum of forty -two inches (42 ") below finished grade, except where approved by the Engineer to avoid conflicts and obstructions. Whenever obstructions not shown on the plans are encountered during the progress of the work and interfere to such an extent that an alteration of the plans is required, the Engineer shall have the authority to change the plans and order a deviation from the line and grade or arrange with the Owners of the structures for the removal, relocation, or reconstruction of the obstructions. 503 -2.2. INSTALLATION Proper implements, tools, and facilities satisfactory to the Engineer shall be provided and used by the Contractor for the safe and convenient performance of the work. All pipe, fittings, valves and hydrants shall be carefully lowered into the trench piece by piece by means of a derrick, ropes, or other suitable tools or equipment in such a manner as to prevent damage to materials and protective coatings and linings. Under no circumstances shall materials be dropped or dumped in the trench. If damage occurs to any pipe, fittings, valves, hydrants or accessories in handling, the damage shall be immediately brought to the Engineer's attention. The Engineer shall prescribe corrective repairs or rejection of the damaged items. All pipe and fittings shall be carefully examined for cracks and other defects while suspended above the trench immediately before installation in final position. Spigot ends shall be examined with particular care as this area is the most vulnerable to damage from handling. Defective pipe SECTION IV Page 47 of 106 Updated 2/11/2016 • • • SECTION IV — Technical Specifications or fittings shall be laid aside for inspection by the Engineer who will prescribe corrective repairs or rejection. All lumps, blisters, and excess coating shall be removed from the bell and spigot end of each pipe, and the outside of the spigot and the inside of the bell shall be wire brushed and wiped clean and dry and free from oil and grease before the pipe is laid. Pipe joints shall be made up in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Every precaution shall be taken to prevent foreign material from entering the pipe while it is being placed in the line. If the pipe laying crew cannot put the pipe into the trench and in place without getting earth into the pipe, the Engineer may require that, before lowering the pipe into the trench, a heavy, woven canvas bag of suitable size shall be placed over each end and left there until the connection is to be made to the adjacent pipe. During laying operation, no debris, tools, clothing or other materials shall be placed in the pipe. As each length of pipe is placed in the trench, the spigot end shall be centered in the bell and the pipe forced home and brought to correct line and grade. The pipe shall be secured in place with approved backfill material tamped under it except at the bells. Precautions shall be taken to prevent dirt from entering the joint space. At times when pipe laying is not in progress, the open ends of pipe shall be closed by a watertight plug or other means approved by the Engineer. The cutting of pipe for inserting valves, fittings, or closure pieces shall be done in a neat and workmanlike manner without damage to the pipe or cement lining and so as to leave a smooth end at right angles to the axis of the pipe. Pipe shall be laid with bell ends facing in the direction of laying unless directed otherwise by the Engineer. Where pipe is laid on the grade of ten percent (10 %) or greater, the laying shall start at bottom and shall proceed upward with the bell ends of the pipe upgrade. Wherever it is necessary to deflect pipe from a straight line, either in the vertical or horizontal plane to avoid obstructions or to plumb stems, or where long radius curves are permitted, the amount of deflection allowed shall not exceed that allowed under the latest edition of ANSI/AWWA C600 -82 and C900 81 or latest revisions. No pipe shall be laid when, in the opinion of the Engineer, trench conditions are unsuitable. 503 -3. SETTING OF VALVES, HYDRANTS AND FITTINGS 503 -3.1. GENERAL Valves, hydrants, fittings, plugs and caps shall be set and joined to pipe in the manner specified above for installation of pipe. 503 -3.2. VALVES Valves in water mains shall, where possible, be located on the street property lines extended unless shown otherwise on the plans. All valves shall be installed at the tee in all cases, not to exceed eighteen inches (18 ") from the main line. SECTION IV Page 48 of 106 Updated 2/11/2016 SECTION IV — Technical Specifications The valve box shall not transmit any shock or stress to the valve and shall be centered and plumb over the wrench nut of the valve, with the box cover flush with the surface of the finished pavement or such other level as may be directed. Refer to City Index No. 402; Sheet 1 of 5 & Sheet 2 of 5 for potable water valve pad detail, and City Index No. 502; Sheet 1 of 2 & Sheet 2 of 2 for reclaimed water valve box and pad detail. 503 -3.3. HYDRANTS Hydrants shall be located as shown or as directed so as to provide complete accessibility and minimize the possibility of damage from vehicles or injury to pedestrians. All hydrants located ten feet (10') of more from the main shall have a gate valve at the main and another gate valve at the hydrant location. No valve can be located anywhere in the hydrant run to circumvent the use of two valves. Refer to City Index No. 402; Sheet 5 of 5 for potable water hydrants. No hydrants shall be installed on the reclaimed water system unless approved by the City of Clearwater's Engineering Department. All hydrants shall stand plumb and shall have their nozzles parallel with, or at right angles to, the curb, with the pumper nozzle facing the curb. Hydrants shall be set to the established grade, with nozzles as shown or as directed by the Engineer. Each hydrant shall be connected to the main with a six inch (6 ") ductile iron branch controlled by an independent six inch (6 ") gate valve. If hydrant is placed greater than ten feet (10') from the main, an additional valve shall be installed at the hydrant and shall be included in the hydrant assembly cost. 503 -3.4. ANCHORAGE Movement of all plugs, caps, tees, bends, etc., unless otherwise specified shall be prevented by attaching approved mechanical restraining rings or glands and installed per manufacturer's recommendations. Hydrants shall be held in place with restrained swivel joints. Restraining mechanical joint glands on hydrants may be used where hydrant run out length precludes the use of hydrant connecting swivel joints. Where special anchorage is required, such anchorage shall be in accordance with details shown on the plans. 503-4. CONNECTIONS TO EXISTING LINES Where shown on the plans or directed by the Engineer, the water lines constructed under this contract shall be connected to the existing lines now in place. No such connection shall be made until all requirements of the specifications as to tests, flushing, and sterilization have been met and the plan of the cut in to the existing line has been approved by the Engineer. Where connections are made between new work and existing work, the connections shall be made in a thorough and workmanlike manner using proper materials and fittings to suit the actual conditions. All fittings shall be properly sterilized and pipe will be properly swabbed before connections to existing facilities. All connections to existing facilities will be completed under the supervision of the City of Clearwater. SECTION IV Page 49 of 106 Updated 2/11/2016 SECTION IV — Technical Specifications 504. TESTS 504 -1. HYDROSTATIC TESTS After installation of water mains, complete with all associated appurtenances including service taps, all sections of newly laid main shall be subject to a hydrostatic pressure test of 150 pounds per square inch for a period of two (2) hours and shall conform to AWWA C600 latest revision. All mains shall be pigged and flushed to remove all sand and other foreign matter before any hydrostatic test can or will be performed. The pressure test shall be applied by means of a pump connected to the pipe in a manner satisfactory to the Engineer. The pump, pipe connection and all necessary apparatus, together with operating personnel, shall be furnished by the Contractor at their expense. The Contractor shall make all necessary taps into the pipe line. The Owner will furnish the water for the test. Before applying the test pressure, all air shall be expelled from the pipe line. 504 -2. NOTICE OF TEST The Contractor shall give the City of Clearwater's Owner Representative forty -eight (48) hours advance notice of the time when the installation is ready for hydrostatic testing. 505. STERILIZATION Before the system is put into operation, all water mains and appurtenances and any item of new construction with which the water comes in contact, shall be thoroughly sterilized in accordance with AWWA C651. • 505 -1. STERILIZING AGENT The sterilizing agent shall be liquid chlorine, sodium hypochlorite solution conforming to Federal Specification O- S -602B, Grade D, or dry hypochlorite, commonly known as "HTH" or "Perchloron ". 505 -2. FLUSHING SYSTEM Prior to the application of the sterilization agent, all mains shall be thoroughly flushed. Flushing shall continue until a clean, clear stream of water flows from the hydrants. Where hydrants are not available for flushing, such flushing shall be accomplished at the installed blow off devices generally at the ends of the lines. 505 -3. STERILIZATION PROCEDURE All piping, valves, fittings and all other appurtenances shall be sterilized with water containing a minimum chlorine concentration of 75 ppm at any point in the system. This solution shall then remain in the distribution system for a minimum contact period of eight (8) hours and never more than twenty -four (24) hours before it is flushed out. All valves in the lines being sterilized shall be opened and closed several times during the contact period. SECTION IV Page 50 of 106 Updated 2/11/2016 • • SECTION IV — Technical Specifications 505-4. RESIDUAL CHLORINE TESTS After the sterilization outlined above has been accomplished, flushing shall continue until free residual chlorine tests not less than 0.2 ppm nor more than 3.0 ppm. Residual chlorine test shall be in accordance with standard methods using a standard DPD test set. 505 -5. BACTERIAL TESTS After the water system has been sterilized and thoroughly flushed as specified herein, City of Clearwater Water Division or the Owner's Representative personnel shall take samples of water from remote points of the distribution system in suitable sterilized containers. The City shall forward the samples to a laboratory certified by the Florida State Board of Health for bacterial examination in accordance with AWWA C651. If tests of such samples indicate the presence of coliform organisms, the sterilization as outlined above shall be repeated until tests indicate the absence of such pollution. The bacterial tests shall be satisfactorily completed before the system is placed in operation and it shall be the Contractor's responsibility to perform the sterilization as outlined above. If methods of sterilization differ materially from those outlined above, such methods shall be in accordance with directives of the Florida State Board of Health and all methods employed shall have the approval of that agency. Definite instructions as to the collection and shipment of samples shall be secured from the laboratory prior to sterilization and shall be followed in all respects. The City of Clearwater shall secure clearance of the water main from the Florida Department of Environmental Protection before the water distribution system is put into operation. 506. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 506 -1. GENERAL Bids must include all sections and items as specified herein and as listed on the Bid Form. Payment for the work of constructing the project will be made at the unit price or lump sum payment for the items of work as set forth in the Bid, which payment will constitute full compensation for all labor, equipment, and materials required to complete the work. No separate payment will be made for the following items and the cost of such work shall be included in the applicable pay items of work: • Clearing and grubbing • Excavation, including necessary pavement removal • Shoring and/or dewatering • Structural fill • Backfill • Grading • Tracer wire • Refill materials • Joint materials • Tests and sterilization • Appurtenant work as required for a complete and operable system. SECTION IV Page 51 of 106 Updated 2/11/2016 SECTION IV — Technical Specifications 506 -2. FURNISH AND INSTALL WATER MAINS . 506 -2.1. MEASUREMENT • • The quantity for payment shall be the actual number of feet of pipe of each size and type satisfactorily furnished and laid, as measured along the centerline of the completed pipe line, including the length of valves and fittings. 506 -2.2. PAYMENT Payment of the applicable unit price shall be full compensation for furnishing all plant, labor, materials and equipment, and constructing the water mains completely and ready for operation. 506 -3. FURNISH AND INSTALL FITTINGS 506 -3.1. MEASUREMENT The quantity for payment will be the number of tons, or decimal part thereof, of ductile iron fittings satisfactorily furnished and installed. Fitting weights shall be based on weights stamped on the body of the fitting, provided such weights do not exceed the theoretical weights by more than the tolerances permitted in ANSUAWWA C110 /A 21.10 82, latest revision, in which case, the weight will be based upon the theoretical weight plus the maximum tolerance. 506 -3.2. PAYMENT Payment of the applicable unit price shall be full compensation for furnishing all plant, labor, materials, and equipment required to furnish and install ductile iron fittings. 506-4. FURNISH AND INSTALL GATE VALVES COMPLETE WITH BOXES AND COVERS 506 -4.1. MEASUREMENT The quantity for payment shall be the number of gate valves of each size satisfactorily furnished and installed. 506 -4.2. PAYMENT Payment of the applicable unit price for each size shall be full compensation for furnishing all plant, labor, material and equipment and installing the valve complete with box and cover. 506 -5. FURNISH AND INSTALL FIRE HYDRANTS 506 -5.1. MEASUREMENT The quantity for payment shall be the number of fire hydrants satisfactorily furnished and installed. The only hydrants allowed to be installed in the City of Clearwater utilities system are listed in Article 501 -2.5 of these Technical Specifications. No exceptions. SECTION IV Page 52 of 106 Updated 2/11/2016 • • • SECTION IV — Technical Specifications 506 -5.2. PAYMENT Payment of the applicable unit price shall be full compensation for furnishing all plant, labor, material and equipment and installing the fire hydrant completely including necessary thrust anchorage, six inch (6 ") pipe between the main and the hydrant and gate valve and valve box on the hydrant lead. SECTION IV Page 53 of 106 Updated 2/11/2016 • SECTION IV— Technical Specifications 600 SERIES: STORMWATER 601. RAISING OR LOWERING OF STORM DRAINAGE STRUCTURES Storm Drainage Structures shall be raised or lowered as indicated on the plans or as indicated by the Engineer. 601 -1. BASIS OF PAYMENT Payment, unless covered by a bid item, shall be included in the cost of the work. 602. UNDERDRAINS The Contractor shall construct sub - surface drainage pipe as directed in the Scope of Work and detail drawings contained in the Project construction plans. In general, underdrain pipe shall be embedded in a bed of #6 FDOT aggregate, located behind the back of curb and aggregate surface covered with a non - degradable fibrous type filter material. A #57 aggregate may be used in lieu of #6 if it is washed and screened to remove fines. The aggregate may be stone, slag or crushed gravel. Unless otherwise noted on the plans, underdrain pipe shall be eight inches (8 ") in diameter, polyvinyl chloride pipe, in conformance with ASTM F -758 "Standard Specification For Smooth Wall PVC Underdrain Systems for Highways" latest revision, minimum stiffness of 46 in conformance with ASTM D2412, perforations in conformance with AASHTO M -189 described in FDOT Section 948 -1.5 or latest revision and in conformance with ASTM D3034 - SDR 35. Alternate acceptable underdrain pipe material is Contech A -2000 which is a rigid PVC pipe that exceeds ASTM Specifications D1784, minimum cell classification of 12454B or 12454C, manufactured per ASTM F949 -93a, minimum pipe stiffness of 50 psi, with no evidence of splitting, cracking or breaking when pipe is tested in accordance with ASTM D2412 at 60% flatting and with a double gasket joint. Underdrain pipe placed beneath existing driveways and roadways shall be non - perforated pipe with compacted backfill. All poly- chloride pipe which has become deteriorated due to exposure to ultra violet radiation shall be rejected. Where ductile iron pipe is specified, pipe material shall be the same as specified for potable water pipe in these technical specifications. All underdrain aggregate shall be fully encased in a polyester filter fabric "sock" (Mirafi 140 -N or approved equal) per the construction detail drawings. Filter aggregate for underdrains shall be as specified in the FDOT Standard Specifications, Section 901 — Course Aggregate, and shall be either #6 or #57. If #57 is used, it must be washed and screened to remove fines. The aggregate may be stone, slag, or crushed gravel. 602 -1. BASIS OF MEASUREMENT Measurement shall be the number of linear feet of eight inch (8 ") Sub -drain in place and accepted. SECTION IV Page 54 of 106 Updated 2/11/2016 • • • SECTION IV — Technical Specifications 602 -2. BASIS OF PAYMENT Payment shall be based upon the unit price per linear foot for underdrain as measured above, which shall be full compensation for all work described in this section of the specifications and shall include all materials, equipment, and labor necessary to construct the underdrain (specifically underdrain pipe, aggregate and filter fabric). Underdrain clean -outs, sod, driveway, road and sidewalk restoration shall be paid by a separate bid item. 603. STORM SEWERS All storm drain pipe installed within the City of Clearwater shall be steel reinforced concrete unless otherwise approved by the City Engineer. Said pipe shall comply with Section 430 of FDOT Standard Specifications. All reinforced concrete pipe joints shall be wrapped with Mirafi 140N filter fabric or equivalent (as approved by the City Engineer). The cost for all pipe joint wraps shall be included in the unit price for the pipe. All pipe, just before being lowered into a trench, is to be inspected and cleaned. If any difficulty is found in fitting the pieces together, this fitting is to be done on the surface of the street before laying the pipe, and the tops plainly marked in the order in which they are to be laid. No pipe is to be trimmed or chipped to fit. Each piece of pipe is to be solidly and evenly bedded, and not simply wedged up. Before finishing each joint, some suitable device is to be used to find that the inverts coincide and pipe is clear throughout. 603 -1. TESTING AND INSPECTION The Contractor shall take all precautions to secure a watertight sewer under all conditions. The work under this Article shall include the internal video recording of new stormwater drainage pipes and drainage structures. The Contractor shall provide the City with a video of the completed stormwater drainage system, and a written report. The Contractor shall pump down and clean the pipes and drainage structures, to the satisfaction of the City, prior to video recording. The video shall be of the standard DVD format, in color, with all the pertinent data and observations recorded as audio on the DVD. The data should include: 1) An accurate recorded footage of the pipe lengths. 2) The drainage structure number and pipe size. 3) The run of the pipe and direction of flow (i.e. from S -1 to S -2). 4) Details of structural defects, broken pipes, sags, dips, misalignments, obstructions and infiltration. The written report shall include the four (4) items listed previously. All visual and video recording inspections shall be completed by the Contractor and be in accordance with Section 430 -4.8 of FDOT Standard Specifications. Any deficient or damaged pipe discovered during the video recording process shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to repair or replace at their own expense within the contractual duration. SECTION IV Page 55 of 106 Updated 2/11/2016 • • • SECTION IV — Technical Specifications As a complement to the video report, the Contractor shall also provide digital photos of areas of concern in electronic (computer CD/DVD) and hard copy form (in color). All known pipe breaks or those breaks discovered after the video inspection shall be repaired by the Contractor regardless of the test allowances. Faulty sections of drainage pipes or drainage structures rejected by the Engineer shall be removed and re -laid by the Contractor. Sections of pipe that are repaired, re -laid or replaced shall be accompanied with a corresponding post construction video inspection at the Contractor's expense. In all cases that a leak is found, re- inspection shall be required at the Contractor's expense, to confirm that the problem has been resolved. 603 -2. BASIS OF PAYMENT Payment shall be the unit price per linear foot for storm sewer pipe in place and accepted, measured along the centerline of the storm sewer pipe to the inside face of exterior walls of storm manholes or drainage structures and to the outside face of endwalls. Said unit price includes all work required to install the pipe (i.e. all materials, equipment, filter fabric wrap, gravel bedding if needed for stabilization, labor and incidentals, etc.). 604. STORM MANHOLES, INLETS, CATCH BASINS OR OTHER STORM STRUCTURES For details on specific design of a type of storm structure refer to Index Numbers 201 to 231. When required, inlets, catch basins or other structures shall be constructed according to the plans and applicable parts of the specifications, Articles 301, 302, 303 and 202, and as approved by the Engineer. Said structures shall be protected from damage by the elements or other causes until acceptance of the work. 604 -1. BUILT UP TYPE STRUCTURES Built up type manholes shall be constructed of brick with cast iron frames and covers as shown on Index Numbers 201. Invert channels shall be constructed smooth and semi circular in shape conforming to inside of adjacent sewer section. Changes in direction of flow shall be made in a smooth curve of as large a radius as possible. Changes in size and grade of channels shall be made gradually and evenly. Invert channels shall be built up with grout. The storm structure floor outside of channels shall be made smooth and sloped toward channels. Manhole steps shall not be provided. Joints shall be completely filled and the mortar shall be smoothed from inside of the manholes. The entire exterior of brick manholes shall be plastered with a skim coat of one half inch (1/2") of mortar. Brick shall be laid radially with every sixth course being a stretcher course. In cases where a storm pipe extends inside a structure, the excess pipe will be cut off with a concrete saw and shall not be removed with a sledge hammer. SECTION IV Page 56 of 106 Updated 2/11/2016 • SECTION IV — Technical Specifications 604 -2. PRECAST TYPE Precast manholes shall be constructed as shown on Index 202. The manhole base shall be set on a pad of dry native sand approximately five inches (5 ") thick to secure proper seating and bearing. Precast Manholes and Junction Boxes: The Contractor may substitute precast manholes and junction boxes in lieu of cast in place units unless otherwise shown on the plans. Precast Inlets will not be acceptable. When precast units are substituted, the construction of such units must be in accordance with ASTM C 478, or the standard specifications at the manufacturer's option. Precast structures must also meet the requirement that on the lateral faces, either inside or outside, the distance between precast openings for pipe or precast opening and top edge of precast structure be no less than wall thickness. A minimum of four courses of brick will be provided under manhole ring so that future adjustment of manhole lid can be accommodated. Manhole steps shall not be provided. 604 -3. BASIS OF PAYMENT Payment for Junction Boxes, Manholes or other structures shall be on a unit basis. 605. GABIONS AND MATTRESSES 605 -1. MATERIAL 605 -1.1. PVC COATED WIRE MESH GABIONS & MATTRESSES • 605 - 1.1.1. GABION & MATTRESS BASKETS Gabion and mattress baskets units shall conform to ASTM A975, be of non - raveling construction and fabricated from a double twist by twisting each pair of wires through three half turns developing the appearance of a triple twist. The galvanized wire core shall have a diameter of 0.106 inches. • 605 - 1.1.2. PVC (POLYVINYL CHLORIDE) COATING The coating shall be gray in color and shall have a nominal thickness of 0.0216 inches but not less than 0.015 inches in thickness. The protective PVC plastic shall be suitable to resist deleterious effects from exposure to light, immersion in salt or polluted water and shall not show any material difference in its initial compound properties. The PVC compound is also resistant to attack from acids and resistant to abrasion. The PVC coating shall be extruded and adhere to the wire core prior to weaving. The PVC coated wire shall be woven into a double twisted hexagonal mesh having uniform openings of 3 1/4 inches by 4 Y2 inches. The overall diameter of the mesh wire (galvanized wire core plus PVC coating) shall be 0.146 inches. Selvedge and reinforcing wire shall be of heavily galvanized wire core, 0.134 inches in diameter, coated with PVC and having an overall diameter (galvanized wire core plus PVC coating) of 0.174 inches. Lacing and connecting wire shall be of soft tensile strength (75,000 PSI max), heavily galvanized wire core, 0.087 inches in diameter, coated with PVC and having an overall diameter (galvanized wire core plus PVC coating) of 0.127 inches. SECTION IV Page 57 of 106 Updated 2/11/2016 • SECTION IV — Technical Specifications The use of alternate wire fasteners shall be permitted in lieu of tie wire providing the alternate fastener produces a four (4) wire selvedge joint with a strength of 1200 lbs. per linear foot while remaining in a locked and closed condition. Properly formed interlocking fasteners shall be spaced from 4 to 6 inches and have a minimum 3/4 square inch inside area to properly confine the required selvedge wires. 605 - 1.1.3. GABION AND MATTRESS FILLER MATERIAL: The filler stone shall be from a source approved by the Engineer before delivery is started. Representative preliminary samples of the stone shall be submitted by the contractor or supplier for examination and testing by the Engineer. The stone shall have a minimum specific gravity of 2.3 and be of a quality and durability sufficient to insure permanency in the structure. The individual stones shall be free of cracks, seams, and other defects that would tend to promote deterioration from natural causes, or which might reduce the stones to sizes that could not be retained in the gabion or mattress baskets. All filler material shall be uniformly graded between 4 inch and 8 inch (equivalent spherical diameter) and shall be angular in form. Rounded stones shall not exceed 10% of the stone, by weight and 70% of the stone, by weight, shall exceed the largest dimension of the mesh opening. Crushed concrete shall not be used for filler material. 605 - 1.1.4. GEOTEXTILE FABRIC Fabric shall conform to FDOT Standard Specifications, Section 985. • 605 -2. PERFORMANCE Gabions and Reno Mattresses shall be installed according to the manufacturer's recommendations and as shown on the Drawings. Fabrication of gabion baskets shall be in such a manner that the sides, ends, lid and diaphragms can be assembled at the construction site into rectangular baskets of the sizes specified and shown on the Drawings. Gabions and mattresses shall be of single unit construction; the base, lid ends and sides shall be either woven into a single unit or one edge of these members connected to the base section of the gabion in such a manner that the strength and flexibility at the connecting point is at least equal to that of the mesh. Where the length of the gabion and mattress exceeds one and one -half its horizontal width, they shall be equally divided by diaphragms of the same mesh and gauge as the mattresses shall be furnished with the necessary diaphragms secured in proper position on the base so that no additional tying is required at this juncture. The wire mesh is to be fabricated so that it will not ravel. This is defined as the ability to resist pulling apart at any of the twists or connections forming the mesh when a single wire strand in a section of mesh is cut. Each gabion or mattress shall be assembled by tying all untied edges with binding wire. The binding wire shall be tightly looped around every other mesh opening along seams so that single and double loops are alternated. A line of empty gabions shall be placed into position according to the contract drawings and binding wire shall be used to securely tie each unit to the adjoining one along the vertical • SECTION IV Page 58 of 106 Updated 2/11/2016 • • • SECTION IV — Technical Specifications reinforced edges and the top selvedges. The base of the empty gabions placed on top of a filled line of gabions shall be tightly wire to the latter at front and back. To achieve better alignment and finish in retaining walls, gabion stretching is recommended. Connecting wires shall be inserted during the filling operation in the following manner: Gabions shall be filled to one third full and one connecting wire in each direction shall be tightly tied to opposite faces of each cell at one third height. The gabion shall then be filled to two thirds full and one connecting wire in each direction shall be tightly tied to opposite face of each cell at one two third height. The cell shall then be filled to the top. Filler stone shall not be dropped more than twelve inches (12 ") into the gabions and mattresses. Geotextile fabric shall be installed at locations shown in the Drawings. The surface to receive the cloth shall be prepared to a relatively smooth condition free of obstructions which may tear or cut the cloth. The panel shall be overlapped a minimum of 30 inches and secured against movement. Cloth damaged or displaced during installation, gabion work, or backfill shall be replaced or repaired to the satisfaction of the Engineer at the contractor's expense. The work shall be scheduled so that the fabric is not exposed to ultraviolet light more than the manufacturer's recommendations or five days, whichever is less. In wet conditions, a base shall be established by spreading and compacting #57 stone prior to placement of geotextile fabric and gabions or mattresses. SECTION IV Page 59 of 106 Updated 2/11/2016 SECTION IV — Technical Specifications 700 SERIES: STREETS AND SIDEWALKS • 701. RESTORATION OR REPLACEMENT OF DRIVEWAYS CURBS, SIDEWALKS AND STREET PAVEMENT Driveways, sidewalks, and curbs destroyed or damaged during construction shall be replaced and shall be the same type of material as destroyed or damaged, or to existing City Standards, whichever provides the stronger repair. All street pavement destroyed or damaged shall be replaced with the same type of material, to existing City Standards, unless the existing base is unsuitable as determined by the Engineer, then the base shall be replaced with City approved material. All replaced base shall be a minimum eight inches (8 ") compacted thickness, or same thickness as base destroyed plus two inches (2 "), if over six inches (6 "), and compacted to 98% of maximum density per AASHTO T-180. Unless called for in the proposal as separate bid items, cost of the above work including labor, materials and equipment required shall be included in the bid price per linear foot of main or square yard of base. The bid price for street pavement, restoration or replacement when called for in the proposals, shall include all materials, labor and equipment required to complete the work, and shall be paid for on a square yard basis. When replacement is over a trench for utilities, the area of replacement shall be limited to twice the depth of the cut plus twice the inside diameter of the pipe. All necessary restoration exceeding this footprint will be at the Contractor's expense. The bid price for restoration or placement of driveways, curbs and sidewalks, when called for in the proposals, shall include all materials, labor and equipment required to complete the work and • shall be paid for on the basis of the following units: Driveways, plant mix - per square yard: concrete - per square foot; curbs - per linear foot; sidewalk four inches (4 ") or six inches (6 ") thick - per square foot. Concrete walks at drives shall be a minimum of six inches (6 ") thick and be reinforced with 6/6 X 10/10 welded wire mesh (also see Articles 303 and 707). The Contractor shall notify the Project Inspector a minimum of twenty -four (24) hours in advance of all driveway, curb, sidewalk and street restoration and replacement work. • 702. ROADWAY BASE AND SUBGRADE 702 -1. BASE This specification describes the construction of roadway base and subgrade. The Contractor shall refer to Section IV, Article 101 "Scope of Work" of the City's Contract Specifications for additional roadway base and subgrade items. Roadway base shall be eight inches (8 ") compacted minimum thickness unless otherwise noted on the plans or directed by the Engineer. The subgrade shall be twelve inches (12 ") compacted minimum thickness with a minimum Limerock Bearing Ratio (LBR) of 40 unless otherwise noted on the plans or directed by the Engineer. The Contractor shall obtain from an independent testing laboratory a Proctor and an LBR for each type material. The Contractor shall also have an independent testing laboratory perform all required density testing. Where unsuitable material is SECTION IV Page 60 of 106 Updated 2/11/2016 SECTION IV — Technical Specifications found within the limits of the base, Section IV, Article 204 (Unsuitable Material Removal) of the City's Technical Specifications will apply. • Once the roadway base is completed, it shall be primed that same day (unless otherwise directed by the Engineer) per Section 300 of FDOT's Standard Specifications. Repairs required to the base that result from a failure to place the prime in a timely manner shall be done to the City's satisfaction, and at the Contractor's expense. No paving of the exposed base can commence until the City approves the repaired base. The cost for placement of prime material shall be included in the bid item for base. The Contractor shall notify the Project Inspector a minimum of twenty -four (24) hours in advance of all base and subgrade placement or reworking. The following base materials are acceptable: 1. Shell Base: Shell base shall be constructed in accordance with Sections 200 and 913 of FDOT's Standard Specifications, and shall have a minimum compacted thickness as shown on the plans. The shell shall be FDOT approved. The cost of the prime coat shall be included in the bid item price for base. 2. Limerock Base: Limerock base shall be constructed in accordance with Sections 200 and 911 of FDOT's Standard Specifications, and shall have a minimum compacted thickness as shown on the plans. The limerock shall be from a FDOT approved certified pit. The cost of the prime coat shall be included in the bid item price for base. 3. Crushed Concrete Base: Crushed concrete base shall be constructed in accordance with Sections 204 and 901 of FDOT's Standard Specifications, and shall have a minimum compacted thickness as shown on the plans. The crushed concrete material shall be • FDOT approved. The Contractor shall provide certified laboratory tests on gradation to confirm that the crushed concrete base material conforms to the above specifications. The LBR shall be a minimum of 100. LBR and gradation tests shall be provided to the City by the Contractor once a week for continuous operations, or every 1000 tons of material, unless requested more frequently by the City Engineer or designee. The cost of the prime coat shall be included in the bid item price for base. 4. Superpave Asphalt Base: Full depth asphalt base shall be constructed in accordance with Section 234 of FDOT's Standard Specifications, and shall have a minimum compacted thickness as shown on the plans. The cost for preparation, placement, and compaction shall be included in the per ton unit cost for asphalt unless otherwise noted in the project scope and plans. The cost of the tack coat shall be included in the bid item price for asphalt or base. 5. Reclaimed Asphalt Pavement Base: Reclaimed asphalt pavement base shall be constructed in accordance with Section 283 of FDOT's Standard Specifications, and shall have a minimum compacted thickness as shown on the plans. As per FDOT Section 283, RAP material shall be used as a base course only on non - limited access paved shoulders, shared use paths, or other non - traffic bearing applications. The cost for preparation, placement, and compaction shall be included in the per ton unit cost for asphalt unless otherwise noted in the project scope and plans. The cost of the tack coat shall be included in the bid item price for asphalt or base. • SECTION IV Page 61 of 106 Updated 2/11/2016 • • • SECTION IV — Technical Specifications 702 -1.1. BASIS OF MEASUREMENT FOR BASE AND REWORKED BASE The basis of measurement shall be the number of square yards of base in place and accepted as called for on the plans. The maximum allowable deficiency shall be a half -inch (1/2 "). Areas deficient in thickness shall either be fixed by the Contractor to within acceptable tolerance, or if so approved in writing by the City Engineer, may be left in place. No payment, however, will be made for such deficient areas that are left in place. 702 -1.2. BASIS OF PAYMENT FOR BASE AND REWORKED BASE The unit price for base shall include: all materials, roadbed preparation, placement, spreading, compaction, finishing, prime, base, subgrade (unless the plans specify a separate pay item), stabilization, mixing, testing, equipment, tools, hauling, labor, and all incidentals necessary to complete the work. Payment for asphalt base shall be included in the per ton unit cost for asphalt unless otherwise noted in the project scope and plans. 702 -2. SUBGRADE All subgrade shall be stabilized and constructed in accordance with Sections 160 and 914 of FDOT's Standard Specifications unless otherwise noted herein. All subgrade shall have a minimum compacted thickness of 12" unless otherwise shown on the plans or directed by the Engineer. If limerock is used, it shall also meet the requirements of Section 911 of FDOT's Standard Specifications. Where unsuitable material is found within the limits of the subgrade, Section IV, Article 204 (Unsuitable Material Removal) of the City's Contract Specifications will apply. The extent of said removal shall be determined by the Engineer in accordance with accepted construction practices. The Contractor is responsible for clearing, grading, filling, and removing any trees or vegetation in the roadbed below the subgrade to prepare it per the plans. The cost of this work shall be included in the unit price for base or subgrade. The Contractor shall obtain from an independent testing laboratory the bearing value of the subgrade after the materials are mixed for the stabilized subgrade. 702 -2.1. BASIS OF MEASUREMENT The basis of measurement shall be the number of square yards of stabilized subgrade in place and accepted as called for on the plans. The maximum allowable deficiency for mixing depth shall be per Section 161 -6.4 of FDOT's Standard Specifications. Acceptable bearing values shall be per Section 160 -7.2 of FDOT's Standard Specifications. Areas deficient in thickness or bearing values shall either be corrected by the Contractor to within acceptable tolerance, or if so approved in writing by the City Engineer, may be left in place. No payment, however, will be made for such deficient areas that are left in place. 702 -2.2. BASIS OF PAYMENT The unit price for subgrade shall include: roadbed preparation, placement, spreading, compaction, finishing, testing, stabilizing, mixing, materials, hauling, labor, equipment and all incidentals necessary to complete the work. If no pay item is given, subgrade shall be included in the bid item for base. SECTION IV Page 62 of 106 Updated 2/11/2016 SECTION IV — Technical Specifications 703. ASPHALTIC CONCRETE MATERIALS • This specification is for the preparation and application of all asphaltic concrete materials on roadway surfaces unless otherwise noted. • • 703 -1. ASPHALTIC CONCRETE 703 -1.1. AGGREGATE All aggregates shall be obtained from an approved FDOT source and shall conform to Sections 901 through 915 of FDOT's Standard Specifications. 703 -1.2. BITUMINOUS MATERIALS All bituminous materials shall conform to Section 916 of FDOT's Standard Specifications. 703 -2. HOT BITUMINOUS MIXTURES - PLANT, METHODS, EQUIPMENT & QUALITY ASSURANCE The plant and methods of operation used to prepare all asphaltic concrete and bituminous materials shall conform to the requirements of Section 320 of FDOT's Standard Specifications. Unless otherwise noted, all acceptance procedures and quality control /assurance procedures shall conform to the requirements of Section 330 of FDOT's Standard Specifications. The City shall have the right to have an independent testing laboratory select, test, and analyze, at the expense of the City, test specimens of any or all materials to be used. The results of such tests and analyses shall be considered, along with the tests or analyses made by the Contractor, to determine compliance with the applicable specifications for the materials so tested or analyzed. The Contractor hereby understands and accepts that wherever any portion of the work is discovered, as a result of such independent testing or investigation by the City, which fails to meet the requirements of the Contract documents, all costs of such independent inspection and investigation as well as all costs of removal, correction, reconstruction, or repair of any such work shall be borne solely by the Contractor. Payment reductions for asphalt related items shall be determined by the following: 1. Density per FDOT's Standard Specifications. 2. Final surface or friction course tolerances per FDOT's Standard Specifications. 3. Thickness will be determined from core borings. Deficiencies of '/4" or greater shall be corrected by the Contractor, without compensation, by either replacing the full thickness for a length extending at least twenty -five feet (25') from each end of the deficient area, or when the Engineer allows for an overlay per FDOT's Standard Specifications. In addition, for excesses of one - quarter inch (1/4") or greater, the Engineer will determine if the excess area shall be removed and replaced at no compensation, or if the pavement in question can remain with payment to be made based on the thickness specified in the contract. The Contractor shall notify the Project Inspector a minimum of twenty -four (24) hours in advance of the placement of all asphalt. SECTION IV Page 63 of 106 Updated 2/11/2016 SECTION IV — Technical Specifications 703 -3. ASPHALT MIX DESIGNS AND TYPES • All asphalt mix designs, acceptance procedures and quality control /assurance procedures shall conform to the requirements of Sections 330 and 334 of FDOT Standard Specifications. All asphalt mix designs shall be approved by the Engineer prior to the commencement of the paving operation. Reclaimed asphalt pavement (RAP) material may be substituted for aggregate in the asphaltic concrete mixes up to 25% by weight. 703-4. ASPHALT PAVEMENT DESIGNS AND LAYER THICKNESS All asphalt pavement designs shall conform to the following requirements: Type SP /Spec 334 -1 Type FC /Spec 337 -8 Type B /Spec 234 -8 ATPB /287 -8 703 -5. GENERAL CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS The general construction requirements for all hot bituminous pavements (including limitations of operations, preparation of mixture, preparation of surface, placement and compaction of mixture, surface requirements, correction of unacceptable pavement, Quality Control Testing, etc.) shall be in accordance with Section 330 of FDOT's Standard Specifications. • 703-6. CRACKS AND POTHOLE PREPARATION • 703 -6.1. CRACKS Cracks in roadway pavement shall be repaired prior to the application of asphaltic concrete by the following steps: 1. All debris to be removed from cracks by compressed air or other suitable method. 2. Apply a multiple layered application of bituminous binder and fine aggregate, as appropriate to the depth of the crack until the void of the crack is completely filled to the level of the surrounding roadway surface. 3. If application of asphaltic concrete is not to begin immediately after crack repair, cracks are to be sanded to prevent vehicular tracking. 4. Payment for crack filling shall be included in the unit price for asphaltic concrete. 703 -6.2. POTHOLES Potholes shall be repaired prior to the application of asphaltic concrete by the following steps: 1. All debris is to be removed from potholes by hand, sweeping, or other suitable method. 2. A tack coat is to be applied to the interior surface of the pothole. 3. The pothole is to be completely filled with asphaltic concrete, and thoroughly compacted. SECTION IV Page 64 of 106 Updated 2/11/2016 • • SECTION IV — Technical Specifications 4. Payment for pothole preparation shall be included in the unit price for asphaltic concrete. 703 -7. ADJUSTMENT OF MANHOLES The necessary adjustments of sanitary sewer and storm drain manholes and appurtenances shall be accomplished by the Contractor. The Contractor shall be paid on a per unit basis for each item. The use of manhole adjustment risers is acceptable under the following conditions: The riser shall meet or exceed all FDOT material, weld, and construction requirements. The riser shall consist of an A -36 hot rolled steel meeting or exceeding the minimum requirements of A.S.T.M. A -36. The riser shall be a single piece with a stainless steel adjustment stud and shall have a rust resistant finish. The use of cast iron, plastic, or fiberglass risers is not permitted. In addition, the installation of each riser shall be per manufacturer's specifications. Each manhole shall be individually measured, and each riser shall be physically marked to ensure that the proper riser is used. Also, the ring section shall be cleaned, and a bead of chemically resistant epoxy applied to the original casting, prior to installation of the riser. It is the Contractor's responsibility to ensure that the manholes are measured, the risers are physically marked, the ring sections are thoroughly cleaned, and that the epoxy is properly applied prior to installation of each riser. If risers are not used, the adjustment of manholes shall be accomplished by the removal of pavement around manhole, grade adjustment of ring and cover, and acceptable replacement and compaction of roadway materials prior to paving. A full depth backfill using asphalt is acceptable. The use of Portland cement for backfill is not acceptable. All manhole and valve adjustments shall be accomplished prior to the application of final asphaltic concrete surface. Unless otherwise noted in the specs or on the plans, the paving operation shall occur within seven (7) calendar days from the completion of the adjustment. On arterial roadways, the manholes are to be ramped with asphalt during the time period between initial adjustment and final resurfacing. Water and gas valves, sewer cleanouts, valve boxes, tree aeration vents, etc., will be adjusted by the Contractor with the cost for this work to be included in the unit cost of the asphalt. Care must be taken around said appurtenances to ensure that they are not paved over. It is the Contractor's responsibility to inform the owners of all utilities of impending work and coordinate their adjustments so they are completed prior to the scheduled paving. 703 -8. ADDITIONAL ASPHALT REQUIREMENTS 1. All impacted radius returns within project limits shall be paved unless otherwise directed by the Construction Inspector or Engineer, with payment to be included in the per ton bid item for asphalt. 2. All pavement markings impacted by placement of asphalt shall be replaced prior to the road being open to traffic unless otherwise noted in the contract scope and plans. 3. All project related debris shall be hauled off the job site by the Contractor in a timely manner and at their own expense in conformance with all regulatory requirements. SECTION IV Page 65 of 106 Updated 2/11/2016 • • SECTION IV — Technical Specifications 4. The Contractor shall pay particular attention to sweeping when paving. Prior to paving, all construction areas shall be swept with a Municipal type sweeper (either vacuum or mechanical type) that picks up and hauls off, dust and dirt. The sweeper must be equipped with its own water supply for pre - wetting to minimize dust. Moreover, the Contractor shall sweep debris off of sidewalks, driveways, curbs and roadways each day before leaving the job site. 5. The application of tack and prime coats (either required or placed at the Engineer's discretion) shall be placed per Section 300 of FDOT's Standard Specifications. Tack shall also be applied to the face of all curbs and driveways. The cost (including heating, hauling and applying) shall be included in the per ton bid item for asphalt, unless otherwise noted in the project scope and plans. 6. Leveling course and spot patching shall be applied to sections of the road as noted on the plans, or as directed by the Engineer, per Section 330 of FDOT's Standard Specifications. The cost shall be included in the per ton unit cost for asphalt, unless otherwise noted in the project scope and plans. 7. If an asphalt rubber binder is required, it shall conform to the requirements of Section 336 of FDOT's Standard Specifications. 8. On all streets with curb and gutter, the final compacted asphalt shall be one - quarter inch (1/4 ") above the lip or face of said curb per City Index 101. 703 -9. BASIS OF MEASUREMENT Basis of measurement will be the number of tons of asphaltic concrete completed, in place and accepted. Truck scale weights will be required for all asphaltic concrete used. 703 -10. BASIS OF PAYMENT Payment shall be made at the contract unit price for asphaltic concrete surface as specified and measured above. This price shall include all materials, preparation, hauling, placement, tack and/or prime coat either required or placed at Engineer's discretion, leveling, spot patching, filling of cracks, pothole repair, sweeping, debris removal, labor, equipment, tools, and incidentals necessary to complete the asphalt work in accordance with the plans and specifications. 704. ADJUSTMENT TO THE UNIT BID PRICE FOR ASPHALT When this Article applies to the contract, the unit bid price for asphalt will be adjusted in accordance with the following provisions: 1. Price adjustment for asphalt shall only be made when the current FDOT Asphalt Price Index varies more than ten percent (10 %) from the bid price at the time of the bid opening. 2. The Bituminous Material Payment Adjustment Index published monthly by the FDOT shall be used for the adjustment of unit prices. This report is available on FDOT's internet site. The address is: http: / /www. dot. state.fl.us / construction /fuel &bit /fuel &bit.shtm. For additional information, call FDOT at (850) 414 -4252. SECTION IV Page 66 of 106 Updated 2/11/2016 • SECTION IV — Technical Specifications 3. The FDOT Payment Adjustment Index in effect at the time of the bid opening will be used for the initial determination of the asphalt price. 4. The FDOT Payment Adjustment Index in effect at the time of placement of the asphalt will be used for payment calculation. 5. The monthly billing period for contract payment will be the same as the monthly period for the FDOT Payment Adjustment Index. 6. No adjustment in bid prices will be made for either tack coat or prime coat. 7. No price adjustment reflecting any further increases in the cost of asphalt will be made for any month after the expiration of the allowable contract time. 8. The City reserves the right to make adjustments for decreases in the cost of asphalt. 705. ASPHALT DRIVEWAYS New driveways or existing asphalt driveways that must be altered for project construction shall be constructed or replaced in accordance with the specifications for paving the street with the exception that the base shall be six inches (6 "). Remove only enough to allow adequate grade for access to the street. Use Article 703 Asphaltic Concrete, of these Technical Specifications, as specified for the street paving. When the finished surface of the existing drive is gravel, replacement shall be of like material. Payment shall be the same as Asphalt Driveways. 705 -1. BASIS OF MEASUREMENT IllMeasurement shall be the number of square yard of Asphalt Driveways in place and accepted. • 705 -2. BASIS OF PAYMENT Payment shall be the unit price per square yard for Asphalt Driveways as measured above, which price shall be full compensation for all work described in this section of the specifications and shall include all materials, equipment, tools, labor and incidentals necessary to complete the work. 706. CONCRETE CURBS Concrete Curbs shall be constructed to the line, grade and dimensions as shown on the plans. Unless otherwise noted, all concrete curbs shall have fiber mesh reinforcement and have a minimum strength of 3000 p.s.i. at 28 days. Expansion joints shall be placed at intervals not to exceed 100 feet, and scored joints shall be placed at intervals not to exceed ten feet (10'). In addition, all the requirements of City Articles 301, 302 and 303 shall also apply. The Contractor shall notify the Project Inspector a minimum of twenty -four (24) hours in advance of the placement of all concrete curbs. 706 -1. BASIS OF MEASUREMENT The basis of measurement shall be linear feet of curb in place and accepted. SECTION IV Page 67 of 106 Updated 2/11/2016 SECTION IV — Technical Specifications 706 -2. BASIS OF PAYMENT 110 Payment shall be the unit price per linear foot of curb, which price shall be full compensation for all work described in this and other applicable parts of the specifications and shall include all materials, equipment, tools, labor and incidentals necessary to complete the work. • • 707. CONCRETE SIDEWALKS AND DRIVEWAYS 707 -1. CONCRETE SIDEWALKS Concrete sidewalks shall be constructed to the line, grade and dimensions as shown on the plans or herein specified. Unless otherwise noted, all concrete sidewalks shall have fiber mesh reinforcement and have a minimum strength of 3000 p.s.i. at 28 days. Unless otherwise specified, all concrete sidewalks shall have a minimum width of four feet (4'). Concrete sidewalks shall have a minimum thickness of four inches (4 "), except at driveway crossings where a minimum thickness of six inches (6 ") is required. Also, 6/6 X 10 /10 welded wire mesh reinforcement is required for all sidewalk that crosses driveways. The welded wire mesh shall be positioned in the middle to upper third of the placement. No compensation shall be given if the welded wire mesh is not properly placed. Expansion joints shall be placed at intervals of not more than 100 hundred feet, and scoring marks shall be made every five feet (5'). Concrete shall be poured only on compacted subgrade. In addition, all the requirements of Articles 301, 302 and 303 of these Technical Specifications shall also apply. 707 -2. CONCRETE DRIVEWAYS Concrete driveways, whether new construction or replacement, shall be a minimum of six inches (6') in thickness with 6/6 x 10 /10 welded wire mesh reinforcement and a minimum horizontal distance between expansion joints of no less than four feet (4') measured in any direction. The welded wire mesh shall be positioned in the middle to upper third of the placement. No compensation shall be given if the welded wire mesh is not properly placed. Concrete shall be poured only on compacted subgrade. In addition, all the requirements of Articles 301, 302 and 303 of these Technical Specifications shall also apply. The Contractor shall notify the Project Inspector a minimum of twenty -four (24) hours in advance of the placement of all concrete sidewalks and driveways. 707 -3. CONCRETE CURB RAMPS The contractor is responsible for constructing ADA compliant concrete curb ramps per the plans and installing detectable warning surfaces on said ramps as called for in the plan set. Concrete curb ramps and detectable warning surfaces are to be constructed per FDOT Standards and Specifications. 707-4. BASIS OF MEASUREMENT The basis of measurement shall be the number of square feet of four inch (4 ") concrete sidewalk, six inch (6 ") concrete sidewalk, and six inch (6 ") concrete driveways in place and accepted. SECTION IV Page 68 of 106 Updated 2/11/2016 SECTION IV — Technical Specifications 707 -5. BASIS OF PAYMENT • Payment shall be the unit price per square foot for each item as measured above, which shall be full compensation for all work described in this section and other applicable parts of the specifications and shall include all materials, equipment, tools, welded wire mesh where required, labor and incidentals necessary to complete the work. • • 708. MILLING OPERATIONS 708 -1. EQUIPMENT, CONSTRUCTION & MILLED SURFACE Unless otherwise noted in the specs, plans or this Article, the milling operation shall be performed in accordance with Section 327 of FDOT's Standard Specifications. The Contractor shall notify the City of Clearwater Project Representative a minimum of twenty -four (24) hours in advance of all milling. 708 -2. ADDITIONAL MILLING REQUIREMENTS 1. If the milling machine is equipped with preheating devices, the Contractor is responsible to secure any necessary permits, and for complying with all local, state and federal environmental regulations governing operation of this type of equipment. 2. All milled surfaces must be repaved within seven (7) days from the time it was milled, unless otherwise noted in the contract documents. 3. Prior to paving, all milled areas shall be swept with a Municipal type sweeper either of the vacuum or the mechanical type that picks up and hauls off, dust and dirt. The sweeper must be equipped with its own water supply for pre- wetting to minimize dust. Moreover, the Contractor shall sweep debris off of sidewalks, driveways and curbs in addition to the roadways before leaving the job site. 4. In cases where concrete valley swales are present, the adjoining pavement shall be milled to allow for the new asphalt grade to be flush with the concrete surface. 5. The Contractor shall be responsible for removing any asphalt that remains in the curb line and/or median curbs after the milling operation of a street is complete. The cost of this removal shall be included in the bid item for milling. 6. All radius returns on streets to be milled shall also be milled unless otherwise directed by the Engineer, with payment to be included in the bid item for milling. 7. Any leveling or base replacement required after milling shall be applied to sections of the road as noted on the plans, or directed by the Engineer, per Section 330 of FDOT's Standard Specifications The cost shall be included in the per ton unit cost for asphalt, unless otherwise noted in the project scope and plans. 8. Any roadway base material exposed as a result of the milling operation shall be primed that same day (unless otherwise directed by the Engineer) per Section 300 of FDOT's Standard Specifications. Repairs required to said base that result from a failure to place the prime in a timely manner shall be done to the City's satisfaction, and at the Contractor's expense. No paving of the exposed base can commence until the City SECTION IV Page 69 of 106 Updated 2/11/2016 • • SECTION IV — Technical Specifications approves the repaired base. The cost of said prime shall be included in the bid item for milling. 9. Prior to the placement of asphalt, the face of all curbs and driveways shall be tacked after the milling operation is complete. 708 -3. SALVAGEABLE MATERIALS Unless otherwise specified, all salvageable materials resulting from milling operations shall remain the property of the City. The transporting and stockpiling of salvageable materials shall be performed by the Contractor. The Contractor shall contact the City Project Representative to schedule delivery of material at least 48 hours prior to starting work. 708-4. DISPOSABLE MATERIALS All surplus materials not claimed by the City shall become the responsibility of the Contractor. The Contractor shall dispose of the material in a timely manner and in accordance with all regulatory requirements in areas provided by the Contractor at no additional expense to the City. 708 -5. ADJUSTMENT AND LOCATION OF UNDERGROUND UTILITIES All private utilities and related structures requiring adjustment shall be located and adjusted by their owners at the owner's expense. City -owned utilities and structures shall be located by the Owner /City and adjusted by the contractor. The Contractor shall arrange their schedule to allow utility owners the time required for such adjustments (minimum 48 hours notice per State Statute). All utility adjustments shall be completed prior to the commencement of milling and resurfacing operations. 708 -6. ADJUSTMENT OF UTILITY MANHOLES The necessary adjustments of sanitary sewer and stormwater utility manholes and appurtenances shall be accomplished by the Contractor in accordance with Section IV, Article 703 -7 of the City's Technical Specifications. 708 -7. TYPES OF MILLING There are two types of milling used by the City: A. Wedge — This will consist of milling a six foot (6') wide strip along the curb line of the pavement adjacent to the curb so the new asphalt will align with the original curb height and pavement cross section. B. Full Width — This will consist of milling the entire roadway (i.e. curb line /edge of pavement to curb line /edge of pavement). All existing horizontal and vertical geometry shall remain unless otherwise indicated or approved by the Engineer. 708 -8. MILLING OF INTERSECTIONS Intersections, as well as other areas (including radius returns) are to be milled and repaved to restore and/or improve the original drainage characteristics. Said work should extend SECTION IV Page 70 of 106 Updated 2/11/2016 • • • SECTION IV — Technical Specifications approximately fifty (50) to one hundred (100) feet in both directions from the low point of the existing swale. 708 -9. BASIS OF MEASUREMENT The quantity to be paid for will be the area milled, in square yards, completed and accepted. 708 -10. BASIS OF PAYMENT The unit price for milling shall include: all materials, preparation, hauling, transporting and stockpiling of salvageable materials, disposal of all surplus material, any required milling of radius returns and intersections, prime and /or tack coat either required or placed at Engineer's discretion, removal of asphalt from curbs, sweeping, labor, equipment, and all incidentals necessary to complete the milling in accordance with the plans and specifications. SECTION IV Page 71 of 106 Updated 2/11/2016 • • SECTION IV — Technical Specifications 800 SERIES: TRAFFIC SIGNALS, SIGNS AND MARKINGS 801. TRAFFIC SIGNAL EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS All traffic signal work shall be performed per FDOT's Standard Specifications (Sections 603 through 699), unless otherwise specified in the contract documents and plans. This specification includes, but is not limited to, the following items: all necessary equipment, materials, guaranties, acceptance procedures, signal timings, field tests, grounding, conduit, signal and interconnect cable, span wire assemblies, pull and junction boxes, electrical power service assemblies, poles, signal assemblies, pedestrian assemblies, inductive loop detectors, pedestrian detectors, traffic controller assemblies, controller cabinets and accessories, removal of existing traffic signal equipment, and internally illuminated signs. All traffic signal installations shall be mast arms and conform to the requirements of FDOT's Mast Arm Assembly standard, and shall be signed and sealed by a professional engineer registered in the State of Florida. All mast arm calculations, as well as the geotechnical report, shall also be signed and sealed by a professional engineer registered in the State of Florida. All mast arm colors shall be determined and approved by the City prior to ordering from the manufacturer. All traffic signal indicators for vehicles and pedestrians shall be LEDs and, approved by both the City and FDOT. In addition to this, all pedestrian signal indicators shall utilize countdown features. Contractor changes to the operation of an existing signal is prohibited unless directed by the City's Traffic Engineering Division. All damaged inductive loop detectors shall be restored by the contractor per FDOT Index 17781. 801 -1. BASIS OF MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT The basis of measurement and payment shall be specified in the contract documents and/or plans and shall include all equipment, preparation, materials, testing and incidentals required to complete the work per the plans. 802. SIGNING AND MARKING All signing and marking work shall be performed per FDOT's Standard Specifications, unless otherwise specified in the contract documents and plans. This specification includes the following work: RPM's (Section 706), painted traffic stripes and markings (Section 710), thermoplastic stripes and markings (Section 711) and tubular delineators /flex posts (Sections 705 and 972). The Contractor is responsible to ensure that striping is correctly placed. Errors in striping or markings shall be "blacked -out" with paint, unless otherwise directed by the Engineer. No payment will be made for these incorrect or "blacked -out" areas. Omissions in striping or markings shall be corrected to the City's satisfaction prior to any payment being made. SECTION IV Page 72 of 106 Updated 2/11/2016 • • • SECTION IV — Technical Specifications The Contractor is responsible for restoring all striping in paint and reflective beading per the FDOT indices mentioned above. The City's Traffic Engineering department shall follow up with thermoplastic striping at a later date unless otherwise specified. 802 -1. BASIS OF MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT The basis of measurement and payment shall be specified in the contract documents and/or plans and shall include all equipment, preparation, materials and incidentals required to complete the work per the plans. 803. ROADWAY LIGHTING All roadway lighting shall be constructed per Sections 715 and 992 of FDOT's Standard Specifications, unless otherwise specified in the contract documents and plans. 803 -1. BASIS OF MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT The basis of measurement and payment shall be specified in the contract documents and/or plans and shall include all equipment, materials, testing and incidentals required to complete the work per the plans. SECTION IV Page 73 of 106 Updated 2/11/2016 SECTION IV — Technical Specifications 900 SERIES: LANDSCAPING /RESTORATION 901. WORK IN EASEMENTS OR PARKWAYS Restoration is an important phase of construction, particularly to residents affected by the construction progress. The Contractor will be expected to complete restoration activities within a reasonable time following primary construction activity. Failure by the Contractor to accomplish restoration within a reasonable time shall be justification for a temporary stop on primary construction activity or a delay in approval of partial payment requests. Reasonable care shall be taken for existing shrubbery. Contractor shall replace all shrubbery removed or disturbed during construction. No separate payment shall be made for this work. The Contractor shall make provision and be responsible for the supply of all water, if needed, on any and all phases of the contract work. The Contractor shall not obtain water from local residents or businesses except as the Contractor shall obtain written permission. Reuse water is available for the Contractor's use without charge from the City's Water Reclamation Facilities, provided the water is used on City of Clearwater contractual work. Details for Contractor to obtain and reuse water from the Water Reclamation Facilities will be coordinated at the pre - construction conference. The Contractor's use of reuse water must conform to all regulatory requirements. 902. GENERAL PLANTING SPECIFICATIONS • 902 -1. IRRIGATION 902 -1.1. DESCRIPTION A. The work specified in this Section consists of the installation of an automatic underground irrigation system as shown or noted in the plans. Provide all labor, materials, equipment, services and facilities required to perform all work in connection with the underground sprinkler irrigation system, complete, as indicated on the drawings and /or specified. Work noted as "NIC ", "existing ", or "by others" is not included in this pay item. • B. The irrigation plans are schematic in nature. Valves and pipes shall be located in the turf/landscape areas except at road/paving crossings. All piping under paving shall be sleeved. Changes in the irrigation system layout shall be modified with the approval of the Engineer. 902 - 1.1.1. QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The irrigation work shall be installed by qualified personnel or a qualified irrigation subcontracting company that has experience in irrigation systems of similar size, scope, mainline, system pressure, controls, etc. SECTION IV Page 74 of 106 Updated 2/11/2016 • SECTION IV — Technical Specifications B. All applicable ANSI, ASTM, FED.SPEC. Standards and Specifications, and all applicable building codes and other public agencies having jurisdiction upon the work shall apply. C. Workmanship: All work shall be installed in a neat, orderly and responsible manner with the recognized standards of workmanship. The Engineer reserves the right to reject material or work which does not conform to the contract documents. Rejected work shall be removed or corrected at the earliest possible time at the Contractor's expense. D. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: The Contractor shall prepare and deliver to the Engineer within ten (10) calendar days prior to completion of construction a minimum of three (3) hard cover binders, with three rings, containing the following information: 1. Index sheet stating the Contractor's address and business telephone number, twenty - four (24) hour emergency phone number, person to contact, list of equipment with name(s) and address(es) of local manufacturer's representative(s) and local supplier where replacement equipment can be purchased. 2. Catalog and part sheet on every material and equipment installed under this contract. 3. Complete operating and maintenance instructions on all major equipment. 4. Provide the Engineer and the City of Clearwater maintenance staff with written and "hands on" instructions for major equipment and show evidence in writing to the Engineer at the conclusion of the project that this service has been rendered. a. Four -hour instruction (minimum) for the Drip Emitter equipment operation and maintenance. • b. Two -hour instruction (minimum) for automatic control valve operation and maintenance. • 902 - 1.1.2. PROJECT CONDITIONS A. The Contractor shall coordinate the work with all other trades, all underground improvements, the location and planting of trees and all other planting. Verify planting requiring excavation of twenty -four inch (24 ") diameter and larger with the Engineer prior to installation of main lines. B. Provide temporary irrigation at all times to maintain plant materials. C. The Contractor is responsible to maintain the work area and equipment until final acceptance by the Engineer. Repairs and replacement of equipment broken, stolen, or missing as well as regular maintenance operations shall be the obligation of the Contractor. D. The Contractor shall submit a traffic control plan (per FDOT specifications) to the Engineer prior to initiating construction on the site. The Contractor shall be responsible for the maintenance of traffic signs, barriers, and any additional equipment to comply with the FDOT standards and to ensure the safety of its employees and the public. SECTION IV Page 75 of 106 Updated 2/11/2016 • • • SECTION IV — Technical Specifications 902 - 1.1.3. WARRANTY A. The Manufacturer(s) shall warrant the irrigation system components to give satisfactory service for one (1) year period from the date of acceptance by the Engineer and the City of Clearwater. Should any problems develop within the warranty period due to inferior or faulty materials, they shall be corrected at no expense to the City of Clearwater. 902 -1.2. PRODUCTS 902 - 1.2.1. GENERAL A. All materials throughout the system shall be new and in perfect condition. No deviations from the specifications shall be allowed except as noted. 902 - 1.2.2. PIPING A. The irrigation system pipe shall be as stated herein and shall be furnished, installed and tested in accordance with these specifications. B. All pipe is herein specified to be Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe, 1120, Schedule 40, conforming to ASTM D2665 and D1785. C. All nipples, pipe connections, bushings, swing joints, connecting equipment to the mainline is required to be threaded Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe, Schedule 80. 902 - 1.2.3. PIPE FITTINGS A. All pipe fittings for Schedule 40 PVC pipe shall be as follows: Fittings shall conform to the requirements of ASTM D2466, Standard Specification for Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 80. All fittings shall bear the manufacturer's name or trademark, material designation, size, applicable IPS schedule and NSF seal of approval. The connection of mainline pipe to the automatic control valve shall be assembled with threaded Schedule 80 fittings and threaded Schedule 80 nipples. 902 - 1.2.4. PVC PIPE CEMENT AND PRIMER A. Provide solvent cement and primer for PVC solvent weld pipe and fittings as recommended by the manufacturer. Pipe joints for solvent weld pipe to be belled end. B. Purple primer shall be applied after the pipe and fittings has been cut and cleaned. The Primer shall be of contrasting color and be easily recognizable against PVC pipe. 902 - 1.2.5. THREADED CONNECTIONS A. Threaded PVC connections shall be made using Teflon tape or Teflon pipe sealant. 902 - 1.2.6. GATE VALVES 902 - 1.2.6.1. MANUAL GATE VALVES TWO INCHES (2 ") AND SMALLER A. Provide the following, unless otherwise noted on Drawings: 1. 200 -250 psi Ball Valve SECTION IV Page 76 of 106 Updated 2/11/2016 • SECTION IV — Technical Specifications 2. PVC body - with Teflon Ball Seals 3. Threaded -Dual end Union Connectors 4. Non -Shock Safe -T Shear Stem 5. Safe -T Shear True Union Ball Valve as manufactured by Spears Manufacturing Company, Sylmer, California, or approved equal. 902 - 1.2.6.2. GATE VALVES TWO AND A HALF INCHES (21/2") AND LARGER A. Provide the following, unless otherwise noted on Drawings: 1. AWWA -C -509 2. 2001b. O.W.G. 3. Cast Iron body - ASTM A 126 Class B 4. Deep socket joints 5. Rising stem 6. Bolted bonnet 7. Double disc 8. Equipped with two inch (2 ") square operating key with tee handle B. Provide two (2) operating keys for gate valve three inches (3") and larger. The "street key" shall be five feet (5') long with a two inch (2 ") square operating nut. • 902 - 1.2.7. SLEEVES A. Sleeves: (Existing by City of Clearwater) 902 - 1.2.8. REMOTE CONTROL VALVES A. The remote control valve shall be a solenoid actuated, balance - pressure across -the diaphragm type capable of having a flow rate of 25 -30 gallons per minute (GPM) with a pressure loss not to exceed 6.1 pounds per square inch (PSI). The valve pressure rating shall not be less than 150 psi. B. The valve body and bonnet shall be constructed of high impact weather resistant plastic, stainless steel and other chemical/UV resistant materials. The valve's one -piece diaphragm shall be of durable santoprene material with a clog resistant metering orifice. C. The valve body shall have a one inch (1 ") (FNPT) inlet and outlet or a one inch (1 ") slip by slip inlet and outlet for solvent weld pipe connections. D. The valve construction shall be as such to provide for all internal parts to be removable from the top of the valve without disturbing the valve installation. E. The valve shall be as manufactured by Rain Bird Sprinkler Mfg. Corp., Glendora, California, or approved equal. F. Identify all control valves using metal I.D. tags numbered to match drawings. • SECTION IV Page 77 of 106 Updated 2/11/2016 • • SECTION IV — Technical Specifications 902 - 1.2.9. VALVE BOXES A. For remote control drip valve assembly and UNIK control timer use a Brooks #36 concrete value box with #36 -T cast iron traffic bearing cover, or approved equal. B. For flush valve assembly use an Ametek #181014 ten inch (10 ") circular valve box with #181015 cover comparable to Brooks, or approved equal. C. For air relief assembly use an Ametek #182001 (6 ") economy turf box with #182002 cover comparable to Brooks, or approved equal. 902 - 1.2.10. DRIP IRRIGATION 902 - 1.2.10.1. CONSTRUCTION A. Techline shall consist of nominal sized one -half inch (1/2 ") low - density linear polyethylene tubing with internal pressure compensating, continuously self - cleaning, integral drippers at a specified spacing (12 ", 18 ", or 24" centers). The tubing shall be brown in color and conform to an outside diameter (O.D.) of 0.67 inches and an inside diameter (I.D.) of 0.57 inches. Individual pressure compensating drippers shall be welded to the inside wall of the tubing as an integral part of the tubing assembly. These drippers shall be constructed of plastic with a hard plastic diaphragm retainer and a self - flushing/cleaning elastomer diaphragm extending the full length of the dripper. 902- 1.2.10.2.OPERATION A. The drippers shall have the ability to independently regulate discharge rates, with an inlet pressure of seven to seventy (7 -70) pounds per square inch (PSI), at a constant flow and with a manufacturer's coefficient of variability (Cv) of 0.03. Recommended operating pressure shall be between 15 -45 PSI. The dripper discharge rate shall be 0.4, 0.6, or 0.9 gallons per hour (GPH) utilizing a combination turbulent flow /reduced pressure compensation cell mechanism and a diaphragm to maintain uniform discharge rates. The drippers shall continuously clean themselves while in operation. The dripperline shall be available in 12 ", 18" and 24" spacing between drippers unless otherwise specified. Techline pipe depth shall be under mulch unless otherwise specified on Plans. Maximum system pressure shall be 45 PSC. Filtration shall be 120 mesh or finer. Bending radius shall be seven inch (7 "). B. For on- surface or under mulch installations, six inch (6 ") metal wire staples (TLS6) shall be installed three feet (3') to five feet (5') on center, and two staples installed at every change of direction. 902 - 1.2.10.3. LINE FLUSHING VALVES A. The sub - surface system shall utilize Automatic Line Flush Valves at the end of each independent zone area. This valve shall be capable of flushing one gallon at the beginning of each irrigation cycle. The valves shall match the dripline manufacturer and connect directly to the dripline. 902- 1.2.10.4.AIRNACUUM RELIEF VALVE SECTION IV Page 78 of 106 Updated 2/11/2016 • • • SECTION IV — Technical Specifications A. Each independent irrigation zone shall utilize an Air /Vacuum Relief Valve at its high point(s). The air and vacuum relief valve shall seal effectively from 2 to 110 psi. 902 - 1.2.10.5. PRESSURE REGULATORS A. The pressure regulator shall be designed to handle steady inlet pressures over 150 pounds per square inch (psi) and maintain a constant outlet pressure of 25 psi. Regulating accuracy shall be within +/ -6 %. The pressure regulator shall be manufactured from high - impact engineering grade thermoplastics. Regulation shall be accomplished by a fixed stainless steel compression spring which shall be enclosed in a chamber separate from the water passage. 902 - 1.2.10.6. FILTERS A. The filter shall be a multiple disc type filter with notation indicating the minimum partial size to travel through or the mesh size of the element being used. The discs shall be constructed of chemical resistant thermoplastic for corrosion resistance. 902 - 1.2.10.7. FITTINGS A. All connections shall be made with barb or compression type fitting connections. Fittings and dripline shall be as manufactured by the manufacturer of the dripline to ensure the integrity of the subsurface irrigation system. 902 - 1.2.11. AUTOMATIC CONTROL TIMER A. The irrigation controller (control module) shall be programmable by a separate transmitter device only. The program shall be communicated to the Control Module from the Field Transmitter via an infrared connection. The controller shall be of a module type which may be installed in a valve box underground. The controller shall function normally if submerged in water and the communication from the transmitter shall function if submerged in water. B. The control module shall be housed in an ABS plastic cabinet and shall be potted to insure waterproof operation. The control module shall have two mounting slots for screws allowing the module to be securely mounted inside a valve box. C. The controller shall operate on one nine volt (9V) alkaline battery for one full year regardless of the number of stations utilized. The controller shall operate 1, 2, or 4 stations either sequentially or independently. D. The controller shall have three (3) independent programs with eight (8) start times each, station run time capability from one (1) minute to twelve (12) hours in one (1) minute increments, and a seven (7) day calendar. The controller shall turn on stations via latching solenoids installed on the valves. Manual operations shall be initiated by attaching the Field Transmitter to the Control Module and programming a manual start. The controller shall be capable of manual single station or manual program operation. E. The controller shall be as manufactured by Rain Bird Sprinkler Mfg. Corp., Glendora, California USA. SECTION IV Page 79 of 106 Updated 2/11/2016 • SECTION IV — Technical Specifications 902 - 1.2.12. FIELD TRANSMITTER A. The irrigation controller shall be programmable by a separate transmitter device (Field Transmitter) only. The Field Transmitter shall communicate to the Control Module via an infrared connection. The Field Transmitter shall be water resistant and housed in ABS plastic and have a removable, reversible protective sheath. The Field Transmitter shall operate on one nine volt (9V) alkaline battery. B. The Field Transmitter shall have a large LCD screen and a seven -key programming pad. A beep sound shall confirm every key stroke. The screen shall automatically turn off after one minute when not in use. C. The Field Transmitter shall be capable of programming an unlimited number of UNIK Control Modules. D. The Field Transmitter shall be as manufactured by Rain Bird Sprinkler Mfg. Corp., Glendora, California USA. 902 - 1.2.13. LATCHING SOLENOID A. The Latching Solenoid shall be supplied with an installed, filtered adapter allowing installation of the solenoid onto any Rain Bird DV, PGA, PEB, PES -B, GB, of EFB series valve. B. The Latching Solenoid shall be as manufactured by Rain Bird Sprinkler Mfg. Corp., Glendora, California USA. 902 -1.3. EXECUTION • 902 - 1.3.1. GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS A. Before work is commenced, hold a conference with the Engineer to discuss general details of the work. B. Verify dimensions and grades at job site before work is commenced. C. During the progress of the work, a competent superintendent and any assistants necessary shall be on site, all satisfactory to the Engineer. This superintendent shall not be changed, except with the consent of the Engineer. The superintendent shall represent the Contractor in Contractor's absence and all directions given to the superintendent shall be as binding as if given to the Contractor. D. Obtain and pay for all irrigation and plumbing permits and all inspections required by outside authorities. E. All work indicated or notes on the Drawings shall be provided whether or not specifically mentioned in these Technical Specifications. F. If there are ambiguities between the Drawings and Specifications, and specific interpretation or clarification is not issued prior to bidding, the interpretation or clarification will be made only by the Engineer, and the Contractor shall comply with the decisions. In the event the installation contradicts the directions given, the installation shall be corrected by the Contractor at no additional cost. • SECTION IV Page 80 of 106 Updated 2/11/2016 • • • SECTION IV — Technical Specifications G. Layout of sprinkler lines shown on the Drawing is diagrammatic only. Location of sprinkler equipment is contingent upon and subject to integration with all other underground utilities. Contractor shall employ all data contained in the contract Documents and shall verify this information at the construction site to confirm the manner by which it relates to the installation. H. Do not proceed with the installation of the sprinkler system when it is apparent that obstructions or grade differences exist or if conflicts in construction details, legend, or specific notes are discovered. All such obstructions, conflicts, or discrepancies shall be brought to the attention of the Engineer. I. The disturbance of existing paving will not be permitted. Install all required sleeving prior to roadway base. 902 - 1.3.2. EXCAVATING AND BACKFILLING 902 - 1.3.2.1. TRENCHING - GENERAL A. Dig sides of trenches straight. Provide continuous support for pipe on bottom of trenches. Lay pipe to uniform grade. Trenching excavation shall follow layout indicated on Drawings. B. Maintain six inch (6 ") horizontal and minimum clearance between sprinkler lines and between all lines of other trades. C. Do not install sprinkler lines directly above another line of any kind. D. Maintain six inch (6 ") vertical minimum between sprinkler lines which cross at angles of 45 degrees to 90 degrees. E. Exercise care when excavating, trenching and working near existing utilities. 902 - 1.3.2.2. BACKFILLING A. All pressure supply lines (mainline) shall have eighteen inches (18 ") of fill placed over the pipe. B. Initial backfill on all lines shall be of a fine granular material with no foreign matter larger than one half inch ( %2 "). C. Compact backfill according to Section 125 of FDOT Standard Specifications. D. Do not, under any circumstances, use equipment or vehicle wheels for compacting soil. E. Restore grades and repair damages where settling occurs. F. Compact each layer of fill with approved equipment to achieve a maximum density per AASHTO T 180. Under landscaped area, compaction shall not exceed 95% of maximum density. G. Compaction shall be obtained by the use of mechanical tampers or approved hand tampers. When hand tampers are used, the materials shall be deposited in layers not more than six inches (6 ") thick. The hand tampers shall be suitable for this purpose and shall have a face area of not more than 100 square inches. Special precautions shall be taken to prevent damage to the irrigation system piping and adjacent utilities. SECTION IV Page 81 of 106 Updated 2/11/2016 • SECTION IV — Technical Specifications 902 - 1.3.2.3. ROUTING OF PIPING: A. Routing of pressure and non - pressure piping lines are indicated diagrammatically on Drawings. B. Coordinate specimen trees and shrubs with routing of lines. 1. Planting locations shall take precedence over sprinkler and piping locations. 2. Report to Owner any major deviation from routing indicated. C. Conform to Drawings layout without offsetting the various assemblies from the pressure supply line. D. Layout drip tube and make any minor adjustments required due to differences between site and Drawings. Any such deviations in layout shall be within the intent of the original Drawings, and without additional cost. E. Layout all systems using an approved staking method, and maintain the staking of approved layout. 902 - 1.3.3. INSTALLATION 902 - 1.3.3.1. WATER SUPPLY A. Connections to the water sources shall be at the approximate locations indicated on the Drawings. Make minor changes caused by actual site conditions without additional cost to the Owner. • 902 - 1.3.3.2. ASSEMBLIES A. Routing or pressure supply lines as indicated on Drawings is diagrammatic only. Install lines and required assemblies in accordance with details on Drawings. B. Do not install multiple assemblies on plastic lines. Provide each assembly with its own outlet. When used, the pressure relief valve shall be the last assembly. C. Install all assemblies in accord with the respective detail Drawings and these Technical Specifications. D. Plastic pipe and threaded fittings shall be assembled using Teflon tape, applied to the male threads only. • 902 - 1.3.3.3. SLEEVES: (EXISTING BY CITY OF CLEARWATER) A. The Contractor shall verify the location of all existing sleeves as shown on the roadway, utility and/or irrigation plans and notify the Engineer of any discrepancies. 902 - 1.3.3.4. PLASTIC PIPE A. Install plastic pipe in accord with manufacturer's recommendations. B. Prepare all welded joints with manufacturer's cleaner prior to applying solvent. 1. Allow welded joints as least fifteen (15) minutes setup /curing time before moving or handling. SECTION IV Page 82 of 106 Updated 2/11/2016 SECTION IV — Technical Specifications 2. Partially center load pipe in trenches to prevent arching and shifting when water pressure is on. 3. Do not permit water in pipe until a period of at least four (4) hours has elapsed for solvent weld setting and curing, unless recommended otherwise by solvent manufacturer. C. Curing 1. When the temperature is above 80 degrees F., allow soluble weld joints at least twenty -four (24) hours curing time before water is introduced under pressure. D. Flushing the system: 1. After all sprinkler pipe lines and risers are in place and connected, open the control valves and flush out the system with a full head of water. E. Installing piping under existing pavement: 1. Piping under existing pavement may be installed by jacking & boring. 2. Secure permission from the Engineer before cutting or breaking any existing pavement. All repairs and replacements shall be approved by Engineer and shall be accomplished at no additional cost. 902 - 1.3.3.5. CONTROLLERS A. Install all automatic controllers as shown in the plans. 1. The location of all controllers shall be approved by the Engineer's representative prior to installation. 902 - 1.3.3.6. REMOTE CONTROL VALVES A. Install at sufficient depth to provide not more than six inches (6 "), nor less than four inches (4 ") cover from the top of the valve to finish grade. B. Install valves in a plumb position with twenty -four inch (24 ") minimum maintenance clearance from other equipment, three feet (3') minimum from edges of sidewalks, buildings, and walls, and no closer than seven feet (7') from the back of curb or edge of pavement along roadways. C. Contractor shall adjust the valve to provide the proper flow rate or operating pressure for each sprinkler zone. 902 - 1.3.3.7. GATE VALVES A. Install where indicated and with sufficient clearance from other materials for proper maintenance. B. Check and tighten valve bonnet packing before backfill. SECTION IV Page 83 of 106 Updated 2/11/2016 902 -2. LANDSCAPE • 902 -2.1. GENERAL • • SECTION IV — Technical Specifications 902 - 2.1.1. REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES A. Comply with Federal, State, Local, and other duly constituted authorities and regulatory agencies, without additional cost to the Owner in matters pertaining to codes, safety, and environmental matters. B. Any permits for the installation or construction of any of the work included under the contract, which are required by any of the legally constituted authorities having jurisdiction, shall be arranged for by the Contractor and paid for directly by the Contractor, unless otherwise agreed upon in writing. 902 - 2.1.2. SCOPE OF WORK A. All provisions of Contract, including General and Special Provisions and Plans, apply to the work specified in this Article. The Scope of Work includes everything for and incidental to executing and completing all landscape work shown on the Plans, Schedules, Notes and as specified herein. B. Furnish and provide all labor, plants and materials tools and equipment necessary to prepare the soil for plantings, to install and care for all plant materials (including finish grading if necessary); to remove and/or transplant existing plants if indicated; to furnish, plant, fertilize, guy and brace, water, mulch and prune all new plant materials; and to execute all other Work as described herein or indicated on the Plans. C. Work under this Article shall include labor and materials for final grading and raking to prepare the site for sodding, sprigging, or seeding, so finished lawn or playing field will appear even and uniform, will drain adequately, and will comply with the intent of the landscape drawings. D. Initial maintenance of landscape materials as specified in this document. 902 - 2.1.3. QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Landscape work shall be contracted to a single firm specializing in landscape work, who shall in turn subcontract no more than 40% of the work specified. All subcontractors under the control of the Contractor involved in the completion of the landscape work, shall be made known to the Owner and the Landscape Architect prior to their commencement of work on the project. B. All work of this Article shall conform to the highest standard of landscape practices. C. The Plant Material Schedule included with these Plans is provided only for the Contractor's convenience; it shall not be construed as to conflict or predominate over the Plans. If conflict between the Plans and Specifications exists, the Plans shall predominate and be considered the controlling document. D. During this work, the Contractor shall be responsible for maintaining safety among persons in their employ in accordance with the standards set by The Occupational Safety SECTION IV Page 84 of 106 Updated 2/11/2016 • • • SECTION IV — Technical Specifications and Health Act of 1970 (and all subsequent amendments). Owner and Landscape Architect shall be held harmless from any accident, injury or any other incident resulting from compliance or non - compliance with these standards. E. The Contractor shall cooperate with and coordinate with all other trades whose work is built into or affects the work in this Article. F. All appropriate utility companies and agencies shall be contacted 72 hours prior to excavation. Call "One Call " / "Sunshine 811" at 8 -1 -1; "Sunshine 811" administrative offices may be reached at (800) 638 -4097. G. The Contractor shall carefully examine the site and all existing conditions affecting the work, such as: soil, obstructions, existing trees, utilities, etc. Report any conditions in conflict with the work to the Landscape Architect. 902 - 2.1.4. SUBMITTALS A. The Contractor is required to submit prior to the expiration of the required maintenance period, two (2) copies of typewritten instructions recommending procedures to be established by the Owner for maintenance of landscape work for a period of one (1) year. B. Furnish unit prices for all plant materials and inert materials, including labor for all specified work. 902 - 2.1.5. ALTERNATES, ADDITIONS, DELETIONS, SUBSTITUTIONS A. If there are additions /alternates included in these Plans and Specifications, the Contractor must propose prices to accomplish the work stated as additions /alternates at the time of bidding. B. The Owner, through their Project Representative, reserves the right to add or deduct any of the work stated herein without rendering the Contract void. C. The Contractor must have written approval by the Project Representative for any substitutions not previously agreed to in the purchase agreement: installation without approval is entirely at the Contractor's risk. D. All material acquired through additions or substitutions shall be subject to all conditions and warranties stated herein. 902 - 2.1.6. ABBREVIATIONS /DEFINITIONS O.A. or HT: The over -all height of the plant measured from the ground to the natural, untied state of the majority of the foliage, not including extreme leaves, branches or fronds. C. T: Clear trunk is measured from the ground to the bottom of the first leaf or frond stem with no foliage from ground to specified height. For example, on Canary Island Date Palms or similar, the clear trunk measurement includes the "nut" at the base of the fronds. C. W: Clear wood is measured from the ground to the bottom of the base of the lowest leaf sheath or boot, trimmed in a natural manner. For example, on Canary Island Date Palms or similar, the clear wood measurement does not include the "nut" at the base of the fronds. SECTION IV Page 85 of 106 Updated 2/11/2016 • • • SECTION IV — Technical Specifications SPR.: Spread, branches measured in natural untied position to the average crown diameter, not including extreme leaves, branches or fronds. ST TR.: Straight trunk. MIN.: Minimum. GAL.: Gallon container size, i.e., 1 gallon, 3 gallon, 7 gallon, etc. O.C.: On center, distance between plant centers. DL4.: Diameter. LVS.: Leaves. D.B.H.: Diameter or caliper of main trunk of tree as measured at breast height at 4 -1/2 feet above grade. CAL.: Caliper, the outside diameter of up to a four inch tree is measured six inches above grade, larger trees are measured at 12 inches above grade. B &B: Balled and burlapped in accordance with horticultural standards of the American Association of Nurserymen. PPP: Plants per pot. FG: Field grown. STD.: Standard, single, straight trunk. Owner: To be known as that entity which holds title or control to the premises on which the work is performed. Owner 's Representative: Owner's on -site representative shall be responsible for approval of quantity and quality of materials specified and execution of installation. Contractor: Shall refer to that person or enterprise commonly known as the Landscape Contractor. Landscape Architect: This person or firm is the responsible representative of the Owner who produces the landscape Plans and Specifications. 902 - 2.1.7. PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING 902 - 2.1.7.1. PLANT MATERIALS A. Provide container -grown or, if appropriate, freshly dug trees and shrubs. Do not prune prior to delivery. Do not bend or bind trees or shrubs in such a manner as to damage bark, break branches or destroy natural shape. Provide protective covering during delivery. If plant delivery is made in open vehicles, the entire load shall be suitably covered. B. All plants are to be handled at all times so that roots or root balls are adequately protected from sun, cold, or drying winds. No root balls for trees and container plants that have been cracked or broken shall be planted except upon special approval. Plants shall not be pulled by the tops or stems, nor handled in a rough or careless manner at any time. SECTION IV Page 86 of 106 Updated 2/11/2016 • • • SECTION IV — Technical Specifications C. Balled and burlapped ( "B & B ") plants shall be moved with firm, natural, balls of soil, not less than one foot (1') diameter of ball to every one inch (1 ") caliper of trunk; root ball depth shall not be less than two - thirds (2/3) of root ball diameter. B & B plants which cannot be planted upon delivery shall have their root balls covered with moist soil or mulch. D. Trees shall be dug with adequate balls, burlapped, and wire bound if needed. Root pruning to be done a minimum of four (4) weeks before removal from the field and planting at the site. Root balls may not be encased in "grow bags" or other synthetic material, except plastic shrink wrap for transport only. E. Remove all fronds form sabal palms prior to planting, but leave a minimum of twelve inches (12 ") of new frond growth above the bud. Do not damage bud. On all other palms, only a minimum of palm fronds shall be removed from crown to facilitate moving and handling. Clear trunk shall be determined after minimum fronds have been removed. Boots shall be removed from trunk unless otherwise specified. Palms shall be planted within twenty -four (24) hours of delivery. F. Deliver trees and shrubs after preparations for planting have been completed and plant immediately. If planting is delayed more than 6 hours after delivery, set trees and shrubs in shade, protect from weather and mechanical damage, and cover to keep the roots moist. G. Label at least one tree and one shrub of each variety with a securely attached waterproof tag bearing legible designation of botanical and common name. H. Time delivery so that sod will be placed within twenty -four (24) hours after stripping. Protect sod against drying and breaking by covering palettes of sod or placing in a shaded area. 902 - 2.1.8. JOB CONDITIONS 902 - 2.1.8.1. ACCEPTANCE OF JOB CONDITIONS. A. The Contractor shall examine the sub - grade, verify elevations, observe the conditions under which work is to be performed and notify the Landscape Architect or Project Representative in writing of unsatisfactory conditions prior to beginning work. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the Landscape Architect. Start of work shall indicate acceptance of conditions and full responsibility for the completed work. B. Proceed with and complete the landscape work as rapidly as portions of the site become available, working within the seasonal limitations for each kind of landscape work and following the approved schedule. If seasonal limitations apply, notify the Landscape Architect for adjustments to the Schedule. C. Determine locations of all underground utilities and review for conflicts with planting procedures. D. When adverse conditions to plant growth are encountered, such as rubble fill, drainage conditions or obstruction, the Contractor shall notify the Landscape Architect in writing prior to planting. SECTION IV Page 87 of 106 Updated 2/11/2016 • SECTION IV — Technical Specifications E. Plant trees and shrubs after final grades are established and prior to sod installation or seeding lawns. Protect existing lawn, trees, and promptly repair damages from planting operations. 902 - 2.1.8.2. SCHEDULING OF WORK A. The work shall be carried out to completion with the utmost speed. Immediately upon award of contract, the Contractor shall prepare a construction schedule and furnish a copy to the Owner's Representative and/or the Landscape Architect for approval. The Contractor shall carry out the work in accordance with the approved schedule. B. If the Contractor incurs unforeseen costs, such as overtime hours, holidays, etc., in order to complete the work within the time stated in the Contract, and/or to maintain the progress schedule, all said costs shall be borne by the Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner. C. The Owner's Representatives may request work stoppage in writing. Upon written request from the Owner's Representative, the Landscape Contractor shall suspend delivery of material and stop all work for such a period as deemed necessary by the Owner, the Owner's Representative, or the General Contractor, with respect to any additional costs which may result from work stoppage. 902 - 2.1.8.3. UTILITIES A. The Contractor shall perform work in a manner which will avoid conflicts with utilities. Hand excavate, as required, to minimize possibility of damage to underground utilities. Maintain grade stakes set by others until removal is mutually agreed upon by all parties concerned. 902 -2.2. PRODUCTS 902 - 2.2.1. MATERIALS 902 - 2.2.1.1. PLANT MATERIALS: NOMENCLATURE A. Plant species, sizes, etc., shall be per Plans and Specifications on Plant Material Schedule. Nomenclature is per Manual of Cultivated Plant, Standard Encyclopedia of Horticulture, L.H. Bailey, or Standardized Plant Names Dictionary, American Joint Committee on Horticultural Nomenclature (latest editions), or conforms with names accepted in the nursery trade. 902 - 2.2.1.2. PLANT MATERIALS: QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide healthy, vigorous stock grown under climatic conditions similar to conditions in the locality of the project. Plants shall have a habit of growth that is normal for the species and be sound, healthy, vigorous and free from insects, pests or their eggs, plant diseases, defects and injuries. Plants shall be well branched and densely foliated when in leaf and shall have healthy, well- developed root systems. B. Trees shall be heavily branched or, in the case of palms, be heavily leafed. Some plant materials may be collected stock with the approval of the Landscape Architect. Provided SECTION IV Page 88 of 106 Updated 2/11/2016 • SECTION IV — Technical Specifications tree species that have a single main trunk (central leader), unless otherwise stated. Trees that have the main trunk forming a "Y" shape or parallel branching are not acceptable. C. Plant materials shall be specified and shall be Florida #1 or better as to shape and quality for the species as outlined in Grades and Standards for Nursery Plants Part I and II, Florida Department of Agriculture and Consumer Services (latest edition). D. The Owner or Landscape Architect reserves the right to inspect plant materials either at the place of growth or at the project site prior to planting for compliance with requirements for name, variety, size, quality, or designated area. E. Landscape materials shall be shipped with certificates of inspection as required by governmental authorities. The Contractor shall comply with all governing regulations that are applicable to landscape materials. F. Do not make substitutions. If specified landscape material is not available, submit to the Landscape Architect proof of it being non - available. In such event, if the Landscape Architect designates an available source, such shall be acquired from designated source. When authorized, a written change order for substitute material will be made by adjustment to Contract amount. G. Height and/or width of trees shall be measured from ground up; width measurement shall be normal crown spread of branches with plants in the normal position. This measurement shall not include immediate terminal growth. All measurements shall be taken after pruning for specified sizes. All trees and shrubs shall conform to measurements specified in the plant material schedule, except that plant material larger than specified may be used with the approval of the Owner or Landscape Architect, with no increase to the Contract price. Plant materials shall not be pruned prior to delivery. H. Plant Material shall be symmetrical, typical for variety and species. Plants used where symmetry is required shall be matched as nearly as possible. I. Balled and burlapped plants shall have firm, natural balls of earth of sufficient diameter and depth to encompass the feeding root system necessary for full development of the plant and to conform with the standards of the American Association of Nurserymen. Root balls and tree trunks shall not be damaged by improper binding and B & B procedures. J. Container -grown plants may be substituted for balled and burlapped plants or vice -versa provided the quality is equal or better than specified and the Landscape Architect approves the substitution. K. Container -grown stock shall have been grown in containers for at least four months, but not over two years. If requested, samples must be shown to prove no root bound condition exists. 902 - 2.2.1.3. GRASSES: SOD OR SEED A. Sod or seed (as /if specified) shall be a species as stated on the Plan. Solid sod shall be of even thickness and with a good root structure, 95% free of noxious weed, freshly mowed before cutting, and in healthy condition when laid. It must not be stacked more than SECTION IV Page 89 of 106 Updated 2/11/2016 • • • SECTION IV — Technical Specifications twenty -four (24) hours before laying and it must be grown in soil compatible to that in which it will be installed. Sod must be kept moist prior to and after installation. B. Seed shall be delivered to the site in unopened bags with certification tags in place. Purity, germination and weed content shall be as certification requirements. 902 - 2.2.1.4. MULCH A. Mulch shall be as specified in the plans or by the project manager. B. Install mulch to an even depth of three inches (3 ") before compaction, as shown in the PLANTING DETAILS in the plans. 902 - 2.2.1.5. FERTILIZER A. Granular fertilizer shall be uniform in composition; free flowing and suitable for application with approved equipment; received at the site in full, labeled, unopened bags bearing the name, trade name or trademark and warranty of the producer; fully conforming to State of Florida fertilizer laws. B. All fertilizer shall bear the manufacturer's statement of analysis and shall contain the appropriate minimum amounts of elements for the type of use specified herein. C. Agriform 20 -10 -5 fertilizer tablets or approved equal, shall be placed in planting pit for all plant materials at time of installation and prior to completion of pit backfilling. D. Ground cover and annual areas shall receive fertilization with Osmocote Time Release Fertilizer according to product instructions and rate. E. For sod and seeded areas, fertilize with a complete granular fertilizer on Bahia and St. Augustine grasses at the rate of one pound (1 lb.) of nitrogen per one thousand square feet (1000 sq ft). Fertilizer shall be commercial grade, mixed granules, with 30% to 50% of the nitrogen being in slow or controlled release form. The ratio of nitrogen to potash will be 1:1 or 2:1 for complete fertilizer formulations. Phosphorus shall be no more than one -fourth (1/4) the nitrogen level. They shall also contain magnesium and micronutrients (i.e. manganese, iron, zinc, copper, etc.). 902 - 2.2.1.6. STAKES AND GUYS A. For trees, approved plastic or rubber guys shall be used between the stakes and the tree trunk. Galvanized steel guy wire shall not be used. B. Stakes shall be cut from 2" x 4" pressure treated (p.t.) stock for trees over two inch (2 ") caliper. Stakes shall be 2" x 2" pressure treated (p.t.) stock for trees two inch (2 ") caliper and under. A minimum of two (2) stakes per tree or an optional three (3) stakes per tree shall be used. C. For single trunk palms, stakes shall be cut from 2" x 4" pressure treated (p.t.) stock, with a minimum of three (3) stakes per palm. Batten consisting of 5 layers of burlap and 5 - 2" x 4" by 16" wood connected with two — three - quarter inch (3/4") steel bands shall be used around the palm trunk. D. Other tree staking systems may be acceptable if approved. SECTION IV Page 90 of 106 Updated 2/11/2016 • SECTION IV — Technical Specifications 902 - 2.2.1.7. PLANTING SOIL A. Unless stated on the plans or in the specifications, install plant material in tilled and loosened native soil backfill. It is the responsibility of the Landscape Contractor to test, prior to planting and at no additional cost to the City, any soils which may be unsuitable for the vigorous growth of plants. Unsuitable conditions shall be reported to the Landscape Architect immediately in writing. B. When required, planting soil media shall be provided by the Contractor and shall consist of one -third (1/3) peat and two- thirds (2/3) sandy loam, with no lumps over one inch (1 "). C. Backfill and clean fill dirt provided by the Contractor shall be in a loose, friable soil. There must be slight acid reaction to the soil (about 6.0 — 6.5 pH) with no excess of calcium or carbonate, and it shall be free from excess weeds, clay lumps, stones, stumps, roots and toxic substances or any other materials that might be harmful to plant growth or a hindrance to grading, planting, and maintenance procedures and operations. No heavily organic soil, such as muck or peat shall be used as fill dirt. D. Bed preparation for annual beds under one (1) gallon container size shall consist of three inches (3 ") of Florida peat or other approved organic soil amendment spread over full length and width of planting area. Rototil organic layer six inches (6 ") to eight inches (8 ") into native soil. 902 - 2.2.1.8. SOIL AMENDMENTS A. Terra -Sorb AG or approved equal, soil amendment shall be mixed with native or planting soil for all trees, shrubs, ground cover, and annuals according to manufacturer's recommended application rates and methods, if specified on the Plans. 902 - 2.2.1.9. TREE PROTECTION A. Wood fencing shall be 2" x 4" pressure treated (p.t.) stock with flagging on horizontal members. Space vertical members six feet (6') to eight feet (8') on center. The barricade shall be placed so as to protect the critical protection zone area, which is the area surrounding a tree within a circle described by a radius of one foot (1') for each inch of the tree's diameter at breast height DBH (four and one half feet)') above grade. 902 - 2.2.1.10. ROOT BARRIER SYSTEM A. Root barrier fabric shall be installed when specified in the plans and /or specifications for protection of adjacent paved surfaces according to specific product name or equal. Install as directed by the manufacturer. 902 - 2.2.1.11. PACKAGED MATERIALS A. Deliver packaged materials in containers showing weight, analysis and name of manufacturer. Protect materials from deterioration during delivery and while stored at the site. 902 - 2.2.1.12. PESTICIDES SECTION IV Page 91 of 106 Updated 2/11/2016 • • • SECTION IV — Technical Specifications A. Pesticides shall be only approved, safe brands applied according to manufacturer's directions. 902 -2.3. EXECUTION 902 - 2.3.1. PREPARATION 902 - 2.3.1.1. OBSTRUCTIONS BELOW GROUND A. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to locate and mark all underground utilities, irrigation lines and wiring prior to commencement of the work. B. If underground construction, utilities or other obstructions are encountered in excavation of planting areas or pits, the Landscape Architect shall be immediately notified to select a relocated position for any materials necessary. 902 - 2.3.1.2. GRADING AND PREPARATION FOR PLANT MATERIALS A. All proposed landscape areas containing existing turf grass or weeds shall be treated with Monsanto's "Round -Up" per manufacturer's specifications. All proposed landscape areas adjacent to water bodies shall be treated with "Rodeo" per the manufacturer's specifications. B. New plant materials will not be installed until a 98% weed/turf eradication has been achieved. More than one application may be required to produce an acceptable planting bed. C. Pre - emergent herbicides are not a substitute for spray treatment of "Round -Up" or "Rodeo ", and may be used only with the written approval of the Landscape Architect. D. Should any plant material in the same or adjacent beds be damaged by these chemicals, the same size, quantity and quality of plants shall be immediately replaced by the Contractor at no cost to the Owner. E. Any necessary corrections or repairs to the finish grades shall be accomplished by the Contractor. All planting areas shall be carefully graded and raked to smooth, even finish grade, free from depressions, lumps, stones, sticks or other debris and such that they will conform to the required finish grades and provide uniform and satisfactory surface drainage without puddling. F. The Contractor shall remove debris (sticks, stones, rubbish) over one and one half inches (1'/2") in any dimension from individual tree, shrub and hedge pits and dispose of the excavated material off the site. 902 - 2.3.1.3. PREPARATION FOR ANNUAL BED PLANTING A. Prepare native subgrade by rototilling or loosening by hand methods. Spread three inches (3 ") of one -third (1/3) Florida peat and two- thirds (2/3) sandy, or other approved organic soil amendment over the full length and width of planting area for annuals. Rototill organic layer six inches (6 ") to eight inches (8 ") into the native soil. Grade the planting bed by "crowning' to insure that surface drainage, percolation, and aeration occur at rapid rates. Add Osmocote time release fertilizer according to product instructions and rate. SECTION IV Page 92 of 106 Updated 2/11/2016 • SECTION IV — Technical Specifications 902 - 2.3.1.4. PREPARATION FOR SEEDING AND SOD AREAS A. All proposed sod areas containing existing turf grass or weeds shall be treated with Monsanto's "Round -Up" per manufacturer's specifications. All proposed sod areas adjacent to water bodies shall be treated with "Rodeo" per the Manufacturer's Specifications. B. Limit preparation to areas which will be planted promptly after preparation. Loosen sub - grade of seed and sod areas to a minimum depth of four inches (4 "). C. Immediately prior to any turf work, the Contractor shall finish grade the soil to a smooth, even surface assuring positive drainage away from buildings and the subsequent turf flush to the tops of adjacent curbs and sidewalks. The surface shall be sloped to existing yard drains. D. A complete fertilizer shall be applied to St. Augustine or Bahia grass at a rate of one pound (1 lb.) of nitrogen per one thousand square feet (1000 sq ft). Fertilizer shall be commercial grade, mixed granules, with 30% to 50% of the nitrogen being in slow or controlled release form. Thoroughly work fertilizer into the top four inches (4 ") of soil. E. Moisten prepared seed and sod areas before planting if soil is dry. Water thoroughly and allow surface moisture to dry before planting lawns. Do not create a muddy soil condition. 902 - 2.3.2. INSTALLATION 902 - 2.3.2.1. BERM CONSTRUCTION (IF SPECIFIED) A. Install berms at location and design shown on Plans and at the height and slope indicated. Height stated is for finished berm with soil at natural compaction. B. Exact location and configuration of berms may require modification to allow proper drainage; such changes will be coordinated with the Landscape Architect. C. If shown on the Plan, construct berms using clean sandy loam fill dirt which is well - drained, free of rocks, roots, or other debris, with a soil pH of an acid Nature (about 6.0 - 6.5). No heavily organic soil, such as muck or peat shall be used in berm construction. 902 - 2.3.2.2. LAYOUT OF PLANT MATERIALS A. Unless otherwise stipulated, plant materials shall be approximately located per the plans by scale measurements using established building, columns, curbs, screen walls, etc., as the measuring reference point. Slight shifting may be required to clear wires, prevent blockage of signage, etc. B. Shrubs and ground covers shall be located and spaced as noted on the plant material schedule (if provided), otherwise plants will be placed in the planting beds at the normally accepted spacing for each species. C. Leave an eighteen inch (18 ") (450 millimeters) border of mulched space between outer leaves of installed plant material and the bed line, curb, or building foundation wall for all plant sizes. SECTION IV Page 93 of 106 Updated 2/11/2016 SECTION IV — Technical Specifications D. Any necessary "minor" adjustments in the layout of planting shall be made by the Contractor with the approval of the Landscape Architect in order to conform as nearly as possible to the intent of the Plans. 902 - 2.3.2.3. PLANTING PROCEDURES A. All shrubs, trees and ground covers or vines shall be planted in pits having vertical sides and being circular in outline. Planting pit shall be three (3) to five (5) times the width of the root ball. B. Plants shall be set straight or plumb, in the locations shown, at such level that after settlement normal or natural relationship of the top of the root ball with the ground surface will be established. With regards to proper nursery practices, plants under certain conditions (i.e. low and wet areas) will benefit from being planted "high" with the root ball about one inch (1 ") higher than the surrounding grade. C. All plant materials shall be fertilized with Agriform 20 -10 -5 planting tablets, or approved equal, at time of installation and prior to completion of pit backfilling. Agriform planting tablets shall be placed uniformly around the root mass at a depth that is between the middle and the bottom of the root mass. Application rate: 1 gallon 1 - 21 gram tablet 3 gallon 2 - 21 gram tablet 5 gallon 3 - 21 gram tablet 7 gallon 4 - 21 gram tablet Trees 3 tablets each 1/2" (12 millimeters) caliper Palms 7 - 21 gram tablets D. Native soil shall be used in back - filling plant pits or as specified. The Contractor shall be responsible for providing additional soil for building tree saucers. E. When balled and burlapped plants are set, undisturbed native soil shall be left under the base of the root ball to prevent voids. Backfill tilled and loosened native soil around the sides of the root ball. Remove the top 4 four inches (4 ") (100 millimeters) of burlap wire, and all tie -down material from the root ball. Do not remove these materials from the bottom of the root ball. Thoroughly water -in before bringing the back -fill up to the proper grade. Roots of bare plants shall be properly spread out, and planting soil carefully worked in among them. Failure to comply is cause for rejection. F. Containerized plants shall be installed with undisturbed native soil left under the base of the root ball to prevent voids. Planting pit shall be three (3) to five (5) times the width of the root ball. Backfill tilled and loosened native soil around the sides of the root ball. Thoroughly water -in before bringing the backfill up to the proper grade. G. Plant spacing shall be "on center" and varies with the different plant species. Space each variety of plant equally in the planting areas. Shrubs and ground covers adjacent to straight or curved edges shall be triangular - spaced in rows parallel to those edges. Plant a minimum of eighteen inches (18 ") from the back of the curb to the outside edge of the plant. SECTION IV Page 94 of 106 Updated 2/11/2016 • • • SECTION IV — Technical Specifications H. All azaleas shall be placed into a prepared bed of amended soil containing 50% weed -free Florida peat or approved equivalent. Root balls shall be scarified vertically at 120 degree angles in a triangular pattern. I. Sabal palms may be planted deeper than normal if conditions warrant and if approved. 902 - 2.3.2.4. SODDING A. During periods of drought, sod shall be watered sufficiently at its origin to moisten the soil adequately to the depth to which it is to be cut. B. An application of 6 -6 -6, 40% organic, slow or controlled release fertilizer shall be made to all lawn areas just prior to the laying of the sod at a rate of one pound (1 lb.) of nitrogen per one thousand square feet (1000 sq ft). The ground shall be moistened before the sod is laid in place. C. Solid sod shall be laid tightly with closely abutting staggered joints with an even surface edge and sod edge, in a neat and clean manner to the edge of all the paving and shrub areas. Cut down soil level to one inch (1 ") to one and one half inches (1 -1/2 ") below top of walks prior to laying sod. D. Within two (2) hours after installing sod and prior to rolling, irrigate the sod. Sufficient water shall be applied to wet the sod thoroughly and to wet the sod to a depth of two inches (2 ") (50 millimeters). Watering shall be done in a manner that will avoid erosion due to the application of excessive quantities, and the watering equipment shall be a type that will prevent damage to the finished sod surface. Watering shall be repeated as necessary to keep sod moist until rooted to subgrade. E. The sod shall be pressed firmly into contact with the sod bed using a turf roller or other approved equipment so as to eliminate air pockets, provide a true and even surface and insure knitting without any displacement of the sod or deformation of the surfaces of sodded areas. After the sodding operation has been completed, the edges of the area shall be smooth and shall conform to the grades indicated. F. If, in the opinion of the Landscape Architect, top dressing is necessary after rolling, clean silica sand shall be used to fill voids. Evenly apply sand over the entire surface to be leveled, filling -in dips and voids and thoroughly washing into the sod areas. G. On slopes 3:1 or steeper, and as required, a geotextile fabric shall be installed per manufacturer's specifications prior to placing sod. The sod shall be fastened in place with suitable wooden pins or by other approved method. 902 - 2.3.2.5. SEEDING A. Seed shall be installed per the specifications of the State of Florida Department of Transportation. See plan for type of seed. 902 - 2.3.2.6. TREE GUYING, BRACING AND STAKING A. Tree guying, staking and bracing shall be the responsibility of the Contractor per sound nursery practices, and shall be done per details shown on the Plans. For trees, a minimum of two (2) stakes per tree or an optional three (3) stakes per tree at 120 degree spacing shall be used. Stakes shall be driven in at an angle, then tightened to vertical supported by SECTION IV Page 95 of 106 Updated 2/11/2016 • • • SECTION IV — Technical Specifications approved plastic or rubber guys. Trees shall be staked with a minimum of four feet (4') height of stake above grade and a minimum of thirty inches (30 ") of stake below grade. B. For single trunk palms, a minimum of three (3) stakes per palm at 120 degree spacing shall be used. Toenail the stakes to batten consisting of five (5) layers of burlap and five (5) - 2 inch x 4 inch x 16 inch wood connected with two (2) three - quarter inch (3/4 ") steel bands. Palms shall be staked with a minimum of five feet (5') of stake above grade. C. Contractor shall remove all tree guying, staking, and bracing from trees six (6) months after the date of final acceptance of the landscape work. D. Stake only trees that require support to maintain a plumb position or are in potentially hazardous areas. 902 - 2.3.2.7. MULCHING A. All planting beds shall be weed -free prior to mulching. B. All curb, roadway, and bed line edges will be "trenched" to help contain the applied mulch. Mulch should be below top of curb and resistant to washout from stormwater run- off. C. All plant beds and tree rings shall be mulched evenly with a three inch (3 ") layer (before compaction) of 100% Grade B recycled cypress bark mulch, or other mulch as specified on the Plans or General Notes. D. Mulch shall not be placed against the trunks of plant materials or foundations of buildings. Maintain a minimum three inch (3 ") clearance for trees and shrub trunks and a minimum six inch (6 ") clearance for the walls of buildings. E. For beds of annual flowers, a 12 inch wide x 3 inch deep band of mulch shall be installed in front of the first row of annuals. Maintain a minimum six inches (6 ") of non - mulched clearance from the outside edge of annuals. 902 - 2.3.2.8. PRUNING A. Pruning shall be done by an experienced certified Arborist to maintain the natural shape and form of the plant. B. Upon acceptance by the Owner, prune any broken branches, remove crossed branches, and branches hanging below the clear trunk of the tree. 902 - 2.3.2.9. CLEAN -UP A. During landscape work, store materials and equipment where directed by the Owner. B. The Contractor shall promptly remove any materials and equipment used on the job, keeping the area neat at all times. Upon completion of all planting, dispose of all excess soil and debris leaving pavements and work areas in safe and orderly condition. C. The clean -up of the site shall include the removal and proper disposal of the tree guying, staking, and bracing materials as described in specifications. 902 - 2.3.2.10. PROTECTION SECTION IV Page 96 of 106 Updated 2/11/2016 • • • SECTION IV — Technical Specifications A. The Contractor shall provide safeguards for the protection of workmen and others on, about, or adjacent to the work, as required under the parameters of the Occupational Safety and Health Administration (O.S.H.A.) standards. B. The Contractor shall protect the Owner's and adjacent property from damage. C. The Contractor shall protect the landscape work and materials from damage due to landscape operations. Maintain protection during installation and maintenance periods. D. The Contractor shall provide protection (tree barricades) for all existing trees and palms as specified. 902 - 2.3.2.11. REPAIR OF DAMAGES E. The Contractor shall repair all damage caused by their operations to other materials, property, or trades to a level equal in quality to the existing condition prior to damage. F. The Contractor shall be held responsible for all damage done by their work or employees to other materials or trades' work. Patching and replacement of damaged work may be done by others, at the Owner's direction, but the cost of same shall be paid by the Contractor who is responsible for the damage. 902 - 2.3.3. MAINTENANCE A. The Contractor shall maintain all plant materials in a first class condition from the beginning of landscape construction until Final Acceptance. B. Operations: 1. Maintenance shall include, but not be limited to, watering of turf and planting beds, mowing, fertilizing, cultivation, weeding, pruning, disease and pest control, replacement of dead materials, straightening, turf or planter settlement corrections, replacement of rejected materials, staking and guying repair and tightening, wash -out repairs and regrading, and any other procedures consistent with the good horticultural practice necessary to insure normal, vigorous and healthy growth of all work under the Contract. Mowing shall be consistent with the recommended height per the University of Florida Cooperative Extension Service. 2. Within the warranty period, the Contractor shall notify the Owner of any maintenance practices being followed or omitted which would be detrimental to the healthy, vigorous growth of the landscape. 3. The Contractor shall be responsible for the final watering of not less than one inch (1 ") of water for all planted materials before leaving the site. 902 - 2.3.4. INSPECTION, REJECTION, AND ACCEPTANCE 902 - 2.3.4.1. INSPECTION A. Upon completion of the installation, the Contractor will notify the Owner or the Owner's Representative that the job is ready for inspection. Within fifteen (15) days of notifications, the installation will be inspected by the Landscape Architect. A written and /or graphic inspection report will be sent to the Owner and/or Landscape Contractor. SECTION IV Page 97 of 106 Updated 2/11/2016 • • • SECTION IV — Technical Specifications 902 - 2.3.4.2. REJECTION AND REPLACEMENT A. The Landscape Architect shall be final judge as to the suitability and acceptability of any part of the work. Plant material will be rejected if it does not meet the requirements set forth in the Plans and Specifications. B. Replace any rejected materials immediately or within fifteen (15) days and notify the Landscape Architect that the correction has been made. 902 - 2.3.4.3. ACCEPTANCE A. After replacement of rejected plant material, if any, have been made, and completion of all other correction items, the Owner or Project Representative will accept the project in writing. B. Upon Final Acceptance, the Owner assumes responsibility for maintenance within the terms of the Contract. Acceptance will in no way invalidate the Contractor's warranty period. C. The Contractor's warranty period will begin after final acceptance of the project by the Owner. 1. If evidence exists of any lien or claim arising out of or in connection with default in performance of this Contract, the Owner shall have the right to retain any payment sufficient to discharge such claim and all costs in connection with discharging such claim. 2. Where the Specifications call for any stipulated item or an "approved equivalent ", or in words to that effect, the Contractor shall indicate the price of the type and species specified in the proposal, giving the price to be added or deducted from their Contract price. The final selection rests with the Owner or their representative. 3. Where plants installed do not meet specifications, the Owner reserves the right to request plant replacement or an appropriate deduction from the Contract amount to compensate for the value not received from the under - specified plant materials. No additional compensation will be made to the Contractor for plants installed that exceed specifications. 902 - 2.3.5. WARRANTY A. The Contractor shall warranty all palms and trees furnished under this contract for a period of one (1) year and all shrubs for a period of six (6) months. Material which is either dead or in poor health during this period or at completion will be replaced at no charge to the Owner. Should any of the plant materials show 50% or more defoliation during the warranty period, due to the Contractor's use of poor quality or improper materials or workmanship, the Contractor upon notice, shall replace without delay same with no additional cost to the Owner. Should any plant require replacing, the new plant shall be given the equal amount of warranty. SECTION IV Page 98 of 106 Updated 2/11/2016 SECTION IV — Technical Specifications 903. SODDING • Unless otherwise noted herein, the Contractor shall place all sod, either shown on the plans or at the direction of the Engineer, in conformance with Sections 575, 981, 982 and 983 of FDOT's Standard Specifications. The area for sod application shall be loosened and excavated to a suitable depth and finished to a grade compatible with existing grass and structures. Sod shall be placed with edges in close contact and shall be compacted to uniform finished grade with a sod roller immediately after placement. In sloped areas, the sod shall be graded and placed so as to prohibit erosion and undermining of the adjacent sidewalk. No sod that has been cut for more than seventy -two (72) hours can be used unless authorized by the Engineer in advance. The sod shall be thoroughly watered immediately after placement. The Contractor shall continue to water sod as needed and/or directed by the Engineer as indicated by sun exposure, soil, heat and rain conditions, to establish and assure growth, until termination of the contract. Dead sod, or sod not acceptable to the Engineer, shall be removed and replaced by the Contractor at no additional compensation. Any questions concerning the type of existing sod shall be determined by the Engineer. Unless otherwise noted on the plans, payment for sod (including labor, equipment, materials, placement, rolling, watering, etc.) shall be included in other bid items. Payment for these associated bid items may be withheld until the Contractor provides the City a healthy, properly placed stand of grass. When this work is given as a separate bid item, it shall cover all labor, equipment and materials, (including water) required for this work and shall be paid for on the basis of each square foot in place and accepted. No payment for sod shall be made until the Contractor provides the City a healthy, properly placed stand of grass. • 904. SEEDING Seed, or seed and mulch, shall only be used when specified for certain demolition projects. The seed and/or mulch shall be placed as called for on the plans in the following manner. The area to be seeded shall be brought to the required line and grade, fertilized and seeded in basic conformance with FDOT's Standard Specifications Sections 570, 981, 982 and 983. However, no wildflower seed shall be used, and Argentine Bahia Seed shall be used instead of Pensacola Bahia. No sprigging will be required. Also, the addition of 20 lb. of Rye Seed (to total 60 lb. of seed per acre) will be required during the stated periods. It is also required that the Contractor maintain said seed until growth is assured. When this work is given as a bid item, the item shall cover all labor, material, equipment (including water), required for this work, and shall be paid for on the basis of each square yard in place and accepted. If called for on the plans, but not shown as a bid item, then the cost of such work as stated above shall be included in the cost of other work. • 905. LAWN MAINTENANCE SPECIFICATIONS 905 -1. SCOPE To remove trash and debris from landscape and paved area; maintenance and fertilization of plant beds and landscape materials; maintenance, repair, and operation of irrigation systems; ornamental pest control; palm pruning; maintenance of traffic; and the cleaning of hard surfaces SECTION IV Page 99 of 106 Updated 2/11/2016 • • SECTION IV — Technical Specifications at designated areas. The Contractor is to work with the City in coordinating maintenance activities and reporting irregularities in the work zone. The Contractor(s) will provide the labor and materials required to maintain the specified landscaped street areas including: • Traffic safety and Maintenance of Traffic; • Trash and debris removal from the job site; • Removal of weeds in landscaped areas and hard surfaces; • Proper trimming and pruning of landscape plants and palms; • Proper fertilization and pest control of landscape and palms (may be subcontracted); • Irrigation service and repair; • Mulch replacement; • Cleaning of hard surfaces; and the • Reporting of irregularities at the job site. 905 -2. SCHEDULING OF WORK The Contractor(s) shall accomplish all landscape maintenance required under the contract between the hours of 7:00 a.m. and 6:00 p.m. Monday through Saturday, excluding observed holidays. The City may grant, on an individual basis, permission to perform contract maintenance at other hours. All work shall be completed in a continuous manner, such as cleanup, weeding, trimming, etc., be completed before leaving the job site. 905 -3. WORK METHODS 905 -3.1. MAINTENANCE SCHEDULING The Contractor(s) will adhere to a work schedule provided by the City (see Level of Service). Any variations to that schedule, requested by either party, must be approved, either verbally or in writing by an authorized representative of the other party. 905 -3.2. DUTIES PER SERVICE VISIT The Contractor(s) shall provide the following service at each scheduled visit to the designated location: 905 - 3.2.1. LITTER AND DEBRIS Remove trash and debris from the project site. Proper disposal of collected trash and debris is the Contractor's responsibility. Extraordinary amounts of debris caused by hurricanes, tornadoes, vandalism, etc., would be the responsibility of the City to clean up. The Contractor should report such accumulations of debris when they are encountered. Bids for the extraordinary cleanup from the Contractor would be considered. Work sites should be left in a clean and neat appearance upon completion. All debris from pruning process is to be removed from the job site and disposed of by the Contractor. SECTION IV Page 100 of 106 Updated 2/11/2016 • • SECTION IV — Technical Specifications 905 - 3.2.2. VISUAL CHECK The site should be checked for irregularities, such as irrigation leaks, vehicle damage, dead or damaged plant material, vandalism, etc., which should be reported to the City within twenty -four (24) hours after providing the service. 905 - 3.2.3. PLANT TRIMMING AND PALM PRUNING All plant material should be trimmed in a manner that promotes the natural shape and mature size of the particular species. Trimming should be performed at intervals that will maintain plants in a neat appearance. Trimming should be performed to promote fullness of the plants, while maintaining height restrictions in Clear Sight Zones as established on the landscape plans. Plants shall be kept trimmed to the back of curb. Brown foliage shall be removed from Liriope. Palm pruning to be performed at least once per year, preferably in late June or July following flower formation, consistent with the following specification: 905 - 3.2.3.1. PHOENIX SPECIES (CANARY DATE, INDIA DATE, PYGMY DATE, ETC.) Remove all descending fronds, to the base of the frond; all parallel and ascending fronds are to remain in order to leave a full, rounded head; seed heads may remain, but remove old faded heads that are encountered in the pruning process; and remove loose frond boots; remove vegetation, such as strangler figs, Brazilian Pepper, Asparagus fern, etc., growing in the frond boots or on the trunk. Provide the rounded, classic cut on all Medjool palm boots. No climbing spikes allowed on palms. 905 - 3.2.3.2. TRAFFIC CONTROL Proper and safe work zones in vehicular traffic areas are to be set up and maintained by the Contractor, according to the approved Maintenance of Traffic specifications. 905 - 3.2.3.3. PEDESTRIAN SAFETY Contractor is responsible for maintaining safe work zones in areas where pedestrian and park users are present. The City reserves the right to limit the hours of operation in certain high pedestrian use areas. 905 - 3.2.4. PLANT FERTILIZATION All tree and plant material should be fertilized with the appropriate amount of 20 -6 -12 sulfur coated, slow release, ornamental fertilizer, three times per year. Applications should be made in mid - February, early June, and mid - September, for the first two years. Fertilizer types and amounts will change with requirements of maturing landscape materials. 905 - 3.2.5. WEED REMOVAL IN LANDSCAPED AREA Weeds should be removed on a regular basis in order to keep them from being visibly noticeable. Weed control with the use of appropriate herbicides is allowable, given they are properly applied by a certified applicator. Herbicide damage to landscape material will be remedied by Contractor at their expense. SECTION IV Page 101 of 106 Updated 2/11/2016 • • • SECTION IV — Technical Specifications 905 - 3.2.6. MULCH CONDITION Should be maintained at a thickness that will discourage weed growth as well as help retain soil moisture, usually three inches (3 "). 905 - 3.2.7. IRRIGATION SERVICE AND REPAIR Should be performed at each visit to assure the system's proper operation and timing. Drip tubing should be kept covered with mulch. Timer should be checked for proper time of day and operating schedule. Leaks or breaks in the system should be repaired before the next scheduled system running time. 905 - 3.2.8. LAWN AND ORNAMENTAL PEST CONTROL Should be performed by a properly licensed and certified applicator to keep pest populations at a less than damaging level. Landscape materials lost to or extensively damaged by pests will be replaced by the Contractor at the Contractor's expense. Diazinon products are not to be used on City properties. 905 - 3.2.9. PALM FERTILIZATION Apply three (3) pounds of Magnesium sulfate and one pound of Potassium evenly, per tree, across the root zone (typically within the dripline), annually in early February. 905 - 3.2.10. FREEZE PROTECTION The City will provide a freeze /frost protection fabric for the Contractor to install over freeze /frost sensitive plants (Lantana and Pentas). The covering material will be stored at a City facility. Contractor will remove the covering material from storage and install over the sensitive plants, securely fastening edges of the material to the ground per manufacturer's directions. The City will furnish metal pins needed for securing fabric to the ground. The City will notify the Contractor one (1) day or twenty -four (24) hours minimum prior to the need to protect plant material. After uses, the Contractor will prepare the fabric for storage and return it to the designated City facility. Protective covering shall be removed the following afternoon or remain in place as directed by the City. The City shall notify the Contractor by 11:00 a.m. about removing the cover or keeping it in place due to continued freezing temperatures. The City may cancel the freeze protection event at any time prior to the end of the scheduled installation day (5:00 p.m.) The Contractor will be compensated for the number of hours mobilization or on -site work at the contracted rate per man -hour unit price. The Contractor shall provide a unit price for the installation and removal of the covering fabric on a per event basis, as well as an hourly rate per employee required. The City and Contractor will coordinate appropriate irrigation operations with weather conditions. Should freeze /frost damage occur, the Contractor shall perform remedial work as per unit basis, as directed by the City. 906. LEVEL OF SERVICE The Project Site is to be serviced weekly. Repairs to damage or vandalism to be made within seven (7) working days of reported irregularity. Weekly visits should occur no closer than six (6) and no further than ten (10) calendar days apart. SECTION IV Page 102 of 106 Updated 2/11/2016 • SECTION IV — Technical Specifications 907. COMPLETION OF WORK Within twenty -four (24) hours of completing work the City either in person or by phone of said completion. It is acceptable to leave a phone message. 908. INSPECTION AND APPROVAL Upon receiving notification from the Contractor, the City shall inspect the serviced location the following business day. If, upon inspection, the work specified has not been completed, the City shall contact the Contractor to indicate the necessary corrective measures. The Contractor will be given forty -eight (48) hours from this notification to make appropriate corrections. If the work has been completed successfully then the City will pay for services billed. 909. SPECIAL CONDITIONS 1. This location will be newly installed and under warranty by the installer for a twelve (12) month period on plants, trees and palms. Landscape installer will coordinate irrigation operation with the Maintenance contractor to assure adequate irrigation to the landscape materials. Installer will also be responsible for the untying of palm heads /fronds as they feel appropriate. 2. All listed acreage or square footage figures are estimates. 3. All work shall be performed in a good and workmanlike manner, consistent with trade practices and standards which prevail in the industry. 4. The Contractor shall be responsible for damage to any plant material or site feature caused by the Contractor or their employees. The Contractor shall be notified in writing of the specific nature of the damage and cost of repair. The City shall, at its option, invoice the Contractor for the payment, or reduce by the amount of the repairs on the next regular payment to the Contractor. 5. Occasionally circumstances (standing water, prolonged inclement weather, parked vehicles, etc.) may make all or portions of a location unserviceable during the regular schedule. The Contractor shall notify the City Supervisor of such occurrences, and shall schedule to perform the required work to the location as soon as the pertaining circumstances are relieved. 910. TREE PROTECTION 910 -1. TREE BARRICADES A. A protective barrier shall be placed around all protected trees and palms prior to land preparation or construction activities within or adjacent to the work zone, including all staging and /or lay down areas. Protective barriers shall be installed as follows: 1. At or greater than the full dripline of all species of Mangroves and Cabbage Palms. 2. At or greater than the full dripline or all protected native pine trees and other conifer species. 3. At or greater than two- thirds (2/3) of the dripline of all other protected species SECTION IV Page 103 of 106 Updated 2/11/2016 • SECTION IV — Technical Specifications 4. At or greater than the full dripline of trees within a specimen tree stand. B. Protective barriers are to be constructed using no less than two inch (2 ") lumber for upright posts. Upright posts are to be at least four feet (4') in length with a minimum of one foot (1') anchored in the ground. Upright posts are to be placed at a maximum distance of eight feet (8') apart. Horizontal rails are to be constructed using no less than one inch (1 ") by four -inch (4 ") lumber and shall be securely attached to the top of the upright post. The City's representative must approve any variation from the above requirements. C. Whenever a protective barrier is required, it shall be in place until all construction activity is terminated. The area within the barrier limits shall remain undisturbed by any activity during construction. Native ground cover and understory vegetation existing within the barriers shall remain throughout construction. Exotic plant species may only be removed by manual labor utilizing hand tools or by other means if authorized in writing by the City's representative. D. Prior to the erection of any required protective barrier, all surface foreign material, trash or debris shall be removed from the area enclosed by the barrier, and after erection of the barrier no such material or litter shall be permitted to remain within the protected area. No equipment, chemicals, soil deposits or construction materials shall be placed within such protective barriers. E. No signs, building permits, wires, or other attachments of any kind shall be attached to any protected tree or palm. F. At all times, due care shall be taken to protect the critical root zone of trees protected by this section, and root pruning requirements shall apply to such trees. S 910 -2. ROOT PRUNING A. Where proposed construction improvements involve excavation and/or impacts to the critical root zone of protected trees, the Contractor shall be required to have an International Society of Arboriculture (ISA) certified arborist perform, or directly supervise root pruning to reduce the impacts of construction. The critical root zone is equivalent to the tree's dripline. Prior to any clearing, grubbing or excavation activities, the affected roots must be severed by clean pruning cuts at the point where grubbing or excavation impacts the root system. Roots can be pruned utilizing specified root pruning equipment designed for that purpose or by hand digging a trench and pruning roots with a pruning saw, chain saw or other equipment designed for tree pruning. Root pruning by trenching equipment or excavation equipment is strictly prohibited. Roots located in the critical root zone that will be impacted by construction activities shall be pruned to a minimum depth of eighteen inches (18 ") below existing grade or to the depth of the proposed impact if less than eighteen inches (18 ") from existing grade. The City's Representative on Engineering Department projects for Root Pruning issues is the Senior Landscape Architect and can be reached at (727) 562 -4747, or through the construction inspector assigned to the project. B. Root pruning shall only be performed by or under the direct supervision of an International Society of Arboriculture (ISA) certified arborist. C. Any proposed root pruning trenches shall be identified on site (i.e. staked or painted) inspected and approved by the City's representative prior to actual root pruning. • SECTION IV Page 104 of 106 Updated 2/11/2016 • • • SECTION IV — Technical Specifications D. Root pruning shall be performed as far in advance of other construction activities as is feasible, but at a minimum shall be performed prior to ANY impacts to the soil. Associated tree protection measures should be implemented upon completion of said root pruning. E. If there is a likelihood of excessive wind and/or rain exceptional care shall be taken on any root pruning activities. F. Root pruning shall be limited to a minimum of ten inches (10 ") per one inch (1 ") of the trunk diameter from the tree base. Any exception must be approved by the City's representative prior to said root pruning. G. Roots shall be cut cleanly, as far from the trunk of the tree as possible. Root pruning shall be done to a minimum depth of eighteen inches (18 ") from existing grade, or to the depth of the disturbance if less than eighteen inches (18 "). H. Root pruning shall be performed using a root cutting machine specifically designed for this purpose. Alternate equipment or techniques must be approved by the City's representative, prior to any work adjacent to trees to be preserved. I. Root pruning shall be completed, inspected and accepted prior to the commencement of any excavation or other impacts to the critical root zones of trees to be protected. J. Excavations in an area where root are present shall not cause the tearing or ripping of tree roots. Roots must first be cleanly severed prior to continuing with the excavation, or tunneled around to prevent damage to the root. K. Tree roots shall not be exposed to drying out. Root ends shall be covered with native soil or burlap and kept moist until final backfill or final grades has been established. L. When deemed appropriate (e.g., during periods of drought) the City representative may require a temporary irrigation system be utilized in the remaining critical root zones of root pruned trees. M. When underground utility lines are to be installed within the critical root zone, the root pruning requirement may be waived if the lines are installed via tunneling or directional boring as opposed to open trenching. 910 -3. PROPER TREE PRUNING A. All tree pruning and/or root pruning on existing trees to remain shall only be performed by or under the direct supervision of an International Society of Arboriculture (ISA) certified arborist. Furthermore, all tree work shall conform to the American National Standards Institute (ANSI) 2001, American National Standard for tree care operations — Tree, Shrub and other Woody Plant Maintenance — Standard practices (pruning) ANSI A -300. B. Proper pruning techniques for all lateral branches of protected trees are required. Flush cuts (pruning cuts that remove the branch collar) and stub cuts (cuts that leave a stub on the tree) are improper techniques. Any protected tree that has been improperly pruned will not be recognized as a tree left on the project in a healthy growing condition, and will require replacement consistent with the current City Code of Ordinances and Community Development Code. C. No protected tree shall have more than thirty percent (30 %) of its foliage removed. SECTION IV Page 105 of 106 Updated 2/11/2016 • • • SECTION IV — Technical Specifications D. No protected tree shall be topped, hat racked or lion- tailed. Any protected tree that has been improperly pruned will not be recognized as a tree left on the project in a healthy growing condition, and will require replacement consistent with the current City Code of Ordinances and Community Development Code. E. Tree Trunks and limbs shall be protected. The use of tree spikes or other devices that damage trunk and bark tissue on protected trees shall be prohibited. Any protected tree that has been damaged in such a manner will not be recognized as a tree left on the project in a healthy growing condition, and will require replacement consistent with the current City Code of Ordinances and Community Development Code. SECTION IV Page 106 of 106 Updated 2/11/2016 • SECTION IVA — SUPPLEMENTAL TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF CLEARWATER WTP NO. 1 IMPROVEMENTS — PRESSURE FILTER MODIFICATIONS & ADSORPTION SYSTEM AUTOMATION Section Title TABLE OF CONTENTS DIVISION 1 — GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01000 Project Requirements 01010 Summary of Project 01025 Measurement and Payment 01041 Coordination 01065 Permits and Fees 01070 Abbreviations and Symbols 01091, Reference Specifications 01100 Special Project Procedures 01200 Project Meetings 01310 Construction Progress Schedules • 01340 Shop Drawings, Working Drawings, and Samples 01370 Schedule of Values 01380 Construction Photographs 01410 Testing and Testing Laboratory Services 01500 Temporary Facilities 01505 Mobilization 01525 Construction Aids 01600 Material and Equipment 01650 Start-Up and Demonstration 01700 Contract Closeout 01710 Cleaning 01720 Project Record Documents and Samples 01730 Operating and Maintenance Data 01740 Warranties and Bonds 01800 Miscellaneous Work and Cleanup • -i- SECTION IVA — SUPPLEMENTAL TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF CLEARWATER WTP NO. 1 IMPROVEMENTS — PRESSURE FILTER MODIFICATIONS & ADSORPTION SYSTEM AUTOMATION TABLE OF CONTENTS (Continued) Section Title DIVISION 2 — NOT USED DIVISION 3 — CONCRETE 03300 Cast -In -Place Concrete 03600 Grout DIVISION 4 —NOT USED DIVISION 5 — METALS 05510 Miscellaneous Metals DIVISIONS 6 — 8 — NOT USED DIVISION 9 — FINISHES 09905 Piping, Valve, and Equipment Identification System DIVISION 10 — NOT USED DIVISION 11 — EQUIPMENT 11450 Positive Displacement Blowers and Accessories DIVISION 12 — NOT USED DIVISION 13 — SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION 13410 Basic Instrumentation, Monitoring, and Control Requirements 13413 Optical Fiber Cabeling Systems 13430 Control Panels 13450 Programmable Logic Controllers 13500 Plant Control and Operating Descriptions SECTION IVA — SUPPLEMENTAL TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF CLEARWATER WTP NO. 1 IMPROVEMENTS — PRESSURE FILTER MODIFICATIONS & ADSORPTION SYSTEM AUTOMATION Section Title TABLE OF CONTENTS (Continued) DIVISION 14 — NOT USED DIVISION 15 — MECHANICAL 15000 Mechanical — General Requirements 15044 Pressure Testing of Piping 15066 Stainless Steel Pipe, Fittings, and Pipe Supports 15105 Process Control Valves 15119 Electric Motor Actuators DIVISION 16 — ELECTRICAL 16050 Basic Electrical Requirements 16060 Grounding 16075 Electrical Identification 16120 Wires and Cables 16130 Raceways 16420 Motor Controllers 16440 Panelboards • DIVISION 1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS SECTION 01000 4 PROJECT REQUIREMENTS • • PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Scope of Work: 1. The Work to be done consists of the furnishing of all labor, materials, and equipment, and the performance of all Work included in this Contract. 2. Work Included: a. The Contractor shall furnish all labor, superintendence, materials, plant power, light, heat, fuel, water, tools, appliances, equipment, supplies, and means of construction necessary for proper performance and completion of the Work. The Contractor shall obtain and pay for all necessary local building permits. The Contractor shall perform and complete the Work in the manner best calculated to promote rapid construction consistent with safety of life and property and to the satisfaction of the Engineer, and in strict accordance with the Contract Documents. The Contractor shall clean up the Work and maintain it during and after construction, until accepted, and shall do all Work and pay all costs incidental thereto. The Contractor shall repair or restore all structures and property that may be damaged or disturbed during performance of the Work. b. The cost of incidental work described in these Project Requirements, for which there are no specific Contract Items, shall be considered as part of the general cost of doing the Work and shall be included in the prices for the various Contract Items. No additional payment will be made therefore. c. The Contractor shall provide and maintain such modern plant, tools, and equipment as may be necessary, in the opinion of the Engineer, to perform in a satisfactory and acceptable manner all the Work required by this Contract. Only equipment of established reputation and proven efficiency shall be used. The Contractor shall be solely responsible for the adequacy of his workmanship, materials, and equipment, prior approval of the Engineer notwithstanding. 01000 -1 052316 • • 3. Public Utility Installations and Structures: a. Public utility installations and structures shall be understood to include all poles, tracks, pipes, wires, conduits, vaults, manholes, and all other appurtenances and facilities pertaining thereto whether owned or controlled by the Owner, other governmental bodies, or privately owned by individuals, firms, or corporations, used to serve the public with transportation, traffic control, gas, electricity, telephone, sewerage, drainage, water, or other public or private property which may be affected by the Work shall be deemed included hereunder. b. The Contract Documents contain data relative to existing public utility installations and structures above and below the ground surface. These data are not guaranteed as to their completeness or accuracy and it is the responsibility of the Contractor to make his own investigations to inform himself fully of the character, condition, and extent of all such installations and structures as may be encountered and as may affect the construction operations. c. The Contractor shall protect all public utility installations and structures from damage during the Work. Access across any buried public utility installation or structure shall be made to avoid any damage to these facilities. All required protective devices and construction shall be provided by the Contractor at his expense. All existing public utilities damaged by the Contractor shall be repaired by the Contractor, at his expense. No separate payment shall be made for such protection or repairs to public utility installations or structures. d. Public utility installations or structures owned or controlled by the Owner or other governmental body which are shown on the Drawings to be removed, relocated, replaced, or rebuilt by the Contractor shall be considered as a part of the general cost of doing the Work and shall be included in the prices bid for the various Contract Items. No separate payment shall be made therefor. e. Where public utility installations of structures owned or controlled by the Owner or other governmental body are encountered during the course of the Work, and are not indicated on the Drawings or in the Specifications, and when, in the opinion of the Engineer, removal, relocation, replacement, or rebuilding is necessary to complete the Work under this Contract, such Work shall be accomplished by the utility having jurisdiction, or such Work may 01000 -2 052316 • • • be ordered, in writing by the Engineer, for the Contractor to accomplish. If such work is accomplished by the utility having jurisdiction it will be carried out expeditiously, and the Contractor shall give full cooperation to permit the utility to complete the removal, relocation, replacement, or rebuilding as required. If such work is accomplished by the Contractor, it will be paid for as extra work as provided in the Agreement. f. The Contractor shall, at all times in performance of the Work, employ acceptable methods and exercise reasonable care and skill so as to avoid unnecessary delay, injury, damage, or destruction of public utility installations and structures; and shall, at all times in the performance of the Work, avoid unnecessary interference with, or interruption of, public utility services, and shall cooperate fully with the owners thereof to that end. g. The Contractor shall give written notice to Owner and other governmental utility departments and other owners of public utilities of the location of his proposed construction operations, at least 48 -hours in advance of breaking ground in any area or on any unit of the Work. h. The maintenance, repair, removal, relocation, or rebuilding of public utility installations and structures, when accomplished by the Contractor as herein provided, shall be done by methods approved by the owners of such utilities. 1.02 DRAWINGS AND PROJECT MANUAL A. Drawings: When obtaining data and information from the Drawings, figures shall be used in preference to scaled dimensions, and large -scale drawings in preference to small -scale drawings. B. Supplementary Drawings: 1. When, in the opinion of the Engineer, it becomes necessary to explain more fully the Work to be done or to illustrate the Work further or to show any changes which may be required, drawings known as Supplementary Drawings, with specifications pertaining thereto, will be prepared by the Engineer, and the Contractor will be furnished one (1) complete set of reproducible Drawings (22 inches by 34 inches) and one (1) reproducible copy of the Project Manual. 2. The Supplementary Drawings shall be binding upon the Contractor with the same force as the Contract Drawings. Where such Supplementary 01000 -3 052316 • • • Drawings require either less or more than the estimated quantities of Work, credit to the Owner or compensation therefor to the Contractor shall be subject to the terms of the Agreement. C. Contractor to Check Drawings and Data: 1. The Contractor shall verify all dimensions, quantities, and details shown on the Drawings, Supplementary Drawings, schedules, Specifications, or other data received from the Engineer, and shall notify him of all errors, omissions, conflicts, and discrepancies found therein. Failure to discover or correct errors, conflicts, or discrepancies shall not relieve the Contractor of full responsibility for unsatisfactory work, faulty construction, or improper operation resulting therefrom, nor from rectifying such conditions at his own expense. He will not be allowed to take advantage of any errors or omissions, as full instructions will be furnished by the Engineer, should such errors or omissions be discovered. 2. All schedules are given for the convenience of the Engineer and the Contractor and are not guaranteed to be complete. The Contractor shall assume all responsibility for the making of estimates of the size, kind, and quality of materials and equipment included in work to be done under the Contract. D. Specifications: The Technical Specifications consist of three (3) parts: General, Products, and Execution. The General part of a Specification contains General Requirements for the Work. The Products and Execution parts modify and supplement the General Requirements by detailed requirements for the Work and shall always govern whenever there appears to be a conflict. E. Intent: 1. All Work called for in the Specifications applicable to this Contract, but not shown on the Drawings in their present form, or vice versa, shall be of like effect as if shown or mentioned in both. Work not specified in either the Drawings or in the Specifications, but involved in carrying out their intent or in the complete and proper execution of the Work, is required and shall be performed by the Contractor as though it were specifically delineated or described. 2. The apparent silence of the Specifications as to any detail, or the apparent omission from them of a detailed description concerning any work to be done and materials to be furnished, shall be regarded as meaning that only the best general practice is to prevail and that only material and workmanship of the best quality is to be used, the interpretation of these Specifications shall be made upon that basis. 01000 -4 052316 • • • 1.03 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT A. Manufacturer: 1. All transactions with the manufacturers or subcontractors shall be through the Contractor, unless the Contractor shall request and at the Engineer's option, that the manufacturer or subcontractor deal directly with the Engineer. Any such transactions shall not in any way release the Contractor from his full responsibility under this Contract. 2. Any two (2) or more pieces of material or equipment of the same kind, type, or classification, and being used for identical types of service, shall be made by the same manufacturer. B. Delivery: 1. The Contractor shall deliver materials in ample quantities to ensure the most speedy and uninterrupted progress of the Work so as to complete the Work within the allotted time. 2. The Contractor shall also coordinate deliveries in order to avoid delay in, or impediment of, the progress of the work of any related Contractor. C. Tools and Accessories: 1. The Contractor shall, unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents, furnish with each type, kind, or size of equipment, one (1) complete set of suitably marked high grade special tools and appliances which may be needed to adjust, operate, maintain, or repair the equipment. Such tools and appliances shall be furnished in approved painted steel cases, properly labeled and equipped with good grade cylinder locks and duplicate keys. 2. Spare parts shall be furnished as specified herein and as recommended by the manufacturer necessary for the operation of the equipment, not including materials required for routine maintenance. 3. Each piece of equipment shall be provided with a substantial nameplate, securely fastened in place and clearly inscribed with the manufacturer's name, year of manufacture, serial number, weight, and principal rate data. D. Service of Manufacturer's Engineer: 1. The Contract Prices for equipment shall include the cost of furnishing a competent and experienced engineer or superintendent who shall represent 01000 -5 052316 • • • the manufacturer and shall assist the Contractor, when required, to install, adjust, test, and place in operation, the equipment in conformity with the Contract Documents. 2. After the equipment is placed in permanent operation by the Owner, such engineer or superintendent shall make all adjustments and tests required by the Engineer to prove that such equipment is in proper and satisfactory operating condition, and shall instruct such personnel as may be designated by the Owner in the proper operation and maintenance of such equipment. 1.04 INSPECTION AND TESTING A. General: 1. For tests specified to be made by the Contractor, the testing personnel shall make the necessary inspections and tests, and the reports thereof shall be in such form as will facilitate checking to determine compliance with the Contract Documents. Five (5) copies of the reports shall be submitted, and authoritative certification thereof must be furnished to the Engineer as a prerequisite for the acceptance of any material or equipment. 2. If, in the making of any test of any material or equipment, it is ascertained by the Engineer that the material or equipment does not comply with the Contract Documents, the Contractor will be notified thereof, and he will be directed to refrain from delivering said material or equipment, or to remove it promptly from the site or from the Work and replace it with acceptable material, without cost to the Owner. 3. Tests of electrical and mechanical equipment and appliances shall be conducted in accordance with the recognized test codes of the ANSI, ASME, or the IEEE, except as may otherwise be stated herein. 4. The Contractor shall be fully responsible for the proper operation of equipment during testing and instruction periods and shall neither have nor make any claim for damage which may occur to equipment prior to the time when the Owner formally takes over the operation thereof. B. Costs: 1. All inspection and testing of materials furnished under this Contract will be provided by the Contractor, unless otherwise expressly specified. 2. The cost of shop and field tests of equipment and of certain other tests specifically called for in the Contract Documents shall be borne by the 01000 -6 052316 • • • Contractor, and such costs shall be deemed to be included in the Contract Price. 3. Materials and equipment submitted by the Contractor as the equivalent to those specifically named in the Contract may be tested by the Owner for compliance. The Contractor shall reimburse the Owner for the expenditures incurred in making such tests of materials and equipment which are rejected for non - compliance. C. Certificate of Manufacture: 1. Contractor shall furnish to Engineer authoritative evidence in the form of a certificate of manufacture that the materials to be used in the Work have been manufactured and tested in conformity with the Contract Documents. 2. These certificates shall be notarized and shall include copies of the results of physical tests and chemical analyses, where necessary, that have been made directly on the product or on similar products of the manufacturer. D. Shop Tests: 1. Each piece of equipment for which pressure, duty, capacity, rating, efficiency, performance, function, or special requirements are specified shall be tested in the shop of the maker in a manner which shall conclusively prove that its characteristics comply fully with the requirements of the Contract Documents. 2. Five (5) copies of the manufacturer's actual test data and interpreted results thereof, accompanied by a certificate of authenticity sworn to by a responsible official of the manufacturing company and/or independent laboratory, shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval. 3. The cost of shop tests and of furnishing manufacturer's preliminary and shop test data of operating equipment shall be borne by the Contractor. E. Start -up Tests: 1. As soon as conditions permit, the Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials, and instruments and shall make start-up tests of equipment. 2. If the start-up tests disclose any equipment furnished under this Contract which does not comply with the requirements of the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall, prior to demonstration tests, make all changes, adjustments, and replacements required. The furnishing Contractor shall assist in the start-up tests as applicable. 01000 -7 052316 • • • F. Demonstration Tests: 1. Prior to Contractor's request for a Substantial Completion inspection, all equipment and piping installed under this Contract shall be subjected to demonstration tests as specified or required to prove compliance with the Contract Documents. 2. The Contractor shall furnish labor, fuel, energy, water, and all other materials, equipment, and instruments necessary for all demonstration tests, at no additional cost to the Owner. Contractor shall assist in the demonstration tests as applicable. 1.05 LINES AND GRADES A. Grade: 1. All work under this Contract shall be constructed in accordance with the lines and grades shown on the Drawings, or as given by the Engineer. The full responsibility for keeping alignment and grade shall rest upon the Contractor. 2. Adjustments of grades shown on Drawings may be necessary to conform to actual field conditions or to maintain cover under proposed future grades. Such adjustments shall be considered part of the job conditions and no extra compensation will be allowed for such changes, except where specifically otherwise noted in the Drawings or Specifications. Such adjustments must be approved by the Engineer prior to being made. 3. The Engineer will establish bench marks and baseline controlling points. Reference marks for lines and grades as the Work progresses will be located by the Contractor to cause as little inconvenience to the prosecution of the Work as possible. The Contractor shall so place excavation and other materials as to cause no inconvenience in the use of the reference marks provided. He shall remove any obstructions placed by him contrary to this provision. B. Surveys: 1. The Contractor shall furnish and maintain, at his own expense, stakes and other such materials. 2. The Contractor shall check such reference marks by such means as he may deem necessary and, before using them, shall call the Engineer's attention to any inaccuracies. 01000 -8 052316 • • • 3. The Contractor shall, at his own expense, establish all working or construction lines and grades as required from the reference marks set by the Engineer, and shall be solely responsible for the accuracy thereof. He shall, however, be subject to the check and review by the Engineer. C. Safeguarding Marks: 1. The Contractor shall safeguard all points, stakes, grade marks, monuments, and bench marks made or established on the Work, bear the cost of re- establishing them if disturbed, and bear the entire expense of rectifying work improperly installed due to not maintaining or protecting or to removing without authorization such established points, stakes, and marks. 2. The Contractor shall safeguard all existing and known property corners, monuments, and marks adjacent to but not related to the Work and shall bear the cost of re- establishing them if disturbed or destroyed. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION 01000 -9 052316 • • • SECTION 01010 SUMMARY OF PROJECT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS A. The Work consists of furnishing all labor, equipment, and materials for the construction of the improvements at WTP No. 1 consisting of, but not limited to, the primary components: 1. Blower replacement manual. 2. Butterfly valve replacement with new high performance butterfly valves, each equipped with an electronic motorized actuator (modulating service). 3. Replacement of structural supports. 4. Programming of PLC control logic. 1.02 CONTRACTOR'S USE OF PREMISES A. The Contractor shall assume full responsibility for the protection and safekeeping of products and materials at the job site. If additional storage or work areas are required, they shall be obtained by the Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner. 1.03 PROJECT SEQUENCE A. The Contractor shall establish his work sequence based on the use of crews to facilitate completion of construction and testing within the specified Contract Time. B. Water Treatment Plant No. 1 (WTP No. 1) shall remain operational throughout construction of the improvement. Work sequence shall be staged to maintain plant operation. WTP No. 1 shall not be taken off -line for tie -ins or switchovers, unless approved by the Owner. Contractor shall follow shutdown request and max shutdown times as detailed on drawings. PART 2 — PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 — EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION 01010 -1 083016 • • SECTION 01025 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 1.01 GENERAL INFORMATION A. Refer to Section 01010 for a description of the work required for completion of the Work. B. Subject to the provisions in the Contract General Conditions, all work and payment for the work is represented by the Total Base Bid amount shown on the Bid Form. 1.02 PAYMENT A. Work under this contract will be paid for on a unit price basis as outlined on the Bid Form. The amount of payment will be as defined in the Standard Form of Agreement Between OWNER and Contractor, Article 5 of Payment Procedures. B. The prices shown on the Bid Form establish a total price cost for completing the Work in its entirety. Furnish all materials, equipment, transportation, tools, labor, services and supplies, plus any miscellaneous items and services that may not be specifically identified in the Contract Drawings and Specifications but that can be inferred from the Contract Drawings and Specifications and are necessary to produce a completed Work that is usable in a manner for which it was intended. If any items for a complete work are omitted or not shown, the Contractor shall furnish and install them without additional cost to the OWNER. No separate payment will be made for another Payment Item required to complete the work of a lump sum item. C. The Contractor shall prepare and submit an Application for Payment no more often than each month. D. Retainage shall apply to all Contractor payments prior to final acceptance as provided for in the Contract General Conditions. 1.03 MEASUREMENT FOR PAYMENT A. Measurement for Lump Sum bid items shall be based on the percent of actual completion as determined by the Contractor and agreed upon by the ENGINEER. B. Measurement of volumes shall be the actual "as- built" volume pertinent to payment items. Quantities on the Bid Form are estimated and may be increased or decreased without limit. 01025 -1 052316 • • • 1.04 PAYMENT ITEMS A. Separate payment will be made for the Unit Price and Lump Sum Items listed on the Bid Form. Related work not specifically listed or identified, but evidently necessary for satisfactory completion of the Item, shall be considered to be included. B. No separate payment will be made for the following Work and its cost shall be included in appropriate Payment Items: 1. Maintenance and replacement of plantings and sodding. 2. Record drawings. 3. Construction photographs and videotape recordings. 4. Field office(s) and storage facilities. 5. Clean up. 6. Testing materials and apparatus. 7. Appurtenant work. 8. Contractor fees associated with the performance of the Work. 9. Night work. C. The following will clarify the work included for bid items in the Pay Item Sheet: 1. Mobilization and Demobilization (Bid Item No. 1): a. Measurement of various items for Mobilization and Demobilization will not be made for payment and all items shall be included in the lump sum price. b. Payment for Mobilization and Demobilization will be made at the Contract lump sum price for the item, which price and payment shall be full compensation for the preparatory work and operations in mobilizing for beginning work on the Project and demobilizing for ending work on the Project. The establishment of field offices, buildings, safety equipment, first aid supplies, sanitary and other facilities, as required by these Specifications, State and local laws and any other preconstruction expense necessary for the state of the Work; the cost of field engineering, including disposal of cleared and grubbed material and debris, permits and fees, construction schedules, preconstruction video and photographs, project signs, shop drawings, temporary facilities, lay down storage area, construction aids, erosion control, work associated with Contractor support during Owner /Engineer testing, reviews and inspection, re- inspection and any rework resulting from same, cleaning, project 01025 -2 052316 • • records documents, operating and maintenance data. The Contractor shall submit invoices substantiating the cost of mobilization with each pay request. Ten percent of the cost for mobilization and demobilization will be withheld. until acceptance and final payment. Contractor is responsible for securing a site for storage of materials and equipment and all other construction needs and providing security for this site and its contents. 2. General Requirements (Bid Item No. 2): a. Measurement for various items covered under General Requirements will not be made for payment, and all items shall be included in the lump sum price. b. Payment for General Requirements shall include all Insurance requirements costs, the costs of all bonds, and all administrative costs associated with acquiring and maintaining the necessary coverage as described in the Contract Documents. This item will be paid upon each payment request made by the Contractor. The Contractor shall attach with the payment request invoices to substantiate that appropriate insurance and bonds have been obtained by the Contractor. Payment will be based on percentage of work completed during the pay period at time of pay application to the nearest 10% complete. The cumulative total shall not exceed the Lump Sum Bid Pay Item Amount. 3. Indemnification (Bid Item No. 3): a. In consideration of the Contractor's indemnity agreement as set out in the Contract Documents, the OWNER specifically agrees to give the Contractor a minimum of $1,000.00 and other good and valuable consideration, receipt of which is acknowledged upon signing of the Agreement. 4. All other work not included in line items 1, 2, and 3 to construct the WTP No. 1 Improvements (Bid Item No. 4): a. Measurement of various items not included in other bid items to construct the WTP No. 1 Improvements will not be made for payment and all items shall be included in the lump sum price. b. Payment for these items will include all materials, equipment, and work required to complete the project as shown on or inferred by the Contract Documents and will be made at the contract lump sum. Contractor shall provide line item breakdown of specific work and associated costs in the Schedule of Values. 01025 -3 052316 PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) • • END OF SECTION 01025 -4 052316 • • • SECTION 01041 PROJECT COORDINATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Furnish personnel and equipment that will be efficient, appropriate and large enough to secure a satisfactory quality of work and a rate of progress that will ensure the completion of the work within the Contract time. If at any time, such personnel appear to the Engineer to be inefficient, inappropriate or insufficient for securing the quality of work aforementioned, he may order the Contractor to increase the efficiency, change the character or increase the personnel and equipment, and the Contractor shall conform to such order. Failure of the Engineer to give such order shall in no way relieve the Contractor or his obligations to secure the quality of the work and rate of progress. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PIPE LOCATIONS A. All pipes shall be located substantially as indicated on the Drawings, but the Engineer reserves the right to make such modifications in locations as may be found desirable to avoid interference with existing structures or for other reasons. Where fittings are noted on the Drawings, such notation is for the Contractor's convenience and does not relieve him from laying and jointing different or additional items where required. 3.02 OPEN EXCAVATIONS A. Contractor shall adequately safeguard all open excavations by providing temporary barricades, caution signs, lights, and other means to prevent accidents to persons, and damage to property. The Contractor shall, at his own expense, provide suitable and safe bridges and other crossings for accommodating travel by workmen. All open excavations shall comply with applicable OSHA Standards. 3.03 TEST PITS A. Test pits for the purpose of locating underground pipelines or structures in advance of the construction shall be excavated and backfilled by the Contractor. Test pits shall be backfilled immediately after their purpose has been satisfied and 01041 -1 052316 • • • maintained in a manner satisfactory to the Engineer. The costs for such test pits shall be borne by the Contractor. 3.04 CARE AND PROTECTION OF PROPERTY A. The Contractor shall be responsible for the preservation of all public and private property, and shall use every precaution necessary to prevent damage thereto. If any direct or indirect damage is done to public or private property by or on account of any act, omission, neglect, or misconduct in the execution of the Work on the part of the Contractor, such property shall be restored by the Contractor, at his expense, to a condition similar or equal to that existing before the damage was done, or he shall make good the damage in other manner acceptable to the Engineer. 3.05 PROTECTION OF CONSTRUCTION AND EQUIPMENT A. All newly constructed work shall be carefully protected from damage in any way. No wheeling or walking or placing of heavy loads on it shall be allowed and all portions damaged shall be reconstructed by the Contractor at no additional expense to the Owner. B. Protect all structures in a suitable manner to prevent damage. Should any part of a structure become heaved, cracked or otherwise damaged, all such damaged portions of the work shall be completely repaired and made good by the Contractor at his own expense and to the satisfaction of the Engineer. If, in the final inspection of the work, any defects, faults or omissions are found, the Contractor shall cause the same to be repaired or removed and replaced by proper materials and workmanship without extra compensation for the materials and labor required. Further, the Contractor shall be fully responsible for the satisfactory maintenance and repair of the construction and other work undertaken herein, for at least the guarantee period described in the Contract. C. Further, the Contractor shall take all necessary precautions to prevent damage to any structure due to water pressure during and after construction and until such structure is accepted and taken over by the Owner. 3.06 MAINTENANCE OF TRAFFIC A. Unless permission to close a street is received in writing from the proper authority (County, City, FDOT, etc.), all excavated material shall be placed so that vehicular and pedestrian traffic may be maintained at all times. If the Contractor's operations cause traffic hazards, he shall repair the road surface, provide temporary ways, erect wheel guards or fences, or take other measures for safety satisfactory to the Engineer. 01041 -2 052316 • • • B. Detours around construction will be subject to the approval of the Owner and the Engineer. Where detours are permitted, the Contractor shall provide all necessary barricades and signs as required to divert the flow of traffic. While traffic is detoured, the Contractor shall expedite construction operations and periods when traffic is being detoured will be strictly controlled by the Owner. All maintenance of traffic plans required for construction shall be approved by the local governmental entity having jurisdiction. C. The Contractor shall take precautions to prevent injury to the public due to open trenches. Night watchmen may be required where special hazards exist, or police protection provided for traffic while work is in progress. The Contractor shall be fully responsible for damage or injuries whether or not police protection has been provided. 3.07 PRIVATE LAND A. The Contractor shall not enter or occupy private land outside the site, except by written permission of the appropriate Owners. Contractor shall provide Owner a copy of such written permission prior to entering private land. 3.08 COOPERATION WITHIN THIS CONTRACT A. The Contractor shall, at least 48 hours prior to interrupting a utility service (water, sewer, etc.) for the purpose of making cut -ins to the existing lines or for any other purposes, contact the Owner and make arrangements for the interruption, which will be satisfactory to the Owner. B. The Contractor shall plan his work to minimize interference with the operation of the existing water treatment facilities. The Contractor shall coordinate with and provide at least 72 hours notice to the Owner prior to any required shutdown or interruption of the operation of any portion of the existing water treatment plant and shall plan his work to minimize interruptions of service. 3.09 COOPERATION WITH OTHER CONTRACTS A. This Contract will require a portion of the work to be connected to work done under other contract(s). It will be necessary for the Contractor to plan his work and cooperate with other contractors insofar as possible to prevent any interference and delay. END OF SECTION 01041 -3 052316 • • • SECTION 01065 PERMITS AND FEES PART 1 - GENERAL A. The Contractor shall obtain all permits and licenses related to his work, including but not limited to, the necessary construction permits (including a City of Clearwater Building Permit) except as otherwise provided herein. The Contractor shall also, if in effect and applicable at the date of bid opening, pay any governmental agency charges and inspection fees required for the prosecution of the work. If the Contractor desires connection of utility services (telephone or electricity) to a field office, he will be responsible for securing the necessary permits and any connection or disconnection charges involved. B. Permits by Owner: It is not anticipated that the Owner will be responsible for applying for permits for this project. C. The Contractor shall adhere to all requirements as contained in permits. END OF SECTION 01065 -1 052316 • • SECTION 01070 ABBREVIATIONS AND SYMBOLS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 STANDARDS AND ABBREVIATIONS A. Referenced Standards: Any reference to published specifications or standards of any organization or association shall comply with the requirements of the specification or standard which is current on the date of Advertisement for Bids. In case of a conflict between the referenced specifications or standards, the one having the more stringent requirements shall govern. In case of conflict between the referenced specifications or standards and the Contract Documents, the Contract Documents shall govern. B. Abbreviations: AA Aluminum Association AAA American Arbitration Association AABC Associated Air Balance Council AAMA Architectural Aluminum Manufacturers Association AASHO The American Association of State Highway Officials ABA American Bar Association ABMA American Boiler Manufacturers Association ABPA Acoustical and Board Products Association ACI American Concrete Institute ACPA American Concrete Pipe Association AEIC Association of Edison Illuminating Companies AFBMA Anti - Friction Bearing Manufacturers Association AGA American Gas Association AGC Associated General Contractors of America AGMA American Gear Manufacturers Association AHA American Hardboard Association AI The Asphalt Institute AIA American Institute of Architects AIA American Insurance Association AIEE American Institute of Electrical Engineers (Now IEEE) AIMA Acoustical and Insulating Materials Association AISC American Institute of Steel Construction AISI American Iron and Steel Institute AITC American Institute of Timber Construction AMCA Air Moving and Conditioning Association ANSI American National Standard Institute 01070 -1 050416 • • • APA American Plywood Association API American Petroleum Institute APWA American Public Works Association AREA American Railway Engineering Association ARI American Refrigeration Institute ASA American Standards Association (Now ANSI) ASAHC American Society of Architectural Hardware Consultants ASCE American Society of Civil Engineers ASHRAE American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Engineers ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers ASSCBC American Standard Safety Code for Building Construction ASSHTO American Association of State Highway Transportation Officials ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials AWG American Wire Gauge AWI Architectural Woodwork Institute AWPA American Wood Preservers Association AWPB American Wood Preservers Bureau AWPI American Wood Preservers Institute AWS American Welding Society AWWA American Water Works Association BHMA Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association BIA Brick Institute of America (formerly SCPI) CDA Copper Development Association CFS Cubic Feet Per Second CMAA Crane Manufacturers Association of America CRSI Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute CS Commercial Standard DHI Door and Hardware Institute DIPRA Ductile Iron Pipe Research Association DOT Spec Standard Specification for Road and Bridge Construction Florida Department of Transportation E/A Engineer and /or Architect EDA Economic Development Association EEI Edison Electric Institute EPA Environmental Protection Agency FCI Fluid Control Institute FDEP Florida Department of Environmental Protection FDOT Florida Department of Transportation Fed Spec Federal Specification FPS Feet Per Second FS Federal Standards GPM Gallons Per Minute HMI Hoist Manufacturers Institute HP Horsepower 01070 -2 050416 • • • HSBII ID IEEE IFI IPCEA IPS MGD MHI MMA NBFU NBHA NBS NCSA NCSPA NEC NECA NEMA NFPA NLA NPC NPT NSC NSF OD OSHA PCA PCI PS PSI PSIA PSIG RPM SAE SDI SJI SMACNA SSI SSPC SSPC STA SWFWMD TDH TH UBC Hartford Steam Boiler Inspection and Insurance Co. Inside Diameter Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers Industrial Fasteners Institute Insulated Power Cable Engineers Association Iron Pipe Size Million Gallons Per Day Materials Handling Institute Monorail Manufacturers Association National Board of Fire Underwriters National Builders' Hardware Association National Bureau of Standards National Crushed Stone Association National Corrugated Steel Pipe Association National Electrical Code National Electrical Contractors' Association National Electrical Manufacturers' Association National Fire Protection Association National Lime Association National Plumbing Code National Pipe Threads National Safety Council National Sanitation Foundation Outside Diameter U.S. Department of Labor, Occupational Safety and Health Act Portland Cement Association Prestressed Concrete Institute United States Products Standards Pounds per Square Inch Pounds per Square Inch Absolute Pounds per Square Inch Gauge Revolutions Per Minute Society of Automotive Engineers Steel Decks Institute Steel Joists Institute Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association Scaffolding and Shoring Institute Steel Structures Painting Council Structural Steel Painting Council Station (100 feet) Southwest Florida Water Management District Total Dynamic Head Total Head Uniform Building Code 01070 -3 050416 • • • UL Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc. USASI or United States of America Standards Institute C. Additional abbreviations and symbols are shown on the Drawings. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION 01070 -4 050416 • SECTION 01091 REFERENCE SPECIFICATIONS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL A. Applicable Publications. Whenever in these Specifications references are made to published specifications, codes, standards, or other requirements, it shall be understood that wherever no date is specified, only the latest specifications, standards, or requirements of the respective issuing agencies which have been published as of the date that the Work is advertised for bids, shall apply; except to the extent that said standards or requirements may be in conflict with applicable laws, ordinances, or governing codes. No requirements set forth herein or shown on the Drawings shall be waived because of any provision of or omission from said standards or requirements. B. Assignment of Specialists. In certain instances, specification test requires (or implies) that specific work is to be assigned to specialist or expert entities who must be engaged for the performance of the Work. Such assignments shall be recognized as special requirements over which the Contractor has no choice or option. These requirements shall not be interpreted so as to conflict with the enforcement of building codes and similar regulations governing the Work. They are not intended to interfere with local union jurisdiction settlements and similar conventions. Such assignments are intended to establish which party or entity involved in a specific unit of Work is recognized as "expert" for the indicated construction processes or operations. Nevertheless, the final responsibility for fulfillment of the entire set of Contract requirements remains with the Contractor. 1.02 REFERENCE SPECIFICATIONS, CODES, AND STANDARDS A. Without limiting the generality of other requirements of the Specifications, all Work specified herein shall conform to or exceed the requirements of such referenced documents which are not in conflict with the requirements of these Specifications or applicable codes. B. References herein to 'Building Code" shall mean the Florida Building Code. The latest edition of the code shall apply to the Work herein, including all addenda, modifications, amendments, or other lawful changes thereto. C. In case of conflict between codes, reference standards, Drawings, and the other Contract Documents, the most stringent requirements shall govern. All conflicts shall be brought to the attention of the Engineer for clarification and directions 01091 -1 050416 • • • prior to ordering or providing any materials or labor. The Contractor shall bid the most stringent requirements. D. Applicable Standard Specifications. The Contractor shall construct the Work specified herein in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents and the referenced portions of those referenced codes, standards, and specifications listed. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 01091 -2 050416 • • SECTION 01100 SPECIAL PROJECT PROCEDURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 PUBLIC NUISANCE A. The Contractor shall not create a public nuisance including, but not limited to, encroachment on adjacent lands, pollution of adjacent lands, flooding of adjacent lands, or excessive noise. B. Sound levels measured by the contractor furnished testing service shall not exceed 50 dBA from 7 P.M. to 7 A.M. or 60 dBA 7 A.M. to 7 P.M. This sound level shall be measured at the exterior of the nearest exterior wall of the nearest residence. Levels at the equipment shall not exceed 85 dBA at any time. Sound levels in excess of these values are sufficient cause to have the Work halted until equipment sound levels are in compliance with this section. Work stoppage by the local governmental agency, Engineer, or Owner for excessive noise shall not relieve the Contractor for any delays of other portions of the contract including but not limited to the completion date. This work stoppage shall not be grounds for any claims by the Contractor. C. Pollution control (i.e. dust, dirt, debris, etc.) shall be based on requirements outlined in Section 02050 - Demolition to comply with governing regulations. D. No claim shall be made by the Contractor for time lost due to work stoppage resulting from the creation of a public nuisance by the Contractor. 1.02 EXCAVATION AROUND AND CONNECTION TO EXISTING UTILITIES A. It is essential that the Contractor understand that the existing WTP No. 1 must be kept in operation with minimal impact and shut - downs. The Contractor shall coordinate and consult with the Owner's plant operating personnel before excavating around or cutting into existing utilities on the plant site. Existing utilities of major concern are water, chemical and process pipelines, electrical power conduits and cables, instrumentation conduits and cables and drain lines. B. The Contractor shall take necessary steps to verify the location of all underground utilities shown prior to commencing any excavation work. Where work is to be conducted through congested utility corridors where the likelihood exists that all underground utilities may not be shown, the Contractor shall use methods such as the use of ground penetrating radar, or equal, in order to establish the locations of potential conflicts within the proposed alignment. Where potential conflicts are 01100 -1 052316 • to • identified, the Contractor shall submit (within seven (7) days of discovery) to the Engineer for review, a plan for avoiding such conflict. C. Some areas within the water plant construction site will require hand excavation due to the congestion of underground piping systems and/or due to the criticality of piping systems that may be damaged unavoidably during machine excavation. D. Cover for underground piping shall not be less than that indicated on the Drawings, or a minimum of 36 inches of cover where obtainable. In areas where other piping conflicts preclude the maximum cover desired, the piping shall be laid to provide the maximum cover obtainable. E. All connections to existing piping systems shall be made as shown or indicated on the Drawings after consultation, cooperation, and coordination with the Owner's plant management personnel. Some such connections may have to be made during off -peak hours (late night or early morning hours). The Contractor shall give a minimum of 72 hours notice to the Owner when tie -ins with the existing plant utilities are required. F. For major utility pipeline tie -ins and relocations, the Contractor shall submit a detailed Plan of Action for review and approval by the Owner and the Engineer. No major utility relocation or tie -ins shall proceed until the Plan of Action for that Work is approved. 1.04 JURISDICTIONAL DISPUTES A. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to pay all costs that may be required to perform any of the Work shown on the Drawings or specified herein in order to avoid any work stoppages due to jurisdictional disputes. 1.05 INCLEMENT WEATHER A. In the event of inclement weather, the Contractor shall, and shall cause subcontractors to protect carefully the Work and materials against damage or injury from the weather. If, in the opinion of the Engineer, any portion of work or materials have been damaged or injured by reason of failure on the part of the Contractor or any subcontractors to so protect the Work, such Work and materials shall be removed and replaced at the expense of the Contractor. 1.06 COORDINATION OF WORK A. The Contractor shall cooperate fully so as to eliminate or minimize the creation of conflicts. Adjustments from time to time may be required in the Contractor's work location and/or schedule provided a reasonable notice is given by the Owner or Engineer. 01100 -2 052316 • • • 1.07 USE OF PUBLIC STREETS A. The use of public streets and roads shall be such as to provide a minimum of an inconvenience to the public and to other traffic. Any earth or other excavated materials spilled from trucks shall be removed by the Contractor and the streets and roads cleaned to the satisfaction of the Owner. 1.08 CHEMICALS A. All chemicals that come in contact with the process water or potable water shall be in conformance with ANSI/NSF Standard 60 for drinking water use. B All chemicals used during project construction, or furnished for project operations, must show approval of the State Department of Health, Florida Department of Environmental Protection and if required, also the EPA or USDA. Use of all such chemicals and disposal of residues shall be in strict conformance with the manufacturer's instructions or recommended use procedures. 1.09 SAFETY AND HEALTH REGULATIONS A. The Contractor shall comply with the Department of Labor Safety & Health Regulations for construction promulgated under the Occupational Safety & Health Act of 1970, (PL 91 -596) and under Section 107 of the Contract Work Hours & Safety Standards Act (PL 91 -54). B. All equipment furnished and installed under this Contract shall comply to Part 1910, Occupational Safety & Health Standards & Amendments thereto. C. The Contractor shall comply with the Florida Trench Safety Act (90 -96, Florida Law). D. All materials, equipment, and components that come in contact with drinking water or drinking water chemicals shall be in conformance with ANSI/NSF Standard 61. E. All raw water and potable piping and equipment that will contact raw water or potable water shall be disinfected in accordance with City and FDEP requirements prior to being put into service. 1.10 STATE AND FEDERAL PERMITS A. Construction in Florida Department of Transportation rights -of -way, wetlands and navigable water bodies will be governed by applicable State and Federal permits. 01100 -3 052316 • • • All conditions set forth on the permits shall be a part of the Contract and they shall be attached by addendum. 1.11 INSPECTION A. The authorized representatives and agents of the Environmental Protection Agency and Controlling State and Local Pollution Control Agencies shall be permitted to inspect all work, material, payrolls, personnel records, invoices of materials and any other relevant data and records. The Owner and Engineer shall be permitted access to any work area for the inspection of work and materials. The Owner may, at the Contractor's expense, order the uncovering or removal of any finished work if circumstances indicate faulty work or materials were used in the original installation. The Owner and Engineer shall also be permitted to inspect material invoices, payrolls or any other relevant data or records as may be necessary or required to satisfy the requirements of the Contract. 1.12 ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION A. General: 1. Contractor shall comply with all Federal, State and Local laws and regulations controlling pollution of the environment. Contractor shall take necessary precautions to prevent pollution of streams, lakes, ponds, and reservoirs with fuels, oils, bitumens, chemicals, or other harmful materials and to prevent pollution of the atmosphere from particulate and gaseous matter. In the event of conflict between such laws and regulations and the requirements of the Specifications, the more restrictive requirements shall apply. Environmental protection requirements specified in other Sections shall be considered as supplementing the requirements of this Section. 2. Failure of the Contractor to fulfill any of the requirements of this Section may result in the Owner ordering the stopping of construction operations. 3. Failure on the part of the Contractor to perform the necessary measures to control erosion, siltation, and pollution will result in the Owner notifying the Contractor to take such measures. In the event that the Contractor fails to perform such measures within 24 hours after receipt of such notice, the Owner may stop the Work as provided above, or may proceed to have such measures performed by others. The cost of such work performed by others plus related fees by the Engineer will be deducted from monies due the Contractor on his Contract. 4. All erosion and pollution control features installed by the Contractor shall be acceptably maintained by the Contractor during the time that construction work is being done. 01100-4 052316 • • 5. Repair or replace damaged or inoperative erosion and pollution control devices as directed by the Engineer or the Owner's Representative. 6. Where there is a high potential for erosion and possible water pollution, the Contractor shall not expose, by his construction methods or procedures, an area of erosive land at any one time larger than the minimum amount required for the proper and efficient construction operation. If the exposure of any incomplete work corresponding to the exposure period required for erosion is anticipated, temporary protective measures shall be taken to prevent the erosion or collapse of land in that immediate construction area. B. Erosion and Pollution Control Schedule: At or prior to the preconstruction conference, the Contractor shall submit to the Owner for his information, three (3) copies of his erosion and pollution control work schedule. This schedule shall show the time relationship between phases of the Work which must be coordinated to reduce erosion and pollution, and shall describe construction practices and temporary control measures which will be used to minimize erosion and pollution. The schedule shall also show the Contractor's proposed method of erosion control on haul roads and borrow and material pits, and his plan for disposal of waste materials or other sources of pollution. Maps or other documents may also be required to show the proposed final surface gradient of proposed borrow pits, soil type base course pits, and waste areas. No work shall be started until the erosion and pollution control schedules and methods of operations have been submitted to the Owner for his information. C. Air Pollution Controls: 1. Contractor shall control dust caused by his operations in the construction of the Project, including but not specifically limited to the following: a. Clearing, grubbing, and stripping. b. Excavation and placement of embankment. c. Cement and aggregate handling. d. Limerock stabilization. e. Use of haul roads. f. Sandblasting or grinding. 01100 -5 052316 • 2. Contractor shall control air pollution from the following causes in constructing the project: a. Volatiles escaping from asphalt and cutback materials. b. Use of herbicides or fertilizers. 3. Control of dust and other air pollutants by the Contractor shall include: a. Exposing the minimum area of land. b. Applying temporary mulch with or without seeding. c. Use of water sprinkler trucks. d. Use of covered haul trucks. e. Use of stabilizing agents in solution. f. Use dust palliatives and penetration asphalt on temporary roads. g. Use of wood chips in traffic and work areas. h. Use of vacuum - equipped sandblasting systems. i. Use of plastic sheet coverings. J. Restricting the application rate of herbicides to recommended dosage. Materials shall be covered and protected from the elements. Application equipment and empty containers shall not be rinsed and discharged so as to pollute a stream, river, lake, pond, water impoundment, or the ground water. k. Relay of operations until climate or wind conditions dissipate or inhibit the potential pollutants. D. Open Burning of Combustible Wastes: No open burning of combustible waste materials or vegetation shall be permitted. All waste materials shall be removed from the site or within public rights -of -way and disposed in a legal manner. E. Permanent and Temporary Water Pollution Control (Soil Erosion): 1. Sufficient precautions shall be taken during construction to minimize the run -off of polluting substances such as silt, clay, fuels, oils, bitumens, calcium chloride, or other polluting materials harmful to humans, fish, or 01100 -6 052316 • • • other life, into the supplies and surface waters of the State. Control measures must be adequate to assure that turbidity in the receiving water will not be increased more than allowed by the State or controlling agency. Such measures may consist of construction of berms, dikes, dams, drains and sediment basins, or use of fiber mats, woven plastic filter cloths, gravel, mulches, quick growing grasses, sod, bituminous spray and other erosion control devices or methods approved by the State or controlling agency. 2. The Contractor shall not be permitted frequent fording of live streams with construction equipment; therefore, temporary bridges or other structures shall be used wherever such crossings adversely affect sediment levels and an appreciable number of stream crossings are necessary. 3. The Contractor shall promptly clear all waterways and drainage patterns of false work, piling, debris, or other obstructions placed during construction work and not a part of the finished work. 4. The Contractor shall remove and dispose of silt accumulations as directed by the Engineer or the Owner's Representative. 5. If new and additional erosion control structures are to be installed, under this project, to prevent possible future erosion as a result of work under this contract, they shall be constructed concurrently with the other work, as early as possible, and as conditions permit. F. Noise Control: The Contractor shall provide adequate protection against objectionable noise levels caused by the operation of construction equipment in order to comply with all current City ordinances and these Specifications. Sound levels shall be measured at the exterior of the nearest exterior wall of the nearest residence or building. Levels at construction equipment shall not exceed 85 dBA at any time. Sound levels in excess of allowable values are sufficient cause to have the work halted until equipment can be quieted to these levels. Work stoppage by the Engineer or Owner for excessive noise shall not relieve the Contractor of the other portions of this Specification including, but not limited to completion dates and bid amounts. 1.13 TREE AND SHRUB PROTECTION AND TRIMMING A. Contractor shall exercise care to protect all trees and shrubs designated to remain. Trees and shrubs outside construction limits shall remain and shall be protected and where damaged, restored to original condition. Contractor shall obtain approval from the Owner prior to removing any trees. Trees damaged within construction limits due to negligence shall be restored to original condition. 01100 -7 052316 • • B. Tree limbs which interfere with construction operations and are approved for pruning shall be neatly cut with sharp pruning instruments; do not break or chop. All cut faces shall be coated with an approved tree pruning compound which is waterproof, antiseptic, elastic and free of kerosene, coal tar, creosote and other substances harmful to plants. Pruning operations shall be extended to restore the natural shape of the entire tree or shrub. Do not allow fires under or adjacent to trees or other plants which are to remain. C. Contractor shall protect tree and shrub root systems. Do not store construction materials, debris or excavated materials beyond construction limits. Do not permit vehicles or construction equipment beyond the limits of utility line construction. Restrict foot traffic to prevent excessive compaction of soil over root system. Excavated material shall be stockpiled away from tree drip lines as approved by the Engineer. Protect tree and shrub root systems from damage due to noxious materials in solution caused by run -off or spillage during construction operations, or drainage from stored materials. Protect root systems from flooding, erosion or excessive wetting resulting from dewatering operations. Excavate within the drip line of trees only when approved by the Engineer. Where trees are designated to remain within the limits of construction and trenching for utilities is required within tree drip lines, cut roots with sharp pruning instruments; do not break or chop. Paint roots over 2" caliper with approved tree pruning compound. D. Trees damaged by construction operations shall be repaired promptly after damage occurs to prevent progressive deterioration of damaged trees. Removed trees, branches, roots and other excess materials shall be removed from the construction site to an approved landfill at the expense of the Contractor. 1 14 SITE CLEANUP AND RESTORATION A. The Contractor shall keep the working area free at all times of tools, materials and equipment not essential to the progress of the Work. Debris, waste materials, and rubbish shall be properly disposed of and not allowed to accumulate. If the Contractor should fail to do this, the Owner will make the necessary arrangements to affect the cleanup by others and will back charge the cost to the Contractor. If such action becomes necessary on the part of and in the opinion of the Owner, the Owner will not be responsible for the inadvertent removal of material which the Contractor would not have disposed of had he affected the required cleanup. B. Where material or debris has washed or flowed into or been placed in watercourses, ditches, gutters, drains, catch basins, or elsewhere as result of the Contractor's operations, such material or debris shall be entirely removed and satisfactorily disposed of during progress of the Work, and the ditches, channels, drains etc., kept in a clean and neat condition. 01100 -8 052316 • • • C. On or before the completion of the Work, the Contractor shall, unless otherwise especially directed or permitted in writing, tear down and remove all temporary buildings and structures built by him; shall remove all temporary works, tools, and machinery or other construction equipment furnished by him; shall remove, acceptably disinfect, and cover all organic matter and material containing organic matter in, under, and around privies, houses, and other buildings used by him; shall remove all rubbish from any grounds he has occupied; and shall leave the roads and all parts of the premises and adjacent property affected by his operations, in a neat and satisfactory condition. D. The Contractor shall restore the entire project site to its original or better condition, with the exception of any area(s) designated for alteration by the Contract Documents. The Contractor shall restore or replace; when and as directed, any public or private property damaged by his work, equipment, or employees to a condition at least equal to that existing immediately prior to the beginning of operations. To this end the Contractor shall do as required all necessary highway or driveway, walk, and landscaping work. Suitable materials, equipment, and methods shall be used for such restoration. E. The Contractor shall thoroughly clean all materials and equipment installed by him and his subcontractors and on completion of the Work shall deliver it undamaged and in fresh and new appearing condition. 1.15 LAWS AND REGULATIONS A. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to give all notices and comply with all the laws, rules, regulations, ordinances, etc., that may be applicable at the time the Work is started on the project. Should the Contractor discover the Drawings or Specifications are contradictory to, or in variance with the above, he shall notify the Engineer immediately, in writing, in order that any required changes or modifications can be made. It is not the Contractor's responsibility to make certain that the Drawings or Specifications are in non - compliance with any of the above; however, should he be aware of any existing discrepancy, or have reason to believe such may exist and performs work without proper notice to the Engineer, the Contractor shall be responsible for any cost involved in making the necessary alterations or corrections. 1.16 CONTRACTOR'S USE OF PREMISES A. All project construction work will be accomplished on the Owner's property, public rights -of -way or within temporary construction easements and the Contractor shall confine his activity to those designated areas. The Contractor shall not enter upon private property for any reason without securing prior permission from the property owner. Such permission, including any stipulations, shall be in writing and a copy shall be delivered to the Engineer prior to the 01100 -9 052316 • Contractor's entry or occupation of the subject property. This requirement will be rigidly enforced, particularly with regard to the utilization of vacant areas adjacent to the work site for the storage of materials or parking equipment. B. The Contractor shall perform his work in such manner that he will not damage adjacent public or private property. Any damage to existing physical structures or utility services shall be repaired or restored promptly at no expense to the Owner. C. The Contractor shall avoid damage to and preserve all existing vegetation (grass, shrubs, trees, etc.) on or near the work area which do not, within reason, interfere with construction. The Contractor will be responsible for and required to replace or restore all such vegetation damaged or destroyed at no cost to the Owner. The Contractor will also be responsible for any unauthorized cutting or damage to trees, shrubs, etc., and also damage caused by careless operation of equipment, storage of materials and rutting or tracking of grass by equipment. D. All connections to existing piping systems shall be made as shown or indicated on the Drawings after consultation, cooperation, and coordination with the Owner. Some such connections may have to be made during off -peak hours (late night or early morning hours). The Contractor shall give a minimum of 72 hours notice to the Owner when tie -ins with the existing plant utilities are required. E. For major utility pipeline tie -ins and relocations, the Contractor shall submit a detailed Plan of Action for review and approval by the Owner and the Engineer. No major utility relocation or tie -ins shall proceed until the Plan of Action for that Work is approved. 1.17 HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS A. The Contractor shall be responsible for identification of hazardous locations, appropriate construction methods, and all other safety issues. 1.18 ADDITIONAL PROVISIONS, PROJECT SEQUENCE A. The Contractor shall provide at his own cost all necessary temporary facilities for access to, and for protection of, all existing structures. The Contractor is responsible for all damage to existing structures, equipment, and facilities caused by his construction operations, and must repair all such damage when and as ordered by the Engineer. B. The WTP No. 1 shall remain operational throughout construction. The WTP No. 1 shall not be taken off -line for any period of time without prior approval from the Owner for tie -ins or switchovers. All shutdowns shall be coordinated with and approved by the Owner. 01100 -10 052316 • • • C. The operation of WTP No. 1's ability to meet permit requirements shall not be negatively impacted by construction. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION 01100 -11 052316 • • • SECTION 01200 PROJECT MEETINGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Scope of Work: 1. The Contractor shall cooperate and coordinate with the Engineer to schedule and administer the preconstruction meeting, periodic progress meetings, and specifically called meetings throughout the progress of the Work. The Contractor shall: a. Prepare agenda for meetings. b. Make physical arrangements for meetings. 2. Representatives of Contractor, subcontractors, and suppliers attending meetings shall be qualified and authorized to act on behalf of the entity each represents. 3. The Owner will attend meetings to ascertain that the Work is expedited consistent with Contract Documents and construction schedules. 4. The Contractor shall record the preconstruction meeting and each progress meeting in its entirety, and shall provide the Engineer with a CD of such recording, having good quality and clarity, and a typed transcript of the minutes of the meeting in a format approved by Owner. B. Related Requirements Described Elsewhere: 1. Construction Progress Schedules: Section 01310. 2. Shop Drawings, Working Drawings, and Samples: Section 01340. 3. Project Record Documents: Section 01720. 1.02 PRECONSTRUCTION MEETING A. Engineer will schedule a preconstruction meeting no later than twenty (20) days after date of Notice to Proceed. The meeting shall be scheduled at the convenience of all parties. 01200 -1 050416 • • • B. Location: A local site, convenient for all parties, designated by the Engineer. C. Attendance: 1. Owner's representative. 2. Engineer and his professional consultants. 3. Resident project representative. 4. Contractor and his superintendent. 5. Major subcontractors. 6. Representatives of major suppliers and manufacturers as appropriate. 7. Governmental and Utilities representatives as appropriate. 8. Others as requested by the Contractor, Owner, and Engineer. D. The Engineer shall preside at the preconstruction meeting. The purpose of the preconstruction meeting is to designate responsible personnel and establish a working relationship. Matters requiring coordination will be discussed and procedures for handling such matters established. E. The suggested agenda for the preconstruction meeting will include but not be limited to the following: 1. Distribution and discussion of: a. List of major subcontractors and suppliers. b. Projected schedules. c. Schedule of Values. d. Owner direct purchase of equipment 2. Critical work sequencing: Relationships and coordination with other contracts and /or work and continuing water treatment plant operation. 3. Major equipment deliveries and priorities. 4. Project coordination: Designation and responsible personnel. 01200 -2 050416 5. Procedures and processing of: a. Field decisions. b. Proposal requests. c. Request for Information. d. Submittals. d. Change Orders. f. Applications for Payment. 6. Submittal of Shop Drawings, project data and samples. 7. Adequacy of distribution of Contract Documents. 8. Procedures for maintaining Record Documents 9. Use of premises: a. Office, work, and storage areas. b. Owner's requirements. c. Access and traffic control. 10. Construction facilities, controls, and construction aids. 11. Temporary utilities. 12. Safety and first aid procedures. 13. Check of required Bond and Insurance certifications. 14. Completion time for contract and liquidated damages. 15. Request for extension of Contract Time. 16. Procedures for periodic monthly (or whatever interval is deemed appropriate or necessary, however, a minimum of monthly meetings will be required) progress meetings, for all involved. 17. Security procedures. • 01200 -3 050416 • • • 18. Procedures for making partial payments. 19. Guarantees on completed work. 20. Equipment to be used. 21. Project layout and staking of work. 22. Project inspection. 23. Labor requirements. 24. Laboratory testing of material requirements. 25. Provisions for material stored on site and monthly inventory of materials stored. 26. Requirements of other organizations such as utilities and building departments. 27. Rights -of -way and easements. 28. Housekeeping procedures. 29. Posting of signs and installation of Project Sign. 30. Pay request submittal dates. 31. Equal opportunity requirements. 1.03 PROGRESS MEETINGS A. The Engineer shall schedule regular periodic meetings. The progress meetings will be held a minimum of once every thirty (30) days and at other times as required by the progress of the Work. The first meeting shall be held within thirty (30) days after the preconstruction meeting or thirty (30) days or less after the date of Notice to Proceed. B. Hold called meetings as required by progress of the Work. C. Location of the meetings: As designated by the Owner. 01200 -4 050416 • • • D. Attendance: 1. Engineer and his professional Subconsultants as needed. 2. Resident Project Representative. 3. Contractor and his Superintendent. 4. Owner's representatives. 5. Subcontractors (active on the site, as appropriate to the agenda). 6. Others as appropriate to the agenda (suppliers, manufacturers, other subcontractors, etc.). E. The Engineer shall preside at the meetings. The purpose of the meetings will be to review the progress of the Work. F. The suggested agenda for the progress meetings will include but not be limited to the following: 1. Review approval of minutes of previous meeting. 2. Review of Work progress since previous meeting and Work scheduled (3 -week look ahead schedule). 3. Field observations, problems, conflicts. 4. Problems which impede construction schedule. 5. Review of off -site fabrication, delivery schedules. 6. Corrective measures and procedures to regain projected schedule. 7. Status of Construction Schedule and revisions to the Construction Schedule as appropriate. 8. Progress schedule during succeeding work period. 9. Coordination of schedules. 10. Review status of submittals and submittal schedule, expedite as required. 11. Maintenance of quality standards. 01200 -5 050416 • • • 12. Pending changes and substitutions. 13. Shop drawing problems. 14. Review proposed changes for: a. Effect on Construction Schedule and on completion date. b. Effect on other contracts of the Project. 15. Critical /long lead items. 16. Other business. G. The Contractor is to attend progress meetings and is to study previous meeting minutes and current agenda items, and be prepared to discuss pertinent topics and provide specific information including but not limited to: 1. Status of all submittals and what specifically is being done to expedite them. 2. Status of all activities behind schedule and what specifically will be done to regain the schedule. 3. Status of all material deliveries, latest contact with equipment manufacturers, and specific actions taken to expedite materials. 4. Status of open deficiencies and what is being done to correct the same. H. The Contractor is to provide a current submittal log at each progress meeting in accordance with Section 01340: Shop Drawings, Working Drawings, and Samples. PART 2- PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION 01200 -6 050416 • • • SECTION 01310 PROGRESS SCHEDULES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 REQUIREMENT A. The Contractor will submit cost - loaded Critical Path Method (CPM) Progress Schedules to the Engineer depicting the approach to prosecution and completion of the Work. This requirement includes, but is not limited to the Contractor's approach to Activity cost - loading, recovering schedule and managing the effect of changes, substitutions and Delays on Work sequencing. B. The Progress Schedule shall show how the Contractor's priorities and sequencing for the Work (or Work remaining) conform to the Contract requirements and the sequences of Work indicated in or required by the Contract Documents; reflect how the Contractor anticipates foreseeable events, site conditions and all other general, local and prevailing conditions that may affect cost, progress, schedule, furnishing and performance of the Work; and show how the Contractor's Means and Methods translate into Activities and logic. C. The Progress Schedule will consist of the Initial Submittal, Payment Submittals and Revision Submittals. Upon acceptance by the Engineer, the Initial submittal will become the As- Planned Schedule for the Work. Revision submittals upon acceptance will become the As- Planned Schedule for the Work remaining to be completed as of the submittal date for that Revision. D. References to the Critical Path Method (CPM) are to CPM construction industry standards that are consistent with the requirements of this Section. 1.02 GLOSSARY OF TERMS A. The following terms, whether or not already defined elsewhere in the Contract Documents, have the following intent and meanings within this Section: 1. Activity Value (Value) — That portion of the Contract Price representing an appropriate level of payment for the part of the Work designated by the Activity. 2. As- Planned Schedule — The first, complete Initial Progress Schedule submitted by the Contractor with the intent to depict the entire Work as awarded and accepted by the Engineer or returned as no resubmittal required. 01310 -1 050416 • • • 3. Contract Float — Days between the Contractors anticipated date for completion of the Work, or of a specified portion of the Work, if any, and the corresponding Contract Time. 4. CPM Schedule — The Progress Schedule based on the Critical Path Method (CPM) of scheduling. The term Critical Path means any continuous sequence of Activities in the Progress Schedule controlling, because of their sum duration, the Early Date of a pertinent, specified Contract Time. 5. Early/Late Dates — Early /late times of performance, based on CPM calculations, for an Activity in the Progress Schedule. Early Dates will be based on proceeding with all or part of the Work on the date when the corresponding Contract Time commences to run. Late Dates will be based on completing all or part of the Work on the corresponding Contract Time, even if the Contractor plans early completion. 6. Milestones — Key, pre - determined points of progress in the completion of a facility, denoting interim targets in support of the Contract Times. Milestones may pinpoint targets for key excavation and substructure events, significant deliveries, critical path transition from superstructure to piping and electrical rough —in and building enclosure. Also, hook —up of mechanical and electrical equipment, availability of power for testing, equipment shakedown, training of Owner personnel, start—up, Substantial Completion and other events of like import. 7. Official Schedule — The Initial or most recent Revision Submittal accepted by the Engineer or returned as no resubmittal required and the basis for Payment Submittals until another Revision Submittal is submitted and accepted. The accepted Initial Submittal is also the As- Planned Schedule. 8. Payment Submittal — A monthly Progress Schedule update reflecting progress and minor adjustments on the Activities, sequencing and restraints for Work remaining. 9. Total Float — Days by which an activity may slip from its Early Dates without necessarily extending a pertinent Contract Time. Total Float at least equals Contract Float. Total Float may also be calculated and reported in working Days. When an activity is delayed beyond Early Dates by its Total Float it becomes a Critical Path activity and if delayed further will impact a Contract Time. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The Contractor may self - perform the Work covered by this Section or employ a Subcontractor, subject to the Engineer's consent. Employment of a scheduling 01310 -2 050416 • • • Subcontractor shall not in any way alter or reduce the Contractor's obligations under the Contract Documents. B. The Contractor will obtain a written interpretation from the Engineer, if the Contractor believes that the selection of activities, logic ties and/or restraints requires a written interpretation of the Contract Documents. With each submission, the Contractor will point out by specific, written notation, any Progress Schedule feature that may reflect variations from any requirements of the Contract Documents. C. It is the Contractor's responsibility to obtain information directly from each Subcontractor and Supplier when scoping their respective Activities, Values, logic ties and restraints. D. Neither Acceptance nor Review of any Progress Schedule will relieve the Contractor from the obligation to comply with the Contract Times and any sequence of Work indicated in or required by the Contract Documents and to complete, within the Contract Times, any Work omitted from that Progress Schedule. E. Neither Acceptance nor Review of any Progress Schedule will imply approval of any interpretation of or variation from the Contract Documents, unless expressly approved by the Engineer through a written interpretation or by a separate, written notation on the returned Progress Schedule Submittal. 1.04 ALLOWANCES A. Work covered by contractual allowances will be completed within the Contract Times. The Progress Schedule will incorporate the Contractor's best estimate of the activities, logic and restraints required, using the information in the Contract Documents or as indicated by the Engineer in writing. 1.05 "OR EQUALS" AND SUBSTITUTIONS A. Activities in the Initial Submittal will be based strictly on the products named or specified in the Contract Documents and will not reflect any "or equal" or substitute materials or equipment, even if the Contractor intends to pursue "or equal" and substitution proposals. This limitation also applies to Means and Methods indicated in or required by the Contract Documents. 1.06 MILESTONES AND SCHEDULE RECOVERY A. The Engineer will select Milestones and Milestone Dates on the basis of the As- Planned Schedule. As the Official Schedule is revised, Milestone Dates will be revised accordingly. Milestone Dates will serve as target dates. 01310 -3 050416 • • • B. Whenever any Activity slips by fourteen (14) or more Days from the Late Date for an activity in the Official Schedule, Milestone Dates selected by the Project Manger, or a pertinent Contract Time, the Contractor will deliver a Revision Submittal documenting the Contractor's schedule recovery plan and /or a properly supported request for an extension in the Contract Time. The narrative will identify the Delay and actions taken by the Contractor to recover schedule, whether by adding labor, Subcontractors or construction equipment, activity re- sequencing, expediting of submittals and/or deliveries, overtime or shift Work, and so forth. Activity shortening and overlapping shall be explained as to their basis (and be supported by increases in resources). C. Upon evaluation of that Revision Submittal, if the Engineer determines there is sufficient cause, the Owner may withhold liquidated damages or provide a notice of intent to do so, if schedule is indeed not recovered, and/or may give a notice of default. 1.07 PROGRESS SCHEDULE SOFTWARE A. The scheduling software employed by the Contractor to process the Progress Schedule will be the current version of Microsoft Excel, Microsoft Office Project, Oracle's Primavera P6 Professional Project Management, Oracle's Primavera Contractor CPM scheduling software, or similar software. B. If the Contractor intends to use companion schedule reporting, analysis or graphics software tools, the Contractor will furnish to the Engineer descriptive materials and samples describing such software tools. 1.08 NON - PERFORMANCE A. The Engineer may refuse to recommend all or any part of any payment, if the Contractor fails, refuses or neglects to provide the required Progress Schedule information on a timely basis. Partial payments without a properly updated Progress Schedule shall be returned to the Contractor as non - conforming. B. If justified under the circumstances, the Owner also may prepare alternate progress schedules, as appropriate, and deduct from the Contract Amount all related costs by Change Order and/or take other action commensurate with the breach. 1.09 REPORTS, SCHEDULES AND PLOTS A. Schedule Reports will include Activity (ID) code and description, duration, calendar, Early Dates, Late Dates and Total Float. 01310 -4 050416 • • • 1. For Precedence Diagram Method, separate Schedule Reports will tabulate, for each Activity, all preceding and succeeding logic types and lead times, whether CPM Plots displaying vertical logic ties are appended or not. B. CPM Schedule Plots will be plotted on a suitable time scale and identify the Contract Times, Critical Paths and sub - Critical Paths on 24 "x 36" or smaller sheets. Activities will be shown on the Early Dates with Total Floats noted by Late Date flags. For Payment and Revision Submittals plot a target comparison based on the current Official Schedule. C. The Activity Value report will tabulate Activity code and description and Activity Value, percent complete and earned value as calculated by the scheduling software. Cash flow plots shall be provided showing the monthly and cumulative actual and planned earned values with curves shown for Early and Late Dates in the schedules. For Payment and Revision Schedule submittals, the cash flow curves shall also plot the most current Official Schedule planned earnings curves. D. Each submittal shall include listings of all added and deleted activities, logic, constraints, Activity Value changes and update information vs. the previous Progress Schedule submittal. This list may be manually prepared or generated by accessory software that will generate such listings. 1.10 NARRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. The Initial Submittal narrative will describe the Contractor's approach to prosecution of the Work and the basis for determination of activity durations, sequence and logic, including the Contractor's management of the site, e.g., lay down, staging, parking, etc.; Contractor's phasing of the Work; use of crewing and construction equipment; identification of non -work Engineers, shifts, weekend Work and multiple calendars applied to activities and an explanation of the basis for restraint dates B. Revision and Payment Submittal narratives will explain any changes to the approach or planning referred to in Paragraph A above on account of any change, delay, schedule recovery, substitution and/or Contractor - initiated revision occurring since the previous submittal. C. Each narrative will list the Critical Path Activities and compare Early and Late Dates against Contract Times and Milestone Dates. Narratives shall also recap progress and Days gained or lost vs. the current Official Schedule, and identify delays, their extent and causes. D. The Initial Submittal narrative will describe all delays occurring since Contract Award and all pending and anticipated "or equal" and substitution proposals. Payment and Revision Submittals narratives will describe any new delays and shall 01310 -5 050416 • • • certify that the Contractor has not been delayed, as of the cut -off date, by any acts or omissions of the Owner or Engineer, except as otherwise specifically stated. 1.11 ACTIVITY REQUIREMENTS A. Separate activities will identify permits, design when included in the Work, construction, Submittal preparation and review (and resubmission and re- review), deliveries (site or storage), testing, start-up, commissioning and Punch List. Separate Activities will be used for Owner - furnished equipment, interfaces with other work and other responsibilities of the Owner, Engineer and Professional. B. Activities will be detailed to the extent required to show the transition of trade Work. Activities will delineate the progression of the Work through mass excavation, substructure, superstructure, equipment installation, start of piping and conduit rough -in, building enclosure, mechanical and electrical equipment hook —up phase, building mechanical, electrical and plumbing (MEP), interior finishes, training of Owner personnel, equipment checkout & testing and start—up. C. Submittal Activities will segregate long -lead items, any item requiring structural access and other procurements that, in the Contractor's judgment, may bear on the rate of progress. If the Contract Documents require MEP coordination drawings, separate MEP coordination drawing Activities will be used for each floor. Allow time for reviews per Section 01300 and the General Conditions, and revisions and re- submittals. Also include activities for or provide a separate tabular schedule of submittal dates for all shop drawings, product data, and samples including Owner furnished products and the dates reviewed submittals will be required from the Engineer. Indicate decision dates for selection of finishes. D. Activities will not combine separate or non - concurrent items of Unit Price or lump sum Work, Work in separate structures and Work in distinct areas, locations or floors within an area or structure; or rough -in and finish Work. E. Activity durations will equal the work Days required to sufficiently complete the Work designated by the Activity, (i.e., when finish -to -start successors could start, even if the Activity is not quite 100% complete). Installation Activities will last from ten (10) to forty (40) workdays. Submittal review activity durations shall conform to specified timeframes. F. Activities will be assigned consistent descriptions and identification codes. Sort codes will group Activities by building or structure, floor or area, Change Order and other meaningful schemes. G. Activities will be assigned Activity Values as appropriate and needed to reasonably allocate the Contract Amount to the time periods that they will be earned and eligible for payment based on the Progress Schedule and Schedule of Values. Separate pay 01310 -6 050416 • • • activities may be used to simplify cost - loading of the Progress Schedule. When used, pay activities shall be loaded with the cost of Work that is included, at no cost, in related (generally, concurrent) CPM activities. Pay activities shall not control the rate of progress; however, their start and finish dates shall be consistent with those of their related CPM activities to ensure accurate Early Date and Late Date cash -flow plots. 1.12 FLOAT TOLERANCES AND FLOAT OWNERSHIP A. Any Progress Schedule with Early Dates after a Contract Time will yield negative Total and Contract Floats, whether shown /calculated or not. Any Revision Submittal with less than negative twenty (20) Days of Float will be returned as "Revise and Resubmit," unless a time extension is requested or the Owner assesses liquidated damages or gives notice of intent to do so, in the event schedule is not recovered. B. Float calculated from the definitions given in this Section, supersede any conflicting Float values in any early completion Progress Schedule. C. Neither the Owner nor the Contractor own the Float time, the Project owns the Float time. Neither the Owner nor the Contractor use of positive Total Float will impact a Contract Completion Date or justify an extension of Contract Time. 1.13 SUBMITTALS A. Each Progress Schedule Submittal will consist of an electronic disk with the Contractor's files, a narrative and five (5) copies of the required reports and plots. B. The Engineer will review Progress Schedule Submittals and return a review copy within 14 Days after receipt and the Contractor shall, if required, resubmit within 7 Days after return of the review copy. C. Requirements for a Preliminary Submittal: 1. Within twenty (20) Days after receipt of Notice to Proceed and prior to commencing Work on the Project, prepare and submit to the Engineer a Preliminary Submittal of the Progress Schedule for the Work. The Preliminary Submittal will show the Work as awarded, without delays, Change Orders or substitutions. The Preliminary Submittal shall be in CPM format and show general work planning and sequencing for the entire Contract Time and detailed planning for the first 90 days after Notice to Proceed. 2. No cost or resource loading of activities is required for the Preliminary Submittal. The Engineer may issue comments on the Preliminary Submittal. A narrative should be included if needed to clarify planning and sequencing 01310 -7 050416 • • • represented in the Preliminary Submittal. Any comments issued should be considered and incorporated as appropriate in the development of the full Progress Schedule Initial Submittal. D. Requirements for the Initial Submittal: 1. Within twenty (20) Days after receipt of Notice to Proceed and prior to commencing Work on the Project, prepare and submit to the Engineer the Initial Submittal of the Progress Schedule for the Work. The Initial Submittal will show the Work as awarded, without delays, Change Orders or substitutions. a. Activity Values will prorate Schedule of Values costs and/or pay items through to Activities. Provide a cross - reference listing with two parts; a part that will list each activity with the respective amounts allocated from each Schedule of Values and Unit Price Item making up the total value of each activity and a second part that will list the Schedule of Values and Unit Price Items with the respective amounts allocated from each activity that make up the total value of each item. 2. After the As- Planned Schedule is established, the Engineer will select Milestones and record the Milestone Early and Late Dates. As the Official Schedule evolves, Milestone Dates will be revised accordingly. 3. If the Engineer refuses to endorse the Initial Submittal (or a resubmission) as "Resubmittal Not Required," the As- Planned Schedule will not be established. In that event, the Contractor will continue to submit Payment and Revision Submittals reflecting progress and the Contractor's approach to remaining Work. The Engineer will rely on the available Payment and Revision Submittals, subject to whatever adjustments it determines appropriate. D. Requirements for Payment Submittals: 1. Payment Submittals with progress up to the closing date and updated Early Dates and Late Dates for progress and remaining Activities will be due with each Progress Payment. As -built data will consist of actual dates, percent complete, earned payment, changes, Delays and other significant events occurring before the closing date. 2. Activity percent complete and earned value should indicate a level of completion that corresponds to the Application for Progress Payment for the same period. The earned value should be calculated by the scheduling software as Activity Value times percent complete. Explanation should be provided whenever the cumulative earned value of activities in a Payment 01310 -8 050416 • • • Submittal is not within 10% of the value of work completed as represented in the corresponding Application for Progress for Payment. 3. At the Contractor's option, a Payment Submittal may overlay minor adjustments on activities and sequencing for Work remaining. This excludes Activity re- scoping to reflect Delays, changes, schedule recovery or substitutions. E. Requirements for revision Submittals: 1. Revision Submittals will be submitted when necessary because of major changes or delays affecting activities, sequencing or restraints for Work remaining and/or to put forth a schedule recovery plan. Revision Submittals may also be required because of Contractor - initiated re- planning, or when Contractor plans to perform Work ahead or out -of- sequence that will require additional testing or inspection personnel, or when requested by the Project Manger when Work is performed out -of- sequence from the current Official Schedule such that the number of Days gained or lost can not be determined or the scheduled dates of completion of the Work in a Payment Submittal are not viewed as reliable. 2. If requesting a time extension, the Revision Submittal should show the impact of the delay after incorporating reasonable mitigation to minimize the impact and illustrate how the number of Days requested time extension was determined. The delay should be determined as the change in the forecast Contract Completion Date(s) resulting solely from delays that entitle the Contractor to a time extension as provided in the General Conditions. Any and all Contractor slippage and delay occurring prior to and concurrent with the delay potentially entitling the Contractor to a time extension shall be incorporated in the Revision and explained such that the concurrent and non - concurrent periods of delay are indicated. If the Contractor does not follow the procedures contained in this Section or, if the Contractor's analysis is not verifiable by an independent, objective evaluation by the Engineer using the electronic files and data furnished by the Contractor, any such extension in Contract Time will not be granted. F. Retrospective Delay Analysis. 1. If the Engineer refuses to endorse any Revision Submittal as "Resubmittal Not Required," the Contractor and Owner will use the latest Official Schedule when evaluating the effect of Delays on Contract Time and/or Contract Price. The procedure to be used will consist of progressively updating the latest Official Schedule at key closing dates corresponding to starting and finishing dates of the delays and/or dates the delays became critical or dates the Critical Path may have changed for other reasons. For 01310 -9 050416 • • • each Progress Schedule iteration, slippage between actual Milestone Dates and Initial Milestone Dates will be correlated to Delays occurring solely in that iteration. 2. For each iteration, revisions in Activities, logic ties and restraints affecting Work after the closing date will be included in that Progress Schedule only if they meet any of the following conditions. First, they are Progress Schedule revisions that the Engineer consented to contemporaneously (i.e., before the closing date) in writing. Second, they reflect comments or objections raised by or on behalf of the Engineer and that were actually confirmed by the as- built progress. Lastly, they represent Contractor's schedule recovery plans or other Progress Schedule revisions that were actually confirmed by the as -built progress. PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION 01310 -10 050416 • • • SECTION 01340 SHOP DRAWINGS, WORKING DRAWINGS, AND SAMPLES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Scope of Work: 1. The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for review and approval, such Shop Drawings, Test Reports, and Product Data on materials and equipment (hereinafter in this Section called Data), and material samples (hereinafter in this Section called Samples) as are required for the proper control of work, including but not limited to those Shop Drawings, Data, and Samples for materials and equipment specified elsewhere in the Specifications and in the Drawings. 2. Within fourteen (14) calendar days after the Effective Date of the Agreement, the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer a complete list of preliminary data on items for which Shop Drawings are to be submitted. Included in this list shall be the names of all proposed manufacturers furnishing specified items. Review of this list by the Engineer shall in no way expressed or implied relieve the Contractor from submitting complete Shop Drawings and providing materials, equipment, etc., fully in accordance with the Contract Documents. This procedure is required in order to expedite final review of Shop Drawings. 3. The Contractor is to maintain an accurate updated submittal log and will bring this log to each scheduled progress meeting with the Owner and the Engineer. This log should include the following items: a. Submittal description and number assigned. b. Date to Engineer. c. Date returned to Contractor (from Engineer). d. Status of submittal (Approved, Approved as Noted, Amend and Resubmit, and Rejected). e. Date of resubmittal and return (as applicable). f. Date material release (for fabrication). 01340 -1 050416 • • • g. Projected date of fabrication. h. Projected date of delivery to site. i. Status of O &M manuals submittal. j. Specification Section. k. Drawings sheet number. B. Related Requirements Described Elsewhere: 1. Construction Progress Schedules: Section 01310. 2. Material and Equipment: Section 01600. 3. Project Record Documents: Section 01720. 4. Operating and Maintenance Data: Section 01730. 1.02 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITY A. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to check all drawings, data and samples prepared before submitting them to the Engineer for review. Each and every copy of the Drawings and data shall bear the Contractor's stamp showing that they have been so checked. Shop drawings submitted to the Engineer without the Contractor's stamp will be returned to the Contractor for conformance with this requirement. Shop drawings shall indicate any deviations in the submittal from requirements of the Contract Documents. If the Contractor takes exception to the specifications, the Contractor shall note the exception in the letter of transmittal to the Engineer. B. Determine and verify: 1. Field measurements. 2. Field construction criteria 3. Catalog numbers and similar data. 4. Conformance with Specifications. C. The Contractor shall furnish the Engineer a schedule of Shop Drawing submittals fixing the respective dates for the submission of shop and working drawings, the beginning and ending of manufacture, testing, and installation of materials, 01340 -2 050416 • • • supplies, and equipment. This schedule shall indicate those that are critical to the progress schedule. D. The Contractor shall not begin any of the work covered by a Shop Drawing, Data, or a Sample returned for correction until a revision or correction thereof has been reviewed and returned to him, by the Engineer, with approval. E. The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer all drawings and schedules sufficiently in advance of construction requirements to provide no less than thirty (30) calendar days for checking and appropriate action from the time the Engineer receives them. F. All submittals shall be accompanied with a transmittal letter prepared in duplicate containing the following information: 1. Date. 2. Project Title and Number. 3. Contractor's name and address. 4. The number of each Shop Drawings, Project Data, and Sample submitted. 5. Notification of Deviations from Contract Documents. a. The Contractor shall indicate in bold type at the top of the cover sheet of submittal of shop drawing if there is a deviation from the Drawings, Specifications, or referenced specifications or codes. b. The Contractor shall also list any deviations from the Drawings, Specifications, or referenced specifications or codes and identify in green ink prominently on the applicable Shop Drawings. 6. Submittal Log Number conforming to Specification Section Number. G. The Contractor shall submit five (5) copies of descriptive or product data information and Shop Drawings to the Engineer plus the number of copies which the Contractor requires returned. All blueprint Shop Drawings shall be submitted with one (1) set of mylar reproducibles and the same number of prints as Shop Drawings, plus the number of copies which the Contractor requires returned. The Engineer will review the blueprints and return to the Contractor the set of marked - up mylar reproducibles with appropriate review comments. H. The Contractor shall be responsible for and bear all costs of damages which may result from the ordering of any material or from proceeding with any part of Work 01340 -3 050416 • • • prior to the completion of the review by the Engineer of the necessary Sh Drawings. p I. The Contractor shall be fully responsible for observing the need for and maki g any changes in the arrangement of piping, connections, wiring, manner of installation, etc., which may be required by the materials /equipment he propos, s to supply both as pertains to his own work and any work affected under oth r parts, headings, or divisions of the Drawings and Specifications. J. The Contractor shall not use Shop Drawings as a means of proposing alterna e items to demonstrate compliance with the Drawings and Specifications. K. Each submittal will bear a stamp indicating that Contractor has satisfi:d Contractor's obligations under the Contract Documents with respect o Contractor's review and approval of that submittal. The Contractor stamp shall .e similar to the sample given below. (OWNER'S NAME) (PROJECT NAME) (PROJECT NUMBER) SHOP DRAWING NO.: SPECIFICATION SECTION: DRAWING NO. WITH RESPECT TO THIS SHOP DRAWING OR SAMPLE, I HAVE DETERMINED AND VERIFIED ALL QUANTITIES, DIMENSIONS, SPECIFIED PERFORMANCE CRITERIA, INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS, MATERIALS, CATALOG NUMBER, AND SIMILAR DATA WITH RESPECT THERETO AND REVIEWED OR COORDINATED THIS SHOP DRAWING OR SAMPLE WITH OTHER SHOP DRAWINGS AND SAMPLES AND WITH THE REQUIREMENTS OF THE WORK AND THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS. NO VARIATION FROM CONTRACT DOCUMENTS VARIATION FROM CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AS SHOWN (CONTRACTOR'S NAME) (CONTRACTOR'S ADDRESS) BY: DATE: AUTHORIZED SIGNATURE NOTE: NOT TO SCALE 01340 -4 050416 • L. Drawings and schedules shall be checked and coordinated with the work of a 1 trades and sub - contractors involved, before they are submitted for review by t e Engineer and shall bear the Contractor's stamp of approval as evidence of sucl checking and coordination. Drawings or schedules submitted without this stamls of approval shall be returned to the Contractor for resubmission. 1.03 ENGINEER'S REVIEW OF SHOP DRAWINGS A. The Engineer's review of Shop Drawings, Data, and Samples as submitted by t e Contractor will be to determine if the items(s) generally conforms to t e information in the Contract Documents and is compatible with the design concep The Engineer's review and exceptions, if any, will not constitute an approval . f dimensions, connections, quantities, and details of the material, equipmen , device, or item shown. The Owner will receive copies of the Shop Drawings following review by the Engineer. B. The review of drawings and schedules will be general, and shall not be construed 1. As permitting any departure from the Contract Documents. 2. As relieving the Contractor of responsibility for any errors, includin_ details, dimensions, and materials. 3. As approving departures from details furnished by the Engineer, except . s • otherwise provided herein. C. If the drawings or schedules as submitted describe variations and show a departure from the Contract Documents which the Engineer finds to be in t interest of the Owner and to be so minor as not to involve a change in Contrast Price or contract time, the Engineer may return the reviewed drawings witho t noting an exception. • D. "Approved As Noted" - Contractor shall incorporate Engineer's comments into t submittal before release to manufacturer. The Contractor shall send a letter to t Engineer acknowledging the comments and their incorporation into the Sho Drawing. E. "Amend And Resubmit" - Contractor shall resubmit the Shop Drawing to t e Engineer. The resubmittal shall incorporate the Engineer's comments highlighte• on the Shop Drawing. F. "Rejected" - Contractor shall correct, revise and resubmit Shop Drawing f review by Engineer. 01340 -5 050416 • • • G. Resubmittals will be handled in the same manner as first submittals. resubmittals the Contractor shall direct specific attention, in writing or resubmitted Shop Drawings, to revisions other than the corrections requested the Engineer on previous submissions. The Contractor shall make any correctio required by the Engineer. n n y s H. If the Contractor considers any correction indicated on the drawings to constitute a change to the Drawings or Specifications, the Contractor shall give written noti e thereof to the Engineer. When the Shop Drawings have been completed to the satisfaction of the Engineer, the Contractor shall carry out the construction in accordance therewith and sh.11 make no further changes therein except upon written instructions from t e Engineer. J. No partial submittals will be reviewed. Submittals not deemed complete will .e stamped "Rejected" and returned to the Contractor for resubmittal. Unle s otherwise specifically permitted by the Engineer, make all submittals in grou.s containing all associated items for: 1. Systems. 2. Processes. 3. As indicated in specific Specifications Sections. All drawings, schematics, manufacturer's product data, certifications, and oth: r Shop Drawing submittals required by a system specification shall be submitted t one time as a package to facilitate interface checking. K. Only the Engineer shall utilize the color "red" in marking Shop Drawin submittals. L. Shop drawing and submittal data shall be reviewed by the Engineer for eac original submittal and first resubmittal; thereafter review time for subseque t resubmittals shall be charged to the Contractor and the Contractor shall reimbur e the Owner for services rendered by the Engineer as specified in t e Supplementary Conditions. 1.04 SHOP DRAWINGS A. When used in the Contract Documents, the term "Shop Drawing" shall considered to mean Contractor's plans for materials and equipment which beco an integral part of the Project. Shop Drawings shall be complete and detailed an shall consist of fabrication, erection, setting and schedule drawing 01340 -6 050416 • • • manufacturer's scale drawings, and wiring and control diagrams. Catalogs cuts, catalogs, pamphlets, descriptive literature, and performance and test data shall be considered only as supportive information to required Shop Drawings as defined above. As used herein, the term "manufactured" applies to standard units usually mass - produced; and "fabricated" means items specifically assembled or made out of selected materials to meet individual design requirements. B. Manufacturer's catalog sheets, brochures, diagrams, illustrations, and other standard descriptive data shall be clearly marked to identify pertinent materials, products, or models. Delete information which is not applicable to the Work by striking or cross - hatching. C. Each Shop Drawing shall be submitted with an 8 -1/2" by 11" cover sheet which shall include a title block for the submittal. Each Shop Drawing cover sheet shall have a blank area 3 -1/2 inches high by 4 -1/2 inches wide, located adjacent to the title block. The title block/cover sheet shall display the following: 1. Project Title and Number. 2. Name of project building or structure. 3. Number and title of the Shop Drawing. 4. Date of Shop Drawing or revision. 5. Name of Contractor and subcontractor submitting drawing. 6. Supplier /manufacturer. 7. Separate detailer when pertinent. 8. Specification title and Section number. 9. Applicable Drawing number. D. Data on materials and equipment shall include, without limitation, materials and equipment lists, catalog data sheets, catalog cuts, performance curves, diagrams, verification of conformance with applicable standards or codes, materials of construction, and similar descriptive material. Materials and equipment lists shall give, for each item thereon, the name and location of the supplier or manufacturer, trade name, catalog reference, size, finish, and all other pertinent Data. E. For all mechanical and electrical equipment furnished, the Contractor shall provide a list including the equipment name, and address, and telephone number 01340 -7 050416 • • • of the manufacturer's representative and service company so that service and/or spare parts can be readily obtained. F. If drawings show variations from Contract requirements because of standard shop practice or for other reasons, the Contractor shall describe such variations in his letter of transmittal. If acceptable, proper adjustment in the Contract shall be implemented where appropriate. If the Contractor fails to describe such variations, he shall not be relieved of the responsibility for executing the Work in accordance with the Contract, even though such drawings have been reviewed. G. All manufacturers or equipment suppliers who propose to furnish equipment or products shall submit an installation list to the Engineer along with the required shop drawings. The installation list shall include at least five (5) installations where identical equipment has been installed and has been in operation for a period of at least two (2) years unless specified otherwise in the Specification Section applicable. 1.05 WORKING DRAWINGS A. When used in the Contract Documents, the term "Working Drawings" shall be considered to mean the Contractor's plan for temporary structures such as temporary bulkheads, support of open cut excavation, support of utilities, ground water control systems, forming and falsework for underpinning, and for such other work as may be required for construction but does not become an integral part of the Project. B. Copies of working drawings as noted in paragraph 1.05 A. above, shall be submitted to the Engineer where required by the Contract Documents or requested by the Engineer, and shall be submitted at least thirty (30) calendar days (unless otherwise specified by the Engineer) in advance of their being required for the Work. C. Working Drawings shall be signed by a registered Professional Engineer, currently licensed to practice in the State of Florida, and shall convey, or be accompanied by, calculations or other sufficient information to completely explain the structure, machine, or system described and its intended manner of use. Prior to commencing such work, working drawings must have been reviewed without specific exceptions by the Engineer, which review will be for general conformance and will not relieve the Contractor in any way from his responsibility with regard to the fulfillment of the terms of the Contract. All risks to new or existing work are assumed by the Contractor; the Owner and Engineer shall have no responsibility therefor. 1.06 SAMPLES 01340 -8 050416 • • • A. The Contractor shall furnish, for the approval of the Engineer, samples required by the Contract Documents or requested by the Engineer. Samples shall be delivered to the Engineer as specified or directed. The Contractor shall prepay all shipping charges on samples. Materials or equipment for which samples are required shall not be used in the Work until approved by the Engineer. B. Samples shall be of sufficient size and quantity to clearly illustrate: 1. Functional characteristics of the product, with integrally related parts and attachment devices. 2. Full range of color, texture, and pattern. 3. A minimum of three (3) samples of each item shall be submitted. C. Each sample shall have a label indicating: 1. Name of Project. 2. Name of Contractor and subcontractor. 3. Material or equipment represented. 4. Place of origin. 5. Name of producer /supplier and brand (if any). 6. Location in Project. 7. Submittal and specification numbers. (Samples of finished materials shall have additional marking that will identify them under the finished schedules.) D. The Contractor shall prepare a transmittal letter and a description sheet for each shipment of samples. The description sheet shall contain the information required in Paragraphs 1.06B and C above. He shall enclose a copy of the letter and description sheet with the shipment and send a copy of the letter and description sheet to the Engineer. Approval of a sample shall be only for the characteristics or use named in such approval and shall not be construed to change or modify any Contract requirements. E. Approved samples not destroyed in testing shall be sent to the Engineer or stored at the site of the Work. Approved Samples of the hardware in good condition will be marked for identification and may be used in the Work. Materials and equipment incorporated in the Work shall match the approved Samples. Samples 01340 -9 050416 • • • which failed testing or were not approved will be returned to the Contractor at his expense, if so requested at time of submission. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION 01340 -10 050416 • • • SECTION 01370 SCHEDULE OF VALUES PART 1 — GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Scope of Work: 1. Submit to the Engineer a Schedule of Values allocated to the various lump sum portions of the Work, at the Pre - Construction Conference, and as otherwise specified or requested to be submitted earlier as evidence of the Apparent Low Bidder's qualifications. 2. Upon request of the Engineer support the values with data which will substantiate their correctness. The data shall include, but not be limited to quantity of materials, all sub - elements of the activity, and their units of measure. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Submit three copies of a Preliminary Schedule of Values within fifteen (15) days after the recommended award of the Contract. B. Submit three copies of a proposed final detailed Schedule of Values within twenty (20) days after receipt of Notice to Proceed as per the General Conditions. C. List installed value of each major item of work and each subcontracted item of work as a separate line item to serve as a basis for computing values for Progress Payments. Round off values to nearest dollar. D. Coordinate listings with the Progress Schedule. E. For items on which payments will be requested for stored materials or equipment, list sub - values for cost of stored products with taxes paid. F. The sum of values listed shall equal the total Contract Amount for the Work or the Contract Amount for a part of the Work with a separate Contract Amount provided for by the Contract Documents. G. When the Engineer requires substantiating information, submit data justifying line item amounts in question. 01370 -1 050416 • • • 1.03 DEFINITION A. Schedule of Values (SOV) — Schedule that divides the Contract Amount into pay items, such that the sum of all pay items equals the Contract Amount for the Work, or for any portion of the Work having a separate specified Contract Amount. 1.04 REQUIREMENT A. The Schedule of Values established as provided in the General Conditions will serve as the basis for progress payments and will be incorporated into a form of Application for Payment acceptable to the Engineer. Progress payments on account of Unit Price Work will be based on the number of units completed. B. No payment will be made for work performed on a lump sum contract or a lump sum item until the appropriate Schedule of Values is approved by the Engineer. C. The equitable value of work deleted from a lump sum contract or lump sum item shall be determined from the approved Schedule of Values. 1.05 SCHEDULE OF VALUES A. Because the ultimate requirement is to develop a schedule of values sufficient to determine appropriate monthly progress payment amounts verifiable by cost loaded of Progress Schedule activities, provide sufficient detailed breakdown to meet this requirement. The Owner shall be the sole judge of acceptable numbers, details, and description of values established. If, in the opinion of the Owner, a greater number of schedule of values items than proposed by the Contractor is necessary, the Contractor shall add the additional items so identified by the Owner as a condition to processing the payment requests. B. The minimum detail of breakdown of the major work components is indicated below. C. Mobilization/General Requirements/Demobilization. Mobilization/General Requirement/ Demobilization costs on the Schedule of Values shall not exceed 5% of the Contract Amount. All Work included in the Schedule of Value that falls under this heading as described in this paragraph (including such Work by Subcontractors) will be added and checked for compliance with the 5% limitation. Any actual cost in excess of this amount shall be distributed proportionately to Schedule of Values items for direct Work items not covered by this heading. Work under this heading may be detailed on Schedule of Value line items identifying each as to whether it is mobilization or initial costs, maintenance or overhead cost or finalization or demobilization cost. The subdivision of this Work into Schedule of Values line items shall be done to support the payment process that shall be distributed as follows: 50% for the first progress payment, 10% for the final payment following 01370 -2 050416 • • • demobilization and restoration, and 40% spread evenly over payments made in between. D. Site construction shall be broken down by clearing and grubbing, stripping, excavation, full construction, erosion control, paving, paving removal, site restoration, and any other items determined to be necessary for the establishment of pay and schedule activity items. E. Pipeline construction work shall be broken down separately by pipeline segment, which shall not exceed 500- foot -long sections of the pipeline. Each pipeline segment shall be broken down into excavation, pipe fabrication (by wall thickness), pipe installation, pipe structures (air- release valves, blowoff valves, and vents), backfilling, testing, site restoration, and any other items determined to be necessary for the establishment of pay and schedule activity items. F. Concrete structures and buildings shall be broken down by structure into excavation, subgrade preparation, and appurtenant prefoundation work; concrete foundation construction; slabs on grade; walls /columns; roof structures and roofing, doors and windows, lifting and other equipment; interior and exterior finishes; miscellaneous metalwork; and backfill. G. Mechanical (HVAC and plumbing) Work shall be broken down by building and to identify individual piping and ductwork and equipment installation and equipment testing. H. Process piping, valves, and equipment Work shall be broken down by structure into individual piping systems, equipment installation by equipment (including valves, actuators, etc.), name and number, and equipment testing and checkout. I. Electrical Work shall be broken down by structure into conduit and raceway installation, cable and wire installation, electrical equipment installation, terminations, and lighting. Yard facilities shall be broken down by duct bank designation and substations. J. Instrumentation and control Work shall be broken down by structure and by pull boxes, duct, fiber -optic cable, and installation and testing. K. Equipment testing and start-up broken down by process and building. L. Other work not specifically included in the above items shall be broken down as necessary for establishment of pay and schedule activity items. M. The Contractor and Owner shall meet and jointly review the schedule of values within 40 days from the date of Notice to Proceed. The value allocations and extent of detail shall be reviewed to determine any necessary adjustments to the values and 01370 -3 050416 • • • to determine if sufficient detail has been proposed to provide cost loading of the Progress Schedule activities. Make any adjustments deemed necessary to the value allocation or level of detail, and submit a revised detailed schedule of values within 10 days from the date of the review meeting. 1.06. INCORPORATION OF SCHEDULE OF VALUES INTO PROGRESS SCHEDULE A. Following acceptance of the detailed schedule of values, incorporate the values into the cost loading portion of the Progress Schedule. The activities and logic shall have been developed concurrent with development of the schedule of values; however, it may be necessary to adjust the schedule of values to correlate to individual schedule activities. It is anticipated that instances may occur, due to the independent but simultaneous development of the schedule of values and the CPM schedule activities, where interfacing these two documents will require changes to each document. Schedule activities may need to be added to accommodate the detail of the schedule of values. Schedule of Value items may need to be added to accommodate the detail of the schedule activities. Where such instances arise, the Contractor shall propose changes to the schedule of values and to the schedule activities to satisfy the schedule cost loading requirements. B. Cross - Reference Listing - To assist in the correlation of the schedule of values and the schedule, provide a cross - reference listing, furnished in two parts. The first part shall list each scheduled activity with the breakdown of the respective Schedule of Values items making up the total cost of the activity. The second part shall list the Schedule of Values item with the respective scheduled activity or activities that make up the total cost indicated. In the case where a number of schedule activities make up the total cost for a Schedule of Values item, the total cost for each schedule activity should be indicated. END OF SECTION 01370 -4 050416 • • • SECTION 01410 TESTING AND TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Scope of Work: 1. Owner will employ and pay for services of an Independent Testing Laboratory to perform Testing specifically indicated on the Contract Documents or specified in the Specifications and may at any other time elect to have materials and equipment tested for conformity with the Contract Documents. 2. Contractor shall cooperate with the laboratory to facilitate the execution of its required services. 3. Employment of laboratory by Owner shall in no way relieve Contractor's obligations to perform the Work of the Contract. 4. The Owner will employ and pay for services on an Independent Testing Laboratory for the laboratory analyses necessary as part of the water quality analysis program during start-up and 12 -month operation of the Pilot Plant. B. Related Requirements Described Elsewhere: 1. Conditions of the Contract. 2. Respective section of Specifications: Certification of products. 3. Each Specification section listed: Laboratory tests required, and standards for testing. 1.02 LABORATORY DUTIES: LIMITATIONS OF AUTHORITY A. Submit five copies of inspection reports to the Owner. The reports shall include the following components: 1. Project title, Owner's job number, and Engineer's job number; 2. Testing laboratory name and address; 3. Date of report issuance; 4. Name and signature of field technician; 01410 -1 050416 • 5. Date of inspections, sampling, and/or testing; 6. Record of weather conditions; 7. Identification of product tested and associated specification section; 8. Testing location; 9. Description of testing performed; 10. Observations made regarding compliance with the Contract Documents. B. Laboratory is not authorized to: 1. Release, revoke, alter, or enlarge on requirements of Contract Documents. 2. Approve or reject any portion of work. 3. Perform any duties of the Contractor. 1.03 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES A. Cooperate with Owner's personnel, provide access to Work and manufacturer's operations. B. Secure and deliver to the Owner adequate representational samples of materials • proposed to be used and which require testing. • C. Provide to the Owner the preliminary design mix proposed to be used for concrete, and other materials mixes which require control by the testing laboratory. D. Materials and equipment used in the performance of work under this Contract are subject to inspection and testing at the point of manufacturer or fabrication. Standard specifications for quality and workmanship are indicated in the Contract Documents. The Owner may require the Contractor to provide statements or certificates from the manufacturers and fabricators that the materials and equipment provided by them are manufactured or fabricated in full accordance with the standard specifications for quality and workmanship indicated in the Contract Documents. All costs of this testing and providing statements and certificates shall be a subsidiary obligation of the Contractor, and no extra charge to the Owner shall be allowed on account of such testing and certification. E. Contractor shall not have direct contact with laboratory or laboratory personnel. All testing shall be coordinated through Owner. F. Furnish incidental labor and facilities: 1. To provide access to Work to be tested. 01410 -2 050416 • 2. To obtain and handle samples at the Project site or at the source of the product to be tested. 3. To facilitate inspections and tests. 4. For storage and curing of test samples. G. Notify Owner sufficiently in advance of operations to allow for laboratory assignment of personnel and scheduling of tests. When tests or inspections cannot be performed after such notice, reimburse Owner for laboratory personnel and travel expenses incurred due to Contractor's negligence. H. Employ and pay for the services of the same or a separate, equally qualified independent testing laboratory to perform additional inspections, sampling and testing required for the Contractor's convenience. I. If the test results indicate the material or equipment complies with the Contract Documents, the Owner shall pay for the cost of the testing laboratory. If the tests and any subsequent retests indicate the materials and equipment fail to meet the requirements of the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall pay for the laboratory costs directly to the Owner or the total costs shall be deducted from any payments due to the Contractor. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED) 0 PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION • 01410 -3 050416 • SECTION 01500 TEMPORARY FACILITIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Scope of Work: Provide temporary facilities as required to complete the work, which could include the following: 1. By Contractor: a. Telephone. b. Storage sheds. c. Temporary water service. d. Temporary sanitary facilities. e. Temporary electrical service. 2. By Owner: a. None. 1.02 TEMPORARY WATER A. The Contractor is responsible for obtaining a hydrant meter and paying for water service. The Owner will provide water service for use throughout the construction period, to be used for: 1. Water for construction purposes. 2. Water for other purposes. a. Testing. b. Temporary sanitary facilities. c. Cleaning. d. Potable water source (separate). 01500 -1 052316 • B. Maintain adequate volume of water for all purposes. C. Water Source: 1. The City of Clearwater Utilities Department will be responsible for providing potable water for construction activities and the Contractor is responsible for providing a hydrant meter and paying for the metered, potable water. Potable water used shall be protected with approved back flow prevention devices. D. Maintain strict supervision of use of temporary services. 1. Enforce conformance with applicable codes and standards. 2. Enforce sanitary practices. 3. Prevent waste of water. 4. Prevent abuse of services. E. Requirements of Regulatory Agencies: 1. Pay for permits, fees, and deposits required by governing authorities. 2. Comply with Federal, State and local codes. 1.03 TEMPORARY ELECTRICITY A. Furnish and install temporary electric power service for construction needs throughout construction period. 1. Power centers for miscellaneous tools and equipment used in construction work. 2. Power for construction equipment. 3. Power for testing and checking equipment. 4. Power for welding units and for other equipment having special power requirements. 5. The City of Clearwater will pay for the electricity supplied on -site at the WTP No. 1 during construction. 01500 -2 052316 B. Capacity: • 1. Adequate electrical service for construction use by all trades during construction period. 2. Notify power company if unusually heavy loads such as welding, and other special power requirements, will be connected. a. Provide special circuits for heavy load requirements. b. Do not overload any circuit. C. Maintain strict supervision of use of temporary services: 1. Enforce conformance with applicable standards. 2. Enforce safe practices. 3. Prevent abuse of services. D. Costs of Installation and Operation: Pay costs for temporary electrical power used, including costs of installation, meter, maintenance, and removal of temporary services from point of connection. E. Requirements of Regulatory Agencies: 1. Obtain and pay for permits as required by governing authorities. 2. Comply with applicable codes. a. National Electrical Code. b. National Electrical Safety Code. c. National Fire Protection Association. d. Federal, State and local codes and utility company regulations. 1.04 TEMPORARY SANITARY FACILITIES A. Furnish and install temporary sanitary facilities for use throughout construction period. 01500 -3 052316 B. Maintain strict supervision of use of facilities: 1. Enforce conformance with applicable standards. 2. Maintain, service and clean facilities. 3. Enforce proper use of sanitary facilities. C. Cost of Installation and Operation: 1. Pay costs for temporary sanitary facilities, including costs of installation, maintenance and removal. 2. Costs of Water: As specified in Paragraph 1.02C.2. 3. Pay service charges for use of portable sanitary units. D. Facility Locations: 1. Within the project site. 2. Drinking Water: Convenient to work stations. 3. Toilet and washing facilities. a. Secluded from public observation. b. Convenient for use of personnel in relation to work stations. 4. Obtain acceptance of Engineer and Owner. E. Requirements of Regulatory Agencies: 1. Obtain and pay for permits as required by governing authorities. 2. Comply with Federal, State, and local codes. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. General: 1. Materials may be new or used, but must be adequate for purpose required. 01500 -4 052316 2. At Contractor's option, patented specialty products may be used, in compliance with applicable codes. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Install work in a neat and orderly manner. B. Make structurally sound throughout. C. Maintain to provide continuous service. D. Modify and extend service as work progress requires. 3.02 TEMPORARY WATER A. Locate piping and outlets. 1. Provide service convenient to work stations. 2. Avoid interference with: a. Traffic and work areas. b. Materials handling equipment. c. Storage areas. B. Do not run piping on floor or on ground. C. When necessary to maintain pressure, provide temporary pumps, tanks, and compressors. 3.03 TEMPORARY ELECTRICITY A. Service and distribution may be overhead or underground. B. Locate to avoid interference with: 1. Traffic and work areas. 2. Cranes. 01500 -5 052316 • 3. Material handling equipment. 4. Storage areas. C. Do not run branch circuits on floor or on ground. D. Wire all safety devices specified for final operation of equipment. E. Check operation of safety devices. 3.04 TEMPORARY SANITARY FACILITIES A. Portable Toilets: 1. Erect securely, and anchor to prevent dislocation or tipping over. 2. Service as often as necessary to prevent accumulation of wastes, and creation of unsanitary conditions. B. Washing Facilities: Provide faucets, drains and other washing facilities suitable for the type of work requiring washing. 3.05 REMOVAL A. Completely remove temporary materials and equipment upon completion of construction. B. Clean, and repair damage caused by installation and restore to specified, or original condition. END OF SECTION 01500 -6 052316 • SECTION 01505 MOBILIZATION PART I - GENERAL 1.01 DEFINITION AND SCOPE A. Mobilization shall include the obtaining of all permits, insurance, and bonds; moving onto the site of all plant and equipment; furnishing and erecting plants, temporary buildings, and other construction facilities; all as required for the proper performance and completion of the Work. Mobilization shall include, but not be limited to, the following principal items. 1. Move onto the site all Contractor's plant and equipment required for first month operations. 2. Install temporary construction power, wiring, and lighting facilities. 3. Establish fire protection plan and safety program. 4. Secure construction water supply. 5. Provide on -site sanitary facilities and potable water facilities as required by 0 agencies having jurisdiction. 6. Arrange for and erect Contractor's work and storage yard and employee's parking facilities. 7. Submit all required insurance certificates and bonds. 8. Obtain all required permits. 9. Post all OSHA, EPA, Department of Labor, and all other required notices. 10. Submit a detailed construction schedule acceptable to the Engineer as specified. 11. Submit a schedule of values of the Work. Mobilization and Demobilization shall not be more than 5.0% of the bid amount. 12. Submit a schedule of submittals. 13. Install project sign. 01505 -1 050416 1.02 DEMOBILIZATION A. Demobilization is the timely and proper removal of all Contractor owned material, equipment or plant, from the job site and the proper restoration or completion of work necessary to bring the site into full compliance with the Contract Documents. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 01505 -2 050416 • SECTION 01525 CONSTRUCTION AIDS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Scope of Work: Furnish, install and maintain required construction aids, remove on completion of Work. B. Related Requirements Described Elsewhere: 1. Summary of Project: Section 01010. C. Comply with applicable requirements specified in Sections of Divisions 2 through 16. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Materials may be new or used, suitable for the intended purpose, but must not • violate requirements of applicable codes and standards. 2.02 CONSTRUCTION AIDS A. Provide construction aids and equipment required by personnel and to facilitate execution of the Work: scaffolds, staging, ladders, stairs, ramps, runways, platforms, railings, hoists, cranes, chutes and other such facilities and equipment such as temporary valves and fittings. Refer to respective Sections for particular requirements for each trade. B. When permanent stair framing is in place, provide temporary treads, platforms and railings, for use by construction personnel. C. Maintain facilities and equipment in first -class condition. 01525 -1 050416 • • • PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Consult with the Engineer, review site conditions and factors which affect construction procedures and construction aids, which may be affected by execution of the Work. 3.02 GENERAL A. Comply with applicable requirements specified in sections of Divisions 2 through 16. B. Relocate construction aids as required by progress of construction, by storage of work requirements and to accommodate legitimate requirements of Owner and other contractors employed at the site. 3.03 REMOVAL A. Completely remove temporary materials, equipment and services: 1. When construction needs can be met by use of permanent construction. 2. At completion of work. B. Clean and restore areas damaged by installation by use of temporary facilities. 1. Remove foundations and underground installations for construction aids. 2. Grade and grass areas of site affected by temporary installations to required elevations, slopes, ground cover and clean the area. C. Restore permanent facilities used for temporary purposes to specified condition or in kind if not specified. END OF SECTION 01525 -2 050416 • • • SECTION 01600 MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Scope of Work: Material and equipment incorporated into the Work: 1. Manufactured and fabricated products: a. Design, fabricate and assemble in accord with the best engineering and shop practices. b. Manufacture like parts of duplicate units to standard sizes and gauges, to be interchangeable. c. Two (2) or more items of the same kind shall be identical, by the same manufacturer. d. Products shall be suitable for service conditions. e. Equipment capacities, sizes and dimensions shown or specified shall be adhered to unless variations are specifically approved in writing. 2. Do not use material or equipment for any purpose other than that for which it is designed or specified. 1.02 MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS FOR INSTALLATION A. When Contract Documents require that installation of work shall comply with manufacturer's printed instructions, obtain and distribute copies of such instructions to parties involved in the installation, including five copies to the Engineer. 1. Maintain one (1) set of complete instructions at the job site during installation and until completion. B. Handle, install, connect, clean, condition and adjust products in strict accord with such instructions and in conformity with specified requirements. 1. Should job conditions or specified requirements conflict with manufacturer's instructions, consult with Engineer for further instructions. 01600 -1 050416 • • 2. Do not proceed with work without clear instructions. C. Perform work in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Do not omit any preparatory step or installation procedure unless specifically modified or exempted by Contract Documents. 1.03 TRANSPORTATION AND HANDLING A. Arrange deliveries of products in accordance with progress schedules, coordinate to avoid conflict with work and conditions at the site. 1. Deliver products in undamaged condition, in manufacturer's original containers or packaging, with identifying labels intact and legible. 2. Immediately on delivery, inspect shipments to assure compliance with requirements of Contract Documents and approved submittals, and that products are properly protected and undamaged. B. Provide equipment and personnel to handle products by methods to prevent soiling or damage to products or packaging. 1.04 STORAGE AND PROTECTION A. The Contractor shall furnish a covered, weather - protected storage structure providing a clean, dry, noncorrosive environment for all mechanical equipment, valves, architectural items, electrical and instrumentation equipment, and special equipment to be incorporated into this Project. Storage of equipment shall be in strict accordance with the "instructions for storage" of each equipment supplier and manufacturer including connection of heaters, placing of storage lubricants in equipment, etc. Corroded, damaged or deteriorated equipment and parts shall be replaced before acceptance of the project. Equipment and materials not properly stored will not be included in a payment estimate. B. Store products in accord with manufacturer's instructions, with seals and labels intact and legible. 1. Store products subject to damage by the elements in weather -tight enclosures. 2. Maintain temperature and humidity within the ranges required by manufacturer's instructions. 3. Store fabricated products above the ground, on blocking or skids, prevent soiling or staining. Cover products which are subject to deterioration with impervious sheet coverings, provide adequate ventilation to avoid condensation. 01600 -2 050416 • • 4. Store loose granular materials in a well - drained area on solid surfaces to prevent mixing with foreign matter. C. All materials and equipment to be incorporated in the work shall be handled and stored by the Contractor before, during and after shipment in a manner to prevent warping, twisting, bending, breaking, chipping, rusting, and any injury, theft or damage of any kind whatsoever to the material or equipment. D. Cement, sand and lime shall be stored under a roof and off the ground and shall be kept completely dry at all times. All structural and miscellaneous steel, and reinforcing steel shall be stored off the ground or otherwise to prevent accumulations of dirt or grease, and in a position to prevent accumulations of standing water and to minimize rusting. Beams shall be stored with the webs vertical. Precast concrete beams shall be handled and stored in a manner to prevent accumulations of dirt, standing water, staining, chipping or cracking. Brick, block and similar masonry products shall be handled and stored in a manner to reduce breakage, chipping, cracking and spalling to a minimum. E. All materials, which, in the opinion of the Engineer, have become so damaged as to be unfit for the use intended or specified shall be promptly removed from the site of the work, and the Contractor shall receive no compensation for the damaged material or its removal. F. Arrange storage in a manner to provide easy access for inspection. Make periodic inspections of stored products to assure that products are maintained under specified conditions, and free from damage or deterioration. G. Protection After Installation: Provide substantial coverings as necessary to protect installed products from damage from traffic and subsequent construction operations. Remove covering when no longer needed. H. The Contractor shall be responsible for all material, equipment and supplies sold and delivered to the Owner under this Contract until final inspection of the work and acceptance thereof by the Owner. This includes all Owner Direct Purchase (ODP) and non -ODP material, equipment and supplies. In the event any such material, equipment and supplies are lost, stolen, damaged or destroyed prior to final inspection and acceptance, the Contractor shall replace same without additional cost to the Owner. Should the Contractor fail to take proper action on storage and handling of equipment supplied under this Contract within seven (7) days after written notice to do so has been given, the Owner retains the right to correct all deficiencies noted in previously transmitted written notice and deduct the cost associated with these corrections from the Contractor's Contract. These costs may be comprised of expenditures for labor, equipment usage, administrative, clerical, engineering and any other costs associated with making the necessary corrections. 01600 -3 050416 1.05 STORAGE AND HANDLING OF EQUIPMENT ON SITE A. Because of the long period allowed for construction, special attention shall be given to the storage and handling of equipment on site. As a minimum, the procedure outlined below shall be followed: 1. Materials shall not be shipped until approved by the Engineer. The intent of this requirement is to avoid unnecessary delivery of unapproved materials and to reduce on -site storage time prior to installation and /or operation. Under no circumstances shall major equipment or finish products be delivered to the site more than one month prior to installation without written authorization from the Engineer. Materials shipped to the site, or temporarily stored off-site in approved locations, shall be stored in accordance with Paragraph 1.04, herein. 2. All equipment having moving parts such as gears, electric motors, etc. and/or instruments shall be stored in a temperature and humidity controlled building approved by the Engineer, until such time as the equipment is to be installed. 3. All equipment shall be stored fully lubricated with oil, grease, etc. unless otherwise instructed by the manufacturer. 4. Manufacturer's storage instructions shall be carefully studied by the Contractor and reviewed with the Engineer. These instructions shall be carefully followed and a written record of this kept by the Contractor. 5. Moving parts shall be rotated a minimum of once weekly to insure proper lubrication and to avoid metal -to -metal "welding ". Upon installation of the equipment, the Contractor shall start the equipment, at least half the load, once weekly for an adequate period of time to insure that the equipment does not deteriorate from lack of use. 6. Lubricants shall be changed upon completion of installation and as frequently as required thereafter during the period between installation and acceptance. Mechanical equipment to be used in the work, if stored for longer than ninety (90) days, shall have the bearings cleaned, flushed and lubricated prior to testing and startup, at no extra cost to the Owner. 7. Prior to acceptance of the equipment, the Contractor shall have the manufacturer inspect the equipment and certify that its condition has not been detrimentally affected by the long storage period. Such certifications by the manufacturer shall be deemed to mean that the equipment is judged by the manufacturer to be in a condition equal to that of equipment that has been shipped, installed, tested and accepted in a minimum time period. As such, the manufacturer will guarantee the equipment equally in both instances. If such a certification is not given, the equipment shall be 01600 -4 050416 • • judged to be defective. It shall be removed and replaced at the Contractor's expense. 1.06 SPARE PARTS A. Spare parts for certain equipment provided under Divisions 11: Equipment; 13: Special Construction; 15: Mechanical; and 16: Electrical have been specified in the pertinent sections of the Specifications. The Contractor shall collect and store all spare parts so required in an area to be designated by the Engineer. In addition, the Contractor shall furnish to the Engineer an inventory listing all spare parts, the equipment they are associated with, the name and address of the supplier, and the delivered cost of each item. Copies of actual invoices for each item shall be furnished with the inventory to substantiate the delivered cost. 1.07 GREASE, OIL AND FUEL A. All grease, oil and fuel required for testing of equipment shall be furnished with the respective equipment. The Owner shall be furnished with a year's supply of required lubricants including grease and oil of the type recommended by the manufacturer with each item of equipment supplied. B. The Contractor shall be responsible for changing the oil in all drives and intermediate drives of each mechanical equipment after initial break -in of the equipment, which in no event shall be any longer than three (3) weeks of operation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION 01600 -5 050416 • • • SECTION 01650 START -UP AND DEMONSTRATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Scope of Work: Demonstrate to Owner and Engineer that the Work functions as a complete and operable system under normal and emergency operating conditions. B. Contractor shall provide all materials, personnel, equipment and expendables as needed and as specified to perform the required start-up and demonstration tests. C. Related Work Described Elsewhere: 1. Progress Schedules: Section 01310. 2. Operating and Maintenance Data: Section 01730. 3. Equipment: Division 11. 4. Mechanical: Division 15. 5. Electrical: Division 16. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 START -UP PLAN A. Submit for approval by the Engineer a detailed start-up plan outlining the schedule and sequence of all tests and start-up activities, including submittal of checkout forms, submittal of demonstration test procedures, start -up, demonstration and testing, submittal of certification of completed demonstration and training. Start-up and commissioning may not begin until the plan is approved by the Engineer. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 COMPONENT TEST AND CHECK -OUT A. Start-up Certification: Prior to system start -up, successfully complete all the testing required of the individual components of the Work. Submit six (6) copies of CHECK -OUT MEMO'S for each individual component or piece of equipment, signed by the Contractor or the subcontractor and the manufacturer's representative. All copies of the Operation and Maintenance Manuals must be provided before start-up may begin. These forms shall be completed and submitted before 01650 -1 083016 • • • Instruction in Operation to Owner or a request for initiating any final inspections. Insert one (1) copy of this form into the applicable section of each Operation and Maintenance Manual. B. Demonstrate to the Engineer and the Owner's representative, that all temporary jumpers and /or bypasses have been removed and that all of the components are operating under their own controls as designated. C. Coordinate start-up activities with the Owner's operating personnel at the treatment plant site and with the Engineer prior to commencing system start-up. 3.02 START -UP A. Confirm that all equipment is properly energized, that the valves are set to their normal operating condition and that the flow path through the new Work is unobstructed. B. Slowly fill each hydrostatic structure in the process flow stream with water. C. Initiate start-up and training in accordance with and with the use of the plant operation and maintenance manuals. D. Observe the component operation and make adjustments as necessary to optimize the performance of the Work. E. Coordinate with Owner for any adjustments desired or operational problems requiring debugging. F. Make adjustments as necessary. 3.03 START -UP DEMONSTRATION AND TESTING A. After all Work components have been constructed, field tested, and started up in accordance with the individual Specifications and manufacturer requirements, and after all Check -Out Forms have been completed and submitted, perform the Start- Up Demonstration and Testing. The demonstration period shall be held upon completion of all systems at a starting date to be agreed upon in writing by the Owner or his representative. Prior to beginning the start-up demonstration testing, the Contractor shall submit a detailed schedule of operational circumstances for approval by the Engineer. The schedule of operational circumstances shall describe, in detail, the proposed test procedures for each piece of equipment. Provide similar test procedure forms for each piece of equipment or section of the Work to include all particular aspects and features of that equipment or section of the Work and as specified in the Technical Sections of the Specifications. B. The Start-Up Demonstration Testing will be conducted for five (5) consecutive days. The Work must operate successfully during the five (5) day testing period in 01650 -2 083016 • 1 • the manner intended. If the Work does not operate successfully, or if the start-up is interrupted due to other contracts, the problems will be corrected and the test will start over from day one. The party causing the interruption will be subject to the assessment of actual damages due to delay. C. During the start-up demonstration period, operate the Work, instruct designated plant operating personnel in the function and operation of the Work, and cause various operational circumstances to occur. As a minimum, these circumstances will include average and peak daily flows, random equipment or process failures, tank overflows, surcharges, interlocks and bypasses. Demonstrate the essential features of the equipment and its relationship to other equipment. The approved schedule of operational circumstances and Demonstration Test Procedures Forms will be used as the agenda during the Start-Up Demonstration Testing period for all equipment and sections of the Work. Coordination of the demonstration test schedule will be accomplished through the Engineer. D. Acceptability of the Work's performance will be based on the Work performing as specified under these actual and simulated operating conditions, to provide water treatment facilities functioning as intended and as defined in the Contract Documents. The intent of the start-up demonstration and testing is for the Contractor to demonstrate to the Owner and the Engineer that the Work will function as a complete and operable system under normal, as well as emergency operating conditions, and is ready for final acceptance. E. Demonstrate the essential features of all the mechanical systems including, but not limited to, the following as they apply to the Work. Each system shall be demonstrated once only, after completion of testing. F. Demonstrate the essential features of all electrical and instrumentation systems including, but not limited to, the following as they apply to the work: 1. Electrical systems controls and equipment. a. Electrical power equipment. b. Motor control centers. c. Motor control devices. d. Valve actuators. e. Special transformers. f. Starting devices. g. Blowers. 2. Supervisory control and data acquisition system. 3. Communications systems. G. Upon successful completion of the Start-up, Demonstration and Testing, the Owner's personnel will receive the specified training for each system. Training of 01650 -3 083016 • • • the Owner's personnel will not be considered valid unless it takes place using a system that has successfully passed the Start -up, Demonstration and Testing. H. Upon completion of all specified operator training, the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer six (6) copies of the Certificate of Completed Demonstration Form, for each item of equipment or system in the Work, signed by the Contractor, Subcontractor, Engineer, and the Owner. Insert one (1) copy of this form in the applicable section of each Operation and Maintenance Manual. A sample Certificate of Completed Demonstration Form is provided in Section 00866. END OF SECTION 01650 -4 083016 • • • SECTION 01700 CONTRACT CLOSEOUT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Scope of Work: Comply with requirements stated in Conditions of the Contract and in Specifications for administrative procedures in closing out the Work after the one (1) year of system operation has been certified complete. B. Related Requirements Described Elsewhere: 1. Start-Up and Demonstration: Section 01650 2. Cleaning: Section 01710. 3. Project Record Documents: Section 01720. 4. Operating and Maintenance Data: Section 01730. 5. Warranties and Bonds: Section 01740. 6. Miscellaneous Work and Cleanup: Section 01800. 1.02 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION A. The Work will not be substantially complete, and Contractor may not request substantial completion inspection unless the following submittals and work is completed: 1. All Operation and Maintenance manuals have been submitted and approved to the requirements of Section 01730. 2. All equipment has been checked -out by the equipment manufacturer and Certificates of Manufacturer's Check -Out have been submitted as required by Section 01650. 3. All start-up and demonstration testing completed and Certificates of Completed Demonstration submitted to the requirements of Section 01650. 01700 -1 050416 • • • 4. Project Record Documents are complete and have been submitted and reviewed to the requirements of Section 01720. 5. All training of Owner's personnel completed. 6. All areas to be used and occupied are safe, operable in automatic and complete. 7. All building occupancy certificates have been issued by the appropriate building permitting agency. 8. All painting, finishes, fencing, cleanup, final grading, grassing, planting, sidewalk construction, and paving shall have been completed and are ready for inspection. 9. All deficiencies noted on inspection reports or nonconformances are corrected or the correction plan approved. B. When the conditions of paragraph 1.02 A. are met the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer: 1. A written notice that he considers the Work, or portion thereof, is substantially complete, and request an inspection. 2. A punch list of items to be corrected. (Uncompleted work which is not related to the safe, effective, efficient use of the Project may be allowed on the punch list with the Engineer's approval.) C. Within a reasonable time after receipt of such notice, the Engineer will make an inspection to determine the status of completion. D. Should the Engineer determine that the Work is not substantially complete: 1. The Engineer will promptly notify the Contractor in writing, giving the reasons therefor. 2. Contractor shall remedy the deficiencies in the Work and send another written notice of substantial completion to the Engineer. 3. The Engineer will within reasonable time, reinspect the Work. The Contractor will be liable for reinspection fees as described in Paragraph 1.04, herein. 01700 -2 050416 • • • E. When the Engineer finds that the Work is substantially complete, he will: 1. Schedule a walk- through of the facility to include the Owner. Engineer shall determine the completeness of the punch list and readiness of the facility for occupancy by the Owner. 2. Prepare and deliver to Owner a tentative Certificate of Substantial Completion with the tentative punch list of items to be completed or corrected before final inspection. 3. After consideration of any objections made by the Owner as provided in Conditions of the Contract, and when the Engineer considers the Work substantially complete, he will execute and deliver to the Owner and the Contractor a definite Certificate of Substantial Completion with a revised tentative list of items to be completed or corrected. Any incomplete work allowed on a punch list must be reinspected upon completion and any deficiencies found will be added to the punch list. 1.03 FINAL INSPECTION A. Prior to Contractor's request for a final inspection the following submittals and work must be complete: 1. Project Record Documents must be approved. 2. All spare parts and maintenance materials must be suitably delivered to the Owner per the requirements of the Technical Sections of the Specifications. 3. Contractor to submit evidence of compliance with requirements of governing authorities. B. After satisfying the requirements of Paragraph 1.03 A. and when Contractor considers the Work complete, he shall submit written certification that: 1. Contract Document requirements have been met. 2. Work has been inspected for compliance with Contract Documents. 3. Work has been completed in accordance with Contract Documents. 4. Equipment and systems have been tested in the presence of the Owner's representative and are operational. 01700 -3 050416 • • • 5. All punch list items have been corrected or completed and the Work is ready for final inspection. C. The Engineer will, within reasonable time, make an inspection to verify the status of completion after receipt of such certification. D. Should the Engineer consider that the Work is incomplete or defective: 1. The Engineer will promptly notify the Contractor in writing, listing the incomplete or defective work. 2. Contractor shall take immediate steps to remedy the stated deficiencies, and send another written certification to the Engineer that the Work is complete. 3. The Engineer will, within a reasonable amount of time, reinspect the Work and the Contractor shall be liable for reinspection fees as described in Paragraph 1.04, herein. E. When the Engineer finds that the Work is acceptable under the Contract Documents, the Contractor may make closeout submittals. 1.04 REINSPECTION FEES A. Should the Engineer perform reinspections due to failure of the Work to comply with the claims of status of completion made by the Contractor: 1. Contractor will compensate the Owner for such additional services. 2. Owner will deduct the amount of such compensation from the final payment to the Contractor. 1.05 CONTRACTOR'S CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Warranties and Bonds: To requirements of Section 01740. B. Evidence of Payment and Release of Liens: To requirements of General and Supplementary Conditions. C. Certificate of Insurance for Products and Completed Operations. 1.06 FINAL ADJUSTMENT OF ACCOUNTS A. Submit a final statement of accounting to the Engineer. 01700 -4 050416 • • B. Statement shall reflect all adjustments to the Contract Sum: 1. The original Contract Sum. 2. Additions and deductions resulting from: a. Previous change orders or written amendments. b. Allowances. c. Unit prices. d. Deductions for uncorrected work. e. Penalties and bonuses. f. Deductions for liquidated damages. g. Deductions for reinspection payments. h. Other adjustments. 3. Total Contract Sum, as adjusted. 4. Previous payments. 5. Sum remaining due. C. Engineer will prepare a final Change Order, reflecting approved adjustments to the Contract Sum which were not previously made by Change Orders. 1.07 FINAL APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT A. Contractor shall submit the final Application for Payment in accordance with procedures and requirements stated in the Conditions of the Contract. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION 01700 -5 050416 • • • SECTION 01710 CLEANING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Scope of Work: Execute cleaning, during progress of the Work and at completion of the Work. 1.02 DISPOSAL REQUIREMENTS A. Conduct cleaning and disposal operations to comply with codes, ordinances, regulations, and anti - pollution laws. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Use only those cleaning materials which will not create hazards to health or property and which will not damage surfaces. B. Use only those cleaning materials and methods recommended by manufacturer of the surface material to be cleaned. C. Use cleaning materials only on surfaces recommended by cleaning material manufacturer. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 DURING CONSTRUCTION A. Execute daily cleaning to keep the Work, the site and adjacent properties free from accumulations of waste materials, rubbish and windblown debris, resulting from construction operations or personal activities. B. Provide on -site containers for the collection of waste materials, debris and rubbish. C. Remove waste materials, debris and rubbish from the site periodically, or as directed by the Owner, and dispose of at legal disposal areas away from the site. 01710 -1 050416 • • • 3.02 DUST CONTROL A. The Contractor shall employ construction techniques that minimize the production and distribution of dust. B. Clean spaces prior to the start of finish painting and continue cleaning on an as- needed basis until painting is finished. C. Schedule operations so that dust and other contaminants resulting from cleaning process will not fall on wet or newly- coated surfaces. 3.03 FINAL CLEANING A. Employ skilled workmen for final cleaning. B. Remove grease, mastic, adhesives, dust, dirt, stains, fingerprints, labels, and other foreign materials from sight- exposed interior and exterior surfaces. C. Prior to final completion, or Owner occupancy, Contractor shall conduct an inspection of sight- exposed interior and exterior surfaces and all work areas, to verify that the entire Work is clean. END OF SECTION 01710 -2 050416 • • • SECTION 01720 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 PURPOSE AND DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. The purpose of the Project Record Documents is to provide the Owner with factual information regarding all aspects of the Work, both concealed and visible, to enable future location, identification and modification of the Work without lengthy and expensive site measurement, investigation or examination. B. Maintenance and submittal of Record Documents. 1. Throughout progress of Work, maintain accurate records of progress and changes of Contract Documents and in the Record Drawings. 2. Provide final record documents to the Owner. 1.02 DEFINITIONS Except where specific definitions are used within a specific section, the following terms, phrases, words and their derivation shall have the meaning given herein when consistent with the context in which they are used. Words used in the present tense include the future tense, words in the plural number include the singular number and words in the singular number include the plural number. The word "shall" is mandatory, and the word "mav" is permissive. A. As -Built Drawings: Drawings prepared by the Contractor shall depict the actual location of installed utilities for the completed Work in a full size hard copy and an electronic AutoCAD file (dwg) format. 1.03 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. All General Conditions, Supplements to the General Conditions, and any Addenda issued by the Owner are a part of this Section in the same manner as if fully written herein, and shall govern the Work of this Section, except where more stringent articles or requirements are stipulated, then they shall govern this Section. B. The Contract Documents are complementary and what is required by anyone shall be as binding as if required by all. C. Other requirements affecting As -Built Documents may appear in pertinent other sections of these specifications. 01720 -1 052316 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE • A. Delegate the responsibility for maintenance of the As -Built Documents to one • • person on the Contractor's staff as approved by the Owner. B. Thoroughly coordinate changes within the As -Built Documents, making adequate and proper entries on each page of specifications and each sheet of drawings and other documents where such entry is required to show progress and changes properly. C. Make entries within 24 -hours after receipt of information has occurred. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01340 "Shop Drawings, Working Drawings, and Samples" and other submittal requirements in the different Articles of this Section and the rest of these specifications. B. As a prerequisite for progress payments, the Contractor shall exhibit the currently updated As -Built Documents for review by the Owner. Payment will be withheld at the Owner's discretion based on the status of the As -Built Documents or if they are not properly maintained. C. The Work will not be placed into operation until the As -Built Drawings are approved by the Owner. D. Prior to submitting request for final payment or the Owner issuing a Certificate of Completion for the Work, Contractor shall submit the final As -Built Documents to the Owner for approval. Retainage funds will be withheld at the Owner's discretion based on the quality and accuracy of the final As -Built Documents. E. Required Submittal Documents: 1. Full size, hard copy set of the final As -Built Documents. 2. Digital Set of the final As -Built Documents including but not limited to: a) Digital Record Drawing in the Engineer's current version of AutoCAD file (dwg) format for the Contract Drawings, updated to match the final As -Built Drawing information. 01720 -2 052316 1.06 RECORD DOCUMENTS AT SITE • A. Maintain at the site and always available for Owner's use one record copy of: 1. Construction Contract, Drawings, Specifications, General Conditions, Supplemental Conditions, Bid Proposal, Instruction to Bidders, Addenda, and all other Contract Documents. 2. Change Orders, Verbal Orders, and other modifications to Contract. 3. Written instructions by the Owner as well as correspondence related to Requests for Information (RFIs). 4. Accepted Shop Drawings, Samples, product data, substitution and "or- equal" requests. 5. Field test records, inspection certificates, manufacturer certificates and construction photographs. B. Maintain the documents in an organized, clean, dry, legible condition and completely protected from deterioration and from loss and damage until completion of the Work, transfer of all record data to the final Record Documents and for submittal to the Owner. PART 2- PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3- EXECUTION (NOT USED) • • END OF SECTION 01720 -3 052316 • • • SECTION 01730 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Scope of Work: 1. Compile product data and related information appropriate for Owner's maintenance and operation of products furnished under Contract. a. Prepare operating and maintenance data as specified in this Section and as referenced in other pertinent sections of Specifications. 2. Instruct Owner's personnel in maintenance of products and in operation of equipment and systems. B. Related Requirements Described Elsewhere: 1. General Requirements: Division 1 2. Equipment: Division 11 3. Special Construction: Division 13 4. Mechanical: Division 15. 5. Electrical: Division 16. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Preparation of data shall be done by personnel: 1. Trained and experienced in maintenance and operation of described products. 2. Familiar with requirements of this Section. 3. Skilled as technical writer to the extent required to communicate essential data. 4. Skilled as draftsman competent to prepare required drawings. 01730 -1 050416 • 1.03 FORM OF SUBMITTALS A. Prepare data in form of an instructional manual for use by Owner's personnel. B. Format: 1. Size: 8 -1/2 inches x 11 inches. 2. Paper: 20 pound minimum, white, for typed pages. 3. Text: Manufacturer's printed data, or neatly typewritten. 4. Drawings: a. Provide reinforced punched binder tab, bind in with text. b. Reduce larger drawings and fold to size of text pages but not larger than 14 inches x 17 inches. 5. Provide fly -leaf for each separate product, or each piece of operating equipment. a. Provide typed description of projects and major component parts of IIIequipment. b. Provide identified tabs. 6. Cover: Identify each volume with typed or printed title "OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS ". List: a. Title of Project. b. Identity of separate structure as applicable. c. Identity of general subject matter covered in the manual. C. Binders: • 1. Commercial quality, three D -ring type binders with durable and cleanable white plastic covers. Binders shall be presentation type with clear vinyl covers on front, back and spine. Binders shall include two sheet lifters and two, horizontal inside pockets. 2. Maximum D -ring width: 2 inches. 01730 -2 050416 3. When multiple binders are used, correlate the data into related consistent • groupings. • • 1.04 CONTENT OF MANUAL A. Neatly typewritten table of contents for each volume, arranged in systematic order. 1. Contractor, name of responsible principal, address and telephone number. 2. A list of each product required to be included, indexed to content of the volume. 3. List, with each product, name, address and telephone number of: a. Subcontractor, manufacturer and installer name, addresses and telephone numbers. b. A list of each product required to be included, indexed to content of the volume. c. Identify area of responsibility of each. d. Local source of supply for parts and replacement equipment including name, address and telephone number. 4. Identify each product by product name and other identifying symbols as set forth in Contract Documents. B. Product Data: 1. Include only those sheets which are pertinent to the specific product. 2. Annotate each sheet to: a. Clearly identify specific product or part installed. b. Clearly identify data applicable to installation. c. Delete references to inapplicable information. 3. Operation and maintenance information as herein specified. 01730 -3 050416 • • • 4. Record shop drawings as submitted and approved with all corrections made for each product. C. Drawings: 1. Supplement product data with drawings as necessary to clearly illustrate: a. Relations of component parts of equipment and systems. b. Control and flow diagrams. 2. Coordinate drawings with information in Project Record Documents to assure correct illustration of completed installation. 3. Do not use Project Record Documents as maintenance drawings. D. Written test, as required to supplement product data for the particular installation: 1. Organize in consistent format under separate headings for different procedures. 2. Provide logical sequence of instruction of each procedure. E. Copy of each warranty, bond and service contract issued. 1. Provide information sheet for Owner's personnel, give: a. Proper procedures in event of failure. b. Instances which might affect validity of warranties or bonds. 1.05 MANUAL FOR MATERIALS AND FINISHES A. Submit six (6) copies of complete manual in final form and four (4) electronic copies. B. Content: for architectural products, applied materials and finishes: 1. Manufacturer's data, giving full information on products. a. Catalog number, size, composition. b. Color and texture designations. 01730 -4 050416 • • • c. Information required for reordering special manufacturing products. 2. Instructions for care and maintenance. a. Manufacturer's recommendation for types of cleaning agents and methods. b. Cautions against cleaning agents and methods which are detrimental to product. c. Recommended schedule for cleaning and maintenance. C. Content, for moisture protection and weather - exposed products: 1. Manufacturer's data, giving full information on products. a. Applicable standards. b. Chemical composition. c. Details of installation. 2. Instructions for inspection, maintenance and repair. D. Additional requirements for maintenance data: Respective sections of Specifications. 1.06 MANUAL FOR EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMS A. Submit six (6) copies of complete manual in final form and four (4) electronic copies. B. Content, for each unit of equipment and system, as appropriate: 1. Description of unit and component parts. a. Function, normal operating characteristics, and limiting conditions. b. Performance curves, engineering data and tests. c. Complete nomenclature and commercial number of replaceable parts. 01730 -5 050416 • • • d. Summary of information listed on equipment and motor data plates. 2. Operating procedures: a. Start-up, break -in, routine and normal operating instructions. b. Regulation, control, stopping, shut -down and emergency instructions. c. Summer and winter operating instructions. d. Special operating instructions. 3. Maintenance procedures: a. Routine operations. b. Guide to "trouble- shooting ". c. Disassembly, repair and reassembly. d. Alignment, adjusting and checking. 4. Servicing and lubrication required. 5. Manufacturer's printed operating and maintenance instructions. 6. Description of sequence of operation by control manufacturer. 7. Original manufacturer's parts list, illustrations, assembly drawings and diagrams required for maintenance. a. Predicted life of parts subject to wear. b. Items recommended to be stocked as spare parts. 8. As- installed control diagrams by controls manufacturer. 9. Each Contractor's coordination drawings. a. As- installed color coded piping diagrams. 10. Charts of valve tag numbers, with location and function of each valve. 01730 -6 050416 • • • 11. List of original manufacturer's spare parts, manufacturer's current prices and recommended quantities to be maintained in storage. 12. Other data as required under pertinent sections of specifications. 13. Approved record shop drawings with all corrections made, and a copy of the warranty statement, checkout memo, demonstration test procedures and demonstration test certification. C. Content, for each electric and electronic systems, as appropriate: 1. Description of system and component parts. a. Function, normal operating characteristics, and limiting conditions. b. Performance curves, engineering data and tests. c. Complete nomenclature and commercial number of replaceable parts. 2. Circuit directories and panelboards. a. Electrical service. b. Controls. c. Communications. 3. As installed color coded wiring diagrams. 4. Operating procedures: a. Routine and normal operating instructions. b. Sequences required. c. Special operating instructions. 5. Maintenance procedures: a. Routine operations. b. Guide to "trouble- shooting ". c. Disassembly, repair and reassembly. 01730 -7 050416 • • • d. Adjustment and checking. 6. Manufacturer's printed operating and maintenance instructions. 7. List of original manufacturer's spare parts, manufacturer's current prices, and recommended quantities to be maintained in storage. 8. Other data as required under pertinent sections of specifications. D. Prepare and include additional data when the need for such data becomes apparent during instruction of Owner's personnel. E. Additional requirements for operating and maintenance data: Respective sections of Specifications. 1.07 SUBMITTAL SCHEDULE A. Submit two (2) copies of preliminary draft of proposed formats and outlines of contents of Operation and Maintenance Manuals within 90 days after Notice to Proceed. B. Submit two (2) copies of completed data in preliminary form no later than 20 days following Engineer's review of the last shop drawing of a product and /or other submittal specified under Section 01340, but no later than delivery of equipment. One (1) copy will be returned with comments to be incorporated into the final copies and the other copy will be retained on -site for use in any early training. C. Submit six (6) copies of approved manual in final form directly to the offices of the Engineer within 10 days after the reviewed copy or last item of the reviewed copy is returned. D. Provide six (6) copies of addenda to the operation and maintenance manuals as applicable and certificates as specified within 30 days after final inspection. 1.08 INSTRUCTION OF OWNER'S PERSONNEL A. Prior to demonstration test, fully instruct Owner's designated operating and maintenance personnel in operation, adjustment and maintenance of products, equipment and systems. B. Operating and maintenance manual shall constitute the basis of instruction. Review contents of manual with Owner's operating and maintenance personnel in full detail to explain all aspects of operations and maintenance. 01730 -8 050416 • • • C. Instructors shall be fully qualified personnel as outlined within the individual equipment specifications. If no specific training specifications are listed with the equipment, the Contractor shall provide the instruction with qualified Contractor personnel. D. The Contractor shall provide a list to the Owner indicating the date, time and instructors that will be present for all training sessions. E. The instructors shall provide for and prepare lesson scopes and handouts for up to ten (10) individuals designated by the Owner that outline the items to be covered. Separate sessions for operation and maintenance instruction shall be provided consecutively. Handouts shall be submitted to the Owner with at least one week's notice prior to the training sessions. F. All instruction sessions shall be recorded with portable DVD recording cameras and DVDs supplied by the Contractor. DVD recording shall be made by the Contractor under the direction of the Owner using DVD compatible recording equipment. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION 01730 -9 050416 • • • SECTION 01740 WARRANTIES AND BONDS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Related Work Described Elsewhere: 1. Contract Closeout: Section 01700. 1.02 SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Assemble warranties, bonds and service and maintenance contracts, executed by each of the respective manufacturers, suppliers, and subcontractors. B. Number of original signed copies required: Two (2) each. C. Table of Contents: Neatly typed, in orderly sequence. Provide complete information for each item. 1. Product of work item. 2. Firm, with name of principal, address and telephone number. 3. Scope. 4. Date of beginning of warranty, bond or service and maintenance contract. 5. Duration of warranty, bond or service maintenance contract. 6. Provide information for Owner's personnel: a. Proper procedure in case of failure. b. Instances which might affect the validity or warranty or bond. 7. Contractor, name of responsible principal, address and telephone number. 1.03 FORM OF SUBMITTALS A. Prepare in duplicate packets. 01740 -1 050416 B. Format: • 1. Size 8 -1/2 inches by 11 inches, punch sheets for standard three (3) ring binder. • • a. Fold larger sheets to fit into binders. 2. Cover: Identify each packet with typed or printed title "WARRANTIES AND BONDS ". List: a. Title of Project. b. Name of Contractor. C. Binders: Commercial quality, three (3) D -ring type binders with durable and cleanable white plastic covers and maximum D -ring width of two (2) inches. Binders shall be presentation type with clear vinyl covers on front, back, and spine. Binders shall include two sheet lifters and two horizontal inside pockets. 1.04 WARRANTY SUBMITTALS REQUIREMENTS A. For all major pieces of ,equipment, submit a warranty from the equipment manufacturer. The manufacturer's warranty period shall be concurrent with the Contractor's for one (1) year, unless otherwise specified, commencing at the time of final acceptance by the Owner. B. The Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining certificates for equipment warranty for all major equipment specified under Divisions 11: Equipment; 13: Special Construction; 15: Mechanical; and 16: Electrical and which has at least a 1 hp motor or which lists for more than $1,000. The Engineer reserves the right to request warranties for equipment not classified as major. The Contractor shall still warrant equipment not considered to be "major" in the Contractor's one -year warranty period even though certificates of warranty may not be required. C. In the event that the equipment manufacturer or supplier is unwilling to provide a one (1) year warranty commencing at the start of the Correction Period, the Contractor shall obtain from the manufacturer a two (2) year warranty commencing at the time of equipment delivery to the job site. This two (2) year warranty from the manufacturer shall not relieve the Contractor of the one (1) year warranty, starting at the time of Owner's acceptance of the equipment. D. The Owner shall incur no labor or equipment cost during the guarantee period. E. Guarantee shall cover all necessary labor, equipment, materials, and replacement parts resulting from faulty or inadequate equipment design, improper assembly or 01740 -2 050416 • • • erection, defective workmanship and materials, leakage, breakage or other failure of all equipment and components furnished by the manufacturer or the Contractor. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION 01740 -3 050416 • SECTION 01800 MISCELLANEOUS WORK AND CLEANUP PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Scope of Work: 1. This Section includes operations which cannot be specified in detail as separate items but can be sufficiently described as to the kind and extent to work involved. The Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals to complete the work under this Section. 2. The work of this Section includes, but is not limited to, the following: a. Restoring of fences. b. Cleaning up. c. Incidental work. • PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS • A. Materials required for this Section shall be of the same quality as materials that are to be restored. Where possible, the Contractor shall reuse existing materials that are removed and then replaced. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 RESTORING OF FENCES A. The Contractor shall remove, store and replace existing fences during construction. Only the sections directed by the Engineer shall be removed. If any section of fence is damaged due to the Contractor's negligence, it shall be replaced with fencing equal to or better than that damaged, and the work shall be satisfactory to the Engineer. 01800 -1 050416 • • • 3.02 CLEAN UP A. The Contractor shall remove all construction material, buildings, equipment and other debris remaining on the job as the result of construction operations and shall render the site of the work in a neat and orderly condition. All suitable excess excavated material shall remain on site. 3.03 INCIDENTAL WORK A. Do all incidental work not otherwise specified, but obviously necessary for the proper completion of the contract as specified and as shown on the Drawings. END OF SECTION 01800 -2 050416 DIVISION 2 NOT USED DIVISION 3 CONCRETE • • SECTION 03300 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK A. Furnish all labor and materials required and install cast -in -place concrete complete as shown on the Drawings and as specified herein. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Grout is included in Section 03600. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit to the Engineer, in accordance with Section 01340, shop drawings and product data including the following: 1. Sources of cement, pozzolan and aggregates. 2. Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) for all concrete components and admixtures. 3. Air - entraining admixture. Product data including catalogue cut, technical data, storage requirements, product life, recommended dosage, temperature considerations and conformity to ASTM standards. 4. Water- reducing admixture. Product data including catalogue cut, technical data, storage requirements, product life, recommended dosage, temperature considerations and conformity to ASTM standards. 5. High -range water - reducing admixture (plasticizer). Product data including catalogue cut, technical data, storage requirements, product life, recommended dosage, temperature considerations, retarding effect, slump range and conformity to ASTM standards. Identify proposed locations of use. 6. Concrete mix for each formulation of concrete proposed for use including constituent quantities per cubic yard, water - cementitious materials ratio, concrete slump, type and manufacturer of cement. Each proposed concrete mix shall have a mix identification number and list of locations to be used. Provide either a. or b. below for each mix proposed. a. Standard deviation data for each proposed concrete mix based on statistical records. b. The curve of water - cementitious materials ratio versus concrete cylinder strength for each formulation of concrete proposed based on laboratory tests. The cylinder strength shall be the average of the 28 03300 -1 050416 day cylinder strength test results for each mix. Provide results of 7 and 14 day tests if available. • 7. Sheet curing material. Product data including catalogue cut, technical data and conformity to ASTM standard. 8. Liquid curing compound. Product data including catalogue cut, technical data, storage requirements, product life, application rate and conformity to ASTM standards. Identify proposed locations of use. • • B. Samples 1. Fine and coarse aggregates if requested by the Engineer. C. Test Reports 1. Fine aggregates - sieve analysis, physical properties, and deleterious substance. 2. Coarse aggregates - sieve analysis, physical properties, and deleterious substances. 3. Cements - chemical analysis and physical properties for each type. 4. Pozzolans - chemical analysis and physical properties. 5. Proposed concrete mixes - compressive strength, slump and air content. D. Certifications 1. Certify admixtures used in the same concrete mix are compatible with each other and the aggregates. 2. Certify admixtures are suitable for use in contact with potable water after 30 days of concrete curing. 3. Certify curing compound is suitable for use in contact with potable water after 30 days (non -toxic and free of taste or odor). 1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) 1. ASTM C31 - Standard Practice for Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the Field. 2. ASTM C33 - Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates. 3. ASTM C39 - Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete Specimens. 03300 -2 050416 • • • 4. ASTM C42 - Standard Test Method for Obtaining and Testing Drilled Cores and Sawed Beams of Concrete. 5. ASTM C94 - Standard Specification for Ready -Mixed Concrete. 6. ASTM C143 - Standard Test Method for Slump of Hydraulic Cement Concrete 7. ASTM C150 - Standard Specification for Portland Cement 8. ASTM C171 - Standard Specification for Sheet Materials for Curing Concrete 9. ASTM C173 - Standard Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Volumetric Method. 10. ASTM C231 - Standard Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Pressure Method. 11. ASTM C260 - Standard Specification for Air - Entraining Admixtures for Concrete. 12. ASTM C309 - Standard Specification for Liquid Membrane - Forming Compounds for Curing Concrete. 13. ASTM C494 - Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete. 14. ASTM C618 - Standard Specification for Coal Fly Ash and Raw or Calcined Natural Pozzolan for Use as a Mineral Admixture in Concrete. 15. ASTM C1017 - Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for use in Producing Flowing Concrete. B. American Concrete Institute (ACI). 1. ACI 304 - Guide for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting and Placing Concrete. 2. ACI 305 - Hot Weather Concreting. 3. ACI 306.1 - Standard Specification for Cold Weather Concreting. 4. ACI 318 - Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete. 5. ACI 350 - Environmental Engineering Concrete Structures. C. Where reference is made to one of the above standards, the revision in effect at the time of bid opening shall apply. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Reinforced concrete shall comply with ACI 318, the recommendations of ACI 350R and other stated requirements, codes and standards. The most stringent requirement of the codes, standards and this Section shall apply when conflicts exist. 03300 -3 050416 • • B. Only one source of cement and aggregates shall be used on any one structure. Concrete shall be uniform in color and appearance. C. Well in advance of placing concrete, discuss with the Engineer the sources of individual materials and batched concrete proposed for use. Discuss placement methods, waterstops and curing. Propose methods of hot and cold weather concreting as required. Prior to the placement of any concrete containing a high -range water - reducing admixture (plasticizer), the Contractor, accompanied by the plasticizer manufacturer, shall discuss the properties and techniques of batching and placing plasticized concrete. D. If, during the progress of the work, it is impossible to secure concrete of the required workability and strength with the materials being furnished, the Engineer may order such changes in proportions or materials, or both, as may be necessary to secure the desired properties. All changes so ordered shall be made at the Contractor's expense. E. If, during the progress of the work, the materials from the sources originally accepted change in characteristics, the Contractor shall, at his/her expense, make new acceptance tests of aggregates and establish new design mixes. F. Testing of the following materials shall be furnished by Contractor to verify conformity with this Specification Section and the stated ASTM Standards. 1. Fine aggregates for conformity with ASTM C33 - sieve analysis, physical properties, and deleterious substances. 2. Coarse aggregates for conformity with ASTM C33 - sieve analysis, physical properties, and deleterious substances. 3. Cements for conformity with ASTM C150 - chemical analysis and physical properties. 4. Pozzolans for conformity with ASTM C618 - chemical analysis and physical properties. 5. Proposed concrete mix designs - compressive strength, slump and air content. G. Field testing and inspection services will be provided by the Owner. The cost of such work, except as specifically stated otherwise, shall be paid by the Owner. Testing of the following items shall be by the Owner to verify conformity with this Specification Section. 1. Concrete placements - compressive strength (cylinders), compressive strength (cores), slump, and air content. 2. Other materials or products that may come under question. H. All materials incorporated in the work shall conform to accepted samples. 03300 -4 050416 • • • 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Cement: Store in weather -tight buildings, bins or silos to provide protection from dampness and contamination and to minimize warehouse set. B. Aggregate: Arrange and use stockpiles to avoid excessive segregation or contamination with other materials or with other sizes of like aggregates. Build stockpiles in successive horizontal layers not exceeding 3 -ft in thickness. Complete each layer before the next is started. Do not use frozen or partially frozen aggregate. C. Sand: Arrange and use stockpiles to avoid contamination. Allow sand to drain to uniform moisture content before using. Do not use frozen or partially frozen aggregates. D. Admixtures: Store in closed containers to avoid contamination, evaporation or damage. Provide suitable agitating equipment to assure uniform dispersion of ingredients in admixture solutions which tend to separate. Protect liquid admixtures from freezing and other temperature changes which could adversely affect their characteristics. E. Pozzolan: Store in weather -tight buildings, bins or silos to provide protection from dampness and contamination. F. Sheet Curing Materials: Store in weather -tight buildings or off the ground and under cover. G. Liquid Curing Compounds: Store in closed containers. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. The use of manufacturer's name and model or catalog number is for the purpose of establishing the standard of quality and general configuration desired. B. Cement: U.S. made Portland cement complying with ASTM C150. Air entraining cements shall not be used. Cement brand shall be subject to approval by the Engineer and one brand shall be used throughout the Work. The following cement type(s) shall be used: 2.02 MATERIALS A. Materials shall comply with this Section and any applicable State or local requirements. B. Cement: Domestic Portland cement complying with ASTM C150. Air entraining cements shall not be used. Cement brand shall be subject to approval by the Engineer and one brand shall be used throughout the Work. The following cement type(s) shall be used: 03300 -5 050416 1. Class A,B,C,D Concrete - Type II with the addition of fly ash resulting in C3A being below 5 percent of total cementitious content, Type III limited to 5 percent C3A or Type V. C. Fine Aggregate: Washed inert natural sand conforming to the requirements of ASTM C33. D. Coarse Aggregate: Well - graded crushed stone or washed gravel conforming to the requirements of ASTM C33. Grading requirements shall be as listed in ASTM C33 Table 2 for the specified coarse aggregate size number. Limits of Deleterious Substances and Physical Property Requirements shall be as listed in ASTM C33 Table 3 for severe weathering regions. Size numbers for the concrete mixes shall be as shown in Table 1 herein. E. Water: Potable water free from injurious amounts of oils, acids, alkalis, salts, organic matter, or other deleterious substances. F. Admixtures: Admixtures shall be free of chlorides and alkalis (except for those attributable to water). When it is required to use more than one admixture in a concrete mix, the admixtures shall be from the same manufacturer. Admixtures shall be compatible with the concrete mix including other admixtures and shall be suitable for use in contact with potable water after 30 days of concrete curing. 1. Air - Entraining Admixture: The admixture shall comply with ASTM C260. Proportioning and mixing shall be in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 2. Water- Reducing Agent: The admixture shall comply with ASTM C494, Type A. Proportioning and mixing shall be in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 3. High -Range Water - Reducer (Plasticizer): The admixture shall comply with ASTM C494, Type F and shall result in non - segregating plasticized concrete with little bleeding and with the physical properties of low water /cement ratio concrete. The treated concrete shall be capable of maintaining its plastic state in excess of 2 hours. Proportioning and mixing shall be in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Where walls are 14" thick or less and the wall height exceeds 12 ft a mix including a plasticizer must be used. 4. Admixtures causing retarded or accelerated setting of concrete shall not be used without written approval from the Engineer. When allowed, the admixtures shall be retarding or accelerating water reducing or high range water reducing admixtures. G. Pozzolan (Fly Ash): Pozzolan shall be Class C or Class F fly ash complying with ASTM C618 except the Loss on Ignition (LOI) shall be limited to 3 percent maximum. H. Sheet Curing Materials. Waterproof paper, polyethylene film or white burlap - polyethylene sheeting all complying with ASTM C171. 03300 -6 050416 • • • I. Liquid Curing Compound. Liquid membrane - forming curing compound shall comply with the requirements of ASTM C309, Type 1 -D (clear or translucent with fugitive dye) and shall contain no wax, paraffin, or oil. Curing compound shall be approved for use in contact with potable water after 30 days (non -toxic and free of taste or odor). 2.03 MIXES A. Development of mix designs and testing shall be by an independent testing laboratory acceptable to the Engineer engaged by and at the expense of the Contractor. B. Select proportions of ingredients to meet the design strength and materials limits specified in Table 1 and to produce concrete having proper placability, durability, strength, appearance and other required properties. Proportion ingredients to produce a homogenous mixture which will readily work into corners and angles of forms and around reinforcement without permitting materials to segregate or allowing excessive free water to collect on the surface. C. The design mix shall be based on standard deviation data of prior mixes with essentially the same proportions of the same constituents or, if such data is not available, be developed by a testing laboratory, acceptable to the Engineer, engaged by and at the expense of the Contractor. Acceptance of mixes based on standard deviation shall be based on the modification factors for standard deviation tests contained in ACI 318. The water content of the concrete mix, determined by laboratory testing, shall be based on a curve showing the relation between water cementitious ratio and 7 and 28 day compressive strengths of concrete made using the proposed materials. The curves shall be determined by four or more points, each representing an average value of at least three test specimens at each age. The curves shall have a range of values sufficient to yield the desired data, including the specified design strengths as modified below, without extrapolation. The water content of the concrete mixes to be used, as determined from the curve, shall correspond to strengths 16 percent greater than the specified design strengths. The resulting mix shall not conflict with the limiting values for maximum water cementitious ratio and net minimum cementitious content as specified in Table 1. D. Compression Tests: Provide testing of the proposed concrete mix or mixes to demonstrate compliance with the specified design strength requirements in conformity with the above paragraph. E. Entrained air, as measured by ASTM C231, shall be as shown in Table 1. 1. If the air - entraining agent proposed for use in the mix requires testing methods other than ASTM C231 to accurately determine air content, make special note of this requirement in the admixture submittal. F. Slump of the concrete as measured by ASTM C143, shall be as shown in Table 1. If a high -range water - reducer (plasticizer) is used, the slump indicated shall be that measured before plasticizer is added. Plasticized concrete shall have a slump ranging from 7 to 10 -in. 03300 -7 050416 • • G. Proportion admixtures according to the manufacturer's recommendations. Two or more admixtures specified may be used in the same mix provided that the admixtures in combination retain full efficiency and have no deleterious effect on the concrete or on the properties of each other. TABLE 1 CONCRETE MIX REQUIREMENTS Design Fine Coarse Cementitious Class Strength Cement Aggregate Aggregate Content (1) (2) (2) (3) (4) A 2500 C150 Type II C33 57 440 min. B 3000 C150 Type II C33 57 480 min. C 4000 C150 Type II C33 57 560 min. D 5000 C150 Type II C33 57 600 min. W /Cm AE Slump Class Ratio Fly Ash Range WR HRWR Range (5) (6) (7) (8) Inches A 0.62 max. 3.5 to 5 Yes B 0.54 max. 3.5 to 5 Yes C 0.44 max. 25% max 3.5 to 5 Yes D 0.40 max. 3.5 to 5 Yes * * * * 1 -4 1 -3 3 -5 3 -5 NOTES: (1) Minimum compressive strength in psi at 28 days (2) ASTM designation (3) Size Number in ASTM C33 (4) Cementitious content in lbs /cu yd (5) W /Cm is Water - Cementitious ratio by weight (6) AE is percent air - entrainment (7) WR is water - reducer admixture (8) HRWR is high -range water - reducer admixture * HRWR used at contractor's option except where walls are 14" thick or less and the wall height exceeds 12 ft a mix including a plasticizer must be used. 03300 -8 050416 • PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 MEASURING MATERIALS A. Concrete shall be composed of Portland cement, fine aggregate, coarse aggregate, water and admixtures as specified and shall be produced by a plant acceptable to the Engineer. All constituents, including admixtures, shall be batched at the plant except a high -range water - reducer may also be added in the field. B. Measure materials for batching concrete by weighing in conformity with and within the tolerances given in ASTM C94 except as otherwise specified. Scales shall have been certified by the local Sealer of Weights and Measures within 1 year of use. C. Measure the amount of free water in fine aggregates within 0.3 percent with a moisture meter. Compensate for varying moisture contents of fine aggregates. Record the number of gallons of water as- batched on printed batching tickets. D. Admixtures shall be dispensed either manually using calibrated containers or measuring tanks, or by means of an automatic dispenser approved by the manufacturer of the specific admixture. 1. Charge air - entraining and chemical admixtures into the mixer as a solution using an automatic dispenser or similar metering device. 2. Inject multiple admixtures separately during the batching sequence. 3.02 MIXING AND TRANSPORTING • A. Batch plants shall have a current NRMCA Certification or equal. • B. Concrete shall be ready -mixed concrete produced by equipment acceptable to the Engineer. No hand - mixing will be permitted. Clean each transit mix truck drum and reverse drum rotation before the truck proceeds under the batching plant. Equip each transit -mix truck with a continuous, nonreversible, revolution counter showing the number of revolutions at mixing speeds. C. Ready -mix concrete shall be transported to the site in watertight agitator or mixer trucks loaded not in excess of their rated capacities as stated on the name plate. D. Keep the water tank valve on each transit truck locked at all times. Any addition of water above the appropriate W/C ratio must be directed by the Engineer. Added water shall be incorporated by additional mixing of at least 35 revolutions. All added water shall be metered and the amount of water added shall be shown on each delivery ticket. Allowable on -site water shall be on truck ticket or no water will be allowed on site. E. All central plant and rolling stock equipment and methods shall comply with ACI 318 and ASTM C94. F. Select equipment of size and design to ensure continuous flow of concrete at the delivery end. Metal or metal -lined non - aluminum discharge chutes shall be used and 03300 -9 050416 • • shall have slopes not exceeding 1 vertical to 2 horizontal and not less than 1 vertical to 3 horizontal. Chutes more than 20 -ft long and chutes not meeting slope requirements may be used if concrete is discharged into a hopper before distribution. G. Retempering (mixing with or without additional cement, aggregate, or water) of concrete or mortar which has reached initial set will not be permitted. H. Handle concrete from mixer to placement as quickly as practicable while providing concrete of required quality in the placement area. Dispatch trucks from the batching plant so they arrive at the work site just before the concrete is required, thus avoiding excessive mixing of concrete while waiting or delays in placing successive layers of concrete in the forms. I. Furnish a delivery ticket for ready mixed concrete to the Engineer as each truck arrives. Each ticket shall provide a printed record of the weight of cement and each aggregate as batched individually. Use the type of indicator that returns for zero punch or returns to zero after a batch is discharged. Clearly indicate the weight of fine and coarse aggregate, cement and water in each batch, the quantity delivered, the time any water is added, and the numerical sequence of the delivery. Show the time of day batched and time of discharge from the truck. Indicate the number of revolutions of the truck mixer. J. Temperature and Mixing Time Control 1. In cold weather, do not allow the as -mixed temperature of the concrete and concrete temperatures at the time of placement in the forms to drop below 40 degrees F. 2. If water or aggregate has been heated, combine water with aggregate in the mixer before cement is added. Do not add cement to mixtures of water and aggregate when the temperature of the mixture is greater than 90 degrees F. 3. In hot weather, cool ingredients before mixing to maintain temperature of the concrete below the maximum placing temperature of 90 degrees F. If necessary, substitute well- crushed ice for all or part of the mixing water. 4. The maximum time interval between the addition of mixing water and/or cement to the batch and the placing of concrete in the forms shall not exceed the values shown in Table 2. 03300 -10 050416 • • • TABLE 2 MAXIMUM TIME TO DISCHARGE OF CONCRETE Air or Concrete Temperature (whichever is higher) Maximum Time 80 to 90 Degree F (27 to 32 Degree C) 45 minutes 70 to 79 Degree F (21 to 26 Degree C) 60 minutes 40 to 69 Degree F (5 to 20 Degree C) 90 minutes If an approved high -range water - reducer (plasticizer) is used to produce plasticized concrete, the maximum time interval shall not exceed 90 minutes. 3.03 CONCRETE APPEARANCE A. Concrete mix showing either poor cohesion or poor coating of the coarse aggregate with paste shall be remixed. If this does not correct the condition, the concrete shall be rejected. If the slump is within the allowable limit, but excessive bleeding, poor workability, or poor finishability are observed, changes in the concrete mix shall be obtained only by adjusting one or more of the following: 1. The gradation of aggregate. 2. The proportion of fine and coarse aggregate. 3. The percentage of entrained air, within the allowable limits. B. Concrete for the work shall provide a homogeneous structure which, when hardened, will have the required strength, durability and appearance. Mixtures and workmanship shall be such that concrete surfaces, when exposed, will require no finishing. When concrete surfaces are stripped, the concrete, when viewed in good lighting from 10 -ft away, shall be pleasing in appearance, and at 20 -ft shall show no visible defects. 3.04 PLACING AND COMPACTING A. Placing 1. Verify that all formwork completely encloses concrete to be placed and is securely braced prior to concrete placement. Remove ice, excess water, dirt and other foreign materials from forms. Confirm that reinforcement and other embedded items are securely in place. Have a competent workman at the location of the placement who can assure that reinforcing steel and embedded items remain in designated locations while concrete is being placed. Sprinkle semi - porous subgrades or forms to eliminate suction of water from the mix. Seal extremely porous subgrades in an approved manner. 03300 -11 050416 • • 2. Deposit concrete as near its final position as possible to avoid segregation due to rehandling or flowing. Place concrete continuously at a rate which ensures the concrete is being integrated with fresh plastic concrete. Do not deposit concrete which has partially hardened or has been contaminated by foreign materials or on concrete which has hardened sufficiently to cause formation of seams or planes of weakness within the section. If the section cannot be placed continuously, place construction joints as specified or as approved. 3. Pumping of concrete will be permitted. Use a mix design and aggregate sizes suitable for pumping and submit for approval. 4. Remove temporary spreaders from forms when the spreader is no longer useful. Temporary spreaders may remain embedded in concrete only when made of galvanized metal or concrete and if prior approval has been obtained. 5. Do not place concrete for supported elements until concrete previously placed in the supporting element (columns, slabs and/or walls) has reached adequate strength. 6. Where surface mortar is to form the base of a finish, especially surfaces designated to be painted, work coarse aggregate back from forms with a suitable tool to bring the full surface of the mortar against the form. Prevent the formation of excessive surface voids. 7. Slabs a. After suitable bulkheads, screeds and jointing materials have been positioned, the concrete shall be placed continuously between construction joints beginning at a bulkhead, edge form, or corner. Each batch shall be placed into the edge of the previously placed concrete to avoid stone pockets and segregation. b. Avoid delays in casting. If there is a delay in casting, the concrete placed after the delay shall be thoroughly spaded and consolidated at the edge of that previously placed to avoid cold joints. Concrete shall then be brought to correct level and struck off with a straightedge. Bullfloats or darbies shall be used to smooth the surface, leaving it free of humps or hollows. c. Where slabs are to be placed integrally with the walls below them, place the walls and compact as specified. Allow 1 hour to pass between placement of the wall and the overlying slab to permit consolidation of the wall concrete. Keep the top surface of the wall moist so as to prevent cold joints. 8. Formed Concrete a. Place concrete in forms using tremie tubes and taking care to prevent segregation. Bottom of tremie tubes shall preferably be in contact with the concrete already placed. Do not permit concrete to drop freely 03300 -12 050416 • • • more than 4 -ft. Place concrete for walls in 12 to 24 -in lifts, keeping the surface horizontal. If plasticized concrete is used, the maximum lift thickness may be increased to 7 -ft and the maximum free fall of concrete shall not exceed 15 -ft. 9. Underwater concreting shall be performed in conformity with the recommendations of ACI 304R. The tremie system shall be used to place underwater concrete. Tremie pipes shall be in the range of 8 to 12 -in in diameter and be spaced at not more than 16 -ft on centers nor more than 8 -ft from an end form. Where concrete is being placed around a pipe, there shall be at least one tremie pipe on each side of each pipe. Where the tremie system is not practical, direct pumped concrete for underwater placement may be used subject to approval of the system including details by the Engineer. B. Compacting 1. Consolidate concrete by vibration, puddling, spading, rodding or forking so that concrete is thoroughly worked around reinforcement, embedded items and openings and into corners of forms. Puddling, spading, etc, shall be continuously performed along with vibration of the placement to eliminate air or stone pockets which may cause honeycombing, pitting or planes of weakness. 2. All concrete shall be placed and compacted with mechanical vibrators. The number, type and size of the units shall be approved by the Engineer in advance of placing operations. No concrete shall be ordered until sufficient approved vibrators (including standby units in working order) are on the job. 3. A minimum frequency of 7000 rpm is required for mechanical vibrators. Insert vibrators and withdraw at points from 18 to 30 -in apart. At each insertion, vibrate sufficiently to consolidate concrete, generally from 5 to 15 seconds. Do not over vibrate so as to segregate. Keep a spare vibrator on the site during concrete placing operations. 4. Concrete Slabs: Concrete for slabs less than 8 -in thick shall be consolidated with vibrating screeds; slabs 8 to 12 -in thick shall be compacted with internal vibrators and (optionally) with vibrating screeds. Vibrators shall always be placed into concrete vertically and shall not be laid horizontally or laid over. 5. Walls and Columns: Internal vibrators (rather than form vibrators) shall be used unless otherwise approved by the Engineer. In general, for each vibrator needed to melt down the batch at the point of discharge, one or more additional vibrators must be used to densify, homogenize and perfect the surface. The vibrators shall be inserted vertically at regular intervals, through the fresh concrete and slightly into the previous lift, if any. 6. Amount of Vibration: Vibrators are to be used to consolidate properly placed concrete but shall not be used to move or transport concrete in the forms. Vibration shall continue until: 03300 -13 050416 • • • a. Frequency returns to normal. b. Surface appears liquefied, flattened and glistening. c. Trapped air ceases to rise. d. Coarse aggregate has blended into surface, but has not disappeared. 3.05 CURING AND PROTECTION A. Protect all concrete work against injury from the elements and defacements of any nature during construction operations. B. Curing Methods 1. Curing Methods for Concrete Surfaces: Cure concrete to retain moisture and maintain specified temperature at the surface for a minimum of 7 days after placement. Curing methods to be used are as follows: a. Water Curing: Keep entire concrete surface wet by ponding, continuous sprinkling or covered with saturated burlap. Begin wet cure as soon as concrete attains an initial set and maintain wet cure 24 hours a day. b. Sheet Material Curing: Cover entire surface with sheet material. Securely anchor sheeting to prevent wind and air from lifting the sheeting or entrapping air under the sheet. Place and secure sheet as soon as initial concrete set occurs. c. Liquid Membrane Curing: Apply over the entire concrete surface except for surfaces to receive additional concrete. Curing compound shall NOT be placed on any concrete surface where additional concrete is to be placed, where concrete sealers or surface coatings are to be used, or where the concrete finish requires an integral floor product. Curing compound shall be applied as soon as the free water on the surface has disappeared and no water sheen is visible, but not after the concrete is dry or when the curing compound can be absorbed into the concrete. Application shall be in compliance with the manufacturer's recommendations. 2. Specified applications of curing methods. a. Slabs for Water Containment Structures: Water curing only. b. Slabs on Grade and Footings (not used to contain water): Water curing, sheet material curing or liquid membrane curing. c. Structural Slabs (other than water containment): Water curing or liquid membrane curing. 03300 -14 050416 • • • d. Horizontal Surfaces which will Receive Additional Concrete, Coatings, Grout or Other Material that Requires Bond to the substrate: Water curing. e. Formed Surfaces: None if nonabsorbent forms are left in place 7 days. Water cure if absorbent forms are used. Sheet cured or liquid membrane cured if forms are removed prior to 7 days. Exposed horizontal surfaces of formed walls or columns shall be water cured for 7 days or until next placement of concrete is made. f. Concrete Joints: Water cured or sheet material cured. C. Finished surfaces and slabs shall be protected from the direct rays of the sun to prevent checking and crazing. D. Cold Weather Concreting: 1. "Cold weather" is defined as a period when for more than 3 successive days, the average daily outdoor temperature drops below 40 degrees F. The average daily temperature shall be calculated as the average of the highest and the lowest temperature during the period from midnight to midnight. 2. Cold weather concreting shall conform to ACI 306.1 and the additional requirements specified herein. Temperatures at the concrete placement shall be recorded at 12 hour intervals (minimum). 3. Discuss a cold weather work plan with the Engineer. The discussion shall encompass the methods and procedures proposed for use during cold weather including the production, transportation, placement, protection, curing and temperature monitoring of the concrete. The procedures to be implemented upon abrupt changes in weather conditions or equipment failures shall also be discussed. Cold weather concreting shall not begin until the work plan is acceptable to the Engineer. 4. During periods of cold weather, concrete shall be protected to provide continuous warm, moist curing (with supplementary heat when required) for a total of at least 350 degree -days of curing. a. Degree -days are defined as the total number of 24 hour periods multiplied by the weighted average daily air temperature at the surface of the concrete (eg: 5 days at an average 70 degrees F = 350 degree- days). b. To calculate the weighted average daily air temperature, sum hourly measurements of the air temperature in the shade at the surface of the concrete taking any measurement less than 50 degrees F as 0 degrees F. Divide the sum thus calculated by 24 to obtain the weighted average temperature for that day. 5. Salt, manure or other chemicals shall not be used for protection. 03300 -15 050416 • • • 6. The protection period for concrete being water cured shall not be terminated during cold weather until at least 24 hours after water curing has been terminated. E. Hot Weather Concreting 1. "Hot weather" is defined as any combination of high air temperatures, low relative humidity and wind velocity which produces a rate of evaporation estimated in accordance with ACI 305R, approaching or exceeding 0.2 lbs /sgft/hr). 2. Concrete placed during hot weather, shall be batched, delivered, placed, cured and protected in compliance with the recommendations of ACI 305R and the additional requirements specified herein. a. Temperature of concrete being placed shall not exceed 90 degrees F and every effort shall be made to maintain a uniform concrete mix temperature below this level. The temperature of the concrete shall be such that it will cause no difficulties from loss of slump, flash set or cold joints. b. All necessary precautions shall be taken to promptly deliver, to promptly place the concrete upon its arrival at the job and to provide vibration immediately after placement. c. The Engineer may direct the Contractor to immediately cover plastic concrete with sheet material. 3. Discuss with the Engineer a work plan describing the methods and procedures proposed to use for concrete placement and curing during hot weather periods. Hot weather concreting shall not begin until the work plan is acceptable to the Engineer. 3.06 REMOVAL OF FORMS A. Except as otherwise specifically authorized by the Engineer, forms shall not be removed before the concrete has attained a strength of at least 30 percent of its specified design strength, nor before reaching the following number of day- degrees of curing (whichever is the longer): TABLE 3 MINIMUM TIME TO FORM REMOVAL Forms for Degree Days Beams and slabs 500 Walls and vertical surfaces 100 (See definition of degree -days in Paragraph 3.05D above). 03300 -16 050416 • • • B. Shores shall not be removed until the concrete has attained at least 70 percent of its specified design strength and also sufficient strength to support safely its own weight and construction live loads. 3.07 INSPECTION AND FIELD TESTING A. The batching, mixing, transporting, placing and curing of concrete shall be subject to the inspection of the Engineer at all times. The Contractor shall advise the Engineer of his/her readiness to proceed at least 24 hours prior to each concrete placement. The Engineer will inspect the preparations for concreting including the preparation of previously placed concrete, the reinforcing steel and the alignment, cleanliness and tightness of formwork. No placement shall be made without the inspection and acceptance of the Engineer. B. Sets of field control cylinder specimens will be taken by the Engineer (or inspector) during the progress of the work, in compliance with ASTM C31. The number of sets of concrete test cylinders taken of each class of concrete placed each day shall not be less than one set per day, nor less than one set for each 150 cu yds of concrete nor less than one set for each 5,000 sq ft of surface area for slabs or walls. 1. A "set" of test cylinders consists of four cylinders: one to be tested at 7 days and two to be tested and their strengths averaged at 28 days. The fourth may be used for a special test at 3 days or to verify strength after 28 days if 28 day test results are low. 2. When the average 28 day compressive strength of the cylinders in any set falls below the specified design strength or below proportional minimum 7 day strengths (where proper relation between seven and 28 day strengths have been established by tests), proportions, water content, or temperature conditions shall be changed to achieve the required strengths. C. Cooperate in the making of tests by allowing free access to the work for the selection of samples, providing an insulated closed curing box for specimens, affording protection to the specimens against injury or loss through the operations and furnish material and labor required for the purpose of taking concrete cylinder samples. All shipping of specimens will be paid for by the Owner. Curing boxes shall be acceptable to the Engineer. D. Slump tests will be made in the field immediately prior to placing the concrete. Such tests shall be made in accordance with ASTM C143. If the slump is greater the specified range, the concrete shall be rejected. E. Air Content: Test for air content shall be made on fresh concrete samples. Air content for concrete made of ordinary aggregates having low absorption shall be made in compliance with either the pressure method complying with ASTM C231 or by the volumetric method complying with ASTM C173. F. The Engineer may have cores taken from any questionable area in the concrete work such as construction joints and other locations as required for determination of 03300 -17 050416 concrete quality. The results of tests on such cores shall be the basis for acceptance, rejection or determining the continuation of concrete work. 41 G. Cooperate in obtaining cores by allowing free access to the work and permitting the use of ladders, scaffolding and such incidental equipment as may be required. Repair all core holes. The work of cutting and testing the cores will be at the expense of the Owner. • • 3.08 FAILURE TO MEET REQUIREMENTS A. Should the strengths shown by the test specimens made and tested in compliance with the previous provisions fall below the values given in Table 1, the Engineer shall have the right to require changes in proportions outlined to apply to the remainder of the work. Furthermore, the Engineer shall have the right to require additional curing on those portions of the structure represented by the test specimens which failed. The cost of such additional curing shall be at the Contractor's expense. In the event that such additional curing does not give the strength required, as evidenced by core and/or load tests, the Engineer shall have the right to require strengthening or replacement of those portions of the structure which fail to develop the required strength. The cost of all such core borings and/or load tests and any strengthening or concrete replacement required because strengths of test specimens are below that specified, shall be entirely at the expense of the Contractor. In such cases of failure to meet strength requirements the Contractor and Engineer shall confer to determine what adjustment, if any, can be made in compliance with Sections titled "Strength" and "Failure to Meet Strength Requirements" of ASTM C94. The "purchaser" referred to in ASTM C94 is the Contractor in this Section. B. When the tests on control specimens of concrete fall below the specified strength, the Engineer will permit check tests for strengths to be made by means of typical cores drilled from the structure in compliance with ASTM C42 and C39. In the case of cores not indicating adequate strength, the Engineer, in addition to other recourses, may require, at the Contractor's expense, load tests on any one of the slabs, beams, piles, caps, and columns in which such concrete was used. Tests need not be made until concrete has aged 60 days. C. Should the strength of test cylinders fall below 60 percent of the required minimum 28 day strength, the concrete shall be rejected and shall be removed and replaced. 3.09 PATCHING AND REPAIRS A. It is the intent of this Section to require quality work including adequate forming, proper mixture and placement of concrete and curing so completed concrete surfaces will require no patching. B. Defective concrete and honeycombed areas as determined by the Engineer shall be repaired as specified by the Engineer. C. As soon as the forms have been stripped and the concrete surfaces exposed, fins and other projections shall be removed; recesses left by the removal of form ties shall be filled; and surface defects which do not impair structural strength shall be repaired. 03300 -18 050416 • • • Clean all exposed concrete surfaces and adjoining work stained by leakage of concrete, to approval of the Engineer. D. Immediately after removal of forms remove plugs and break off metal ties as required by Section 03100. Promptly fill holes upon stripping as follows: Moisten the hole with water, followed by a 1 /16 -in brush coat of neat cement slurry mixed to the consistency of a heavy paste. Immediately plug the hole with a 1 to 1.5 mixture of cement and concrete sand mixed slightly damp to the touch (just short of "balling "). Hammer the grout into the hole until dense, and an excess of paste appears on the surface in the form of a spiderweb. Trowel smooth with heavy pressure. Avoid burnishing. E. When patching exposed surfaces the same source of cement and sand as used in the parent concrete shall be employed. Adjust color if necessary by addition of proper amounts of white cement. Rub lightly with a fine Carborundum stone at an age of 1 to 5 days if necessary to bring the surface down with the parent concrete. Exercise care to avoid damaging or staining the virgin skin of the surrounding parent concrete. Wash thoroughly to remove all rubbed matter. 3.10 SCHEDULE A. The following (Table 4) are the general applications for the various concrete classes and design strengths: TABLE 4 CONCRETE SCHEDULE Design Strength Class (psi) Description A 2,500 Concrete fill and duct encasement B 3,000 Concrete overlay slabs and pavements C 4,000 Walls, slabs on grade, suspended slab and beam systems, columns, grade beams and all other structural concrete D 5,000 Prestressed concrete END OF SECTION 03300 -19 050416 • • SECTION 03600 GROUT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals required and install grout complete as shown on the Drawings and as specified herein. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Cast -in -Place Concrete is included in Section 03300. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit to the Engineer, in accordance with Section 01340, shop drawings and product data showing materials of construction and details of installation for: 1. Commercially manufactured nonshrink cementitous grout. The submittal shall include catalog cuts, technical data, storage requirements, product life, working time after mixing, temperature considerations, conformity to required ASTM standards and Material Safety Data Sheet. 2. Commercially manufactured nonshrink epoxy grout. The submittal shall include catalog cuts, technical data, storage requirements, product life, working time after mixing, temperature considerations, conformity to required ASTM standards and Material Safety Data Sheet. 3. Cement grout. The submittal shall include the type and brand of the cement, the gradation of the fine aggregate, product data on any proposed admixtures and the proposed mix of the grout. 4. Concrete grout. The submittal shall include data as required for concrete as delineated in Section 03300. This includes the mix design, constituent quantities per cubic yard and the water /cement ratio. B. Laboratory Test Reports 1. Submit laboratory test data as required under Section 03300 for concrete to be used as concrete grout. C. Certifications 1. Certify that commercially manufactured grout products and concrete grout admixtures are suitable for use in contact with potable water after 30 days curing. 03600 -1 050416 • • • D. Qualifications 1. Grout manufacturers shall submit documentation that they have at least 10 years experience in the production and use of the proposed grouts which they will supply. 1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) 1. ASTM C531 - Standard Test Method for Linear Shrinkage and Coefficient of Thermal Expansion of Chemical Resistant Mortars, Grouts and Monolithic Surfacings and Polymer Concretes 2. ASTM C579 - Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Chemical Resistant Mortars, Grouts and Monolithic Surfacings and Polymer Concretes 3. ASTM C827 - Standard Test Method for Change in Height at Early Ages of Cylindrical Specimens from Cementitious Mixtures 4. ASTM C1107 - Standard Specification for Packaged Dry, Hydraulic- Cement Grout (Nonshrink) B. U.S. Army Corps of Engineers Standard (CRD) 1. CRD C -621 - Corps of Engineers Specification for Nonshrink Grout C. Where reference is made to one of the above standards, the revision in effect at the time of bid opening shall apply. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications 1. Grout manufacturer shall have a minimum of 10 years experience in the production and use of the type of grout proposed for the work. B. Pre - installation Conference 1. Well in advance of grouting, hold a pre- installation meeting to review the requirements for surface preparation, mixing, placing and curing procedures for each product proposed for use. Parties concerned with grouting shall be notified of the meeting at least 10 days prior to its scheduled date. 03600 -2 050416 • • • C. Services of Manufacturer's Representative 1. A qualified field technician of the nonshrink grout manufacturer, specifically trained in the installation of the products, shall attend the pre - installation conference and shall be present for the initial installation of each type of nonshrink grout. Additional services shall also be provided, as required, to correct installation problems. D. Field Testing 1. All field testing and inspection services required shall be provided by the Owner. The Contractor shall assist in the sampling of materials and shall provide any ladders, platforms, etc, for access to the work. The methods of testing shall comply in detail with the applicable ASTM Standards. 2. The field testing of Concrete Grout shall be as specified for concrete in Section 03300. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials to the jobsite in original, unopened packages, clearly labeled with the manufacturer's name, product identification, batch numbers and printed instructions. B. Store materials in full compliance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Total storage time from date of manufacture to date of installation shall be limited to 6 months or the manufacturer's recommended storage time, whichever is less. C. Material which becomes damp or otherwise unacceptable shall be immediately removed from the site and replaced with acceptable material at no additional expense to the Owner. D. Nonshrink cement -based grouts shall be delivered as preblended, prepackaged mixes requiring only the addition of water. E. Nonshrink epoxy grouts shall be delivered as premeasured, prepackaged, three component systems requiring only blending as directed by the manufacturer. 1.07 DEFINITIONS A. Nonshrink Grout: A commercially manufactured product that does not shrink in either the plastic or hardened state, is dimensionally stable in the hardened state and bonds to a clean base plate. 03600 -3 050416 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL • A. The use of a manufacturer's name and product or catalog number is for the purpose of establishing the standard of quality desired. B. Like materials shall be the products of one manufacturer or supplier in order to provide standardization of appearance. • • 2.02 MATERIALS A. Nonshrink Cementitious Grout 1. Nonshrink cementitious grouts shall meet or exceed the requirements of ASTM C1107, Grades B or C and CRD C -621. Grouts shall be Portland cement based, contain a pre - proportioned blend of selected aggregates and shrinkage compensating agents and shall require only the addition of water. Nonshrink cementitious grouts shall not contain expansive cement or metallic particles. The grouts shall exhibit no shrinkage when tested in conformity with ASTM C827. a. General purpose nonshrink cementitious grout shall conform to the standards stated above and shall be SikaGrout 212 by Sika Corp.; Set Grout by Master Builders, Inc.; Gilco Construction Grout by Gifford Hill & Co.; Euco NS by The Euclid Chemical Co.; NBEC Grout by U. S. Grout Corp. or equal. b. Flowable (Precision) nonshrink cementitious grout shall conform to the standards stated above and shall be Masterflow 928 by Master Builders, Inc.; Hi -Flow Grout by the Euclid Chemical Co.; SikaGrout 212 by Sika Corp.; Supreme Grout by Gifford Hill & Co.; Five Star Grout by U. S. Grout Corp. or equal. B. Nonshrink Epoxy Grout 1. Nonshrink epoxy -based grout shall be a pre - proportioned, three component, 100 percent solids system consisting of epoxy resin, hardener, and blended aggregate. It shall have a compressive strength of 14,000 psi in 7 days when tested in conformity with ASTM D695 and have a maximum thermal expansion of 30 x 10 -6 when tested in conformity with ASTM C531. The grout shall be Ceilcote 648 CP by Master Builders Inc.; Five Star Epoxy Grout by U.S. Grout Corp.; Sikadur 42 Grout -Pak by Sika Corp.; High Strength Epoxy Grout by the Euclid Chemical Co. or equal. 03600 -4 050416 • • • C. Cement Grout 1. Cement grouts shall be a mixture of one part Portland cement conforming to ASTM C150, Types I, II, or III and 1 to 2 parts sand conforming to ASTM C33 with sufficient water to place the grout. The water content shall be sufficient to impart workability to the grout but not to the degree that it will allow the grout to flow. D. Concrete Grout 1. Concrete grout shall conform to the requirements of Section 03300 except as specified herein. It shall be proportioned with cement, coarse and fine aggregates, water, water reducer and air entraining agent to produce a mix having an average strength of 2900 psi at 28 days, or 2500 psi nominal strength. Coarse aggregate size shall be 1 /2 -in maximum. Slump should not exceed 5 -in and should be as low as practical yet still retain sufficient workability. E. Water 1. Potable water, free from injurious amounts of oil, acid, alkali, organic matter, or other deleterious substances. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Grout shall be placed over cured concrete which has attained its full design strength unless otherwise approved by the Engineer. B. Concrete surfaces to receive grout shall be clean and sound; free of ice, frost, dirt, grease, oil, curing compounds, laitance and paints and free of all loose material or foreign matter which may effect the bond or performance of the grout. C. Roughen concrete surfaces by chipping, sandblasting, or other mechanical means to ensure bond of the grout to the concrete. Remove loose or broken concrete. Irregular voids or projecting coarse aggregate need not be removed if they are sound, free of laitance and firmly embedded into the parent concrete. 1. Air compressors used to clean surfaces in contact with grout shall be the oilless type or equipped with an oil trap in the air line to prevent oil from being blown onto the surface. D. Remove all loose rust, oil or other deleterious substances from metal embedments or bottom of baseplates prior to the installation of the grout. 03600 -5 050416 • • • E. Concrete surfaces shall be washed clean and then kept moist for at least 24 hours prior to the placement of cementitious or cement grout. Saturation may be achieved by covering the concrete with saturated burlap bags, use of a soaker hose, flooding the surface, or other method acceptable to the Engineer. Upon completion of the 24 hour period, visible water shall be removed from the surface prior to grouting. The use of an adhesive bonding agent in lieu of surface saturation shall only be used when approved by the Engineer for each specific location of grout installation. F. Epoxy -based grouts do not require the saturation of the concrete substrate. Surfaces in contact with epoxy grout shall be completely dry before grouting. G. Construct grout forms or other leakproof containment as required. Forms shall be lined or coated with release agents recommended by the grout manufacturer. Forms shall be of adequate strength, securely anchored in place and shored to resist the forces imposed by the grout and its placement. 1. Forms for epoxy grout shall be designed to allow the formation of a hydraulic head and shall have chamfer strips built into forms. H. Level and align the structural or equipment bearing plates in accordance with the structural requirements and the recommendations of the equipment manufacturer. I. Equipment shall be supported during alignment and installation of grout by shims, wedges, blocks or other approved means. The shims, wedges and blocking devices shall be prevented from bonding to the grout by appropriate bond breaking coatings and removed after grouting unless otherwise approved by the Engineer. 3.02 INSTALLATION — GENERAL A. Mix, apply and cure products in strict compliance with the manufacturer's recommendations and this Section. B. Have sufficient manpower and equipment available for rapid and continuous mixing and placing. Keep all necessary tools and materials ready and close at hand. C. Maintain temperatures of the foundation plate, supporting concrete, and grout between 40 and 90 degrees F during grouting and for at least 24 hours thereafter or as recommended by the grout manufacturer, whichever is longer. Take precautions to minimize differential heating or cooling of baseplates and grout during the curing period. D. Take special precautions for hot weather or cold weather grouting as recommended by the manufacturer when ambient temperatures and/or the temperature of the materials in contact with the grout are outside of the 60 and 90 degrees F range. E. Install grout in a manner which will preserve the isolation between the elements on either side of the joint where grout is placed in the vicinity of an expansion or control joint. F. Reflect all existing underlying expansion, control and construction joints through the grout. 03600 -6 050416 3.03 INSTALLATION - CEMENT GROUTS AND NONSHRINK CEMENTITIOUS GROUTS A. Mix in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Do not add cement, sand, pea gravel or admixtures without prior approval by the Engineer. B. Avoid mixing by hand. Mixing in a mortar mixer (with moving blades) is recommended. Pre -wet the mixer and empty excess water. Add premeasured amount of water for mixing, followed by the grout. Begin with the minimum amount of water recommended by the manufacturer and then add the minimum additional water required to obtain workability. Do not exceed the manufacturer's maximum recommended water content. C. Placements greater than 3 -in in depth shall include the addition of clean, washed pea gravel to the grout mix when approved by the manufacturer. Comply with the manufacturer's recommendations for the size and amount of aggregate to be added. D. Place grout into the designated areas in a manner which will avoid segregation or entrapment of air. Do not vibrate grout to release air or to consolidate the material. Placement should proceed in a manner which will ensure the filling of all spaces and provide full contact between the grout and adjoining surfaces. Provide grout holes as necessary. E. Place grout rapidly and continuously to avoid cold joints. Do not place cement grouts in layers. Do not add additional water to the mix (retemper) after initial stiffening. F. Just before the grout reaches its final set, cut back the grout to the substrate at a 45 degree angle from the lower edge of bearing plate unless otherwise approved by the Engineer. Finish this surface with a wood float (brush) finish. G. Begin curing immediately after form removal, cutback, and finishing. Keep grout moist and within its recommended placement temperature range for at least 24 hours after placement or longer if recommended by the manufacturer. Saturate the grout surface by use of wet burlap, soaker hoses, ponding or other approved means. Provide sunshades as necessary. If drying winds inhibit the ability of a given curing method to keep grout moist, erect wind breaks until wind is no longer a problem or curing is finished. 3.04 INSTALLATION - NONSHRINK EPDXY GROUTS A. Mix in accordance with the procedures recommended by the manufacturer. Do not vary the ratio of components or add solvent to change the consistency of the grout mix. Do not overmix. Mix full batches only to maintain proper proportions of resin, hardener and aggregate. B. Monitor ambient weather conditions and contact the grout manufacturer for special placement procedures to be used for temperatures below 60 or above 90 degrees F. C. Place grout into the designated areas in a manner which will avoid trapping air. Placement methods shall ensure the filling of all spaces and provide full contact between the grout and adjoining surfaces. Provide grout holes as necessary. 03600 -7 050416 • • • D. Minimize "shoulder" length (extension of grout horizontally beyond base plate). In no case shall the shoulder length of the grout be greater than the grout thickness. E. Finish grout by puddling to cover all aggregate and provide a smooth finish. Break bubbles and smooth the top surface of the grout in conformity with the manufacturer's recommendations. F. Epoxy grouts are self curing and do not require the application of water. Maintain the formed grout within its recommended placement temperature range for at least 24 hours after placing, or longer if recommended by the manufacturer. 3.05 INSTALLATION - CONCRETE GROUT A. Screed underlying concrete to the grade shown on the Drawings. Provide the surface with a broomed finish, aligned to drain. Protect and keep the surface clean until placement of concrete grout. B. Remove the debris and clean the surface by sweeping and vacuuming of all dirt and other foreign materials. Wash the tank slab using a strong jet of water. Flushing of debris into tank drain lines will not be permitted. C. Saturate the concrete surface for at least 24 hours prior to placement of the concrete grout. Saturation may be maintained by ponding, by the use or soaker hoses, or by other methods acceptable to the Engineer. Remove excess water just prior to placement of the concrete grout. Place a cement slurry immediately ahead of the concrete grout so that the slurry is moist when the grout is placed. Work the slurry over the surface with a broom until it is coated with approximately 1/16 to 1 /8 -in thick cement paste. (A bonding grout composed of 1 part Portland cement, 1.5 parts fine sand, an approved bonding admixture and water, mixed to achieve the consistency of thick paint, may be substituted for the cement slurry.) D. Place concrete grout to final grade using the scraper mechanism as a guide for surface elevation and to ensure high and low spots are eliminated. Unless specifically approved by the equipment manufacturer, mechanical scraper mechanisms shall not be used as a finishing machine or screed. E. Provide grout control joints as indicated on the Drawings. F. Finish and cure the concrete grout as specified for cast -in -place concrete. 03600 -8 050416 • • • 3.06 SCHEDULE A. The following list indicates where the particular types of grout are to be used: B. General purpose nonshrink cementitious grout: Use at all locations where non shrink grout is called for on the plans except for base plates greater in area than 3 -ft wide by 3 -ft long and except for the setting of anchor rods, anchor bolts or reinforcing steel in concrete. C. Flowable nonshrink cementitious grout: Use under all base plates greater in area than 3 -ft by 3 -ft. Use at all locations indicated to receive flowable nonshrink grout by the Drawings. The Contractor, at his/her option and convenience, may also substitute flowable nonshrink grout for general purpose nonshrink cementitious grout... D. Nonshrink epoxy grout: Use for the setting of anchor rods, anchor bolts and reinforcing steel in concrete and for all locations specifically indicated to receive epoxy grout. E. Cement grout: Cement grout may be used for grouting of incidental base plates for structural and miscellaneous steel such as post base plates for platforms, base plates for beams, etc. It shall not be used when nonshrink grout is specifically called for on the Drawings or for grouting of primary structural steel members such as columns and girders. F. Concrete grout: Use for overlaying the base concrete under scraper mechanisms of clarifiers to allow more control in placing the surface grade. END OF SECTION 03600 -9 050416 DIVISION 4 NOT USED DIVISION 5 METALS • SECTION 05510 MISCELLANEOUS METAL PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals required and install all miscellaneous metal complete as shown on the Drawings and as specified herein. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. See Contract Drawing. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit to the Engineer, in accordance with Section 01340, shop drawings and product data showing materials of construction and details of installation for: 1. Shop drawings, showing sizes of members, method of assembly, anchorage and connection to other members. • 2. Where adhesive anchors are used load tables shall be submitted showing minimum embedment lengths. B. Samples 1. Submit samples as requested by the Engineer during the course of construction. C. Design Data 1. The structural design of the frame shall be the Contractor's responsibility as a delegated design and shall be signed and sealed by a Professional Engineer licensed in the State of Florida, to verify the proposed structure can support existing loads at current support locations and meets all applicable Florida Building Codes. D. Test Reports 1. Certified copy of mill test reports on each aluminum proposed for use showing the physical properties and chemical analysis. E. Certificates • 05510 -1 083116 • 1. Submit certification that the railing system is in compliance with OSHA requirements and the 2007 Florida Building Code. 2. Certify that welders have been qualified under AWS, within the previous 12 months, to perform the welds required under this Section. 1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. Aluminum Association (AA) 1. AA M31 C22A41 a. M31: Mechanical Finish, Fine Satin b. C22: Finish, Medium Matte c. A41: Clear Anodic Coating, Class I B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) 1. ASTM A36 - Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel. 2. ASTM A48 - Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings. • 3. ASTM A53 - Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot - Dipped, Zinc- Coated, Welded and Seamless. • 4. ASTM A108 - Standard Specification for Steel Bars, Carbon, Cold Finished, Standard Quality. 5. ASTM A123 - Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot -Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products. 6. ASTM A153 - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot -Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware. 7. ASTM A167 - Standard Specification for Stainless and Heat - Resisting Chromium - Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet and Strip. 8. ASTM A276 - Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Bars and Shapes. 9. ASTM A307 - Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60,000 Psi Tensile Strength. 10. ASTM A325 - Standard Specification for Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated, 120/105 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength. 05510 -2 083116 Ill 11. ASTM A366 - Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet, Carbon, Commercial Quality. • • 12. ASTM A500 - Standard Specification for Cold - Formed Welded Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes. 13. ASTM A501 - Standard Specification for Hot - Formed Welded Carbon Steel Structural Tubing. 14. ASTM A536 - Standard Specification for Ductile Iron Castings. 15. ASTM A570 - Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet and Strip, Carbon, Hot - Rolled, Structural Quality. 16. ASTM B209 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum -Alloy Sheet and Plate. 17. ASTM B221 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum -Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles and Tubes. Cold - Rolled, and Seamless and Seamless 18. ASTM B429 - Standard Specification for Aluminum -Alloy Extruded Structural Pipe and Tube. C. American Iron and Steel Institute (AISI). 1. Specification for Structural Steel Buildings. D. American Welding Society (AWS) 1. AWS D1.1 - Structural Welding Code Steel. 2. AWS D1.2 - Structural Welding Code Aluminum. E. Federal Specifications 1. FS- FF- B -575C - Bolts, Hexagonal and Square F. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) G. 2007 Florida Building Code. (FBC) H. Where reference is made to one of the above standards, the revision in effect at the time of bid opening shall apply. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE 05510 -3 083116 • • • A. The work of this Section shall be completely coordinated with the work of other Sections. Verify, at the site, both the dimensions and work of other trades adjoining items of work in this Section before fabrication and installation of items herein specified. B. Furnish to the pertinent trades all items included under this Section that are to be built into the work of other Sections. C. All welding shall be performed by qualified welders and shall conform to the applicable AWS welding code. Welding of steel shall conform to AWS D1.1 and welding of aluminum shall conform to AWS D1.2. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver items to be incorporated into the work of other trades in sufficient time to be checked prior to installation. B. Repair items which have become damage or corroded to the satisfaction of the Engineer prior to incorporating them into the work. 1.07 PROJECT /SITE REQUIREMENTS A. Field measurements shall be taken at the site, prior to fabrication of items, to verify or supplement indicated dimensions and to ensure proper fitting of all items. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. The use of manufacturer's name and model or catalog number is for the purpose of establishing the standard of quality and general configuration desired. B. Like items of materials shall be the end products of one manufacturer in order to provide standardization for appearance, maintenance and manufacturer's service. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Unless otherwise noted, materials for miscellaneous metals shall conform to the following standards: 1. Structural Steel ASTM A36 2. Structural Steel Tubing ASTM A500, Grade B 05510 -4 083116 • 3. Welded and Seamless Steel Pipe 4. Steel Sheets 5. Gray Iron Castings 6. Ductile Iron Castings 7. Aluminum Extruded Pipe 8. Aluminum Extruded Shapes 9. Aluminum Sheet and Plate ASTM A501 or ASTM A53, Type E or S, Grade B Schedule 40. Use standard malleable iron fittings, galvanized for exterior work ASTM A366 ASTM A48, Class 35 ASTM A536, Grade 65 -45 -12 ASTM B429, Alloy 6063 T6 ASTM B221, Alloy 6061 T6 ASTM B209, Alloy 6061 T6 10. Stainless Steel Plates, Sheets, and Structural Shapes a. Exterior, Submerged or Industrial Use b. Interior and Architectural Use 11. Stainless Steel Bolts, Nuts, and Washers 12. Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs 13. High Strength Steel Bolts, Nuts and washers a. Elevated Temperature Exposure b. General Application 14. Galvanizing ASTM A167, Type 316 (Type 316L for welded) ASTM A167, Type 304 ASTM A276, Type 316 ASTM A307, Grade A (hot dip galvanized nuts and washers where noted) ASTM A325 (mechanically galvanized per ASTM B695, Class 50, where noted) Type I Type I or Type II ASTM A123, Zn w/0.5 percent minimum Ni 15. Galvanizing, hardware ASTM A153, Zn w/0.5 percent minimum Ni 05510 -5 083116 • • 2.03 ANCHORS, BOLTS AND FASTENING DEVICES A. Anchor bolt material shall be ASTM 276, Type 316, unless otherwise noted. B. Unless otherwise noted, bolts for the connection of carbon steel or iron shall be steel machine bolts; bolts for the connection of galvanized steel or iron shall be stainless steel machine bolts; and bolts for the connection of aluminum or stainless steel shall be stainless steel machine bolts. C. Unless otherwise noted, expansion anchors shall be type 316 stainless steel. When the length or embedment of the bolt is not noted on the Drawings, provide length sufficient to place the expansion sleeve portion of the bolt at least 1 -in behind the concrete reinforcing steel. Expansion anchors shall be Hilti, Kwik -bolt III; ITW Ramset; Redhead trubolt, or engineer approved equal. D. Compound masonry expansion anchors shall be lead expansion sleeve type anchors complete with nuts and washers. Anchors shall be precision die -cast zinc alloy with a minimum of two lead alloy expansion sleeves. When the length or embedment of the bolt is not noted on the Drawings, provide length sufficient to place the wedge and expansion sleeve portion of the bolt at least 1 -in behind the concrete reinforcing steel. Expansion anchors shall be Star Expansion Industries, Star Slugin or equal. E. Adhesive capsule anchors shall be a two -part stud and capsule chemical resin anchoring system. Capsules shall contain premeasured amounts of polyester or vinyl ester resin, aggregate and a hardener contained in a separate vial within the capsule. Stud assemblies shall consist of an all - thread anchor rod with nut and washer. Adhesive capsule anchors shall be Hilti, HVA Adhesive Anchor; Molly, Parabond; Rawlplug, Rawl Chem -Stud or equal. F. Adhesive anchors, for fastening to hollow concrete block or brick, shall be a three -part stud, screen and chemical dispenser anchoring system. Adhesive cartridges shall contain premeasured amounts of resin and hardener which are mixed and deposited in a screen tube by a dispenser. Stud assemblies shall consist of an all- thread anchor rod with nut and washer. Anchors shall be Hilti, HIT C -20 System or equal. G. Automatic end welded headed anchor studs shall be flux ended studs made from cold drawn steel, ASTM A108 Grades C -1010 through C -1020. Headed anchor studs shall be Nelson, H4L Headed Concrete Anchors or equal. H. Machine bolts and nuts shall conform to Federal Specification FF- B -575C. Bolts and nuts shall be hexagon type. Bolts, nuts, screws, washers and related appurtenances shall be Type 316 stainless steel. I. Toggle bolts shall be Hilti, Toggler Bolt or equal. 05510 -6 083116 • • • 2.04 MISCELLANEOUS STAINLESS STEEL A. All miscellaneous metal work shall be formed true to detail, with clean, straight, sharply defined profiles and smooth surfaces of uniform color and texture and free from defects impairing strength or durability. Holes shall be drilled or punched. Edges shall be smooth and without burrs. Fabricate supplementary pieces necessary to complete each item though such pieces are not definitely shown or specified. B. Connections and accessories shall be of sufficient strength to safely withstand the stresses and strains to which they will be subjected. Exposed joints shall be close fitting and jointed where least conspicuous. Threaded connections shall have the threads concealed where practical. Welded connections shall have continuous welds or intermittent welds as specified or shown. The face of welds shall be dressed flush and smooth. Grind smooth continuous welds that will be exposed. Provide holes for temporary field connections and for attachment of the work of other trades. C. All stainless steel structural shall be pickled and passivated by full immersion following fabrication to provide a bright, uniform finish. No field welding will be permitted. Structural frames shall be designed to allow assembly in the field utilizing machine bolt fasteners and connectors. Any visible rust or staining on stainless steel materials will be considered cause for removal and replacement with new materials that meet the finish requirements described above. D. Miscellaneous stainless steel items shall include: beams, angles, bar racks and any other miscellaneous stainless steel called for on the Drawings, described within, and not otherwise specified. E. Contractor shall replace existing painted carbon steel supports for each media filter with and identical structure composed entirely of 316 SST materials. F. The structural design of the frame shall be the Contractor's responsibility as a delegated design and shall be signed and sealed by a Professional Engineer licensed in the State of Florida, to verify the proposed structure can support existing loads at current support locations and meets all applicable Florida Building Codes. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install all items except those to be embedded in concrete or other masonry which shall be installed under Division 3 and Division 4 respectively. Items to be attached to concrete or masonry after such work is completed shall be installed in accordance with the details shown. Fastening to wood plugs in masonry will not be permitted. 05510 -7 083116 • • • B. Abrasions in the shop primer shall be touched up immediately after erection. Areas left unprimed for welding shall be painted with primer after welding. C. Zinc coating which has been burned by welding, abraded, or otherwise damaged shall be cleaned and repaired after installation. The damage area shall be thoroughly cleaned by wire brushing and all traces of welding flux and loose or cracked zinc coating removed prior to painting. The cleaned area shall be painted with two coats of zinc oxide -zinc dust paint conforming to the requirements of Military Specifications MIL -P- 15145. The paint shall be properly compounded with a suitable vehicle in the ratio of one part zinc oxide to four parts zinc dust by weight. D. Specialty products shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. E. Expansion bolts shall be checked for tightness a minimum of 24 hours after initial installation. F. Install adhesive capsule anchors using manufacture's recommended drive units and adapters and in compliance with the manufacturer's recommendations. G. Headed anchor studs shall be welded in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. H. All railings shall be erected to line and plumb. I. All steel surfaces that come into contact with exposed concrete or masonry shall receive a protective coating of an approved heavy bitumastic troweling mastic applied in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions prior to installation. J. Where aluminum contacts a dissimilar metal, apply a heavy brush coat of zinc - chromate primer followed by two coats of aluminum metal and masonry paint to the dissimilar metal. K. Where aluminum contacts masonry or concrete, apply a heavy coat of approved alkali resistant paint to the masonry or concrete. L. Where aluminum contacts wood, apply two coats of aluminum metal and masonry paint to the wood. M. Between aluminum grating, aluminum stair treads, or aluminum handrail brackets and steel supports, insert 1 /4 -in thick neoprene isolator pads, 85 plus or minus 5 Shore A durometer, sized for full width and length of bracket or support. END OF SECTION 05510 -8 083116 DIVISIONS 6 -8 NOT USED DIVISION 9 FINISHES SECTION 09905 • PIPING, VALVE, AND EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION SYSTEM • • PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Scope of Work: The work included under this Section consists of providing an identification system for piping systems and related equipment. B. Related Work Described Elsewhere: 1. Shop Drawings, Working Drawings, and Samples: Section 01340. 2. Equipment: Division 11 3. Mechanical: Division 15. 4. Electrical: Division 16. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Standards: ANSI Standard A13.1, Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit manufacturer's descriptive literature, illustrations, specifications, and other pertinent data in accordance with Section 01340. B. Schedules: 1. Provide a typewritten list of all tagged valves giving tag color, shape, letter code and number, the valve size, type, use, and general location. 2. Provide a complete list of materials to be furnished and surfaces on which they will be used. 09905 -1 083016 C. Samples: 411 1. Provide a sample of each type valve of tag supplied. 2. Provide a sample of each type of identification tape supplied. 3. Provide manufacturer's color charts for color selection by Engineer. 1.04 PRODUCTS DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Delivery of Materials: Except for locally mixed custom colors, deliver sealed containers with labels legible and intact. B. Storage of Materials: 1. Store only acceptable project materials on project site. 2. Store in suitable location. 3. Restrict storage to paint materials and related equipment. 4. Comply with health and fire regulations. 1.05 JOB CONDITIONS • A. Environmental Requirements: • 1. Comply with manufacturer's recommendations as to environmental conditions under which coatings and coating systems can be applied. 2. Do not apply finish in areas where dust is being generated. B. Protection: Cover or otherwise protect finished work of other trades and surfaces not to be painted. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Aboveground piping shall be identified by self - adhesive pipe markers equal to those manufactured by W. H. Brady Company. 1. Markers shall be of wording and color as shown in Table 09905. 09905 -2 083016 • • • 2. Lettering shall be: a) 2 1/4- inches high for pipes 3 inches diameter and larger. b) 1 1/8- inches high for pipes less than 3 inches diameter. 3. Flow arrows shall be: a) 2 1/4- inches by 6 inches for pipes 3 inches diameter and larger. b) 1 1/8- inches by 3 inches for pipes less than 3 inches diameter. B. Aboveground Valve Identifications: A coded and numbered tag attached with stainless steel chain or "S" hooks shall be provided on all valves. 1. Tag Types: Tags for valves on pipe shall be 300 Series stainless steel or anodized aluminum. Colors for aluminum tags shall, where possible, match the color code of the pipeline on which it is installed. Square tags shall be used to indicate normally closed valves and round tags shall indicate normally open valves. 2. Coding: In addition to the color coding, each tag shall be stamped or engraved with wording or abbreviations to indicate the valve service and number. All color and letter coding shall be approved by the Engineer. Valve service shall either be as listed in Table 09905, or by equipment abbreviation if associated with a particular piece of equipment. Valve numbering, if required, shall be as approved by the Engineer and /or Owner. C. Buried valves shall have valve boxes with a bronze disc affixed to the surface as shown on the Drawings. The bronze disc shall have the following information neatly stamped on it: 1. Size of valve, inches. 2. Type of valve: a) BV — Ball Valve b) CV — Check Valve c) BFV — Butterfly Valve d) PV — Plug Valve 3. Valve Services — See Table 09905 for abbreviations. 09905 -3 083016 PART 3 - EXECUTION 11, 3.01 COLOR CODING FOR PIPES AND EQUIPMENT • • A. Piping color codes, and code labels for pipe identification shall conform to Table 09905. B. General Notes and Guidelines: 1. Pipelines, equipment, or other items which are not listed here shall be assigned a color and shall be treated as an integral part of the Contract. 2. Color coding shall consist of color code identification of all exposed conduits, through lines and pipelines for the transport of gases, liquids, or semi - liquids including all accessories such as valves, insulated pipe coverings, fittings, junction boxes, bus bars, connectors and any operating accessories which are integral to a whole functional mechanical pipe and electrical conduit system. 3. All safety equipment shall be painted in accordance with OSHA Standards. 4. All inline equipment and appurtenances not assigned another color shall be selected by the Engineer at the time of the Shop Drawing submittal. C. All pipe hangers, pipe supports, and accessories shall be painted to match their piping. The system shall be painted up to, but not including, the face of flanges or the flexible conduit connected to electrical equipment. Structural members used solely for pipe hangers or supports shall be painted to match their piping. D. System code lettering and arrows shall conform to the requirements of ANSI A 13.1 marked on piping as follows: 1. Legends shall be of the following color for the respective pipe color: Key to Classification of Color of Letters, Predominant Colors For Piping if not Otherwise Specified (F) Fire Protection: Red White (D) Dangerous: Yellow Black Orange Black (S) Safe: Green Black White Black 09905 -4 083016 • • Black White Light Grey Black Dark Grey White Aluminum Black (P) Protective: Blue White 2. All piping containing or transporting corrosive or hazardous chemicals shall be identified with labels every 10 feet and with at least two (2) labels where length permits. Otherwise, markers shall be placed no more than 8 feet apart with at least one (1) marker on every straight run and additional markers at turns. 3. An arrow indicating direction of flow shall be placed adjacent to each marker. 3.02 FABRICATED EQUIPMENT A. Unless otherwise indicated or specifically approved, all fabricated equipment shall be shop primed and finished. B. The Contractor shall be responsible for and take whatever steps are necessary to properly protect the shop prime and finish coats against damage. 09905 -5 083016 • • • TABLE 09905 COLOR CODES AND ABBREVIATIONS Service Mark Conduit, Pipe, and Valve Color Code Letter and Flow Arrow Color Process Air AIR Green Bands Black Sodium Hypochlorite NaOCL Yellow Black Calcium Hydroxide CaOH Yellow with Green band Black Ammonium Hydroxide NH4OH Yellow with White band Black Sulfuric Acid SA Yellow with Red Band Black Antiscalant AS Orange Black Hydrogen Peroxide H202 Orange with Green Band Black Cleaning Solutions (MF, RO, and DEOX) CS Light Blue with Red Band Black Carbon Dioxide Gas GCO White Bands Black Nitrogen Gas N2 Blue Bands Black Drain DR Brown Black Raw (Reclaimed) Water RW Olive Green Black Process Water PW Olive Green Black Plant Service Water SVW Dark Blue with White Bands Black Finished Water FW Dark Blue Black Sample Line SA Gray Black END OF SECTION 09905 -6 083016 DIVISION 10 NOT USED DIVISION 11 EQUIPMENT • • • SECTION 11450 POSITIVE DISPLACEMENT BLOWERS AND ACCESSORIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Scope of Work: Furnish all labor, materials, equipment, and incidentals required and install, place in operation, and field test electric motor driven, rotary positive displacement blower. Blower shall be of the type and size specified herein and includes all appurtenances to provide complete systems ready for operation. Blower shall be installed at the locations shown on the Drawings. Each blower shall include the following: 1. Inlet air filter. 2. Intake silencer. 3. Blower and motor, base mounted. 4. Discharge silencer. 5. Pressure relief valve. 6. Check valve. 7. Isolation valve. 8. Spare parts for each blower. 9. Miscellaneous appurtenances. 10. Acoustical enclosure. B. Related Work Described Elsewhere: 1. Instrumentation: Division 13. 2. Mechanical: Division 15. 3. Electrical: Division 16. C. These Specifications are intended to give a general description of what is required but do not cover all details, which will vary in accordance with the requirements of the equipment as offered. It is, however, intended to cover the furnishing, shop testing, delivery, complete installation, and field testing of all materials, equipment, and appurtenances for the complete blower units as herein specified. D. For all units, furnish and install all necessary and desirable accessory equipment and auxiliaries whether specifically mentioned in these Specifications or not. This installation shall incorporate the highest standards for the type of service shown on the Drawings including field testing of the entire installation and 11450 -1 050416 • • instruction of the regular operating personnel in the care, operation, and maintenance of all equipment. 1.02 QUALIFICATIONS A. To assure unity of responsibility, the blowers and motors shall be furnished and coordinated by the blower manufacturer. The Contractor and manufacturer shall assume responsibility for the satisfactory installation and operation of the blowers. B. The blowers covered by these Specifications are intended to be standard equipment of proven ability as manufactured by a reputable and qualified manufacturer having experience in the production of such blowers. The blowers furnished shall be designed, constructed, and installed in accordance with the best practice and methods, and shall operate satisfactorily when installed. C. All equipment furnished under these Specifications shall be new and unused, shall be the standard product of manufacturers having a successful record of manufacturing and servicing the equipment and systems specified herein for a minimum of five (5) years. The manufacturer shall have at least ten (10) installations of similar equipment in Florida operating for five (5) years. D. Blowers shall be manufactured by Universal Blower Pac, Incorporated, Aerzen or an engineer's approved equal. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Copies of all materials required to establish compliance with these Specifications shall be submitted in accordance with the provisions of Section 01340: Shop Drawings and Submittals. Submittals shall include at least the following: 1. Certified shop and erection drawings showing all important details of construction, dimensions, and anchor bolt locations. 2. Descriptive literature, bulletins, and/or catalogs of the equipment. 3. Data regarding the characteristics and performance of each blower. Data shall include factory guaranteed performance curves, based on actual shop tests of similar units, which show that they meet the specified requirements for capacity in ACFM, discharge pressure in psig, blower rpm, efficiency, and brake horsepower required at the design conditions. Curves shall be submitted on 8 1/2 -inch by 11 inch sheets, at as large a scale as is practical. Catalog sheets showing a family of curves will not be acceptable. 11450 -2 050416 • • • 4. The total weight of the equipment, including the weight of the single largest item. 5. A complete total bill of materials of all equipment. 6. A list of the manufacturer's recommended spare parts to be supplied in addition to those specified in Paragraph 1.05, with the manufacturer's current price for each item. Include gaskets, bearings, seals, etc., on the list. List bearings by the bearing manufacturer's numbers only. 7. Motor data as required herein. 8. Copies of all factory test results, as specified herein. B. In the event that it is impossible to conform to certain details of these Specifications due to different manufacturing techniques, describe completely all nonconforming aspects. 1.04 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS A. Operating and maintenance manuals shall be furnished as specified in Section 01730: Operating and Maintenance Data. The manuals shall be prepared specifically for this installation and shall include all required catalog cuts, drawings, equipment lists, descriptions, etc., that are required to instruct operating and maintenance personnel unfamiliar with such equipment. The number of manuals to be submitted and special requirements shall be as specified in Section 01730: Operating and Maintenance Data. B. A factory representative who has complete knowledge of proper operation and maintenance shall be provided for two (2) days to instruct representatives of the Owner and the Engineer on proper operation and maintenance. This work may be conducted in conjunction with the inspection of the installation and test run as provided herein with the Owner's permission. If there are difficulties in operation of the equipment due to manufacturer's design or fabrication, additional services shall be provided at no cost to the Owner. 1.05 TOOLS AND SPARE PARTS A. One (1) set of all special tools required for normal operation and maintenance shall be provided for the blowers. All such tools shall be furnished in a suitable steel tool chest complete with lock and duplicate keys. B. The manufacturer shall furnish a complete set of recommended spare parts necessary for the first one (1) year operation of the blower system, which shall include at least the following: 11450 -3 050416 • • • 1. Two (2) sets of drive belts for each blower supplied. 2. Two (2) filter elements for each inlet filter /silencer supplied. 3. One (1) year's supply of each type of lubricant required. C. Spare parts shall be properly packaged and labeled for identification without opening the packaging and shall be suitably protected for long -term storage. 1.06 PRODUCT HANDLING A. All items shall be properly protected so that no damage or deterioration will occur during a prolonged delay from the time of shipment until installation is completed and the units and equipment are ready for operation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT A. The blower units required under this Section of these Specifications shall be complete with proper alignment and balancing of the individual units. All parts shall be designed and proportioned to have liberal strength, stability, and stiffness, and to be especially adapted for the intended service. Ample room shall be provided for inspection, repairs, and adjustment. B. The support system for blowers and drives shall be rigidly and accurately anchored into position. All foundation bolts, plates, nuts, and washers shall be furnished by the Contractor. All anchoring hardware shall be Type 316 stainless steel. C. Stainless steel or phenolic nameplates giving the name of the manufacturer, the rated capacity, discharge pressure, speed, brake horsepower, efficiency, and all other pertinent data shall be attached to each blower and motor. Nameplates shall be attached to the blower with stainless steel screws or pins. 2.02 BLOWERS A. General: 1. Furnish each blower complete with electric motor, steel base, drive system and appurtenances. 2. The blowers shall be of standard dimensions, built to limit gauges or formed to templates, such that parts will be interchangeable between like units. 11450 -4 050416 • • r 3. The blowers shall be furnished with a common base for blower, motor and V -belt drive unit. Base shall be fabricated of steel with all necessary auxiliary equipment. 4. The blowers packages shall be as manufactured by Universal Blower Pac, Incorporated, Aerzen, or an engineer's approved equal. B. Performance: 1. The blowers shall be capable of meeting the conditions described in Table 11450 -A. C. Blower Construction: 1. Blowers shall be the two -lobe (two - impeller) rotary positive displacement type. 2. Each blower casing shall be of one -piece construction with separate headplates at the gear end and drive end. Casings and headplates shall be made of close - grained cast iron suitably ribbed externally to prevent distortion under the specified operating conditions. Casings shall be provided with inspection ports to permit internal inspection and clearance checks. Inlet and outlet connections shall be NPT with a threaded nipple having an ANSI 125 pound drilled and tapped flange. The casing shall meet ASTM A48 Class 30A and have a 30,000 psi tensile strength. 3. The impellers shall be of the straight, two -lobe involute type and shall operate without rubbing or liquid seals or lubrication. Impellers shall be constructed of cast iron. All impellers shall be statically and dynamically balanced, and machined on all exterior surfaces for operating at close tolerances. The impellers shall be permanently fastened to forged, machined alloy steel shafts. Shafts shall be of one -piece straight through design or two -piece design and designed to withstand all operating loads imposed. 4. The impellers shall be positively timed by a matched pair of timing gears. Timing gears shall be designed and manufactured for continuous service in accordance with AGMA Standards. Timing gears shall be fully machined from heat - treated alloy steel and adjustable for field retiming. 5. Each impeller and shaft assembly shall be supported by a minimum of two, double -row, antifriction, spherical, self - aligning bearings. All bearings shall have a B io bearing life of 10 years in continuous operation, as defined by AFBMA Standards. The bearings shall be replaceable without the necessity of disconnecting the piping or disassembly of the 11450 -5 050416 • o • unit housing. The bearing housing shall be of totally closed, gas tight construction. a) Lubrication to the gears of each blower shall be maintained by an oil bath relying on gears to splash lubricate all moving parts. The oil system shall have sufficient capacity and cooling provisions to provide adequate oil to the gears and bearings with a continuous service interval between oil changes of not less than 2,000 hours. Bearings shall be provided with seals that will prevent lubricant from entering the air stream. Air vents shall be located between the seals and the impeller chamber to relieve excessive pressure on the seals. b) Sight glasses shall be provided for oil level observation. Each sight glass shall be able to indicate that a safe oil level exists during blower operation and accurately indicate the amount of oil present when the blower is off. The system shall be arranged so that should a sight glass break during operation, the oil loss will be limited so as to prevent damage to the blower under continued operation. 6. Each unit shall be V -belt driven with matched belts and sheaves designed at the proper speed ratio to meet the specified conditions. The belt shall be auto - tensioning. A belt guard of solid metal construction shall be provided which meets all OSHA requirements. 7. The blower unit shall be a packaged base mounted unit including blower, motor, inlet filter, inlet silencer, discharge silencer, V -belt drive, belt guard, pressure relief valve, and appurtenances. The baseplate shall be of welded steel construction to provide adequate support of the blower unit, drive motor, drive components and accessories. Each motor mounting base shall include all necessary provisions to permit proper blower /motor alignment. The motor mounting base shall be of the swing type providing automatic belt tensioning. The baseplate shall be sufficiently reinforced and braced to withstand all shock loads and resist all wearing and buckling during blower operation. 8. Blower and motor combination units shall be free of objectionable noise and vibration. Units shall operate with a maximum sound level without a sound attenuating enclosure not to exceed the levels specified in Table 11450 -A as measured 5 feet from any surface. 11450 -6 050416 • • • 2.03 ELECTRIC MOTORS A. General: 1. The motors for the blowers shall be of the horizontal, TEFC design. 2. All motors shall be built in accordance with latest NEMA, IEEE, ANSI, and AFBMA standards where applicable. 3. Motors shall be as manufactured by U.S. Motors, General Electric Company, Westinghouse or approved equal. B. Performance Requirements: 1. Motors shall be inverter duty, rated for operation on a 460 -volt 3- phase, 60 Hertz power supply. 2. Each motor shall have a 1.15 service factor. 3. Motors shall be rated at a minimum horsepower as listed in Table 11450 -A. 4. Motors shall be premium efficiency. 5. Motors shall be free of objectionable noise and vibration. Units shall operate with a maximum sound level not to exceed 80 dBA as measured 5 feet from any surface. 6. Maximum temperature rise of motor windings shall not exceed 80 degrees C, as measured by resistance, when motor is operated continuously at service factor horsepower, rated voltage and frequency in ambient air temperature of 40 degrees C. C. Each motor shall be provided with a 120 -volt single phase strip heater to maintain a motor temperature of at least 40 degrees C or 10 degrees C above ambient, whichever is greater. 2.04 APPURTENANCES A. Inlet Filter /Silencer: Each blower will have a filter /silencer with paper media that removes 99.5% of 2 micron particles and have the attenuation performance of the RIS series inlet silencer. The maximum pressure drop across the clean element shall be less than 2- inches of water column. The filter /silencer shall be Stoddard FH64 or equal. 11450 -7 050416 • • • C. Discharge Silencer: The manufacturer shall provide one (1) discharge silencer for each blower. The discharge silencer shall be installed in the discharge piping below the unit. The silencer shall have a side or end inlet, bottom outlet, and be multi- chambered containing a special arrangement of volumes and air passageways to effectively reduce pulsation through the conversion of noise energy into heat. Pressure drop through the silencer shall be minimal. Silencer shall be constructed with an all welded heavy gauge sheet and plate steel shell. Inlet and outlet connections shall be flanged, with standard ANSI 150 Ib. flange drilling. Noise attenuation for the silencer shall be from 25 to 30 decibels depending on the frequency. The discharge silencer shall be manufactured by Stoddard or an approved equal. D. Pressure Relief Valve: A properly sized pressure relief valve shall be provided for the discharge of each blower. The relief valve shall open at a setting of 10 percent above the specified discharge pressure. Relief valve shall be the spring type. Pressure safety valve shall be as manufactured by Kunkle or an approved equal. E. Check Valve: A spring wafer type check valve shall be installed in the blower discharge piping, downstream of the silencer and pressure relief valve as shown on the Drawings. The wafer type check valve shall be for air service with a pressure rating of a minimum of 25 psig. The check valve shall have a cast iron body, stainless steel pin and spring, and two semi - circular cast iron or aluminum plates. The seat material shall be suitable for an operating discharge temperature of 250 degrees Fahrenheit ( °F). F. Flexible Connectors: Flexible connectors shall be provided at the blower discharge and external to the system. The joints shall be of the single arch style and designed for the maximum temperature, pressure, and vibration conditions that may result from operation of the system. The joint shall be sized to match the blower connections. G. Blower and Motor Support Structure: The manufacturer shall provide a complete steel support structure to receive the blower and motor in a horizontal configuration as shown on the Drawings. The support shall be fabricated of rigid steel reinforced to withstand normal loading. H. Pressure Gauge: One (1) 2 -1/2 -inch diameter air pressure gauge with snubber and a range from 0 to 15 psig shall be provided on the discharge side of each blower. Gauge and fittings shall be a combination of brass and Type 316 stainless steel. I. Temperature Gauge: One (1) 3 -inch dial bimetal type air temperature gauge with a range from 0 to 300 °F shall be provided on the discharge side of each blower. 11450 -8 050416 • • • J. Filter Restriction Gauge: Each inlet filter shall have a filter restriction gauge that progressively measures vacuum in the filter element. A visual indicator, with a manual reset, shall lock at the current vacuum when the blower is shut off. K. Isolation Valve: Each blower shall have a discharge isolation valve. Isolation valves shall be cast -iron wafer -body, aluminum - bronze disc, butterfly type with a locking handle. The temperature rating of the seat shall exceed the maximum anticipated discharge temperature. The valves shall be shipped loose for field installation. L. Acoustical Enclosure: Each blower shall be supplied with an acoustical enclosure where denoted on the plan drawings and Table 11450 -A. Enclosures shall be powder coated aluminum and galvannealed steel outer construction with 2" thick high density acoustical foam backing and removable panels. Enclosures shall be equipped with an electric ventilation fan equipped with operator adjustable thermostat to provide operation after shutdown. 2.06 BLOWER SHOP COATING A. All external parts of the blower, motor, drive unit, base, and accessories shall be primed and finish painted at the factory prior to shipping. Surface preparation, priming and finish coating shall be an alkyd coating system. All coatings used for shop painting shall be the products of the same manufacturer as the coating to be used for field painting to assure coating compatibility. Color of finish coating shall be medium gray for the blower /motor and OSHA orange for the belt guard. 2.07 NOISE ATTENUATION A. Each blower system shall be equipped with an acoustical enclosure. The Enclosures shall be designed, assembled and inspected by Universal Blower Pac, Inc. at the manufacturing site with documentation provided to verify the noise reduction demanded in these documents. Noise attenuation shall be provided as necessary to reach the specified sound limit requirement at a distance of 1 meter from the operating equipment in a free field environment. All readings shall be taken by personnel experienced in the field of sound attenuation. B. The enclosure herein specified shall be designed and manufactured by the blower system manufacturer specifically for the equipment supplied. Units shall be designed to be picked up by a fork truck. Each acoustical enclosure shall be shipped completely assembled. No field assembly shall be permitted C. Adsorption of sound waves shall be the basis of design for the enclosure. The complete blower system will be enclosed to meet the level specified. With absorption considered, perforated metal inner skin retaining devices shall not be considered acceptable. 11450 -9 050416 • • • D. Adsorption media shall be a nominal 2 -inch thick resilient material capable of returning to its original form after compression. Media shall have an overall weight of not less than 1.6 pounds per cubic foot. Media sheets shall have an upper oil resistant layer a minimum of three mils in thickness to protect the integrity of the media. Adsorption media shall be interior and be fitted to each exterior facet and show contact at all points. Media shall be snug fit, be complete with pressure sensitive adhesive and held in place with washers, studs and cap nuts manufactured from corrosive resistant materials. All adhesives used in anchoring studs or other items in structure shall be high temperature industrial material rated for the application. E. Outer skin shall be a minimum 10 gauge aluminum. Lesser gauges shall not be acceptable. All surfaces are to be powder coated. F. No fastening hardware shall be visible on the exterior of the enclosure except those holding the instruments and relief valve exhaust differ in place for ease of repair. Rivets or loose fitting panels which can loosen during operation will not be accepted. Slide -in panels showing a loose fit shall provide grounds for rejection. G. Each enclosure will have removable service panels. All surfaces and edges shall be free of burs and sharp edges. Panels shall lock closed using key- operated compression latches with folding handles that fit flush. H. Each enclosure shall incorporate internal acoustical -lined intake -air vent boxes rated for the SCFM listed in the "service" section and discharge pipe openings with sound seal. Louvers shall not be acceptable. I. A 120/60/1 electric cooling fan with thermostat control and acoustical vent shall be supplied installed on the enclosure. To ensure adequate cooling at all speeds the cooling fan will not be connected to the blower or motor shaft in any way. J. Enclosure and fasteners shall be designed to meet wind loads per Florida Building Code. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXECUTION A. Installation shall be in strict accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and recommendations in the locations shown on the Drawings. Installation shall include furnishing the required oil and grease for initial operation. The grades of oil and grease shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Anchor bolts shall be set in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Blower and motor baseplate shall be set on vibration isolation pads. 11450 -10 050416 • • • B. Align blower and motor in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. No more than two shims of proper thickness shall be used to secure proper alignment. Prior to placing the blower in operation, recheck the alignment after piping and other external connections have been made up to the blower. Adjust and realign as required if alignment has changed. All alignments and adjustments made to the blower shall be completed by technicians with prior experience and training in making such alignments and adjustments for the specific equipment provided. 3.02 FIELD PAINTING A. All equipment furnished shall be provided with finished coating system in the field. B. All nameplates shall be properly protected during painting. 3.03 INSPECTION AND TESTING A. General: 1. Materials and equipment shall be tested or inspected as required by the Engineer, and the cost of such work shall be included in the cost of the equipment. 2. Furnish the services of a factory representative for two (2) days who has complete knowledge of proper operation and maintenance to inspect the final installation and supervise a test run of the equipment. These services may be combined with those provided under Paragraph 1.04. 3. The duties of the factory service representative shall be as follows: After the equipment has been installed but before it is operated by others, the representative shall inspect the completed installation. The service representative shall start up the equipment and instruct the Owner's personnel in proper operation and maintenance procedures. The responsibility of the Contractor with regards to start-up shall be fulfilled when the start-up is complete, the equipment is functioning properly and it has been accepted by the Owner. 4. Field tests shall not be conducted until the entire installation is complete and ready for testing. 5. The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer, six (6) copies of a certified report from the factory service representative of the results of the representative's inspections, adjustments, testing and start-up. The report shall include a statement that the equipment is ready for permanent operation and that nothing in the installation will render the manufacturer's 11450 -11 050416 • • warranty null and void. Final payment shall not be made to the Contractor until this report has been submitted to and approved by the Engineer. B. Blowers: 1. After all blowers have been completely installed and working under the direction of the manufacturer, conduct in the presence of the Engineer tests necessary to indicate that blower operation, efficiency, blower rpm and discharge pressure and capacity conform to these Specifications. Field tests shall include all blowers under this Section. 2. If the blower performance does not meet these Specifications, corrective measures shall be taken or blowers shall be removed and replaced with blowers which satisfy the conditions specified. A 24 hour operating period of the blowers will be required before acceptance. C. The Contractor's attention is directed to the fact that the services specified represent an absolute minimum acceptable level of service, and are not intended to limit the responsibilities of the Contractor to comply with all requirements of the Contract Documents. The Contractor shall procure, at no additional cost to the Owner, all services required, including additional or extended trips to the jobsite by manufacturer's representatives to comply with said requirements. Table 11450 —A GENERAL BLOWER PERFORMANCE SUMMARY Parameter Requirement Process Adsorption System Number of Units 1 Capacity 400 SCFM Discharge Pressure 10.0 psig Altitude, MSL 0 ft. Minimum Inlet Temperature 20 °F at 36% R.H. Maximum Inlet Temperature 100° F at 85% R.H. Maximum Blower Speed at Design Point 6,700 rpm Maximum Blower Speed 1,800 rpm Maximum Motor Horsepower 25 HP Sound Enclosure Yes Maximum Sound Levels 75 dBA Basis of Design Universal Blower Pac, Aerzen or equal END OF SECTION 11450 -12 050416 DIVISION 12 NOT USED DIVISION 13 SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION SECTION 13410 • BASIC INSTRUMENTATION, MONITORING, AND CONTROL REQUIREMENTS • • PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: General administrative and procedural requirements for instrumentation, monitoring, and control installations. Administrative and procedural requirements are included in this Section to expand on requirements specified in Division 1. This section shall apply to all systems including pre- engineered systems. B. This section describes the requirements for furnishing, installing, testing, and placing into operation plant control systems and components. Provide the detailed hardware configuration, manufacture, program configuration, integration, test, startup, installation assistance, and demonstration of equipment and software. Although not all requirements are defined herein, the major elements of the work include the following: 1. Furnish and install a PLC based monitoring and control system consisting of a PLC, graphics for local operator interface, paging, historical data collection of all the 110, trending and storage, supporting network hardware, and report production as defined in these contract documents. 2. Modify the existing Citect SCADA system at Water Treatment Plant No. 1 to accommodate the new PLC, upgrade graphics in HMI for the work involved within this contract, paging, historical data collection of all the I/O, trending and storage, and report production as defined in these contract documents. The City of Clearwater will provide electronic files for Contractor to assist in modifications involved within this Contract to the existing system. 3. Seamlessly integrate new control system with existing WTP No. 1 SCADA network using Owner's SCADA standards. 4. Arsenic Absorption Filter sequence and operations shall be derived from the Owner's existing standard operating procedures attached as Instrumentation appendices at the end of this specification and control narrative within this specification. The Contractor shall coordinate with Owner and Plant Operations to review AAF control strategies prior to logic development. It is anticipated that one (1) control strategy meeting will be required to review process and discuss possible improvements to existing AAF control strategies. 5. Provide configuration and application programming as specified. 6. Furnish and install control panels and panel instrumentation as required. 13410 -1 083116 7. Furnish and install plant field instrumentation as defined elsewhere. • 8. Furnish and install supporting network components required for communications and signal conversions. • • C. Integration, testing, startup, and demonstration of equipment and software shall be coordinated with the Engineer and the City of Clearwater. Existing Plant Operations interruption is anticipated, Contractor shall provide a detailed schedule of onsite work involving demolition, installation, testing, startup procedures, upon approval by the Engineer/ City, onsite work shall commence. The City of Clearwater will have an operator or technician onsite, Monday through Friday, up to 8 hours per day, all testing and startup activities shall be closely coordinated so as to minimize any interruptions to the facility Operations. Advance notice of at least 24 hours is required for all starup activities. D. The Systems Integrator will attend at least 4 weekly progress meetings at the job site during startup. System Integrator shall be responsible for providing all SCADA hardware and instrumentation not integral to a pre- engineered system. Integrator shall coordinate with pre- engineered system vendors to insure compatibility with the SCADA system. Vendors shall provide PLC logic for troubleshooting and integration purposes. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Submit in accordance with Division 1, Shop Drawings covering the items included under this Section. Shop Drawing submittals shall include: 1. Product data for each product specified. 2. Wiring diagrams, both elementary and schematic, differentiating between manufacturer installed and field- installed wiring. 3. Digital Systems: Provide the following: a. Digital equipment layouts of input and output racks showing complete module model number and addressing assignment. Layouts of port pin assignment, connection schematic indicating cable types and port addresses. 4. Software Programs: One fully annotated printed copy of program prior to factory test. In addition, provide required number of copies of latest revisions of program at time of acceptance by Owner. Submittal of printouts, listings, and screen images shall be supplied on paper (hard copy). With concurrence of Owner and Engineer, electronic copies may be supplied in addition to printed copies as a matter of convenience. Format of media shall be as mutually agreed with Owner. Provide electronic logic files, program files, data files, etc. in their uncompiled states to support future changes by the end user without integrator's assistance. 5. Programmable Logic Controllers: Submits lists of input and output assignments, data file structures used, tags, and internal data points. Show points used to 13410 -2 083116 • communicate between PLCs, the operator interface and data collection segments. Include complete, fully annotated ladder logic diagrams complete with cross - reference listings. 6. Operator Interface and Supervisory Control: Describe communication protocol with PLC control system. Show sample event and alarm log outputs. Document shall include both the Citect SCADA and Allen Bradley PanelView systems. 7. Operator Interface and Supervisory Control: Submit "screen dump" images of each proposed operator interface screen. Describe color schema, mouse button use, function key controls and communication protocol with PLCs. Provide a flow diagram showing screen navigation. Show sample event and alarm log outputs. Document shall include both the Citect SCADA and Allen Bradley PanelView systems. 8. Data Collection: Submit details of data structures, communications protocols, data exchange formats, sampling intervals, and file storage space management. Provide "screen dump" images of historical trending. 9. Data Management and Reporting: Includes process data management, laboratory management, and reporting. Submit data definitions, customization of base software, data entry screens, and menus. All reports will follow the Owner's established formatting B. Test Reports • 1. Factory Acceptance Test (FAT) • 2. Site Acceptance Test (SAT) C. Record Drawings: At Project closeout, submit record drawings of installed products, in accordance with requirements of Division 1. 1. Where Drawings are drafted by computer equipment, Contractor shall furnish files on a disk. These Drawings shall include changes made by Field Orders, Change Orders, Addenda, and errors discovered during start-up and acceptance. 2. Drawings shall include terminal numbers at each wiring termination and piping termination. A complete system diagram shall be included. D. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Submit in accordance with requirements of Section 01730, Operating and Maintenance Data, for items included under this Section. 1. Instructions shall be short, easy -to- understand directions specifically written for this Project describing various possible methods of operating equipment. Instructions shall include procedures for tests required, adjustments to be made, and safety precautions to be taken with equipment. These documents are to be submitted to Engineer's office. 13410 -3 083116 • • • 2. Provide 4 complete set of manufacturer's documentation covering programmable equipment supplied. Include hardware manuals and prints as manufacturer normally ships with programmable equipment. One copy shall be an electronic copy on CD. a. Include complete software manuals for operating system, as well as manuals for any other software. Written instructions for the operations and maintenance of software shall be provided. The instructions shall be short, easy -to- understand directions specifically written for this Project describing various possible methods of operating software. b. Include program listings, point/address lists, cross - reference listings, images of screens, data entry forms, and sample reports. c. Include trouble shooting instructions identifying common conditions and there resolutions. The initial list of topics shall be submitted to the Engineer before FAT. The Contractor shall include additional time to incorporate new topics from Engineer 30 days after SAT. E. Warranty: Submit in accordance with requirements of Section 01740, Warranties and Bonds, covering the items included under this Section. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of equipment, of types and sizes required, and whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years. B. Codes and Standards: 1. National Electric Code. 2. Applicable State and local requirements. 3. UL listing and labeling shall be adhered to. C. Items covered by this Section are designated as undelivered specifically manufactured equipment for which associated progress payments will be made in accordance with this Specification. D. Equipment that does not have a UL, FM, CSA, or other listed testing laboratory label shall be furnished with a notarized letter signed by the supplier stating that equipment furnished has been manufactured in accordance with National Electric Code and OSHA requirements. E. Contractor shall provide permits and licenses, observe and abide by applicable laws, regulations, ordinances, and rules of State, territory or political subdivision thereof, 13410 -4 083116 • • • wherein the Work is done. Contractor shall pay fees for permits, inspections, licenses, and certifications when such fees are required. F. To ensure timely performance and conformance with Specifications, Project meetings shall be held at Owner's facility once every 3 months during course of Project. Cost of such meetings shall be included. G. Component Requirements: For the purposes of uniformity and conformance to industry standards, signal transmission modes shall be either electronic 4 -20 mA DC only. No other signal characteristics are acceptable, except for remote temperature detector (RTD) and thermocouple (TC) sensing circuits; 4 -20 mA DC signals shall be such that devices may be wired in parallel for 1 -5 volt DC as required. 1 -5 volt DC mode shall be employed only within control panel enclosures. H. Responsibility and Coordination: Drawings and Specifications are intended to include details of a complete equipment installation for purposes specified. Contractor shall be responsible for details which may be necessary to properly install, adjust, and place in operation complete installation. Any error on Drawings or in Specifications which prevents proper operation of supplied system shall be shown correct at time of Shop Drawing submittal for approval or brought to attention of Engineer with or prior to submittal. I. Contractor shall be responsible for costs incurred to correct aforementioned errors brought to Engineer's attention. Contractor shall assume full responsibility for additional costs which may result from unauthorized deviations from Specifications. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Manufactured material shall be adequately packed to prevent damage during shipping, handling, storage, and erection. Material shipped to Site shall be packed in a container properly marked for identification. Blocks and padding shall be used to prevent movement. B. Contractor shall inspect the material prior to removing it from carrier. If damage is observed, Contractor shall immediately notify carrier so that a claim can be made. If no such notice is given, material shall be assumed to be in undamaged condition; any subsequent damage that occurs to the equipment shall be the responsibility of Contractor. Repair and replacement of damaged parts will be done at no expense to Owner. C. Contractor shall be responsible for any damage charges resulting from handling of materials. 13410 -5 083116 PART 2 - PRODUCTS • 2.01 EQUIPMENT SUPPLIERS • • A. Subject to compliance with specified requirements, equipment suppliers shall be the following (no "or equals "): 1. Revere Control Systems 2. Rocha Controls B. References made in these Specifications to specific manufacturer's products are intended to serve as a guide to type, construction, and materials. Listing of a manufacturer does not imply acceptance by Engineer of a manufacturer's particular product, product line, or latest product revision if it does not meet Specifications. C. Equipment Supplier: Equipment specified under Sections 13410 through 13450 and shown on Drawings shall be designed as a system, fabricated or purchased, shipped to Site, and started up by one of the qualified and approved equipment suppliers listed under this Section. Intent is for unit responsibility. 1. Equipment supplier shall not assign any of its rights or delegate any of its obligations under these Sections without prior written acceptance by Engineer. 2. Direct purchase of any items in these Sections by Contractor is not in compliance with this Specification and will not be permitted. 3. When a Service Contract is included, it shall be performed by factory- trained personnel employed by equipment supplier. Equipment supplier shall assign a qualified Engineer employed by the supplier as Project Engineer/Project Manager. a. Project Engineer/Project Manager's name shall be forwarded to Contractor and Engineer within 30 days after receipt of a purchase order by equipment supplier. b. Project Engineer/Project Manager shall be focal point for design, fabrication, Contract communications, and shall be responsible for start -up and acceptance. Project Engineer/Project Manager shall be at factory test at Site for start -up and at the Site during entire acceptance procedure. Only qualified and approved equipment suppliers shall be accepted as meeting this Specification. 2.02 EQUIPMENT A. Transmitted electronic signals to equipment of other vendors and between control panels shall be a separate isolated - floating output for each item of equipment and shall conform to ISA Standard S50.1. 13410 -6 083116 • • • B. Enclosures shall be NEMA 12, 4, 4X, or 7 as indicated on Drawings. Intrinsically safe systems, as approved by Factory Mutual, shall be furnished when called for. C. No external power connections shall be allowed unless specifically called for in Specification. Where an external power source is called for, unit shall accept 120 VAC, plus or minus 10 percent power. D. Current -to- current converters shall be used as power boosters to provide sufficient signal power as required. It is equipment supplier's responsibility to determine under what circumstances and locations power boosters are required, provide them, and integrate them into the instrumentation system to make system function properly. E. Separate power supplies shall be totally enclosed with solderless terminals for connections. They shall be short circuit current limiting type that will automatically resume regulation after removal of short circuit. They shall operate from 120 volt AC, plus or minus 10 percent power. Regulated voltage shall be fixed. Units with internal trim potentiometers will be accepted. 1. Instruments shall be panel- mounted or enclosed for wall mounting as shown on Drawings. F. Size and style of instruments are defined in Specifications. G. Solid -state output switches, where used, shall be overvoltage transient protected and not be damaged by dI/dT or dv /dt for their design application under this Contract. H. Instruments shall be equipped with permanently attached identification tag. Tag shall be included on field- and panel- mounted devices. Tags shall include Engineer's tag identification and manufacturer's tag identification if different from Engineer's. 1. Tags shall be either stamped metal or laminated phenolic with black letters engraved on a white background. Field - mounted devices shall have tags fastened with screws. Devices mounted in panels will be tagged inside panel on subplates or on device itself where it can be easily read. I. Finish on instruments and accessories shall provide protection against corrosion by elements in environment in which they are to be installed. Both the interior and exterior of enclosures shall be finished. Extra paint of each color used on material shall be provided by manufacturer for touch -up purposes. J. Provide equipment identification nameplates complying with Section 16075, Electrical Identification. Nameplates shall contain Engineer's item designation and, for indicators and transmitters, design range and units of device shown. 13410 -7 083116 • • • 2.03 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL Factory Test Procedure (FAT): A. EQUIPMENT SUPPPLIER shall notify Engineer and Owner in writing at least 14 days before the proposed testing date and in no case shall notice be given until after the CONTRACTOR has received written ENGINEER approval of the test procedures. If the factory acceptance test is concluded unsuccessfully, the test shall be repeated. EQUIPMENT SUPPPLIER shall reimburse Owner and Engineer for all expenses incurred in connection with attending repeated factory or site testing necessitated by system failure or inadequate preparation. B. EQUIPMENT SUPPPLIER shall prepare a testing procedure to be approved by Owner and Engineer that shall demonstrate that the system conforms to the specifications. The testing procedure shall be submitted at least 30 days in advance of testing. The testing shall be conducted by EQUIPMENT SUPPPLIER and witnessed by Owner and/or Engineer. C. FACTORY TEST SETUP. Assemble and integrate the factory test setup as specified to prove that performance of the system satisfies all requirements of this project, including system communications requirements in accordance with the approved test procedures. The factory test shall take place during regular daytime working hours on weekdays. Equipment used shall be the same equipment that is to be delivered to the site. The factory test setup shall include the following: D. FACTORY TEST PROCEDURE. Test procedures shall define the tests required to ensure that the system meets technical, operational, and performance requirements. The test procedures shall define location of tests, milestones for the tests, and identify simulation programs, equipment, personnel, facilities, and supplies required. The 13410 -8 083116 Factory Test SCADA workstation One of each type control panel CPs with all equipment inside PLC Controls, and Switchgear network switch One of each type data storage One of each type operator interface One of each type VFD display One of each type portable tester One of each type communications circuits All equipment including bridges, modems, encoder /decoders, transceivers and repeaters. I/O functions Sufficient to demonstrate the I/O capability and system normal operation software Software required for proper operation of the proposed system including application programs and sequences of operation D. FACTORY TEST PROCEDURE. Test procedures shall define the tests required to ensure that the system meets technical, operational, and performance requirements. The test procedures shall define location of tests, milestones for the tests, and identify simulation programs, equipment, personnel, facilities, and supplies required. The 13410 -8 083116 • • • test procedures shall provide for testing all control system capabilities and functions specified and shown. The procedures shall cover actual equipment and sequences to be used by the Contractor for the specified project and shall consist of detailed instructions for test setup, execution, and evaluation of test results. The test reports shall document results of the tests. Reports shall be delivered to the ENGINEER within 7 days after completion of each test. The procedures shall include the following: 13410 -9 083116 Test Procedure Equipment Block diagram Hardware and Software Descriptions Commands Operator commands I/O functions Test database points with failure modes Passwords Required for each operator access level Each type of digital and analog point in the test database Description Test equipment List Surge protection Circuit diagrams Inputs required (I /O point values and status) and corresponding expected results of each set of input values For each application program Default values For the application program inputs not implemented or provided for in the contract documents for the application programs to be tested. Verification shall include at a minimum • Phase monitor • Programmable fault inputs and outputs • Valve open/pump stopped alarm— user configurable time • Valve closed /pump running alarm— user configurable time • Speed Mismatch alarm — speed called for and actual speed to far apart • Valve open/closed indication • Runtime counter • Number of Starts counter • Output relay for each pump — is the pump being called to start , • Utility Power Fail Alarm • Ambient Temperature 13410 -9 083116 • • • E. FACTORY ACCEPTANCE TESTING. After system assembly and debugging at EQUIPMENT SUPPPLIER's facility, the system shall be tested before the system is shipped to the site. The factory test shall be conducted on at the system consisting of computer hardware, software, printer, and one field UO device. 1. The entire system, including all peripherals and associated software, shall be factory tested under simulated operating conditions. Both normal operating sequences and fault conditions shall be simulated. The results shall be noted on the displays and the logging printer for hard copy. The testing procedures for hardware and software are described below. All basic functions shall be demonstrated, including I/O processing, communications, alarm handling, HMI display functions, alarm logging, report generation, and historical data storage, as well as the specific functions listed herein. The system shall operate continuously for at least a 72 hours without faults. This operational test may run concurrently with the demonstration of hardware and software functions. The test procedure shall also include at a least four -hour period for discretionary tests to be conducted by Engineer or Owner. For systems with software configuration by Engineer /Owner, a preliminary version of such configured software may be used as part of the factory acceptance test. 2. Software Test. All system software modules specified herein shall be demonstrated. Software tests shall include running all diagnostics, debugging routines, and system test routines. The operating system, advanced process control language compiler, and all associated drivers shall be fully tested and operable for the system test. Software "patches" or changes to bypass failed or flawed modules during the test will not be acceptable. F. FACTORY TEST REPORT. Original copies of data produced during the factory test, including results of each demonstration procedure, shall be delivered to the ENGINEER at the conclusion of the test, prior to ENGINEER approval of the factory test. The report shall be arranged so that commands, responses, and data acquired are correlated to allow logical interpretation of the data. G. EQUIPMENT SUPPLIER is responsible for supplying computer and software for Factory Acceptance Test. EQUIPMENT SUPPLIER shall attempt to match OWNERS existing computer and loaded software. 1. Control and monitoring system control panels and computer equipment shall be tested at the factory prior to shipment to Site. The Contractor shall provide documentation containing factory test methods and procedures. H. Site Acceptance Test (SAT) 1. The site acceptance test procedure shall refer to the actions and expected results to demonstrate that the control system performs in accordance with the sequence of control. The Contractor shall include a list of the equipment to be 13410 -10 083116 • • • used during the testing plus manufacturer's name, model number, equipment function, the date of the latest calibration and the results of the latest calibration. I. Conduct preliminary testing prior to factory checkout by executing programs supplied for this Project. Exercise inputs to test logic for correct function and proper response of outputs. Verify correct interface with programs. Verify correct communications. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION A. Equipment provided under this Section shall be fabricated, assembled, erected, and placed in proper operating condition in full conformity with detail drawings, specifications, engineering data, instructions, and recommendations of equipment manufacturer as approved by Engineer. B. Install equipment as indicated, in accordance with manufacturer's written instruction, and in compliance with recognized industry practices to ensure that products fulfill requirements. C. Elements that are supported by plumbing or piping, or that have only plumbing or piping connections shall be installed under those Sections. D. Plumbing, piping, or pneumatic signal connections to elements requiring such connections shall be made under those Sections. Control panels shall be installed in accordance with Division 16 Sections, with piping connections to control panels installed under Division 15 Sections. E. Drawings are not intended to show every detail of construction or location of conduit or equipment. Where proper operation or construction makes it necessary or advisable to change location of conduit, instrumentation equipment, air ducts, or other equipment, Contractor shall so inform Engineer for his approval and permission. 3.02 SOFTWARE SERVICES A. Software services include program development, testing, documentation, and Work necessary to implement a complete and fully operating system as shown on Drawings and/or as specified. Provide programming to implement required functions and features. Program to be developed based on Owner's existing standard operating procedures and any improvements based on the control strategy meeting which will take place prior to logic development. Refer to Attachment A for Owner's current standard operating protocol. B. Work requires coordination with concurrent program development for PLCs, Operator Interfaces, Management Reports, and Data Collection. Include PLC error detection 13410 -11 083116 logic for communications failures, faults, internal faults, and time outs. Communicate PLC error conditions to Operator Interface for logging and reporting. C. Software Functional Requirements: 1. General functional requirements for system configuration are indicated on the drawings and described in the specifications. The information presented herein and indicated on the drawings illustrates the general functional intent of the system, and may not be sufficient to fully configure the system. The Equipment Suppplier shall be responsible for determining what additional information may be required to complete the configuration tasks, and for obtaining this information from the Engineer or the Owner. D. Communication between PLCs, Operator Interface, and Data Collection shall be on an exception basis. When reportable changes in process state occur, such as alarm assertion, return to normal or analog value out of dead band, report event to PLC that communicates with Operator Interface and Data Collection. This PLC shall maintain data tables current with all process inputs and outputs. Organize data to be transferred into contiguous blocks of information using bit - mapped and integer tables. Employ a "watchdog" timer for each remote PLC and poll that PLC if no message has been received in a reasonable amount of time notify an operator with an alarm. Accept Operator Interface directives for setpoint changes and hand switches. E. Graphic Screen Displays. The Intregrator shall be responsible for developing and configuring the custom graphic displays with a feel and look of the existing system. Each piece of major process equipment that is monitored by the control system shall be displayed on one or more graphic screen. Graphic screens shall be representations of the equipment and piping and change color based on the status. Color codes shall match the existing SCADA color code system currently in use at the Plant. The screens must accurately show all devices and equipment that is part of the control loops. These items must be done in accordance to the Configuration Standards and Conventions as described earlier in this section. The requirement for alarm and/or event displays shall also be provided and proven functional prior to acceptance of the system. F. Alarming shall utilize the EEMUA 191, ISA -18.1, and RP77.60.02 -2000 standards for structure, implementation, and occurrence. The time required for the operator interface panel to display an alarm shall not exceed 20 seconds. 3.03 PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER LOGIC A. Develop programs for execution on PLC using development software supplied under that Section. Logic shall perform functions required to control processes and equipment as shown on Drawings and /or as specified in this section. Develop complete cross - references for ladder logic and complete input/output listings. 13410 -12 083116 B. Functions • 1. Analog Monitoring a. The system shall measure and transmit all analog values including calculated analog points. 2. Logic (Virtual) a. Logic (virtual) points shall be software points entered in the point database which are not directly associated with a physical 1/0 function. Logic (virtual) points shall be analog or digital points created by calculation from any combination of digital and analog points, or other data having all the properties of real points, including alarms, without the associated hardware. Logic (virtual) points shall be defined or calculated and entered into the database. The calculated analog point shall have point identification in the same format as any other analog point. 3. State Variables a. If an analog point represents more than two (up to 8) specific states, each state shall be nameable. For example, a level sensor shall be displayed at its measured engineering units plus a state variable with named states usable in programs or for display such as low alarm /low /normal/high/high alarm. • 4. Analog Totalization • a. Any analog point shall be operator assignable to the totalization program. Up to eight analog values shall be totalized within a selectable time period. C. Alarm Processing 1. Digital Alarms a. Digital alarms are those abnormal conditions indicated by DIs as specified and shown. The system shall automatically suppress analog alarm reporting associated with a digital point when that point is turned off. 2. Analog Alarms a. Analog alarms are those conditions higher or lower than a defined value, as measured by an AI. Analog readings shall be compared to predefined high and low limits, and alarmed each time a value enters or returns from a limit condition. Unique high and low limits shall be assigned to each analog point in the system. In control point adjustment (CPA) applications, key the limit to a finite deviation traveling with the setpoint. The system shall automatically 13410 -13 083116 • • suppress analog alarm reporting associated with an analog point when that analog point is turned off. b. Each analog point will have a low alarm, low warning, normal, high warning, and high alarm. All alarms may be turned off or On from the OIP or HMI. 3. Constraints a. Each control point in the database shall have PLC resident constraints defined and entered by the Contractor, including as applicable: maximum starts (cycles) per hour; minimum off time; minimum on time; high limit (value in engineering units); and low limit (value in engineering units). 4. Constraints Checks a. All control devices connected to the system shall have the PLC constraints checked and passed before each command is issued. Each command point shall have unique constraints assigned. High and low "reasonableness" values or one differential "rate -of- change" value shall be assigned to each AI. Each individual point shall be capable of being selectively disabled by the operator from the central station. 5. Control Sequences and Control Loops a. Specific functions to be implemented are defined in individual system control sequences and database tables shown on the drawings, and shall include, as applicable, the following functions: PI control shall provide proportional control and proportional plus integral control; two position control shall provide control for a two state device by comparing a set point against a process variable and an established dead band; floating point control shall exercise control when an error signal exceeds a selected dead band, and shall maintain control until the error is within the dead band limits; signal selection shall allow the selection of the highest or lowest analog value from a group of analog values as the basis of control and shall include the ability to cascade analog values so that large numbers of inputs can be reduced to one or two outputs; signal averaging shall allow the mathematical calculation of the average analog value from a group of analog values as the basis of control and shall include the ability to "weight" the individual analog values so that the function output can be biased as necessary to achieve proper control; reset function shall develop an AO based on up to two AIs and one operator specified reset schedule. 6. PIDE Basic Loop Control a. Standard software algorithms shall be available to perform regulatory control functions, and these shall have easily configurable parameters. 13410 -14 083116 • • • b. Basic loop control should be supported by the system via open loop tuning. Enhanced Proportional, Integral, Derivative (PIDE) control loops are supported through the Function Block Diagram and Structured Text control functions. These control functions can be used to create continuous and batch process PIDE control loops. Online editing permits changes to control loop strategies while they are operating. c. It shall be possible to put any individual control loop in a manual; automatic, or cascade mode. In cascade, it shall be possible to configure remote setpoints from other regulatory controllers or from other control blocks. d. There shall be bumpless transfer between all control modes, and windup protection shall be provided. Control blocks shall be able to perform automatic mode switching based on external or internal logic inputs. 7. PIDE Integrated Auto -Tune a. An integrated PID auto -tuner should be built into the PIDE instruction used in the function block language. Because the PIDE auto - tuning is built into the system controllers, auto - tuning can be performed from any operator workstation. 1) Applicable to processes with slow and fast dynamics. 2) Used with self - regulating and integrating processes. 3) Immune to noise and process load disturbances. 4) Can be accessed directly from the controller. b. The PID auto - tuning facility shall employ an easy -to -use graphical interface with a setup "wizard "(similar to Microsoft Excel ®) to assist engineers and technicians who are unfamiliar with the tool. 8. PIDE Optimized Auto -Tune a. The system shall provide advanced open and closed loop tuning and analysis by providing PID control loop optimization without additional programming. b. Control loop process models can be automatically developed allowing users to analyze and simulate current operating conditions. Knowing the dynamics of the process model, advanced analysis tools can be applied to diagnose PID loop disturbances and suggest optimal proportional, integral, derivative and filtering values. These new values can be tested prior to downloading to the process allowing for the prediction of the new loop response and comparison of improvements with the current settings. 13410 -15 083116 • • • c. An off -line modeling tool should be available so archived process data can be used to perform loop analysis. Using real data off -line allows experimentation with new settings without compromising production. D. Command Priorities 1. A scheme of priority levels shall be provided to prevent interaction of a command of low priority with a command of higher priority. Override commands entered by the operator shall have higher priority than those emanating from applications programs. 3.04 DEVELOPMENT SOFTWARE (OIP) A. All development of the software configuration shall be performed using hardware and the system software owned by the Equipment Supplier. It is intended that the Equipment Supplier to use their own Factory Talk application development software for OIP screen development and for all related configuration work. 3.05 OPERATOR INTERFACE (LOCAL OPERATOR PANELVIEW) & SCADA SCREENS UPGRADE: A. Operator Interface programs provide graphic representation of local processes and control over machinery. B. Screens shall include equipment status (On \Off\Opened \Closed) indications. Include analog instruments such as indicators, manual loading stations, controllers, etc., as shown. C. Graphical Operations 1. Display Information a. The HMI software shall display information necessary to support all requirements specified, including: operator commands; alarm notification; system graphics as specified and as shown, incorporating dynamic data; and curve plotting. b. Video displays shall be color at highest resolution supported by hardware. Install operating system drivers as necessary. They shall be fully windowed and shall use a mouse for control. Use colors, function keys, and navigational controls consistently. 13410 -16 083116 • • • 2. System Graphics Implementation a. System graphics displays shall be hierarchical displays which integrate dynamic data into the display. System graphics shall reflect actual system configuration. Each system schematic shall be included as a separate display. Different colors, textures, and use of inverted video shall be used for various components and dynamic data. The displays shall include standard and /or custom symbols. Data associated with a display shall be updated within 5 seconds of the digital status change or the analog change in excess of the analog change differential. Any dynamic data which is not current, due to PLC communications failure, PLC failure, or point out of service, shall be highlighted or flagged. 3. Trending a. Provide on- screen trending displays that are user definable that operate from either previously collected historical trend groups (named file) or from a group of real -time variables. Provide facilities for user selection of colors, time (horizontal), and measurement (vertical) scales. Accommodate real -time sampling intervals as short as 1 second. Real -time trends shall show alarm set points. Historical trend displays shall have time -scale panning controls. 4. System Menus and Displays a. The user shall be able to call up the following displays by dedicated function key, pull down menu or by icon and shall be able to page forward and backward on linked multiple page displays. The system menu and index displays shall also contain icons which can be used to call up subsequent displays. b. Menu (list of all graphics and menus). 1) Index (list of all PLCs). 2) Alarm Summary (list of all uncleared alarms). 3) Abnormal Summary (list of all devices not in normal state; keeps track of alarm conditions which have been cleared). 4) Data Communications Summary (listing of availability for each communication channel, by statistically processing the number of transmission errors, outages, and other abnormal conditions for each channel). c. Navigation to any system graphics shall be no more than three push buttons away from any other screen. 13410 -17 083116 • • • D. Command Function 1. Command Input (Buttons) a. Command buttons shall utilize full words and acronyms selected to allow operators to use the system without extensive training or data processing backgrounds. The system shall prompt the operator. 2. Command Input Errors a. The system shall supervise operator inputs to ensure they are correct for proper execution. Operator input assistance shall be provided whenever a command cannot be executed because of operator input errors. 3. Special Functions a. The system shall support the following special functions by using a mouse, in addition to all other commands specified: 1) Start/Enable shall manually start equipment and enable monitoring and control of points. 2) Stop/Disable shall manually stop equipment and disable monitoring and control components. 3) Display Diagram shall display diagrams of specific utility systems or interlocks required for operations. 4) Auto /Override shall override automatic operation of a point or return a point to automatic operation. 4. Level of Addressing a. Four levels of addressing for identification shall be provided as follows: 1) Point. The individual sensor or control device within a unit. 2) Unit. The unit that a point is associated with, such as a pump. 3) Sub - system. The sub - system that a point is located in or near. 4) System. The system that a sub - system is located in or near. 13410 -18 083116 • • • 5. System Access Control a. A minimum of 30 passwords shall be configured into the control system software. The system shall maintain an ASCII disk file logging all operators logged onto the system, alarm acknowledgments, commands issued and all database modifications for each password. Each password shall be definable as to the functions that the operator can perform. E. At a minimum the following screens are expected at the local OIT and added to the Plant SCADA system: 1. Arsenic Adsorber Filters (AAF) — Overview Screen: This screen shall show all the equipment including piping with tags between the two AAF units. Features such as initiate backwash, available backwash scenarios, stop backwash sequence shall be available on this screen. All equipment such as valves shall be selectable for remote - manual control and when clicked shall open a popup screen as described here below in item no. 3.a. 2. AAF Backwash Sequencing Automation Screen: Based on specification section 13500 — Plant Control and Operating Descriptions, a screen showing all the automatic operations shall be provided for Opertor to select. This screen shall also have the default values, all values shall be Operator adjustable. 3. Additional popup screens shall be available as follows: a. Valve Control Screen — Each motor operated valve shall have Hand/Off /Auto, Open/Close, Alarms for ability to remote - manual control of all the valves. F. Equipment Supplier shall include additional 15% spare screens in base bid. The screens shall be developed during Owner meeting's and Startup. At a minimum 2 meetings are anticipated with the Owner upon submittal of the Screens to the Engineer for review. Preliminary meeting shall be held to show and tell the funcitionality of the screen, note comments. Final meeting shall be include PowerPoint presentation showing the finalized screens including any changes before On -site deployment. The integrator shall discuss SCADA upgrade plant and anticipated downtime of the current SCADA system. 3.06 SECURITY A. Using operator interface and operating system software, implement a security system to restrict access to parts of system. A minimum of 60 passwords shall be configured into the control system software. The system shall maintain an ASCII disk file logging all operators logged onto the system, alarm acknowledgments, commands issued and all database modifications for each password. Each password shall be definable as to the functions that the operator can perform. Provide following as a minimum: 1. Programmer - Access to all facilities including changing displays and logic. 13410 -19 083116 • • • 2. Supervisor - Access to all displays, change master set points and purge stale alarm messages. 3. Operator - Access to all displays, change normal operational sequences and acknowledge alarms. 4. Observer - Access to displays only. 3.07 ALARMING A. Alarm Management: For each process or system event classed as an alarm provide facilities for displaying and logging on system, acknowledgment, and purging of stale messages. Alarm events are derived from discrete inputs, analog trip values, logic combinations and computations as needed. Display both alarm events and returns to normal. Provide date /time stamps for events, descriptive message, and event type code. Use color combinations to distinguish following alarm states: Alarm- Unacknowledged, Alarm- Acknowledged, Normal- Unacknowledged, and Normal - Acknowledged. B. The software shall notify an operator of the occurrence of an alarm condition. The control system alarm history shall be stored in an ASCII file and shall be recallable by the operator using the report generator. Alarm messages shall take precedence over other functions. A minimum of the most recent 25 system alarms shall be directly available at the operator interface. Operator acknowledgment of one alarm shall not be considered as acknowledgment of any other alarm nor shall it inhibit reporting of subsequent alarms. Alarm data to be displayed and stored shall include: identification of the alarm; date and time to the nearest second of occurrence; device or sensor type; limit exceeded (if analog); engineering units; current value or status; alarm class; and alarm messages. C. Digital Alarms 1. Digital alarms shall be subject to immediate reporting, within the alarm response time, at the OIP. D. Analog Alarms 1. These alarms shall be subject to immediate reporting, within the alarm response time, at the OIP. The control panel analog readings shall be compared to predefined high and low limits, and alarmed to the OIP each time a value enters or returns from a limit condition. The program shall automatically change the high or low limits, or both, of any analog point, based on time scheduled operations as specified, allowing for a time interval before the new alarm limit becomes effective. For those applications where setpoint adjustments are made, the alarm limit shall be keyed to a finite deviation traveling with the setpoint. 13410 -20 083116 • • • E. Alarm Messages 1. Assignment of messages to a point shall be an operator editable function. Secondary messages shall be assignable by the operator for display to provide further information, such as telephone lists or maintenance functions, and shall be editable by the operator. F. Alarm Classes 1. Classes of alarms, which will be identified for each item, include class 1 and class 2 alarm conditions. Class 1 (Critical) shall include display and audible alarm at occurrence and at return-to- normal. Acknowledgment of class 1 alarms by the operator shall be required at occurrence and at return-to- normal. Class 2 (Informational) shall include display and audible alarm at occurrence and at return- to- normal. No acknowledgment of Class 2 alarms is required unless otherwise shown. G. Critical process alarms shall be derived from an actual field device connected to respective local process control panel or controller and not from the HMI programming software by calculation or other means. This should, however, not be interpreted to mean that that the HMI shall be excluded from performing supervisory alarm handling functions. H. The system integrator shall work to eliminate all nuisance equipment and process alarms during system commissioning, to the satisfaction of Engineer and Owner. At the completion of the work, the system integrator shall provide the Engineer and Owner certification that all instruments and control systems have been commissioned and are operating in accordance with the contract drawings and specification. 3.08 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Calibrate equipment in accordance with manufacturer's instructions to ranges or set points indicated on Drawings. B. Installation and Start-up: Equipment supplier shall have an established service facility from which qualified technical service personnel and parts may be dispatched upon call. Such a service facility shall be no more than 6 hours travel time from Site. 1. Equipment supplier shall provide an experienced, factory- trained, competent, and authorized service representative for a minimum of 3 times at Site, including once during installation and start-up and once during acceptance to inspect, check, and calibrate any part of system. Supplier's service representative shall revisit Site for 8 hours per day as often as necessary after installation until trouble is corrected and equipment has passed acceptance test and is operating satisfactorily to Engineer. 2. Third trip is after equipment has been accepted and shall be used to instruct Owner's personnel in aspects of operation and maintenance, such as fuse locations, use of 13410 -21 083116 • • • controls, instruction manuals, etc. Third trip shall be for duration of two, 8 -hour days at Owner's facility. C. Equipment supplier shall provide two, 8 -hour days of training for Owner's personnel in aspects of operation and maintenance such as use of controls, fuse locations, instruction manuals, etc. 1. Training and instructions at the plant shall be given by the Project Engineer assigned to the Project by the equipment supplier or other personnel as approved by Engineer. D. Digital Equipment Field Training: At conclusion of field acceptance tests, Contractor shall conduct a training course on site for Owner's personnel in use of system. 1. Course shall be 3 days duration and shall consist of hands -on use of system. 2. Written course materials shall be provided to each participant for use during instruction and to serve as a basic reference document after training. 3.09 TRAINING A. Operator Training Manuals 1. Training manuals shall be submitted twenty -one (21) days before Preliminary Operator Training is scheduled. After approval a copy of the training manual for each trainee plus two additional copies shall be delivered to the Engineer. Manuals shall include an agenda, the defined objectives for each lesson, and a detailed description of the subject matter for each lesson. Furnish audiovisual equipment and other training supplies and materials. Copies of the audiovisuals shall be delivered with the printed training manuals. The Owner reserves the right to videotape training sessions for later use. 2. Submit training schedule for approval. Approval of the Contractor's training schedule shall be obtained from the Engineer at least 10 days before the training. B. Contractor shall bear transportation and subsistence costs for the specified training. The cost shall include per diem allowance of $150 per day per person. Contractor shall arrange for training for Owner with a minimum of 6 -week notification of the training schedule prior to the actual course being provided. Scheduling of the courses and their contents shall be approved by Engineer and provided at a time and location agreeable to Owner. The course shall be conducted at locations normally established for such courses by manufacturers of the software and computer products. 13410 -22 083116 • • • 3.10 DEMONSTRATION A. Upon completion of installation and calibration, demonstrate functioning of equipment in accordance with requirements. Where possible, correct malfunctioning units at Site, then retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise, remove and replace with new or repaired units, and retest to demonstrate compliance. B. Failure to complete the project in the time agreed to and in compliance with the contract terms will result in liquidated damages in the amount of $500 per day. END OF SECTION 13410 -23 083116 • • SECTION 13413 OPTICAL FIBER CABLING SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Product and installation requirements for the following: 1. Fiber -optic (FO) Cables. 2. Fiber -optic Connectors, Couplers, and Patch Panels. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Submit in accordance with Section 01340, Shop Drawings covering the items included under this Section. Shop Drawing submittals shall include: 1. Product data for each type of product specified. 2. Product certificates, signed by the communication system manufacturers, certifying that the cables are suitable for the connected equipment as described in "Quality Assurance" Article below. B. Contract Closeout: Submit in accordance with Section 01700. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturers Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of equipment, of types and sizes required, and whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years. B. Connected Equipment Manufacturer Certifications: Where cables specified in this Section are used to provide signal paths for systems specified in other sections of these Specifications, or for systems furnished under other contracts, obtain review of the cable characteristics and certification for use with the connected system equipment by the connected equipment manufacturers. C. UL Compliance: For cables that may be run in plenum ceilings or other air - handling spaces, provide cables tested for compliance with applicable requirements of UL Standard 910, "Test Method for Fire and Smoke Characteristics of Electrical and Optical Fiber Cables Used in Air - Handling Spaces." In addition, provide FO cables that have passed the UL VW -1 flame test. 13413 -1 • • • D. EIA /TIA Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements of EIA Standards, EIA - 440, -455, -458, -475, -509, — 568 -b.3, and 598 -a pertaining to optical fiber cable and system component construction and installation. EIA /TIA- 455 -61, FOTP -61, Measurement of Fiber or Cable Attenuation Using an OTDR. E. Fiber Optics Experience: Contractor must be able to prove to the satisfaction of Owner that it has significant experience in the installation of fiber- optics cable systems. Installation must include installation of fiber- optics cable, fiber termination, knowledge of interconnect equipment, and a thorough knowledge of testing procedures. F. Labeling: Handwritten labels are not acceptable. All labels shall be machine printed on clear or opaque tape, stenciled onto adhesive labels, or type written onto adhesive labels. The font shall be at least 1/8 inch in height, block characters, and legible. The text shall be of a color contrasting with the label such that is may be easily read. If labeling tape is utilized, the font color shall contrast with the background. Patch panels shall exhibit workstation numbers or some type of location identifier, in sequential order, for all workstations or devices attached. Each fiber- optics cable segment shall be labeled at each end with its respective identifier. G. Fiber - Optics Interconnect Equipment (Patch Panels): Interconnect equipment shall be used in all fiber cable installations. Patch panels shall be mounted in the equipment racks or panel mounted. Interconnect equipment mounted in racks shall be affixed to the rack by at least 4 screws. All fiber- optics interconnect devices shall be assembled and installed in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. H. Patch Cords: Patch cords shall be provided for each fiber -optic port on the patch panel. Patch cords shall meet or exceed technical specifications of all installed fiber -optic cable. Patch cord connectors shall be matched with patch panel connector type and network fiber module connector type as required. 1.04 COMMISSIONING A. Subsequent to hook -ups of FO system to signal sources and destination equipment, operate systems to demonstrate proper functioning. Replace malfunctioning FO cabling system items with new materials, and then retest until satisfactory performance is achieved. 13413 -2 • • PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with specified requirements, manufacturers offering products which may be incorporated in Work include: 1. FO Cables: a. Corning Infinicor SX+ Optical Fiber, or Equal, for multi -mode applications. b. Corning NexCor Optical Fiber, or Equal, for single -mode applications. 2. FO Connectors and Couplers: a. AMP Netcon. b. AT &T Network Systems. c. Corning. d. Honeywell, Inc. e. ITT Corp. f. Thomas and Betts Corp. 3. FO Patch Panels: a. Panduit. b. Volition. 2.02 OPTICAL FIBER CABLING SYSTEMS A. Fabricate system using manufacturer's standard materials as indicated by published product information and in sizes, types, and performance characteristics as indicated. B. FO Cables: Factory fabricated, single channel, low loss glass type, fiber -optic multimode graded -index cables with the following operational and construction features: 1. Multi -mode Fibers: a. Cable Type shall be Coming FREEDM One Indoor /Outdoor Tight- Buffered Cable. b. Number of Fibers: 6 minimum or as listed on Drawings. c. Core Diameter: 50 microns or as listed on Drawings. d. Cladding Diameter: 125 microns or as listed on Drawings. e. Subunit Size: 2.0 mm or as listed on Drawings. 13413 -3 • • • f. Maximum Attenuation: Less than 2.5 dB /850 nm. g. Minimum Bandwidth: Greater than 500 MHz -km. h. Minimum Bend Radius (Unloaded): 10 cm (3.1 in). i. Operating Temperature Range: -20 to +70 degrees C. C. FO Connectors: Stainless steel, fiber -optic cable connectors, capable of terminating FO glass cables with diameters from 8 through 1,000 microns. Fabricate connectors with optical fiber, self - centering, axial alignment mechanisms. Provide ST style connectors as required or shown on Drawings. 2.03 SPARE PARTS A. Provide at end of project the following spare parts: 1. Provide five (5) Optical Fiber splice pigtails. 2. One (1) optical fiber splice kit including optical fiber tester. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas and conditions with the Installer present for compliance with requirements, and other conditions affecting the performance of optical fiber cabling system. Do not proceed with Work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to Installer. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install fiber -optic cables and associated equipment and devices in accordance with industry standards and manufacturer's written instructions. B. Install fiber -optic cable without damage to fibers, cladding, or jacket. Ensure that media manufacturer's recommended pulling tensions are not exceeded. Do not, at any time, bend cables to smaller radii than minimums recommended by manufacturer. C. Install FO cables simultaneously where more than one cable is being installed in same raceway. Use pulling lubricant where necessary; compound used must not deteriorate cable materials. Do not use soap. Use a pulling means, including fish tape, rope, and basket -weave grips, that will not damage media or raceway. D. No splices are allowed, except at indicated splice points. 13413 -4 3.03 GROUNDING • A. Provide grounding connections for FO cable and other system components as required p q by manufacturer's written instructions. 3.04 APPLICATIONS A. Install optical fiber cabling for project applications as detailed on drawings. 3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL • • A. Testing: Testing shall be done by Contractor with at least 5 years of experience in testing fiber -optic cabling systems. Contractor shall test each fiber strand. Owner reserves the right to have representation present during all or a portion of the testin2 process. Contractor must notify Owner 5 days prior to commencement of testin2. If Owner elects to be present during testing, test results will only be acceptable when conducted in the presence of Owner. Any fiber -optic cable left non - terminated at the discretion of Owner, shall be tested using an adequate light source to determine that all installed strands are not damaged. B. Fiber - Optics Cable: Each fiber strand shall undergo bi- directional testing for signal attenuation losses using power meter and light source. Testing shall also include Optical Time Domain Reflectometer (OTDR) at both 850 and 1,300 nanometers for all installed fiber strands. 1. Recommended Test Equipment: a. Multimode: Siecor OM -100F and OS -100D or equivalent power meter and light source. b. Multimode: Siecor OTDRPIus with appropriate modules for testing. 2. Tests: a. Multi -mode: Bi- directional signal attenuation at 850 and 1,300 nm. 3. Test Criteria: Signal loss of less than 10 dB through entire fiber path, including cable, couplers and jumpers. C. Documentation (Fiber Optic): Contractor shall provide documentation to include test results and as -built Drawings. Fiber Test Results: The results of the fiber testing shall be entered into the form "Fiber Attenuation Tests Results." Handwritten results are acceptable provided the test is neat and legible. Copies of test results are not acceptable. Only original signed copies will be acceptable. 13413 -5 • • 1. Each cable installed shall undergo complete testing in accordance with TIA /EIA TSB -67 to guarantee performance to this standard. 2. All required documentation shall be submitted within 30 days at conclusion of the project to Owner. 3. Test Criteria: Pass rate to conform to latest TIA /EIA Standards that incorporate link performance testing through entire path, including cable, couplers, and jumpers. D. Acceptance: Acceptance of the Data Communications System, by Owner, shall be based on the results of testing, functionality, and the receipt of documentation. 3.06 CLEANING A. Clean optical fiber cabling and components of dirt and construction debris upon completion of installation. 3.07 WARRANTY A. Fiber Optic cable and splices shall be provided with a 20 year full warranty covering material and labor. END OF SECTION 13413 -6 • SECTION 13430 CONTROL PANELS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. This Section applies to fabricated process control panels and hardware that are not part of an equipment suppliers pre - package and pre- engineered control system. B. Section Includes: 1. Control panels. 2. Switches, push- buttons, lights. 3. Relays. 4. Intrinsically safe isolator relays. 5. Timing devices. 6. Terminal blocks. 7. Surge protection devices. 8. Control power transformers. 9. UPS 1.02 SUBMITTALS • A. Shop Drawings: Submit in accordance with Division 1, Shop Drawings covering the items included under this Section. B. Contract Closeout: Submit in accordance with Division 1. C. Fabricated and pre- engineered panels are subject to this specification. D. Control panel drawings shall include at a minimum: • 1. Title page 2. Drawing index 3. Power one -line 4. Power wiring (with fuse type and size) 5. Panel layout with bill of material 6. PLC rack layout 7. Individual card layouts, indicating wiring to each device and scale of analog /digital signals 8. Terminal rotation 9. Dip switch, or jumper settings 10. Riser diagram or interconnection diagram 11. All drawings shall include wire numbers, type and size for wiring 13430 -1 083116 • • • 12. Loop drawings (meeting ISA 5.4 standards) 13. Panel elevation 14. Panel door tagging and components 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirements: 1. Codes, Ordinances, and Industrial Standards: Design, testing, assembly, and methods of installation for materials, electrical equipment, and accessories proposed under this Section shall conform to National Electric Code and to applicable State and local requirements. 2. UL listing and labeling of custom -built panels (UL 508) shall be adhered to under this Contract. All panels shall be fabricated by a UL panel shop and have a UL 508 label attached. 3. Workplace Electrical Safety: Comply with NFPA 70E, Standard for Electrical Safety in the Workplace. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with specified requirements, manufacturers offering products which shall be incorporated in Work include: 1. Switches, Push - Buttons, Lights: a. Allen - Bradley (Type 800T/H LED). b. Square D Company. 2. Relays: a. Allen- Bradley (Type 700 -HA, or 700 -P). b. Square D Co. c. Omron d. Phoenix Contact 3. Latching Relays: a. Allen- Bradley (Type 700 -PL). b. Potter - Brumfield c. Struthers -Dunn d. Phoenix Contact 4. Programmable Timers: a. Allen- Bradley (Type 700 -HR) 13430 -2 083116 • • 5. Terminal Blocks: a. Allen- Bradley b. Altech c. GE Consumer & Industrial d. Square D Co. e. Thomas & Betts f. Weidmueller g. Phoenix Contact 6. Fusible Terminal Blocks: a. Allen- Bradley b. Altech c. Square D Co. d. Weidmueller e. Phoenix Contact 7. Control Power Transformers: a. Allen- Bradley b. Sola c. Phoenix Contact 8. Wire Markers: a. Brady b. T &B 9. Surge Protection Devices: a. Phoenix Contact. b. DEHN 10. UPS: a. Eaton b. Best Power Technologies 2.02 CONTROL PANELS A. Sheet Metal Construction: 1. Panels shall be rated NEMA 4X fabricated from sheet stainless steel welded and bolted into a rigid self - supporting structure a maximum of 90 inches high and a minimum of 20 inches deep. Overall length shall be coordinated with space requirements as indicated by Drawings. Changes in length from that shown on Drawings must be brought to attention of Engineer within 90 days of Contract Award. Cost to modify floor plan, wall opening, or concrete pad shall be at Contractor's expense after this 90 -day period. Panel face layouts shown on Drawings are intended to indicate relative position of all components. Supplier shall fix exact locations and overall dimensions to meet requirements of its equipment. 13430 -3 083116 • 2. Panel bodies shall be 12 gauge minimum stainless steel for panels up to 42 inches in width, and 10 gauge minimum stainless steel for panels exceeding 42 inches in width. Panel subplates shall be same gauge as enclosure. Stiffening members shall be provided for strength and stiffness as required. 3. A minimum of 3 inches shall be provided between edge of panel subplate and outside walls of panel body to ensure adequate wire -way space for external wires entering panel. Panel subplate shall be mounted on collar studs for easy removal. Print pockets shall be provided on each panel. Brackets welded to inside of panel, complete with lights, shall be provided on panels where indicated by Drawings. 4. Identification plates shall be laminated phenolic with black letters engraved on a white background and mounted with screws or double -back adhesive foam tape. 5. All components inside panel shall have identification plates. This includes instruments, relays, switches, circuit boards in plug -in racks, etc. Identification plates shall include engineering symbols (FBQ -1, SW -3, FIC -4, CR -1, etc.). Switches and circuit breakers inside panel shall have names (Horn, Audio Tone, Panel Power, etc.) on identification plates as well as engineering symbol. 6. Identification plates shall be located on or adjacent to device they are identifying and shall be readable without looking around, under, or on top of device to find identification plate. B. Access: 1. Wall- and/or floor - mounted control panels shall have continuous piano- hinged doors for ease of access. Door openings shall expose a minimum of 80 percent of panel interior. Door openings shall be sealed with a 0.125 -inch thick minimum cellular neoprene gasket cemented with oil - resistant adhesive and held in place with a retaining strip. Print pockets shall be provided on each door. Two -door enclosures shall have a removable center post. Panels with separated control and power shall be partitioned to allow access to lower voltage control panel without being exposed to power components. Panel doors less than 40 inches high shall be equipped with a 2 -point latching mechanism. Panel doors 40 inches high or more shall be equipped with a 3 -point latching mechanism. 2. Components and terminals shall be accessible without removing another component except covers. Swing out sections shall be used if mounting space is required that is not normally accessible. C. Finish: 1. Panel face openings for mounting equipment shall be smoothly finished cut with counterboring and trim strips provided as required to give a neat finished appearance. Bezels shall be used on all front panel- mounted devices to cover panel 13430 -4 083116 • • • cutouts. A chrome - plated or stainless steel bezel shall be used at parting line of panels that have shipping splits or at parting line of panels placed end to end. 2. Graphic plates, when used, shall be fastened to panel frame with fasteners not visible from front of graphic. 3. After fabrication, exterior panel surfaces shall be powder coated white with sun shields mounted on the top and sides. Panel interior shall be painted white, ANSI No. 51. 4. Panels shall have identical exterior finishes as selected by Engineer. Panel finishes on matching colored panels shall be identical. It is supplier's responsibility to achieve this result, especially for panels fabricated in different shops. D. Electrical: 1. Internal panel wiring shall be 19 strand No. 16 AWG, 900C MTW, Class C stranded, or THHN /THWN approved as 900C MTW. All panel wiring not run in wire ducts shall be bundled and tied. Each wire shall be identified at both ends with same exclusive number. Number shall be same number shown on control schematic. Number shall not be used again for any other purpose. Wires marked differently on each end will not be accepted. Wire markers shall be provided on end of each wire at termination point. 2. Control wiring associated with control circuits de- energized when main disconnect is opened shall be color -coded red. Control wiring associated with control circuits which remains "hot" when main disconnect is opened shall be color -coded yellow. DC control wiring shall be color -coded blue. Ground wires shall be color -coded green. Terminal blocks shall be numbered in numerical order. Yellow wiring leaving panel shall be brought to an isolated set of terminal blocks. 3. Provide an instrument common bus 0.1 by 0.5 by 6 -inch minimum in enclosure and isolated from enclosure. A separate instrument common wire shall be run from each common terminal on an instrument to instrument common bus. Instrument common wires looped from one terminal to another and then to instrument common bus will not be accepted. 4. Instrument common bus shall be connected to power supply common with a wire or wire braid strap as short as practical and of sufficient capacity to prevent troublesome voltage drop. Common terminals and common bus for instrument common shall be tagged "Instrument Common." Instrument signal wires of 4 -20 mA or 1 -5V shall be shielded wire. Telephone wires and telemetry equipment interconnection wires shall be shielded wires. 5. Provide a copper ground bus 0.1 by 0.5 by 6 -inch minimum in enclosure to which all instrument grounds and panel enclosures are tied. Separate ground wire shall be run from instrument enclosure ground terminal directly to ground bus. Instrument 13430 -5 083116 • ground wires looped from one instrument to another will not be accepted. Under no circumstances shall neutral side of power source or any other terminals used for grounding power circuits be used as an instrument common. 6. Wires to internal components shall be connected to inside of terminal strip. Wires to external components shall be connected to outside of terminal strip. No more than 2 wires shall be connected to one terminal point. 7. Panel wire duct shall be provided between each row of components and adjacent to each terminal strip. Wire ducts shall be a minimum of 1 -inch wide and 3 inches deep with removable snap -on covers and perforated walls for easy wire entrance. Wire ducts shall be constructed of nonmetallic materials with voltage insulation in excess of maximum voltage carried therein. 8. Single phase, 60 hertz power at voltage shown on Drawings shall be supplied to main disconnect. Panel fabricator shall provide any additional voltages and power requirements at control panel to meet requirements of equipment contained therein. 9. Relays, timers, etc., installed on panel subplate shall be provided with a minimum spacing between component and wire duct of 1.5 inches above and 1 inch below. Minimum spacing between adjacent components shall be 0.25 inch. Relays, timers, etc., shown in schematics are intended to show function. Additional relays may be required in conjunction with items shown to provide total number of contacts required. Where limit, pressure, float switches, etc., are used and more than SPDT contacts are indicated by schematics, provide additional contacts required by using auxiliary relays. However, if a DPDT switch is called for, using a SPDT with a relay will not be accepted. All control and pilot devices such as relays, timers, etc., shall be 120V, 3 amp rated except where noted with coil voltage as required. One N.O. spare contact shall be provided on each relay. E. Panel /Subplate Layout: 1. Panel face - mounted equipment shall consist of pilot lights, push- buttons, selector switches, meters, indicating timer, etc. Spacing between horizontal rows of components shall be 1.5 inches minimum; spacing between vertical columns of components shall be 1.875 inches minimum. Components shall be grouped and/or located as indicated on Drawings. Distance from bottom row of components to floor shall be not less than 36 inches. Top row of recording and indicating instruments shall be centered approximately 60 inches above floor. Maximum height for annunciator windows shall be 85 inches above floor. In general, indicating lights, push- buttons, etc., shall be mounted in accordance with sequence of operation from left to right and top to bottom. 2. A minimum of 2 inches shall be provided between terminal strips and wire ducts or terminal strips and terminal strips. In general, terminal strips shall be mounted on vertical edges of subplate. Where terminal strips are mounted side -by -side, 13430 -6 083116 • • • terminals shall be elevated 1.5 inches above subplate to allow wires to pass underneath. 3. Subplates shall have a minimum of 15 percent spare mounting space, and terminal strips shall have a minimum of 20 percent spare terminal blocks. F. Panels shall include lockout and tagout procedures designed to meet all OSHA and Owner requirements. G. The requirement for air conditioners, heat exchangers, and fans shall be determined from the required heat calculations of the enclosure and the applicable ambient air temperature and humidity for the area. H. PLC panels shall include a folding shelf, mounted to the exterior of the panel. The shelf shall support instruments and test equipment used to install and maintain electrical components in the enclosure. The shelf shall support laptop computers, monitoring units and other equipment used with programmable controllers. The shelf shall be installed on the outside surface of the enclosure, and automatically lock in the horizontal position when raised. When not in use, the shelf shall fold down and project out no more than 1 in. (25 mm) from the mounting surface. 1. Construction: 304 stainless steel with a brushed finish 2. Listing: Maintain UL /CSA Type 4, 4X and 12 rating when properly installed on enclosure. I. Provide an externally accessible Ethernet PLC communication port on the front door of the panel to support the use of a laptop computer for programming the PLC processor without having to open the enclosure. Unit will not change the enclosure rating, and will be rated the same as the enclosure. 1. Housing: Cast aluminum base 2. Latch: Type 304 Stainless Steel 3. Cover: Polycarbonate, UV rated, V -0 Flame rated 4. Gasket: Thermoplastic elastomer 5. Insert Material: Acrylic UL94HB 2.03 SWITCH, PUSH BUTTONS, LIGHTS A. Selector switches shall be 120 VAC rated, oil -tight construction with standard operator knob. B. Start push buttons shall be 120 VAC rated, oil -tight construction with extended guard and black color insert. 13430 -7 083116 C. Stop push- buttons shall have a half -guard with red color insert. Contacts shall be rated NEMA B -150 and P -150. D. Pilot lights shall be push -to -test oil -tight construction, LED with cap colors and voltages as required. Nameplates for each switch and light shall conform to manufacturer's series and type with engraving as called for on Drawings. 2.04 RELAYS A. Control Relays: Switching and output relays shall be plug -in type with contacts rated 120 VAC, 3 amp with 120 VAC or 24 VDC coil, indicating light, manual operator, and plastic transparent cover. Relays shall have a retainer mechanism to prevent loosening from vibration. Relays shall not be used for switching 1 -5 VDC or 4 -20 mA signals associated with instruments. B. Intrinsically Safe Isolator Relay: 1. Intrinsically safe relay shall be provided between raw sewage floats and control circuits or where shown on Drawings. 2. Relay shall operate at 120 VAC plus 10 percent with a switch rating of 1 amp rms and maximum holding current of 20 milliamp for solid -state devices. Relay shall be rated for ambient temperatures of 32 degrees F to 120 degrees F. 3. Output shall be N.O. or N.C. Equipment supplier is responsible for choosing proper output for float specified and circuits specified. If float and circuit are not defined, intrinsically safe relay shall be of such a polarity as to fail in a safe condition for function being performed. 4. When intrinsically safe relay is required in panels exposed to outdoor temperatures, relays shall be rated for ambient temperatures of —40 to 120 degrees F, or thermostatically controlled heaters must be added to panel to maintain an ambient in panel of 32 to 120 degrees F. 2.05 TIMING DEVICES A. Synchronous and solid -state timers shall be plug -in type. B. Synchronous timers with ON or OFF delay cycles shall operate at 120 VAC, 60 hertz. Time interval shall be as shown on Drawings or as required. C. Solid -state timers with ON or OFF delay cycles shall operate at 120 VAC, 60 hertz. Solid -state device may be analog or digital in operation. Time interval shall be as shown on Drawings or as required. D. Synchronous repeat cycle timers with adjustable ON -OFF cycles shall operate at 120 VAC, 60 hertz. Time interval shall be as shown on Drawings or as required. 13430 -8 083116 • • • E. Solid -state repeat cycle timers with adjustable ON -OFF cycles shall operate at 120 VAC, 60 hertz. Solid -state device may be analog or digital in operation. Time interval shall be as shown on Drawings or as required. F. Sequence programmers for 115 VAC, 60 hertz operation with cam settings shall be as shown on Drawings or as required. Timers shall be 24 -hour synchronous -type unless shown otherwise. Where momentary contact closures are required for batching or other operations, contact closure shall not exceed one second. Intervals shall be divisible into 24 hours by 1, 2, 3, 4, 6 and 8. G. Programmable Timer: Programmable timers shall be a solid -state time switch suitable for flush mounting on a control panel. Timer shall have a LCD digital display for programming and indicating time of day and day of week. Built -in rechargeable battery shall retain program during loss of power. 1. Programming shall be done by front - mounted push buttons. Timer shall be capable of storing 10 individual programs which shall consist of a switch -on time, switch - off time, and days of week selected. 2. 5 Amp rated contacts. 3. Timer range from 0.5 s....300 hr. 4. Multi- voltage inputs. 2.06 TERMINAL BLOCKS A. All terminal blocks for control wiring shall have minimum continuous current capacity of 15A at rated voltage 300V or 600V. The minimum size of terminal blocks shall be 2.5mm sq. and be suitable for clamping wire between 22 AWG to 10 AWG. B. Where terminal blocks are used to send or receive signals to or from field devices, such as actuators, sensor, transducer, emergency stop etc., disconnect type terminal block, allowing easy trouble- shooting, shall be used. The number of operations of no -load disconnection shall not be less than 30 operations. C. Fuse terminals, where specified and used, shall not have any loose parts, such as screw fuse cap which may fall off when replacing fuse. Fuse terminals with hinged cover shall be used. D. Terminals shall have safe and easy means of commoning adjacent terminals. Quick fit, screw -less, touch -proof jumpers shall be used. E. Terminal blocks used to connect cables of different voltage of shall be segregated into groups, and be preferably identified by different color. Each group of terminal block 13430 -9 083116 • • • shall be provided with a group marker carrier. Cable having the same ferrule number shall be terminated at adjacent terminal, and connected by means of cable jumper at the terminal blocks. 30% spare terminal blocks shall be provided for each type of the terminal block. F. Terminal blocks shall be color -coded according to the following coloring scheme: Black 120V power circuits de- energized when main disconnect is opened. White 120V neutral conductors. Red 120V control circuits de- energized when main disconnect is opened. Yellow Control circuits which remain hot when main disconnect is opened. Blue Terminal blocks for DC wiring. Gray Terminal blocks for shields in DC wiring. Green Ground terminal blocks. G. For terminals associated with 120V nonisolated input cards, individually fused terminal blocks shall be used for 120V power to field devices. H. Terminal blocks shall be raised so that the top of the block is flush with the top of the adjacent wire duct. 2.07 CONTROL POWER TRANSFORMERS A. Control power transformers shall be sized to handle in -rush currents and to accommodate continuous load of circuits plus 25 percent future load with 5 percent or less voltage drop. Transformer primary voltage shall be as indicated on Drawings. 2.08 ANNUNCIATOR A. Annunciator shall utilize standard ISA-S18.1 sequence "A." Provide a separately mounted electronic audio tone device, horn, test, and silence buttons. B. Test button shall sequence annunciator from input to output of auxiliary contacts, testing all functions and indicator lights in annunciating sequence. 2.09 SURGE PROTECTION DEVICES A. Surge Suppressors: 1. General: a. To prevent against induced lightning currents on signal lines, surge suppression shall be installed on any analog or digital signals that leave the building envelope and extend underground. Point -of -use surge suppression shall be installed on any instruments located outside the envelope of the electrical building. Outdoor mounted control panels shall have surge suppression installed on any analog or digital signals. 13430 -10 083116 • • • b. Construction: First -stage high- energy metal oxide varistor and second - stag'e bipolar silicon avalanche device separated by series impedance; includes grounding wire, stud, or terminal. c. Response: 5 nanoseconds maximum. d. Recovery: Automatic. e. Temperature Range: Minus 20 degrees C to plus 85 degrees C. 2. Suppressors on 120 Vac Power Supply Connections: a. Occurrences: Tested and rated for a minimum of 50 occurrences of C62.41 Category B test waveform. b. First -Stage Clamping Voltage: 350 volts or less. c. Second -Stage Clamping Voltage: 210 volts or less. d. Continuous Operation: Power supplies for one four -wire transmitter or receiver: 5 amps minimum at 130 Vac. All other applications: 30 amps minimum at 130 Vac. 3. Suppressors on Analog Signal Lines: a. Test Waveform: Linear 8 microsecond rise in current form amps to a peak current value followed by an exponential decay of current reaching one -half the peak value in 20 microseconds. b. Surge Rating: Tested and rated for 50 occurrences of 2,000 -amp peak test. 1) DC Clamping Voltage: 20 to 40 percent above operating voltage for circuit. 2) DC Clamping Voltage Tolerance: Less than plus or minus 10 percent. 3) Maximum Loop Resistance: 18 ohms per conductor. 4. Physical Characteristics: a. Mounted in Enclosures: Encapsulated in flame retardant epoxy. b. For Analog Signals Lines: DEHN series. c. For Digital Signal Lines: DEHN type UTB series or approved equal. d. For 120 Vac Supply Lines: DEHN e. Field Mounted at Two -Wire Instruments: 1) Encapsulated in stainless steel pipe nipples. 13430 -11 083116 • • • 2) DEHN series. f. Field Mounted at Four -Wire Instruments: With 120 Vac outlet, ac circuit breaker, and 10 -ohm resistors on signal lines, all in enclosure. 1) Enclosure: a) NEMA 4X fiberglass or Type 316 stainless steel with door. b) Maximum Size: 12 inches by 12 inches by 8 inches deep. 2) Manufacturer and Product: DEHN series. 2.010 UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SYSTEM A. Uninterruptible Power System (UPS) shall be furnished to provide a reliable source of uninterruptible power with no break in AC output power during a complete or partial interruption of incoming line power. UPS shall include audio /visual alarms. UPS shall be UL listed. B. Rating: 120 VAC, 60 Hz, 1.4KVA /1.0KW minimum to provide uninterrupted conditioned power, fully loaded conditions for 15 minutes. C. Description: On line dual track power conditioner and true (0 ms transfer time) uninterruptible power supply providing isolation, line regulation and conditioning, using sealed 48 VDC maintenance free batteries and switch mode power supply for uninterrupted power with 0.5 to 0.7 power factor and 2.7 to 3.5 crest factor. D. Required Features: 1. Lighting and Surge Protection: Inherent 2000: One spike attenuation. 2. Regulation: One to three percent load regulation with less than 2pF effective coupling capacitance for line to load. 3. Output Waveform: Computer grade sine wave with three percent maximum single harmonic and five percent maximum total harmonic distortion. 4. Output Frequency: 60 Hz ±0.5 Hz. 5. Operating Temperature: 1 °C to 40 °C. 6. Relative Humidity: Five to 90 percent non - condensing. 7. Computer Interface: RS232 port for display of 22 meter functions and 15 alarm functions. 8. Input Protection: Independent battery charger fuse and DC fuses. 9. Output Protection: Inherently current limited ferro- resonant transformer. 10. Battery Charger: Two -step charger, 8 A and 2 A. 11. AC Input: 120 VAC, 60Hz, single phase, +15 percent, -20 percent. 12. AC Output: 120 VAC, 60Hz, single phase, +3 percent, -3 percent. E. Products and Manufacturers: Provide one of the following: 1. Eaton. 13430 -12 083116 • • • 2. Best Power Technologies 3. Or Equal. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Examination, Installation, Field Quality Control, Demonstration: In accordance with Section 13410: Basic Instrumentation, Monitoring and Control Requirements. B. Examination to include the minimum: 1. Vacuum interior of cubicles and remove foreign material. 2. Wipe clean with a lint -free cloth insulators, bushings, bus supports, etc. 3. Check and adjust time delay, under - voltage devices, phase relay, over - current relays, etc., as required by coordination study or ENGINEER. 4. Equipment with two (2) or more sources of power connected by tie breakers, transfer switches, or generator receptacles shall be checked for rotation from each possible combination of power sources. Power sources must have the same phase sequence for each source throughout entire facility. 5. Check exposed bolted power connections for tightness. 6. Check operation of breakers, contactors, etc., and control and safety interlocks. 7. Check tightness of bolted structural connections. 8. Check leveling and alignment of enclosures. 9. Check operating parts and linkages for lubrication, freedom from binding, vibration, etc. 10. Check tightness and correctness of control connections at terminal blocks, relays, meters, switches, etc. 11. Clean auxiliary contacts and exposed relay contacts after vacuuming C. Arc Flash labels: 1. Contractor shall calculate and provide arc flash labels per NFPA 70E. END OF SECTION 13430 -13 083116 • SECTION 13450 PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC CONTROLLERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Programmable Logic Controller (PLC): a. Central processing unit. b. Process input /output. B. Related Work Described Elsewhere: 1. Basic Instrumentation, Monitoring, and Control Requirements: Section 13410. C. The new Adsorption Control Panel System (CP -130) will be configured to communicate via fiber optic to existing Water Treatment Plant No. 1 CompactLogix controller located in panel CP -110. • 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Submit in accordance with Division 1, Shop Drawings covering the items included under this Section. B. Contract closeout: Submit in accordance with Division 1. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE • A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Manufacturer shall be regularly engaged in manufacturing equipment complying with requirements of these Specifications. 1.04 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Contractor shall purchase 1 -year upgrade and technical support warranties for all software purchased under this Section. As part of these services, there shall be no intermediaries. They shall be between Owner and OEM. 13450 -1 083116 • • • PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with specified requirements, manufacturers offering products which shall be incorporated in Work include: 1. Programmable Logic Controller (PLC): a. Allen Bradley CompactLogix 2. Program Development Software: a. Allen Bradley RSLogix 5000 2.02 PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC CONTROLLER (PLC) A. Develop programs for execution on PLC using development software supplied under that Section. Logic shall perform functions required to control processes and equipment as shown on Drawings and/or as specified in this section. Develop complete cross - references for ladder logic and complete input/output listings. 1. Operating System a. The PLC shall maintain a point database in its memory that includes all parameters, constraints and the latest value or status of all points connected to the PLC. Execution of the PLC application programs shall use the data in memory resident files. All code shall be defined as a mix of function blocks, ladder logic diagrams, sequential function charts and text programming. Programming methods and interactions shall be based on IEC 61131 -3. Combinations of the programming methods are allowed within a single controller. The operating system shall allow loading of software locally or from the central station. It shall also support data entry and diagnostics using an operator interface panel attached directly to the PLC. 1) Startup: The PLC shall have startup software that causes automatic commencement of operation without human intervention, including startup of all connected I/O functions. A PLC restart program based on detection of power failure at the PLC shall be included in the PLC software. The restart program shall include start time delays between successive commands to prevent demand surges or overload trips. 2) Failure Mode: Upon failure for any reason, the PLC shall perform an orderly shutdown and force all PLC outputs to a predetermined (failure mode) state, consistent with the failure modes shown and the associated control device. 13450 -2 083116 • • • B. Analog Input: Analog inputs to system shall be in form of differential (non - grounded) direct current voltages. Input circuitry shall be high- impedance such that external sensing circuits will not be adulterated by presence of this equipment. In all cases this equipment shall be passive with respect to analog sensing circuits. External power supplies shall be provided as necessary. Provide a minimum of 20% spare analog inputs. 1. Milliampere loops shall be sensed in concert with precision resistors appropriately sized. Such resistors shall be applied at termination point in a way that input card removal does not affect loop continuity. Each analog signal shall be connected to system via a barrier -type terminal strip. 2. Input impedance shall be a minimum of 10 megohms and common mode rejection shall be 120 dB or better. Accuracy shall by plus 0.1 percent full scale and resolution shall be 25 percent. Analog to digital conversion shall yield a signed 12- bit integer. Provide 8 inputs per card. C. Analog Outputs: Control signals in form of 4 -20 mA analog signals into 500 ohms shall be provided. Each analog output shall be provided on a barrier -type terminal strip. Provide a minimum of 20% spare analog outputs. 1. Analog output modules shall be provided to interface each output to appropriate terminal strip. Each output shall be continually maintained by a sample and hold circuit with a drift rate no greater than 1 percent in 12 hours. Digital to analog conversion shall accept signed 12 -bit integers. Provide 4 outputs per card. D. Discrete Inputs: Discrete inputs to be monitored shall consist of isolated dry contract closures and 120 VAC inputs as shown. Barrier -type terminal strips capable of terminating inputs shall be provided. Provide a minimum of 20% spare discrete inputs. 1. A discrete input circuit board shall be equipped with a photo isolation for each discrete input. Noise and contact bounce less than 20 milliseconds shall be rejected. Provide 16 inputs per card. E. Discrete Outputs: Control signals in form of discrete outputs shall be provided. Each discrete control signal shall be provided on a barrier -type terminal strip. They shall make use of relays or zero -angle fired triacs having a capability of at least 2 amps. They shall include any necessary arc suppression or other conditioning circuitry to ensure their proper operation in conjunction with field elements specified. Provide a minimum of 20% spare discrete outputs. 1. Each output shall be fused and shall be equipped with a status indicator. A blown fuse indicator shall also be provided. 2. Outputs used to control devices external to enclosure in which module is located shall be isolated type, allowing use of a different external 120 VAC power source for each output. Outputs used to control devices within enclosure in which module is located need not be isolated. Provide 16 outputs per card. 13450 -3 083116 • • • 3. Outputs used to control devices external to enclosure in which module is located shall be relay type. Outputs used to control devices within enclosure in which module is located may be zero -angle fired triacs where compatible with devices. F. Rack Configuration: Provide UO to meet requirements shown on Drawings, plus 20 percent spare I/O of each type used. I/O assignments must not put more than 50 percent of similar equipment on same card to prevent catastrophic failures based on loss of 1 card. Equipment rack layout must allow for addition of 20 percent more cards per rack; minimum space 2 slots. This requirement is totaled for each rack; it in not based on overall network. 2.03 DATA HIGHWAYS A. Link the PLC's, Operator Interface Computers and associated equipment into an integrated network. PLC rack shall be equipped with communication channels as depicted on Drawings. B. Plant -wide Networks: 1. PLCs shall include an Ethernet Adapter port where shown on Drawings. The selected messaging protocol for this port shall be Ethernet and shall provide high throughput with error detection and correction. Reliability shall be achieved through use of appropriate check sums, parity checking, redundant messages, and acknowledgment/rejection of messages. Networking software shall be open systems interconnect compliant. 2. The network shall operate at a speed of 10M bits per second or faster. Network protocol shall be carrier sense multiple access /collision detection (CSMA/CD) in compliance with IEEE 802.3. Alternate protocols conforming to IEEE 802 may be used only upon written permission granted by Engineer. C. Fiber -Optic Converters: 1. Provide fiber -optic communication compatible with PLC hardware and communication protocols. Converters shall be stand -alone or rack - mounted as shown on Drawings. Converters shall use multimode fiber, which matches existing plant fiber, and Type ST mating connectors. Transmit launch power shall be -15 dbm and receive sensitivity shall be -32 dbm. D. Provide cables as required to interconnect each network component. Provide all cables and connectors for programmable products. Cables shall be installed in conduit and /or underground duct under Division 16. Cables shall be shipped to Site in bulk with connectors not attached. 2.04 PROGRAM DEVELOPMENT SOFTWARE A. Licensed copies of RSLogix program development software will not be required. 13450 -4 083116 • • • PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 Examination, Installation, Field Quality Control, Demonstration: In accordance with Section 13410: Basic Instrumentation, Monitoring and Control Requirements. The following are the minimum I/O anticipated for the new PLC located in CP -130: 1. UPS — Signals — ON Battery, Low Battery, On Bypass 2. Valve #' — 250 -1 &2, 121 -A &B through 125 -A &B - Signals (Typical for 12 valves) — Open Command/ Close Command/ In Remote/ Valve Open/ Valve Closed/ Valve Fail. 3. PLC Communication Failure 4. Power On. The valves 250 -1 & 2 shall be rewired from CP -110 to the new CP -130 provided in this contract, as shown on Electrical drawings. As part of this Contract, Integrator shall update the existing SCADA system, to remap the signals rewired to the new CP- 130 -PLC, including any programming associated with these valves for automation of other processes currently in use at the Plant. END OF SECTION 13450 -5 083116 SECTION 13500 • PLANT CONTROL AND OPERATING DESCRIPTIONS • • PART 1 — GENERAL 1.01 INTRODUCTIONS A. The purpose of the Plant Control and Operating Descriptions is to provide a detailed description of the control, monitoring and alarm functional requirements associated with process control strategy for the Plant's control system (PCS) to operate the backwash sequencing of Arsenic Adsorber Filters (AAF) located in the City of Clearwater - Reverse Osmosis WTP No. 1. Each control strategy is divided into nine (9) sections: 1. Overview: This section provides a basic performance description as an introductory guide. 2. Monitor: This section provides required equipment operation status, current process variable measurements, totaling process variable measurements, and active equipment control mode status that are to be monitored (`Monitor' does not include alarms): a. Equipment operation status includes OPEN or CLOSED position; ON or OFF; and LOW, HIGH or OFF. (OFF is also referred to `READY' in the electrical schematics wiring diagrams.) b. Current process variable measurements include level, pressure, temperature, flow. c. Totaling process variable measurements include daily, monthly, and annual total measurements; as well as, equipment cumulative runtimes. d. Active equipment control mode status includes REMOTE selected in the field; MANUAL or AUTO selected from the control system interface; current sequence steps. 3. Control: This section provides required modes of equipment operation, mathematical algorithms, proportional- integral- derivative (PID) controller, and sequencing steps. This section assumes the equipment is placed in REMOTE (from the field). If the equipment is not in REMOTE then the described controls are disabled and the equipment is not available for the PCS. 13500 -1 011717 • • • 4. Transfer Mode: This section provides the functional requirements of transferring from one control mode to another control mode. Where the term ` bumpless transfer' is used to describe the transfer mode. Bumpless transfer is the ability to seamlessly go from one mode to another mode without interrupting the equipment operation. 5. Interlock: This section provides required control interaction between two or more devices and override functions to protect equipment and process performance under normal operations. `Interlocks' does not include override actions caused by field generated alarms, equipment or instrument failure, and power outage. 6. Alarm: This section provides required annunciation, control action and priority of field generated alarms, logic generated alarms, and logic generated warnings. Logic generated alarms and warnings are identified with a ;Q. symbol in the control strategy. These alarms include: • BAD Analog Input: An analog input is outside of the 4 to 20 mA range for 30 seconds then issue a BAD input alarm. • FAIL -to- CLOSE: A CLOSE command is issued and there is no CLOSE status feedback to indicate valve has reached full closed position within 45 seconds or the CLOSE status is not present while valve is commanded to CLOSED position then issue a FAIL -to -CLOSE alarm. • FAIL -to -OPEN: A OPEN command is issued and there is no OPEN status feedback to indicate valve has reached full open position within 45 seconds or the OPEN status is not present while valve is commanded to OPEN position then issue a FAIL -to -OPEN alarm. • FAIL -to -RUN: A START command is issued and there is no ON status feedback to indicate device has started within 45 seconds or the ON status is not present while device is running then issue a FAIL -to -RUN alarm. • FAIL -to -STOP: A STOP command is issued and there is still an ON status feedback after a 45 seconds from issuing a STOP command then issues a FAIL -to -STOP alarm. • FEEDBACK FAILURE: A PID controller modulates a valve position or pump speed to maintain a process set point under AUTO mode and the controller's feedback used to determine off set from set point is `d 5% from the set point for 45 seconds then issue a FEEDBACK FAILURE alarm. 13500 -2 011717 • • • • FORCE OVERRIDE: A failure condition occurs that requires the control logic to override a calculated value used for controlling a device such as valve position or pump speed, etc. • NO STANDBY AVAILABLE: The control strategy has a `duty' and `standby' service operation under AUTO mode and there is only one pump available for AUTO control then issue a NO STANDBY AVAILABLE warning. • TRACKING FAILURE: A variable speed device or modulating valve is commanded to a speed or position percentage and the feedback from the drive tachometer or actuator positioner is V 5% from the commanded speed or position for 45 seconds then issue a TRACKING FAILURE alarm. • POWER OUTAGE FORCED STOP: The equipment was running under the PCS control in MANUAL mode prior to loss of power and due to the power outage, the equipment was stopped. Issue a POWER OUTAGE FORCED STOP alarm upon this condition. In addition, alarm priority levels are assigned a number from 1 to 4. The numbers are categorized by the urgency of the alarm condition and are as follows: Priorit }' Description 1 Human safety in Danger /Chemical Spill Potential/Toxic Gas Leak. 2 Equipment or system failure; or interlock to shutdown equipment to prevent mechanical damage. 3 Control override to prevent jeopardizing process performance or possible mechanical damage. 4 Warning of potential problem effecting process performance or possible mechanical damage. 7. Fault Mode: This section provides the functional control requirements in the event that there is an equipment or instrument failure. An equipment failure is defined as the inability to control or monitor a device placed under REMOTE control due to an alarm condition. An instrument failure is defined as the inability to monitor a device due to an alarm condition. 8. Interface: This section provides a description of the physical electrical connection for the loop input/output signal. This section is for reference only. The actual physical connection is to be field verified. 9. Power Outage: This section provides functional control requirements in the event of a loss of power and the functional control requirements upon power restoration. This section assumes a power outage to be detected by the 13500 -3 011717 • • • transfer of normal to generator power for all processes except Lake Murray Pump Station. 1.02 GENERAL FUNCTION A. All values shown in Control Strategies are to be adjustable. The values shown are only initial values and are to be tuned during startup. All values inputted become default values and remain until changed by the operator. Each successive time the strategy is initiated the default values are used and no values are required to be inputted by the operator unless the operator chooses a value change. B. During process start-up, inhibit alarms required for the Control Strategies that cause a nuisance alarm. Once the equipment is operating all alarms are available in the event of a failure. All logic generated process alarms such as low pressure, high turbidity, low low level, etc. are to be provided with separate adjustable delay timers to prevent nuisance alarms from occurring during equipment start -up, equipment shutdown or a process spike. 1. Overview - This section provides a basic performance description as an introductory guide. The Arsenic Adsorber Filters (AAF) are pressurized filters (two, tagged as STS -A & STS -B) that capture and store arsenic from chlorinated raw water. They are a critical component of the water treatment process at WTP No. 1 and assist in reducing arsenic levels. The AAF — Backwash system is comprised of: 250 -2 Raw Water Inlet MOV 250 -1 Potable Inlet MOV 253 Backwash Outlet MOV 121A Vessel A - Raw /Backwash to Inlet 115 Common Backwash Valve MCV 123A Vessel A - Raw /Backwash to Outlet 125A Vessel A - Outlet to Decant/Vessel B 124A Vessel A - Inlet to Decant/from Vessel B 122A Vessel A - Outlet to Process Blending 12113 Vessel B - Raw/Backwash to Inlet 123B Vessel B - Raw/Backwash to Outlet 125B 124B B - Inlet to Decant/from'Vessel A 122B 114 Common Backwash Flow Vessel B - Outlet to Decant/Vessel A Vessel Vessel B - Outlet to Process Blending 2. Monitor - This section provides required equipment operation status, current 13500 -4 011717 • • • process variable measurements, totaling process variable measurements, and active equipment control mode status that are to be monitored (`Monitor' does not include alarms). • PDIT — 251 STS -A Differential Pressure • PDIT — 252 STS -B Differential Pressure • High Service Pumps (min. 2) — (RUN, FAULT, SPEED, NOT IN AUTO) • Dual Media Pressure Filters — Hand Position • FIT — 251 STS -A Flow meter • FIT — 252 STS -B Flow meter • DT -211 Decant Tank Level • DT -212 Decant Tank Level • FIT — 114 Common Backwash Flow 3. Control - This section provides required modes of equipment operation, mathematical algorithms, proportional- integral- derivative (PID) controller, and sequencing steps. This section assumes the equipment is placed in REMOTE (from the field). If the equipment is not in REMOTE then the described controls are disabled and the equipment is not available for the PCS. AAF BACKWASH CONTROL SYSTEM MANUAL • Control via panel — OIT — soft buttons for each AAF unit graphical display. REMOTE MANUAL • Operator initiation of backwash sequence for each filter unit from the PCS. AUTO • Based on the following: o Timer: 0 — 72 hours (Operator adjustable). Based on runtime of STS -A, STS -B, respectively for each unit. o Differential pressure across either filter unit (DPI -211 and DPI -212). o All parameters (time, flow, etc.,) set points shall be operator adjustable. BACKWASH OPERATION: The following are the list of various operations that are used for backwashing the AAF filters. The Integrator shall program all these backwash scenarios for the automatic backwash operation of the AAF filters unit A & B. 1. Backwash Unit A — Lead A and Lag B 2. Backwash Unit A — Lead B and Lag A 13500 -5 011717 • • • 3. Backwash Unit B — 4. Backwash Unit B — 5. Backwash Unit A 6. Backwash Unit A 7. Backwash Unit B — 8. Backwash Unit B — 9. Backwash Unit A 10. Backwash Unit B — Lead A and Lag B Lead B and Lag A — Lead A and Lag OFF — Lead B and Lag OFF Lead A and Lag OFF Lead B and Lag OFF — A & B in parallel A & B in parallel 1. AAF FILTERS — Backwash Unit A (STS -A) — Lead A and Lag B. • Continuously monitor PDIT -251 for backwash initiation Or Timer: 0 — 72 hours (Operator adjustable). Based on runtime of STS -A, STS - B, respectively for each unit • Continuously monitor permissive signal to initiate backwash sequence, stop backwash sequence and alarm Operator when permissive signals are not met o Check Decant Tank Level, DT -211 & DT -212 for level < 5.5 ft (operator adjustable). o Check Hours since last backwash on Dual Media Filter is > 0.5 Hrs. o Check Dual Media Filter status is in "IN SERVICE" position. o Check if at least 2 high service pumps are running. o Check if Decant Tanks status is in "Standby/Fill Adsorber mode ". Initiated and annunciate backwash sequence on signal from PDIT -251 (> 10 psi — Operator adjustable) or time elapsed (0 -72 hrs). • Once backwash initiated, non - permissive signal for backwash sequence • Based on the table below, automate the process accordingly • Run backwash at a flow rate of 1,750 gpm (FIT -114) for ten (10) minutes, and then slowly closed to end the backwash cycle after which annunciate to indicate backwash complete. Table 3.1 Operation Slowly Open (x) Open Slowly Throttle Close Open (*) V- 124B V -125A V -250 -2 „V -121A 2. Backwash 1,750gpm @' 10 min. (FIT -114) V -122 Crossovc Valve V -124A V -253 V -250 -1 13500 -6 V- 250 -2 V-12 IA V -125A V -124B V -122B 011717 • • • V -123A V -121 A V-125A MCV 115 V -125A V -12413 V -250 -2 3. Forward Rinse 700gpm @ 2 min. (FIT -251) 4. Back to Service 700gpm (FIT -251) 1MCV -11 Op (x) — Slowly Open the valve at 10% open increments while holding for 2 seconds in between the open commands until fully Open. % increments and timer shall be Operator adjustable values. ( *) — Slowly throttle Open the valve at 10% open increments while holding for 2 seconds in between the open commands until the desired flow set point is achieved. % increments and timer shall be Operator adjustable values. 2. AAF Filters — Backwash Unit A (STS -A) — Lead B and Lag A: If B is Lead and A is lag, switch A's and B's in the valve sequences shown in the table 3.1. 3. AAF FILTERS — Backwash Unit B (STS -B) — Lead A and Lag B. • Continuously monitor PDIT -252 for backwash initiation Or Timer: 0 — 72 hours (Operator adjustable). Based on runtime of STS -A, STS - B, respectively for each unit • Continuously monitor permissive signal to initiate backwash sequence, stop backwash sequence and alarm Operator when permissive signals are not met o Check Decant Tank Level, DT -211 & DT -212 for level < 5.5 ft (operator adjustable). o Check Hours since last backwash on Dual Media Filter is > 0.5 Hrs. o Check Dual Media Filter status is in "IN SERVICE" position. o Check if at least 2 high service pumps are running. o Check if Decant Tanks status is in "Standby/Fill Adsorber mode ". • Initiated and annunciate backwash sequence on signal from PDIT -252 (> 10 psi — Operator adjustable) or time elapsed (0 -72 hrs). • Once backwash initiated, non - permissive signal for backwash sequence • Based on the table below, automate the process accordingly • Run backwash at a flow rate of 1,750 gpm (FIT -114) for ten (10) minutes, and then slowly closed to end the backwash cycle after which annunciate to indicate backwash complete. Table 3.3 Operation Slowly Open (x) Open Slowly Throttle Close 13500 -7 011717 • • B Unit 11- Lead A, Lag B' 1. Service 700 gpm (FIT -251) 2. Backwash 1,750gpm @' 10 min. (FIT -114) Crossove Valve V-124B V -253 V -250 -1 V -123B V -250 -2 V -121A V -125A V -12413 V -122B 3. Forward Rinse 700 gpm @ 2 min. (FIT -251) V -12113 V -125B CV- 115,'; V -253 V -253 V -123B V-124B 4. Back to Service 700 gpm. (FIT 252) V -250 -2 V- 250 -1`. V -121B V -12513 V-1 15 (x) — Slowly Open the valve at 10% open increments while holding for 2 seconds in between the open commands until fully Open. % increments and timer shall be Operator adjustable values. ( *) — Slowly throttle Open the valve at 10% open increments while holding for 2 seconds in between the open commands until the desired flow set point is achieved. increments and timer shall be Operator adjustable values. 4. AAF FILTERS — Backwash Unit B (STS -B) — Lead B and Lag A. If B is Lead and A is lag, switch A's and B's in the valve sequences shown in Table 3.3. 5. AAF FILTERS — Backwash Unit A (STS -A) — Lead A and Lag OFF. • Continuously monitor PDIT -251 for backwash initiation Or Timer: 0 — 72 hours (Operator adjustable). Based on runtime of STS -A, STS - B, respectively for each unit • Continuously monitor permissive signal to initiate backwash sequence, stop backwash sequence and alarm Operator when permissive signals are not met o Check Decant Tank Level, DT -211 & DT -212 for level < 5.5 ft (operator adjustable). 13500 -8 011717 • • o Check Hours since last backwash on Dual Media Filter is > 0.5 Hrs. o Check Dual Media Filter status is in "IN SERVICE" position. o Check if at least 2 high service pumps are running. o Check if Decant Tanks status is in "Standby/Fill Adsorber mode ". Initiated and annunciate backwash sequence on signal from PDIT -251 (> 10 psi — Operator adjustable) or time elapsed (0 -72 hrs). • Once backwash initiated, non - permissive signal for backwash sequence • Based on the table below, automate the process accordingly • Run backwash at a flow rate of 1,750 gpm (FIT -114) for ten (10) minutes, and then slowly closed to end the backwash cycle after which annunciate to indicate backwash complete. Table 3.5 Operation Slowly Open (x) Open Slowly Throttle Open (Y) Close B 1. Service 825 gpm (FIT -251) 2. Backwash 1,750gpm @ 10 min. (FIT -114) MCV115) 3. Forward Rinse 700gpm @ 2 min. (FIT -251) 4. Back to Service 825gpm (FIT -251) V -250 -2 V -12IA V -122A �V -123A V -124A V -253 V--50-2 V -121A V- 250 -1 V -253 [sty i,.. (x) — Slowly Open the valve at 10% open increments while holding for 2 seconds in between the open commands until fully Open. % increments and timer shall be Operator adjustable values. ( *) — Slowly throttle Open the valve at 10% open increments while holding for 2 seconds in between the open commands until the desired flow set point is achieved. % increments and timer shall be Operator adjustable values. MCV -115 13500 -9 011717 • • • 6. AAF FILTERS — Backwash Unit A (STS -A) — Lead B and Lag OFF. • Continuously monitor PDIT -251 for backwash initiation Or Timer: 0 — 72 hours (Operator adjustable). Based on runtime of STS -A, STS - B, respectively for each unit • Continuously monitor permissive signal to initiate backwash sequence, stop backwash sequence and alarm Operator when permissive signals are not met o Check Decant Tank Level, DT -211 & DT -212 for level < 5.5 ft (operator adjustable). o Check Hours since last backwash on Dual Media Filter is > 0.5 Hrs. o Check Dual Media Filter status is in "IN SERVICE" position. o Check if at least 2 high service pumps are running. o Check if Decant Tanks status is in "Standby /Fill Adsorber mode ". Initiated and annunciate backwash sequence on signal from PDIT -251 (> 10 psi — Operator adjustable) or time elapsed (0 -72 hrs). • Once backwash initiated, non - permissive signal for backwash sequence • Based on the table below, automate the process accordingly • Run backwash at a flow rate of 1,750 gpm (FIT -114) for ten (10) minutes, and then slowly closed to end the backwash cycle after which annunciate to indicate backwash complete. Table 3.6 Operation Slowly Open (x) Open Slowly Throttle Open (*) Close 1. Service 825 gpm (FIT -251) 2. Backwash 1,750gpm @ 10 min. (FIT -114) V -253 V -250 -1 V -123A V-1 24A V -250 -2 V -121 B V- 122B 3. Forward Rinse 700gpm @ 2 min. (FIT -251) V-25 IA' V -124A V -253 4. Back to Service V -250 -2 V -121B 13500 -10 V -121A V -250 -1 011717 • • • Stec` ep (x) — Slowly Open the valve at 10% open increments while holding for 2 seconds in between the open commands until fully Open. % increments and timer shall be Operator adjustable values. ( *) — Slowly throttle Open the valve at 10% open increments while holding for 2 seconds in between the open commands until the desired flow set point is achieved. % increments and timer shall be Operator adjustable values. 7. AAF FILTERS — Backwash Unit B (STS -B) — Lead A and Lag OFF. • Continuously monitor PDIT -252 for backwash initiation Or Timer: 0 — 72 hours (Operator adjustable). Based on runtime of STS -A, STS - B, respectively for each unit • Continuously monitor permissive signal to initiate backwash sequence, stop backwash sequence and alarm Operator when permissive signals are not met o Check Decant Tank Level, DT -211 & DT -212 for level < 5.5 ft (operator adjustable). o Check Hours since last backwash on Dual Media Filter is > 0.5 Hrs. o Check Dual Media Filter status is in "IN SERVICE" position. o Check if at least 2 high service pumps are running. o Check if Decant Tanks status is in "Standby/Fill Adsorber mode ". Initiated and annunciate backwash sequence on signal from PDIT -252 (> 10 psi — Operator adjustable) or time elapsed (0 -72 hrs). • Once backwash initiated, non - permissive signal for backwash sequence • Based on the table below, automate the process accordingly • Run backwash at a flow rate of 1,750 gpm (FIT -114) for ten (10) minutes, and then slowly closed to end the backwash cycle after which annunciate to indicate backwash complete. Table 3.7 Operation Slowly Open (x) Open Slowly Throttle Open (Y) Close 1. Service 825 gpm (FIT -251) V -250 -2 V -12 IA V -122A 13500 -11 011717 • • • 2. Backwash 1,750gpm @ 10 min. (FIT -114) 3. Forward Rinse 700gpm @ 2 min. (FIT -251) 4. Back to Service 825gpm (FIT-251) reso vcr' Valve -253 -250 -1 V -123A 124A� V -121B V -125B MCV-1I V -250 -2 V -121A V -122A V -123B V -124] V-121A V- 250 -2 ep (x) — Slowly Open the valve at 10% open increments while holding for 2 seconds in between the open commands until fully Open. % increments and timer shall be Operator adjustable values. ( *) — Slowly throttle Open the valve at 10% open increments while holding for 2 seconds in between the open commands until the desired flow set point is achieved. increments and timer shall be Operator adjustable values. 8. AAF FILTERS — Backwash Unit B (STS -B) — Lead B and Lag OFF. • Continuously monitor PDIT -252 for backwash initiation Or Timer: 0 — 72 hours (Operator adjustable). Based on runtime of STS -A, STS - B, respectively for each unit • Continuously monitor permissive signal to initiate backwash sequence, stop backwash sequence and alarm Operator when permissive signals are not met o Check Decant Tank Level, DT -211 & DT -212 for level < 5.5 ft (operator adjustable). o Check Hours since last backwash on Dual Media Filter is > 0.5 Hrs. o Check Dual Media Filter status is in "IN SERVICE" position. o Check if at least 2 high service pumps are running. o Check if Decant Tanks status is in "Standby/Fill Adsorber mode ". Initiated and annunciate backwash sequence on signal from PDIT -252 (> 10 psi — Operator adjustable) or time elapsed (0 -72 hrs). • Once backwash initiated, non - permissive signal for backwash sequence • Based on the table below, automate the process accordingly • Run backwash at a flow rate of 1,750 gpm (FIT -114) for ten (10) minutes, and then slowly closed to end the backwash cycle after which annunciate to indicate backwash complete. 13500 -12 011717 • • Table 3.8 Operation Slowly Open (x) Open Slowly Throttle Open (Y) Close B4? "Unit B -7 1. Service 825 gpm (FIT -251) gag OFF' V -122B 2. Backwash 1,750gpm @ 10 min. (FIT -114) 3. Forward Rinse 700gpm @2min. (FIT - 251) 4. Back to Service 825gpm (F1? -251) V -253 V- 250 -1 V -123A V -124B V -12 V-125B 1CV-1' 15 V -250 -2 V-121B V -122B V -253 V-. V -1241 V -250 -2 -121B (x) — Slowly Open the valve at 10% open increments while holding for 2 seconds in between the open commands until fully Open. % increments and timer shall be Operator adjustable values. ( *) — Slowly throttle Open the valve at 10% open increments while holding for 2 seconds in between the open commands until the desired flow set point is achieved. increments and timer shall be Operator adjustable values. 9. AAF FILTERS — Backwash Unit A (STS -A) — A & B IN PARALLEL • Continuously monitor PDIT -251 for backwash initiation Or Timer: 0 — 72 hours (Operator adjustable). Based on runtime of STS -A, STS - B, respectively for each unit • Continuously monitor permissive signal to initiate backwash sequence, stop backwash sequence and alarm Operator when permissive signals are not met o Check Decant Tank Level, DT -211 & DT -212 for level < 5.5 ft (operator adjustable). o Check Hours since last backwash on Dual Media Filter is > 0.5 Hrs. 13500 -13 011717 • • • o Check Dual Media Filter status is in "IN SERVICE" position. o Check if at least 2 high service pumps are running. o Check if Decant Tanks status is in "Standby/Fill Adsorber mode ". Initiated and annunciate backwash sequence on signal from PDIT -251 (> 10 psi — Operator adjustable) or time elapsed (0 -72 hrs). • Once backwash initiated, non - permissive signal for backwash sequence • Based on the table below, automate the process accordingly • Run backwash at a flow rate of 1,750 gpm (FIT -114) for ten (10) minutes, and then slowly closed to end the backwash cycle after which annunciate to indicate backwash complete. Table 3.9 Operation Slowly Open (x) Open Slowly Throttle Open (*) Close 1. Service 825 gpm (FIT-251) 2. Backwash 1,750gpm @ 10 min. (FIT -114) V- 250.2 V -121A V -1218 rossov Valve v1CV-I 15 3. Forward Rinse 700gpm 2 rnin. (FIT -251) Back to Service 825gpm (FIT -251) 4. V -253 V -250 -I V -123A V -124B V -121A V -125A +4CV-115 V -250 -2 V -12 IA V -12113 V -122A V -12213 V -123A V -124A V -250 -2 V -121A V -121.8 V -122A V -1228 St: • 1 (x) — Slowly Open the valve at 10% open increments while holding for 2 seconds in between the open commands until fully Open. % increments and timer shall be Operator adjustable values. ( *) — Slowly throttle Open the valve at 10% open increments while holding for 2 seconds in between the open commands until the desired flow set point is achieved. % increments and timer shall be Operator adjustable values. 10. AAF FILTERS — Backwash Unit B (STS -B) — A & B IN PARALLEL 13500 -14 011717 • • • • Continuously monitor PDIT -252 for backwash initiation Or Timer: 0 — 72 hours (Operator adjustable). Based on runtime of STS -A, STS - B, respectively for each unit • Continuously monitor permissive signal to initiate backwash sequence, stop backwash sequence and alarm Operator when permissive signals are not met o Check Decant Tank Level, DT -211 & DT -212 for level < 5.5 ft (operator adjustable). o Check Hours since last backwash on Dual Media Filter is > 0.5 Hrs. o Check Dual Media Filter status is in "IN SERVICE" position. o Check if at least 2 high service pumps are running. o Check if Decant Tanks status is in "Standby/Fill Adsorber mode ". • Once backwash initiated, non - permissive signal for backwash sequence • Based on the table below, automate the process accordingly • Run backwash at a flow rate of 1,750 gpm (FIT -114) for ten (10) minutes, and then slowly closed to end the backwash cycle after which annunciate to indicate backwash complete. Table 3.10 Operation Slowly Open (x) Open Slowly Throttle Open Close 1. Service 825 gpm (FIT -251) V -250.2 V -121A V -121B rssave` 2. Backwash 1,750gpm 10 min. (FIT -114)' 3. Forward Rinse 700gpm @ 2 min. (FIT- 251) 4. Back to'1 Service 825gpm (FIT -251) V -253 V -250 -1 V -123B V -124B V -121 3' V -125B ICV- 11 V -250 -2 V -121A V -12113 V -122A V -122B V-25 V -2' V -121A V -121B V -253 V -250 -1 13500 -15 011717 • • • (x) — Slowly Open the valve at 10% open increments while holding for 2 seconds in between the open commands until fully Open. % increments and timer shall be Operator adjustable values. ( *) — Slowly throttle Open the valve at 10% open increments while holding for 2 seconds in between the open commands until the desired flow set point is achieved. increments and timer shall be Operator adjustable values. 4. Transfer - This section provides the functional requirements of transferring from one control mode to another control mode. Where the term ` bumpless transfer' is used to describe the transfer mode. Bumpless transfer is the ability to seamlessly go from one mode to another mode without interrupting the equipment operation. • Bumpless transfer of valve control. 5. Interlock - This section provides required control interaction between two or more devices and override functions to protect equipment and process performance under normal operations. `Interlocks' does not include override actions caused by field generated alarms, equipment or instrument failure, and power outage. • N/A 6. Alarm - This section provides required annunciation, control action and priority of field generated alarms, logic generated alarms, and logic generated warnings. Logic generated alarms and warnings are identified with a .0 symbol in the control strategy. These alarms include: Ta No. Function Action Priority 7.0'S General Motor Run Or Valve Open Alarm (Discord) Alarm will occur and the operator notified if High Service Pumps 1,2 & /or 3 OR control valves are engaged to Run/Open and the return input from the auxiliary contact is not made. 0 General Instrument Alarm (Out of Range) After 30 sec time delay Alarm to SCADA. LI -211, 212 (Operator Adjustable) LAHHH @ 20' Level High in decant tanks, stop backwash sequence. Notes: (1) All analog values (level, flow, pressure, etc.) shall be recorded for the purpose of historical trending and data analysis. Recorded analog values shall be collected a minimum every 5 minutes and data shall be maintained on the system hard drive for a minimum of 15 days. 13500 -16 011717 • • (2) Backwash sequence shut down — if PARTIAL shutdown of the backwash is identified as response and or Operator aborts the backwash sequence, the following will occur: a. Audible alarm will sound in the plant area and in the plant office b. Send alarm through autodialer. c. Personnel will be notified (text message and /or email) (3) Signals are used to Re- Enable a valve after respective fault alarm disables it. 7. Fault Mode — This section provides the functional control requirements in the event that there is an equipment or instrument failure. An equipment failure is defined as the inability to control or monitor a device placed under REMOTE control due to an alarm condition. An instrument failure is defined as the inability to monitor a device due to an alarm condition. • Valve Failure - Discord alarm shall occur and the operator notified. • High Service Pump Failure - Discord alarm shall occur and the operator notified. • Refer to Alarm section for fault mode. 8. Interface — This section provides a description of the physical electrical connection for the loop input/output signal. This section is for reference only. The actual physical connection is to be field verified. • Hardwire of all instrumentation and motor control circuits. Ethernet connection between CP -130 and CP -110 to communicate with the PCS. All valves powered through MCC. • Hardwire between CP -130 and the new valves. 9. Power Outage — This section provides functional control requirements in the event of a loss of power and the functional control requirements upon power restoration. This section assumes a power outage to be detected by the transfer of normal to generator power for all processes. • If power outage during backwash cycle, PLC to maintain backwash cycle by holding timers and resume backwash cycle ONLY upon Operators intervention/ authorization and if all the permissive signals are met for the backwash cycle to restart. END OF SECTION 13500 -17 011717 DIVISION 14 NOT USED DIVISION 15 MECHANICAL • • 0 SECTION 15000 MECHANICAL - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Scope of Work: 1. All equipment furnished and installed under this contract shall conform to the general stipulations set forth in this section except as otherwise specified in other sections. 2. Contractor shall coordinate all details of equipment with other related parts of the Work, including verification that all structures, piping, wiring, and equipment components are compatible. Contractor shall be responsible for all structural and other alternations in the Work required to accommodate equipment differing in dimensions or other characteristics from that contemplated in the Contract Drawings or Specifications. B. Related Work Described Elsewhere: 1. General Requirements: Division 1 2. Metals: Division 5 3. Painting: Division 9 4. Equipment: Division 11 5. Electrical: Division 16 C. General Design: 1. Contract Drawings and Specifications: The Contract Drawings and Specifications shall be considered as complementary, one to the other, so that materials and work indicated, called for, or implied by the one and not by the other shall be supplied and installed as though specifically called for by both. The Contract Drawings are to be considered diagrammatic, not necessarily showing in detail or to scale all of the equipment or minor items. In the event of discrepancies between the Contract Drawings and Specifications, or between either of these and any regulations or 15000 -1 052316 • • • ordinances governing work of these specifications, the bidder shall notify the Engineer in ample time to permit revisions. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Materials and Equipment: Unless otherwise specified, all materials and equipment furnished for permanent installation in the work shall conform to applicable standards and specifications and shall be new, unused, and undamaged when installed or otherwise incorporated in the work. No such material or equipment shall be used by the Contractor for any purpose other than that intended or specified, unless such use is specifically authorized in writing by the Owner. No material shall be delivered to the work site workout prior acceptance of drawings and data by the Engineer. B. Where applicable, Manufacturers shall be selected as presented in these technical specifications or approved equal. C. Equivalent Materials and Equipment: 1. Whenever a material or article is specified or described by using the name of a proprietary product or the name of a particular manufacturer or vendor, the specific item mentioned shall be understood as establishing the type, function, and quality desired. Other manufacturers' products will be accepted provided sufficient information is submitted to allow the Engineer to determine that the products proposed are equivalent to those named. Such items shall be submitted for review in accordance with Section 01340: Shop Drawings, Working Drawings, and Samples. 2. Requests for review of equivalency will not be accepted from anyone except the Contractor and such requests will not be considered until after the contract has been awarded. D. Governing Standards: Equipment and appurtenances shall be designed in conformity with ANSI, ASME, ASTM, IEEE, NEMA, OSHA, AGMA, and other generally accepted applicable standards. They shall be of rugged construction and of sufficient strength to withstand all stresses which may occur during fabrication, testing, transportation, installation, and all conditions or operations. All bearings and moving parts shall be adequately protected against wear by bushings or other acceptable means. Provisions shall be made for adequate lubrication with readily accessible means. E. Tolerances: Machinery parts shall conform to the dimensions indicated on the drawings within allowable tolerances. Protruding members such as joints, corners, and gear covers shall be finished in appearance. All exposed welds shall be ground smooth and the corners of structural shapes shall be rounded or chamfered. 15000 -2 052316 • • F. Clearances: Ample clearances shall be provided for inspection and adjustment. All equipment shall fit the allotted space and shall leave reasonable access room for servicing and repairs. Greater space and room required by substituted equipment shall be provided by the Contractor and at his expense. G. Testing: 1. When the equipment is specified to be factory tested, the results of the tests shall be submitted to the Engineer and approval of the test results shall be obtained before shipment of the equipment. 2. When an item of equipment, including controls and instrumentation, has been completely erected, the Contractor shall notify the Engineer, who will designate a time to make such tests as required, and operate the item to the satisfaction of the Contractor. All testing shall be done in the presence of the Contractor. "Completely erected" shall mean that the installation is erected, all necessary adjustments have been made, all required utility connections have been made, required lubricants and hydraulic fluid have been added and the unit has been cleaned and painted. H. Pressure Test: 1. After installation, all piping shall be pressure tested. Piping shall be tested in accordance with Section 15044. 2. All tests shall be made in the presence of and to the satisfaction of the Construction Manager and also, to the satisfaction of any local or state inspector having jurisdiction. a. Provide not less than three days notice to the Construction Manager and the authority having jurisdiction when it is proposed to make the tests. b. Any piping or equipment that has been left unprotected and subject to mechanical or other injury in the opinion of the Construction Manager shall be retested in part or in whole as directed by the Construction Manager. c. The piping systems may be tested in sections as the work progresses by no joint or portion of the system shall be left untested. 3. All elements within the system that may be damaged by the testing operation shall be removed or otherwise protected during the operation. 15000 -3 052316 • • • 4. All defects and leaks observed during the tests shall be corrected and made tight in an approved manner and the tests repeated until the system is proven tight. 5. Repair all damage done to existing or adjacent work or materials due to or on account of the tests. 6. Provide test pumps, gauges, or other instruments and equipment required for the performance of all tests. Provide all temporary bracing, test plugs, additional restraint, and thrust blocking which may be required for test pressures above normal working pressures. 7. All tests shall be maintained for as long a time as required to detect all defects and leaks but not less than the duration specified for each type of pipe or piping system in this Division. I. Failure of Test: 1. Defects: Any defects in the equipment, or deviations from the guarantees or requirements of the Specifications, shall be promptly corrected by the Contractor by replacements or otherwise. The decision of the Engineer as to whether or not the Contractor has fulfilled his obligations under the Contract shall be final and conclusive. If the Contractor fails to correct any defects or deviations, or if the replaced equipment when tested shall fail again to meet the guarantees or specified requirements, the Owner, notwithstanding his having made partial payment for work and materials which have entered into the manufacturer for such equipment, may reject that equipment and order the Contractor to remove it from the premises at the Contractor's expense. 2. Rejection of Equipment: In case the Owner rejects a particular item of equipment, then the Contractor hereby agrees to repay to the Owner all sums of money paid to him to deliver to the Contractor a bill of sale of all his rights, title, and interest in and to the rejected equipment provided, however that the equipment shall not be removed from the premises until the Owner obtains from other sources other equipment to take the place of that rejected. The bill of sale shall not abrogate the Owner's right to recover damages for delays, losses or other conditions arising out of the basic Contract. The Owner hereby agrees to obtain the alternate equipment within a reasonable time and the Contractor agrees that the Owner may use the original equipment furnished by him without rental or other charge until the other equipment is obtained. 15000 -4 052316 • • • J. Responsibility During Tests: The Contractor shall be fully responsible for the proper operation of equipment during tests and instruction periods and shall neither have nor make any claim for damage which may occur to equipment prior to the time when the Owner formally takes over the operation thereof. K. Acceptance of Materials: 1. Only new materials and equipment shall be incorporated in the work. All materials and equipment furnished by the Contractor shall be subject to the inspection and acceptance of the Owner. No material shall be delivered to the work without prior submittal approval of the Engineer. 2. The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer data relating to materials and equipment he proposes to furnish for the work. Such data shall be in sufficient detail to enable the Engineer to identify the particular product and to form an opinion as to its conformity to the specifications. 3. Facilities and labor for handling and inspection of all materials and equipment shall be furnished by the Contractor. If the Engineer requires, either prior to beginning or during the progress of the work, the Contractor shall submit samples of materials for such special test as may be necessary to demonstrate that they conform to the specification. Such sample shall be furnished, stored, packed, and shipped as directed at the Contractor's expense. Except as otherwise noted, the Owner will make arrangements for and pay for tests. 4. The Contractor shall submit data and samples sufficiently early to permit consideration and acceptance before materials are necessary for incorporation in the work. L. Safety Requirements: 1. In addition to the components shown and specified, all machinery and equipment shall be safeguarded in accordance with the safety features required by the current codes and regulations of ANSI, OSHA, and local industrial codes. 2. The Contractor shall provide for each V -belt drive or rotating shaft a protective guard which shall be securely bolted to the floor or apparatus. The guard shall completely enclose drives and pulleys and be constructed to comply with all safety requirements. 3. For double inlet fans, the belt guard shall be arranged so as not to restrict the air flow into the fan inlet. Guards shall not interfere with lubrication of equipment. 15000 -5 052316 • 1.03 SUBMITTALS (SEE SECTION 01340: SHOP DRAWINGS, WORKING DRAWINGS AND SAMPLES) • • 1.04 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Packaging: All equipment shall be suitably packaged to facilitate handling and protect against damage during transit and storage. All equipment shall be boxed, crated, or otherwise completely enclosed and protected during shipment, handling, and storage. All equipment shall be protected from exposure to the elements and shall be kept thoroughly dry at all times. B. Protection: All machined surfaces and shafting shall be cleaned and protected from corrosion by the proper type and amount of coating necessary to assure protection during shipment and prior to installation. Painted surfaces shall be protected against impact, abrasion, discoloration, and other damage as specified in Section 09905. All painted surfaces which are damaged prior to acceptance of equipment shall be repainted to the satisfaction of Engineer. C. Lubrication: Grease and lubricating oil shall be applied to all bearings and similar items as necessary to prevent damage during shipment and storage. D. Marking: Each item of equipment shall be tagged or marked as identified in the delivery schedule or on the Shop Drawings. Complete packing lists and bills of material shall be included with each shipment. E. Fabricated sub - assemblies, if any, shall be shipped in convenient sections as permitted by carrier regulations and shall be properly match - marked for ease of field erection. F. Responsibility: 1. The Contractor shall be responsible for all material, equipment, and supplies sold and delivered to the site under this Contract until final inspection of the work and acceptance thereof by the Owner. In the event any such material, equipment, and supplies are lost, stolen, damaged, or destroyed prior to final inspection and acceptance, the Contractor shall replace same without additional cost to the Owner. 2. Should the Contractor fail to take proper action on storage and handling of equipment supplied under this Contract within seven days after written notice to do so has been given, the Owner retains the right to correct all deficiencies noted in previously transmitted written notice and deduct the cost associated with these corrections from the Contractor's Contract. These costs may be comprised of expenditures for labor, equipment usage, 15000 -6 052316 • • • administrative, clerical, engineering, and any other costs associated with making the necessary corrections. G. Delivery: The Contractor shall arrange deliveries of products in accordance with construction schedules and coordinate to avoid conflict with work and condition at the site. 1. The Contractor shall deliver products in undamaged condition, in manufacturer's original containers or packaging, with identifying labels intact and legible. 2. Immediately on delivery, the Contractor shall inspect shipments to assure compliance with requirements of Contract Documents and accepted submittals, and that products are properly protected and undamaged. 3. Under no circumstances shall the Contractor deliver equipment to the site more than one month prior to installation without written authorization from the Construction Manager. Operation and maintenance data shall be submitted to the Engineer for review prior to shipment of equipment as described in Section 01730: Operating and Maintenance Data. H. Storage and Protection of Products: 1. The Contractor shall furnish a covered, weather - protected storage structure providing a clean, dry noncorrosive environment for all mechanical equipment, valves, architectural items, electrical and instrumentation equipment, and special equipment to be incorporated into this project. Storage of equipment shall be in strict accordance with the "Instructions for Storage" of each equipment supplier and manufacturer including connection of space heaters, and placing of storage lubricants in equipment. Corroded, damaged, or deteriorated equipment and parts shall be replaced before acceptance of the project. Equipment and materials not properly stored will not be included in a payment estimate. a. The Contractor shall store products subject to damage by the elements in weathertight enclosures. b. The Contractor shall maintain temperature and humidity within the ranges required by manufacturer's instructions. c. The Contractor shall store fabricated products above the ground, on blocking or skids, to prevent soiling or staining. The Contractor shall cover products which are subject to deterioration with impervious sheet coverings and provide adequate ventilation to avoid condensation. 15000 -7 052316 • • • d. The Contractor shall store loose granular materials in a well drained area on solid surfaces to prevent mixing with foreign matter. 2. All materials and equipment to be incorporated in the work shall be handled and stored by the Contractor before, during, and after shipment in a manner to prevent warping, twisting, bending, breaking, chipping, rusting, and any injury, theft, or damage of any kind whatsoever to the material or equipment. 3. Cement, sand, lime shall be stored under a roof and off the ground, and shall be kept completely dry at all times. All structural and miscellaneous steel and reinforcing steel shall be stored off the ground or otherwise to prevent accumulations of dirt, or grease, and in a position to prevent accumulations of standing water, staining, chipping, or cracking. Brick, block, and similar masonry products shall be handled and stored in a manner to reduce breakage, chipping, cracking and peeling to a minimum. 4. All materials which, in the opinion of the Construction Manager, have become damaged and are unfit for the use intended or specified, shall be promptly removed from the site of the work, and the Contractor shall receive no compensation for the damaged material or its removal. 5. The Contractor shall arrange storage in a manner to provide easy access for inspection. The Contractor shall make periodic inspections of stored products to assure products are maintained under specified conditions, and free from damage or deterioration. 6. Protection After Installation: The Contractor shall provide substantial coverings as necessary to protect installed products from damage from traffic and subsequent construction operations. The Contractor shall remove covering when no longer needed. 1.05 WARRANTY AND GUARANTEES A. The manufacturer's written warranty shall be submitted for all major pieces of equipment, as specified in Section 01740: Warranties and Bonds. The manufacturer's warranty period shall be concurrent with the Contractor's correction period for one year after the time of completion and acceptance. 15000 -8 052316 • • • PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. All materials that come into contact with the water being treated or the finished water shall be on either the EPA or NSF lists of products approved for use in contact with potable water. Manufacturers shall submit an affidavit with the shop drawings indicating approval by the EPA or NSF for the materials used in products that come into contact with the water, in accordance with Rule 62- 555.320(3) Florida Administrative Code. 2.02 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT A. Fabrication and Manufacture: 1. Workmanship and Materials: a. Contractor shall guarantee all equipment against faulty or inadequate design, improper assembly or erection, defective workmanship or materials, and leakage, breakage or other failure. Materials shall be suitable for service conditions. b. All equipment shall be designed, fabricated, and assembled in accordance with recognized and acceptable engineering and shop practice. Individual parts shall be manufactured to standard sizes and gages so that repair parts, furnished at any time, can be installed in the field. Like parts of duplicate units shall be interchangeable. Equipment shall not have been in service at any time prior to delivery, except as required by tests. c. Except where otherwise specified, structural and miscellaneous fabricated steel used in equipment shall conform to AISC standards. All structural members shall be designed for shock or vibratory loads. Unless otherwise specified, all steel which will be submerged, all or in part, during normal operation of the equipment shall be at least 1/4 inch thick. 2. Lubrication: a. Equipment shall be adequately lubricated by systems which require attention no more frequently than weekly during continuous operation. Lubrication systems shall not require attention during startup or shutdown and shall not waste lubricants. 15000 -9 052316 • • • b. Lubricants of the type recommended by the equipment manufacturer shall be furnished by the Contractor in sufficient quantity to fill all lubricant reservoirs and to replace all consumption during testing, startup, and operation prior to acceptance of equipment by Owner. Unless otherwise specified or permitted, the use of synthetic lubricants will not be acceptable. c. Lubrication facilities shall be convenient and accessible. Oil drains and fill openings shall be easily accessible from the normal operating area or platform. Drains shall allow for convenient collection of waste oil in containers from the normal operating area or platform without removing the unit from its normal installed position. 3. Safety Guards: All belt or chain drives, fan blades, couplings, and other moving or rotating parts shall be covered on all sides by a safety guard. Safety guards shall be fabricated form 16 USS gage or heavier galvanized or aluminum -clad sheet steel or 1/2 inch mesh galvanized expanded metal. Each guard shall be designed for easy installation and removal. All necessary supports and accessories shall be provided for each guard. Supports and accessories, including bolts, shall be galvanized. All safety guards in outdoor locations shall be designed to prevent the entrance of rain and dripping water. 4. Equipment Foundation Supports: a. All foundations, platforms and hangers required for the proper installation of equipment shall be furnished and installed by the Contractor. b. Unless otherwise indicated or specified, all equipment shall be installed on reinforced concrete bases at least 6 inches high and shall conform to Section 03300. Cast iron or welded steel baseplates shall be provided for pumps, compressors, and other equipment. Each unit and its drive assembly shall be supported on a single baseplate of neat design. Baseplates shall have pads for anchoring all components and adequate grout holes. Baseplates for pumps shall have a means for collecting leakage and a threaded drain connection. Baseplates shall be anchored to the concrete base with suitable anchor bolts and the space beneath filled with grout as specified in Section 03600: Grout. All open equipment bases shall be filled with nonshrinking grout sloped to drain to the perimeter of the base. 15000 -10 052316 • • • c. The Contractor shall furnish, install and protect all necessary guides, bearing plates, anchor and attachment bolts, and all other appurtenances required for the installation of equipment. These shall be of ample size and strength for the purpose intended. d. Equipment suppliers shall furnish suitable anchor bolts for each item of equipment. Anchor bolts, together with templates or setting drawings, shall be delivered sufficiently early to permit setting the anchor bolts when the structural concrete is placed. Anchor bolts shall comply with Section 05500: Miscellaneous Metals and, unless otherwise specified, shall have a minimum diameter of 3/4 inch. Unless otherwise indicated or specified, anchor bolts for items of equipment mounted on baseplates shall be long enough to permit 1 -1/2 inches of grout beneath the baseplate and to provide adequate anchorage into structural concrete. e. Structural steel supports and miscellaneous steel required for supporting and/or hanging equipment and piping furnished under this Division shall be provided and installed by Contractor. f. All foundations, anchor pads, piers, thrust blocks, inertia blocks and structural steel supports shall be built to template and reinforced as required for loads imposed on them. g. The Contractor shall assume all responsibility for sizes, locations and design of all foundations, anchor pads, pier, thrust blocks, inertia blocks, curbs and structural steel supports. 5. Shop Painting: a. All steel and iron surfaces shall be protected by suitable paint or coatings applied in the shop. Surfaces which will be inaccessible after assembly shall be protected for the life of the equipment. Exposed surfaces shall be finished smooth, thoroughly cleaned, and filled as necessary to provide a smooth uniform base for painting. Electric motors, speed reducers, starters, and other self - contained or enclosed components shall be shop primed or finished with a high -grade oil resistant enamel suitable for coating in the field with an alkyd enamel. Coatings shall be suitable for the environment where the equipment is installed. b. Surfaces to be painted after installation shall be prepared for painting as recommended by the paint manufacturer for the intended service, and then shop painted with one or more coats of the specified primer. Unless otherwise specified, the shop primer 15000 -11 052316 • • • for steel and iron surfaces shall be Cook "391 -N -167 Barrier Coat ", Koppers "No. 10 Inhibitive Primer ", or equal. c. Machined, polished, and nonferrous surfaces which are not to be painted shall be coated with rust- preventive compound, Houghton "Rust Veto 344 ", Rust -Oleum "R -9 ", or equal. 6. Nameplates: Contractor shall provide equipment identification nameplates for each item of equipment. Nameplates shall be 1/8 -inch Type 304 stainless steel and shall be permanently fastened. Plates shall be fastened using round head metallic drive screws, or where metallic drive screws are impractical, with stainless steel pop rivets. Metallic drive screws shall be brass or stainless steel, Type V and No. 8 by 3/8 -inch long. Names and/or equipment designations shall be engraved on the plates and the engraving painted with a primer and black paint system compatible with stainless steel. Contractor shall submit a list of proposed names and designations for review prior to fabrication of nameplates. At a minimum, each nameplate shall include equipment manufacturers name, year of manufacture, serial number and principal rating data. 7. Pipe Identification: a. All pipe (except underground) shall have code letters and flow arrows painted as per specification Section 09905. The contractor shall ensure that the pipes are properly marked. b. Underground pipe and tube: Pipe and tube shall be located by laying 2 -inch wide plastic tape continuously along the run of pipe or tube. Where possible, color of tape shall be consistent with the color of bands on interior pipe and as approved by the Engineer, or shall bear an imprinted identification of the line. i. Location: Tape shall be laid approximately 12 inches below ground surface and directly over pipe location. ii. Manufacturer: Tape shall be as specified in Section 09905. 8. Valve Identification: On all valves, except shut -off valves located at a fixture or piece of equipment, the Contractor shall provide a coded and numbered tag attached with brass chain and/or brass "S" hooks. Underground valves shall be provided with a brass plate glued onto the valve pad. a. Tag Types: 15000 -12 052316 • • • i. Tags for valves on pipe and tube lines conducting hot medium (steam, condensate, hot water, etc.) shall be brass or anodized aluminum. ii. Tags for all other valves shall be Type 304 stainless steel. iii. Square tags shall be used to indicate normally closed valves and round tags shall indicate normally open valves. b. Coding: In addition to the color coding, each tag shall be stamped or engraved with wording or abbreviations to indicate the line service. All color and letter coding shall be approved by the Engineer. c. Valve Schedule: The Contractor shall provide a typewritten list of all tagged valves giving tag shape, letter code and number, the valve size, type, number of turns, and general location within building. 9. Fire Hazard Rating: a. All piping and equipment insulation, fastener, and jacketing materials shall have a fire hazard rating not to exceed 25 for flame spread, 50 for fuel contributed, and 50 for smoke developed. Rating shall be determined by ASTM Designation E84, "Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials ". Corresponding ratings determined by Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc., UL -723, "Test Method for Fire Hazard Classification of Building Materials ", will also be acceptable. b. Flameproofing treatments will not be acceptable. 2.03 ACCESSORIES A. Special Tools and Accessories: Equipment requiring periodic repair and adjustment shall be furnished complete with all special tools, instruments, and accessories required for proper maintenance. Equipment requiring special devices for lifting or handling shall be furnished complete with those devices. 2.04 SPARE PARTS A. Spare parts for certain equipment provided under Divisions 11, 13, 14, 15, and 16 have been specified in the pertinent sections of the specifications. The Contractor shall collect and store all spare parts in an area to be designated by the Engineer. In addition, the Contractor shall furnish to the Engineer an inventory listing of all 15000 -13 052316 • • • B. Additional Information: 1. Submit materials list showing material of pipe and fittings with ASTM reference and grade. C. Operating Instructions (Not Applicable) 1.04 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. The equipment provided under this section shall be shipped, handled and stored in accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions, and in accordance with Section 016600: Product Storage and Handling Requirements. 1.05 WARRANTY AND GUARANTEES A. Provide equipment warranty in accordance with Section 016000: Project Requirements. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. All materials that come into contact with the water being treated or the finished water shall be on either the EPA or NSF lists of products approved for use in contact with potable water. B. All stainless steel piping shall be pickled and passivated following fabrication. Pickling shall include complete immersion of the piping in an acid pickling solution after all welding and fabrication work is complete. 2.02 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT A. Materials: 1. Stainless Steel Pipe and Fittings (50 -300 psi working pressure at 120 °F maximum). a. All stainless steel pipe and fittings shall be fabricated from Type 316L extra low carbon grade austenitic stainless steel sheet and plate. i. Pipe shall conform to ASTM A -312 and be die - formed or rolled true to dimension and round within the applicable 15066 -3 083116 • • • ANSI Standard. The two edges of sheet shall be brought to line so as not to leave a shoulder on the inside of the pipe. ii. Pipes shall be straight within the applicable ANSI Standard for ASTM -A -312 welded pipe. iii. Ends of pipe and fittings shall be true and perpendicular to the longitudinal axis with the edges deburred. iv. Fittings shall conform to ASTM A- 403 -WP in accordance with B16.9. v. Longitudinal seams on pipe and fittings shall be welded by the GTAW, PAW, FCAW, SAW, or the SMAW methods. Filler metal, if utilized, shall be of same composition or superior to the pipe and fittings material. vi. Weld deposit at the seams shall have a slight crown on both sides of the weld and no cracks or crevices shall be allowed. Excessive weld deposits, slag, weld spatter and projections into interior of pipe shall be removed by grinding. The interior welds shall be smooth, even and shall not have an internal bead higher than 1/16 inch. vii. All pieces shall be marked indicating wall thickness /schedule, grade of stainless steel, and ASTM Standard. b. The stainless steel piping wall dimensions shall be designed for the hydrostatic test pressures as required in Section 15044: Pressure Testing of Piping, and shall be at a minimum Schedule 10S. The required Schedule Gauge or Plate and Wall Thickness are to be indicated in the manufacturer's shop drawings and verified by ASME B31.3 calculations. Calculations for wall thickness shall be based on the minimum wall thickness due to manufacturing tolerances, joint efficiencies, and a safety factors as permitted by ASME B31.3. c. Fittings: Fittings shall be butt weld type per ASTM- A -403WP and manufactured in accordance with ANSI B16.9. All fittings shall be of the same pressure rating and grade material as the pipe. Elbows shall be long radius Long radius; i.e., centerline to end of elbow equals 1.5 times the nominal pipe size, unless otherwise approved by the Engineer. All elbows up to 24 -inch diameter shall be smooth flow. All short radius, special radius, and reducing elbows 15066 -4 083116 • • • and long radius elbows greater than 24 -inch diameter shall be of mitered construction with at least (5) miter sections for 90 degree bends, (3) mitered sections for 45 and 60 degree bends, and (2) mitered sections for 30 degree and smaller bends. Reducers shall be straight tapered, cone type. i. Fittings three inches and smaller shall be threaded conforming to ASTM -A -182 forged, Class 3000# and manufactured to ANSI B16.11. ii. Fittings for buried or submerged pipe larger than three inches shall be butt- welded, conforming to ASTM -A- 403WP, same pressure rating and material as the pipe and manufactured to ANSI B16.9. iii. Fittings for above ground or exposed pipe larger than three inches shall be butt- welded except when flanged or coupled, as shown on the drawings, conforming to ASTM A 403 WP, same pressure rating and grade material as the pipe and manufactured to ANSI B16.9. Tees shall have no welds in the throat area and the crotch shall be reinforced with long radius design to eliminate sharp corners. Extruded branch outlets may be used in place of reducing outlet tees when properly designed and manufactured per ASME B31.3 to meet the applicable operating, design, and test pressures as specified herein. iv. Drain & Instrumentation Branches: (1) Outlets of size three inches and smaller in piping 4 inches and larger shall be of the Thredolet type, per AWWA Manual M11 (1964 edition), Figure 19.24. Outlets shall be 3,000 pound WOG stainless steel per ASTM A 182, or ASTM A 403. Threads shall comply with ANSI B2.01. Outlets shall be Bonny Forge Co. "Thredolet," Allied Piping Products Co. "Brachlet," or equal. (2) For outlets three inches and smaller in piping smaller than four inches, use a threaded tee in accordance with c.i. above. (3) For outlets larger than three inches, use a tee conforming to ASTM- A- 403WP, in accordance 15066 -5 083116 • • • with c., iii. above and with a flanged outlet or as shown on the Drawings. v. Process Piping Branches (1) d. Joints: Reducing outlets of size 8 inches to 1 -1/4 inches for skid process piping headers shall be fabricated of 316L stainless steel, ASTM SA -312, to match the material and construction of the header pipe. Fabricated outlets shall be extruded with a single butt weld in accordance to ASME B31.3 to connect the outlet branch to the header pipe. i. Joints for pipes three inches and smaller shall be threaded or socket welded, same material as the pipe, 3,000 pound WOG, conforming to ANSI B16.11. ii. Joints for buried or submerged pipe larger than three inches shall be butt- welded. iii. Joints for aboveground or exposed pipe larger than three inches shall be butt- welded except where flanges or grooved end joints are shown on the Drawings. e. Flanges: Provide weld -neck flanges conforming to ANSI B16.5 for piping three inches and smaller to connect to flanged valves, fittings, or equipment. Provide slip -on flanges for piping larger than three inches. Provide blind flanges at dead end connections and where shown on the Drawings. Flanges shall be Class 150 per ANSI B16.5 unless a higher pressure rating is required. Material for weld -neck, slip -on, and blind flanges shall conform to ASTM -A -182, Grade F316L. Flanges and blind flanges shall match the connecting flanges on the adjacent fitting, valve or piece of equipment. ii. Determine the pressure class of flange and blind flanges based on the test pressure specified in Section 15044: Pressure Testing of Piping. 15066 -6 083116 iii. Where a raised face steel flange connects to a flat face flange, remove the raised face on the steel flange. f. Field welding of stainless steel piping is not permitted without special approval of the Engineer. Proposed field welded joints must be submitted to the Engineer for approval in advance of such work. The Contractor shall employ alternate methods of piping assembly, such as the use of flanged joints, grooved joint couplings, mechanical sleeves or couplings with appropriate thrust restraints, flange coupling adaptors, or an alternate coupling system that is of equal material to the piping if approved by the Engineer. When pre- approved, all field welding shall be performed by welders certified in accordance to ASME Section IX and shall be inspected via X -ray examination. Welding processes utilized shall be as specified herein. g. Pipe ends shall be prepared for either mechanical or flexible couplings where shown on the Drawings. h. Pipe and fittings shall be cleaned and acid pickled after manufacture in accordance with 3.01 of this specification. i. Dead Ends of pipe runs shall have butt- welded ASME Code dished heads designed to meet the test pressures specified in Section 15044. J. Mechanical couplings at equipment connections shall be in accordance with the requirements of Section 15000, "Mechanical - General Requirements" as modified by this Section. Gaskets shall be suitable for the service conditions. The pipe ends shall be roll grooved to the coupling manufacturer's specifications for piping size 6- inches and under. Where roll grooving is not sufficient for the specified pressure, the pipe shall have heavy wall machine grooved pipe nipples or machined ring collars fully welded to the pipe or fitting. Nipples shall be taper bored to the I.D. of the adjoining pipe to allow full weld penetration. Collars shall be welded on both sides to the piping. Nipples and collars shall be of the same alloy as the piping. 2. Stainless Steel Tubing and Fittings a. Pipe and fittings to sample panels, 1 -inch and smaller, shall incorporate seamless 316 stainless steel tubing and shall maximize the use of non - threaded fittings where possible. Tubing systems 15066 -7 083116 • • shall be pressure rated for a minimum of 1,000 psi and shall conform to ASTM A276. Approved fittings include Swagelok VCR or VCO series, Ham -Let Let -Lok series, or Engineer approved equal. Gaskets shall be made of stainless steel or Buna N. All pressure ratings shall comply with calculations in accordance with ASME Code for Pressure Piping B31.3, Process Piping, and ASME B31.1, Power Piping. For 316 SS fittings and gaskets, temperature rating shall be 1000 °F (537 °C). ii. Pressure relief valves shall be constructed of 316 SS with screw type adjustment and shall have an operating range of 30 -150 psi. Pressure relief valves shall be manufactured by Jesco or approved equal. iii. Ball valves shall be two -way vented with quarter turn actuation, pressure rated for a minimum of 1,000 psi. Models include Swagelok 60 series, Hamlet 700 series, or approved equal. iv. When threaded fittings are used, unions shall be provided within 2 feet on each threaded end unless there are other connections which permit easy removal of the fitting. v. Pipe and fittings larger than 1 -inch shall be threaded stainless steel piping and fittings as specified herein. 2.03 ACCESSORIES A. Bolts and Nuts for Flanges: 1. Bolts and nuts for flanges shall be Type 316 stainless steel conforming to ASTM A 193, Grade B8M, for bolts and ASTM A 194, Grade 8M, for nuts. Both the bolts and nuts shall be hex heavy dimensions, and shall have a bright electropolished finish. 2. Provide washer for each nut. Washers shall be Type 316 SAE pattern to match the nuts. B. Gaskets for Flanges: 1. Provide full -face gaskets for flat faced flanges. Provide ring gaskets for raised face flanges. 15066 -8 083116 • • • 2. Air Service (High Temperature): Gaskets shall be composed of asbestos with rubber binder, 1/8-inch thick, Johns - Manville No. 60, John Crane Co. "Granite ", or Engineer approved equal. 3. Water Service a. Gaskets for water service shall be tested and certified by NSF 61. b. High Pressure Service (150 -450 psi at 120 - Degrees F): Gaskets for high pressure service shall be Garlok Style 3505 (Gylon) high performance restructured PTFE material with glass microspheres. c. Low Pressure Service (25 -150 psi at 120- Degrees F): Gaskets for low pressure service shall be Garlok Style 3760 -U synthetic fiber sheet with a proprietary rubber binder for raised face flanges and Garlok Style 98206 EPDM sheet gasket material with Sulfur Cure (85 durometer) for flat face flanges. C. Couplings and Adaptors: 1. Grooved Joint Couplings (Split Type): a. Grooved joint couplings shall be for use with grooved or shouldered end pipe and shall be rated for the same working pressures and test pressures of the piping, as specified in Section 15044. Grooved joint couplings may be either rigid or flexible design as required for the intended application. b. Construction: Coupling body shall be made of cast Type 316 stainless steel, ASTM A 351 Grade CF -8M. Coupling hardware shall be Type 316 stainless steel or material of higher corrosion resistance, and shall have a bright electopolished finish with a special antigalling coating. c. Gaskets: Gasket material for water service shall be EPDM conforming to ANSI/NSF Standard 61. WRAS - certified material with approved microbiological resistance to BS 6920 for cold and hot potable water service up to +149 °F / +65 °C. d. Finish: Smooth Electropolished e. Acceptable Manufacturers: 15066 -9 083116 • • • (1) Victaulic Company of America — Flexible models Style 475 for pipe diameters of 1 -inch through 6- inches and Style 77S for pipe diameters of 8- inches through 12- inches with pressures less than 300 psi. Rigid models Style 489 for pipe diameters of 1.5- inches through 12- inches with pressures less than 300 psi. (2) Piedmont Pacific Corporation - Style K for pipe diameters of 2 inches through 8 inches with pressures less than 200 psi, Style B for pipe diameters of 2 inches through 4 inches with pressures less than 300 psi. 2. Restrained Couplings (Bolted Split Sleeve Type) a. Restrained split sleeve couplings where indicated on the drawings for use with plain end stainless steel pipe shall be rated for the same working pressures and test pressures of the piping, as specified in Section 15044. Couplings shall incorporate a restrained design as required for the intended application. b. Construction: Coupling body, shoulder plates and sealing plate shall be made of Type 316L stainless steel conforming to ASTM A240. Restraining rings shall be Type 316L stainless steel conforming to ASTM A276. Coupling fasteners (hardware) shall be hex heavy and shall have a bright electopolished finish. Bolts shall conform to ASTM A193 Grade B8M 316 Class 2 and nuts to ASTM A194 Grade 8M 316, c. Gaskets: Gasket material for water service shall be EPDM conforming to ANSI/NSF Standard 61. d. Finish: Pickled and passivated after fabrication to provide a uniform finish. e. Acceptable Manufacturers: (1) Victaulic Company of America — Style 232S (formerly Depend -O -Lok FxF) for pipe diameters of 3- inches through 96- inches. Coupling shall be Type 2 shouldered coupling unless otherwise noted. with pressures less than 300 psi. 2.04 SPARE PARTS (Not Applicable) 15066 -10 083116 • • • 2.05 QUALITY CONTROL A. Contractor shall follow Manufacturer's and Supplier's recommended product quality control specifics as required for project. B. Piping subcontractor shall submit a list of welders who will work on this project along with a welder's current certification (less than one year old) and two sample weld coupons. Only approved welders will be allowed to work on this project. C. The weld should be made as rapidly as possible, with the least amount of generated heat. D. At random, Contractor shall visually examine via x -ray approximately 10 percent of all shop welds. 100% of field welds shall be examined via x -ray. E. All shop welds shall be visually inspected by the fabricator's quality control division. Each weld shall be marked with an inspection stamp, certifying that the weld is acceptable. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Descaling, Cleaning, and Passivation: 1. Following final fabrication, all stainless steel pipe spools and fittings shall be cleaned and descaled in accordance with the requirements of ASTM A- 380. Descaling shall include immersion in an appropriate pickling solution for the type and grade of material being treated. Caution shall be taken to avoid over - pickling. The type of acid used, acid concentration, solution temperature, and contact time shall be consistent with industry standards for such work. In addition to pickling, piping and fittings shall be scrubbed and washed until discoloration and possible iron, picked up from manufacturing process, is removed. Pickling and passivation of individual pipe lengths and fittings will not be considered equal to pickling and passivation of the finished product(s) following fabrication. 2. After chemical descaling, surfaces shall be thoroughly rinsed to remove residual chemicals. Surfaces shall not be permitted to dry between successive steps of the acid descaling and rinsing procedure. Following the final rinse, thorough air drying shall be performed. 15066 -11 083116 • • • B. Electropolishing 1. Where noted in the Contract Documents, electropolish stainless steel pipe inside and out in conformance with ASME B912. The electropolish process shall not remove more than 5 µm from the surface. 2. Following shop fabrication of pipe sections, straight spools, fittings and other components, prepare surface using preparatory and cleaning procedures defined in ASTM A 380. Wipe all items with appropriate solvent to remove any marks, sugar, markers, or crayon. 3. A post dip in room temperature 10 to 30% nitric acid solution is required to remove residuals from the electropolishing process and to provide a shine to the metal surface. Final rinsing with water shall follow the post dip procedure to remove residual acid or any other materials that may affect the appearance or performance of the passivated part. 4. Finished surfaces shall be free of imperfections such as pitting, etches, burn marks or stains, as in Electropolish Finish Standards (EFS) 3. C. Handling and Storage 1. Extreme care shall be used to avoid the contact of any ferrous materials with the stainless steel piping. All saws, drills, files, wire brushes, etc. shall be used for stainless steel piping only. Pipe storage and fabrication racks shall be non ferrous or stainless steel or rubber lined. Nylon slings or straps shall be used for handling stainless steel piping. Contact with ferrous items may cause rusting of iron particles embedded in the piping walls. After installation, the Contractor shall wash and rinse all foreign matter from the piping surface. If rusting of embedded iron occurs, the Contractor shall pickle the affected surface with Oakite Deoxidizer SS or equal, scrub with stainless steel brushes and rinse clean. 2. The use of chains, hooks, or other equipment which might injure the pipe will not be permitted. All other pipe handling equipment and methods shall be acceptable to the Engineer. 3. All fabricated piping shall have openings plugged and flanges screened for storage and/or transport after fabrication. 4. The Contractor shall be fully liable for the cost of replacement or repair of pipe which is damaged, including any cosmetic damage to electropolished piping. 15066 -12 083116 • • • 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Stainless steel piping shall be installed true to alignment and rigidly supported. B. After installation, completed pipelines shall be washed clean with steam or hot water to remove any foreign material picked up during transportation. C. Field Welded Piping: Field welding is not permitted unless otherwise approved by the Engineer. The Contractor shall use flange joints or couplings at assembly joints as approved by the Engineer. At other locations where permitted, field joint welding shall be in accordance with the ASME B31.3 standards. The strength of the weld shall develop the strength of the pipe. All field welds shall be descaled and passivated with pickling paste, scrubbed with stainless wire brushes and rinsed until clean. D. Installation Threaded Piping: Ream, clean and remove burrs from threaded straddling the pipe's horizontal and vertical centerline. Install pipe without springing, forcing, or stressing the pipe or any adjacent connecting valves or equipment. E. Fabrication, Assembly and Erection of Welded Piping: 1. Beveled ends for butt- welding shall conform to ANSI B16.25. Remove slag by chipping or grinding. Surfaces shall be clean of paint, oil, rust, scale, slag, and other material detrimental to welding. 2. Fabrication shall comply with ANSI B31.3, Chapter V. 3. Use the GTAW process only for all stainless steel welded butt joints in accordance with the specifications. 4. Welding preparation shall comply with ANSI B31.3, paragraph 327.3. Limitations on imperfections in welds shall conform to the requirements in ANSI B31.3, Tables 327.4.1A and 327.4.1a, and paragraph 327.4 for visual examination. Identify welds in accordance with ANSI B31.3, paragraph 327.4. 5. Clean each layer of deposited weld metal prior to depositing the next layer of weld metal, including the final pass, by a power- driven wire brush on the same material. 6. Welding electrodes shall comply with AWS A5.4. Bare wire shall comply with AWS AS.9. 15066 -13 083116 • 7. Where field welds are permitted, the Contractor shall install the stainless steel piping system with the minimal number of field welded joints as is possible. Field welding shall be in conformance with procedures detailed in the mechanical specifications. All installed stainless steel pipe shall be closed to the atmosphere after connections of pipe, valves or equipment with a nitrogen purge and bagged ends. Provide temporary enclosures as required to complete the piping installation in a clean environment. This area shall remain clean and dust free. If the area is not maintained adequately, the fabrication and welding work will not be accepted. 8. Mark each weld (field and manufacturing facility) with symbol identifying welder and date of weld. F. Painting: 1. Exposed stainless steel piping is not required to be painted, however, it will be required to be striped in accordance with Section 09900: Painting. 2. Fitting flanges and other non - stainless steel appurtenances shall be final painted as specified in Section 09900: Painting. 3.03 INSPECTION AND TESTING A. All stainless steel pipe shall be pressure tested in accordance with Section 15044: 410 Pressure Testing of Piping. • 3.04 START -UP AND INSTRUCTION (Not Applicable) END OF SECTION 15066 -14 083116 • • • SECTION 15105 PROCESS CONTROL VALVES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Scope of Work: Furnish and install process control valves of the type(s) and size(s) and in the location(s) as shown on the Drawings and /or specified herein. B. Special Conditions: If possible the Contractor shall select replacement butterfly valves to provide a lay length that matches the existing Bray Series 3A resilient seated butterfly valves to minimize the need for piping modifications and downtime during construction. C. Related Work Described Elsewhere: 1. Electric Motor Actuators: Section 15119. 2. Mechanical: Division 15. 3. Electrical: Division 16. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications: 1. All valves intended for identical services shall be of the same type, class, and duty and shall be manufactured by one (1) manufacturer. 2. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. High performance butterfly valves shall be manufactured by Bray Controls, Dezurik, or Neles - Jamesbury. No substitutions or equals will be considered. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Materials and Shop Drawings: Copies of all materials required to establish compliance with the Specification shall be submitted in accordance with the provisions of the General Requirements, Section 01330: 15105 -1 083116 • • • B. Submit to the Engineer within 30 days after execution of the contract a list of materials to be furnished, the names of the suppliers and the date of delivery of materials to the site. C. Complete shop drawings of all valves and appurtenances shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval in accordance with the requirements of Section 01330 and the General Requirements. In addition, valve manufacturer shall certify in writing that valve design and materials of construction are suitable for the intended service. D. Quality Control Submittals: 1. Certificate of Compliance for: a. Electric operators; full compliance with AWWA C540. 2. Tests and inspection data. 3. Manufacturer's Certificate of Proper Installation. 4. Operation and Maintenance Manual. 1.04 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. All materials shall be delivered, stored and handled in accordance with Section 15100: Valves and Appurtenances. 1.05 WARRANTY AND GUARANTEES A. The manufacturer's written warranty shall be submitted for all major pieces of equipment, as specified in Section 01600: Project Requirements. The manufacturer's warranty period shall be concurrent with the Contractor's correction period for 1 year after the time of completion and acceptance. 1.06 SPARE PARTS A. Provide one (1) set of valve packing for every five valves supplied. No less than one (1) set of packing shall be provided for each type and model of valve supplied. B. Provide spare parts and/or accessories for electric motor operated actuators per Section 15119: Electric Motor Acutators. C. Special tools, if required for normal operation and maintenance shall be supplied with the equipment. 15105 -2 083116 PART 2 - PRODUCTS II 2.01 SERVICE DESCRIPTION A. Arsenic Adsorber Control Valves • • 1. Ten (10) control valves shall be furnished for the arsenic adsorber treatment system. The valves shall be sized as shown on the Drawings, and shall be high performance butterfly valves as described below. 2.02 GENERAL A. Valve to include operator, actuator, handwheel, chain wheel, extension stem, floor stand, worm and gear operator, operating nut, chain, wrench, and accessories for a complete operation. B. All valves and appurtenances shall be of the size shown on the Drawings and all equipment of the same type shall be from one manufacturer. C. All valves and appurtenances shall have the name of the maker and the working pressure for which they are designed cast in raised letters upon some appropriate part of the body. D. All bolts, washers and nuts shall be Type 316 stainless steel, unless specified otherwise. E. Factory Finishing: 1. Epoxy Lining and Coating: a. In accordance with AWWA C550 unless otherwise specified. b. Either two -part liquid material or heat - activated (fusion) material except only heat - activated material if specified as "fusion" or "fusion bonded" epoxy. c. Minimum 7 -mil dry film thickness except where limited by valve operating tolerances. 2. Stainless Steel Valves: a. Pickling & passivation shall be provided for all stainless steel valves to provide a bright, uniform finish of the valve body interior and exterior surfaces, including the valve trim, and hardware. 15105 -3 083116 • • • 2.03 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT A. Approved Materials 1. All materials that come into contact with the water being treated or the finished water shall be on either the EPA or NSF lists of products approved for use in contact with potable water. Manufacturers shall submit an affidavit with the shop drawings indicating approval by the EPA or NSF for the materials used in products that come into contact with the water, in accordance with FDEP rules for drinking water system components. B. High Performance Butterfly Valves 1. Shall be manufactured of cast Type 316 stainless steel (ASTM A351, Grade CF8M), one piece lug or double flanged design with flange hole design for ANSI service as indicated in Table 15105 -A. Provided with top and bottom stem bearings consisting of a 316 stainless steel shell with a TFE /glass fabric liner bearing surface. Equipped with an externally adjustable stem packing system that allows packing adjustment without removing the actuator. The valve shall provide internal over - travel stop to prevent over - travel of the disc and minimize possible seat damage. 2. The valve seat shall consist of reinforced PTFE. Reinforced PTFE seats shall provide bi- directional shutoff. The seat design shall consist of a resilient energizer totally encapsulated by the seat which shall be self - adjusting for wear and temperature changes. Seat retainer shall be full - faced and firmly attached by bolts located outside the sealing area to protect them from corrosion. The seat shall be easily field replaceable and the seat assembly shall be locked in the body recess by the full -faced retainer. 3. The valve stem shall be one piece design and shall be manufactured of Type 316 stainless steel or 17 -4 PH stainless steel. The stem shall be provided with blow -out proof stem retention system to assure full retention of the stem in the unlikely event of an internal stem failure. The disc -to- stem connection shall be an internal connection design with no possible leak paths. 4. Valve hardware and all components on the valve including actuator adaptors and/or brackets shall be manufactured of Type 316 stainless steel. 5. The valve shall be controlled electrically. Actuation shall be modulating service and meet the requirements according to Section 15119: Electric 15105 -4 083116 Motor Actuators. Manual overrides shall be provided through the use of a handwheel operator. 6. Control valves shall be capable of controlling the flow at the specified minimum and maximum flow conditions and within the acceptable operating range as indicated in Table 15105 -A herein. 7. High performance butterfly valves shall be Series 4A, double flanged body as manufactured by Bray. Lugged body high performance valves by Bray, DeZurik (Model BHP) or Neles - Jamesbury (Series 815 or 830) will also be acceptable but will require substantial modifications to existing process piping. This option can be selected by the Contractor, but at no increase in contract schedule or cost to the Owner. 8. Testing: All valves shall be hydrostatic and leak tested in accordance with AWWA C -504. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and Section 15100: Valves and Appurtenances. • 3.02 START -UP AND INSTRUCTION A. Manufacturer's Representative: Present at site or classroom designated by Owner, for minimum person -days listed below, travel time excluded: • 1. One (1) person -day per completion phase for installation assistance and inspection. No less than a total of three (3) person -days of installation assistance. 2. One (1) person -day per completion phase for functional and performance testing and completion of Manufacturer's Certificate or Proper Installation and pre - startup classroom or site training. No less than a total of three (3) person -days of functional and performance testing. B. See Section 01730: Execution Requirements. 15105 -5 083116 • • • TABLE 15105 -A PROCESS CONTROL VALVES - DESIGN REQUIREMENTS Item/Design Conditions Arsenic Adsorber Control Valves Equipment Tag Number: As Noted on Drawings Valve Type: HP Butterfly Valve Size: 10 inch Design Pressure Drop: 20 psi End Connections: 150# FLG Water Rate of Flow, Min/Max: 150 /1,000 gpm Maximum Allowable Noise Level: 80 dBa Acceptable Control Range, % Open, Min/Max: 20 %/ 80% Notes: 1. Control valves shall be capable of controlling the flow to an individual adsorber treatment unit during backwash operations pre or post flushing without cavitating or hunting. END OF SECTION 15105 -6 083116 • • • SECTION 15119 ELECTRIC MOTOR ACTUATORS PART 1 — GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE A. The CONTRACTOR shall furnish all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals required, to complete, ready for operation and delivery, the electric motor actuators as depicted on the Contract Drawings; B. Related Work Specified Elsewhere (if included): 1. Division 1 — General Requirements; 2. Division 2 — Site Work; 3. Division 3 — Concrete; 4. Division 11 — Equipment; 5. Division 13 — Special Construction; 6. Division 15 — Mechanical; 7. Division 16 — Electrical; C. Electric motor actuators are designed to produce a multi -turn rotary motion output to actuate a multi -turn valve or gate or to actuate an external gear head for quarter - turn valves; D. The actuator(s) shall consist of an electric motor, worm gear reduction, optical absolute position encoder (or Hall Effect sensor), electronic torque sensor, mechanically and electrically interlocked reversing motor contactor, electronic overload protection, manual override hand wheel, valve interface bushing, terminals for indication connections, and local control switches all housed within a self - contained, sealed enclosure; E. Actuator design life shall be at least one million drive sleeve turns; F. Sufficient commissioning tools shall be provided with the actuators and must meet the enclosure protection and certification levels of the actuators. Commissioning tools shall not form an integral part of the actuator and must be removable for secure storage /authorized release. In addition, provision shall be made for the protection 15119 -1 • of configured actuator settings by a means independent of access to the commissioning tool. G. The actuator shall be sized to guarantee the valve or gate opening or closing that exceeds the following requirements: 1. The rated output torque of the actuator shall be at least 1.5 times the maximum torque required to open or close the valve or gate at any position including seating and unseating conditions when subjected to the most severe operating condition including any mechanical friction and/or other restrictive conditions that are inherent in the valve assembly. Do not include hammer -blow effect in sizing the actuator to comply with this torque requirement. Coordinate with the Valve (Gate) MANUFACTURER to assure that the motor actuator stall torque output does not exceed the torque limits of the valve (gate) operating stem or shaft. 2. Maximum torque shall include seating or unseating torque, bearing torque, dynamic torque, and hydrostatic torque. Assume that the differential pressure across the valve is equal to the pressure or head rating of the valve. Assume the temperature is 90 °F (32 °C); 3. For linear operating valves, the operating speed shall be such as to give valve closing and opening at approximately 10 -12 inches per minute unless otherwise stated in the data sheet; 4. For 90° valve types the operating time shall be specified; 5. Assume a maximum pipeline fluid velocity of 16 feet per second with the valve fully open, unless a higher velocity is specified in the detailed valve specification. H. Provide an electrical and mechanical disconnection of the motor without draining the lubricant from the actuator gear case; 1. Actuators shall be suitable for indoor and outdoor use. The actuator shall be capable of functioning in an ambient temperature ranging from 22 °F to +158 °F ( -30 °C to +70 °C), up to 100% relative humidity; J. Actuators for hazardous area application shall meet the area classification, gas group and temperature requirements -22 °F to +140 °F ( -30 °C to +60 °C); K. Like items of equipment provided hereunder shall be the end product of one Actuator MANUFACTURER in order to achieve standardization for appearance, operation, maintenance, spare parts and Actuator MANUFACTURER's service. 15119 -2 • • • L. Any modifications to a standard actuator product required to meet this specification shall be performed by the Actuator MANUFACTURER only. Distributor hardware field changes to the actuator product are specifically disallowed. 1.02 REFERENCES A. All characteristics, definitions, and terminology, except as specifically covered in this Specification, shall be in accordance with the latest revision of the following standards: 1. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) / American Water Works Association (AWWA) C542 - AWWA Standard for Electric Motor Actuators for Valves and Slide Gates; 2. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM); 3. ANSUNational Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) 250 — Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1,000 Volts Maximum); 4. ANSUNEMA MG 1 — Motors and Generators; 5. Copper Development Association (CDA); 6. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE); 7. International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC); 8. National Fire Protection Association® (NFPA ®) 70 — National Electric Code® (NEC ®); 9. NFPA® 70E® - Electrical Safety in the Workplace; 10. NEC n Article 500 — Hazardous (Classified) Locations, Classes I, II, and III, Division 1 and 2; 11. Society of Automotive Engineers (SAE); 12. Underwriters Laboratories (UL) 50 — Safety Enclosures for Electrical Equipment, Non - Environmental Considerations; 15119 -3 • • • 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings in accordance with the General Conditions and Section 01340. B. All submittal documents shall be provided in both hardcopy, bounded in separate three -ring binders, indexed, tabbed with sectional dividers, and no larger than 81/2- inch x 11 -inch and bookmarked electronic media - Adobe® Acrobat® portable document format. Two sets of hardcopy and two sets of electronic media shall be provided. C. All drawings shall be provided in both hardcopy, bounded, indexed, and no larger than 11 -inch x 17 -inch and bookmarked electronic media - Autodesk® AutoCAD® file format AND Adobe® Acrobat@ portable document format. Two sets of hardcopy and two sets of electronic media shall be provided. D. The CONTRACTOR shall submit Actuator MANUFACTURER's certified drawings that include: 1. Dimensions - Principal dimensions, including those necessary for interfacing with the valve or slide gate, general construction, and outline of the actuator mechanism; 2. Wiring diagrams - Electrical wiring diagrams with a list of symbols in accordance with ANSI/IEEE or IEC; E. The CONTRACTOR shall submit Actuator MANUFACTURER's catalog data sheet showing actuator parts and materials of construction including weights and coatings, referenced by ANSI, ASTM, SAE or CDA specification and grade for each type of actuator being provided, including: 1. Information — Listing the output torque or thrust, voltage, phase, frequency, full load amps, amperage at running torque and locked rotor, insulation type, nominal motor horsepower, output speed or travel time, lubricant type recommended for the gear case, as required; 2. Drawings - electrical schematic and physical wiring diagrams showing all components and connections; 3. Options — Any actuator options being supplied and those available for consideration; 4. Environmental — Listing temperature, humidity, and condensation requirements for operating and storage; 15119 -4 • • • 5. Independent Certification of proof of design and performance testing verification according to ANSI/AWWA C542; 6. Reference List of Installations - Florida municipality, contact names and Model & Part Numbers of the MANUFACTURER's actuators similar to the specified design including torque and position sensing, lubrication and enclosure design. F. The CONTRACTOR shall submit Actuator MANUFACTURER's Installation, operation, and maintenance manuals including: 1. Instructions — Complete installation, operation, and maintenance instructions; 2. Parts List — List of components; 3. Spare Parts — List of recommended spare parts; 4. Consumables — List of components that are consumed periodically; 5. Special Tools — List of special tools needed for installation, maintenance or adjustment; 6. Lubrication Guide — List of recommended lubricants; 7. Certified Drawings — A copy of each certified drawing; 8. Materials — List of materials used; G. The CONTRACTOR shall submit complete actuator sizing considerations, (as obtained from specifications, drawings, inspections, requests for information, etc.), including: 1. Data — a. Modulating (Throttling) Service; b. Contact closures, analog signal, or digital field bus controls required; c. Required actuator torque or thrust over full cycle (include weight lifted, packing friction); d. Desired speed of actuation or stroking time; e. Shaft diameter; f. Thread characteristics (including right- or left- hand); g. Keyway dimensions; h. Electrical needs; 15119 -5 • 2. Conditions — Most adverse conditions to be encountered when actuation is necessary: a. Valve pressure ratings; b. Actuator design heads; c. Etc.; 3. Comparison - CONTRACTOR selected actuator information compared with the required data & conditions; 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The Actuator MANUFACTURER shall have a minimum of ten (10) -years consecutive experience producing similar equipment; B. The Actuator MANUFACTURER shall be ISO certified; C. Listing Requirements — 1. Non - Hazardous Locations: NEMA 6/1P68 (Indoor or outdoor use primarily to provide a degree of protection against hose - directed water, and the entry of water during occasional temporary submersion at a limited depth and damage from external ice formation), Temperature -22 °F to +158 °F ( -30 °C to +70 °C); 2. Hazardous Area Locations: Factory Mutual (FM) Class 1, Division 1, Groups C, D, E, F, G hazardous areas: Explosion -proof to NEC® Article 500; Temperature -22 °F to +140 °F ( -30 °C to +60 °C); D. Each actuator shall be performance tested prior to shipment in accordance with AWWA C542; 1. The application torque shall be the maximum torque required to open or close the valve at any position including seating and unseating conditions; 2. A test report shall accompany delivery in accordance with AWWA C542 shall be provided; 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver products in factory labeled packages that include recommended storage practices placed on the outside of the shipping container. B. Store and handle in strict compliance with MANUFACTURER's instructions and recommendations. Protect from potential damage from weather and construction operations. Store so condensation will not form on or in actuators and if necessary, apply temporary heat where required to obtain suitable service conditions. 15119 -6 1.06 SPARE PARTS III A. Furnish the following: • • 1. One (1) spare electric motor actuator in full conformance with Specification Section 15119; 2. Five (5) fuses of each size and type used; 3. One (1) electronics board of each type used; 4. One (1) display assembly of each type used; 5. Two (2) gaskets /seals of each type used; 6. One (1) switch assembly of each type used; B. Two (2) half pint containers of touchup paint matching actuator finish; C. Spare parts shall be boxed or packaged for long -term storage and clearly identified on the exterior of the package. Identify each item with MANUFACTURERs name, description and part number. D. All spare parts shall be delivered prior to actuator startup; 1.07 CONFIGURATION SOFTWARE AND CONNECTION A. One (1) complete licensed Configuration, Control and Monitoring Microsoft® WindowsTM Based Software and PC To Actuator Converter & Connection Device /Cable shall be delivered prior to actuator startup; 1.08 WARRANTY A. Any actuator(s) or components that fail or perform incorrectly prior to warranty completion shall be replaced at no cost to the OWNER. B. The factory warranty shall include all parts related to the restoration of the failed component. C. The Actuator MANUFACTURER shall guarantee the electric motor actuator and supporting components with a factory warranty for a period of two -years from date of Substantial Completion. 15119 -7 • • • PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.01. GENERAL DESIGN A. The actuators shall be suitable for use on a nominal 460 volt three -phase 60 Hertz power supply and are to incorporate motor, integral reversing starter, local control facilities, and terminals for indication connections. B. Multi -turn Applications — The electric motor actuator for multi -turn applications shall include one integral unit consisting of the electric motor, reduction gearing, drive coupling, torque switches, position limit switches, gear case, and auxiliary hand wheel. The valve or slide gate and actuator combination must be self - locking. C. Quarter -turn Applications - The electric motor actuator for quarter -turn applications shall include one integral unit consisting of the electric motor, reduction gearing, drive coupling between the final drive gear and valve stem, torque switches, position limit switches, gear case, and auxiliary hand wheel. The valve and actuator combination must be self - locking. D. Gears — Reduction shall be accomplished by means of spur, helical, bevel, or worm gears. Spur, helical, and bevel gears shall be made of steel. Worm wheel gear teeth shall be made of bronze. The worm shall be hardened steel. The use of non - metallic or aluminum gears in the power train is unacceptable. E. Lost - motion Device — When required by the unseating application, a lost- motion device independent of gear backlash shall be supplied as an integral part of the actuator gear train. This device shall allow the motor to attain full speed before the load is engaged. The lost - motion device shall not be incorporated in actuators supplied for modulating service. F. Bearings — Gears and shafting shall be supported on anti - friction bearings. Where thrust is a consideration, roller or axial - thrust- needle bearings (to accept thrust) shall be provided. G. Lubrication — Gearing and bearings shall be grease or oil - lubricated. Lubricants shall be suitable for year -round service based on normal ambient temperature conditions of -22 °F to +158 °F ( -30 °C to +70 °C); H. Hand Wheel — The actuator shall be equipped with a hand wheel for manual operation, connected so that operation by the motor shall not cause the hand wheel to rotate, and the operation of the hand wheel shall not cause the motor to rotate. If power is returned to the motor while the hand wheel is in use, the design of the actuator shall prevent transmission of the motor torque to the hand wheel. Use of the hand wheel shall not negate the lost - motion feature. The hand wheel shall require a maximum input force of 80- pounds (356- newtons) on the rim /spoke for seating or unloading load. When unseated, the hand wheel shall require a maximum 15119 -8 • • input force of 60- pounds (267 - newtons) on the rim /spoke at any point through the travel for running load. I. Motor — Electric motors shall be specifically designed for valve or slide gate service (high torque, low inertia duty). Motors shall be capable of operating through one complete cycle, open - close -open or close- open- close, under the maximum specified operating conditions without overheating when voltage to the motor is within + / -10 percent of the specified voltage. Motors shall have Class F — 311 °F (155 °C) Insulation, at a minimum, in accordance with ANSI/NEMA MG1. Overload protection shall be by means of overload relays or inherent motor heat sensors embedded in the windings: 1. Modulating actuators shall be designed for 30- minute duty or 600 starts per hour at 104 of (40 oC); J. Limit Switches — Open and close position limit switches /sensors shall be geared to the drive mechanism and in step at all times whether the unit is operated electrically or manually. The switches /sensors shall be of the field- adjustable type and capable of being set either fully open, fully closed, or at any intermediate position. Limit - switch gearing shall be appropriately lubricated and totally enclosed to prevent the entrance of foreign material or the loss of lubricant. K. Torque Switches — The actuator shall include an adjustable electronic torque switch/sensor (and thrust switch/sensor, where applicable) arrangement to break the control power circuit when a valve requiring torque seating has reached the fully open or fully closed position (stops), or when an obstruction has been encountered in either direction of travel. Open and close torque switches /sensors shall be individually adjustable. An open torque switch bypass circuit shall be provided for torque- seated valves or slide gates to eliminate a nuisance trip during unseating. The torque switch shall remove power to the actuator motor within 50- milliseconds of a stalled valve occurrence. L. Electrical- Controls Enclosure — Terminal strips or blocks, limit switches and torque switches shall be housed in compartment(s) integral to the actuator. At a minimum, the electric motor enclosure shall meet NEMA Type 6/IP68 (occasionally submersible, watertight, sleet resistant — indoor and outdoor). M. Wiring & Terminals - Internal wiring shall be flame- resistant, rated 105 °C, and UL listed. stranded cable of appropriate size for the control and three -phase power; 1. Each wire shall be clearly identified at each end; 2. All wiring supplied as part of the actuator to be contained within the main enclosure for physical and environmental protection; External conduit connections between components are not acceptable; 15119 -9 3. The terminals shall be embedded in a terminal block of high tracking resistance compound; 4. The terminal compartment of the actuator shall be provided with a minimum of two (2) threaded cable entries; 5. Control logic circuit boards and relay boards must be mounted on plastic mounts to comply with double insulated standards; 6. A durable terminal identification card showing plan of terminals shall be provided attached to the inside of the terminal box cover indicating: a. Serial Number; b. External Voltage Values; c. Wiring Diagram Number; d. Terminal Layout; 7. This must be suitable for the CONTRACTOR to inscribe cable core identification beside terminal numbers; N. Drive Coupling — Mating of the electric actuator to driven equipment shall be accomplished by means of a separate, removable drive coupling (bronze stem nut for threaded rising stems or steel bushing for shaft and key applications), permitting installation and removal without disassembly of the actuator. Where an auxiliary gear box (quarter -turn) is supplied as an integral part of the electric actuator, a separate, removable drive coupling for mating of the actuator to the auxiliary gear box will not be required. Coupling of the electric actuator to some valve top works configurations, such as rising, rotating, and splined shaft, may be accomplished, if necessary, without the use of a separate, removable drive coupling. O. Position Indication — Position indication shall be accomplished by means of an optical, absolute position encoder (or Hall Effect sensor) in full step at all times with the valve or slide gate travel during both power and manual operation. P. Stem Protectors — Stem protectors for rising, threaded stem applications shall be provided in suitable length and diameter to allow full extension of the stem. Stem protectors shall couple to the top of the actuator by means of a national pipe thread (NPT) or suitable clamping device, and shall be capped and vented to prevent the entrance of foreign matter and to minimize condensation inside the cover. Q. • Integral Actuator Manual Controls — Integral to the actuator shall be an Open, Close and Stop selector switch, a Remote, Local and Off selector switch (padlockable in any one of the following three positions: Local Control Only, Off (No Electrical Operation), and Remote (plus Local Stop Only)); 1. Monitor Relay (Fault Alarm) 15119 -10 • • • a. The Monitor Relay is a normally closed contact and will monitor the following: i. Motor Thermal Trip; ii. Loss of Primary and Secondary Fuses; iii. Transformer Loss; iv. Power Loss. R. Provide a diagnostic module, which will store and enable download of historical actuator data to permit analysis of changes in actuator or valve performance; 1. A software tool shall be provided to allow configuration and diagnostic information to be reviewed, analyzed and reconfigured; 2. Diagnostic status screens must be provided to show multiple functions simultaneously. S. Painting and Coatings — Actuators shall be shop coated: 1. Internal surfaces — Ferrous internal surface, except finished working parts, such as shafts and gears, surfaces subject to constant coating by lubricants or working fluids, and corrosion- resistant metals, shall be shop cleaned and coated to resist corrosion. A light color shall be used to enhance inspection and maintenance. 2. External surfaces — External surfaces, except machined surfaces, shall be thoroughly cleaned and shop coated with a suitable primer or paint system to a dry thickness of not less than 3 mil (75 micrometers). Machined surfaces shall be coasted with suitable rust preventative applied in accordance with the Actuator MANUFACTURER's recommendations. T. Marking — A stainless steel nameplate or nameplates containing the following data shall be permanently mounted on the actuator housing: 1. MANUFACTURER's Name; 2. Identifying Model Number and/or Serial Number; 3. Supply Voltage; 4. Full Load Current; 5. Motor RPM; 6. Motor horsepower rating; 15119 -11 • • • U. Tag — A stainless steel tag identifying the actuator shall be provided. Attach tags to actuators by means of a stainless -steel wire; V. Startup Kit - Each actuator shall be supplied with a startup kit comprised of installation instruction, electrical wiring diagram, and sufficient spare cover screws and seals to resolve any site losses during the commissioning period; 2.02 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. The listing of specific MANUFACTURERs does not imply acceptance of their products that do not meet the specified ratings, features and functions. MANUFACTURERs listed are not relieved from meeting these specifications in their entirety. Products in compliance with the specification and manufactured by others not named will be considered only if pre- approved by the OWNER ten (10) days prior to bid date. 1. EIM Emerson (Basis of Design) Series 2000/M2CP with Futronic II Package w/ MDPI & Pot, and circuit breaker module 2. Beck Model 11 -269 PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.01 DELIVERY A. The actuator(s) shall be protected against damage until installation. Any damage to the paint shall be carefully repaired using touch -up paint furnished by Actuator MANUFACTURER. B. Upon delivery, the CONTRACTOR shall coordinate with the Actuator MANUFACTURER or their local factory - certified Product Partner to ensure a correct mechanical and electrical installation of the actuator(s) and associated components. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. The Actuator MANUFACTURER shall have the local capability and personnel to assist in the start-up, training, service and maintenance of the actuator(s). B. All actuator(s) shall be installed per the Contract Drawings in accordance with the Actuator MANUFACTURER's instructions and recommendations. C. Where shown in the Contract Drawings, mount the actuators on floor stands with extension stems. 15119 -12 • • • D. Provide additional hangers and supports for actuators which are not mounted vertically over the valve or which may impose an eccentric load on the piping system. E. The CONTRACTOR shall provide the technical services of the Actuator MANUFACTURER or their local factory - certified Product Partner, who shall supervise the installation, perform a certified Actuator startup and testing of each Actuator and accessories furnished under this Section and instruct the OWNER's personnel in the correct operation of the units. F. All costs for transportation, lodging, subsistence, and other incidental costs for the Actuator MANUFACTURER or their local factory - certified Product Partner personnel during the installation, startup, testing, and instruction shall be by the CONTRACTOR at no cost to the OWNER. 3.03 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. The actuator(s) shall be adjusted accordingly per Actuator MANUFACTURER's recommendations. B. Clean exposed surfaces using Actuator MANUFACTURER recommended materials and methods. C. Vacuum all interior spaces. 3.04 TESTING A. Perform factory and installation tests in accordance with applicable NEC ®, NEMA and UL requirements. 3.05 STARTUP SERVICES A. The CONTRACTOR shall provide the following Actuator MANUFACTURER or their local factory - certified Product Partner Services, at a minimum: 1. Two (2) person -days (a day equals 8- hours) for installation assistance and inspection; 2. Two (2) person -days for functional and performance testing and completion of Actuator MANUFACTURER Certified Startup and Certificate of Proper Installation; 3. One (1) person -day for facility startup (Two (2) additional trips shall be included for this work at days /times approved and selected by the OWNER); 15119 -13 • B. The initial Actuator MANUFACTURER Certified Startup of each actuator delivered with the assistance of the OWNER shall include the following, at a minimum: 1. Verify that the model numbers and the voltage ratings are as specified in the purchase order or Contract Drawings by matching the nameplate data for each actuator to the purchase order or Contract Drawings; 2. Verify that the actuator has been installed in accordance with the mechanical and electrical installation sections of the O &M Manual; 3. Inspect the security of the supply line power, ground connections, and all control circuit connections; 4. Verify that all other field- installed wires are correctly terminated (including the shields); 5. Record the actuator nameplate (voltage, power factor, full load amps, RPM, etc.) information; 6. Verify that the input voltage matches the actuator's rating; 7. Verify that the motor is wired for the application voltage; • 8. Record any other connections to the actuator by terminal number to determine if special configuration or programming is required; • 9. Off -line, verify that the configuration is ready to perform adequately for start and stop command functions; 10. Apply power to the actuator; 11. Make sure that the input voltage is correct for the system being set up; 12. Verify that the actuator display is on; 13. Download configuration; 14. Proceed with commissioning procedure; 15. Verify correct operation in HAND /LOCAL, OFF and AUTO/REMOTE modes; 16. Upload installed actuator configuration and provide a copy of the file to the OWNER; 15119 -14 • • • 17. Actuator MANUFACTURER certified start-up form shall be filled out for each actuator started up with a copy provided to the OWNER. 3.06 ON -SITE TRAINING A. The Actuator MANUFACTURER or their local factory - certified Product Partner shall provide on -site training; 1. Minimum of three (3) 4 -hour on -site training sessions supplied at time and location approved by the OWNER. Contractor shall provide a minimum two -week advance notice /coordination to set up training sessions. 2. Each student shall receive a "quick startup guide ", a listing of each electric motor actuator configuration and parameterization and Trouble - shooting guide with Fault codes; 3. Any and all special tools, equipment training manuals used during the training shall be the property of the OWNER upon completion of the training. END OF SECTION 15119 -15 DIVISION 16 ELECTRICAL SECTION 16050 • BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: General administrative, procedural requirements, and installation methods for electrical installations specified in Division 16. B. The Drawings are schematic and are not intended to show every detail of construction. 1. In general, conduits /raceways, transitions and offsets shown on Drawings indicate approximate locations in plan and elevation where the systems are intended to be run. 2. CONTRACTOR shall fully coordinate electrical Work with other trades to avoid interferences. 3. In the event of interferences, CONTRACTOR shall request clarification from ENGINEER in writing. B. Related Documents: Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General • and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Sections, apply to Work of this Section. • 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Submit in accordance with requirements of Section 01340, Shop Drawings covering the items included under this Section of Work. Shop Drawing submittals shall include: 1. Submit product data covering the items included under this Section of Work. B. Conforming to Construction Drawings: Submit a complete set of Drawings showing the locations of the piping, ductwork, etc., as actually installed. Such Drawings shall be submitted to ENGINEER on tracing cloth, mylar, or sepia paper from which blueprints can be obtained. C. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Submit in accordance with requirements of Section 01730, operation and maintenance manuals for items included under this Section. Include following information for equipment items: 16050 -1 032816 • • • 1. Description of function, normal operating characteristics and limitations, performance curves, engineering data and tests, and complete nomenclature and commercial numbers of replacement parts. 2. Manufacturer's printed operating procedures to include start-up, break -in, and routine and normal operating instructions; regulation, control, stopping, shutdown, and emergency instructions; and summer and winter operating instructions. 3. Maintenance procedures for routine preventative maintenance and troubleshooting; disassembly, repair, and reassembly; aligning and adjusting instructions. 4. Servicing instructions and lubrication charts and schedules. 1.03 RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Prepare Record Documents in accordance with requirements in Section 01770. In addition, CONTRACTOR shall submit, prior to final payment, Drawings conforming to construction records of systems it has installed. Vendor drawings shall be sized as manufacturers' standard. B. Provide typewritten data sheets on motor control circuits with following information on each branch feeder: Load name, horsepower or KVA (transformer), fuse size, starter size, service factor of motor, motor nameplate currents, power factor correction capacitor size (if used), and thermal overload part number. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. National Electrical Code: Comply with NFPA 70, National Electrical Code B. Workplace Electrical Safety: Comply with NFPA 70E, Standard for Electrical Safety in the Workplace. C. UL Compliance and Labeling: Use products and components labeled by UL. 1.05 PERMITS, INSPECTIONS, AND LICENSES A. CONTRACTOR shall procure all necessary permits and licenses, observe and abide by all applicable laws, codes, regulations, ordinances, and rules of the State, territory, or political subdivision thereof, wherein Work is done, or any other duly constituted public authority, and further agrees to hold OWNER harmless from liability or penalty which might be imposed by reason of an asserted violation of such laws, codes, regulations, ordinances, or other rules. 16050 -2 032816 • • • 1. Upon completion of Work, CONTRACTOR shall secure certificates of inspection from the inspector having jurisdiction and shall submit 3 copies of the certificates to OWNER. CONTRACTOR shall pay the fees for the permits, inspections, licenses, and certifications when such fees are required. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver products to Project properly identified with names, model numbers, types, grades, compliance labels, and other information needed for identification. Equipment shall be packaged to prevent damage during shipment, storage, and handling. Do not install damaged units; replace, and remove damaged units from Site. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01 AMMETER (NOT USED) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION A. Provide electrical materials and equipment enclosures appropriate for areas in which they are installed. Each area will be designated on Drawings with a type of construction such as NEMA 4X. An area designated by a name and elevation includes space bounded by floor, ceiling, and enclosing walls. 1. Exception: Provide manufacturer's standard construction for indoor or outdoor application where equipment is not manufactured to NEMA specifications (e.g., switchgear, transformers, high voltage capacitors, bus duct, and light fixtures; materials and equipment used in finished areas such as offices, laboratories, etc.). B. Provide 316 stainless less electrical materials and equipment enclosures in NEMA 4X areas; watertight NEMA 4X and equipment enclosures for outdoor applications and indoor applications below grade; explosion -proof NEC Class I, Division 1, Group D equipment for NEMA 7 areas; explosion -proof NEC Class II, Division 2, Group F equipment for NEMA 9 areas. C. Supporting devices and sleeves shall be set in poured -in -place concrete and other structural components as they are constructed. D. Where mounting heights are not detailed or dimensioned, install systems, materials, and equipment to provide maximum headroom possible... 16050 -3 032816 • • • E. Install systems, materials, and equipment to conform with approved submittal data, including coordination Drawings, to greatest extent possible. Conform to arrangements indicated by Drawings recognizing that portions of Work are shown only in diagrammatic form. Where coordination requirements conflict with individual system requirements, refer conflict to ENGINEER. F. Install systems, materials, and equipment level and plumb, parallel and perpendicular to other building systems and components where installed exposed in finished spaces. G. As much as practical, connect equipment for ease of disconnecting with minimum of interference with other installations. H. Install systems, materials, and equipment giving right -of -way priority to systems required to be installed at a specified slope. 3.02 RACEWAY INSTALLATION A. Outdoors, use the following materials: 1. Exposed Conduit: Rigid Aluminum metal conduit and fittings. 2. Underground Direct Buried Conduit: Schedule 40 PVC conduit. 3. Conduit Used to Connect to Vibrating Equipment including actuators or motor - driven equipment: Liquidtight flexible metal conduit. B. Indoors, use the following wiring materials: 1. Exposed Conduit: Rigid Aluminum Conduit. 2. Concealed Conduit: Rigid Aluminum Conduit. C. Minimum size conduit shall be 3/4 inch unless shown otherwise. D. Instrument Signal Conduit Requirements: Shielded signal wires for 4 -20 mA type instruments or thermocouple wires assigned to the same control panel may be run in the same conduit. Shielded instrument signal wires, thermocouple wires, and shielded 2 -wire intercom wires may be run in the same conduit. No other wires will be permitted in an instrument signal /2 -wire intercom conduit. E. Conduit Thread Paint: Make threaded conduit joints watertight by coating threaded portions with a spray -on or brush -on zinc - bearing paint. Provide paint containing 90 percent minimum by weight of metallic zinc powder in the dried film. Clean field -cut threads of oil using the recommended solvent prior to coating threads. 16050 -4 032816 • • F. Install expansion fittings in all exposed rigid nonmetallic conduit runs of 20 feet or more. G. Install expansion /deflection fittings where conduit passes a building expansion joint or where conduits are attached to two structures joined by a concrete expansion joint. H. Exposed or Concealed Construction: Install conduit exposed inside buildings except for areas with finished walls (e.g., offices, laboratories, lavatories, locker rooms, etc.) unless otherwise indicated. I. Concealed Raceways: Raceways embedded in slabs shall be installed in the middle third of the slab thickness where practical and leave at least 1 -inch concrete cover. Tie raceways to reinforcing rods or otherwise secure them to prevent sagging or shifting during concrete placement. Space raceways laterally to prevent voids in the concrete. Run 1 -inch and smaller raceways with a minimum of bends in the shortest practical distance. Run larger conduit parallel with or at right angles to the main reinforcement; where at right angles to the reinforcement, the conduit shall be close to one of the supports of the slab. Where nonmetallic conduit or fiberglass- reinforced conduit is used, raceways must be converted to PVC externally coated rigid metal conduit before rising above floor. J. Exposed Raceways: Install parallel and perpendicular to nearby surfaces or structural members and follow the surface contours as much as practical. Make bends and offsets so the inside diameter is not effectively reduced. Keep the legs of a bend in the same plane and the straight legs of offsets parallel. Conduits shall slope away from loads to keep moisture from entering the load. Run parallel or banked raceways together. Make bends in parallel or banked runs from the same centerline so that the bends are parallel. Factory elbows may be used in banked runs only where they can be installed parallel. This requires that there be a change in the plane of the run, such as from wall to ceiling and that the raceways be of the same size. In other cases, provide field bends for parallel raceways. Keep raceways at least 6 inches away from parallel runs of flues and steam or hot water pipes. Install horizontal raceway runs above water and steam piping. K. Space raceways, fittings, and boxes 0.25 inch from mounting surface in NEMA 4X areas. Spacers shall be one -piece construction of stainless steel, or other noncorrosive material. L. Sleeves: Install in concrete floor slabs except where conduit passes through a housekeeping pad. Install in exterior walls below grade. M. Stub -up Connections: Extend conduits through concrete floor for connection to freestanding equipment with an adjustable top or coupling threaded inside for plugs and set flush with the finished floor. Extend conductors to equipment with rigid metal conduit; flexible metal conduit may be used 6 inches above the floor. Where 16050 -5 032816 • • equipment connections are not made under this Contract, install screwdriver - operated threaded flush plugs with floor. N. Flexible Connections: Use short length (maximum 6 feet for lighting fixtures; maximum 3 feet for all other equipment) of flexible conduit for recessed and semi - recessed lighting fixtures, equipment subject to vibration, noise transmission, or movement, and all motors. Use liquidtight flexible conduit in wet locations and rated flexible connections for hazardous locations. Install separate ground conductor across flexible connections. 0. Join raceways with fittings designed and approved for the purpose and make joints tight. Where joints cannot be made tight, use bonding jumpers to provide electrical continuity of the raceway system. Where terminations are subject to vibration, use bonding bushings or wedges to assure electrical continuity. Where subject to vibration or dampness, use insulating bushings to protect conductors. P. Use raceway fittings that are of types compatible with the associated raceway and suitable for the use and location. For intermediate metal conduit, use threaded rigid metal conduit fittings. For PVC externally coated rigid metal conduit, use only factory - coated fittings approved for use with that material. Patch all nicks and scrapes in PVC coating after installing conduit. Q. Install raceway sealing fittings in accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions. Locate fittings at suitable, approved, accessible locations and fill them with UL listed sealing compound. For concealed raceways, install each fitting in a flush metal box with a blank cover plate having a finish similar to that of adjacent plates or surfaces. Install raceway sealing fittings at the following points and elsewhere as indicated: 1. Where conduits enter or leave hazardous locations. 2. Where conduits enter or leave NEMA 4X areas. 3. Where conduits pass from warm locations to cold locations, such as the boundaries of refrigerated spaces and air - conditioned spaces. 4. Where required by the NEC. R. Install electrical boxes in those locations which ensure ready accessibility to enclosed electrical wiring. Provide knockout closures to cap unused knockout holes where blanks have been removed. S. Fasten electrical boxes firmly and rigidly to substrates or structural surfaces to which attached, or solidly embed electrical boxes in concrete masonry. 16050 -6 032816 • • • T. Support exposed raceway within 1 foot of an unsupported box and access fittings. In horizontal runs, support at box and access fittings may be omitted where box or access fittings are independently supported and raceway terminals are not made with chase nipples or threadless box connectors. U. In open overhead spaces, cast boxes threaded to raceways need not be supported separately except where used for fixture support; support sheet metal boxes directly from building structure. V. Terminations: Where raceways are terminated with locknuts and bushings, align the raceway to enter squarely and install the locknuts with dished part against the box. Where terminating in threaded hubs, screw the raceway or fitting tight into the hub so the end bears against the wire protection shoulder. Where chase nipples are used, align the raceway so the coupling is square to the box and tighten the chase nipples so no threads are exposed. W. Complete installation of electrical raceways before starting installation of conductors within raceways and prevent foreign matter from entering raceways by using temporary closure protection. Cap spare conduit. Protect stub -ups from damage where conduits rise from floor slabs. Arrange so curved portion of bends is not visible above the finished slab. X. Install pull wires in empty raceways: Use No. 14 AWG zinc - coated steel or monofilament plastic line having not less than 200 -pound tensile strength. Leave not less than 12 inches of slack at each end of the pull wire. 3.03 WIRE AND CABLE INSTALLATION A. Use pulling means including fish tape, cable, rope, and basket weave wire /cable grips which will not damage cables or raceways. Pull conductors simultaneously where more than one is being installed in same raceway. Use UL listed pulling compound or lubricant where necessary. B. Keep branch circuit conductor splices to minimum. Splice feeders only where indicated. Use a standard kit. No splices are allowed for instrument and telephone cables except at indicated splice points. C. Install splice and tap connectors which possess equivalent or better mechanical strength and insulation rating than conductors being spliced. Use splice and tap connectors which are compatible with conductor material and are UL listed as pressure type connectors. D. Provide adequate length of conductors within electrical enclosures and train conductors to terminal points with no excess. Bundle multiple conductors, with 16050 -7 032816 • conductors larger than No. 10 AWG cabled in individual circuits. Make terminations so there is no bare conductor at terminal. E. Terminate power conductors at equipment using pressure -type terminals specifically designed for type of terminations to be made. Terminate no more than 2 conductors No. 8 AWG and smaller within the same pressure -type terminal. These 2 conductors shall be no more than 4 wire gauge sizes apart. Terminate no more than 1 conductor larger than No. 8 AWG within any pressure -type terminal. 1. Exception: Power factor correction capacitor conductors may be terminated at the motor disconnect switch load terminals. F. Seal wire and cable ends until ready to splice or terminate. 3.04 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. Perform cutting and patching in accordance with requirements in Section 01730. In addition, the following requirements apply. 1. Perform cutting, fitting, and patching of electrical equipment and materials required to uncover Work to provide for installation of ill -timed Work, remove and replace Work that is either defective or does not conform to requirements of Drawings. 2. Cut, remove, and legally dispose of selected electrical equipment, components, and materials as indicated including, but not limited to, removal of electrical items indicated to be removed and items made obsolete by new Work. Protect structure, furnishings, finishes, and adjacent materials not indicated or scheduled to be removed. Provide and maintain temporary partitions or dust barriers adequate to prevent spread of dust and dirt to adjacent areas. 3. Patch existing finished surfaces and building components using new materials matching existing materials. 3.05 EQUIPMENT CHECKOUT AND TESTING A. Equipment Testing: The following tests which are applicable for a particular item of equipment shall be performed: 1. After Work has been completed, demonstrate to OWNER's Representative that entire electrical installation is in proper working order and will perform functions for which it was designed by functional testing. 2. Make any specific tests required by the manufacturer's installation instructions. B. Check -out Procedures. In general, check -out procedures (as listed below) which are applicable for a particular item of equipment shall be performed: 16050 -8 032816 • • • 1. Check direction of rotation of motors and reverse connections if necessary. Check rotation with motor mechanically uncoupled where reverse rotation could damage equipment. 2. Check exposed bolted power connections for tightness. 3. Check operation of breakers, contactors, etc., and control and safety interlocks. 4. Check tightness of bolted structural connections. 5. Check leveling and alignment of enclosures. 6. Check operating parts and linkages for lubrication, freedom from binding, vibration, etc. 7. Check tightness and correctness of control connections at terminal blocks, relays, meters, switches, etc. 8. Clean auxiliary contacts and exposed relay contacts after vacuuming. END OF SECTION 16050 -9 032816 • • SECTION 16060 GROUNDING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Electrical grounding and bonding Work as follows: 1. Solidly grounded. B. Applications of electrical grounding and bonding Work in this Section: 1. Electrical power systems. 2. Grounding electrodes. 3. Separately derived systems. 4. Raceways. 5. Enclosures. 6. Equipment. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Submit in accordance with Section 01340, Shop Drawings covering the items included under this Section. Shop Drawing submittals shall include: 1. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's data on grounding and bonding products and associated accessories. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Codes and Standards: 1. UL Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements of UL Standards No. 467, "Electrical Grounding and Bonding Equipment," and No. 869, "Electrical Service Equipment," pertaining to grounding and bonding of systems, circuits, and equipment. In addition, comply with UL Standard 486A, "Wire Connectors and Soldering Lugs for Use with Copper Conductors." Provide grounding and bonding products which are UL listed and labeled for their intended usage. 2. IEEE Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements and recommended installation practices of IEEE Standards 80, 81, 141, and 142 pertaining to grounding and bonding of systems, circuits, and equipment. 16060 -1 032816 • • PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 GROUNDING AND BONDING A. Materials and Components: 1. Except as otherwise indicated, provide electrical grounding and bonding systems indicated; with assembly of materials including, but not limited to, cables /wires, connectors, solderless lug terminals, grounding electrodes and plate electrodes, bonding jumper braid, surge arresters, and additional accessories needed for complete installation. Where more than one type component product meets indicated requirements, selection is Installer's option. Where materials or components are not indicated, provide products which comply with NEC, UL, and IEEE requirements and with established industry standards for those applications indicated. 2. Conductors: Electrical copper grounding conductors for grounding system connections that match power supply wiring materials and are sized according to NEC. 3. Service Arrester: Electrical service arrester, 480 volts, 3- phase, 4 -wire, for exterior mounting. 4. Grounding Electrodes: Steel with copper welded exterior, 3/4 -inch diameter by 10 feet. 5. Electrical Grounding Connection Accessories: Provide electrical insulating tape, heat - shrinkable insulating tubing, welding materials, bonding straps, as recommended by accessories manufacturers for type services indicated. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION OF ELECTRICAL GROUNDING AND BONDING SYSTEMS A. Connect grounding conductors to underground grounding electrodes using exothermic weld process or mechanical compression type connectors. B. Ground electrical service system neutral at service entrance equipment to grounding electrodes. C. Ground each separately derived system neutral to effectively grounded metallic water pipe, effectively grounded structural steel member, and separate grounding electrode. 16060 -2 032816 • • • D. Connect together system neutral, service equipment enclosures, exposed noncurrent carrying metal parts of electrical equipment, metal raceway systems, grounding conductor in raceways and cables, receptacle ground connectors, and plumbing systems. E. Terminate feeder and branch circuit insulated equipment grounding conductors with grounding lug, bus, or bushing. F. Connect grounding electrode conductors to 1 -inch diameter or greater, metallic cold water pipe using a suitably sized ground clamp. Provide connections to flanged piping at street side of flange. G. Bond grounding cables to both ends of metal conduit or sleeves through which such cables pass. H. Tighten grounding and bonding connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts, in accordance with manufacturer's published torque- tightening values for connectors and bolts. Where manufacturer's torquing requirements are not indicated, tighten connections to comply with tightening torque values specified in UL 486A to assure permanent and effective grounding. I. Install braided type bonding jumpers with code -sized ground clamps on water meter piping to electrically bypass water meters. J. Route grounding connections and conductors to ground and protective devices in shortest and straightest paths as possible while following building lines to minimize transient voltage rises. Protect exposed cables and straps where subject to mechanical damage. K. Apply corrosion - resistant finish to field connections, buried metallic grounding and bonding products, and places where factory applied protective coatings have been destroyed and are subjected to corrosive action. 3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Upon completion of installation of electrical grounding and bonding systems, test ground resistance with ground resistance tester using the 3 -point fall of potential method. Testing shall be performed during normal dry weather conditions with at least 5 non -rain days elapsing prior to test. Where tests show resistance -to- ground is over 5 ohms, take appropriate action to reduce resistance to 5 ohms or less by driving additional ground rods; then retest to demonstrate compliance. 16060 -3 032816 • • • B. Test ground paths for continuity by applying a low DC voltage source of current, capable of furnishing up to 100 amps, between electrical equipment grounds and ground grid. Grounding path must conduct a 100 -amp current at a resistance of 0.010 ohms or less as calculated from circuit voltage. END OF SECTION 16060 -4 032816 • • • SECTION 16075 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Identification of electrical materials, equipment, and installations. It includes requirements for electrical identification components including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Buried electrical line warnings. 2. Identification labeling for cables and conductors. 3. Equipment labels and signs. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Submit in accordance with Section 01340, Shop Drawings covering the items included under this Section. Shop Drawing submittals shall include: 1. Product Data for each type of product specified. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS A. Colored Adhesive Marking Tape for Wires and Cables: Self - adhesive, vinyl tape not less than 3 mils thick by 1 inch to 2 inches in width. B. Pre - tensioned Flexible Wraparound Colored Plastic Sleeves for Cable Identification: Flexible acrylic bands sized to suit raceway diameter and arranged to stay in place by pre - tensioned gripping action when coiled around the cable. C. Wire /Cable Designation Tape Markers: Vinyl or vinyl- cloth, self - adhesive, wraparound, cable /conductor markers with pre - printed numbers and letter. D. Aluminum, Wraparound Cable Marker Bands: Bands cut from 0.014- inch -thick aluminum sheet, fitted with slots or ears for securing permanently around wire or cable jacket or around groups of conductors. Provide for legend application with stamped letters or numbers. 16075 -1 032816 • • • E. Engraved, Plastic Laminated Labels, Signs, and Instruction Plates: Engraving stock melamine plastic laminate, 1/16 inch minimum thick for signs up to 20 square inches or 8 inches in length; 1/8 -inch thick for larger sizes. Engraved legend in white letters on black face and punched for mechanical fasteners. F. Cable Ties: Fungus - inert, self - extinguishing, one - piece, self - locking nylon cable ties, 0.18 inch minimum width, 50 -pound minimum tensile strength, and suitable for a temperature range from minus 50 to 350 degrees F. Provide ties in specified colors when used for color coding. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Lettering and Graphics: Coordinate names, abbreviations, colors, and other designations used in electrical identification Work with corresponding designations specified or indicated. Install numbers, lettering, and colors as approved in submittals and as required by Code. B. Install line marker for wiring, both direct buried and in raceway. C. Conductor Color Coding: Provide color coding for secondary service, feeder, and branch circuit conductors throughout the Project secondary electrical system following OWNER's method of phase identification or as follows: Phase 480/277 Volts A Yellow B Brown C Orange Neutral White Ground Green D. Wiring Standards: 1. 480/277 Volt, 3 -Phase Power: a. Brown. b. Orange. c. Yellow. d. Grey Neutral. 16075 -2 032816 • • • 2. Motor Leads, Control Cabinet/MCC: a. Black, numbered L1 -T1, etc. 3. Control Wiring: a. Red - Control circuit wiring that is de- energized when the main disconnect is opened. b. Yellow - Control circuit wiring that remains energized when the main disconnect is opened. c. Blue - DC. d. Green - Ground. E. Use conductors with color factory applied entire length of conductors except as follows: 1. The following field applied color coding methods may be used in lieu of factory - coded wire for sizes larger than No. 10 AWG. a. Apply colored, pressure- sensitive plastic tape in half - lapped turns for a distance of 6 inches from terminal points and in boxes where splices or taps are made. Apply last 2 laps of tape with no tension to prevent possible unwinding. Use 1- inch -wide tape in colors as specified. Do not obliterate cable identification markings by taping. Tape locations may be adjusted slightly to prevent such obliteration. b. In lieu of pressure - sensitive tape, colored cable ties may be used for color identification. Apply 3 ties of specified color to each wire at each terminal or splice point starting 3 inches from the terminal spaced 3 inches apart. Apply with a special tool or pliers, tighten for snug fit, and cut off excess length. F. Power Circuit Identification: Securely fasten identifying metal tags of aluminum wraparound marker bands to cables, feeders, and power circuits in vaults, pull boxes, junction boxes, manholes, and switchboard rooms with 1/4 -inch steel letter and number stamps with legend to correspond with designations on Drawings. If metal tags are provided, attach them with approximately 55 -pound test monofilament line or one -piece self - locking nylon cable ties. G. Install wire /cable designation tape markers at termination points, splices, or junctions in each circuit. Circuit designations shall be as indicated on Drawings. END OF SECTION 16075 -3 032816 • • • SECTION 16120 WIRES AND CABLES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes the following: 1. Low - Voltage Wire and Cable. 2. Instrument Cable. 3. Multiconductor Control Cable. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Submit in accordance with Section 01340, Shop Drawings covering the items included under this Section. Include Shop Drawings of wires, cables, connectors, splice kits, and termination assemblies. B. Reports of field tests prepared as noted in Section 01410. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. UL Compliance: Provide components which are listed and labeled by UL. For cables intended for use in air handling space comply with applicable requirements of UL Standard 710, "Test Method for Fire and Smoke characteristics of cables used in Air Handling Spaces." B. NEMA/ICEA Compliance: Provide components which comply with following standards: 1. NEMA WC 70- 1999 /ICEA S -95- 658 -1999, Nonshielded Power Cables Rated 2,000 Volts or Less for the Distribution of Electrical Energy. C. IEEE Compliance: Provide components which comply with the following standard. 1. Standard 82, Test procedures for Impulse Voltage Tests on Insulated Conductors. D. Workplace Electrical Safety: Comply with NFPA 70E, Standard for Electrical Safety in the Workplace. E. Labeling: Handwritten labels are not acceptable. All labels shall be machine printed on clear or opaque tape, stenciled onto adhesive labels, or typewritten onto adhesive labels. The font shall be at least 1/8 inch in height, block characters, and legible. The 16120 -1 032816 • • • text shall be of a color contrasting with the label such that is may be easily read. If labeling tape is utilized, the font color shall contrast with the background. Patch panels shall exhibit workstation numbers or some type of location identifier, in sequential order, for all workstations or devices attached. Each Network cable segment shall be labeled at each end with its respective identifier. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with specified requirements, manufacturers offering products which may be incorporated in Work include: 1. Low - Voltage Wire and Cable: a. American Insulated Wire Corp. b. General Cable. c. The Okonite Co. d. Southwire Co. 2. Connectors for Low - Voltage Wires and Cable Conductors: a. AMP. b. O -Z /Gedney Co. c. Square D Company. d. 3M Company. 3. Instrument Cable: a. Belden (Trade Nos. 1120A and 1118A). 2.02 LOW- VOLTAGE WIRES AND CABLES A. Conductors: Provide stranded conductors conforming to ASTM Standards for concentric stranding, Class B. Construction of wire and cable shall be single conductor (1 /c) unless multiconductor cable is shown by notation in form (x/c) where x indicates the number of separate insulated conductors per cable. B. Conductor Material: Copper. Minimum size power wire shall be No. 12 AWG. C. Insulation: Provide RHW/USE insulation for power conductors used in single- and 3- phase circuits with more than 120 volts to ground. Provide RHW/USE, XHHW, or THWN /THHN insulation for power conductors used in single- and 3 -phase circuits with 120 volts or less to ground. 16120 -2 032816 • • • 1. Provide RHW, THHN /THWN, or XHHW insulation for grounding conductors installed in raceways. 2. Provide THHN /THWN insulation for control conductors. 2.03 CONNECTORS FOR LOW- VOLTAGE WIRES AND CABLES A. Provide UL listed factory fabricated, solderless metal connectors of sizes, ampacity ratings, materials, types, and classes for applications and services indicated. Use connectors with temperature ratings equal to or greater than those of the wires upon which used. 2.04 MULTICONDUCTOR CONTROL CABLE A. Multiconductor Control Cable: Concentrically cabled No. 14 AWG stranded copper conductors with saturated interstitial fillers; overall binder of nylon or similar material; and PVC jacket. Quantity of conductors shall be as indicated on Drawings. Provide Type 2010 individual conductor insulation unless otherwise indicated on Drawings as one of the following: 1. Type ISS: 15 mils polyethylene with 5 mils nylon. 2. Type 2010: 20 mils polyethylene with 10 mils PVC. 3. Type 3015: 30 mils polyethylene with 15 mils PVC. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Prior to energizing, check installed 480 volt, 3 -phase power circuits and higher wires and cables with a 1,000 -volt megohm meter to determine insulation resistance levels to assure requirements are fulfilled. Minimum acceptable megohm meter reading is 100 megohms held at a constant value for 15 seconds. A certified copy of megohm meter tests shall be submitted to ENGINEER. Test reports shall include ambient temperature and humidity at time of testing. Notify ENGINEER 48 hours prior to test with schedule. B. Reports (non -LAN cable): Testing organization shall maintain a written record of observations and tests, report defective materials and workmanship, and retest corrected defective items. Testing organization shall submit written reports to ENGINEER. END OF SECTION 16120 -3 032816 • SECTION 16130 RACEWAYS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Raceways for electrical wiring. Types of raceways in this Section include the following: 1. Liquidtight flexible conduit. 2. Rigid metal conduit. 3. Rigid nonmetallic conduit. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Submit in accordance with Section 01340, Shop Drawings covering the items included under this Section. Shop Drawing submittals shall include: 1. Product data for the following products: a. Conduit. b. Conduit bodies. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Codes and Standards: 1. NEMA Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements of NEMA standards pertaining to raceways. 2. UL Compliance and Labeling: Comply with applicable requirements of UL standards pertaining to electrical raceway systems. Provide raceway products and components listed and labeled by UL, ETL, or CSA. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products which may be incorporated in Work include: 1. Conduit: a. Allied Tube. 16130 -1 032816 b. Carlon. c. Johns Manville. d. Occidental Coatings. e. Orangeburg. f. Perma -Cote Industries. g. Republic Steel. h. Robroy Industries. i. Steelduct Co. j. Triangle Conduit. k. Wheatland Tube. 1. Youngstown Sheet and Tube. 2. Liquidtight Conduit: a. Anamet, Inc. b. Carlon. c. Electric -Flex. d. Thomas and Betts. 3. Conduit Bodies: a. Adalet -PLM. b. American Electric. c. Appleton Electric Co. d. Carlon. e. Crouse -Hinds Division, Cooper Industries, Inc. f. Delta Industrial Products. g. Killark Electric Mfg. Co. h. Kraloy Products Co. i. O- Z /Gedney Co. j. Perma -Cote Industries. k. Robroy Industries. 1. Spring City Electrical Mfg. Co. 4. Conduit Thread Paint: a. CRC Chemicals, USA. b. Sherwin Williams. c. ZRC Chemical Products Co. 2.02 METAL CONDUIT AND TUBING A. Rigid Aluminum Conduit. 16130 -2 032816 • • • 2.03 NONMETALLIC CONDUIT AND DUCTS A. Rigid Nonmetallic Conduit (RNC): NEMA TC 2 and UL 651, Schedule 40 or 80 PVC. B. Liquidtight Flexible Nonmetallic Conduit and Fittings: UL 1660. Fittings shall be specifically approved for use with this raceway. 2.04 CONDUIT BODIES A. Provide matching gasketed covers secured with corrosion- resistant screws. Use nonmetallic covers in NEMA 4X areas. PART 3 — EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION 16130 -3 032816 • • • SECTION 16420 MOTOR CONTROLLERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Types of motor controllers, including: 1. Combination controllers. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Submit in accordance with Section 01340, Shop Drawings covering the items included under this Section. Shop Drawing submittals shall include: 1. Shop Drawings: Submit Shop Drawings of motor controllers showing dimensions and sizes. 2. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's data and installation instructions on motor controllers. 3. Wiring Diagrams: Submit power and control wiring diagrams for motor controllers 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Codes and Standards: 1. UL Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements of UL 486A and B, and UL 508, pertaining to installation of motor controllers. Provide controllers and components which are UL listed and labeled. 2. NEMA Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements of NEMA Standards ICS 2, "Industrial Control Devices, Controllers and Assemblies," and Pub No. 250, "Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1,000 Volts Maximum)," pertaining to motor controllers and enclosures. 16420 -1 032816 • • • PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with specified requirements, manufacturers offering products which may be incorporated in Work include: 1. Allen- Bradley Co. 2. Crouse -Hinds Co. 3. Cutler- Hammer Products /Eaton Corp. 4. Emotron. 5. Furnas Electric Co. 6. Siemens, Inc. 7. Square D Company. 2.02 MOTOR CONTROLLERS A. Combination Controllers: Consist of controller and circuit breaker or fusible disconnect switch mounted in common enclosure of types, sizes, ratings, and NEMA sizes indicated. Equip starters with block -type manual reset overload relays. Provide control and pilot devices indicated. Provide 90 degree C SIS or MTW, No. 14 AWG control wiring, tagged at each termination. Provide operating handle for disconnect switch mechanism with indication and control of switch position, with enclosure door either opened or closed, and capable of being locked in OFF position with 3 padlocks. Construct and mount controllers and disconnect switches in single NEMA -type enclosure suitable for the location in which it is installed; coat with manufacturer's standard color finish. 1. The 3 -phase starter may be the following types: a. Full Voltage Non - reversing (FVNR): One 3 -pole magnetic contactor with a set of 3 overload devices. b. Full Voltage Reversing (FVR): Two 3 -pole magnetic contactors with a common set of 3 overload devices. B. Control and Pilot Devices: Provide an individually fused control power transformer in each starter unit. Provide 2 fuses in the transformer primary circuit and 1 in transformer secondary circuit. Size transformers such that they can supply 100VA in excess of the unit requirements or provide 150VA rated transformer, whichever is greater. Provide 300 volt rated, oiltight type pilot lights, push buttons with extended guard and black color insert. Equip stop push buttons with half guard and red color insert. Provide 120/6 volt transformer type push -to -test pilot lights with lens color indicated. Provide machine tool type relays, each with 1 spare N.O. contact. Provide 6- digit elapsed time indicators with one -tenth hour increments. When timers are required, they shall be synchronous type. 16420 -2 032816 • • • C. Fractional HP Manual Controllers: Provide 3 -phase and single -phase fractional horsepower manual motor controllers, of sizes and ratings indicated. Equip with manually operated quick -make, quick -break toggle mechanisms, and with one -piece melting alloy type thermal units. Controller shall become inoperative when thermal unit is removed. Provide controllers with double -break silver alloy contacts, visible from both sides of controller, and switch capable of being padlocked -OFF. Enclose controller unit in NEMA -type enclosure suitable for the location in which it is installed; coat with manufacturer's standard color finish. PART 3 — EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION 16420 -3 032816 • SECTION 16440 PANELBOARDS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes the following: 1. Power distribution panelboards. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Submit in accordance with Section 01340, Shop Drawings covering the items included under this Section. Shop Drawing submittals shall include: 1. Manufacturer's product data on panelboards and enclosures. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Codes and Standards: 1. UL Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements of UL 67, "Electric Panelboards," and UL's 50, 869, 486A, 486B, and 1053 pertaining to panelboards, accessories, and enclosures. Provide panelboard units which are UL listed and labeled. 2. NEMA Compliance: Comply with NEMA Standards Pub/No. 250, "Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1,000 Volts Maximum)," Pub/No. PB 1, "Panelboards," and Pub/No. PB 1.1, "Instructions for Safe Installation, Operation and Maintenance of Panelboards Rated 600 Volts or Less." 3. Federal Specification Compliance: Comply with FS W -P -115, "Power Distribution Panel," pertaining to panelboards and accessories. 4. Workplace Electrical Safety: Comply with NFPA 70E, Standard for Electrical Safety in the Workplace. 16440 -1 032816 • ID PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with specified requirements, manufacturers offering products which may be incorporated in Work include: 1. Cutler - Hammer Products. 2. Siemens, Inc. 3. Square D Company. 2.02 PANELBOARDS A. Except as otherwise indicated, provide panelboards, enclosures, and ancillary components, of types, sizes, and ratings indicated, which comply with manufacturer's standard materials; with design and construction in accordance with published product information. Equip with proper number of unit panelboard devices as required for complete installation. Where types, sizes, or ratings are not indicated, comply with NEC, UL, and established industry standards for those applications indicated. B. Power Distribution Panelboards: Provide dead -front safety type power distribution panelboards as indicated, with panelboard switching and protective devices in quantities, ratings, and types shown; with anti -turn solderless pressure type main lug connectors approved for use with copper conductors. Select unit with feeders connecting at top of panel. Equip with tin - plated aluminum, or silver- or tin - plated copper bus bars braced for 50,000 rms symmetrical amperes fault current, and with full -sized neutral bus; provide suitable lugs on neutral bus for outgoing feeders requiring neutral connections. Provide as indicated, either molded -case bolt -on main and branch circuit breakers for each circuit with toggle handles that indicate when tripped, or bolt -on fusible switches for main and branch circuits. Where multiple pole breakers are indicated, provide with common trip so overload on one pole will trip all poles simultaneously. Provide panelboards with bare uninsulated grounding bars suitable for bolting to enclosures. Select enclosures fabricated by same manufacturer as panelboards, which mate and match properly with panelboards. C. Panelboard Enclosures: Provide galvanized sheet steel cabinet type enclosures, in sizes and NEMA types as indicated, code gauge, minimum 16 -gauge thickness. Construct with multiple knockouts and wiring gutters. Provide fronts with adjustable trim clamps and doors with flush locks and keys, all panelboard enclosures keyed alike, with concealed piano door hinges and door swings as indicated. Equip with interior circuit directory frame and card with clear plastic covering. Provide baked gray enamel finish over a rust - inhibitor coating. Design enclosures for recessed or surface mounting as indicated. Provide enclosures which are fabricated by same manufacturer as panelboards, which mate and match properly with panelboards to be enclosed. 16440 -2 032816 r • D. Molded -Case Circuit Breakers: Provide factory assembled, molded -case circuit breakers of frame sizes, characteristics, and ratings, including rms symmetrical interrupting ratings indicated. Select breakers with permanent thermal and instantaneous magnetic trip, and with fault - current limiting protection, ampere ratings as indicated. Construct with overcenter, trip -free, toggle type operating mechanisms with quick -make quick -break action and positive handle trip indication. Construct breakers for mounting and operating in any physical position, and operating in an ambient temperature of 40 degrees C. Provide breakers with mechanical screw type removable connector lugs, AL /CU rated. E. Ground Fault Protected Breakers: Provide UL Class A protected GFI breakers with 6 mA for personnel protection, and for general - purpose receptacles. For breakers dedicated to equipment (sump pumps, heat trace, etc.), provide breaker with 30 mA equipment protection. F. Accessories: Provide panelboard accessories and devices including, but not necessarily limited to, ground -fault protection units or circuit breaker locking hardware as indicated. G. Spares: In each panelboard provide 8 installed, single pole, 20A spare circuit breakers unless otherwise indicated. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION OF PANELBOARDS A. Type out panelboard's circuit directory card upon completion of installation Work. B. Arc Flash labels: 1. Contractor shall calculate and provide arc flash labels per NFPA 70E. END OF SECTION 16440 -3 032816 INSTRUMENTATION APPENDICES • CITY OF CLEARWATER PUBLIC UTILITIES WATER DIVISION /PRODUCTION SECTION • • Standard Operating Protocol — RO Plant #1 Arsenic Adsorber (AAF) O &M 1A. Purpose The AAF filters are pressurized sand filters that capture and store arsenic from chlorinated raw water. The AAF filters are critical water treatment components that reduce the arsenic below the MCL of l Oug/l. 2A. Responsibilities 2A -1 Water Plant Coordinator /Chief Operator • Oversees AAF operation • Determines and schedules media change outs. • Determines lead lag swap and configuration. • Reviews and interprets data collected by Operators. • Prepares and submits reports as required by IPP Permit and FDEP. • Ensures safety of staff when working with chemicals. • Reports any spills or incidents. 2A -2 Water Treatment Operator • Operates, inspects, and maintains AAF. • Backwashes filters. • Collects, examines and interprets data from all equipment and laboratory analysis. • Monitors flows and differential pressures. • Notifies Water Plant Coordinator /Lead Operator of any abnormalities, equipment failure or operational upsets. • Makes appropriate notations of any abnormalities, equipment failure or operational upsets in the water plant logbook(s). • Inputs data into appropriate databases and sheets. Page 1 of 2 CURRENT AS OF 12/31/2012 • • • 3A. Schedule of Operations 3A -1 Daily Checks • Record the daily AAF log. • Compare the digital differential pressure gauges to the actual gauges. • Monitor flow and differential pressures at least every 2 hour. • Immediately respond to high flow or DP alarms. • Analyze field arsenic per log sheets 3A -2 Weekly Checks • Analyze inlet and effluent arsenic at a certified lab per warranty conditions. • Schedule Backwashes at appropriate times. 4A. Operations o Operational limits: • Max flow in series configuration 1040gpm • Max DP at any flow for each AAF IODP o WARNINGS: • CONDUCT AAF BACKWASHES ONLY DURRING BUISNESS HOURS • -DUAL MEDIA FILTER MUST BE PLACED IN HAND DURRING AAF BACKWASHES • -MAKE SURE THERE IS ROOM IN THE DECANT TANKS / BW BASIN • - PROCEDURE ONLY TO BE CONDUCTED BY LICENCED OPERATOR WITH PROPER TRAINING. • - NOTIFY WTP CHIEF BEFORE CONDUCTING ANY AAF BACKWASH • NOTIFY WTP CHIEF IF AAF EFFLUENT FIELD ARSENIC IS ABOVE 4.0 PPB 5A. Attached Procedures • For all operational details refer to Severn Trent AAF O &M. • For routine backwashes Refer to AAF backwash checklist. Complete and file with each BW. • For training refer to Severn Trent AAF training presentation. Page 2 of 2 CURRENT AS OF 12/31/2012 IN BACK RAW WATER INLET MOV 2S0-2 POTABLE INLET MOV 2504 BACKWASH OULET MOV 2.,53 ry YE HAMS OTHER RELATED VAVLES DIME AAF CROSSOVER WOE COMMON BACKWASH CONTROL VALVE • Wxso BEND w T 0 BLENONG TANK • • ACKWASH A WHEN LEAD A LAG B START -THE FOLLOWING VALVES SHOULD BE OPEN BEFORE ANY VALVES ARE TURNED WHEN: LEAD A LAG B. VERIFY ON ALL VALVES. Service : 700 gpm Open V -124B V -125A V -250 -2 V -121A —> Slowly Open V -122B (700 gpm) BEFORE GOING OUT TO BACKWASH DO THE FOLLOWING: PLACE ALL DUAL MEDIA FILTERS INTO HAND. TURN ON ROTH I FAD AND I AG HSP TO PREVENT RAeKFI OW OF WATER THAT HAS RFFN DOSED WITH POIYPHOSPHATF PROCEDURE CONDUCTED BY LIC# PROCEDURE CONDUCTED DATE TIME PRE B/W FLOW PRE B/W DP POST B/W FLOW POST BW DP OPERATIONAL WARNINIGS -CONDUCT AAF BACKWASHES ONLY DURING BUISNESS HOURS -DUAL MEDIA FILTER MUST BE PLACED IN HAND DURING AAF BACKWASHES -MAKE SURE THERE IS ROOM IN THE DECANT TANKS / BW BASIN - PROCEDURE ONLY TO BE CONDUCTED BY LICENCED OPERATOR WITH PROPER TRAINING. I ACKNOWLEDGE I HAVE READ THE WARNINGS AND HAVE BEEN PROPERLY TRAINED TO CONDUCT THIS PROCEDURE Backwash 1750 gpm 10 min Open 0 Crossover Valve 0 COMMON BACKWASH CONTROL VALVE (SLOWLLY\CLOSOE� Close 0 V -121A O V -125A O V -124B O V -122B Open O V -253 O (SLOWLY) V -250 -1 O V -123A 0 Slowly V -124A Throttle (1750 gpm) FOR 10MIN SLOWLY THROTTLE BACK CLOSED TO END BACKWASH Forward Rinse 700 gpm 2 min Close 0 V -123A 0 V -124A -- Open O V -121A - — ► Slowly 0 V -125A Throttle (700 gpm) FOR 2 MIN SLOWLY THROTTLE BACK CLOSED Back to Service 700 gpm Put in Remote 0 COMMON BACKWASH CONTROL VALVE ---> Close 0 V -250 -1 —4-0-> Open 0 V -125A 0 V -253 0 V -124B (SLOWLY)0 V -250 -2 O V -122B Slowly Check Drain valve is Open 0 25% open O Place DM's Back to Auto S: \Public Utilities \DATA \SOP'S \AAF SOP \PARTS • 411 ACKWASH p WHEN LEAD START -THE FOLLOWING VALVES SHOULD BE OPEN BEFORE ANY VALVES ARE TURNED WHEN: LEAD B LAG A. VERIFY ON ALL VALVES. Service : 825 gpm Open V -124A V -125B V -250 -2 V -121B > Slowly Open V -122A (700 gpm) BEFORE GOING OUT TO BACKWASH DO THE FOLLOWING: PLACE ALL DUAL MEDIA FILTERS INTO HAND. j1IRN ON ROTH I FAD AND 1 At; HSP Tf1 PRFVFNT RACKFI OW AF WATFR THAT HAS RFFN DOSFD WITH POI VPHOSPHATF • LAG A PROCEDURE CONDUCTED BY LIC# PROCEDURE CONDUCTED DATE TIME PRE B/W FLOW PRE B/W DP POST B/W FLOW POST BW DP OPERATIONAL WARNINIGS -CONDUCT AAF BACKWASHES ONLY DURING BUISNESS HOURS -DUAL MEDIA FILTER MUST BE PLACED IN HAND DURING AAF BACKWASHES -MAKE SURE THERE IS ROOM IN THE DECANTTANKS/ BW BASIN - PROCEDURE ONLY TO BE CONDUCTED BY LICENCED OPERATOR WITH PROPER TRAINING. 1 ACKNOWLEDGE I HAVE READ THE WARNINGS AND HAVE BEEN PROPERLY TRAINED TO CONDUCT THIS PROCEDURE Backwash 1770 gpm 10 min Open 0 CROSSOVER VALVE 0 OPEN COMMON BACKWASH CONTROL VALVE Close (SLOWLY CLOSE - O V -121B O V -125B O V -124A 0 V -122A Open O V -253 ▪ (SLOWLY) V -250 -1 O V -123A Slowly 0 V -124A Throttle (1770 gpm) FOR 10MIN Open SLOWLY THROTTLE BACK CLOSED TO END BACKWASH Forward Rinse 700 gpm 2 min Close 0 V -123A 0 V -124A -4 Open 0 V -121A -'—* Slowly Throttle Open O V -125A (700 gpm) FOR 2 MIN SLOWLY THROTTLE BACK CLOSED TO END BACKWASH Back to Service 825 gpm Put in Remote COMMON O BACKWASH CONTROL VALVE Close O V -250 -1 O V -253 O V -121A O V -125A Open • V -121B • V -125B O V -124A (SLOWLY) 0 V -250 -2 • V -122A Slowly Open To preferred set point flow S: \Public Utilities \DATA \SOP'S \AAF SOP \PARTS • • • BACKWASH B WHEN LEAD A LAG START -THE FOLLOWING VALVES SHOULD BE OPEN BEFORE ANY VALVES ARE TURNED WHEN: LEAD A LAG B. VERIFY ON ALL VALVES. Service : 700 gpm Open V -124B V -125A V -250 -2 V -121A Slowly Open V -122B (700 gpm) BEFORE GOING OUT TO BACKWASH DO THE FOLLOWING: PLACE ALL DUAL MEDIA FILTERS IN TO HAND. TURN ON BOTH LEAD AND LAG HSP TO PREVENT BACKFLOW OF WATER THAT HAS BEEN DOSED WITH POLYPHOSPHATE PROCEDURE CONDUCTED BY LIC# PROCEDURE CONDUCTED DATE TIME PRE B/W FLOW PRE B/W DP POST B/W FLOW POST BW DP OPERATIONAL WARNINIGS -CONDUCT AAF BACKWASHES ONLY DURING BUISNESS HOURS -DUAL MEDIA FILTER MUST BE PLACED IN HAND DURING AAF BACKWASHES -MAKE SURE THERE IS ROOM IN THE DECANT TANKS / BW BASIN - PROCEDURE ONLY TO BE CONDUCTED BY LICENCED OPERATOR WITH PROPER TRAINING. - NOTIFY WTP CHIEF BEFORE CONDUCTING ANY AAF BACKWASH I ACKNOWLEDGE I HAVE READ THE WARNINGS AND HAVE BEEN PROPERLY TRAINED TO CONDUCT THIS PROCEDURE Backwash 1750 gpm 10 min (SLOWLY CLOSE ) Open O CROSSOVER-- -> Close 0 V -250 -2 VALVE 0 COMMON BACKWASH CONTROL VALVE O V -121A O V -125A O V -124B O V -122B en 0 V-253 _--11* o Slowly V -124B (SLOWLY)V -250 -1 Throttle (1750 gpm) FOR 10MIN V-123B SLOWLY THROTTLE BACK CLOSED TO END BACKWASH Forward Rinse 700 gpm 2 min Close D V -123B —4Open D V -121B -+—* Slowly 0 V -125B O V -124B Throttle (700 gpm) FOR 2 MIN SLOWLY THROTTLE BACK CLOSED Back to Service 700 gpm Put in Remote COMMON 0 BACKWASH CONTROL VALVE —`� Close 0 V -250 -1 O V -121B O V -125B O V -253 """"L> ' Open 0 V -121A O V -125A O V -124B (SLOWLY) 0 V -250 -2 Slowly Open O V -122B O Check Drain valve is 25% open O Place DM's Back to Auto S: \Public Utilities \DATA \SOP'S \AAF SOP \PARTS • • ACKWASH B WHEN LEAD START -THE FOLLOWING VALVES SHOULD BE OPEN BEFORE ANY VALVES ARE TURNED WHEN: LEAD B LAG A. VERIFY ON ALL VALVES. Service : 825 gpm Open V -124A V -125B V -250 -2 V -121B Slowly Open V -122A (700 gpm) BEFORE GOING OUT TO BACKWASH DO THE FOLLOWING: PLACE ALL DUAL MEDIA FILTERS INTO HAND. TIIRN ON ROTH 1 FAD AND LAG HSP TO PRFVFNT RACKFLOW_Of WATER THAT HAS REM DOSED WITH POLYPHOSPHATE • LAGA PROCEDURE CONDUCTED BY LIC# PROCEDURE CONDUCTED DATE TIME PRE B/W FLOW PRE B/W DP POST B/W FLOW POST BW DP OPERATIONAL WARNINIGS - CONDUCTAAF BACKWASHES ONLY DURING BUISNESS HOURS -DUAL MEDIA FILTER MUST BE PLACED IN HAND DURING AAF BACKWASHES -MAKE SURE THERE IS ROOM IN THE DECANT TANKS / BW BASIN - PROCEDURE ONLY TO BE CONDUCTED BY LICENCED OPERATOR WITH PROPER TRAINING. I ACKNOWLEDGE I HAVE READ THE WARNINGS AND HAVE BEEN PROPERLY TRAINED TO CONDUCT THIS PROCEDURE Backwash 1770 gpm Open 0 Crossover Valve O COMMON BACKWASH CONTROLVALVFI 10 min (SLOWLY LOSE) Close 0 O V -121B O V -125B O V -124A O V -122A Open O V -253 --> O (SLOWLY) V -250 -1 O V -123B 0 Slowly V -124B Throttle (1770 gpm) FOR 10MIN Open SLOWLY THROTTLE BACK CLOSED TO END BACKWASH Forward Rinse 700 gpm Close O V -123B O V -1248 2 min -- Open 0 V -121B y-1)* Slowly 0 V -125B Throttle (700 gpm) FOR 2 MIN SLOWLY THROTTLE Open BACK CLOSED TO END BACKWASH Back to Service 825 gpm Put in Remote 0 COMMON BACKWASH CONTROL VALVE ^,—^> Close O V-250-1 4 Open 0 V -125B -- Slowly O V 122A 0 V -253 0 V -124A Open (SLOWLY) 0 V -250 -2 To preferred set point flow S: \Public Utilities \DATA \SOP'S \AAF SOP \PARTS • • BACKWASH A WHEN LEAD A LAG START -THE FOLLOWING VALVES SHOULD BE OPEN BEFORE ANY VALVES ARE TURNED WHEN: LEADA LAG OFF. VERIFY ON ALL VALVES. Service : 825 gpm Open V -250 -2 V -121A Slowly Open V -122A (700 gpm) BEFORE GOING OUT TO BACKWASH DO THE FOLLOWING: PLACE ALL DUAL MEDIA FILTERS INTO HAND. TI IRN ON ROTH I FAO ANC, LAG HSP TO PRFVFNT RACKFLOW OF WATFR THAT HAS REEN MAR] WITH POLYPHOSPHATE • PROCEDURE CONDUCTED BY LIC# PROCEDURE CONDUCTED DATE TIME PRE B/W FLOW PRE B/W DP POST B/W FLOW POST BW DP OPERATIONAL WARNINIGS - CONDUCTAAF BACKWASHES ONLY DURING BUISNESS HOURS -DUAL MEDIA FILTER MUST BE PLACED IN HAND DURING AAF BACKWASHES -MAKE SURE THERE IS ROOM IN THE DECANT TANKS / BW BASIN AND I5 IN PROPER MODE - PROCEDURE ONLY TO BE CONDUCTED BY LICENCED OPERATOR WITH PROPER TRAINING. I ACKNOWLEDGE I HAVE READ THE WARNINGS AND HAVE BEEN PROPERLY TRAINED TO CONDUCT THIS PROCEDURE Backwash 1750 gpm Open 0 CROSSOVER VALVE 0 OPEN COMMON BACKWASH CONTROL VALVE 10 min Cl (SLOWLY CLOSE) O V -250 -2 O V -121A O V -122A Open O V -253 --> O (SLOWLY) V -250 -1 O V -123A Slowly 0 V -124A Throttle (1750 GPM) FOR 10 MIN SLOWLY THROTTLE BACK CLOSED TO END BACKWASH Open Forward Rinse 700 gpm Close O V -123A O V -124A 2 min --4► Open O V -121A Slowly Throttle Open 0 V -125A (700 gpm) FOR 2 MIN SLOWLY - THROTTLE BACK CLOSED TO END BACKWASH Back to Service 825 gpm Close V -250 -1 O V -253 Put in Remote COMMON 0 BACKWASH CONTROL VALVE Open 0 V -250 -2 Slowly 0 V -122A Open To preferred set point flow S: \Public Utilities \DATA \SOP'S \AAF SOP \PARTS • • ACKWASH A WHEN LEAD B LAG START -THE FOLLOWING VALVES SHOULD BE OPEN BEFORE ANY VALVES ARE TURNED WHEN: LEAD B LAG OFF. VERIFY ON ALL VALVES. Service : 825 gpm Open V -250 -2 V -121B > Slowly Open V -122B (700 gpm) BEFORE GOING OUT TO BACKWASH DO THE FOLLOWING: PLACE ALL DUAL MEDIA FILTERS INTO HAND. TIIRN ON ROTH 'TAO AMR 1 AG HSP TO PRFVFNT RArKFLOW OF WATFR THAT HASEFFN DASH) WITH POI VPHOSPHATF • PROCEDURE CONDUCTED BY LIC# PROCEDURE CONDUCTED DATE TIME PRE B/W FLOW PRE B/W DP POST B/W FLOW POST BW DP OPERATIONAL WARNINIGS - CONDUCTAAF BACKWASHES ONLY DURING BUISNESS HOURS -DUAL MEDIA FILTER MUST BE PLACED IN HAND DURING AAF BACKWASHES -MAKE SURE THERE IS ROOM IN THE DECANT TANKS / BW BASIN AND IS IN PROPER MODE - PROCEDURE ONLY TO BE CONDUCTED BY LICENCED OPERATOR WITH PROPER TRAINING. I ACKNOWLEDGE I HAVE READ THE WARNINGS AND HAVE BEEN PROPERLY TRAINED TO CONDUCT THIS PROCEDURE Backwash 1750 gpm 10 min Open 0 CROSSOVER CloseOWLYCLOSE) VALVE 0 V -250 -2 0 OPEN COMMON BACKWASH CONTROL VALVE O V -121B O V -122B Open O V -253 --> O (SLOWLY) V -250 -1 O V -123A Slowly 0 V -124A Throttle (1750 gpm) FOR 10 MIN Open SLOWLY THROTTLE BACK CLOSED TO END BACKWASH Forward Rinse 700 gpm Close 0 V -123A 0 V -124A 2 min —*� Open 0 V -121A -0— Slowly Throttle Open O V -125A (700 gpm) FOR 2 MIN SLOWLY - THROTTLE BACK CLOSED TO END BACKWASH Back to Service 825 gpm Close O V -121A 0 V -250 -1 O V -253 Put in Remote COMMON O BACKWASH CONTROL VALVE Open O V -250 -2 (SLOWLY) • V -121B Slowly 0 V -122B Open To preferred set point flow S: \Public Utilities \DATA \SOP'S \AAF SOP \PARTS • • ACKWASH 8'VVHEfV LEAD A LAG START -THE FOLLOWING VALVES SHOULD BE OPEN BEFORE ANY VALVES ARE TURNED WHEN: LEADA LAG OFF. VERIFY ON ALL VALVES. Service : 825 gpm Open V -250 -2 V -121A Slowly Open V -122A (700 gpm) BEFORE GOING OUT TO BACKWASH DO THE FOLLOWING: PLACE ALL DUAL MEDIA FILTERS INTO HAND. TI IRN ON ROTH I FAD AND LAG HSP TO PREVENT RACKFLOW OF WATER THAT HASBFFN DOSED WITH POLYPHOSPHATE • PROCEDURE CONDUCTED BY LIC# PROCEDURE CONDUCTED DATE TIME PRE B/W FLOW PRE B/W DP POST B/W FLOW POST BW DP OPERATIONAL WARNINIGS -CONDUCT AAF BACKWASHES ONLY DURING BUISNESS HOURS -DUAL MEDIA FILTER MUST BE PLACED IN HAND DURING AAF BACKWASHES -MAKE SURE THERE IS ROOM IN THE DECANT TANKS / BW BASIN AND 1S IN PROPER MODE - PROCEDURE ONLY TO BE CONDUCTED BY LICENCED OPERATOR WITH PROPER TRAINING. I ACKNOWLEDGE I HAVE READ THE WARNINGS AND HAVE BEEN PROPERLY TRAINED TO CONDUCT THIS PROCEDURE Backwash 1750 gpm 10 min (SLOWLY CLOSE) Open 0 CROSSOVER —Close VALVE 0 V -250 -2 0 OPEN COMMON 0 V -121A BACKWASH 0 V -122A CONTROL VALVE Open —i)+ 0 V- 253 --> O (SLOWLY) V -250 -1 O V -123B Slowly 0 V -124B Throttle (1750 gpm) FOR 10 MIN Open SLOWLY THROTTLE BACK CLOSED TO END BACKWASH Forward Rinse 700 gpm 2 min Close 0 V -123B 0 V -124B -4 Open 0 V -121B -'—r-D Slowly Throttle Open O V -125B (700 gpm) FOR 2 MIN SLOWLY THROTTLE BACK CLOSED TO END BACKWASH Back to Service 825 gpm Put in Remote COMMON 0 BACKWASH CONTROL VALVE Close O V -121B O V -253 O V -250 -1 Open O V -121A (SLOWLY) 0 V -250 -2 ---- •Slowly Open To preferred set point flow 0 V -122A S: \Public Utilities \DATA \SOP'S \AAF SOP \PARTS • 4111 • ACKWASH B WHEN LEAD START -THE FOLLOWING VALVES SHOULD BE OPEN BEFORE ANY VALVES ARE TURNED WHEN: LEAD B LAG OFF. VERIFY ON ALL VALVES. Service : 825 gpm Open V -250 -2 V -121B 3' Slowly Open V -122B (700 gpm) BEFORE GOING OUT TO BACKWASH DO THE FOLLOWING: PLACE ALL DUAL MEDIA FILTERS INTO HAND. TIIRN AN RATH I FAA AND IAG HSP TO PREVFNT RACKFLOW OF WATER THAT HAS RFEN DOSED WITH_POIYPHOSPHATE LAG F PROCEDURE CONDUCTED BY LIC# PROCEDURE CONDUCTED DATE TIME PRE B/W FLOW PRE B/W DP POST B/W FLOW POST BW DP OPERATIONAL WARNINIGS - CONDUCTAAF BACKWASHES ONLY DURING BUISNESS HOURS -DUAL MEDIA FILTER MUST BE PLACED IN HAND DURING AAF BACKWASHES -MAKE SURE THERE IS ROOM IN THE DECANTTANKS / BW BASIN AND IS IN PROPER MODE - PROCEDURE ONLY TO BE CONDUCTED BY LICENCED OPERATOR WITH PROPER TRAINING. I ACKNOWLEDGE I HAVE READ THE WARNINGS AND HAVE BEEN PROPERLY TRAINED TO CONDUCT THIS PROCEDURE Backwash 1750 gpm 10 min Open p CROSSOVER VALVE 0 OPEN COMMON BACKWASH CONTROL VALVE (SLOWLY CLOSE) Close 0 V -250 -2 O V -121B O V -122B Open —÷ 0 V -253 -- a (SLOWLY) V -250 -1 V -123B Slowly 0 V -124B Throttle (1750 gpm) FOR 10MIN Open SLOWLY THROTTLE BACK CLOSED TO END BACKWASH Forward Rinse 700 gpm 2 min Close 0 V -123B 0 V -124B --4* Open 0 V -121B Slowly Throttle Open 0 V -125B (700 gpm) FOR 2 MIN SLOWLY THROTTLE BACK CLOSED TO END BACKWASH Back to Service 825 gpm Put in Remote COMMON 0 BACKWASH CONTROL VALVE Close O V -250 -1 O V -253 • V -125B Open 0 V -121B (SLOWLY) 0 V -250 -2 --- Slowly Open To preferred set point flow 0 V -122B S: \Public Utifities\DATA\SOP'S\AAF SOP \PARTS • START -THE FOLLOWING VALVES SHOULD BE OPEN BEFORE ANY VALVES ARE TURNED WHEN: AAF'S ARE RUNNING IN PARALLEL. VERIFY ON ALL VALVES. Service : 825 gpm Open V -250 -2 V -121A V -121B Slowly Open V -122A V -122B (825 gpm) BEFORE GOING OUT TO BACKWASH DO THE FOLLOWING: PLACE ALL DUAL MEDIA FILTERS INTO HAND. TARN ON ROTH I FAD AND LAG HSP TO PREVENT RACKFIOW OF WATER THAT HAS RFFN DOSED WITH POI YPHOSPHATE B N PARA PROCEDURE CONDUCTED BY LIC# PROCEDURE CONDUCTED DATE TIME PRE B/W FLOW PRE B/W DP POST B/W FLOW POST BW DP OPERATIONAL WARNINIGS - CONDUCT AAF BACKWASHES ONLY DURING BUISNESS HOURS -DUAL MEDIA FILTER MUST BE PLACED IN HAND DURING AAF BACKWASHES -MAKE SURE THERE IS ROOM IN THE DECANT TANKS / SW BASIN AND IS IN PROPER MODE - PROCEDURE ONLY TO BE CONDUCTED BY LICENCED OPERATOR WITH PROPER TRAINING. I ACKNOWLEDGE I HAVE READ THE WARNINGS AND HAVE BEEN PROPERLY TRAINED TO CONDUCT THIS PROCEDURE Backwash 1750 gpm 10 min Open 0 CROSSOVER —* Close (SLOW 0VV 250-2 ) • V -121A ▪ V -121B ▪ V -122A O V -1228 VALVE 0 OPEN COMMON BACKWASH CONTROL VALVE Open 0 V -253 (SLOWLY) 0 V -250 -1 a V -123A Slowly 0 V -124A Throttle (1750 gpm) FOR 10 MIN Open SLOWLY THROTTLE BACK CLOSED TO END BACKWASH Forward Rinse Close 700 gpm • V -123A O V -124A 2 min —4 Open • V -121A Slowly Throttle Open O V -125A (700 gpm) FOR 2 MIN SLOWLY THROTTLE BACK CLOSED TO END BACKWASH Back to Service 825 gpm Put in Remote COMMON • BACKWASH CONTROL VALVE Close O V -253 O V -250 -1 Open 0 •V -121A O V -121B (SLOWLY) 0 V -250 -2 ---- •Slowly ° V -122A Open 0 V -122B To preferred set point flow S: \Public Utilities \DATA \SOP'S \AAF SOP \PARTS • • BACKWASH B WHEN A START -THE FOLLOWING VALVES SHOULD BE OPEN BEFORE ANY VALVES ARE TURNED WHEN: AAF'S ARE RUNNING IN PARALLEL. VERIFY ON ALL VALVES. Service : 825 gpm Open V -250 -2 V -121A V -121B Slowly Open V -122A V -122B (825 gpm) BEFORE GOING OUT TO BACKWASH DO THE FOLLOWING: PLACE ALL DUAL MEDIA FILTERS INTO HAND. TARN ON ROTH LEAD AND I AG RCP TO PRFVFNT RACKFLOW OF WATER THAT HAS BEEN DOSED WITH POIYPHOSPHATF IN PAMI • PROCEDURE CONDUCTED BY LIC# PROCEDURE CONDUCTED DATE TIME PRE B/W FLOW PRE B/W DP POST B/W FLOW POST BW DP OPERATIONAL WARNINIGS -CONDUCT AAF BACKWASHES ONLY DURING BUISNESS HOURS -DUAL MEDIA FILTER MUST BE PLACED IN HAND DURING AAF BACKWASHES -MAKE SURE THERE IS ROOM IN THE DECANT TANKS / BW BASIN AND IS IN PROPER MODE - PROCEDURE ONLY TO BE CONDUCTED BY LICENCED OPERATOR WITH PROPER TRAINING. !ACKNOWLEDGE I HAVE READ THE WARNINGS AND HAVE BEEN PROPERLY TRAINED TO CONDUCT THIS PROCEDURE Backwash 1750 gpm Open 0 CROSSOVER VALVE O OPEN COMMON BACKWASH CONTROL VALVE 10 min (SLOWLY CLOSE) Close 0 V -250 -2 O V -121A O V -121B O V -122A O V -122B Open O V -253 (SLOWLY) 0 V -250 -1 O V -123B Slowly 0 V -124B Throttle (1750 gpm) FOR 10 MIN Open SLOWLY THROTTLE BACK CLOSED TO END BACKWASH Forward Rinse 700 gpm Close O V -123B O V -124B 2 min --� Open 0 V -121B Slowly Throttle Open O V -125B (700 gpm) FOR 2 MIN SLOWLY THROTTLE BACK CLOSED TO END BACKWASH Back to Service 825 gpm Put in Remote COMMON 0 BACKWASH CONTROL VALVE Close 0 V -253 0 V -250 -1 Open 0 V -121A O V-121B Slowly 0 V -122A Open 0 V -122B To preferred set point flow (SLOWLY) 0 V -250 -2 S: \Public Utilities \DATA \SOP'S \AAF SOP \PARTS • • • Clearwater, FL RO Plant No. 1 STS Process Engineer — Martin Lawrence OPERATOR TRAINING November 2013, • MEM Arsenic & Adsorption EPA Arsenic Rule • ma, = 0.010mg/L= 10pg/L = 10ppb • Effective Compliance Date — January 23rd, 2006 Arsenic Adsorption Technology 4. • Adsorption is the collection of molecules on a media's surface • Differs from conventional filtration which utilizes particle size — Example: coagulation / filtration • Adsorption media is engineered to specific surface areas and micro pores to facilitate arsenic removal • • Adsorption Technology Adsorbent Types Granular Activated Carbon — Polymer Based Adsorbents — Granular Iron Oxide — Activated Alumina • — Other Metal Oxides — Impregnated Media Substrates Adsorbent Structures — High Surface Area: 100 to 500 m2 /g — Porous Particles: 98 +% of Surface Area Is Within Particle • Arsenic ...•`Ion • How Iron Oxide Adsorption Works Chemical Bonding - Primary means of arsenic removal — Strong bond to arsenic — Does not tdesorb — Bonds only broken with. strong caustic • • Regeneration Physical Bonds — Electrostatic attraction of arsenic species to iron oxide media. — Number of physical bonds varies with pH of water • • • Granular Ferric Oxide Media (GFO) • Non hazardous material upon contact • Handling only requires a dust mask • Naturally - occurring or synthetic material with high percentage of oxidized iron • Arsenic -laden groundwater flows through bed of granular iron media, which lies within specially- designed pressure vessels • Arsenic is chemically attracted (adsorbs) to oxidized iron (ferric) Periodic backwashing needed to prevent channeling or plugging of media • After arsenic adsorption capacity is exhausted, media is replaced Bayer • Factors Impacting Media Performance • Oxidation state of arsenic — Two species of arsenic in groundwater As(III) and As(V) oxidized arsenic AS(V) adsorbs best (pH ti 7.0 or lower) pH .. - Alters physical attraction of arsenic to iron oxide media • Competing constituents — silica, fluoride, vanadium, & phosphate AK • Contact time — Time water is allowed to contact the media before it is considered "treated water" — Minimum effective contact time is 3.0 minutes • Contact efficiency- (Channeling) — Efficiency maintained by backwashing media • Media Exhaustion & Available Capacity — Surface area remaining on the media for adsorption to occur • • Damaging Effects to Media High pressure differentials across media bed - Excess of 10 psi — Crushes media and degrades surface — Can be caused by exceeding the maximum treatment rate of 8 gpm/ft 2 or 1230 gpm Sand or foreign object impalement of media — Damages media bed surface & reduces media's capacity "Oil, Grease, & Lubricants (Vertical Turbine Well Systems) — Coats media surface and blocks adsorption sites — Voids media warranty or guarantee Water Hammer — Defined as an increase of pressure >20psi in a time interval of 3 seconds or less. Often occurs from well pump dead heading or well start -ups — Packs media bed causing degradation & high pressure drops — Can damages vessel's internal equipment fi i.. • • Mai II MOM Chlorination Media adsorbs 17 g of free chlorine per cubic foot of media — Equivalent to 14 gallons 12.5% industrial bleach per vessel — Chlorination completed during virgin media fill to a sor ers — Fresh media will continue to adsorb chlorine for around the first 100 BV's Chlorination Durin g Treatment — Standard operation is to chlorinate prior to media contact — Eliminates possible iron bacteria — Oxidizes and precipitates soluble iron, which aids in arsenic removal — Oxidizes As (ITT) to As (V), which is adsorbed faster — Free chlorine residual prior to media exposure best if 0.4 ppm Chlorination when vessel is not in use — Free chlorine residual to be maintained ? 0.4 ppm — Fill vessel with 2 -5 ppm free chlorine to prohibit iron bacteria growth. Check for residual weekly. • • System Design Summary Working Capacity 404.7 Million gallons treated before all vessels are changed out Mode of Operation — Series Flow Media and adsorbers . — Two 14 ft diameter vessels - 506.7 ft3 per vessel = 14,880. lb — 39 in media bed depth (3.3 ft) Backwash (BW) Standard BW: 1770 gpm Virgin Media BW: 2000 gpm — BW waste allowed to decant — reclaimed during service cycle • • "ma System Design Summary • Project Name & General Information Client: City of Clearwater, FL Name of Site: RO Plant No. 1 Primary Contact Karen S Lowe Engineer CDM Smith AverageFlow: Well Capacity: Treatment Flow: Op Factor 24.0 HrslDay or. '100% 1.50 MGD Avg', 1,040 gpm 1,040 gpm 0.0% bypass System Design SORB 330 Model No: Adsorber No & Size: System Footprint: Flow Configuration: Adsorptive Media: Media Quantity: Backwash Volume: SORB Backwash Rate: pH Adjustment: Special Features: EAS -9014 Two 14.0 ft Diameter 321 x 16'W x 14'H Series Bayoxide E33 Granules 29,731 lbs (13.48 MT) 1,013 cubic ft 23,010 gals/vessel 1770 gpm Contact Time (EBCT) & Bed Depth: Average Treatment Rate: Design Flow Rate per Adsorber. Loading Rate (Specific Velocity): Estimated Working Capacity: Total / Lead Media Cycle Life: Volume Treated per Cycle: Arsenic Analysis: 7.3 Min /3.3ft 1,497,600 gals/Day 1,040 gpm 6.8 ppm /ft2 53,000 B■'s 8.9 /4.4 Months 404.7 million gals 40.0 rg /L As Pres: 75 psig • • Treatment Vessels 1040 gpm SJpp.E S ' Lif ,0 Backwash. Weer To $kood Talc <win Water • • Series Operation By operating the vessels in a series configuration, the lead vessel is able to utilize more of its media capacity than if it were operated in parallel. 15 — 20 Series Operation Vessel 1 Changeout Switched to lag position U • 60,000 90,000 120.0110 Bed Va4umes 110,1100 180,000 210,000 Vessel1 Ves4. i • Adsorber Operating Modes Normal Mode - Two vessels in series Vessel Out of Service (Standby or Media Replacement) — Influent & effluent valves closed on vessel out of service (lead) — Flow diverted..through other vessel . (lag) 4i3ackwash — One adsorber is backwashed at a time — Backwash upflow: 12 minutes at 1770 gpm (21,240 gal waste) — All water supplied from supplemental source (distribution) — Booster pumps must be running to prevent backflow of PO4 dosed water - Rinse downflow: 2 minutes at 1040 gpm (2,080 gal waste) — Supplemental source used • • Backwashin g Procedure Select adsorber to be backwashed & log system info • Differential pressures, totalizer reading, time /date, etc. Begin backwash sequence • See Valve. Sequencing sheet Backwash Flow Rates 410 • Rate dependent on water temp (variable viscosity) • Standard Backwash at 1770 gpm for 12 minutes — Virgin Media BW at 2000 gpm for 20 minutes NOTE: Do not exceed 2155 gpm or media loss may occur During BW cycle • Monitor BW effluent from sample taps — Watch for large particle media loss — Monitor progression of fines and color in BW waste Water :1 (°FJ T <65 65<T <85 T >85 (gpm). 1540 1770 2000 Variable Backwash Flow Rates • • BackwashingProcedure Forward Rinse • Freshly backwashed vessel is rinsed at service flow rate — 1040 gpm for 2 minutes • Should run clear after .2 minutes Return To Service • • Place vessels back into series flow Note: Do not switch the order of the lead and lag vessel after a backwash. Backwash Frequency • Primarily determined by pressure differential across bed (? 10 psi) • If DP of 10 psi is not reached in 4 months, initiate backwash • Lead vessel will have to be backwashe uen y an.144:,;vve l • • • • Valve Sequencing — Vessel A Service : 1040 gpm Open V -124B V -125A V- 250-2 V -121A Slowly Open V -1228 (1040 gpm) Turn on High Service Pumps to prevent backflow of PO4 dosed water Lead: A Lag: B Backwash 1770 gpm " 12 min Open Crossover -> Close V-250-2 ) Open DMF FCV Slowly V=124A Valve V -1214 V -253 Throttle (1770gpm) V -125A V -2504 V -1248 V -123A V -1228 Forward Rinse 1040 gpm 2 min Close V -123A —> Open V -121A --- Slowly V -125A V -124A Throttle (1040 gpm) Back to Service 1040 gpm Put in Auto DMRF FCV `-- Close V- 250-1 --> Open V -125A --> Slowly V -1228 V -1248 Open V -250 -2 (Bring vessel up to P) V -253 If B is lead an �`�" ittion s in these valve sequences • • Valve Sequencing — Vessel B Service : 1040 gpm Open V -1248 V -125A V -250 -2 V -121A > Slowly Open V -1228 (10409pm) Turn pn High Service Pumps to prevent backilowof PO4 dosed water Lead: A Lag: B Backwash 17701pm 12 min Open Crossover Close :: V- 250 -2 --> . Open DMF FCV --fir Slowly V -124B V -121A V -253 Throttle (1270 gpm). .. Valve V -124A V-250 -1 V -1248 V -1238 V -1228 Forward Rinse 1040gpm 2min Close V -1718 ---> Open V -1218 —a Slowly V -125B V -124B Throttle (1040gpm) Back to Service 1040 gpm Put in Auto DMF FCV Close V-250-1 Open V -121A > Slowly V -122B V -1218 V -125A Open V -12SB V -1248 V -253 V -250 -2 (Bring vessel up to P) 13eo s in these valve sequences • • Utilit : Cit of Clearwater FL Operations Lod_ Date trtriddi ) Lead Vessel AorB Flow Totalizer Readings Adsorber A: Adsorber B Arsenic Assays pg /L) Feed Ads A Ads 8 Feed Water Assays pH Fe (mg/L) 102 (m `/1. PO4 (mg/L) Performance U•dated Volume Treated to Date (Gals) Adsorber A Adsorber B 1,014 fta E33/Adsorber Guarantee = 50,000 BV's Treatment to Date: Adsorber A x BV's Adsorber B BV's • Severn Trent Water Purification, Inc. SORB 33® As Removal Systems — Project 22569 • OPERATIONS MANUAL Clearwater, FL — RO Plant No. 1 • • Table of Contents Chapter 1 INTRODUCTION 1.1 Arsenic Removal System Description 1.2 Adsorption Chemistry 1.3 Adsorption Performance 1.4 Water Analysis & Design Summary 1.5 Safety Considerations Chapter 2 2.1 2.2 2.3 2.4 2.5 2.6 2.7 Chapter 3 3.1 3.2 3.3 Chapter 4 4.1 4.2 4.3 4.4 4.5 Chapter 5 5.1 5.2 5.3 5.4 5.5 PROCESS OPERATION & CONTROLS Treatment Cycle Media Backwashing Residuals Handling & Backwash Reclaim Process Controls & Alarms Startup Preparation System Start-up, Shutdown, & Standby System Monitoring & Sampling ADSORPTION MEDIA Bayoxide® E33 Media Media Conditioning Spent Media Disposal SYSTEM START -UP & MAINTENANCE Media Installation Spent Media Removal Routine Maintenance Media Replacement STWP Contact Information FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS FAQ A — Spent Media FAQ B — Adsorption Flow Configuration FAQ C — Backwashing FAQ 0 — Series Flow FAQ F — Disinfection Appendix A TECHNICAL MEDIA DATA Material Safety Data Sheets NSF Certification Specifications Project 22569 O &M Manual SEVERN TRENT SERVICES Clearwater, FL — RO Plant No. 1 17 October 2013: Page 1 • • • SEVERN TRENT SERVICES Chapter 1 INTRODUCTION 1.1 Arsenic Removal System Description The SORB 33® Arsenic Package Unit is a commercially available product specifically designed for arsenic (chemical symbol — As) removal for small systems at the wellhead. SORB 33® products are standard packaged systems engineered for arsenic removal. A central component of the integrated SORB 33® systems is the Bayoxide® E33 iron -based adsorption media developed by Bayer AG specifically for the removal of arsenic from drinking water. The granular ferric oxide media exhibits a high capacity for arsenic adsorption and, unlike other iron - based media, is delivered in a dry crystalline form. The E33 media is robust, easy to handle, stored and shipped dry and has NSF 61 approval for use in drinking water. Water from the source well is pumped through a vessel, called an adsorber, containing the media. As the water passes through the fixed bed of media, the arsenic is reduced to below 10 parts per billion or PPB (the new Maximum Contaminant Level) until the media reaches its capacity. The spent media, which will pass the EPA's TCLP test for toxicity, is then removed and disposed of as non - hazardous waste. Unlike several other Arsenics Removal technologies, there is no chemical regeneration or flocculation, making the process simple, reliable, and minimizing labor. The media's high capacity for arsenic enables long operating life (typically 6 to 36 months between media change -outs depending on well usage), thus minimizing operational attention requirements. 1.2 Adsorption Chemistry Arsenic Valence States: Arsenic in ground waters is generally found in one of 2 inorganic states — As3+ or arsenite Arsenic (III) and Ass+ or arsenate Arsenic (V). The more common and stable form of as is Arsenic (V). It exists in 2 ionic forms depending upon the water's pH. It is present in an oxidizing environment, i.e., where the electromotive force (EMF) or ORP of the water is positive or slightly negative. Arsenic (III) exists where the EMF is more negative. It readily oxidizes to Arsenic (V) when exposed to air or to a disinfecting oxidant. As a rule of thumb, Arsenic (III) will be found in waters containing higher levels of iron and /or manganese. Severn Trent Services' SORB 33® Arsenic (As) Removal Process is a fixed bed adsorption system using a granular or pelletized ferric oxide media, or adsorbent, called Bayoxidee E33 and E33P for the adsorption of dissolved arsenic onto the solid media. It employs a simple "Pump & Treat" process that flows pressurized well water through a fixed bed pressure vessel containing the media where the As removal occurs. In the SORB 33® Process, both As(III) and As(V) oxyanions are As(V) Adsorption Reaction removed from water via a with Bayoxide® E33 combination of adsorption, occlusion (adhesion) or solid - solution formation by reaction with ferric Project 22569 O &M Manual FeO —OH + HAsO32- FeO —HAsO3 + 0H1- Clearwater, FL — RO Plant No 1 25 November 2013: Page 2 SEVERN CERVICES oxide ions. Above pH 7, the primary mechanism is the adsorption of arsenic oxyanions (HAsO3) to the surface hydroxyl groups of ferric oxide hydroxide (FeO -OH) as illustrated here: Adsorption is a continuous process conducted at a specific flow rate or velocity, normally about 7 gpm /ft2, downward through the fixed bed adsorber for operating periods of about 1 -4 months on- stream duration. In addition to specific flow rate, the other key process parameter is empty bed contact time (EBCT). This variable dictates the amount of water contact time within the bed required to effect complete As adsorption; the normal design value is 3.5 minutes. The media adsorbs As(V) with rapid kinetics (adsorption). Unlike other adsorbents, it will also adsorb As(III). Arsenite is nonionic at normal water pH's, and therefore, it will not be adsorbed as an anion. Adsorption kinetics for As(III) are slower than that of As(V), probably because it is first oxidized by the media to As(V) before it is adsorbed. 1.3 Arsenic Adsorption Performance Arsenic removal performance via adsorption is illustrated graphically using a "Breakthrough Curve" such as the one shown below. Performance of an adsorbent is measured by the number of bed volumes of water that can be treated with one bed volume (BV) of media before it exhausts, i.e. can no longer adsorb arsenic efficiently. The adsorption curve on the right is predicted performance for Bayoxide® E33 media used to treat the supplied water. The projected volume per vessel in the table below represents the concentration at which the treated water's Arsenic level is nearing the MCL of 10 p.g /L. This is called the breakthrough point. Clea nra r, FL - RO Plant Ni As Breakthrough Curve (per V Influent [As] 8.5 ppb Breakthrough 4.5 Mos Volumeof Water Treated (Millions Monitoring of SORB 33® performance is Bed of Treated 13KKBVs done by routine analysis of the treated water. Initially, this can be done on a monthly basis. As the treated water Arsenic level increases, this frequency is increased to semi - monthly to allow media replacement scheduling as close to the breakthrough point as possible without exceeding the MCL. Bayoxide® E33 media performance is unlike breakthrough curves for water softening resins or some other adsorbents which breakthrough rapidly to the influent levels leaving little time for media change -out. Using Bayoxide® E33 media, arsenic will continue to be adsorbed even after it exceeds the MCL. of Gall 53.4K 1.4 Water Analysis & Design Summary Based upon the flow rate and water quality data in Table 1, the expected performance data is summarized in Table 2. The complete water analysis is important in predicting E33 adsorption performance. Project 22569 O &M Manual Clearwater, FL — RO Plant No. 1 25 November 2013: Page 3 • • • S};1;V1CIS Chapter 4 SYSTEM MAINTENANCE 4.1 Media Installation 4.1.1 The vessel if filled 50% full of water prior to loading media. Chlorine is added to the water before media addition and allowed to mix and disinfect gravel for 10 -15 minutes. 4.1.2 Media is loaded into the top manway through a hoisted supersack. 4.1.3 Once media is installed, add water from the bottom of the vessel to make sure all of the media is submerged. Close and seal the top manhole or flange. 4.1.4 Allow bed to soak for 4 -6 hrs. This will allow the media to become saturated with water and free chlorine. If time is available, soaking overnight is best. 4.1.5 Following media soaking in high level chlorine solution, initial backwashing can then be initiated as in step 2.3.2. Note: The E33 media will adsorb approximately 17 g free chlorine per ft3 of media; it may require substantial flow to establish a residual if full adsorption is not complete over soaking period. Media could continue slow adsorption of system residual for up to 48 hours if it has not been contacted with enough bleach. Do NOT exceed a dosage rate of 500 mg/L (ppm) of free chlorine (Cl2) as this may have an adverse effect on the media. 4.2 Spent Media Removal The Lead vessel's media is considered spent when the Lag vessel's treated effluent reaches 10 p.g /L As. Spent media is removed via a vacuum system certified for potable drinking water service. STWP offers this complete service in most areas of the country. The process is described below. 1. Observe the vendors site preparation to be sure all confined space permits and other safety related actions are being followed and approved by the site owner or operator. Verify with owner or operator vessels that are to be changed out. 2. Isolate water flow to vessels. Follow vendor's Lockout /Tag out procedures. Owner is to have possession of a lock on the isolation. Vendor will also be required to have a separate lock if confined space permits are issued. If electrical work is to be completed, this must also be locked out prior to work and must be on a separate form. Each lockout item has its own form to be completed. 3. Verify that all valves indicate proper position. Make note of current pressure differential. 4. Pull representative spent media sample from sample port on side of the adsorber (if provided) prior to vessel dewatering or from the open manhole after depressurization and draining. This sample is to be submitted by vendor or owner to a certified laboratory for the EPA metals Toxicity Characteristic Leaching Procedure test (TCLP). In CA, the state's Soluble Threshold Limit Concentration (STLC) and hazardous solids waste classification tests (TTLC) are required in addition. Project 22569 O &M Manual Clearwater, FL — RO Plant No. 1 17 October 2013: Page 13 • • • SEVERN SERVICES 5. Depressurize vessels to be evacuated with hand valve air release and complete lock out tag out procedures to isolate any water or chemical sources. Verify contractor performing any confined space entry is also locked out. (Multiple locks may be used) 6. Have vendor remove top manway and observe the media bed conditions. Look for any signs of foreign contaminants or media discolorations, and measure /record the media bed height. If possible have vendor open side manway to view media profile for any crushing or items effecting system performance. If STWP personnel is not on site for this, contact vendor prior to change out date to arrange for pictures and samples to be taken for viewing upon STWP arrival on site. These will be included in the report to the owner. 7. Verify pressure differential during run cycles to be no greater than 12 psi, preferred at 9 psi. 8. Verify standard backwash rates with operator, not to be less than 9.5 gpm /ft2 unless specified in operation manual published by STWP at start-up. 9. Visually inspect valves & flow meters for wear for malfunction. 10. When vessels are evacuated of all media and confined space entry is complete by vendor, visually inspect the underdrain from the manway for internals exposure. Record the bed height removed from each vessel and include in report. Top off or fill holes with surplus gravel and level before media filling is commenced. 4.3 Routine Maintenance Flow Meters — Verify calibration accuracy annually. If flow varies in excess of 10% between vessels in series, contact a Severn Trent Water Purification representative if under warranty or the manufacturer's local servicing representative. Pressure and PDIT Gauges —Bleed water from the supply piping after each backwash. Differential pressure gauge can be tested by isolating and bleeding the pressure from the effluent pressure piping and allowing influent piping to remain pressurized. The differential pressure should read the well pressure. Do not complete this test if well discharge pressure exceeds the maximum pressure differential the instrument is designed to display. Adsorber Underdrain— Inspect every media changeout. During media change -out, drain adsorber of water, and vacuum out all media. Observe any plugged channels or wear on underdrain system. Vessel Interior Coating — Interior coating should be visually inspected with every media change - out. Any exposed metal should be resealed with the proper coating. Further oxidation of the surface could permanently damage the vessel. Manways & Seals — All manways should be inspected every media change -out for a clean and undamaged sealing surface. New gaskets should be replaced every 2-4 years. A set of gaskets should always be available during every media change out to assure installation can be completed in the given time. Project 22569 O &M Manual Clearwater, FL — RO Plant No. 1 25 November 2013: Page 14 SEVERN SERVICES 4.4 Media Replacement • Routine sampling of raw and treated water (from each adsorber) for Arsenic analyses should be done, preferably at least once per month. Reference Section 3 (Arsenic Adsorption Performance) to see how the media performs with gradually increasing effluent Arsenic levels over this period and for recommended increases in sampling frequency. STWP should be notified when the effluent As level is in the 8 -8.5 pg /L range, so that plans can be made for media replacement. For ordering Bayoxide® E33 media replacement, contact Park West One, Cliff Mine Rd., Suite 600, Pittsburgh, PA 15275 Main Phone: (800) 364 -1600 • • 4.5 STWP Contact Information The primary process contacts for troubleshooting help and process support is: System Design & Technical Assistance Rich Dennis Separation Products Manager 5415 W. Sligh Ave., Suite 102, Tampa, FL 33634 Office: (800) 364 -3931 Cell Phone: (813) 601 -7966 RDennis @severntrentservjces.corn Martin Lawrence Process Engineer mlawrence(severntrentservices .com 5415 W. Sligh Ave., Suite 102, Tampa, FL 33634 Office: (800) 364 -3931 Cell Phone: (813) 394 -3281 Chris Clark Process Engineer 5415 W. Sligh Ave., Suite 102, Tampa, FL 33634 Office: (800) 364 -3931 Cell Phone: (727) 688 -5585 CCIark@sevemtrentservices.com Project Management Ed Kuchtjak EKuchtjak Aseverntrentservices.corn Park West One, Cliff Mine Rd., Suite 600, Pittsburgh, PA 15275 Main Phone: (800) 364 -1600 Project 22569 O &M Manual Clearwater, FL — RO Plant No. 1 25 November 2013: Page 15 • • • Chapter 5 FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS Frequently Asked Questions Bulletin A TRENT SERVICES Date: April 18, 2007 Subject: Spent Media Characterization & Disposal Q: How is the spent Bayoxide® E33 & E33P media classified, and how is it disposed? A: One of the key advantages of Bayoxide® E33 granular and Bayoxide® E33P pelletized iron oxide adsorbent is its ability to strongly bind arsenic as water passes through the media through a combination of adsorption, adhesion and other physical /chemical mechanisms. The iron oxide media has been tested in multiple lab scale, pilot and commercial drinking water applications since 1999. The spent media from many of these applications have been tested. In each case the spent media passed the USEPA's Toxicity Characteristic Leaching Procedure threshold (TCLP per RCRA 40 CFR 261). The TCLP test is an extraction procedure used for determining whether the material (media), when discarded, would classify as a hazardous waste. Based on repeated results on over 100 samples, the media will not be characterized as a hazardous waste per the EPA's TCLP test. Unless preempted by more stringent state or local regulations (such as California), the spent media is considered a RCRA Subtitle D, non - hazardous solid waste, suitable for disposal in a sanitary landfill. The table on the right shows some spent media testing results. Susanville (CDC), CA Pilot BV's Treated: 25,000 Metal Arsenic (TCLP) Barium (TCLP) Cadmium (TCLP) Chromium (TCLP) Lead (TCLP) Mercury (TCLP) Selemium (TCLP) Silver (TCLP) Final disposition and determination is Vanadium typically the responsibility of the customer, since State or federal agencies do not grant blanket "approval" Metal or "disapproval" of spent materials, but Units: Col #2 Limit _ '` Col #2 rather allows the generator of such Arsenic residuals to make a hazardous waste Vanadium determination. For more guidance on testing the spent E33 media, feel free to contact Severn Trent Water Purification for assistance. Units: EPA Toxicity Characteristic Leaching Procedure (mg1L) Col #2 Limit ND ND ND ND ND ND ND ND 5.0 100.0 1.0 5.0 5.0 0.2 1.0 5.0 Sample Date: 18 Feb 06 CA Soluble Threshold Limit Concentration (mgIL) I Col #2 Lirn 0.71 1.7 ND ND ND ND ND ND 7.5 5.0 100.0 1.0 5.0 5.0 0.2 1.0 5.0 24.0 Analysis determines the amount of analyte that is soluble in the CA Waste Extraction Test' (WET) Leachate. CA Total Threshold Limit Concentration (mg/kg) Z 360 620 500 2,400 2 Total amount of metal in the wet spent media. Limit Q: CAN A UTILITY ELIMINATE ENVIRONMENTAL LIABILITY BY SELECTING ONE ARSENIC REMOVAL TECHNOLOGY OVER ANOTHER? A: Generating, managing, and disposing of arsenic - containing residuals in a regulatory compliant manner that is consistent with sound environmental stewardship can present a challenge to Utilities. Regulations are written such that the "generators" of a waste share in the responsibility for the complete "cradle -to- grave" process. Project 22569 O &M Manual Clearwater, FL — RO Plant No. 1 25 November 2013: Page 16 • • • Every arsenic removal technology produces a waste that contains arsenic. Wastes are essentially discarded material that are relinquished, recycled, or considered inherently waste -like. Concentrate streams, sludge's (from iron removal or CF processes), spent adsorption media, and spent ion- exchange media or spent brine all would be considered "wastes ". Treatment or recycling (regeneration) of solid and liquid arsenic - containing "waste" may be conducted at an off -site facility. These third party commercially operated facilities require a full RCRA treatment, storage, or Disposal Facility (TSDF) permit. It is the responsibility of the Utility to test, manage, store, transport and manifest all "wastes" in an environmental responsible manner "cradle -to- grave ". To date, no sovereign immunity exists. As a result, an arsenic removal technology or company offering an arsenic removal technology can not eliminate a Utility's liability or responsibility for sound environmental stewardship. Based on capital costs, operations /Maintenance and programmatic costs (training, monitoring, record keeping, residual management and disposal), Bayoxide® E33 and Bayoxide® E33 -P media can offer a Utility an environmentally sound and overall cost - effective and safe solution. Q: How IS THE SPENT MEDIA REMOVED FROM THE SORB 33® ADSORBERS? A: Spent media is removed from adsorber vessels either by vacuuming or under hydraulic pressure. Vacuuming entails first draining the vessel of water followed by vacuuming the media from the top nozzle or manway with disinfected or dedicated vacuum truck equipment. This process generates the minimum amount of wastewater. Alternatively, media can be removed from a flooded vessel hydraulically through the bottom or side nozzles in the adsorber. 20 PSIG air pressure can force most of the media out using a small amount of backwash water flow for hydraulic fluidization assist. Underbedding gravel may be removed with the media if the nozzle is on the vessel bottom. Upon completion, the vessel is drained and any heel of media remaining in the vessel is flushed out under water pressure or vacuumed out. Project 22569 O &M Manual Clearwater, FL — RO Plant No. 1 17 October 2013: Page 17 411 Frequently Asked Questions Bulletin B • • Date: June 21, 2004 Subject: Adsorption Flow Configuration Q: What is the optimum SORB 33TM flow configuration for minimum capital expenditure and footprint? For maximum Bayoxide® E33 media life and lowest operating cost? For system redundancy with adsorbers out of service? A: Configuration of a water utility's As treatment system can best be answered by first prioritizing that utility's water treatment design philosophy, its water quality (As level), and the state's design criteria for water treatment systems. The key criteria are: 1) capital available for As treatment, 2) available footprint, or space, for installation, 3) the level of redundancy required if an adsorber is taken out of service, 4) state rules regarding treatment bypass & blending, 5) the trade -off between capital & operating costs for treating high As waters, and, 6) optional centralized treatment. The simplest configuration for adsorption processes is parallel flow between 2 or more adsorbers. The most economical configuration is parallel flow with bypass and blending. Since Bayoxide® E33 will adsorb As to levels <3 µg /L throughout most of the adsorption cycle, some water can be bypassed via flow control and blended with treated water to an average As level 1 -2 pg /L below the 10 µg /L federal MCL. This extends media life, thus reducing operating costs. It also allows for smaller adsorber vessel designs due to reduced loading rates. Bypass and blending is recommended for waters with As levels <25 µg /L. Treatment through 2 adsorbers in series flow configuration ( "lead /lag ") is recommended for waters with high As levels ( >30 pg /L). The media's As adsorption capacity can be optimized by allowing the first "lead" bed of media to continue to adsorb As past the 10 pg /L federal MCL while the second bed acts as a polishing, or "lag ", adsorber. This is possible because the As breakthrough curve is gradual even when the treated water exceeds 10 µg /L As. When media is changed out in the first adsorber, the second one becomes the lead adsorber while the first one is placed in the lag position. The media can adsorb up to 40% additional As in this configuration when compared with proportional operating costs for parallel flow. These savings can offset the more expensive capital costs which can be up to 70% greater than for parallel flow design. "(N + 1) redundancy" parallel flow configuration uses 3 or more adsorbers designed so that one adsorber can be taken out of service for backwash, etc., while the other adsorbers continue to treat the full well capacity. The adsorbers in service treat water above the minimum EBCT contact time and below the maximum loading rates. Some state regulations require this level of treatment system redundancy. Optimization of the series flow and (N + 1) redundant designs is the sequencing configuration. Three or more adsorbers are designed with a valve & piping manifold that allows for parallel, N + 1, simultaneous parallel & series flow, and parallel flow with simultaneous backwash. This configuration optimizes media capacity while minimizing capital costs and area requirements. Media usage can be optimized in multiple parallel flow adsorber systems via staging. The media life cycle for each adsorber is staggered such that one is operating in the latter stages of its life while others are operating at earlier stages of media life. The adsorber with the oldest media can operate to 12 -14 ppb As breakthrough because its water is blended with other adsorbers discharging water with As in the 2 -6 ppb range. The treated water from the adsorbers contains an As level of about 8 ppb. Project 22569 O &M Manual Clearwater, FL — RO Plant No. 1 17 October 2013: Page 18 • • Frequently Asked Questions Date: December 11, 2004 Bulletin C Subject: Media Backwashing Requirements Q: Is Backwashing of the media required? How much water is generated? What is the water quality? Does the backwashing step release arsenic to the water? A: Periodic backwashing or "fluffing" of the media is performed every 1-4 months depending on usage and water quality. It is performed for two reasons. All media in pressurized systems over time can compact and potentially develop preferential channels that can cause short- circuiting or incomplete adsorption. Additionally, sediment from the well (if present), oxidized iron precipitate from the feed water, or other suspended material may be retained and captured in the media bed. To prevent excessive pressure drop or channeling, backwashing (typically using well water) to lift or fluff the bed is performed periodically. Backwashing is typically performed at a rate of 10 -13 GPM /Ft' for up to 9 bed volumes. Arsenic is not desorbed during the backwashing process. Since well water is used for backwashing, the backwash water quality will bear similar characteristics to the well water. The table below is an analysis of various parameters from actual field pilot adsorption tests. As noted, some filterable iron particulates (small media particles or captured ferric hydroxide [Fe(OH)3] particulates in the influent) are present in the backwash water. This iron particulate represents nearly all of the total suspended solids and can be easily removed via filtration or decanting if required. Since the well water is used for backwashing, some As removal (partial treatment) results as the water flows upward through the fluidized bed during the backwash process. As observed below, the arsenic levels are in all cases lower than the well water. Also, it should be noted that a portion of the arsenic in the backwash effluent is associated with the iron particulate and is therefore insoluble. Based on the backwash waster quality observed, this water is suitable for (1) discharge to a sewer or POTW if available; (2) direct discharge to a septic system, an open ditch, or other location; or (3) decanted of any fines and recycled back into the feed stream at the head of the system if there is no discharge allowed. Local or state permitting requirements for direct discharges should be consulted before exercising this option to obtain any regulatory approvals. Pilot Site Sample Date Analysis - TSS (PPM) As Well Water Analysis - Backwash Effluent (PPB) Fe (PPM) TSS (PPM) As (PPB) Fe (PPM) Rio Rancho, NM Apr 02 ND 49 0.05 28 21 18.00 Apr 02 10 34 0.18 Manteca, CA May 02 ND 19 ND 12 8 1.70 Jul02 ND 19 0.38 Sep 02 ND 20 ND Femley, NV May 03 ND 51 0.08 <5 18 1.30 Jul03 <5 36 1.90 Aug 03 <5 42 0.90 Project 22569 O &M Manual Clearwater, FL — RO Plant No. 1 17 October 2013: Page 19 • • Frequently Asked Questions Bulletin 0 Date: April 10, 2010 Subject: Series Flow Configuration Q: WHAT IS SERIES FLOW CONFIGURATION AND How DOES IT IMPROVE BAYOXIDE® E33 AS REMOVAL PERFORMANCE IN SORB 33® ADSORBERS? A: Arsenic (As) Removal performance via adsorption is illustrated graphically below using a "Breakthrough Curve ". Performance is measured by the number of bed volumes of water that can be treated with one bed volume (BV) of media before it exhausts, i.e., it can no longer adsorb As efficiently. This "breakthrough" point typically occurs when the treated water's As level exceeds the EPA's MCL of 10 pg /L (5 pg /L As for New Jersey). Bayoxide® E33 will remove As from high levels in water to well below the above limits through a 3 foot bed depth. The adsorption kinetics can be relatively fast. Therefore, treatment is achieved in a single adsorber, i.e., via parallel flow configuration. Unlike breakthrough curves for water softening resins or some other adsorbents, As will continue to be adsorbed even level is much greater than the limit, it continues to be adsorbed from partially "spent" E33 media beyond the 10 µg /L breakthrough point. See the blue "Lead Col As" curve in the Rimrock, AZ Adsorption graph on the right. The advantage of an "extended adsorption" media like E33 is that its As capacity can be increased in a lead /lag series flow configuration. Treating water containing 25 -60 pg /L As, effluent water from the primary, or "lead ", column can contain as much as 15 -30 pg /L As. This partially treated water is further treated in a "lag ", or polishing, column where the final As level is reduced to <3 pg /L (the green "Lag Col As" curve). The net result of this flow configuration treatment capacity of 15 -40 %. This translates into a proportional reduction in operating costs. Q: WHEN IS THE SERIES FLOW CONFIGURATION BETWEEN THE LEAD AND LAG COLUMNS REVERSED? A: The flow configuration is reversed only when the media in the lead column becomes exhausted, or the column's effluent As level is more than 75% of the influent As level. This bed is then replaced. Alternatively, this point can be set when the lag column's As level increases above 3 pg /L or another low As value. After the lead column is taken out of service to replace its exhausted media, the lag column is then operated in the lead position with the column containing the fresh media now in the lag position. Once a column has been placed into the lead position, it should remain in that position until its media is replaced. The reason for this is that once an adsorption profile has been established in a media bed and the effluent As increases, the column cannot produce water any cleaner than its elevated effluent As level. after it exceeds the MCL. If the water's As Bayoxide® E33 As Adso Ion • Rlmrock, AZ 20,000 40,000 60.000 Noe a ,yrrm nom Bad: Volumes Da es is an increase in the media's adsorption and Project 22569 O &M Manual Clearwater, FL — RO Plant No. 1 17 October 2013: Page 20 • Q: How IS ADSORPTION PERFORMANCE (BV's) MEASURE IN SERIES FLOW CONFIGURATION? A: Bayoxide® E33 series flow media performance is reported in terms of overall bed volumes (BV's) for both columns in the lead position. In series flow, water flows through two columns one at a time. Only the flow to the 1st column is measured. When that column's media is exhausted, the volume of water treated to that point divided by the column's media volume determines the BV's of treatment by it. This should be half of the overall value. Once the other column is placed into the lead position, then only the flow to it is measured to determine its BV's of treatment prior to breakthrough. The sum of these two values is the performance BV's for the 2 column system. • Project 22569 O &M Manual • Clearwater, FL — RO Plant No. 1 17 October 2013: Page 21 • Frequently Asked Questions Bulletin F • i Date: August 23, 2007 Subject: SORB 33® System & Bayoxide® E33 Disinfection Q: What standard disinfection methods are used during commissioning of a SORB 33® System? A: Regulations governing the degree of disinfection required when commissioning drinking water pumping, treatment and distribution systems vary across State and Local environmental and health agencies. Nonetheless, these regulations set the precedent for a utilities' compliance in a region. The recommended standard SORB 33® System disinfection methods are conducted after the equipment and any gravel underbedding have been installed and tested hydrostatically for leaks. The equipment systems are dosed with chlorinated water, checking free chlorine (Cl2) residual levels periodically until the residual stops decreasing and becomes a steady value. Q: What standard disinfection methods are used during commissioning of Bayoxide® E33 media? A: At the end of the Bayoxide® E33 manufacturing process, the final step is high temperature thermal drying of the iron oxide media prior to packaging the product in sealed, shrink wrapped sacks free of bacterial contamination. Emptying the media directly into disinfection adsorber vessels from these sacks does not require any disinfection to the actual media. In fact, Bayoxide® E33 behaves somewhat like granular activated carbon and adsorbs a limited amount of free chlorine. Thus, it is impossible to maintain a residual if the media was to be disinfected although the media will eventually become saturated with free Cl2. The standard process is to backwash the media after allowing it to soak for 4 -24 hours for wetting, and then collect water samples from the backwash effluent and treated water lines for bacteria analysis (bacti's). If any bacti sample tests positive, add two gallon of 10 -12% NSF certified NaOCI per 100 cubic foot (ft3) of media into the top of the adsorber, and allow 1 -2 hours for dispersing. Then flow water downward at 3 -5 gpm /ft2 for two bed volumes discharging the effluent to waste and resample for bacti's. NOTE: Bayoxide® E33 media reversibly adsorbs about 17 grams of free Cl2 per cubic foot of media. With out chlorine preloading, it takes 40-60 hours of treatment of chlorinated water before saturating the media and measuring a free residual in treated water. Adsorbed chlorine has no negative impact on the arsenic adsorption process providing contacted water does not exceed 150 ppm free chlorine. Some free Cl2 will desorb from the media if feed water is not chlorinated. Q: What are the disinfection procedures if regulations require Bayoxide® E33 media disinfection? A: When regulations require disinfection of the media, add four gallons of 5.25 % -6.5% NaOCI Clorox® Brand or two gallons 10 % -12 %NSF approved bleach per 100 ft3 of media into the adsorber after gravel addition. Add another four gallons of 5.25 % -6.5% NaOCI Clorox® Brand or two gallons 10 % -12 %NSF approved bleach 100 ft3 of media into the flooded adsorber after media addition. Allow for the minimum soak period of 4 hours for media wetting, and then proceed with the conditioning media backwash procedures using chlorinated water for this service. Collect bacteria samples as required by regulation. It is important not to exceed 150 ppm free chlorine otherwise damage to media could occur. Project 22569 O &M Manual Clearwater, FL — RO Plant No. 1 17 October 2013: Page 22 • APPENDIX A Technical Media Data • Project 22569 O &M Manual • Clearwater, FL — RO Plant No. 1 17 October 2013: Page 23 LANXESS Energizing Chemistry LANXESS Corporation Product Safety & Regulatory Affairs 111 RIDC Park West Drive Pittsburgh, PA 15275 -1112 USA MATERIAL SAFETY DATA SHEET TRANSPORTATION EMERGENCY CALL CHEMTREC: (800) 424 -9300 INTERNATIONAL: (703) 527 -3887 NON - TRANSPORTATION LANXESS Emergency Phone: LANXESS Information Phone: (800) 410-3063 (800) LANXESS 1. Product and Company Identification Product Name: Material Number: Color Index Name: CAS -No.: Formula: HS Tariff Classification: BAYOXIDE E 33 2653218 Pigment Yellow 42 20344 -49 -4 FeOOH 2821.10 2. Hazards Identification Emergency Overview Color: Brown Form: solid Granules Odor: Odorless. Product poses little or no hazard if spilled. May cause mechanical irritation (abrasion). Potential Health Effects Primary Routes of Entry: Inhalation, Skin Contact, Eye Contact, Ingestion Medical Conditions Aggravated by Respiratory disorders Exposure: HUMAN EFFECTS AND SYMPTOMS OF OVEREXPOSURE General Effects of Exposure Acute Effects of Exposure For Product: BAYOXIDE E 33 No applicable information was found concerning any adverse acute health effects from overexposure to this product. Chronic Effects of Exposure For Product: BAYOXIDE E 33 No applicable information was found concerning any adverse chronic health effects from overexposure to this product. Material Name: BAYOXIDE E 33 Article Number: 2653218 Page: 1 of 7 Report Version: 1.1 Carcinogenicity: No Carcinogenic substances as defined by IARC, NTP and/or OSHA 13. Composition /Information on Ingredients Hazardous Components This material is not hazardous under the criteria of the Federal OSHA Hazard Communication Standard 29 CFR 1910.1200. 14. First Aid Measures Eye Contact In case of contact, flush eyes with plenty of lukewarm water. Get medical attention if irritation develops. Skin Contact In case of skin contact, wash affected areas with soap and water. Inhalation If inhaled, remove to fresh air. Get medical attention if irritation develops. Ingestion If ingested, do not induce vomiting unless directed to do so by medical personnel. Get medical attention. 5. Fire - Fighting Measures Suitable Extinguishing Media: Material is not combustible. Use extinguishing media suitable for other combustible materials in the area. Special Fire Fighting Procedures Firefighters should be equipped with self - contained breathing apparatus to protect against potentially toxic and irritating fumes. 6. Accidental release measures Spill and Leak Procedures Spills should be swept up and placed in appropriate containers for disposal. Clean up promptly by scoop or vacuum. Avoid creating dusty conditions. 7. Handling and Storage Storage Period Unlimited in tightly closed containers. Handling/Storage Precautions Material Name: BAYOXIDE E 33 Article Number: 2653218 Page: 2 of 7 Report Version: 1.1 Handle in accordance with good industrial hygiene and safety practices. Wash thoroughly after handling. Keep container closed when not in use. Avoid breathing dust. Further Info on Storage Conditions Material can be stored safely at ambient temperatures. 18. Exposure Controls / Personal Protection Country specific exposure limits have not been established or are not applicable Industrial HygieneNentilation Measures Under normal conditions of use, special ventilation is not required. Respiratory Protection Although no exposure limit has been established for this product, the OSHA PEL for Particulates Not Otherwise Regulated (PNOR) of 15 mg/m3 - total dust, 5 mg/m3 - respirable fraction is recommended. In addition, the ACGIH recommends 3 mg/m3 - respirable particles and 10 mg/m3 - inhalable particles for Particles (insoluble or poorly soluble) Not Otherwise Specified (PNOS)., The following respirator is recommended if airborne concentrations exceed the appropriate standard/guideline., NIOSH approved, air - purifying particulate respirator with N -95 filters. Eye Protection safety glasses. Skin and body protection No special skin protection requirements during normal handling and use. Additional Protective Measures Employees should wash their hands and face before eating, drinking, or using tobacco products. Educate and train employees in the safe use and handling of this product. 9. Physical and chemical properties Form: Appearance: Color: Odor: pH: Melting Point: Flash Point: Lower Explosion Limit: Upper Explosion Limit: Vapor Pressure: Specific Gravity: Solubility in Water: Autoignition Temperature: Viscosity, Dynamic: Bulk Density: solid Granules Brown Odorless 4 -8 @50g/1 Begins at 1,000 °C (1,832 °F) not applicable Not Established Not Established not applicable 4 - 5 @ 20 °C (68 °F) Insoluble Not Applicable not applicable 300 - 1,000 kg/m3 110. Stability'! and Reactivity Hazardous Reactions I Material Name: BAYOXIDE E 33 Article Number: 2653218 Page: 3 of 7 Report Version: 1.1 Hazardous polymerization does not occur. Stability Stable Conditions to avoid At temperatures greater than 356 F (180 C) the product will be converted to Fe203. 11. Toxicological Information Toxicity Data for BAYOXIDE E 33 Acute Oral Toxicity LD50: > 5,000 mg/kg (Rat) Skin Irritation rabbit, Non - irritating Eye Irritation rabbit, Non - irritating Toxicity Data for C.I. Pigment Yellow 42 Acute Oral Toxicity LD50: > 5,000 mg/kg (Rat) Skin Irritation rabbit, Non - irritating Eye Irritation rabbit, Non - irritating Carcinogenicity Rat, Male/Female, intraperitoneal, 8 w, ambiguous 12. Ecological Information Ecological Data for BAYOXIDE E 33 Acute and Prolonged Toxicity to Fish LCO: > 1,000 mg/I (Golden orfe (Leuciscus idus)) Toxicity to Microorganisms NOEC: > 1,000 mg/1, (Pseudomonas putida) Ecological Data for C.I. Pigment Yellow 42 Acute and Prolonged Toxicity to Fish EC50: > 1,000 mg/I (Golden orfe (Leuciscus idus), 48 h) Toxicity to Microorganisms > 10,000 mg/I, ( Pseudomonas putida) Material Name: BAYOXIDE E 33 I Article Number: 2653218 Page: 4 of 7 Report Version: 1.1 • • 113. Disposal considerations Waste Disposal Method Waste disposal should be in accordance with existing federal, state and local environmental control laws. Empty Container Precautions Recondition or dispose of empty container in accordance with governmental regulations. 14. Transportation information Land transport (DOT) Non - Regulated Sea transport (IMDG) Non - Regulated Air transport (ICAO /IATA) Non - Regulated 115.,Regulatory Information United States Federal Regulations OSHA Hazcom Standard Rating: Non - Hazardous US. Toxic Substances Control Act: Listed on the TSCA Inventory. US. EPA CERCLA Hazardous Substances (40 CFR 302): Components None SARA Section 311/312 Hazard Categories: Non - hazardous under Section 311/312 US. EPA Emergency Planning and Community Right -To -Know Act (EPCRA) SARA Title III Section 302 Extremely Hazardous Substance (40 CFR 355, Appendix A): Components None US. EPA Emergency Planning and Community Right -To -Know Act (EPCRA) SARA Title III Section 313 Toxic Chemicals (40 CFR 372.65) - Supplier Notification Required: Components None US. EPA Resource Conservation and Recovery Act (RCRA) Composite List of Hazardous Wastes and Appendix VIII Hazardous Constituents (40 CFR 261): If discarded in its purchased form, this product would not be a hazardous waste either by listing or by characteristic. However, under RCRA, it is the responsibility of the product user to determine at the time Material Name: BAYOXIDE E 33 Article Number: 2653218 Page: 5 of 7 Report Version: 1.1 of disposal, whether a material containing the product or derived from the product should be classified as a hazardous waste. (40 CFR 261.20 -24) State Right -To -Know Information The following chemicals are specifically listed by individual states; other product specific health and safety data in other sections of the MSDS may also be applicable for state requirements. For details on your regulatory requirements you should contact the appropriate agency in your state. Potential exposure to the California Proposition 65 chemicals in this product have been determined to be below the No Significant Risk Level (NSRL)., The concentrations reported below in units of parts per million (ppm) or parts per billion (ppb) are maximum values. Massachusetts, New Jersey or Pennsylvania Right to Know Substance Lists: Weight % Components CAS -No. 1 - 100% C.I. Pigment Yellow 42 20344 -49 -4 MA Right to Know Extraordinarily Hazardous Substance List: Weight % Components CAS -No. 25 ppm Arsenic 7440 -38 -2 350 ppm Chromium 7440 -47 -3 200 ppm Nickel (Ni) 7440 -02 -0 California Prop. 65: To the best of our knowledge, this product does not contain any of the listed chemicals, which the state of California has found to cause cancer, birth defects or other reproductive harm. 116.Other Information NFPA 704M Ratin Health 1 Flammability 0 Reactivity 0 Other O= Insignificant 1= Slight 2= Moderate 3 =High 4= Extreme HMIS Ratin 1 Flammability 0 Physical Hazard 0 O= Minimal 1= Slight 2= Moderate 3= Serious 4= Severe * = Chronic Health Hazard LANXESS Corporation's method of hazard communication is comprised of Product Labels and Material Safety Data Sheets. HMIS and NFPA ratings are provided by LANXESS Corporation as a customer service. Contact Person: Product Safety Department Telephone: (800) LANXESS MSDS Number: 000000004623 Version Date: 04/01/2005 Report Version: 1.1 Material Name: BAYOXIDE E 33 1 Article Number: 2653218 Page: 6 of 7 Report Version: 1.1 This information is furnished without warranty, express or implied. This information is believed to be accurate to the best knowledge of LANXESS Corporation. The information in this MSDS relates only to the specific material designated herein. LANXESS Corporation assumes no legal responsibility for use of or reliance upon the information in this MSDS. I Material Name: BAYOXIDE E 33 1 Article Number: 2653218 Page: 7 of 7 Report Version: 1.1 0 NSF International • • • OFFICIAL LISTING NSF International Certifies that the products appearing on this Listing conform to the requirements of NSF /ANSI Standard 61 - Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects This is the Official Listing recorded on February 7, 2007. LANXESS AG RHEINUFERSTRASSE 7 -9 BUILDING 54 KREFELD, 47812 GERMANY 49 2151 88 3790 Facility: KREFELD, GERMANY Process Media Water Water Contact Contact Trade Designation Size Temp Material Adsorption Bayoxide E33 .3 mm - 2 mm CLD 23 FEOH Bayoxide E33 HC .3 mm - 2 mm CLD 23 FEOH Bayoxide E33 HCF .1 mm - .5 mm CLD 23 FEOH Bayoxide E33 P .3 mm 2 mm CLD 23 FEOH NOTE: Certified for water treatment plant applications. This product has not been evaluated for point of use applications. Note: Additions shall not be made to this document without prior evaluation and acceptance by NSF International. 1 of 1 769 N. Dixboro Road, Ann Arbor, Michigan 48105-9723 USA 1 -8 -NSF -MARK 734 - 769 -8010 www.nsforg OL760 • • • Description Type Delivery form Chemical class CAS -No. REACH registration Specification Technictd Data Technical Oxide Granules Synthetic .ion hydroxide: • a -::FH 512741 01 - 2119457554.330000.. Fee203 -went [ %] Bulk Density [gJci Specific Surface Area _f rr lg] water - soluble content [ %] Moisture content (ex works) [%] Greve analysis < 0.5 mm [96] Sieve analysis > 20 mm [ %] Trace elements • [m9i1(9] ea [rn9tkg1 Co [mg] Cr [9] Cu [nom] Mn [mgncg] Ni [mom] Pb [9] Zit .[mg/kg] min 70 0.45 120 0.6 200 1.0 20 20 5.0 max 350 10 100 250 100 3000 300 3 100 Teat method DIN 55913:1972 DIN EN ISO 787 -11 :1995 DIN 66131:1993 DIN EN ISO 787 - 3:1995 DIN EN ISO 787-2:1995 Test method K006 -00 Test method K006 -00 Test methods Atomic spectroscopy Atomic spectroscopy Atomic spectroscopy Atomic spectroscopy Atomic spy Atomic spectroscopy Atomic spectroscopy Atomic spectroscopy Atomic spectroscopy Informative technical data (guide values) a - FeOOH Content [9I162 Density [gtml] Test method 99 information about the determination of iron oxide" 4.0 DIN EN ISO 787-10:1995 • APPENDIX A Technical Media Data • Project 22569 O &M Manual • Clearwater, FL — RO Plant No. 1 17 October 2013: Page 23 LANXESS Energizing Chemistry LANXESS Corporation Product Safety & Regulatory Affairs 111 RIDC Park West Drive Pittsburgh, PA 15275 -1112 USA MATERIAL SAFETY DATA SHEET TRANSPORTATION EMERGENCY CALL CHEMTREC: (800) 424 -9300 INTERNATIONAL: (703) 527 -3887 NON - TRANSPORTATION LANXESS Emergency Phone: LANXESS Information Phone: (800) 410-3063 (800) LANXESS 1. Product and Company Identification Product Name: Material Number: Color Index Name: CAS -No.: Formula: HS Tariff Classification: BAYOXIDE E 33 2653218 Pigment Yellow 42 20344 -49 -4 FeOOH 2821.10 2. Hazards Identification Emergency Overview Color: Brown Form: solid Granules Odor: Odorless. Product poses little or no hazard if spilled. May cause mechanical irritation (abrasion). Potential Health Effects Primary Routes of Entry: Inhalation, Skin Contact, Eye Contact, Ingestion Medical Conditions Aggravated by Respiratory disorders Exposure: HUMAN EFFECTS AND SYMPTOMS OF OVEREXPOSURE General Effects of Exposure Acute Effects of Exposure For Product: BAYOXIDE E 33 No applicable information was found concerning any adverse acute health effects from overexposure to this product. Chronic Effects of Exposure For Product: BAYOXIDE E 33 No applicable information was found concerning any adverse chronic health effects from overexposure to this product. Material Name: BAYOXIDE E 33 1 Article Number: 2653218 Page: 1 of 7 Report Version: 1.1 • Carcinogenicity: No Carcinogenic substances as defined by IARC, NTP and /or OSHA 13. Composition /Information on Ingredients Hazardous Components This material is not hazardous under the criteria of the Federal OSHA Hazard Communication Standard 29 CFR 1910.1200. 14. First Aid, Measures Eye Contact In case of contact, flush eyes with plenty of lukewarm water. Get medical attention if irritation develops. Skin Contact In case of skin contact, wash affected areas with soap and water. Inhalation If inhaled, remove to fresh air. Get medical attention if irritation develops. Ingestion If ingested, do not induce vomiting unless directed to do so by medical personnel. Get medical attention. 15. Fire- Fighting Measures Suitable Extinguishing Media: Material is not combustible. Use extinguishing media suitable for other combustible materials in the area. Special Fire Fighting Procedures Firefighters should be equipped with self - contained breathing apparatus to protect against potentially toxic and irritating fumes. 16. Accidental release measures Spill and Leak Procedures Spills should be swept up and placed in appropriate containers for disposal. Clean up promptly by scoop or vacuum. Avoid creating dusty conditions. 7. Handling and Storage Storage Period Unlimited in tightly closed containers. Handling/Storage Precautions Material Name: BAYOXIDE E 33 Article Number: 2653218 Page: 2 of 7 Report Version: 1.1 1 • Handle in accordance with good industrial hygiene and safety practices. Wash thoroughly after handling. Keep container closed when not in use. Avoid breathing dust. Further Info on Storage Conditions Material can be stored safely at ambient temperatures. 18. Exposure Controls / Personal Protection Country specific exposure limits have not been established or are not applicable Industrial HygieneNentilation Measures Under normal conditions of use, special ventilation is not required. Respiratory Protection Although no exposure limit has been established for this product, the OSHA PEL for Particulates Not Otherwise Regulated (PNOR) of 15 mg/m3 - total dust, 5 mg/m3 - respirable fraction is recommended. In addition, the ACGIH recommends 3 mg/m3 - respirable particles and 10 mg/m3 - inhalable particles for Particles (insoluble or poorly soluble) Not Otherwise Specified (PNOS)., The following respirator is recommended if airborne concentrations exceed the appropriate standard/guideline., NIOSH approved, air - purifying particulate respirator with N -95 filters. Eye Protection safety glasses. Skin and body protection No special skin protection requirements during normal handling and use. Additional Protective Measures Employees should wash their hands and face before eating, drinking, or using tobacco products. Educate and train employees in the safe use and handling of this product. 9. Physical and chemical properties Form: Appearance: Color: Odor: pH: Melting Point: Flash Point: Lower Explosion Limit: Upper Explosion Limit: Vapor Pressure: Specific Gravity: Solubility in Water: Autoignition Temperature: Viscosity, Dynamic: Bulk Density: solid Granules Brown Odorless 4 -8 @50g/1 Begins at 1,000 °C (1,832 °F) not applicable Not Established Not Established not applicable 4 -5 @20 °C(68 °F) Insoluble Not Applicable not applicable 300 - 1,000 kg/m3 10. Stability , and Reactivity Hazardous Reactions Material Name: BAYOXIDE E 33 Article Number: 2653218 Page: 3 of 7 Report Version: 1.1 • Hazardous polymerization does not occur. Stability Stable Conditions to avoid At temperatures greater than 356 F (180 C) the product will be converted to Fe203. 11. Toxicological Information Toxicity Data for BAYOXIDE E 33 Acute Oral Toxicity LD50: > 5,000 mg/kg (Rat) Skin Irritation rabbit, Non - irritating Eye Irritation rabbit, Non - irritating Toxicity Data for C.I. Pigment Yellow 42 Acute Oral Toxicity LD50: > 5,000 mg/kg (Rat) Skin Irritation rabbit, Non - irritating Eye Irritation rabbit, Non - irritating Carcinogenicity Rat, Male/Female, intraperitoneal, 8 w, ambiguous 112.;Ecological Information' Ecological Data for BAYOXIDE E 33 Acute and Prolonged Toxicity to Fish LCO: > 1,000 mg/I (Golden orfe (Leuciscus idus)) Toxicity to Microorganisms NOEC: > 1,000 mg/I, (Pseudomonas putida) Ecological Data for C.I. Pigment Yellow 42 Acute and Prolonged Toxicity to Fish EC50: > 1,000 mg/1 (Golden orfe (Leuciscus idus), 48 h) Toxicity to Microorganisms > 10,000 mg/1, (Pseudomonas putida) Material Name: BAYOXIDE E 33 1 Article Number: 2653218 Page: 4 of 7 Report Version: 1.1 • Article Number: 2653218 I 113. Disposal considerations Waste Disposal Method Waste disposal should be in accordance with existing federal, state and local environmental control laws. Empty Container Precautions Recondition or dispose of empty container in accordance with governmental regulations. 114. Transportation information Land transport (DOT) Non - Regulated Sea transport (IMDG) Non - Regulated Air transport (ICAO /IATA) Non - Regulated 115. Regulatory Information United States Federal Reeulations OSHA Hazcom Standard Rating: Non - Hazardous US. Toxic Substances Control Act: Listed on the TSCA Inventory. US. EPA CERCLA Hazardous Substances (40 CFR 302): Components None SARA Section 311/312 Hazard Categories: Non - hazardous under Section 311/312 US. EPA Emergency Planning and Community Right -To -Know Act ( EPCRA) SARA Title III Section 302 Extremely Hazardous Substance (40 CFR 355, Appendix A): Components None US. EPA Emergency Planning and Community Right -To -Know Act (EPCRA) SARA Title III Section 313 Toxic Chemicals (40 CFR 372.65) - Supplier Notification Required: Components None US. EPA Resource Conservation and Recovery Act (RCRA) Composite List of Hazardous Wastes and Appendix VIII Hazardous Constituents (40 CFR 261): If discarded in its purchased form, this product would not be a hazardous waste either by listing or by characteristic. However, under RCRA, it is the responsibility of the product user to determine at the time Material Name: BAYOXIDE E 33 Page: 5 of 7 Report Version: 1.1 • • of disposal, whether a material containing the product or derived from the product should be classified as a hazardous waste. (40 CFR 261.20 -24) State Right -To -Know Information The following chemicals are specifically listed by individual states; other product specific health and safety data in other sections of the MSDS may also be applicable for state requirements. For details on your regulatory requirements you should contact the appropriate agency in your state. Potential exposure to the California Proposition 65 chemicals in this product have been determined to be below the No Significant Risk Level (NSRL)., The concentrations reported below in units of parts per million (ppm) or parts per billion (ppb) are maximum values. Massachusetts, New Jersey or Pennsylvania Right to Know Substance Lists: Weight % Components CAS -No. 1 - 100% C.I. Pigment Yellow 42 20344 -49 -4 MA Right to Know Extraordinarily Hazardous Substance List: Weight % Components CAS -No. 25 ppm Arsenic 350 ppm Chromium 200 ppm Nickel (Ni) 7440-38-2 7440 -47 -3 7440 -02 -0 California Prop. 65: To the best of our knowledge, this product does not contain any of the listed chemicals, which the state of California has found to cause cancer, birth defects or other reproductive harm. 116.Other Information' NFPA 704M Ratin Health 1 Flammability 0 Reactivity 0 Other 0= Insignificant 1= Slight 2= Moderate 3 =High 4= Extreme HMIS Rating Health 1 Flammability 0 Physical Hazard 0 0= Minimal 1= Slight 2= Moderate 3= Serious 4= Severe * = Chronic Health Hazard LANXESS Corporation's method of hazard communication is comprised of Product Labels and Material Safety Data Sheets. HMIS and NFPA ratings are provided by LANXESS Corporation as a customer service. Contact Person: Product Safety Department Telephone: (800) LANXESS MSDS Number: 000000004623 Version Date: 04/01/2005 Report Version: 1.1 Material Name: BAYOXIDE E 33 Article Number: 2653218 Page: 6 of 7 Report Version: 1.1 • This information is furnished without warranty, express or implied. This information is believed to be accurate to the best knowledge of LANXESS Corporation. The information in this MSDS relates only to the specific material designated herein. LANXESS Corporation assumes no legal responsibility for use of or reliance upon the information in this MSDS. Material Name: BAYOXIDE E 33 Article Number: 2653218 Page: 7 of 7 Report Version: 1.1 • • • NSF International OFFICIAL LISTING NSF International Certifies that the products appearing on this Listing conform to the requirements of NSF /ANSI Standard 61 - Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects This is the Official Listing recorded on February 7, 2007. LANXESS AG RHE INUFERSTRAS SE 7 -9 BUILDING 54 KREFELD, 47812 GERMANY 49 2151 88 3790 Facility: KREFELD, GERMANY Process Media Water Water Contact Contact Trade Designation Size Temp Material Adsorption Bayoxide E33 .3 mm - 2 mm CLD 23 FEOH Bayoxide E33 HC .3 mm - 2 mm CLD 23 FEOH Bayoxide E33 HCF .1 mm - .5 mm CLD 23 FEOH Bayoxide E33 P .3 mm - 2 mm CLD 23 FEOH NOTE: Certified for water treatment plant applications. This product has not been evaluated for point of use applications. Note: Additions shall not be made to this document without prior evaluation and acceptance by NSF International. 1 of 1 769 N. Dixboro Road, Ann Arbor, Michigan 48105 -9723 USA 1 -8 -NSF -MARK 734- 769 -8010 www.nsforg OL760 • • Description Type De lively. Chemical •Class CAS -No. .: REACH registration no. Technical Oxide Granules Synthetic iron hydroxide a - FeOOH 51274 -d0-1 01- 2119457554 - 33-0000 Specification Technical Data Fe20,- Content [ %] Bulk Density [glare] Specific Surface Area [rift] water - soluble content [ %1 Moisture content (ex works) [ %1 Sieve analysis < 0.5 mm [9{,] Sieve Snalysis > 2.0 nun [ %] Trace elements Al [m9/k91 Ba [mg/kg] Co [g] Cr [9] Cu i 91 Mn [rrxikg] Ni [9l Pb [91 Zn [mg/kg] min 70 0.45 120 min 0.6 200 1.0 20 20 5.0 max 350 10 100 250 100 3000 300 3 100 Test method DIN 55913:1972 DIN EN ISO 787-11:1995 DIN 66131 :1993 DIN EN ISO 787 - 3:1995 DIN EN 1S0 787 -2:1995 Test method K006 -00 Test method K006 -00 Test methods Atomic specopy Atomic spectroscopy Atomic spectroscopy Atomic spectroscopy Atomic spectroscopy Atomic uroscopy Atomic spectroscopy Atomic spectroscopy Atomic spy Informative technical data (guide values) a - Fe0QH Content m Density Test method 99 information about the determination of inon'oxide" 4.0 DIN EN ISO 787 - 10:1995 • • • ADDENDUM NO. 1 FOR WTP NO. 1 IMPROVEMENTS - PRESSURE FILTER MODIFICATIONS AND ADSORPTION SYSTEM AUTOMATION PROJECT # 15- 0031 -UT DATE: March 28, 2017 SUBJECT: Clarifications TO: Prospective Bidders and Others Concerned Bidders on the above project are hereby notified the following Addenda are made clear to the Contract Documents: - Section 01025 — Measurement and Payment — ADD Bid Item No. 5 — Owner's Contingency to Section 01025 1.04 C.5 to read as follows: "5. Owner's Contingency (Bid Item No. 5): a. The work covered by this Bid Item consists of unforeseen items of work not included in other bid items but necessary for accomplishing the work and shall apply only to extra work or additional items over and above those specified or shown on the plans. The cost for unforeseen Utility Relocations will be paid for under a separate Pay Item. The cost of this additional work shall be agreed upon in writing and approved by the Owner or his authorized representative prior to starting this additional work. The value of the work shall be based on unit prices or similar bid items called for in the Proposal. b. Measurement: The quantities and cost of unspecified work to be paid under this item shall be agreed upon and approved in writing by the Owner or his authorized representative prior to starting this unspecified work. c. The bid price for this Bid Item shall be ten percent (10 %) of the total bid. This item will be treated as an allowance, against which the Owner, at his discretion, may direct work not shown on the plans, or require other additional work which falls within the general scope of work for the project, as approved in writing from the Owner. Each dollar of cost for • • • the additional work will be considered one unit. The final project change order shall include all additional costs approved under the contingency. This item is for contingency if required during the course of the project to facilitate the project, and will be paid only after written authorization to include the item in the progress payments." The revised Section 01025 — Measurement and Payment has been attached for reference. Section V — Contract Documents — ADD Bid Item No. 5 to the Bid Form on Page 14 of Section V — Contract Documents. The change reflects a 10% Contingency that should be applied to the subtotal of Bid Items No. 1— 4. The revised Bid Form has been attached for reference. All other specifications, drawings, terms and conditions remain the same. - Please remember to acknowledge receipt of this Addendum in Section V, Page 13 of 15 END OF ADDENDUM #1 THE CITY OF CLEARWATER PINELLAS COUNTY, FLORIDA By: /s/William B. Horne, 11 City Manager • • • SECTION 01025 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 1.01 GENERAL INFORMATION A. Refer to Section 01010 for a description of the work required for completion of the Work. B. Subject to the provisions in the Contract General Conditions, all work and payment for the work is represented by the Total Base Bid amount shown on the Bid Form. 1.02 PAYMENT A. Work under this contract will be paid for on a unit price basis as outlined on the Bid Form. The amount of payment will be as defined in the Standard Form of Agreement Between OWNER and Contractor, Article 5 of Payment Procedures. B. The prices shown on the Bid Form establish a total price cost for completing the Work in its entirety. Furnish all materials, equipment, transportation, tools, labor, services and supplies, plus any miscellaneous items and services that may not be specifically identified in the Contract Drawings and Specifications but that can be inferred from the Contract Drawings and Specifications and are necessary to produce a completed Work that is usable in a manner for which it was intended. If any items for a complete work are omitted or not shown, the Contractor shall furnish and install them without additional cost to the OWNER. No separate payment will be made for another Payment Item required to complete the work of a lump sum item. C. The Contractor shall prepare and submit an Application for Payment no more often than each month. D. Retainage shall apply to all Contractor payments prior to final acceptance as provided for in the Contract General Conditions. 1.03 MEASUREMENT FOR PAYMENT A. Measurement for Lump Sum bid items shall be based on the percent of actual completion as determined by the Contractor and agreed upon by the ENGINEER. B. Measurement of volumes shall be the actual "as- built" volume pertinent to payment items. Quantities on the Bid Form are estimated and may be increased or decreased without limit. 01025 -1 052316 • • • 1.04 PAYMENT ITEMS A. Separate payment will be made for the Unit Price and Lump Sum Items listed on the Bid Form. Related work not specifically listed or identified, but evidently necessary for satisfactory completion of the Item, shall be considered to be included. B. No separate payment will be made for the following Work and its cost shall be included in appropriate Payment Items: 1. Maintenance and replacement of plantings and sodding. 2. Record drawings. 3. Construction photographs and videotape recordings. 4. Field office(s) and storage facilities. 5. Clean up. 6. Testing materials and apparatus. 7. Appurtenant work. 8. Contractor fees associated with the performance of the Work. 9. Night work. C. The following will clarify the work included for bid items in the Pay Item Sheet: 1. Mobilization and Demobilization (Bid Item No. 1): a. Measurement of various items for Mobilization and Demobilization will not be made for payment and all items shall be included in the lump sum price. b. Payment for Mobilization and Demobilization will be made at the Contract lump sum price for the item, which price and payment shall be full compensation for the preparatory work and operations in mobilizing for beginning work on the Project and demobilizing for ending work on the Project. The establishment of field offices, buildings, safety equipment, first aid supplies, sanitary and other facilities, as required by these Specifications, State and local laws and any other preconstruction expense necessary for the state of the Work; the cost of field engineering, including disposal of cleared and grubbed material and debris, permits and fees, construction schedules, preconstruction video and photographs, project signs, shop drawings, temporary facilities, lay down storage area, construction aids, erosion control, work associated with Contractor support during Owner /Engineer testing, reviews and inspection, re- inspection and any rework resulting from same, cleaning, project 01025 -2 052316 • • • records documents, operating and maintenance data. The Contractor shall submit invoices substantiating the cost of mobilization with each pay request. Ten percent of the cost for mobilization and demobilization will be withheld. until acceptance and final payment. Contractor is responsible for securing a site for storage of materials and equipment and all other construction needs and providing security for this site and its contents. 2. General Requirements (Bid Item No. 2): a. Measurement for various items covered under General Requirements will not be made for payment, and all items shall be included in the lump sum price. b. Payment for General Requirements shall include all Insurance requirements costs, the costs of all bonds, and all administrative costs associated with acquiring and maintaining the necessary coverage as described in the Contract Documents. This item will be paid upon each payment request made by the Contractor. The Contractor shall attach with the payment request invoices to substantiate that appropriate insurance and bonds have been obtained by the Contractor. Payment will be based on percentage of work completed during the pay period at time of pay application to the nearest 10% complete. The cumulative total shall not exceed the Lump Sum Bid Pay Item Amount. 3. Indemnification (Bid Item No. 3): a. In consideration of the Contractor's indemnity agreement as set out in the Contract Documents, the OWNER specifically agrees to give the Contractor a minimum of $1,000.00 and other good and valuable consideration, receipt of which is acknowledged upon signing of the Agreement. 4. All other work not included in line items 1, 2, and 3 to construct the WTP No. 1 Improvements (Bid Item No. 4): a. Measurement of various items not included in other bid items to construct the WTP No. 1 Improvements will not be made for payment and all items shall be included in the lump sum price. b. Payment for these items will include all materials, equipment, and work required to complete the project as shown on or inferred by the Contract Documents and will be made at the contract lump sum. Contractor shall provide line item breakdown of specific work and associated costs in the Schedule of Values. 01025 -3 052316 • • • 5. Owner's Contingency (Bid Item No. 5): a. The work covered by this Bid Item consists of unforeseen items of work not included in other bid items but necessary for accomplishing the work and shall apply only to extra work or additional items over and above those specified or shown on the plans. The cost for unforeseen Utility Relocations will be paid for under a separate Pay Item. The cost of this additional work shall be agreed upon in writing and approved by the Owner or his authorized representative prior to starting this additional work. The value of the work shall be based on unit prices or similar bid items called for in the Proposal. b. Measurement: The quantities and cost of unspecified work to be paid under this item shall be agreed upon and approved in writing by the Owner or his authorized representative prior to starting this unspecified work. c. The bid price for this Bid Item shall be ten percent (10 %) of the total bid. This item will be treated as an allowance, against which the Owner, at his discretion, may direct work not shown on the plans, or require other additional work which falls within the general scope of work for the project, as approved in writing from the Owner. Each dollar of cost for the additional work will be considered one unit. The final project change order shall include all additional costs approved under the contingency. This item is for contingency if required during the course of the project to facilitate the project, and will be paid only after written authorization to include the item in the progress payments. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 01025 -4 052316 • • • SECTION V — Contract Documents BIDDER'S PROPOSAL PROJECT: PROJECT: WTP No. 1 Improvements — Pressure Filter Modifications and Adsorption System Automation (15- 0031 -UT) CONTRACTOR: BIDDER'S GRAND TOTAL: $ (Numbers) BIDDER'S GRAND TOTAL: (Words) ITEM DESCRIPTION ESTIMATED UNIT UNIT AMOUNT QUANTITY PRICE 1 Mobilization and Demobilization 1 LS $ $ 2 General Requirements 1 LS $ $ 3 Indemnification 1 LS $1,000 $1,000 4 All Other Work Not Included in Line Items 1, 2, and 3 to Construct the WTP No. 1 Improvements 1 LS $ $ SUBTOTAL $ 5 Contingency (10 %) 1 LS $ $ GRAND TOTAL $ THE BIDDER'S GRAND TOTAL ABOVE IS HIS TOTAL BID BASED ON HIS UNIT PRICES AND LUMP SUM PRICES AND THE ESTIMATED QUANTITIES REQUIRED FOR EACH SECTION. THIS FIGURE IS FOR INFORMATION ONLY AT THE TIME OF OPENING BIDS. THE CITY WILL MAKE THE TABULATION FROM THE UNIT PRICES AND LUMP SUM PRICE BID. IF THERE IS AN ERROR IN THE TOTAL BY THE BIDDER, IT SHALL BE CHANGED AS ONLY THE UNIT PRICES AND LUMP SUM PRICE SHALL GOVERN. SECTION V Page 14 of 15 Updated: 2/6/2017 • • • SECTION V CONTRACT DOCUMENTS Table of Contents PUBLIC CONSTRUCTION BOND 1 CONTRACT 3 CONSENT OF SURETY TO FINAL PAYMENT 7 PROPOSAL /BID BOND 8 AFFIDAVIT 9 NON COLLUSION AFFIDAVIT 10 PROPOSAL 11 CITY OF CLEARWATER ADDENDUM SHEET 13 BIDDER'S PROPOSAL 14 SCRUTINIZED COMPANIES AND BUSINESS OPERATIONS WITH CUBA AND SYRIA CERTIFICATION FORM 15 SECTION V Page i Updated: 2/6/2017 • • • Bond No.: 54- 217225 PUBLIC CONSTRUCTION BOND (1) Executed in 3 Counterparts This bond is given to comply with § 255.05, Florida Statutes, and any action instituted by a claimant under this bond for payment must be in accordance with the notice and time limitation provisions in subsections (2) and (10). Pursuant to § 255,05(1Xb), Florida Statutes, "Before commencing the work or before recommencing the work after a default or abandonment, the contractor shall provide to the public entity a certified cony of the recorded bond. Notwithstanding the terms of the contract or any other law governing prompt payment for construction services, the public entity may not make a payment to the contractor until the contractor has complied with this paragraph." CONTRACTOR SURETY [RTD Construction, Inc.] [name] United Fire & Casualty Company PO Box 73909, Cedar Rapids, IA 52407 -3909 [P 0 Box 2439, Zephyrhills,FL [principal business mess] 33539] (319) 399-5700 [phone number] [813- 783 -9119 OWNER City of Clearwater [Engineering Dept] 100 S. Myrtle Avenue Clearwater, FL 33756 (727) 562- [4750] PROJECT NAME:WTP No. 1 Improvements - Pressure Filter Modifications & Absorption System Automation, Clearwater, FL PROJECT NO.: [15- 0031 -UT] PROJECT DESCRIPTION: The project includes improvements to automate the arsenic absorber backwash process and make improvements to the dual media filter systems. ] BY THIS BOND, We, RTD Construction, Inc. , as Contractor, and. United Fire & Casualty Company , a corporation, as Surety, are bound to the City of Clearwater, Florida, herein called Owner, in the sum of $[430,076.00], for payment of which we bind ourselves, our heirs, personal representatives, successors, and assigns, jointly and severally. THE CONDITION OF THIS BOND is that if Contractor: 1. Performs the contract dated J^(,,.. 10:1;e 1f1 , between Contractor and Owner for construction of ['TP No. 1 Improvements — Pressure Filter Moclfflcations cfc Absorption System Automation], the contract documents being made a part of this bond by reference (which include the Advertisement for Bids, Proposal, Contract, Surety Bond, Instructions to Bidders, General Conditions, Plans, Technical Specifications and Appendix, and such alterations as may be made in said Plans and Specifications as therein provided for), at the times and in the manner prescribed in the contract; and 2. Promptly makes payments to all claimants, as defined in Section 255.05(1), Florida Statutes, supplying Contractor with labor, materials, or supplies, used directly or indirectly by Contractor in the prosecution of the work provided for in the contract; and SECTION V Page 1 of 15 Updated: 2/6/2017 • • • Bond No.: 54- 217225 PUBLIC CONSTRUCTION BOND (2) 3. Pays Owner all losses, damages, expenses, costs, and attorney's fees, including appellate proceedings, that Owner sustains because of a default by Contractor under the contract; and 4. To the limits of § 725.06(2), Florida. Statutes, shall indemnify and hold harmless Owner, their officers and employees, from liabilities, damages, losses and costs, including, but not limited to, reasonable attorney's fees, to the extent caused by the negligence, recklessness, or intentional wrongful misconduct of Contractor and persons employed or utilized by Contractor in the performance of the construction contract; and 5. Performs the guarantee of all work and materials furnished under the contract for the time specified in the contract, then this bond is void; otherwise it remains in full force. 6. Any action instituted by a claimant under this bond for payment must be in accordance with the notice and time limitation provisions in Section 255.05(2), Florida Statutes. 7. Any changes in or under the contract documents and compliance or noncompliance with any formalities connected with the contract or the changes does not affect Surety's obligation under this bond, and Surety does hereby waive notice of any such change, extension of time, alteration or addition to the terms of the contract or to the work or to the specifications. IN TESTIMONY WHEREOF, witness the hands and seals of the parties hereto this IV1 A\I , 2017. (If sole Ownership or Partnership, two (2) Witnesses required). (If Corporation, Secretary only will attest and affix seal). o • i rat ,Secretary or Witness • ••• Rrint lNatine: ."--Julie Jordan CI (aff xtga• jip'a�atelseal) SECTION V [RTD Cons By: Title: Print Name: WI ES& Print Name: ctio J � President Dannie E. Jordan _ day of United Fire & Casualty Company (Corpora„ Surety) By: ATTORNEY -IN -FACT & FL Licensed? Print Name: Gloria A. Richards *Inquiries (407) 786 -7770 (affix corporate seal) (Power ofAttorney must be attached) Page 2 of 15 Updated: 2/6/2017 ufg UNITED FIRE & CASUALTY COMPANY, CEDAR RAPIDS IA UNITED FIRE R. INDEMNITY COMPANY, W EBSTER, TX FINANCIAL PACIFIC INSURANCE COMPANY, ROCKLIN, CA CERTIFIED COPY OF POWER OF ATTORNEY (original ott file at Home Office of Company — See Certification) ". KNOW ALL PERSONS BY THESE PRESENTS, That UNITED FIRE &. CASUALTY COMPANY, a corporation duly organized and existing under the laws of the State of Iowa; UNPTED FIRE & INDEMNITY COMPANY, a corporation duly organized and existing under the laws of the State of' ilk Texas; and FINANCIAL PACIFIC INSURANCE COMPANY, a corporation duly organized and existing under the laws of the State of California ler (herein collectively called the Companies), and having their corporate headquarters in Cedar Rapids State of Iowa, does make constitute and appoint KIM E. NIV, JEFFREY W. REICH, SUSAN L. REICH, TERESA L. DURHAM, GLORIA A. RICHARD]S, DON BRAMLAGE, LISA ROSELAND, CHERYL FOLEY, GLENN ARVANITIS, SONJA AMANDA FLOREE HARRIS, EACH INDIVIDUALLY of MAITLAND FL Inquiries: Surety Department 118 Second Ave SE Cedar Rapids, IA 52401 their true and lawfitl Attorneys) -in -Fact with power and authority hereby conferred to sign, seal and execute in its behalf all lawful bonds, undertakings and other obligatory instruments of similar nature provided that no single obligation shall exceed $100, 000, 000.00 and to bind the Companies thereby as fully and to the saute extent as if such instruments were signed by the duly authorized officers of the Companies and all of the acts of said Attorney, pursuant to the authority hereby given and hereby ratified and confirmed. The Authority hereby granted is continuous and shall remain inn fitll force and effect until revoked by UNITED FIRE & CASUALTY COMPANY, UNITED FIRE & INDEMNITY COMPANY, AND FINANCIAL PACIFIC INSURANCE COMPANY. This Power of Attorney is made and executed pursuant to and by authority of the following bylaw duly adopted on May 15, 2013, by the Boards of Directors of UNITED FIRE & CASUALTY COMPANY, UNITED FIRE & INDEMNITY COMPANY, and FINANCIAL PACIFIC INSURANCE COMPANY. "Article VI — Surety Bonds and Undertakings" Section 2, Appointtnent of Attorney -in- Fact. "The President or any Vice President, or any other officer of the Companies may, from time to time, appoint by written certificates attorneys -in -fact to act in behalf of the Companies in the execution of policies of insurance, bonds, undertakings and other obligatory instruments of like nature. The signature of any officer authorized hereby, and the Corporate seal, may be affixed by facsimile to any power of attorney or special power of attorney or certification of either authorized hereby; such signature and seal, when so used, being adopted by the Companies as the original signature of such officer and the original seal of talc Companies, to be valid and binding upon the Companies with the saute force and effect as though manually affixed. Such attorneys -in -fact, subject to the limitations set forth in their respective certificates of authority shall have Rill power to bind the Companies by their signature and execution of any such instnnnents and to attach the seat of the Companies thereto. The President or any Vice President, the Board of Directors or any other officer of the Companies may at any time revoke all power and authority previously given to any attorney-in-fact. �„0�� "0at,v,,,,, IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the COMPANIES have each caused these presents to be signed by its 'c.,\F.`•Rpa"'4q. c vice president and its corporate seal to be hereto affixed this 11th day of October , 2013 . `o 2 .0 UNITED FIRE & CASUALTY COMPANY ;a Iversr 0.-. ° o= UNITED COMPANY UNITED FIRE & INDEMNITY COMPANY -,-'c9tifotk4 fi= FINANCIAL PACIFIC INSURANCE COMPANY By: n State of Towa County of Linn, ss: ice President On 11th day of October, 2013, before me personally came Dennis J. Richmann to me known, who being by me duly sworn, did depose and say; that he resides in Cedar Rapids, State of Iowa; that he is a Vice President of UNITED: FIRE & CASUALTY COMPANY, a Vice President of UNITED FIRE& INDEMNITY COMPANY, and a Vice President of FINANCIAL PACIFIC INSURANCE COMPANY the corporations described in and which executed the above instnunent; that he knows the seal of said corporations; that the seal affixed to the said instrument is such corporate seal; that it was so affixed pursuant to authority given by the Board of Directors of said corporations and that he signed his name thereto pursuant to like authority, and acknowledges some to be the act and deed of said corporations. Judith A. Davis Iowa Notarial Seat Commission number 173041 My Commission Expires 04123/2018 Notary Public My cottunission expires: 04/23/2018' I, David A. Lange, Secretary of UNITED FIRE & CASUALTY COMPANY and Assistant Secretary of 1TED FIRE & INDEMNITY COMPANY, and Assistant Secretary of FINANCIAL PACIFIC INSURANCE COMPANY, do hereby certify that T have compared the foregoing copy of the Power of Attorney and affidavit, and, the copy of the Section of the bylaws and resolutions of said Corporations as set forth in said Power of Attorney, with the ORIGINALS ON FILE IN THE HOME OFFICE OF SAID CORPORATIONS, and that the same are correct transcripts thereof, and of the whole of the said originals, and that the said Power of Attorney has not been revoked and is now in fiu[l force and effect. In testimony whereof I have hereunto subscribed my name and affixed the corporate seal of the said Corporations ,2U this day of BP0A0049 0115 Secretary, UF&C Assistant Secretary, OF &UFPIC FLORIDA SURETY BONDS, INC. • • • May 5, 2017 City of Clearwater, Florida 100 S. Myrtle Avenue Clearwater, FL 33756 620 N. Wymore Road, Suite 200 Maitland, FL 32751 407- 786 -7770 Fax 407 - 786 -7766 1326 S. Ridgewood Avenue, Suite #15 Daytona Beach, FL 32114 386 - 898 -0507 Fax 386 - 898 -0510 888 - 786 -BOND (2663) Fax 888 - 718 -BOND (2663) www. FloridaSuretyBonds.com RE: AUTHORITY TO DATE BONDS AND POWERS OF ATTORNEY Principal: RTD Construction, Inc. Bond No: 54- 217225 Project: Proj. No. 15- 0031 -UT, WTP No. 1 Improvements - Pressure Filter Modifications and Absorption System Automation Dear Sir or Madam: Please be advised that as Surety on the above referenced bond, executed on your behalf for this project, we hereby authorize you to insert the contract date onto the contract bonds and powers of attorney. Once dated, please email to me at Iisa @floridasuretybonds.com or fax a copy of the bonds to our office at (407) 786 -7766. Sincerely, United Fire & Casualty Company 9�x�.l+xanc� Gloria A. Richards Attorney -In -Fact and FL Licensed Resident Agent • • • CONTRACT (1) This CONTRACT made and entered into this itl day of ✓1 , 20 )% by and between the City of Clearwater, Florida, a municipal corporation, hereina er designated as the "City ", and , of the City of County of and State of Florida, hereinafter designated as the "Contractor ". [Or, if out of state:] This CONTRACT made and entered into of Clearwater, Florida, a municipal business State of Florida, and State WITNESSETH: this _ day of , 20 by and between the City corporation, hereinafter designated as the "City ", and , a/an; (State) Corporation authorized to do of the City of County of of , hereinafter designated as the "Contractor". That the parties to this contract each in consideration of the undertakings, promises and agreements on the part of the other herein contained, do hereby undertake, promise and agree as follows: The Contractor, and his or its successors, assigns, executors or administrators, in consideration of the sums of money as herein after set forth to be paid by the City and to the Contractor, shall and will at their own cost and expense perform all labor, furnish all materials, tools and equipment for the following: PROJECT NAME: [WTP No. 1 Improvements - Pressure Filter Modifications & Absorption System Automation] PROJECT NO.: [ 15- 0031 -UT] in the amount of $ 430,076.00 In accordance with such proposal and technical supplemental specifications and such other special provisions and drawings, if any, which will be submitted by the City, together with any advertisement, instructions to bidders, general conditions, technical specifications, proposal and bond, which may be hereto attached, and any drawings if any, which may be herein referred to, are hereby made a part of this contract, and all of said work to be performed and completed by the contractor and its successors and assigns shall be fully completed in a good and workmanlike manner to the satisfaction of the City. If the Contractor should fail to comply with any of the terms, conditions, provisions or stipulations as contained herein within the time specified for completion of the work to be performed by the Contractor, then the City, may at its option, avail itself of any or all remedies provided on its behalf and shall have the right to proceed to complete such work as Contractor is obligated to perform in accordance with the provisions as contained herein. SECTION V Page 3 of 15 Updated: 2/6/2017 CONTRACT (2) • THE CONTRACTOR AND HIS OR ITS SUCCESSORS AND ASSIGNS DOES HEREBY AGREE TO ASSUME THE DEFENSE OF ANY LEGAL ACTION WHICH MAY BE BROUGHT AGAINST THE CITY AS A RESULT OF THE CONTRACTOR'S ACTIVITIES ARISING OUT OF THIS CONTRACT AND FURTHERMORE, IN CONSIDERATION OF THE TERMS, STIPULATIONS AND CONDITIONS AS CONTAINED HEREIN, AGREES TO HOLD THE CITY FREE AND HARMLESS FROM ANY AND ALL CLAIMS FOR DAMAGES, COSTS OF SUITS, JUDGMENTS OR DECREES RESULTING FROM ANY CLAIMS MADE UNDER THIS CONTRACT AGAINST THE CITY OR THE CONTRACTOR OR THE CONTRACTOR'S SUB CONTRACTORS, AGENTS, SERVANTS OR EMPLOYEES RESULTING FROM ACTIVITIES BY THE AFOREMENTIONED CONTRACTOR, SUB CONTRACTOR, AGENT SERVANTS OR EMPLOYEES, TO THE LIMITS OF § 725.06(2). • • In addition to the foregoing provisions, the Contractor agrees to conform to the following requirements: In connection with the performance of work under this contract, the Contractor agrees not to discriminate against any employee or applicant for employment because of race, sex, religion, color, or national origin. The aforesaid provision shall include, but not be limited to, the following: employment, upgrading, demotion, or transfer; recruitment or recruitment advertising; lay off or termination; rates of pay or other forms of compensation; and selection for training, including apprenticeship. The Contractor agrees to post hereafter in conspicuous places, available for employees or applicants for employment, notices to be provided by the contracting officer setting forth the provisions of the non discrimination clause. The Contractor further agrees to insert the foregoing provisions in all contracts hereunder, including contracts or agreements with labor unions and/or worker's representatives, except sub contractors for standard commercial supplies or raw materials. It is mutually agreed between the parties hereto that time is of the essence of this contract, and in the event that the work to be performed by the Contractor is not completed within the time stipulated herein, it is then further agreed that the City may deduct from such sums or compensation as may be due to the Contractor the sum of $1,000.00 per day for each day that the work to be performed by the Contractor remains incomplete beyond the time limit specified herein, which sum of $1,000.00 per day shall only and solely represent damages which the City has sustained by reason of the failure of the Contractor to complete the work within the time stipulated, it being further agreed that this sum is not to be construed as a penalty but is only to be construed as liquidated damages for failure of the Contractor to complete and perform all work within the time period as specified in this contract. It is further mutually agreed between the City and the Contractor that if, any time after the execution of this contract and the public construction bond which is attached hereto for the faithful performance of the terms and conditions as contained herein by the Contractor, that the City shall at any time deem the surety or sureties upon such public construction bond to be unsatisfactory or if, for any reason, the said bond ceases to be adequate in amount to cover the performance of the work the Contractor shall, at his or its own expense, within ten (10) days after receipt of written notice from the City to do so, furnish an additional bond or bonds in such term and amounts and with such surety or sureties as shall be satisfactory to the City. If such an event occurs, no further payment shall be made to the Contractor under the terms and provisions of this contract until such new or additional security bond guaranteeing the faithful performance of the work under the terms hereof shall be completed and furnished to the City in a form satisfactory to it. SECTION V Page 4 of 15 Updated: 2/6/2017 CONTRACT (3) • In addition to all other contract requirements as provided by law, the contractor executing this agreement agrees to comply with public records law. • • IF THE CONTRACTOR HAS QUESTIONS REGARDING THE APPLICATION OF CHAPTER 119, FLORIDA STATUTES, THE CONTRACTORS DUTY TO PROVIDE PUBLIC RECORDS RELATING TO THIS CONTRACT. CONTACT THE CUSTODIAN OF PUBLIC RECORDS AT 727 -562 -4092, Rosemarie .Call @myclearwater.com, 112 S. Osceola Ave., Clearwater, FL 33756 The contractor's agreement to comply with public records law applies specifically to: a) Keep and maintain public records required by the City of Clearwater (hereinafter "public agency ") to perform the service being provided by the contractor hereunder. b) Upon request from the public agency's custodian of public records, provide the public agency with a copy of the requested records or allow the records to be inspected or copied within a reasonable time at a cost that does not exceed the cost provided for in Chapter 119, Florida Statutes, as may be amended from time to time, or as otherwise provided by law. c) Ensure that the public records that are exempt or confidential and exempt from public records disclosure requirements are not disclosed except as authorized by law for the duration of the contract term and following completion of the contract if the contractor does not transfer the records to the public agency. d) Upon completion of the contract , transfer, at no cost, to the public agency all public records in possession of the contractor or keep and maintain public records required by the public agency to perform the service. If the contractor transfers all public records to the public agency upon completion of the contract, the contractor shall destroy any duplicate public records that are exempt or confidential and exempt from public records disclosure requirements. If the contractor keeps and maintains public records upon completion of the contract, the contractor shall meet all applicable requirements for retaining public records. All records stored electronically must be provided to the public agency, upon request from the public agency's custodian of public records, in a format that is compatible with the information technology systems of the public agency. e) A request to inspect or copy public records relating to a public agency's contract for services must be made directly to the public agency. If the public agency does not possess the requested records, the public agency shall immediately notify the contractor of the request and the contractor must provide the records to the public agency or allow the records to be inspected or copied within a reasonable time. f) The contractor hereby acknowledges and agrees that if the contractor does not comply with the public agency's request for records, the public agency shall enforce the contract provisions in accordance with the contract. g) A contractor who fails to provide the public records to the public agency within a reasonable time may be subject to penalties under Section 119.10, Florida Statutes. h) If a civil action is filed against a contractor to compel production of public records relating to a public agency's contract for services, the court shall assess and award against the contractor the reasonable costs of enforcement, including reasonable attorney fees, if: SECTION V Page 5 of 15 Updated: 2/6/2017 • • • CONTRACT (4) 1. The court determines that the contractor unlawfully refused to comply with the public records request within a reasonable time; and 2. At least 8 business days before filing the action, the plaintiff provided written notice of the public records request, including a statement that the contractor has not complied with the request, to the public agency and to the contractor. i) A notice complies with subparagraph (h)2. if it is sent to the public agency's custodian of public records and to the contractor at the contractor's address listed on its contract with the public agency or to the contractor's registered agent. Such notices must be sent by common carrier delivery service or by registered, Global Express Guaranteed, or certified mail, with postage or shipping paid by the sender and with evidence of delivery, which may be in an electronic format. A contractor who complies with a public records request within 8 business days after the notice is sent is not liable for the reasonable costs of enforcement. J) IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties to the agreement have hereunto set their hands and seals and have executed this Agreement, the day and year first above written. CITY OF CLEARWATER IN PINELLAS COUNTY, FLORIDA By: WkWAA44 /4i. William B. Horne, II City Manager Countersigned: `keo \e4Cr (,\C)fQ5 By: Appro Attest: Rosemarie Call City Clerk George N. Cretekos, Mayor C ntractor must indicate whether: Corporation, Partnership, 41( Matt hew M. Sm. ', Assistant City A orney Company, or (Contractor) rn • By: 1 ■ Print Netfrilf: Title: VT-t" Individual i ` »SEAL) The person signing shall, in his own handwriting, sign the Principal's name, his own name, and his title; where the person is signing for a Corporation, he must, by Affidavit, show his authority to bind the Corporation — provide Affidavit. SECTION V Page 6 of 15 Updated: 2/6/2017 • • • CONSENT OF SURETY TO FINAL PAYMENT TO OWNER: City of Clearwater [Engineering Dept.] 100 S. Myrtle Ave. Clearwater, FL 33756 PROJECT NAME: [WTP No. 1 Improvements Pressure Filter Modifications & Absorption System Automation Project]' PROJECT NO.: [15- 0031 -UT] CONTRACT DATE: [ ';, 1 BOND NO. : [ ], recorded in O.R. Book [ Page [ 1, of the Public Records of Pinellas County, Florida. CONTRACTOR: [RTD Construction, Inc.] Pursuant to § 255.05(11), Florida Statutes, and in accordance with the provisions of the Contract between the Owner and the Contractor as indicated above, the: ,SURETY, [insert name ©f Surety] [address] [address] on bond of [RTD Construction, Inc. ] [P.O. Box 2439] [Zephyrhills, FL 33539] ,CONTRACTOR, hereby approves of the final payment to the Contractor, and agrees that final payment to the Contractor shall not relieve Surety of any of its obligations to City of Clearwater [Engineering Dept. ] 100 S. Myrtle Ave. Clearwater, FL 33756 as set forth in said Surety's bond. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the Surety has hereunto set its hand this day of Attest: (Seal): SECTION V ,OWNER, (Surety) (Signature of authorized representative) (Printed name and title) Page 7 of 15 Updated: 2/6/2017 SECTION V — Contract Documents • PROPOSAL /BID BOND (Not to be filled out if a certified check is submitted) KNOWN ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: That we, the undersigned, RTD Construction, Inc. 38038 North Avenue, Zephyrhills, FL 33542 as Contractor, and United Fire & Casualty Company, as Surety, whose address is PO Box 73909, Cedar Rapids, IA 52407 -3909 , are held and firmly bound unto the City of Clearwater, Florida, in the sum of -4 4het4i k 4 a CLn��°fk-� Dollars ($ 431(90 e .0(9 ) (being a minimum of 10% o Contractor's total bid amount) for the payment of which, well and truly to be made, we hereby jointly and severally bind ourselves, our heirs, executors, administrators, successors and assigns. The condition of the above obligation is such that if the attached Proposal of RTD Construction, Inc. as Contractor, and United Fire & Casualty Company as Surety, for work specified as: #15- 0031 -UT: WTP No. 1 Improvements- Pressure Filter Modifications and Absorption System Automation, 1657 Palmetto Street, Clearwater, FL all as stipulated in said Proposal, by doing all work incidental thereto, in accordance with the plans and specifications provided herefor, all within Pinellas County, is accepted and the contract awarded to the above named bidder, and the said bidder shall within ten days after notice of said award enter into a contract, in writing, and furnish the required Public Construction Bond with surety or sureties to be approved by the City Manager, this obligation shall be void, otherwise the same shall be in full force and virtue by law and the full amount of this Proposal/Bid Bond will be paid to the City as stipulated or liquidated damages. Principal must indicate whether: Corporation, Partnership, Company, or lndiidual • Signed this 6th day of April 17 RTD Construction, in ; • Principal By: rP S/ 1C,7i Title United Fire & Casualty Company Surety Teresa L. Durham, Attorney -In -Fact & Flr'Licensed' Resident Agent The person signing shall, in his own handwriting, sign the Principal's name, his own name, and his title,' where the person is signing for a Corporation, he must, by Affidavit, show his authority to bind the Corporation - provide Affidavit. SECTION V Page 8 of 15 Updated: 2/6/2017 UNITED FIRE & CASUALTY COMPANY, CEDAR RAPIDS, IA ft/ UNITED FIRE & INDEMNITY COMPANY, WEBSTER, TX FINANCIAL PACIFIC INSURANCE COMPANY, ROCKLIN, CA CERTIFIED COPY OF POWER OF ATTORNEY on file at Home Office of Company — See Certification) KNOW ALL PERSONS BY THESE PRESENTS, That UNITED FIRE & CASUALTY COMPANY, a corporation duly organized and existing under the laws of the State of Iowa; UNITED FIRE & INDEMNITY COMPANY, a corporation duly organized and existing under the laws of the State of Texas; and FINANCIAL PACIFIC INSURANCE COMPANY, a corporation duly organized and existing under the laws of the State of California iiein collectively called the Companies), and having their corporate headquarters in Cedar Rapids, State of Iowa, does make, constitute and appoint M E NIV OR JEFFREY W REICH, OR SUSAN L REICH, OR TERESA L DURHAM, OR GLORIA A RICHARDS, OR DON BRAMLAGE, OR LISA ROSELAND, OR CHERYL F R C OLEY „ORGLENN ARVANITIS, OR SONJA AMANDA FLOREE HARRIS, ALL INDIVIDUALLY of MAITLAND FL Inquiries: Surety Department 118 Second Ave SE Cedar Rapids, IA 52401 their true and lawful Attorneys) -in -Fact with power and authority hereby conferred to sign, seal and execute in its behalf all lawful bonds, undertakings and other obligatory instruments of similar nature provided that no single obligation shall exceed $35,000,000.00 and to bind the Companies thereby as fully and to the same extent as if such instruments were signed by the duly authorized officers of the Companies and all of the acts of said Attorney, pursuant to the authority hereby given and hereby ratified and confirmed. The Authority hereby granted is continuous and shall remain in full force and effect until revoked by UNITED FIRE & CASUALTY COMPANY, UNITED FIRE & INDEMNITY COMPANY, AND FINANCIAL PACIFIC INSURANCE COMPANY. This Power of Attorney is made and executed pursuant to and by authority of the following bylaw duly adopted on May 15, 2013, by the Boards of. Directors of UNITED FIRE & CASUALTY COMPANY, UNITED FIRE & INDEMNITY COMPANY, and FINANCIAL PACIFIC INSURANCE COMPANY. "Article VI — Surety Bonds and Undertakings" Section 2, Appointment of Attorney -in -Fact. "The President or any Vice President, or any other officer of the Companies may, from time to time, appoint by written certificates attorneys -in -fact to act in behalf of the Companies in the execution of' policies of insurance, bonds, undertakings and other obligatory instruments of' like nature. The signature of any officer authorized hereby, and the Corporate seal, may be affixed by facsimile to any power of attorney or special power of attorney or certification of either authorized hereby; such signature and seal, when so used, being adopted by the Companies as the original signature of such officer and the original seal of the Companies, to be valid and binding upon the Companies with the same force and effect as though manually affixed. Such attorneys -in -fact, subject to the limitations set forth in their respective certificates of authority shall have full power to bind the Companies by their signature and execution of any such instruments and to attach the seal of the Companies thereto. The President or any Vice President, the Board of Directors or any other officer of the Companies may at any time revoke all power and authority previously given to any attorney -in -fact. dmugt c �NSU' "' IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the COMPANIES have each caused these presents to be signed by its ,.QPGGOPQOl y vice president and its corporate seal to be hereto affixed this 11t h day of October , 2013 Q'2 oLY2 OiO °_ c 41. 1966 y b '/ , \Ps ; ter, /FOP, '''�nnannm�m" °o State of Iowa, County of Linn, ss: By: UNITED FIRE & CASUALTY COMPANY UNITED FIRE & INDEMNITY COMPANY FINANCIAL PACIFIC INSURANCE COMPANY On 11tri day of October, 2013, before me personally came Dennis J. Richmann to me known, who being by me duly sworn, did depose and say; that he resides in Cedar Rapids, State of Iowa; that he is a Vice President of UNITED FIRE & CASUALTY COMPANY, a Vice President of UNITED FIRE & INDEMNITY COMPANY, and a Vice President of FINANCIAL PACIFIC INSURANCE COMPANY the corporations described in and which executed the above instrument; that he knows the seal of said corporations; that the seal affixed to the said instrument is such corporate seal; that it was so affixed pursuant to authority given by the Board of Directors of said corporations and that he signed his name thereto pursuant to like authority, and acknowledges same to be the act and deed of said corporations. Vice President Judith A'. Davis Iowa Notarial Seal Commission number 173041 My Commission Expires 04/23/2018 Notary Public My commission expires: 04/23/2018 I, David A. Lange, Secretary of UNITED FIRE & CASUALTY COMPANY and Assistant Secretary of ITED FIRE & INDEMNITY COMPANY, and Assistant Secretary of FINANCIAL PACIFIC INSURANCE `COMPANY, do hereby certify that I have compared the foregoing copy of the Power of Attorney and affidavit, and the copy of the Section of the bylaws and resolutions of said Corporations as set forth in said Power of Attorney, with the ORIGINALS ON FILE IN THE HOME OFFICE OF SAID CORPORATIONS, and that the same are correct transcripts thereof, and of the whole of the said originals, and that the said Power of Attorney has not been revoked and is now in full force and effect. In testimony whereof I have hereunto subscribed my name and affixed the corporate seal of the said Corporations this (o+h day of (P✓, l , 201 ] . CORPORAM tE SEAL Secretary, OF &C Assistant Secretary, OF &I /FPIC SECTION V — Contract Documents AFFIDAVIT • (To be filled in and executed if the bidder is a corporation) • • STATE OF FLORIDA COUNTY OF Pasco Julie A. Jordan , being duly sworn, deposes and says that he /she is Secretary of RTD Construction, Inc . a corporation organized and existing under and by virtue of the laws of the State of Florida, and having its principal office at: 38038 North Avenue Zephyrhills Pasco FL (Street & Number) (City) (County) (State) Affiant further says that he is familiar with the records, minute books and by -laws of RTD Construction, Inc. (Name of Corporation) Affiant further says that Dannie E. Jordan is President (Officer's Name) (Title) of the corporation, is duly authorized to sign the Proposal for or said corporation by virtue of (state whether a provision of by laws or a Resolution of Florida RTD Construction, Inc. Board of Directors. If by R =- 1 lution give date of adoption). Sworn to before me this 6 day of Apri 1 ution 1/12/2017 VAS .,., Affiant Dannie , 20 17 O4 IA...4110. r _ Public -'r Jennifer L. Jo •an President Type /print/stamp name of Notary Title or rank, and Serial No., if any SECTION V Page 9 of 15 Updated: 2/6/2017 • • • SECTION V — Contract Documents NON COLLUSION AFFIDAVIT STATE OF FLORIDA COUNTY OF Pasco Dannie E . Jordan being, first duly sworn, deposes and says that he is president of RTD Construction, Inc. the party making the foregoing Proposal or Bid; that such Bid is genuine and not collusive or sham: that said bidder is not financially interested in or otherwise affiliated in a business way with any other bidder on the same contract; that said bidder has not colluded, conspired, connived, or agreed, directly or indirectly, with any bidders or person, to put in a sham bid or that such other person shall refrain from bidding, and has not in any manner, directly or indirectly, sought by agreement or collusion, or communication or conference, with any person, to fix the bid price or affiant or any other bidder, or to fix any overhead, profit or cost element of said bid price, or that of any other bidder, or to secure any advantage against the City of Clearwater, Florida, or any person or persons interested in the proposed contract; and that all statements contained in said proposal or bid are true; and further, that s s bidder has not directly or indirectly submitted this bid, or the contents thereof, or divulged informa on or • ata relative thereto to a y association or to any member or agent thereof. Sworn to and subscribed before me this Affiant 444///.i _ ��II �►. 'i - 6 day of April SECTION V ,20 17 Public or. an Page 10 of 15 Updated: 2/6/2017 • • • SECTION V — Contract Documents PROPOSAL (1) TO THE CITY OF CLEARWATER, FLORIDA, for WTP No. 1 Improvements — Pressure Filter Modifications and Adsorption System Automation 15- 0031 -UT and doing such other work incidental thereto, all in accordance with the contract documents, marked WTP No. 1 Improvements — Pressure Filter Modifications and Adsorption System Automation 15- 0031 -UT Every bidder must take notice of the fact that even though his proposal be accepted and the documents signed by the bidder to whom an award is made and by those officials authorized to do so on behalf of the City of Clearwater, Florida, that no such award or signing shall be considered a binding contract without a certificate from the Finance Director that funds are available to cover the cost of the work to be done, or without the approval of the City Attorney as to the form and legality of the contract and all the pertinent documents relating thereto having been approved by said City Attorney; and such bidder is hereby charged with this notice. The signer of the Proposal, as bidder, also declares that the only person, persons, company or parties interested in this Proposal, are named in this Proposal, that he has carefully examined the Advertisement, Instructions to Bidders, Contract Specifications, Plans, Supplemental Specifications, General Conditions, Special Provisions, and Public Construction Bond, that he or his representative has made such investigation as is necessary to determine the character and extent of the work and he proposes and agrees that if the Proposal be accepted, he will contract with the City of Clearwater, Florida, in the form of contract; hereto annexed, to provide the necessary labor, materials, machinery, equipment, tools or apparatus, do all the work required to complete the contract within the time mentioned in the General Conditions and according to the requirements of the City of Clearwater, Florida, as herein and hereinafter set forth, and furnish the required surety bonds for the following prices to wit: If the foregoing Proposal shall be accepted by the City of Clearwater, Florida, and the undersigned shall fail to execute a satisfactory contract as stated in the Advertisement herein attached, then the City may, at its option determine that the undersigned has abandoned the contract, and thereupon this Proposal shall be null and void, and the certified check or bond accompanying this Proposal, shall be forfeited to become the property of the City of Clearwater, Florida, and the full amount of said check shall be retained by the City, or if the Proposal Bond be given, the full amount of such bond shall be paid to the City as stipulated or liquidated damages; otherwise, the bond or certified check accompanying this Proposal, or the amount of said check, shall be returned to the undersigned as specified herein. SECTION V Page 11 of 15 Updated: 2/6/2017 • SECTION V — Contract Documents PROPOSAL (2) Attached hereto is a bond or certified check on N/A Bank, for the sum of -c, r-ee- b e 0c,I o- 'f-t Cc,r S (being a minimum of 10% of Contractor's total bid amount). ($ 13308.o°) The full names and residences of all persons and parties interested in the foregoing bid are as follows: (If corporation, give the names and addresses of the President and Secretary. If firm or partnership, the names and addresses of the members or partners. The Bidder shall list not only his name but also the name of any person with whom bidder has any type of agreement whereby such person's improvements, enrichment, employment or possible benefit, whether sub contractor, materialman, agent, supplier, or employer is contingent upon the award of the contract to the bidder). NAMES: ADDRESSES: Dannie E. Jordan / President 38038 North Avenue., Zephyrhills, FL 33542 Tony D. Jordan / Vice President Rusty A. Haughn / Vice President Marjorie S. Jordan / Secretary, Treasurer • Julie A. Jordan / Secretary • ANIL Signature of Bidder: 1 Dannie E .rdan The person signing shall, in his own handwriting, sign the Principal's name, his own and his title. Where the person signing for a corporation is other than the President or Vice President, he must, by affidavit, show his authority, to bind the corporation. '1/, By: Company Legal Name: Title: ✓ rzC,Ct' D Construction, Inc. Doing Business As (if different than above): Business Address of Bidder: City and State: N/A P.O. Box 2439 Zephyrhills, FL Zip Code 33525 Phone: 813 - 783 -9119 Email Address: bids @rtdconstruction.com Dated at , this 6 day of Apr i 1 , A.D., 2017 SECTION V Page 12 of 15 Updated: 2/6/2017 SECTION V — Contract Documents CITY OF CLEARWATER • ADDENDUM SHEET • • PROJECT: WTP No. 1 Improvements — Pressure Filter Modifications and Adsorption System Automation (15- 0031 -UT) Acknowledgment is hereby made of the following addenda received since issuance of Plans and Specifications. Addendum No. 1 Date: 3/28/2017 Addendum No. Date: Addendum No. Date: Addendum No. Date: Addendum No. Date: Addendum No. Date: Addendum No. Date: Addendum No. Date: Addendum No. Date: Addendum No. Date: Addendum No. Date: D Construction, Inc. (Title of Officer) April 6, 2017 (Date) SECTION V Page 13 of 15 Updated: 2/6/2017 • • SECTION V — Contract Documents BIDDER'S PROPOSAL PROJECT: PROJECT: WTP No. 1 Improvements — Pressure Filter Modifications and Adsorption System Automation (15- 0031 -UT) CONTRACTOR: RTD Construction, Inc. BIDDER'S GRAND TOTAL: $ L O 107 .0 (Numbers) BIDDER'S GRAND TOTAL: F kkA of Z.J-- l kef-4-1 o ci1c1 02,4_ 53,,e_v,r,-1-v (Words) ITEM DESCRIPTION ESTIMATED UNIT UNIT AMOUNT QUANTITY PRICE 1 Mobilization and Demobilization 1 LS $ �y ^� (20 VD $ 60a). 00 2 General Requirements 1 LS $ 5oco, 00 $ .O0 3 Indemnification 1 LS $1,000 $1,000 4 All Other Work Not Included in Line Items 1, 2, and 3 to Construct the WTP No. 1 Improvements 1 LS $ 33r 9' ( OO $ 3-7ci q uo SUBTOTAL $ 390, 978.ao 5 Contingency (10 %) 1 LS $ $ GRAND TOTAL $ 430,076.oa THE BIDDER'S GRAND TOTAL ABOVE IS HIS TOTAL BID BASED ON HIS UNIT PRICES AND LUMP SUM PRICES AND THE ESTIMATED QUANTITIES REQUIRED FOR EACH SECTION. THIS FIGURE IS FOR INFORMATION ONLY AT THE TIME OF OPENING BIDS. THE CITY WILL MAKE THE TABULATION FROM THE UNIT PRICES AND LUMP SUM PRICE BID. IF THERE IS AN ERROR IN THE TOTAL BY THE BIDDER, IT SHALL BE CHANGED AS ONLY THE UNIT PRICES AND LUMP SUM PRICE SHALL GOVERN. SECTION V Page 14 of 15 Updated: 2/6/2017 SECTION V — Contract Documents SCRUTINIZED COMPANIES AND BUSINESS OPERATIONS WITH • CUBA AND SYRIA CERTIFICATION FORM PER SECTION III, ITEM 25, IF YOUR BID IS $1,000,000 OR MORE, THIS FORM MUST BE COMPLETED AND SUBMITTED WITH THE BID PROPOSAL. FAILURE TO SUBMIT THIS FORM AS REQUIRED, MAY DEEM YOUR SUBMITTAL NONRESPONSIVE. • • The affiant, by virtue of the signature below, certifies that: 1. The vendor, company, individual, principal, subsidiary, affiliate, or owner is aware of the requirements of section 287.135, Florida Statutes, regarding companies on the Scrutinized Companies with Activities in Sudan List, the Scrutinized Companies with Activities in the Iran Petroleum Energy Sector List, or engaging in business operations in Cuba and Syria; and 2. The vendor, company, individual, principal, subsidiary, affiliate, or owner is eligible to participate in this solicitation and is not listed on either the Scrutinized Companies with Activities in Sudan List, the Scrutinized Companies with Activities in the Iran Petroleum Sector List, or engaged in business operations in Cuba and Syria; and 3. Business Operations means, for purposes specifically related to Cuba or Syria, engaging in commerce in any form in Cuba or Syria, including, but not limited to, acquiring, developing, maintaining, owning, selling, possessing, leasing or operating equipment, facilities, personnel, products, services, personal property, real property, military equipment, or any other apparatus of business or commerce; and 4. If awarded the Contract (or Agreement), the vendor, company, individual, principal, subsidiary, affiliate, or owner will immediately notify the i of Clearwater in writing, no later than five (5) calendar days after any of its principals are pla•ed .. the Scrutinized Companies with Activities in Sudan List, the Scrutinized Companies with Acti ities i the Iran Petroleum S y tor List, or engages in business operations in Cuba and Syria. STATE OF COUNTY OF Florida Pasco Authorized Signature Dannie E Printed Name President Title RTD Construction, Inc. Name of Entity /Corporation The foregoing instrument was acknowledged before me on this 6 day of April 20 17 , by Dannie E . Jordan (name of person whose signature is being notarized) as the president (title) of RTD Construction, Inc. (name of corporation/entity), personally known to me as described herein , or produced a N/A (type of identification) as i r- ntifcatio an. . did /did not take an oath. 0, Aft Pu.Tic Jennifer L. Jordan My Commission Expires: 6/ 16 / 2 0 2 0 NOTARY SEAL ABOVE SECTION V Printed Name Page 15 of 15 Updated: 2/6/2017 • State of Florida Department of State I certify from the records of this office that RTD CONSTRUCTION, INC. is a corporation organized under the laws of the State of Florida, filed on October 21, 1993. The document number of this corporation is P93000074511. I further certify that said corporation has paid all fees due this office through December 31, 2017, that its most recent annual report/uniform business report was filed on January 3, 2017, and that its status is active. I further certify that said corporation has not filed Articles of Dissolution. Given under my hand and the Great Seal of the State of Florida at Tallahassee, the Capital, this the Third day of January, 2017 ,ON 044A Secretary of State Tracking Number: CC8485336618 To authenticate this certificate,visit the following site,enter this number, and then follow the instructions displayed. https: // services .sunbiz.org / Filings/ CertificateOfStatus /CertificateAuthentication • • • RTD CONSTRUCTION, INC a Florida Corporation CONSENT TO ACTION IN LIEU OF ANNUAL BOARD OF DIRECTORS MEETING The undersigned, MARJORIE S. JORDAN, TONY D JORDAN and DANNIE E. JORDAN, constituting the entire Board of Directors of RTD CONSTRUCTION, INC., a Florida corporation, does hereby record their consent to the following action taken by the Board of Directors as if taken at its annual Directors Meeting. RESOLVED, that the following are named and elected as the officers of the corporation to hold office for the term of one (1) year and until a successor is duly elected and qualified: Office Name President: DANNIE E. JORDAN Vice President: TONY D. JORDAN Vice President RUSTY A. HAUGHN Secretary/Treasurer: MAJORIE S. JORDAN Secretary: JULIE A. JORDAN RESOLVED, that the Board authorizes and affirms the salaries and /or bonuses paid to any employee, officer, director or shareholder during the previous year as reflected in the Corporation's payroll /personnel records. RESOLVED, that the Board of Directors of RTD CONSTRUCTION, INC. do hereby ratify, approve and confirm in all respects the transactions made by the Officers of the corporation during the previous year. This action taken as of January 10, 2017. DANNIE E. JORDAN M JE S. JOR AN • • • RTD CONSTRUCTION, INC. a Florida Corporation CONSENT TO ACTION OF SHAREHOLDERS IN LIEU OF ANNUAL MEETING The undersigned, MARJORIE S. JORDAN, TONY D. JORDAN and DANNIE E. JORDAN, being all of the Shareholders of RTD CONSTRUCTION, INC., a Florida corporation, do hereby record their consent to the following action taken by the Shareholders, which shall be treated for all purposes as resolutions passed at the annual meeting of the Shareholders of the Corporation. RESOLVED, that the following are elected as Directors of the Corporation, to hold office for a term of one (1) year until a successor is duly elected and qualified: Director: MARJORIE S. JORDAN Director: TONY D. JORDAN Director: DANNIE E. JORDAN RESOLVED, that the actions of the Officers of the Corporation on behalf of the Corporation during the preceding fiscal year be and they are hereby approved and ratified to the extent permitted by law. This action taken at Dade City, Florida as of January 12, 2017. M J IE S. 0 AN C-Mt74 _100, T IY D. JORD DANNIE E. JORDAN RICK SCOTT, GOVERNOR ICENSE NUMBER Ut IALh titFW KEN LAWSON, SECRETARY STATE OF FLORIDA DEPARTMENT OF BUSINESS AND PROFESSIONAL REGULATION CONSTRUCTION INDUSTRY LICENSING BOARD The GENERAL CONTRACTOR Named below IS CERTIFIED Under the provisions of Chapter 489 FS. Expiration date: AUG 31, 2018 JORDAN, DANNIE EARL RTD CONSTRUCTION, INS- 38038 NORTH AVE. "-----. ,._ ZEPHYRHILLS Ft 33542 ISSUED: 07/21 /2016 RICK SCOTT, GOVERNOR DISPLAY AS REQUIRED BY LAW LJt IAI.n ntKt SEQ # 11607210001295 KEN LAWSON, SECRETARY STATE OF FLORIDA DEPARTMENT OF BUSINESS AND PROFESSIONAL REGULATION CONSTRUCTION INDUSTRY LICENSING BOARD LICENSE NUMBER The UNDERGROUND UTILITY & EXCAVATION CO Named below IS CERTIFIED Under the provisions of Chapter 489 FS. Expiration date: AUG 31, 2018 JORDAN, DANNIE EARL RTD CONSTRUCTION ING- 38038 NORTH AVE. ZEPHYRHILLS Ft$9542 ISSUED: 07/21/2016 • DISPLAY AS REQUIRED BY LAW SEQ # 11607210001460 A�� o® CERTIFICATE OF LIABILITY INSURANCE DATE (MM /DD/YYYY) 4/11/2017 THIS CERTIFICATE IS ISSUED AS A MATTER OF INFORMATION ONLY AND CONFERS NO RIGHTS UPON THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER. THIS CERTIFICATE DOES NOT AFFIRMATIVELY OR NEGATIVELY AMEND, EXTEND OR ALTER THE COVERAGE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES BELOW. THIS CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE DOES NOT CONSTITUTE A CONTRACT BETWEEN THE ISSUING INSURER(S), AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE OR PRODUCER, AND THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER. terms and conditions of the policy, certain policies may require an endorsement. A statement on this certificate does not confer rights to the dtPORTANT: If the certificate holder is an ADDITIONAL INSURED, the policy(ies) must be endorsed. If SUBROGATION IS WAIVED, subject to ificate holder in lieu of such endorsement(s). PRODUCER Stahl & Associates Insurance Inc. 91 Lake Morton Drive P 0 Box 3608 Lakeland FL 33802 CONTACT Michele Crifasi (4/c°.No.Ext): (863) 688 -5495 FAX No): (863)688 -4344 E -MAIL ADDRESS: michele .crifasi @stahlinsurance.com INSURER(S) AFFORDING COVERAGE NAIC # INSURERAAmerisure Insurance Co 19488 INSURED RTD Construction, Inc. PO Box 2439 Zephyrhills FL 33539 -2439 INSURER B :North River Insurance Co 21105 INSURERC:Westchester Surplus Lines Ins Co 10172 INSURERD:Travelers Prop & Casualty Co of Am 25674 INSURER E : INSURERF: X COVERAGES CERTIFICATE NUMBER:16 /17 Master THIS IS TO CERTIFY THAT THE POLICIES OF INSURANCE LISTED BELOW HAVE BEEN ISSUED TO THE INSURED NAMED ABOVE FOR THE POLICY PERIOD INDICATED. NOTWITHSTANDING ANY REQUIREMENT, TERM OR CONDITION OF ANY CONTRACT OR OTHER DOCUMENT WITH RESPECT TO WHICH THIS CERTIFICATE MAY BE ISSUED OR MAY PERTAIN, THE INSURANCE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES DESCRIBED HEREIN IS SUBJECT TO ALL THE TERMS, EXCLUSIONS AND CONDITIONS OF SUCH POLICIES. LIMITS SHOWN MAY HAVE BEEN REDUCED BY PAID CLAIMS. INSR LTR TYPE OF INSURANCE ADDL JL'ISn SUBR WVD POLICY NUMBER POLICY EFF (MM /DD/YYYY) POLICY EXP (MM /DD/YYYY) LIMITS A C X COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY X Y CPP2083199 G28202714001 Poll Aggregate/$1 , 000 ,000 Ea Poll Incid /$1, 000 , 000 6/30/2016 1/01/2017 6/30/2017 1/01/2018 EACH OCCURRENCE $ 1,000,000 CLAIMS -MADE X OCCUR DAMAGE TO RENTED PREMISES (Ea occurrence) $ 100,000 X X GEN'L Contractual Pollution AGGREGATE POLICY OTHER: X Liability Liability LIMIT APPLIES .7 PER: LOC MED EXP (Any one person) $ 5,000 PERSONAL&ADVINJURY $ 1,000,000 GENERAL AGGREGATE $ 2,000,000 PRODUCTS - COMP /OP AGG $ 2,000,000 Employee Benefits $ 1,000,000 irANY AUTOMOBILE X LIABILITY AUTO ALL OWNED AUTOS HIRED AUTOS SCHEDULED AUTOS NON -OWNED AUTOS x y CA2083197 6/30/2016 6/30/2017 COMBINED SINGLE LIMIT (Ea accident) $ 1,000,000 BODILY INJURY (Per person) $ BODILY (Per accident) ( ) $ PROPERTY DAMAGE (Per accident) $ PIP -Basic $ 10,000 B X UMBRELLA LIAB EXCESS LIAB X OCCUR CLAIMS -MADE 5911071859 6/30/2016 6/30/2017 EACH OCCURRENCE $ 10,000,000 AGGREGATE $ 20,000,000 DED RETENTION$ $ A WORKERS COMPENSATION AND EMPLOYERS' LIABILITY ANY PROPRIETOR/PARTNER/EXECUTIVE OFFICER/MEMBER EXCLUDED? (Mandatory in NH) If yes, describe under DESCRIPTION OF OPERATIONS below Y / N N N / A y WC208319805 AL, FL, GA, NC, SC, & TN 6/30/2016 6/30/2017 X PER STATUTE OTH- ER E.L. EACH ACCIDENT $ 1,000,000 $ 1,000,000 $ 1,000,000 E.L. DISEASE - EA EMPLOYEE E.L. DISEASE - POLICY LIMIT D Rented & Leased Equipment 6600G776514 6/30/2016 6/30/2017 Limit R/L with $5,000 ded 1,000,000 DESCRIPTION OF OPERATIONS / LOCATIONS / VEHICLES (ACORD 101, Additional Remarks Schedule, may be attached if more space Is required) RE: WTP No. 1 Improvements- Pressure Filter Modifications and Adsorption System Automation Project No. 15- 0031 -UT, Job Location: 1657 Palmetto Street, Clearwater, FL City of Clearwater, FL is an additional insured with respects to the General, Auto & Umbrella policies as required by written contract. Waiver of subrogation applies on the General, Auto, Workers Compensation & Umbrella policies as required by written contract. CERTIFICATE HOLDER CANCELLATION • City of Clearwater, FL 100 S Myrtle Avenue 3rd Floor Clearwater, FL 33756 -5520 SHOULD ANY OF THE ABOVE DESCRIBED POLICIES BE CANCELLED BEFORE THE EXPIRATION DATE THEREOF, NOTICE WILL BE DELIVERED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE POLICY PROVISIONS. ACORD 25 (2014/01) INS025 (201401) AUTHORIZED REPRESENT © 1988-2014 ACORD CORPORATION. All rights reserved. The ACORD name and logo are registered marks of ACORD